f '^"/^ ,.u
John Swett
wii .•?'
,^.a; -^Jry^^^lMy.
%^\^. ^
\U9W
'o-nn
^ j^i^W/
•2^ t
Digitized by tine Internet Archive
in 2008 with funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/compendiousgermaOOwhitrich
WHITNEY'S MODERN LANGUAGE BOOKS.
FRENCH.
A FRENCH GRAMMAR. With Exercises and Illustrative
Sentences from French Authors. i2mo, 442 pp.
PRACTICAL FRENCH. Taken from the Author's larger
Grammar, and Supplemented by Conversations and Idio-
matic Phrases. i2mo, 304 pp.
BRIEF FRENCH GRAMMAR. i6mo, 177 pp.
GERMAN.
A COMPENDIOUS GERMAN GRAMMAR, izmo, 303 pp.
BRIEF GERMAN GRAMMAR. i6mo, 143 pp.
GERMAN READER. i2mo, 523 pp.
GERMAN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. 8vo, 900 pages.
GERMAN TEXTS Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney.
Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. Annotated by W. D. Whit-
ney, Prof in Yal College. i6mo, 138 pp.
Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. Annotated by Prof. A. Sachtleben,
of Charleston, S. C. i6mo, 199 pp.
Goethe's Faust. Annotate ' by Wiw. Cook. i6mo, 229 pp.
Goethe's Iphigenie a Tauris, Annotated "by Prof Franklin
Carter, Williams College. i6mo, 113 pp'.
Schiller's Maria Stuar- Annotated by E. S. Joynes, Prof, in
University of South Carolina. i6mo, 222 pp.
Lessing's Nathan der Weise. Annotated by H. C. G. Brandt,
Prof, in Hamilton College. i6mo, 158 pp.
WHITNEY-KLEMM GERMAN SERIES.
By William D. Whitney and L. R. Klemm.
GERMAN BY PRACTICE. i2mo, 305 pp. *■
ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. i2mo, 237 pp.
HENRY HOLT & CO., Publishers. NEW YORK.
COMPENDIOUS
QEEMAE^ GEAMMAK
BT
WILLIAM D. WHITNEY
Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology and Instructor
in Modern Languages in Yale College
SIXTH EDITION, THOKOUGHLY REVISED
AND
WITH NEW EXERCISES
NEW YOKE
HENKY HOLT AND COMPANY
F. W. Christern
Boston: Oabl Schoenhof
COPTBIGHT, 1888,
BY
HENRY HOLT & CO.
EDUCATION DEPt;
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
(somewhat abbreviated.)
THE author of a new German grammar, in a community
where so many are already in use, and with so much
approval, may well feel called upon to explain and defend
his undertaking — esj)ecially, when his work is compara-
tively wanting in those practical exercises, for writing
and speaking, which make the principal part of the other
grammars now most in use.
That system of instruction in modern languages of which
the Ollendorff grammars are popularly regarded as the
type has its unquestionable advantages where learning to
speak is the main object directly aimed at, and where the
smallness of the classes, and the time spent with the in-
structor, render it possible for the latter to give each pupil
that amount of personal attention and drilling which is
needed in order to make the system yield its best results.
But in our schools and colleges this is for the most part
impracticable. Their circumstances and methods of in-
struction render translation and construction the means
by which the most useful knowledge and the best discipline
can be gained. To the very great majority of those who
learn German, ability to speak is an object inferior in
importance to ability to understand accurately and readily
the language as written or printed ; and the attainment
of the former is properly to be made posterior to that of
the latter. One who has mastered the principles of
grammar, and acquired by reading a fair vocabulary and
a feeling for the right use of it, will learn to speak and
to write rapidly and well when circumstances require of
him that ability.
54 ! 584
IV PBETACE.
Moreover, there is a large and increasing class of students
whose philological training has to be won chiefly or alto-
gether in the study of the modern languages, instead of
the classical — and who must win it by methods somewhat
akin with those so long and so successfully followed in
classical study. For the class referred to, German offers
peculiar advantages, quite superior to those presented by
any other modern language. In words, forms, and con-
structions, it is enough unlike English to call forth and
exercise all the pupil's powers of discrimination, to sharpen
his attention to the niceties of word and phrase, and to
train his j^hilological insight ; while, at the same ^ime, the
fundamental relation of German to the most central and
intimate part of English makes the study instinct with
practical bearings on our own tongue, and equivalent to
a historical and comparative study of English itself ; and,
both on the esthetic and on the practical side, there is no
other modern literature so rich in attraction and so liberal
of reward to us as the German.
It has appeared to me that, in these aspects of the study,
hardly sufficient assistance was furnished the teacher and
learner by the grammars hitherto accessible. Three sub-
jects especially have called for more careful exposition :
the derivation of German words from one another ; the
construction of sentences ; and the correspondences be-
tween German and English. I have also desired to see in
some respects a more acceptable arrangement of the ordi-
nary subject-matter of a grammar — one having in view
the history of words and forms, although not obtruding
the details of that history unnecessarily upon pupils un-
prepared for their study.
At the same time, I have endeavored to make a really
compendious and simple grammar, according to the promise^
of the title-page, a grammar which might answer the needs
even of young scholars, although containing some things
which they would not fairly understand and appreciate
PEEFAOE. t
until later. That I shall have satisfied others' ideal of a
compendious grammar, by including all they may deem
essential and omitting the unessential, I do not venture to
hope ; but only trust that I may have come pretty near to
meeting the wants of many.
A careful distinction of the contents of the book by
variety of type, according to their degree of immediate
importance, has been attempted throughout. Especially,
I have meant to put in the largest type (sm. pica) just
about so much as the scholar ought to learn carefully and
thoroughly in his first course of grammar-lessons, pre-
paratory to reading. This a class should acquire, accord-
ing to the age and capacity and previous training of its
members, in from twelve to twenty-five lessons ; and
should then at once be put into reading, while the grammar
is taken up again, and such part of what was before
omitted is learned as the judgment of the intelligent
teacher shall direct.
After enough reading has been done to give some fami-
liarity with forms and constructions, I would have the
writing of exercises begun ; and I feel confident that a
better result in reading and writing together will be won
thus, in a given time, than by any other method. I have
myself been accustomed to prepare exercises for my classes,
for turning into German, from whatever text the class
were reading; taking a sentence or paragraph, and putting
its phrases into a different shape from that presented in
the text, so that the student shall have his main vocabulary
before him on the page, instead of having to hunt for
proper expressions in the dictionary, with knowledge in-
sufficient for the task. This method I would recommend
to others.
Some of the subjects treated in the grammar (especially
word-derivation, and the relation of English and German)
need support from the lexicon. Considering the general
deficiency of information on these subjects in the access-
VI PREFACE.
ible dictionaries, I am endeavoring to give the beginner
help till he can make his analyses and comparisons for
himself, in the Vocabulary to a German Eeader, which is
published as a companion-book to the present one. From
its pages have been drawn a large part of the examples
given in the Grammar.
Of course, I have consulted, and more or less used, a
good many grammars while engaged in the preparation of
this one, deriving more or less of valuable information or
suggestion from each and all of them. But I do not feel
that I need to make special acknowledgments save to one —
the work of Heyse (in its two editions, the Schul- Grammatik
and the AusflZhrliches Lehrhuch). To it my obligations
have been more constant and various than I can well point
out in detail ; hence this general confession of indebted-
ness. Those familiar with Heyse will have no difficulty in
tracing its influence in many parts (for examjDle, in the
classification of verbs of the Old conjugation, which I have
taken almost without modification from that authority);
while they will also find that I have nowhere followed it
slavishly.
It has everywhere been my intention so to set forth the
facts of the language as to favor the recognition of
language as a growth, as something which has been grad-
ually converted into what it is, from a very different con-
dition, by those who have used it — a recognition which is
the first need, if one would really understand language,
and which must lead the way to those deepen studies into
the history of languages and of language, constituting so
important a branch of modern science.
The study of German is so rapidly increasing in preva-
lence that there is pressing need of raising it to a some-
what higher plane. I trust it will be found that this
volume contributes its part, though a small one, to so de-
sirable an end. W. D. W»
Yale College, New Ha\en, Aug. 1869.
PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION.
TN the revision of this work no fundamental changes have
-*- been made in its plan or structure. Even the para-
graphing has been kept unchanged throughout, so as not
to interfere with the pertinence of the references exten-
sively made to it in text-books heretofore published. But
many additions and improvements have been introduced —
partly the result of the author's own experience in the use
of the work, partly due to the suggestions of other users :
among whom are to be specially mentioned, with thanks.
Prof. A. S. Wheeler of the Sheffield Scientific School of
Yale College, and Prof. O. Seidensticker of Philadelphia.
The so-called New Orthography of German words has also
been described, and everywhere introduced, in brackets,
beside the old spelling : it has not yet been so widely
adopted in German literature that its acceptance in place
of the old seemed advisable. And, especially, an entire
new set of Exercises has been prepared, including illustra-
tions of the intricacies of German usage by extracts from
the best German authors : as to their use, see the Note
below.
To obviate objections made from some quarters to the
use of the smaller type of the first edition, something of the
former elaborate classification of the matter of the volume
by three sizes of the type, etc., has been abandoned, and
only two sizes, of superior legibility, are now employed.
Grateful for the favor with which the work has been
received during nearly twenty years, the author hopes
that in its somewhat changed form it will continue to
merit the approval of teachers and students.
Yale College, New Haven, May 1888.
I am indebted to friends, especially to Mr. Herrmann
Knapp, of San Jose, Cal., for sundry corrections in this
year's impression. January, 1893.
vii
NOTE ON THE EXERCISES.
The exercises (pp. 285 — 395) are intended to be used in
connection with the first study of the grammar ; but it has
seemed best to put them together, instead of scattering thetu
through the body of the text. They are divided into two
series. The first series consists of simple exercises for trans-
lating from German into English and vice-versa. These follow
in the main the arrangement of the grammar, though in some
places this order is abandoned — as, by introducing a lesson on
prepositions quite early in the series, and by taking up the
subject of sentence-construction before going on to the sub-
junctive and infinitive, the use of which necessitates more
involved sentences than the pupil is prepared for. Each exer-
cise is accompanied by a vocabulary of the words used for
the first time in it, the object being to familiarize the pupil
gradually with a good number of the most- used German words,
and thus to give him a vocabulary which he will find useful in
all reading or speaking. There are also general vocabularies
at the end, including all the words used in both series of
exercises.
The second series of exercises consists of sentences selected
from the writings of well-known German authors, illustrative
of the usages of the language, including also those more
special idiomatic points not taken up in the first series.
Accompanying these are short English themes for translation
into German, in which are used as far as possible the same
words or the same constructions which are to be found in the
illustrative sentences. With the help of the English vocabulary,
the pupil will be able without too much difficulty to render
these into German,
In making use of these exercises each teacher will of course be
guided by his own judgment and the necessities and capabil-
ities of his class. If the exercises are too long, they can be
divided. If too short, or not full enough, it will be easy, still
using the same words or constructions, to add an indefinite
number of sentences to each exercise. If the object is to get
the class to the point of reading German as soon as possible,
it will be best merely to read through the German exercises of
the first series, leaving the English ones to be taken up and
written after some reading has been done. In the same way,
the reading through of the illustrative sentences, and the
PREFACE. ix
writing of the English themes accompanying them, will serve
as a review of the grammar or a valuable auxiliary to reading.
After studying carefully the illustrative sentences, the student
will meet with little in any German reading which can cause
him grammatical dilSculty and the working through of the
English themes should be sufficient preparation for rendering
into German, or writing in German, in a freer and more general
way. All the exercises are annotated with references to the
grammar in cases of special difficulty.
The illustrative sentences are classified by the paragraph
of the grammar which they illustrate, the number of the
paragraph being given in brackets. Each sentence is followed
by the name of its author in parenthesis. For those authors
most frequently met with are used the following abbreviations:
grei.
Freitag.
^lop.
Klopstock.
a
Goethe.
M*
Lessing.
sr.®r.
A. Grimm,
a^.9?.
Jean Paul Richter.
^.®r.
Herman Grimm.
SRutf.
Riickert.
a@r.
Jakob Grimm,
m»
Schiller.
€>ei.
Heine.
©piet
Spielhagen.
^e^.
Heyse.
@pr.
Spruch (proverb).
$umb.
Humboldt.
m
Uhland.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
^^The references are to paragraphs.
Alphabet, 1-4.
Use of capitals, 4.
New Orthography, 5.
Pronunciation, 6-55.
Vowels, 7-22 ; consonants, 23-53 ; foreign words, 54 ; ac-
cent, 55.
Parts of Speech, 56.
Declension, 57-62.
Rules for gender of nouns, 61.
Articles, 63-67.
Use of articles, 66.
Nouns, 68-113.
General rules of declension, 68-73; First or strong de-
clension, 74-90; first class, 75-80; second class, 81-86;
third class, 87-90; Second or weak declension, 91-95; ir-
regular declension, 96-100; nouns of foreign origin, 101;
proper names, 102-108; modifying adjuncts of the noun,
109-112 ; equivalents of the noun, 113.
Adjectives, 114-148.
When declined, 114-118; first and second declensions,
119-128; mixed declension, 124.2; adjective used as sub-
stantive, 129 ; as adverb, 130 ; participles as adjectives, 131 ;
comparison of adjectives, 133-142 ; comparison withadverbp
141 ; modifying adjuncts of the adjective, 143-148.
CONTENrS. XI
Pbonouns, 14.9-195.
Personal pronouns, 151-156; possessive pronominal ad-
jectives, 157-162 ; demonstratives, 163-166 ; determinatives,
167-171 ; interrogatives, 172-176 ; relatives, 177-183 ; inde-
finite pronouns and indefinite numerals, 184-195.
NuMERAi^, 196-208.
Cardinals, 197-202 ; ordinals, 203 ; multipUcatives, etc.,
202-206 ; derivatives from ordinals, 207-208.
Uses of the Forms of Declension, 209-230.
Numbers, 210-211; cases:— nominative, 212-214; genitive,
215-220 ; dative, 221-225 ; accusative, 226-230.
Conjugation, 231.
Verbs, 232-319.
Classification, 233 ; simple forms of the verb, 235-237 ;
compound forms, 238-240 ; use of l)abzn or jetn as auxiliary
of tense, 241-244 ; conjugations, 245-246 ; New or weak
conjugation, 247-250 ; modal auxiliaries, 251-260 ; Old or
strong conjugation, 261-273 ; passive verbs, 274r-282 ;
reflexive verbs, 283-290 ; impersonal verbs, 291-295 ; com-
pound verbs, 296 ; separable, 297-301 ; inseparable, 302-307 ;
separable or inseparable, 308-311 ; other compound verbs,
312-313 ; verbal adjuncts, 314-319.
Uses of the Forms of Conjugation, 320-359.
Person and number, 320-322 ; mode and tense: — indicative,
323-328; subjunctive, 329-333; conditional, 334-336; im-
perative, 337-338 ; infinitive, 339-348 ; participles, 349-359.
Indeclinables, 360.
Adverbs, 361-370.
Classification, 362 ; origin, 363-367 ; comparison, 368 ;
special uses, 369 ; place, 370.
Prepositions, 371-381.
Cases governed by them, 372-376.
Conjunctions, 382-386.
Classification, 383.
Interjections, 387-392. -
XU CONTENTS.
WOKD-FORMATION, DERIVATION, 393-417.
Introductory explanations, 393-402 ; derivation of verbs,
403-406 ; of nouns, 407-412 ; of adjectives, 413-416 ; of the
other parts of speech, 417.
WOED-COMBINATION, COMPOSITION, 418-425.
Introductory explanations, 418-419 ; composition of verbs,
420; of nouns, 421-422 ; of adjectives, 423-424; of particles,
425.
Construction of Sentences, 426-446.
Introductory explanations, 426-429 ; regular order of the
sentence, 430: inverted order, ^^ l interrogative and opta-
tive sentences, 432 ; conditional clauses, 433^ transposed
order, 434 ; dependent clauses, 435-439 ; substantive depen-
dent clause, 436 ; adjective dependent clause, 437 ; adverbial
dependent clause, 438 ; summary of the rules of arrangement,
440-444 ; concluding remarks, 445-446.
Belation of German to English, 447-461.
Introductory explanations, 447-452 ; the law of progres-
sion of mutes, 453-457 ; correspondences, 458-60.
Brief History of the German Language, 462-469.
Three periods of history of High-German, 463 ; Old High-
German period, 464 ; Middle High-German period, 465 ; New
High-German period, 467 ; what the present German is, 468 ;
remarks, 469.
German Written Character, pp. 275.
List of Irregular Verbs, pp. 278-284.
Exercises, First Series, pp. 285-334.
" Second Series, pp. 335-395.
German-English Vocabulary, pp. 397-444.
English-German Vocabulary, pp. 445-461.
Index, pp. 463-472.
GERMAN GRAMMAR.
ALPHABET.
1. The German language is usually printed in an
alphabet having the same origin as our own, and the
same extent ; but in the form of its characters nearly
resembling what we call "Old English," or "Black-
letter."
This is one of the derivative forms of the old Latin alphabet, a
product of the perverse ingenuity of monkish scribes in the Middle
Ages. It was in general use throughout Europe at the time of the
invention of printing, but was abandoned by one nation after another
for the simpler, neater, and more legible character which we call
"Roman," and which the Germans know as "Latin" (lateinisch). For
scientific hterature, the latter is in more common use among the Ger-
mans themselves, and many of the best German scholars are in favor of
the entire relinquishment of the other.
2. The letters of the ordinary German alphabet, with
their "Koman" equivalents, and the names by which
the Germans call them, are as follows :
German
Roman
German
German
Boman
German
letters.
equiv'ts.
names.
letters.
equiv'ts.
names.
% a
a
a, (ah)
®,9
g
ga
33,6
b
ba {bay)
€>,^
h
U
S, c
c
tsa
5, i
i
e{ee)
®,b
d
da
3,i
J
yot
e,. e
e
a
«, !
k
ka
^, f
f
ef
?, I
1
el
2 '
c cc. .
• • •
* * * •
ALPHABET.
[4-
kSfeiroali » '
♦itoriiah**
'German
German
Roman
German
letters.
equiv'ts.
names.
letters.
equiv'ts
names.
m,m
m
em
X,t
t
ta
% n
n
en
n, u
U
u (oo)
0,0
«, u
V
fou (found)
%P
P
pa
2B,tt)
w
va
0,q
q
ku (koo)
X, 3?
X
ix
di,x
r
er
?)-9
y
ipsilon
®,f, «
s
es
3'i
z
tset
1. There is a special written alphabet, as well as a printed,
for the German. The forms of its letters, and specimens of
written texts, will be given at the end of this work. The begin-
ner had better not concern himself with it, as he can make prac-
tical use of it to advantage only when he has already gained
considerable famiharity with the language.
, 2. When German is written or printed in the " Latin " char-
acter, each German letter is represented by its Latin equivalent,
with the single exception that for the compound ^, sz, is usually
and preferably substituted ss (or fs : see 49).
3. Certain points concerning this alphabet require
special notice on the part of the learner :
1. Of the two forms of small s, the second, or short §, is used
y at the end of a word ; the other, or long |, in other situations :
thus, Ia§ ; but lejen, fo.
If a word ending in § is followed by another in composition,
it is still written with short § : thus, loycje^en, In^'^er, bc§^al6,
baSfelbe, ^onnerStaG, Sicbe^Iirief. Short § is also used before an
ending of derivation beginning with a consonant : thus, 33i§tf)um
[^^i§him], 2Bei§!)cit, BDel)aft, ^a5d]t\\, Utoeleui, loybar; further, in
foreign words before other consonants than t or |) : thus, 5[Ra§fe
33o§!et or 35D§quet, ^i§cour§, ^igcipUn, ^atriotigmug.
2. Some of the letters are modified in form by combination
with one another: thus, c^, ch; cf, ck; §, sz; ^, tz.
3. Some letters resemble one another so much as to be easily
confounded by the beginner :
Thus, 33, h, and 35, v; g, c, and ®, e; (S, g, and @, s; ^, fc,
9?, n, and ^, r; %, d, £), o, and Q, q;- also, b, h, b, d, and ]^, h;
f,/, and f, s; !, k, and t, t; r, r, and r, oc.
4. The German uses capital initial letters
f~
4] NEW ORTHOGRAPHY.' ', ' ,',3 ' '3'
1. As the English, at the beginning 6i senli^nces; 'of ^'''^
lines in poetry, and of direct quotations.
2. For all nouns, common as well as proper, and for ^
words used as nouns.
Words used as nouns are especially adjectives (129) and ^
infinitives (340). As no fixed line divides their ordinary from
their substantive use, there are doubtful cases in each class,
with regard to which usage is conflicting.
But nouns and noun-forms used as other parts of speech —
adverbs, prepositions, prefixes, etc. — do not take capitals : thus,
ftatt, fang, f(uG§, lelb tt)un.
3. For pronouns of the third person, when used in
address, with the value of those of the second person
(153).
That is, especially, ©ie, with its oblique cases, and its corre- ;<
sponding possessive 3^r; but not its reflexive, ]t(f).
4. Pronouns of the second person properly take capitals only
when intended to come under the eye of the person addressed
(as in letters, etc.) ; but they are sometimes written with capitals
also in other cases.
5. Kespecting the indefinite pronouns ^e'^^^^^^^^^ every one,
Semonb any one, Dliemanb no one, etc., and the pronominal
adjectives used substantively, such as afle§ everything, matK^er
many a one, einige some, usage is very various. Some write ein
with a capital when it is emphatic, or means one.
6. For adjectives derived from names of persons or
places, usually ; but not for adjectives of nationality, as /^
englijd) English, fran^ofifd) French,
7. Adjectives of title, or those used in respectful and compli-
mentary address, also usually take capital initials : thus, @ure
^oniglic^e C>ol&eit your royal highness, ©ic, SBoWfleborener ^txx
you, excellent sir, griebrid) ber .3tt)eite or ber ^ro^e.
NEW ORTHOG-RAPHY.
5. 1. German scholars have, for some time past, been
attempting to improve the spelling of the language in the direc-
tion of simplicity and consistency, especially as regards the use
of double vowels, of double consonants, of 1^ as the sign of a A.
long vowel, etc. Some of these changes have recently been
officially authorized, and are gradually coming into more or less
4:\ PrvONUNClATION. [6-
general use, while others are liable to be met with in the works
of certain authors.
2. In this grammar the old and stiU prevailingly used orthog-
raphy will be employed; but the authorized changes will be
► given under the head of Pronunciation after the various letters,
and the new spelUng of each word wiQ be added after it in
brackets wherever it occurs.
PRONUNCIATION.
6. The precise mode of production of German articulated
sounds, taken singly or in combination, as well as the general
tone and style of utterance, can only be acquired through means
of oral instruction, and by long practice. The following rules,
however, will help the learner, with or without a teacher, to
approximate to the true pronunciation of German words.
The subject is a comparatively easy one to deal with, because
^ 1. There are no silent letters, either vowels or con-
sonants.
i- Excepting sometimes ^ (28).
y 2. As a rule, the same letter receives the same sound
under all circumstances.
^ Exceptions, 5, c, b, g, f, t) — see those letters, below.
3. The German, however, like many other languages,
writes certain simple sounds, vowel or consonant, with
combinations of two and of three letters, or with
digraphs and trigraphs.
VOWELS.
7. Each simple vowel sound is either long or short,
varying in quantity, or time of utterance, without at the
same time varying, like our English vowels, to any-
notable extent, in quality, or nature of sound.
The distinction of long and short vowels must to a great
extent be learned by experience ; but the following rules will be
found of service :
4- 1. A vowel doubled, or followed by ^, is long.
2. A vowel is short before a double consonant, and
"^"^aorfiL usually before a group of two consonants - unless
10] VOWELS. 5
tlie latter of the pair or group belongs to an appended
ending or suffix.
8. %, tt. — ^t has always the sound of our open or ,•<;
Italian a, in far, father.
It is long in %a\, ^aax, 33a^n, naft, 5^amen.
It is short in 33afl, 5Rann, ^atte, ^anh, fcf)arf, !ann, Balb.
Particularly avoid the flattening of this vowel, or its reduc-
tion to a sound at all resembling that of our "short a" in hat, can,
1. Some words vary in spelling between aa and a; of those
more usually having aa the New Orthography prescribes a in
gjia^ measure, ©c^af sheep, ©(^ar troop (and =]d)ar in $flug*
fd^ar), ©tar starling, SBage scales, 2Bare w;are, Bar in cash
(Sarf(^aft cas/i).
9. @, e. — (S is pronounced nearly as our e in they, or
our "long a" in/a^e, only without the distinct vanishing-
sound of ee into which our a passes at its close. Short
e is nearly our " short e " in met, men.
It is long in §eer, meftr, 'Sttij,
It is short in benn, fc^nell, nett, §err, 2Belt.
In long syllables — and by some authorities also in short ones
— is distinguished a closer and an opener utterance of the e, the
latter inclining very slightly toward our " short a " (in hat, can).
The difference is analogous to that between the French e and e.
Thus, e is said to be close in me'^r, Ute!^, jeber (first syllable), and
open in (the first syllables of) Seben, geben, beten. No rules are
to be given respecting the occurrence of this distinction ; nor is
it much to be insisted on.
Unlike the other vowels, e is notably slighted and obscured in
sound when unaccented. Especially before a liquid (n, I, r), in a
syllable following the accent, it acquires nearly the tone of our
" short It " (in but), and becomes very inconspicuous.
Guard against giving to final e the sound of English e; it
should have a very open utterance, and in parts of Germany
even becomes like our "short u" (in but, puff).
1. The New Orthography writes §erbe herd, instead of §eerbe.
10. 3f t. — 3 has the sound of our i inpiqice, machine,
or of our " long e," or double ee. When short, it is more
like our " short i " (in pin), yet somewhat less removed
than that is from our " long e."
-f-
6 PRONUNCIATION. [10^
It is long in t^n, t^r, Sgel, bir, Wint.
It is short in biflig, bitten, ^jinter, ift, ^rift.
3 is never written double, and it is followed by ^ only in the
personal pronouns i^n, t^m, i^r, i^rer, i^nen, and the possessives
i^r and i^rig. To indicate its long sound an e is generally
added, making the digraph, or compound vowel, ie (18).
11. C, 0. — D has always the tone of our "longo/'
except the distinct vanishing-sound of u (po) with which
the latter ends.
It is long in 5!Jloor, 33ol^ne, ^otp (Bebot, ^ober.
It is short in ']oU, (SJott, often, molh, ^opf.
Never give to o the quahty of our "short o" in Iwt, on, etc.;
this is no proper o-sound, but pretty nearly the German short a.
1. The New Orthography writes So§ lot (and lofen and
Sofung).
12. U, tl. — Vi long is our u in ruhf or oo in hoot ;
VL short is nearly our u in pvM, or oo in book, but less
removed from long u.
It is long in UI)r, nun, gut, ru^en.
It is short in q^ruft, ©tunbe, !RuII.
U is never doubled.
Be especially careful not to give to u, under any circum-
stances, the pronunciation of English u in union, mute, cure ; to
do so is to put a y before it.
13. ^, ^. — ^ is found only in foreign words (except,
according to the usage of some, in the digraphs al), et) :
see below, 19.3), and is ordinarily pronounced as an t
in the same situation.
Examples : ©^rup, %\\)\, \X)X\]^, 9J^t)rte.
Some require that in words from the Greek, of more learned
and less popular use, it should have the sound of ii (17)-
MODIFIED V0WEI.S.
14. 1. The modified vowels are, historically, prod-
ucts of the mixture of an e or t-sound with a, o, u, or of
the phonetic assimilation of the latter to the former in
a succeeding syllable. They were written %q, Dc, Uc,
ae, oe, ue, and are still often so written when the vowel
17] MODIFIED VOWELS. 7
modified is a capital ; but when small letters were
used, the e came to be first written above the other
vowel — thus, a, Of it — and then, for convenience, was
reduced in common use to a couple of dots — as d, b, it.
2. They are never doubled ; and hence, a noun containing in
the singular a double vowel, if requiring modification in the
plural, loses one vowel : thus, (gaal forms ©die, %a^ forms S]er.
15. %, S.— S has the sound of an open c — that is to
say, of an e very slightly approaching our *' short a";
it is everywhere hardly distinguishable from an e in
the same situation.
It is long in |?(dger, prdgen, Sfer, Spacer, ^[fldftre.
It is short in §dnbe, Spfel, ftdttc, ^drfer, fdflen.
1. A number of words vary in their spelhng between d and e.
Of those often spelt with e the New Orthography prefers d in
©ebdrbe gesture; and in those oftenest written with d it prefers
e in uBerfd)tt)cnQUd) exuberant, and tnelfd) Welsh. For the inter-
change of du and eu see below, 21.3.
16. O, 5. — D is really produced by a combination
of that position of the tongue in which e (e in they) is
uttered, and of that position of the lips in which o is
uttered ; but it is not easily given by a conscious effort
so to dispose the organs. It is nearest in tone to our
u in hurt, but is notably different from this, verging
considerably toward the e of they. It is closely akin
with the French e^^-sounds.
It is long in Ofen, mo^^en, fc^on, ftoren, 6l.
It is short in fonnte, bffnen, C)o(Ic, ©potter, Orter.
To form o, therefore, endeavor to hit an intermediate sound
between the vowels of hurt and hate.
The German poets frequently make o rime with the simple
C, and in parts of Germany the two are hardly distinguished.
But their real difference, as properly pronounced, is quite
marked, and should never be neglected.
17. tl, tt. — U is produced by a combination of that
position of the tongue in which i (^ in piqiie, pin) is
uttered, and of that position of the lips in which u {u in
8 PEONUNCIATION. [17-
rule^ pull) is uttered. It is tlie same sound with, the
French u. To utter it, first round the lips to the
U-position, and then, without moving them, fix the
tongue to say i (ee) — or vice versa.
It is long in libel, 8d)ulcr, miibe, tntju, tix% iibcr.
It is short in ^IM, Tlixikx, Uppigfeit, fiiEcn, §iittc, biinn.
The sounds of o and ii are, among the German vowels, much
the hardest to acquire, and cannot be mastered without assidu-
ous practice under a teacher.
DIPHTHONGS AND VOCAL DIGRAPHS.
18. For t, D, 11, see Modified Vowels, above (14-17).
3c, as already noticed (10), is an t made long by the
addition of an e, instead of by doubling, or the addition
of ^.
Historically, te often represents an original combination of
separate vowels.
Examples : bie, lief, liegen, grieben, 3fliemen.
At the end of a few words (mostly coming from the Latin,
and always accented on the preceding syllable), the e of ie has
its own proper sound, and the i is pronounced like y before it,
or else forms an independent syllable: thus, Sinien, (^lorie,
gamilie, Sragobte ; also ^nie (plural of ^nie, and better spelt
^niee).
1. The New Orthography writes te instead of i in verbs (404,
II. 4) hke marfd^ieren, ftubieren, ^antieren.
19. 1. ?li. — %i is a combination of letters represent-
ing a true diphthongal sound, which is composed of the
two elements a (a in far) and i {{ in pique). It is pro-
nounced nearly as the English aye (meaning * yes '), or
like the "long *" oi aisle, ish, but with the first con-
stituent of that sound made very slightly opener and
more conspicuous, a little dwelt on. It occurs in very
few words.
Examples: §ain, SSaife, 5!}^ai.
2. @i. — (Si represents the same sound, and is of
very much more frequent occurrence, being the ordin-
ary German equivalent of our "long *."
24] DIPHTHONGS. 9
Examples : ^ein, 33eil, @imer, fei, (Si, ©itelfeit.
3. ^^ and et) were formerly written in certain words instead
of ai and ei : they are now gone nearly out of use, only a few
authors retaining them.
Examples : Tlat), fetjn, fel), ^oliset).
20. ?(lt. — 5(u combines the two sounds of a (in far)
and u (in rule), and is pronounced almost precisely like
the English ou, ow, in house, down, but with the first
element, the a-sound, a shade more distinct.
Examples: §au§, faufen, luge, ©au, braun, Waul.
21. 1. ©tt. — ^u is most nearly like the English oi,
oy, in hoil, loy, differing chiefly in having the first ele-
ment briefer and less conspicuous. Theoretically, its
final element is the ii-sound.
Examples : i^eutc, ncu, ©uter, greunbe, euer.
2. 9(u, ttU. — Su is the modified diphthong corre-
sponding to ait, as d to a. It is pronounced in the
same manner as eu.
Examples: SuQier, Oaute, Braunen, ^rciume.
3. There are a number of words which vary in their spelling
between eu and du. Of those oftenest spelt with du the New
Orthography prefers eu in bleueu maul, beud)ten seem, (SJreuel
horror, greulid) horrible, leugnen deny, f(f)neu5en snuff.
22. Hi. — Ui is found only in :^ui, pfut, and is pro-
nounced like we.
CONSONANTS.
23. S, b. — 33 has the same sound as in English, when
followed in the same syllable by a vowel or a semivowel
(r, I), or when doubled.
Examples : 33iber, 33uBe, 1)dbtn, ober, 33Iet, breci^en, ^bbe.
In other situations — i.e., when final, or followed by a
consonant in general — it loses its sonant character, and
is converted into the corresponding surd, p.
Examples: ©tab, (je^oBt, ob, f^ub, C)cib§bura'.
24. 6, e.-^(£, in words properly German, is found
10 PEONUNCIATION. [24-
only in the combinations (^, d, fd), for which see below,
43, 44, 48.
In words borrowed from other languages and not
Germanized in spelling, it is, as in English, hard before
a, 0, u, I, n, r, but soft before c, i, t) : in the former case,
it is pronounced as k, in the latter, as ts (German ^: 42).
Examples : ^ato, (^^arcer, (Concert, Sicero, CUaubiu^, Ocean.
1. There are many foreign words in regard to which usage is
still unsettled, either ! or c being written for the hard sound,
and either 3 or c for the soft sound : thus, farcer or ^arjer,
(Concert or ^onjert.
25.* 2), b. — ^, like h, has its own proper sonant
sound, that of English d, before a vowel, or any con-
sonant that may intervene between it and a vowel in
the same syllable ; also when doubled.
Examples : ^amm, bid, ^orf, bu, ^bel, brei, ^voaU, ^robbel.
At the end of a word, or of a syllable before another
consonant, it is changed to the corresponding surd, t.
Examples : 2kh, ^iahi, milb, ^Ibenb, lanblid).
1. The combination bt is the equivalent of a double t, the b
not being separately pronounced : thus, gefanbt, berebt, Idbt,
f anbte ; and in a few words the spelling wavers between bt and t.
The New Orthography writes tot dead, instead of the usual
tobt (hence also toten, etc.) ; also Qcfcl)eit clever, instead of
gefdjeibt.
26. |5, f . — 5 ^^s always the same sound as in
English.
27. @, g. — @, like the other sonant mutes, h and b,
has its proper hard sound (as English g in go, give, get)
when doubled, or when followed in the same syllable
by a vowel or a liquid ((, it, r). It is never softened
before e or t — as it also is not in any English word of
Germanic origin.
Examples : (S5an§, Qcgen, (^ier, gut, grog, ^la§, (^nabe, ^ogge.
In the same situations in which h and b become p and
t, g is also changed to a surd ; it does not, however,
assume the* value of !, but rather that of cI) (43).
34] CONSONANTS. 11
Examples: %aQ, aoQ, 3w9/ ^ogt, ^J^afib, ru^ig, laglic^.
There is much difference of usage among Germans, and of
opinion among German orthoepists, as to the pronunciation of
g. All, indeed, agree to give it the hard sound when initial.
But in other situations, some always soften it to d) — e. g., in
^^Qsn, Siege. Others do not allow it anywhere the precise
c^-sound, especially not after the hard vowels (a, 0, u), but pro-
nounce it nearly as f, or as something between a g and f, or
between a f and (f) — and so on.
In many words taken from the French, g has its French
sound, like that of the English s in vision, or z in azure: thus,
(^enie, ^age, Sngenieur, Orange, genieren.
28. §, 1^. — § has the sound of English h when it
begins a word (or either of the suffixes {)eit, I)aft). Else-
where it is silent, serving either to lengthen the pre-
ceding vowel, or to make a hiatus between two vowels.
For tf), which is pronounced as simple t, see below (37.2). For
(^ and jd), see below (43, 48).
Examples: I)in, fter, ^at, ©of, ^ni, ^ol^er, l!inbI)cit,J)al)l^aft,frDft,
raf(^, ©^u^, rul)en, %^r\, (^I)re, cl)cr, i()m, O^r, tl)un, ^t!)er.
29. Sf J» — 3 ^s always pronounced like our y con-
sonant.
Examples: 3a!^r, jung, ieber, So^ann, bejaften.
30. B, f, — ^ has always the sound of English h
Instead of double f is written c! (which, however, if
separated in syllabication, becomes t4).
Examples : faun, fennen, f^eib, £reibe, ^nie, ^nabe, ^lode, bruf=
fen (but brurfcn).
31. 8, I ; SK, tit. — These letters have the same
sounds as their English correspondents.
32. 91, II. — ^ has usually the same "Sound as Eng-
lish n. Like the latter, it has before f the value of ng :
thus, finfen, ^ant
For the digraph ng, see below (45).
33. $JJ, Ji. — ^ is pronounced as in English. For
the digraph pi), see below (46.2).
34. £l, r|. — O, as in English, is always followed by
12 PEONUNCIATION. [34-
XI, and qu is pronounced as hv, but with the pure labial
utterance of the -y-sound, as explained below (under
ttj, 39).
Examples : Oual, quer, Ouirl, quoH.
35. 91, t. — ^ has a decidedly more distinct and
forcible utterance than in English, being more or less
rolled or trilled, and hence formed a little further for-
ward in the mouth than our r. In every situation, it
must be clearly heard.
Examples : 9ianb, reben, flitter, Sfloftr, runb, ^cr, §crr, ^Irbetter,
gii^rer, t)ermer!en, marmorner, eriernbarer.
36. @, f, §. — ©, after a manner analogous with b,
b, and g, has its proper surd or hissing sound only
when doubled, final, or standing before a consonant;
before a vowel (not before a semivowel ; nor when pre-
ceded by a surd consonant, as t, cf), or a liquid, I, m, n,
r) it approaches a sonant, or buzzing sound, that of our
z, and in the usage of some localities, or of some classes,
it is a full s; according, however, to the better sup-
ported pronunciation, it is a compromise between s
and 2, a kind of sz. Before t and p at the beginning
of a word, it is usually and regularly pronounced
as sh (rather less broadly and conspicuously than our
common sh); but the pronunciation as written has also
good usage (especially in Northern Germany) in its
favor.
Double §> (f^, ff) is always surd or hissing; for %
see 49.
Examples: (S5Ia§, ^(x\i, S3o§f)eit, tt)tj]en, Sootfe, emftG, alfo, ©o:^n,
©eele, 33efcn, (S^efang, fteif, ©trang, ©pur, fpringen.
37. %, t. — %, in words properly German, has always
the ordinary sound of English t
Examples: %o.\t\, Saube, %zii, treten, Xritt, ^inte.
1. In the terminations of certain words from the
Latin or French, t is pronounced as ^ (i. e., as English
ts) before ia, te, io : thus, martialifd^, patient, Station.
39] CONSONANTS. 13
2. Xf) is pronounced always as simple t, its I) having,
in real German words, no historical ground, but only a
phonetic value, as indicating the long quantity of the
neighboring vowel : thus, ^f)a(, Zi)at, Zi)on, t^un, Xt)ure,
X^rcine.
3. The New Orthography omits the "f) of tft at the beginning of
a word in all cases in which the following vowel is otherwise
shown to be long: thus, %m animal, %d\ part (with Urteil,
SSorteil, etc.), ^eer tor, kmx dear, %an dew, t)erteibiGen defend;
also in %^vixm tower, and in the suffix =tum (for ^f^uin) : thus,
9tei^tum wealth. But the f) is retained in xi)ee tea. It writes
t instead of t^ everywhere at the end of a word (or of a radical
syllable before a suffix or ending) : thus, glut flood, 9Jlut spirit,
5^ot need, ^at council, rot red, mert dear, Sddtjel riddh, ^tem
breath, 5!Jliete hire, ^ute rod — instead of giut^, etc.
Some writers omit the Ij of t^ in all cases.
For ^, see below (61).
38, §B, H. — '^ is hardly found except at the begin-
ning of a word, and there has the sound of English /.
In the case or two where it occurs in the interior of
words before a vowel, it is pronounced as our v; as
also, in words taken from foreign languages which give
it the latter sound.
Examples: 35atcr, ml, SSerfaH, t)or, t)oIIig, SSolf, freDeIn,
S!Iat)e, 55acan3, SSenebig, t)ioIett, ^ult)er.
39. SB, Ul. — 3S, when not preceded by a consonant
in the same syllable, is commonly and correctly pro-
nounced precisely as the English v, or between the
edges of the upper teeth and lower lip. Another mode
of its utterance, which is also supported by good
authority, excludes the action of the teeth, and pro-
duces the sound between the edges of the lips alone.
As thus made, it is still distinctly a v (not a w), though
one of a different quality from our v : the difference,
however, is not conspicuous to an unpractised ear. All
authorities agree in requiring this purely labial pro-
nunciation after a consonant (which consonant is nearly
14 PBONUNCIATION. [34-
always a sibilant, fc^ or j) : and the same belongs, as
above noticed (34), to the u of the combination qu.
Examples: 2Belle, 2Baf)n, 2But^, mliQn, {corner, aiDei, %mtU
40. X, J. — 3£ is found in only an exceedingly small
number of words originally German. It has the sound
of English x (ks), whether as initial or elsewhere.
Examples: Igt, C)e£e, %tii, ^mopljon, 3Eenien, 3Ei)roGra|)l)tc.
41. ^, ^. — ^ in German is a vowel only (13).
42. 2, 3. — 3 is always pronounced as ts, except in
the combination [3 (see below, 49) : its two constituents
should be sharply and distinctly uttered. Instead of
double J is written t^ (51).
Examples : ^inn, SoH, ju, gerjiel^en, gagen, ^eijen, ^rinj, §ol3,
^ers, $Iafe, stDei.
CONSONANTAL DIGEAPHS AND TETGKAPHS.
43. g]|, dj. — The compound d) has two sounds:
one is deeper or more guttural, nearly our throat-
clearing or hawking sound, and is heard after a, 0, u,
an ; the other, after any other vowel or a consonant, is
more palatal, made over the middle of the tongue, and
approaches the sA-sound, or is nearly as we should
pronounce Jiy in hyen.
(^^, in all situations, is a rough breathing, an h, rasped out
with conspicuous force through as nearly as possible the same
position of the organs in which the preceding vowel was uttered.
According, then, as the vowel is one produced in the throat —
namely, a, 0, U — or one which comes forth between the flat of
the tongue and the palate — namely, c, i, t), d, b, ix — or as it is a
diphthong whose final constituent is of each class respectively
— -namely, an on the one hand ; a\, ei, Ciu, cu on the other — the
following d) has a different pronunciation, guttural or palatal.
1 . (If) after a consonant has the softer or palatal sound.
As above noticed (27), c\ not followed by a vowel etc.
ha.s the sound which d) would have in the same situa-
tion.
46] CONSONANTS. 15
Examples : guttural c^ : 35a(^, ho6), 33u(^, an^, Tla6)tx, %^t\xm,
palatal c^: ^ec^, rc(i)t, i(^, ni(^t§, ftd^er, 33ud)er,
a^kn, Sdc^er, Soccer, rei(^, euc^, feud)!, bduc^te, burc^, i)old^, man*
(f)er, 2Bea, ric^tig, 9)^dgbe, beugte, Suglein, Stt'erg.
The fault particularly to be avoided in practising the d) -sound
is the closure of the organs, forming a mute consonant, a kind
of k or g. If such a mispronunciation is once acquired, it can-
not be unlearned without great trouble. Much better utter a
mere breathing, an h, at first, depending upon further practice
to enable one by degrees to roughen it to the desired point of
distinctness.
2. (£^ before §, when the §> belongs to the stem of
the word, and not to an added suffix or inflectional end-
ing, loses its peculiar sound, and is uttered as Jc (i.e.,
d)g as x).
Examples: 2Ba(^§, Od}fe, 5u(^§, 33ud)fe, ®ei(^fel, tt)cc^feln.
3. In words taken from the Greek, d) has usually the softer
or palatal d)-sound before e or i, as (S;i)irurg, $cted)ien ; but else-
where it is pronounced as f : thus, (XI)aractcr, (^I)or, S^lor, (Sftrift.
In words from the French, it has the French c/i-sound, or that
of German fd) (our sh): thus, 9ied)erc^e, d)armant, (Sl)auf]ee.
44. ^t, i, — Sf, as already explained (30), is the
written equivalent of a double 4.
45. 91g, tt(|. — 9^CJ is the guttural nasal, the equiva-
lent of English ng, standing related to ! and c^ as it to t
and b, and iii to p and h. Its g is not separately uttered,
as g, before either a vowel or a consonant : thus, finger
like singer J not like finger; Ijimgrig like hangrope, not
like hungry.
Examples : jung, fingen, (Bang, ^dngc, Idngcr, bringlid^.
46. 1. ^f, J)f. — ^f is often etymologically the equiva-
lent of our p (^fiuib pound, ^]al'){ pale), but it is uttered
regularly as a combination of p and f.
2. ^J, ^^, — ^f) is found only in words of foreign
origin, and has the sound of f, as in English.
Examples : ^fcffer, ^jerb,to|)f, rupfcn ; ^f)a]e, $ftD§pl)or, ^rap^it.
16 PRONTTNCIATION. [47-
47. Ctt, (\n. — This combination has been abeady
explained (34, 39).
48. ^Sf, f^. — @c^ is the equivalent of our sk
Examples: ©d^iff, f(?^on, ](^eu, %]^^, 5if(^, ©r^nur, <B^mn,
©(^lo^, ©d^merg, fc^reiben, !inbif(^.
49. @}, ^. — @J is pronounced as a double g (ff, 36),
the J losing its distinctive character in the combination.
Double ff is not written at the end of a word, nor before
a consonant (t), nor after a long vowel or diphthong,
^ being in such situations substituted for it.
Examples: lap la^t (from lajfen), ©c^oB (but ©d^bffe), genic^en,
©trau^ and ©trdu^e, ^a^, ^'d^li^, t)a^te (but f)afjett).
As was remarked above (2.2), when German is written or
printed in the Roman character, § should be represented by ss
(according to the rules of the New Orthography, rather by the
obsolete and barbarous combination fs).
1. The New Orthography writes the suffix =ni^ (408-9) with a
single g : thus, (^Ieid)tu§, ginfterntS.
60. Xi^, i^. — Xf), as noticed above (37), is equivalent
to t simply.
61. X}, ^. — ^^ is the written equivalent of a double
5, and is pronounced in the same manner as a single ^.
Examples : pafe, pd^e, ft^en, Tlix^t, iefet, pIbfeUd).
GENEEAL SUPPLEMENTAKY EULES.
52. 1. Other combinations of letters than those
treated of above, whether of vowels or of consonants,
are pronounced as the single letters of which they are
made up.
2. Doubled consonants, however, are not pronounced
double, but in the same manner as single ones.
Double consonants, in general, have no etymological ground,
but are an orthographical device for indicating the short quan-
tity of the preceding vowel.
53. But doubled consonants, or double vowels, or any of the
foregoing combinations of vowels or consonants, if produced by
55] FOEEIGN WOBDS. 17
the coming together of the final and initial letters of the parts
making up a word — either by composition or by the addition of
prefixes or of suffixes of derivation beginning with a consonant
— are pronounced as in those parts taken separately. Thus,
beerbet (be=erbet) not as ^eere; geirrt (ge4rrt) not as @eier;
beurtt)eilt (bentrt^eitt)" 33eute; ^anbbruc! (^onb=bruc!) " (Sbba;
SHittag (9)nt4ag) " 'Mittt; iiJegging (weg.ging) " (Sgge;
5lbbUb <m=-bUb) " (Sbbe; auffaUt (auMallt) '* 3tffe;
t)ieUeicf)t (t)iel4ei(f)t) " Selle; benuoc^ (ben^norf)) " §enne;
tierreift (uer-reift) " fperren; ba^felbe (bag4etbe) " beffen;
tuatfifam (tt)Qd)4am) " H)ad)fen; ungar (uu-gar) " Ungar;
^ougrfjen (C5au§=(f)en) " ^af^en; §oii§5in8 (^auS^^jing) " au^er;
^utsuder(^u^u(fer) " ^ilje; megeffen (tt)eg=e[fen) " gegeffen;
Slbart (5tb=Qrt) " ?tbenb; ^anbeifen (§anb=eifen) " f)anbe(n»
54. Foreign Wards. — 1. Many words taken into German from
other languages (especially French) are made more or less like
German words in spelling and in pronunciation. But many
others retain their foreign peculiarities. The most common and
important of these have been noticed above, under the different
consonants; less frequent are the following: c^n, pronounced
like ny, as in gftampagne, Sorgnette; II, like hj, as in 33iEarb,
SBillet; gu, as hard g, as in ^uitarre; qu, as k, as in33ouquet;
n with preceding vowel as a nasal vowel, as in Baffin, 9lefrain,
33aIIon. So also among vowels : a\, as a, as in ^Iffaire ; an and
eau, as o, as in (Epaulette, pateau ; eu, as o, as in ^bieu, Sn^^nieur ;
DU, as u, as in feoufin, ^DUr; oi, hke English wa in was, as in
SJlemoiren, toilette,
2. In pronouncing the classical languages, Latin and Greek,
the Germans follow, in general, the rules of utterance of their
own letters, both vowels and consonants. But, in reading Latin,
g is always hard, and v has the sound of EngUsh v (German to),
not of German t) (English/).
ACCENT.
55. Tlie accentuation of German words is so generally
accordant in its principles witli that of English words,
that it occasions little difficulty, even to the beginner,
and can be left to be learned by practice, without detailed
exposition and illustration. The following are its lead-
ing rules :
18 ACCENT. [55-
1. The accent ordinarily rests, in words uncom-
pounded, on the radical or chiefly significant syllable —
never on terminations of declension or conjugation,
almost never on suffixes of derivation, and never on the
inseparable prefixes of verbs (302), either in the forms
of conjugation or in derivative words.
Exceptions are : the sufBx el (408); the i or ie of verbs ending
in the infinitive in tren or ieren (404) ; and a few wholly anomalous
words, as leben'big (from le'ben, le'benb).
2. In compound words, except compound particles,
the accent rests, as in English, upon the first member.
The separable prefixes of verbs are treated as forming
compounds, and receive the accent, in the verbal forms
and in most verbal derivatives.
Exceptions are : many compounds with all, as aflma^'tig
almighty, aflein alone, allererft first of all; compound words of
direction, like ©iiboft south-east; and a number of others, as
Sa^rl^un'bert century, leibei'gen vassal, tDiflforn'men welcome.
3. Compound particles usually accent the final mem-
ber : thus, ba^in thither, obgleicf) although, ^u\oVc\t accord-
ing to, jut) or previously.
Exceptions are : many adverbs which are properly cases of
compound nouns or adjectives ; and some others : compare 425.
4 The negative prefix m\ has the accent commonly,
but not always (compare 416.46). The same is the case
with er^ and ur.
5. Words from foreign languages regularly retain the accent
belonging to them in those languages — yet with not a few, and
irregular, exceptions. As the greater part of them are French,
or Latin with the unaccented syllables at the end dropped off,
they more usually accent the final syllable. Some change their
accent in the plural: thus, 2)o!'tor, ®o!to'ren, (S;:^ar after, S^a=
ralte're.
PARTS OF SPEECH.
56. The parts of speech are the same in German as
in English.
69] DECLENSION. 19
They are classified according to the fact and the mode of
their grammatical variation, or inflection.
1. Nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are declined.
Among these are here included articles, numerals, and par-
ticiples, which are sometimes reckoned as separate parts of
speech.
2. Verbs are conjugated.
3. Adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions are unin-
flected.
4 Interjections are a class by themselves, not enter-
ing as members into the construction of the sentence.
DECLENSION.
57, Declension is the variation of nouns, adjectives,
and pronouns for number, case, and gender.
68. There are two numbers, singular and plural, of
which the value and use are in general the same as in
English.
For special rules concerning the use of the numbers in Ger-
man, see 211.
69, There are four cases in German, as in the oldest
known form of English (Anglo-Saxon).
1. The nominative, answering to the English nomina-
tive.
The nominative case belongs to the subject of a sentence,
to a word in apposition with it, or a predicate noun qualifying
it; it is alse used in address (as the Latin vocative). See
212-14.
2. The genitive, answering nearly to the English pos-
sessive, or objective with of.
It is therefore most often dependent upon a noim, but is also
used as the object of certain adjectives, verbs, and prepositions;
and it stands not infrequently without a governing word, in an
adverbial sense. See 215-20.
20 DECLENSION. [5&^
3. The dative, corresponding to the Latin and Greek
dative, or to the English objective with to or for.
The dative stands as indirect object of many verbs, transitive
or intransitive, and also follows certain adjectives and preposi-
tions. In rare cases, it is the equivalent of an ablative. See
221-5.
4 The accusative, nearly the same with our objective.
This is especially the case of the direct object of a transitive
verb ; certain prepositions are followed by it ; it is used to
express measure (including duration of time and extent of
space), also the time when anything is or is done ; and it occa-
sionally stands absolutely, as if governed by having understood.
See 226-30.
A noun in apposition with a noun standing in any of these
relations is in general put in the same case with it (but see
213.2).
60. There are three genders, masculine, feminine,
and neuter.
Each noun is of one or the other of these genders, yet not
wholly according to the natural sex of the object indicated by it.
The names of most objects having conspicuous sex are, indeed,
mascuUne or feminine, according as those objects are male or
female ; but there are not infrequent exceptions ; and the names
of objects destitute of sex have a grammatical gender, as mas-
culine, feminine, or neuter, according to rules of which the
original ground is in great part impossible to discover, and
which do not admit of succinct statement.
61. In the main, therefore, the gender of German
words must be learned outright; but the following
practical rules will be found of value :
1. Exceptions to the natural gender of creatures having sex.
a. All diminutives formed by the suffixes c^en and lein (410.1)
are neuter: thus, ba§ 3[Rdb(^en the girl, ba§ grdulein the young
lady.
h. Besides the special names which designate the male and
female of a few species, there is a neuter name for the young, or
for the species, or for both : thus, ber ®ber the hoar, bie ©au
the sow, ba§ Serfel the pig, \)a^ ©d^tucin the Iwg.
61] GENDEE. 21
But most names of animals are of one gender only, and gener-
ally either masculine or feminine: thus, ber ©afe the hare, bie
S^ad^tigaE the nightingale; but ba§ (Srocobil the crocodile.
c. Of anomalous exceptions, only 'Cia§ SScib woman, requires
special notice.
2. Attribution of gender to classes of inanimate objects.
a. Names of the seasons, months, and days of the week, of
the points of compass, and of stones, are mascuhne : thus, ber
SSinter vnnter, ber Wax May, ber 2}ZDnta9 Monday, ber 5lorb
ncyrth, ber ^tefel fiint
b. Most names of plants, fruits, and flowers (usually ending
in e), are feminine : thus, bie gtc()te the pine, bie ^flaume the
plum, bie 9lcl!e the pink.
c. Most names of countries and places, of metals, the names
of the letters, and other parts of speech used as nouns, are
neuter: thus, ba§ Stalien Itahj, ba§ 33erUn Berlin, ha^i ©ifen
iron, ba§ 1 the letter x, ba§ ^a unb ^ein tM ^jes and no.
3. Geyider as determined bij derivation or termination (for
further details, see 408-11).
a. Masculine are the greater number of derivatives formed
from roots without suffix, by change of vowel; also (though
with very numerous exceptions) of words in el, en, and er ; and
all derivatives formed by ing and ling.
Thus, ber ©|)ru(^ the speech, ber 5]agel the nail, ber 9legen the
rain, ber ginger the finger, ber S^edel the covei\ ber 33Dl^rer the
gimlet, ber Sinbling the foundling.
b. Feminine are most derivatives in e and t, and all those
formed by the secondary suffixes ei, I)ett, !ett, fdjaft, nng, and in
(or inn).
Thus, bie ©)3ra(^e speech, bie ^a^i might, bie ©(!)mei^elel
flattej^j, bie 2Bci§!)cit wisdcm, bie @itel!eit vanity, bie Stcnnbfd)aft
friendship, bie Orbnung order, bie greunbin the female friend.
c. Neuter are all diminutives formed with d)en and Icin (as
already noticed), most nouns formed by the suffixes jel, fal, ni^
[ni^], and tl}um [turn], most collectives and abstracts formed by
the prefix ge, and all infinitives used as nouns.
Thus, ba§ 9J^dnn(^en tJie mannikin, ba§ ^nablein the little boy,
bag mtm [9ldtfel] the riddle, ha^ ©c()icffal fate, ha^^ mi^m^
[(Slei(!)ntg] the likeness, ha^ I?i3nigtf)um [.^onigtum] the kingdmn,
ha^ ^efieber plumage, ba§ diejprdd) talk, 'i)a^ ^tel^en the act of
standing,
4 Gender of compound nouns.
22 GENDER. [61-
Compound nouns regularly and usually take the gender of
their final member.
Exceptions are bie ^ntmort answer (ba§ SBort word), ber ^b*
f(^eu abhorrence (bie (Sc^eu fear), several compounds of ber
DJlut^ [9Jlut] spirit, as, bie (^rofemut!) [(^ro^mut] magnanimity,
©anftmutl^ [Sanftmut] gentleness, and 2)emut5 [^emut] humility,
etc., names of cities (which are neuter), and a few others (421).
5. Gender of nouns of foreign origin.
Excepting a few words — which, having become thoroughly
Germanized, have had their original gender altered by assimila-
tion to analogous German words, or otherwise anomalously—
nouns from other languages are masculine, feminine, or neuter,
as in the tongues whence they come : thus, ber %\kl the title
(Lat. titulus, m.), bie ^rone the crown (Lat corona, t), ba§
^l^dnomen the plienomenon (Gr. phainomenon, n.) ; but ber
^brper the body (Lat. corpus, n.), ha^ genfter the window (Lat.
fenestra, 1), bie DIummer the number (Lat. numerus, m.).
6. Some nouns are used as of more than one gender. Thus,
some of those in rti^ [nt§] are either feminine or neuter : see
408, in. 6. %\)dl [%n\] is generally mascuhne, but sometimes
neuter, especially when used in the sense of share; its com-
pounds also vary in gender. Other examples are : ber (or ba§)
^dfig cage, Ort place, g^or chorus; bie (or ber) 33utter butter,
©emmel roll; ba§ (or ber) glo^ raft, 2}lunbel ward, gieratT^
[Sterat] ornament; and so on.
7. A number of nouns are of more than one gender according
to differences of meaning : being either of kindred derivation, or
of only accidental coincidence of form. The commonest of
these are as follows :
ber S3aitb, volume ba^ iBanb, hand, rihbon
ber 33unb, covenant tcc^ S3unb, bundle
ber (Srbe, heir \>Ci^ @rbe, inheritance
bie gtur, meadow ber (or bie) %tuv, floor
ber @e^ott, contents bo§ (or ber) (S>tl\a\t, wages
ber ^aft, hold bie §aft, confinement
ber §eibc, heathen bie §eibe, heath
ber ^ut, hat bie §ut, guard
ber ^uube, customer bie ^iinbe, information
ber @c!^ilb, shield ba^ @d^ilb, si^/n
ber @ee, lake bie @ee, sea, ocean
ber (Sproffe, descendant bie @proffe, rownd (of ladder)
ber @tift, pegr ba§ ®tift, /oMrwIaiion
bie SSel^r, defense ba8 Se^r, loeir
64] ARTICLES. 23
bcr Surfct, hump bie SBurf cl, 6os5
ber liefer, ja?^ bie liefer, pine-free
ber Inciter, guide bie better, ladder
bcr 3JJangeI, Zacfc bie SJlangel, mangle
bie 3Jlar!, marfc, marc?i ba§ 3)Jar!, marrow
ber 3Raft, masf {of a ship) bie 9}Jaft,/o(Mer
ber 9J?effer, measurer , ba§ SJJeffer, fcni/e
ber 2;i)or, /ooZ baS 2;^or, gra<e
ber (or bie) 2Beif)e, fci^e (6irc?) bie SBei^e, consecration
62, Adjectives and most pronouns are inflected in
the singular in all the three genders, in order to agree
in gender with the nouns which they qualify or to
which they relate. No such word makes a distinction
of gender in the plural.
ARTICLES.
63. For the sake of convenience, the declension of the
definite and indefinite articles is first given.
The definite article is the same with the demonstrative pro-
noun, in its adjective use (164.1) ; the indefinite is the same with
the numeral ein one (198). Our own articles are of like origin.
Definite Article.
Singular. Plural.
X
masc.
fern.
neut.
m. f. n.
Nom. bcr
bie
ha^
bie
the
Gen. be§
ber
be§
ber
of the
Dat. bent
ber
bem
ben
to the
Ace. \>m
bie
has.
bie
the
Indeftnite
Articles.
Singular.
N.
ciu
eine
ein
a
G.
eine§
einer
eine§
of a
D.
einem
einer
einem
to a
A
einen
eine
ein
a
64. 1. The stem (base, theme)
of the definite article is b only ;
of the indefinite, eitt : the rest is declensional ending.
2. Notice that the declension of ein differs from that of ber in
that the former has no ending in the nom, masculine and thQ
nom. and ace, neuter.
24 AETIOLES. [65-
65. The ace. neuter ba§, and the dat. masc. and neuter
bem are frequently appended to prepositions in the form of
simple § and m, being written as one word with the preposition ;
and, in such contracted forms, a preposition ending in n (an, in,
t)on) loses its n before m. The dat. feminine ber is in like
manner cut down to r, but only after ju, forming jur.
The commonest cases of this contraction and combination
are am, im, t)om, jum, beim (for an bem, in bem, Don bem, gu bem,
bel bem), and an§, auf§, tn§, fur§, t)or§ (for an ha^, etc.). Much
less frequent are aufm, t)orm, bur(f)§, and, with dissyllabic prepo-
sitions, uber§, iiberm, and the like.
Earely, the ace. masculine ben is similarly treated, forming
iibern, l^intern, and so on. ■
The contractions are almost always used in adverbial phrases :
thus, am ^nbe in fine, im (^angen on the whole, etc.
Some writers mark the omission of part of the article in these
contracted forms by an apostrophe : thus, auf §, iibef m, ^intef n,
etc.
Very rarely, the same contraction is made after other words
than prepositions : thus, mann enbli(^ au^aefungen iff § alte, emige
Sieb when will the everlasting old song he sung out ?
USE OF THE ARTICLES.
66, In general, the articles are used in German
nearly as in English. But there are also not a few
differences, the more important of which are stated
below.
1. The definite article regularly stands in German before a
noun used in its most comprehensive or universal sense, as
indicating the whole substance, class, or kind of which it is the
appellation: as, ha§ ^olb ift gelb gold is yellow; bte 33Iatter
b e r ^flangen jinb griin leaves of plants are green.
2. By a Uke usage, it stands before abstract nouns : as, \ja§
Seben ift fura, bie ^unft ift lang life is short, art is long; ber
^laube ma^t felig faith makes happy; xn§ 35erberben lorfen to
entice to destruction.
3. It is often used where we use a possessive pronominal
adjective (161), when the connection sufficiently points out the
possessor, or when the latter is indicated by a noim or pronoun
in the dative, dependent on the verb of the sentence : as, ber SSater
66] AETICLES. 25
fdiiittcltc ben ^opf the father shook his head; ba crGteiff^ t^m
b i e ©eelc then it takes hold upon his soid.
4. It is prefixed to words of certain classes which in English
are used without it : as,
a. To the names of seasons, months, and days of the week :
as, im WiXiitx in winter ; in bem (or im) OJlai in May; am 5rei=
ia(^ on Friday.
h. To names of streets and mountains, and to feminine names
of countries: as, in ber ^riebric^^flrage in Frederick street;
ber35efut) Vesuvius; in ber (Bdjm'u in Switzerland.
c. Often to proper names, especially when preceded by adjec-
tives or titles : as, b e m franfen (^eorg to sick George; b a § fc^one
33erlin beautiful Berlin; — or, when the name of an author is
used for his works : as, i(?^ (efe b e n ©(^iEer lam reading Schiller;
— or, in a famiUar or contemptuous w^ay : as, rufe ben ^oftann
call John ; — or, to indicate more plainly the case of the noun : as,
ber ©(fatten ber DJZaria Maria's shadx)w; ben ^Irginofth be§
^nbronifuS the jealousy of Andronicus (compare 104).
5. There are numerous phrases, in German as in English, in
which the article is omitted, although called for by general ana-
logies. These often correspond in the two languages : as, gu
33ette to bed, bei ^ijc^ at table, ^Infer merfen to cast amhor, SSinb
nnb 3Bctter wind and iveather, 9J^ei[ter rii^rt fic^ unb (^efelle master
and mail bestir themselves; — in other cases, the German retains
the article which is omitted in Enghsh: as, in bie ©^ule to
school, i m C^immel unb auf ber @rbe in heaven and on earth, a m
^benb at evening; — or, less often, the article, retained in Eng-
lish, is omitted in the German: as, Dor ^lugen before the eyes,
Qen Often toward the East; — and the article is often omitted in
proverbial phrases: thus, ^Rorgenfhmb' l^at ©olb im 3JJunb
the morning-hour has gold in its mouth.
6. The article is usually omitted in technical phraseology
before words referring to persons or things as already men-
tioned or to be mentioned, as befagt, Qcbad)t, genannt the afare^
said, folgcnb the following, erfter and letter former and latter,
etc.; also before certain nouns, as 3n^aber holder, UeberbrinGei
bearer, etc.
7. In place of our indefinite article with a distributive sense,
the German employs the definite article : as, jo Die! ho.^ ^f unb
so much A pound; be§ ^benb§ of an evening; breimal bie
2Bo(^e three times a week. Also, in certain cases, the definite
article in combination with a preposition stands where the
indefinite would be expected: as, (©taat um (^taat foUte gur
26 NOUNS. [66-
^rot)iti5 tocrben state after state was to he turned into a prov-
ince.
8. The indefinite article is often omitted before a predicate
noun, and before a noun in apposition after al§ as, signifying
occupation, office, rank, or the like : thus, er tvax ,^aufmann, tt)tE
aber ie^t ©olbat tDerben he was a merchant, but noiv icants to
become a soldier, [^ fann e§ al§ 5Jlann nid)! bulben / cannot, as
A man, endure it.
The above are only the leading points that require notice in
comparing the German and English use of the articles. The
German allows, especially in poetry, considerable irregularity
and freedom in their employment, and they are not rarely
found introduced — and, much more often, omitted — where gen-
eral analogies would favor a contrary treatment.
67. In regard to their position — the definite article
precedes all other qualifying words (except all all) ;
and the indefinite suffers before it only jo or fold) sicch,
tDeld) what, and tva§> fitr ivhat sort of.
Thus, bie beibcn l^naben both the boys, ber bo|)|)clte ^rei» dx)uble
the price, folc^ cin DJ^ann (or ein fol(i)cr Tflann) such a man, ml^
ein §elb what a hero: but eine fialbe ©tunbe half an hour, ein fo
armer 5Jlann so poor a man, cine gans fd)5ne ^u^fic^t quite a fine
view.
NOUNS.
68. In order to decline a German noun, we need to
know how it forms its genitive singular and its nom-
inative plural ; and upon these two cases depends the
classification of German declensions.
1. Compound nouns have the inflection of their final member ;
excepting ^Soflmad^t commission, O^nma^t /ain^, which are of the
2nd declension, while 9J^a(i)t might is of the 1st declension, 2nd
class.
69. 1. The great majority of masculine nouns, and
all neuters, form their genitive singular by adding ^ or
e§ to the nominative. These constitute the first or
STRONG DECLENSION ; which is then divided into classes
according to the mode of formation of the nominative
plural.
71] GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION. 27
a. The first class takes no additional ending for the
plural, but sometimes modifies the vowel of the theme :
thus, (Spaten spade, (Spaten spades ; but 3Sater father,
^akx/atJiers.
h. The second doss adds the ending e, usually also
modifying the vowel: thus, Sa^r year, Sat)re years;
gufe/oof, %\\\i^feet.
c. The third class adds the ending cr, and always
modifies the vowel (when this is capable of modification) :
thus, 9}^annma7i, Wiimnamen; %mh grave, ^xah^x graves.
d. By modification of the vowel is meant the substitution of
the modified vowels (i, b, \i (14), and an (21.2), for the simpler
a, 0, U, and ail, in themes containing the latter. The change of
Vowel in English man and men, foot and feet, mouse and mice^
and their like, is originally the same process.
2. Some feminines form their plural after the first and
second of these methods, and are therefore reckoned as
belonging to the first and second classes of the first
declension, although they do not now take §> in the
genitive singular.
70. The rest of the masculine nouns add n or en to
the theme to form the genitive singular, and take the
same ending also in the nominative plural. Most fem-
inines form their plural in the same way, and are there-
fore classified with them, making up the second or weak
DECLENSION.
The feminines have to be classified by the form of their
plurals only, because, as is pointed out below, all feminine
nouns are now invariable in the singular.
71. The two cases above mentioned being known,
the rest of the declension is found by the following
general rules :
1. Singular, a. Feminines are invariable in the sin-
gular.
For exceptions, see below, 95.
h. In the masculines and neuters of the first or
strong declension, the accusative singular is like the
28 NOUNS. [71-
nominative. Nouns which add only § in the genitive have
the dative also like the nominative ; those which add e§
in the genitive regularly take e in the dative, but may
also omit it — it being proper to form the dative of any
noun of the first declension like the nominative.
c. Masculines of the second or weak declension have
all their oblique cases like the genitive.
2. Plural, a. The nominative, genitive, and accu-
sative are always alike in the plural.
h. The dative plural ends always in n : it is formed
by adding n to the nominative plural, provided that
case end in any other letter than n (namely, in e, I, or r,
the only other finals that occur there) ; if it end in
n, all the cases of the plural are alike.
c. But nouns making foreign plurals (101. 4, 5) have no dative
plural different from the other cases.
72. 1. The general scheme of noun-declension, then,
is as follows :
1st (strong) Dect.ension
'.
2nd (weak) De
X]T,F,NS
Singular :
m. n.
f.
m.
f.
K
G.
=e§, ■■
=§
»en, =n
D.
-c,
=en, =n
A.
=en, ^n
Plural:
let 01.
2nd 01.
I
3rd CI.
N.
=e
=er
=en,
:=n
G.
*c
=er
«cn.
*tt
D.
*n
*cn
=crn
-en,
^n
A.
't
*cr
^ett,
=n
vowel
sometimet
modified.
vowel
=fiilr
vowel
always
modified.
vowel
never
modified.
2. The following general rules, applying to all declension--
that of noims, adjectives, and pronouns — are worthy of notice;
a. The ace. singular of the fem. and neuter is like the nom-
inative.
h. The dat. plural (except of personal pronouns) ends in n.
76] GENEKAL RULES OF DECLENSION. 29
73. It will be seen, on comparing the declension of nouns
with that of the definite article (63), that the former is less full,
distinguishing fewer cases by appropriate terminations. Besides
their plural ending — which, moreover, is wanting in a consider-
able class of words — nouns have distinct forms only for the
genitive singular and the dative plural, with traces of a dative
singular — and even these in by no means all words.
a. The names strong and weak declension were introduced by Grimm,
and, though destitute of any resonable ground of application, have
become too generally and firmly established to be gotten rid of. A
historically suitable designation would be "vowel-declension" and
" n-declension, " since the first mode of declension properly belongs to
themes originally ending in a vowel (though the plural-ending ei* comes
from themes in g) ; the second, to those ending in n : other consonant-
endings with their peculiarities of declension have disappeared. The
whole German declensional system has undergone such extensive cor-
ruption, mutilation, and transfer, that the old historical classifications
are pretty thoroughly effaced, and to attempt to restore them, or make
any account of them, would only confuse the learner.
FIKST OR STRONG DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
74. As already explained, the first or strong declen-
sion contains all the neuter nouns in the language, all
masculines which form their genitive singular by adding
g or e§ to the nominative, and such feminines as form
their nominative plural either without an added ending,
or else by appending c to the stem.
FIRST CLASS.
75. The characteristic of the first class is that it
adds no ending to form the plural : its nominatives are
alike in both numbers — except that in a few words the
vowel of the singular is modified for the plural.
76. To this class belong
1. Masculine and neuter nouns having the endings e(,
er, en (including infinitives used as nouns, 340), and one
or two in ent ;
2. A few neuter nouns having the prefix ge and ending
in e ; also one masculine in e (^df e cheese) ;
3. All neuter diminutives formed with the suffixes
(^en, lein, and )el ;
30
NOUNS.
[76-
4 Two feminines ending in er (SKutter mother and
Slodjter daughter).
No nouns of this class are monosyllabic (except the infinitives
t^un and fein). The endings el, er do not include iel, eel, ier, eer,
but imply the simple vowel e as that of the termination.
77. Nouns of the first class add only § (not e^^) to
form the genitive singular, and never take e in the
dative.
Their only variation for case, therefore, is by the assumption
of § in the gen. sing, (of masc. and neut. nouns), and of n in the
dat. plural.
78. About twenty masculines, and both feminines,
modify in the plural the vowel of the principal syllable.
1. The masculines modifying the vowel in the plural are :
Stcfer, cultivated field §ofen, Jiarbor
5lpfel, apple ^ammel, ram
S3oben, ^oor jammer, hammer
S3ogen, l)ow §anbel, business
5Bruber, brother ?aben, shop
^aben, thread 9J?aiigeI, want
©avten, garden SJiantet, cloak
©raben, ditch ^ahd, navel
SBogen, ^aben, and ^amniel sometimes have the unmodified vowel
79. Examples : —
I. With vowel unchanged in the plural :
9^agc(, naU
Ofen, stove
(Sattel, saddle
®d)aben, harm
@d)nabe(, beak
©d^iDoger, brother-in-law
SBater, father
SSogel, bird
©paten i<pade, m.
(^emalbe picture, n.
^dfe cheese, m.
Singular.
N.
G.
D.
A.
ber ©paten
be§ ©patent
bem ©paten
ben ©paten
ha§> ©emcilbe
be§ ©emcitbeS
bem ©emiilbe
ha^ ©emcilbe
Plural.
ber ^afe
be§ Sl'afeg
bem ^dfe
ben ^afe
N.
G.
D.
A
bie ©paten
ber ©paten
ben ©paten
bie ©paten
bie ^emalbe
ber ©emcilbe
ben (^emntben
bie (^emdlbe
bie ^afe
ber f afe
ben ^afen
bie ^^dfe
d2]
FIRST OR STRONG DECLENSION.
31
II. With vowel modified in the pkiral
33rubcr brother, m.
^lofter convent, n.
Gutter mother, f.
Singular.
N.
ber 33ruber
hc[§> mo]itx
bie 9[Rntter
G.
be§ ^ruberg
be§ ^lofterg
ber 99intter
D.
bem ^ruber
bem S^lofter
ber aJ^utter
A.
ben 33riiber
Flural
bie mutkx
N.
bie ^riiber
bie ^'Ibfter
bie ^miitter
a
ber 33ruber
ber Softer
ber ^O^iitter
D.
ben 53rubern
ben £Ibftern
ben SJiiittern
A.
bie 33riiber
bie mofter
bie ai^iitter
80. 1. A few nouns are of this class in the singular and of
the second declension in the plural ; a few others have lost an
original ending n or en in the nom. (or nom. and ace.) singular :
for all these, see Irregular Declension (96—8).
2. Among the infinitive-nouns belonging to this class are
a few of irregular ending : namely, %\jun doing and 8ein being,
with their compounds, some of which are in common use as
nouns— e. g., ^afein existence, 2BDl)lfein welfare—; and others
which end in eln and crn : thus, 2[Banbeln lualklng, SSanbern
wandering.
[Exercise 1. Nouns of First Declension, 1st Class.]
second class.
81. The characteristic of the second class is that it
forms the plural by adding e to the singular ; at the
same time, the vowel of the principal syllable is usually
modified in the plural ; but to this there are many ex-
ceptions.
82. To this class belong
1. The greater number of masculine nouns ;
2. Many neuters ;
3. More than thirty monosyllabic feminines (with
their compounds, and including the compounds of funft,
not in use as an independent word), with the feminines
32
NOtJNS.
[82-
formed by the suffixes m^ [n\§] (about a dozen in num-
ber) and ]ai (two or three).
The feminines belonging to this class are :
Stngft, anxiety §anb, hand 9?ac^t, night
Slpt, axe ^aut, skin ^a\)t, seam
SBanf, bench ^(uft, cleft 9?ot^ [9f?ot], need
SBraut, bride ^raft, strength ^u% nut
SBrunft, fervor ^uf|, cow ®au, sow
S3ruft, breast ^unft, arf @(f)nur, sHng
l^auft, /s< 2au8, Zouse ©cf)tx)ulft, swelling
^lnd)t, flight i^uft, air ©tobt, city
^ruc^t, /rM« ?uft, pZeoswre SBonb, loaZZ
®ang, sroose 9}?a(^t, might SBurft, sausage
@ruft, uawZ< 9}?agb, maid 3u(f)t, training
@un\t, favor 9J?au8, mowse 3unft, gfwiZd
9?ot^ [9^ot] hardly forms a plural except in the dative, 9^bt^en, in
certain phrases. ©c^tDuIft makes also @d)tt)utften.
83. Masculines and neuters form their genitive
singular by adding either § or e^; the dative is
like the nominative, or adds e.
1. The ending eg is more often taken by monosyllables, § by
polysyllables ; but many words may assume either, according
to the choice of the writer or speaker, depending partly on
euphony, and partly on the style he is employing — e§ belonging
to a more serious or elaborate style, and § being more collo-
quial. Nouns of more than one syllable with unaccented final
containing e hardly admit e in the ending. On the other hand,
nouns having a final sibilant require an e to make the genitive
ending perceptible. Thus, %aQ^ or %aQt§, ^bnxQ^ rather than
^onigeS, almost always ©c^metterltngg, and always glomes,
Sud^fe§, Sa^eg.
2. The use or omission of e in the dative is nearly parallel
with the use of e§ or § in the genitive ; but it may be left oft
from every noun without exception. It is regularly omitted
from a noun immediately following a preposition ; thus, mit
9ie(^t with right, tjor 3orn for anger; exceptions are gu or nad^
§aufe Iwme.
84. Of the masculines, the great majority take the
modified vowel in the plural, there being only about
fifty exceptions ; of the neuters, only two, gtofe raft and
&)QX choir, require the modification, and two others,
85]
FIEST OR STRONG DECLENSION.
33
S5oot hoat and 9^ol)r reed, may take it or not; of the
feminines, all except those ending in ni^ [ni^] and ]a(
modify the vowel.
1. The masculines not modifying the vowel in the plural
are:
%Qi\, ed
%QiX, eagle
5tmbofe, anvil
%xm, arm
S3ou, building
S3efu(^, visit
SSorn, fountain
S)ad^g, badger
2)oId^, dagger
2)od^t, wick
S)om, fMhedral
S)orn, thorn
2)rud, print
§orft, forest
®rab, degree
province
®aum, palate
§all, sound
^alm, stalk
^aud), breath
^uf, /lOO/
^unb, (^ofif
kxaljxi [^xan]f crane
^ad}^, salmon
Saut, sound
Sump, ragamuffin
SJiorb, murder
Ort, pZace
^arf, parfc
^fab, paf/i
^Jpfau, peacock
^|^unf(^, punch
Ouaft, tosseZ
©c^uft, wretch
<Bdin^, shoe
@taar L®tar], starling
(Stoff, s«w#
ZaQ, day
2^^roit, throne
Xobf death
Zxnpp, troop
Xn\^, flourish
35erfu(^, trial
®aVL, ^alm, and 2;^ron also make plurals of the second or weak
declension, ^fau is also declined throughout by the second declension.
85. Examples : —
I. With vowel modified in the plural
©ol&n son, m.
N. ber (So^tt
G. beg ©oI)ne§
I), bem (Soljue
A. ben ©ofjit
N. bte ©o^c
G. ber (Si)f)ne
D. htn <Bo[)ntn
A. bie (Sof)ue
8lo§ ra/if, n.
Singular,
be§ glo^eg
bem gto^e
ba§ g(o6
Plural.
bie Siofee
ber glofje
ben glofjeu
bie Slbjje
§anb /iamZ, f,
bte §anb'
ber §anb
ber §anb
bie $onb,'
bie §anbe
ber ^anbe
ben ^ditbeii
bie §dnbe
34 NOUNS.
n. With vowel unchanged in the plural :
[85.
9Jlonat month, m. Sal)r year, n. ©rfparni^ [=ni§] saving, f.
N. ber SQZonat
G. be§ Tlomi^
D. bem 93Zonat
A. ben Monat
N. bie SQ^onate
G. ber SJ^ouate
D. ben 5Dlonaten
A. bie 93Zonate
Singular.
\>a^ 3af)r
beg Sa^reS
bem ^a^xt
ha§ 3a^r
Plural
bie 3a^re
ber 3a()re
ben Qa^ren
bie ^a^xt
bie Grfparni^ [-nig]
ber (Srfparnig [:=ni§]
ber dTfparni^ [=ni§]
bie C^rfparni^ [=ni§]
bie (Srfparniffe
ber (Srfparniffe
ben (Srfparniffen
bie ©rfpamiffe
86. Most nouns of foreign origin belong to this class. For
some irregularities in their declension, as well as in that of
other members of the class, see below, 97 etc.
[Exercise 2. Nouns of First Declension, 2nd Class.]
l^}^\ THIRD CLASS.
L I i' V / 8|j). The characteristic of tliis<jlass is the assumption
otthe ending er to form the nominative plural, along
with modification of the vowel of the theme (if it admits
of modification).
88. The class is composed chiefly of neuter nouns,
with a few masculines, but no feminines.
Besides the nouns formed by the suffix t^um [turn] (which are,
with two or three exceptions, neuter, and which modify the
vowel of the suffix, not that of the radical syllable), there are
not far from fifty neuters, and about a dozen masculines, be-
16nging to the class ; also, three or four words of foreign origin.
90]
FIRST OR STRONG DECLENSION.
35
1. The neuters are
5tag, carcass
Stmt, office
S3ab, bath
33anb, ribbon
^i(b, picture
matt, leaf
33rctt, board
iBud), book
'3) ad), roof
2)enfma(t, monument
S)ingt, ^/trngf
S)orf, village
(Si, egf^r
^ad^, departmerd
®elb, money
©emad^t, chamber
©eiuanbt, garment
@(ieb, Zinfc
@rab, gfrnt-e
@ra§, gfrass
@ut, property
^aiipt, Aead
^emb, s/iirf
^olj, wood
^orut, horn
3oc^t, yoke
^alb, caZ/
^inb, child
^leib, dress
^orn, srmm
?ieb, songf
$?ocf), /ioZe
2Ralt, mark
2«at)lt, meaZ
9J?au(, moi*</i
9?eft, "es<
9?ab, whed
9?iub, mMe
@cf)eitt, 6iM
@cf)ilbt, si^fn
@(^Io§, castle
©c^raevt, sioord
©tiftt, foundation
%\)Ci[, valley
%\\6)% cloth
SSotf, people
SSamniS, waistcoat
SBeib, woman
SSortt, loord
35ormunb, guardian
SSalb, /ores^
2Burm, loorm
^raut, /ier6
©emiit^ [©emiit], disposition ?amm, Zam6
@efcf){ed)t, seic !i?anbt, Zarw^
@e[td)t, face ^id,tt, %M
@e[penft, gr/iosi
2. The mascuUnes are:
^ofett)i(^tt, scamp 3JJann, man
@eift, spirit Drtt, place
@ott, (?o(2 9lanb, rim
?eib, &o(Zy ©traiifet, bouquet
The nouns marked with t in the ahove hsts make also plurals in e,
SBurm and @trauJ3 with modification of the vowel.
89. Eespecting the form of tlie genitive singular
ending, whether g or e^, and respecting the dative,
whether like the nominative or adding e, the same rules
apply as in the second class (83).
/^ Examples:— OJ^.o.jr' f^^M^
C)au§ 2Beib Strt^um t=tum] ^ann
hotcse^ n. woman, n. error, m. man, m.
Singular.
N. \)a§> §au§ SScib ber ^v^t^um ^ann
G. be§ §aufe§ SSeibeg be§ 3rrt^um§ aJJanneg
D. bem §aufc SSeiOe bent Srrt^um 3[Ranne
A. bag §aug SSeib ben ^i^i^t^um Tlann
36
N.
bte §aufer
G.
ber §aufer
D.
ben |)aufern
A.
bie §dufer
NOUNS.
Plural
SSeiber bie 3rrt!)umer
SSeiOer ber Srrt^iimer
SSeibern h^n Qrrt^iimern
SSeiber bie 3rrtl)iimer
(90-
Wdnmx
Tl'dnncv
SJ^cinncru
SO^cinncr
[Exercise 3. Nouns of First Declension, 3rd Class.]
-^Cx^ SECOND OE WEAK DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
yl. To the second or weak declension belong only
masculine and feminine nouns. They form all the cases
of the plural by adding n or en to the stem, and mas-
culines add the same in the oblique cases of the singular.
92. 1. Nearly all the feminine nouns in the language
are of this declension : namely —
a. All feminines of more than one syllable, whether prim-
itive words, as ©eite side; or primary derivatives, as ^ab^ gift;
words formed with prefixes, as (SJefal^r danger, or with suffixes,
as ^ugenb virtue, 'iBa\)X^ni truth, ^ixx\t\n princess ; or words de-
rived from other languages, as 9}linute minute, 5}lelobie melody,
Station nation, Unit)eriitGt university.
Exceptions : those having the suffixes ni^ [m^] or jal (see 82.3).
h. About sixty monosyllables : namely —
5lrt, manner
^oft, fare
©ci^rift, writing
2(u, meadow
^a% burden
©(f)utb, fault
Sba^n^ track
?ift, trick
®d)ur, shearing
SBrut, brood
Wait, mark
®ee, sea
SBu&it, bay
mik, milt
®pur, trace
iBurg, casile
9^uU, nought
@tatt, place
%a\)vt, passage
''^a(i)t, agreement I
1 ©tint, forehead
glur, field
WW, duty
©treu, liUer
glutf) [%{nt], fiood ^0% post
©ud)t, malady
^orm, form
Ouol, torment
Xi)at, deed
grarfit, freight
ma\t, rest
Z\)nv, door
^rau, woman
@aat, seed
2^racl)t, cosiume
grift, period
@au, sow
%x\\i, pasture
@ei{3, goat
'Bdjaax [<B6)ax'],
company \\i)X, watch
@ic^t, gout
@rf)ar, share (of a
, plough) aSc^r, defense
@ift, gift
@(i)i(^t, layer
SSelt, world
^ut, heed
®d|Iacf)t, battle
3al){, number
3ad^t, yacht
@rf)Iucf)t, ravine
3eit, time
3agb, hunt
©d^nur, daughter
-in-law
94j
SECOND OE WEAK DECLENSION.
37
2. Masculines of the second declension are
a. Words of more than one syllable in e, as 53ote messenger^
^aiit spouse, ^nabt boy — including those that have the prefix
QC, as ^cf d!)rte companion, ©efeEe fellow, and some nouns of na-
tionality, as ^xm^t Prussian, ^xan^o']t Frenclmian ; also a few
in er and or, as 33aicr Bavarian, Ungar Hungarian,
h. About twenty monosyllabic root-words : namely —
%^\\, forefather ^elb, hero 0(^§, ox
33ar, hear ^err, gentleman %x\\\i, prince
33urfd), student ^\xi, shepherd ®(f)ent, cuphearet
^(§.lixi\t, Christian Tlt\i\d), man ^d)dp§, icether
^int, finch 9Ro^r, moor @pal^, sparrow
^ixx^t, prince SRaxx, fool (Btxau% ostrich
@raf, count 9^ert), nerve 2^^or, fool.
The nominatives S3urjd)e, Dd)\t, and <®(^enfe are also in use.
c. Many foreign words, as ©tubent student, Tlonaxd) monarch,
S3 arbor barbaman.
^3^ Nouns ending in e, cl, er, and ax unaccented, add
only n to the stem ; others add en.
1. Before this ending, the n of the sufBx in is doubled : thus,
giirftin, giirftinnen.
2. ^nx gentleman, in modern usage, ordinarily adds n in the
singular, and en in the plural, being the only masculine whose
forms differ in the two numbers.
' g? No noun of this declension modifies its vowel in
the plural. n
94. Examples :-
- J^
^ ' '-''
I. Feminines:
^-^^
©eitc.
%W,
SSa^r^ieit, ^
5^attDn,
side.
deed.
truth.
nation.
Singular.
N. bie (Scite
^^at
SSnfjrljeit
Nation
G. ber Seite
Xijat
SSaljr^eit
Station
r>. ber (Seite
Zi)at
SSaljrIjeit
D^ation
A. bie ©eite
Plural
SSaljr^eit
Station
N. bie ©eiten
^§atcn
SSarjrljeiten
9?ationcu
Gr. ber <Seiten
^f)aten
SSaljr^eiten
9?atiDneu
r>. ben (Seitcn
3:l)atcn
SSaI)rI)eiten
9^ationen
A. bie <^eiten
^f>ateu
SlSa^r^eiten
^f^atiptieu
38
NOUNS.
[94^
n. Masculines :
©tubent
student.
^naBe
boy.
55ater 5Henf(^
Bavarian. man.
N. ber ^mh^
G-.D.A. Slnabeu
Singular.
q3ater ^enfc^
^aiern SJienjc^ett
Plural.
©tubent
©tubcutcu
N.G.D.A. ^mUn
SBaiern 93^enfc^en
©tubenten
95. 1. Formerly, many feminine nouns of this declension,
like the masculines, took the declensional ending in the genitive
and dative singular ; and this ending is still commonly retained
in certain phrases : e. g., auf @rben on earth, t)on ©eiten on the
part of. Occasionally, also, it appears in a gen. feminine pre-
ceding the governing noun, as um feiner ©eelcn §eil for the wel-
fare of his soul; and yet more rarely, by poetic license, in other
situations : e. g., auf ber (^affen on the street, ha^ 2id)t ber ©onnen
the light of the sun.
2. Occasionally, when two nouns are used together, the
ending en of the second declension is omitted ; thus, §elb unb
^id^ter (accus.) he7^o and poet, 5Jlenf (^ 3U SJlenfcf) man to man.
[Exercise 4. Nouns of Second Declension.]
IRREGULA.E DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
96. Irregularities in the declension of nouns of foreign
origin, and of proper names, will be considered below, under
those titles respectively (see 101-8).
97. Mixed Declension.
1. A number of masculine and neuter nouns are regularly
and usually declined in the singular according to the first
declension, and in the plural according to the second. Such
are: masculines —
S3auev, peasant
©eoatter, godfather
l^orbeer, laurel
2Haft, mast
Mvi^l^\, musck
9^ad)bor, neighbor
^antoffel, slipper
<B6)mn], pain
@ee, lake
(^toat, state
®tarf)et, goad
©tral)!, ray
llntert!)Qn, subject
S>ettcr, cousin
3ievat^ [-xai], ormnmni.
IIIREGUIAR DECLENSION.
89
Neuters —
Sliige, eye
S3ett, bed
©nbe, end
^cmb, shirt
O^r, ear
2Be^, pain.
Several of these words have other forms. Thus, (S^eDatter,
and ^^antoffcl and SSettcr make a plural also according to the
first declension 1st class ; ^auer, 9la(i)bar, and Untertftan make
a singular also of the second declension.
2. Further, certain nouns of foreign origin are of the first
declension in the singular, and the second in the plural, as 3n=
feet insect, gen. sing. 3nfecte§ ; pi. gnfecten :— especially those
ending in unaccented or (which, however, throw the accent for-
ward, upon the or, in the plural), as ^oc'tor, gen. sing. ®Dc1or§,
pi. ^octo'ren.
3. Examples : —
@taat
9?a(^bar
2)octor
5luge
state, m.
neighbor, m.
Singular.
doctor, m.
eye, n.
N. ber <Bia(\i
9^acf)bar
doctor
ha^ ^nge
G. be§ ©taateg
9^acpar§
®octor§
beg 5Iuge§
D. bent (Staate
9Zac!)bar
2)Dctor
bent 5lnge
A. ben ©taat
9kd}0ar
Plural
doctor
bag 5tuge
^. etc. bie ©taateti
9^ac()barn
SDoctoren
^ngen
98. Declension with defective stem.
1. A few masculines^ otherwise declined according to the 1st
class of the first declension, p,s stems in en, sometimes or usu-
ally drop the n or en in the nominative singular. Thus :
%tU ( or =jen), rock
griebe (or =ben), peace
gunte (or 4m), spark
©ebanfe (or .!en), thought
@(aube (or -Mn), belief
§aufe (or .en), heap
^ame (or =men), name
®Qme (or .men), seed
SBiUe (or 4eu), will
@c^abe (or =ben), (ci inplur.) harm
2. Like the above, ber ©(^mers pain has sometimes the
genitive in en§; and ba§ ^erg heart has a corresponding declen-
sion, but with the accusative like the ncxninative.
40
NOUNS.
[98-
3
. Examples :^
^amtn name, m.
^vkhtn peace, m.
^crj ^ear<, n.
Singular.
N.
ber DZame (or :=men)
griebe (or
=ben)
ha^ §er§"
a
be§ 9^amen§
grieben§
beg ^ergeng
D.
bem D^amen
grieben
bem ^erjen
A.
ben Seamen
grieben
Plural.
ha^ ^erj
N.,
etc. Seamen
grieben
^erjen
99. Bedundant Declension.
1. A considerable number of nouns are declined, either in
the singular or the plural, or in both, after more than one form.
The most important of these have been already pointed out
above under the different declensions and classes ; others are
sometimes met with in dialectic, and even in literary, use.
2. A smaller number have two well established forms of the
plural, belonging to different significations of the word ; they
are as follows :
bag iBoitb
^anber, ribbons
53anbe, bonds
bie 53on!
SSdnfe, benches
^on!en, banks
ber S3auer
S3auern, peasants
iBauer, builders
ber S3ogen
iBogen, sheet of paper
33ogen, bows (for shooting)
ha^ 2)ing
S)inge, things
2)inger, creatures
ber guB
m^^rfeet
^U^e, feet (a measure)
bag ©efid^t
@efid)te, apparitions
©efic^ter, /aces
ha^ ^orn
§orne, kinds of horn
Corner, horns (of animals)
ber ^aben
Saben, shutters
:2a ben, shops
bag $?anb
Sanbe, regions
^iinbtv, countries
bag Sid^t
iidjtt, candles
$?i(^ter, lights
ber Wann
9JJanner, men
Ttanmn, vassals
ber monh
SJJonbe, moons
SJJonben, months
ber Ort
Dxte, regions
Orter, places (towns)
bie @au
@aue, sows
®auen, wild pigs
ber @(^itb
©d^itbe, shields
@d)i(ber, signs
bag Znd}
Xu^e, kinds of cloth
Xn6)ev, pieces of cloth
bag Sort
SSorte, words
Sorter, vocables
100. Defective Declension.
1. In German, as in English, there are classes of nouns — es-
pecially abstracts, as ^emutl^ [^emut] humilityj and names of
101] IRKEGXILAR DECLENSION, 41
substances, as ^olb gold (unless, as is sometimes the case, they
have taken on also a concrete or individualized sense, as %'iiot=
Ijtikn follies, ^apiere papers) — which, in virtue of their significa-
tion, have no plural.
Some abstract nouns, when they take such a modified sense
as to admit of plural use, substitute other, derivative or com-
pound, forms : as, %oh death, ^obegfaKe deatJis (literally, cases of
death), 35eftre6en exertion, 33eftreBun0en exertions, efforts.
2. A much smaller number have no singular : as, (^Ikxn parents,
DJiafern measles, Striimmer ruins, Seute people.
3. Compounds of 9J^ann man substitute leute for mann in the
plural, when taken collectively : thus, ^aufmann merchant, ^auf=
leute merchants; but 53iebermanner worthy men, ©"^renmdnner wen
of honor, as individuals only, not forming a class.
NOUNS OF FOREIGN ORIGIN.
^01. 1. Nouns derived from foreign languages are
variously treated, according to the completeness of their
naturalization.
2. The great mass of them are assimilated in inflec-
tion to German models, and belong to the regular de-
clensions and classes, as already stated.
3. A class of nouns in um from the Latin form a plural in en ;
thus, 3nbit)ibuum, 3nbit)tbuen; ©tubium, ©tubien; and a few in
qI and il add ien : thus, l^apital, llapitalien j goffil, goffilien. One
German noun, ^Icinob jewel, makes a similar plural, ^leinobien.
4. A few, as in English, form their plurals after the manner of
the languages from which they come ; but are hardly capable
of any other variation, except an § as sign of the genitive sing-
ular: thus, 9Jluftcu§, 9J?ufici; 5:eTnpu§, Slempora ; factum, Sacta.
5. Some from the French and English, or other modern
languages, form the plural, as well as the genitive singular, in § :
thus, feibene ©op^a§ silken sofas, bie Sorb§ the lords.
Sometimes, rather than add a genitive sign § to a word which
in the original took none such, an author prefers to leave it, like
a proper name, uninflected : thus, be§ ^aQUax of the jaguar, be§
^lima of the climate.
Before this foreign and irregular §, some authorities set an
apostrophe, both in the genitive and the plural, especially after
a vowel. The same is true in proper names.
42 NOUNS. [102-
PROPER NAMES.
/102. Proper names are inflected like common nouns,
unless they are names of persons, of places (towns and
tha like), or neuter names of countries.
\ 103. Names of countries and places admit only the genitive
ending § (not e§) ; if, as terminating in a sibilant, they cannot
take that ending, they are not declined at all : thus, bie SSiiften
5lfrt!a§ the deserts of Africa, bie SiniDoftner ^erling the inhabitants
of Berlin, but bie ^inmo^ner t)on ^art^ t1ie inhabitants of Paris
(or, bie SintDol^ner ber 6tabt $ari§).
( 104? Names of persons were formerly more generally and
more fully declined than at present ; now, the article is custom-
arily used to indicate the case, and the name itself remains un-
varied after it in the singular.
But the genitive takes an ending if followed by the governing
word : as, be§ grofeen griebrid)^ S^ftaten Frederwk the Great's deeds.
i 105. ) When used without the article, such nouns add § in the
genitiv^ : thus, (5cf)iner§, 5riebrid}§. But masculine names end-
ing in a sibilant, and feminines in e, have en§ in the genitive :
thus, 9}^a5en§, ©opftienS. i p^ '^
The dative and accusative, of both genders, were formerly
made to end in n or en, which ending is now more often, and
preferably, omitted, and the name left unvaried in those cases.
^y But classical names ending in § are unchanged in the gen-
itive: thus, ^Itreu§' 6oI)n Atrem' son, ^emo§tl^ene§' Sfleben De-
mosthenes' speeches. And German nouns ending in a sibilant are
sometimes treated in the same way : e. g. 3^blt^^ (^ebii^te Zedlitz'
poems. The use of the apostrophe in such cases is common, but
not universal.
^ 106. J The plurals of masculine names, with or without the
article, have e (rarely en), with n added in the dative ; of fem-
inines, n or en. Those in o (from Latin themes in on) add ne:
thus, gato, Satone.
107. ; 3^11^^ ^^d 6^riflu§ are still usually dechned as Latin
neuns :' gen. ^efu, Sf)nfti ; dat. 3efu, (Skifto ; ace. 3ef urn, (S:^riftum.
Other classical names were formerly treated in the same man-
ner, and cases thus formed are occasionally met with, even in
recent works.
108. 1. A proper name following a title that has the article
before it k left unvaried ; if without the article, it takes the
110] ADJUNCTS OP THE NOUN. 43
genitive sign, and the title (except §err) is unvaried: thus,
ber ©o^n Haljer griebric^S the son of Emperor Frederick, §errn
©d^mibtg ^an^ Mr. Smith's house, but ^reusgufi be§ ^aijers grieb=
rid) tJw crusade of Emperor Frederick.
2. An appended title is declined, whether the preceding name
be declined or not; thus, ^Ue^anbcra bc§ (^ro^cn (^e(d)i(^te
Alexander the GreaVs history, bie 51'^aten be§ .^i)niQ§ Sriebri(5^ be§
3tt)eiten the deeds of King Frederick the Second.
3. Of two or more proper names belonging to the same
person, only the last is liable to variation under the preceding
rules: thus, §errn 3o^ann ©d^mibt^ ^au^ Mr. John Smith's
house; but, if the last be a family name preceded by t)On, it
takes the genitive ending only before the governing noun:
thus, gricbrid) Don ©d^lEerS 2Ber!e, but bie 2Ber!e r^riebrid)§ bon
©d)iner the works of Frederick von Schiller.
[Exercise 5., Nouns of Mixed Declension, etc.]
MODIFYING ADJUNCTS OF THE N3UN.
109. A noun may enter as an element into the structure of
the sentence not only by itself, but is modified and limited by
adjuncts of various kinds.
110. 1. The most usual adjunct of a noun is an adjective
(including under this term the pronominal and numeral ad-
jectives and the articles) : namely
a. An attributive adjective, directly qualifying the noun,
preceding it, and agreeing with it in gender, number, and case :
as, ctn Quter DJJann a good man, ber fc^onen Srau of the beautiful
woman, biejen artigen ^Hnbern to these well-hehaved children (see
115).
h. An appositive adjective, less directly qualifying the noun,
immediately following it, and in German not varied to agree
with it (treated, rather, as if the predicate of an adjective
clause) : thus, ein Sel^nftuI)! reid) gefc^nifet unb tDunberlic^ an arm-
chair [which is] richly carved and quaint (see 116.2).
But an adjective may follow a noun, as if appositive, and yet
be declined, being treated as if having a noun understood after
it: thus, bie geinbe, bie mac^tigen, jiegcn the enemies, the mighty,
prevail, menn id) Dergang'ner Stage, gliidlid)er, 311 benfen tuage when
I venture to think of past days, happy ones, Such cases are
poetic and rare.
44 NOUNS. [110>
c. An adjective clause, containing a verb and its subject, and
introduced by a relative pronoun or conjunction : as, ber 3f{tng,
ben fie mir (^a'i) the ring which she gave to me, bie ©iitte, tt)D ber alte
S3ergmann tt)ol^nt the cottage where the old miner lives (see 437).
2. Sometimes an adverb, by an elliptical construction (as rep-
resenting the predicate of an adjective clause), stands as
adjunct to a noun : as, ber Tlann Ijkx the man here, ber S)immel
bort oBen heaven above: that is, the man who is here, etc.
111. A noun is very often limited by another noun.
1. By a noun dependent on it, and placed either before or
after it.
a. Usually in the genitive case, and expressing a great
variety of relations (216).
b. Very rarely, in the dative case (225.1).
2. By an appositive noun, following it, and agreeing with it
in case (but not necessarily in gender or number) : as, er l^at ben
^atfer griebric^, feinen ^txxn, t)errat5en [t)erraten] he has betrayed
the Emperor Frederick, his master, ben fie, meine (^eliebte, mir
Q^Oih which she, my beloved, gave me.
The appositive noun is sometimes connected with its subject
by the conjunction al§ as: thus, gieftt, al^ ber lefete ^ii^ter, ber
le^te SJlenf (^ !&inau§ the last man marches out as last poet.
3. The ether parts of speech used as substantives (113), of
course, may take the place of the Umiting noun.
112. A noun is limited by a prepositional phrase : that is, by
a noun whose relation to it is defined by a preposition : as, ber
©(^litffel 3U ©amletS 33etraQen the key to Hamlefs behavior.
This construction is especially frequent with verbal derivatives
retaining something of the verbal force: thus, ^rgiejung gur
Sreifteit education to freedom, bie ^offnung auf eine ^inigung tnit
bem ^aifer the Iwping for an understanding with the emperor.
In other cases, the prepositional phrase is virtually the predi-
cate (3186) of an adjective clause: as, ber SJiann im Often the
man [wlio was or lived] in the East.
EQUIVALENTS OF THE NOUN.
113. 1. Other parts of speech are habitually or occasionally
used as substantives, and may be substituted for the noun in a
part or all of its constructions. These are
a. The substantive pronouns and numerals : as, t(^ I, birf)
thee, fie she, her, they, them, mx who, fe(f)g ber 9)^dnner six of the
men.
116] EQUIVALENTS OF THE NOUN. 45
b. Infinitives of verbs (which are properly verbal nouns): see
339 etc.
c. Adjectives (including pronominal and numeral adjectives
and participles) are often converted into nouns (see 129).
2. Any word or phrase, viewed in itself, as concrete rep-
resentative of what it signifies, may be used as a neuter sub-
stantive : thus, fein eigen 3c^ his own "I", ol^ne SOSenn ober ^ber
without "if" or "hut", jebeg Siir unb SBlber every pro and con,
3. A substantive clause, containing a verb and its subject,
and introduced generally by ba§ that, oB whether, or a compound
relative word, takes the place of a noun in some constructions
(see 436).
For a fuller definition of the relations and constructions in
which the various equivalents of the noun may be used, see the
several parts of speech concerned.
-iS
ADJECTIVES.
The Adjective, in German, is declined only
wli6n used attributively or substantively.
/il6/^4' The attributive adjective always precedes
rhe noun Vhich it qualifies ; it is varied for number and
case, and (in the singular only) for gender, and agrees
in all these particulars with its noun.
But the noun to which the adjective relates is often omitted:
the latter, in such case, has the same form as if followed by the
noun: as, er T^at tDei^e Ociufer, unb mx l^aben Braune lie has white
houses, and we have brown, geben ©ie mir stDcierIci %n6:), rot^e^
[rote§] unb f d) tt) a r 5 e § give me two kinds of cloth, red and black.
2,-^ov the adjective used as a substantive, see below, 129.
\ 116) The adjective remains uninflected when used
predicatively, appositively, or adverbially.
1. A predicate adjective (316) is one which is by means of a
verb made to belong to and qualify a noun (or pronoun, etc.).
Its uses may be classified as — a. simple predicate, after
verbs that signify being, becoming, continuing, seeming, and the
like : as, fein ^an^ Wax jd)on unb m\^, w'xxh aha je^t alt, unb fiel)t
l^dfjlid) an§ his liouse was handsome and white, but is now
growing old, and looks ugly ; — b. adverbial predicate, divid-
46 ADJECTIVES. [116-
ing its qualifying force between the noun and the verb : as, ba§
C)au§ [te^^t feft^^/te Iwuse stands firm, tobt [tot] unb ftarr liegt bie
SBiifte l^ingeftredft the steppe lies stretched out dead and stiff; — c.
objective or factitive predicate, expressing a condition
effected in or ascribed to an object by the action of a transitive
verb : as, ba§ mad)t mid^ traurig that makes me sad, ]\^ fialh tobt
ftot] lac^en to laugh one's self half to death, er Baut ha^ §au§ ftoc^
he builds the house high, ic^ mli meine 5lugen off en bel^alten I will
keep my eyes open, bie lang^ ic^ t)erGeffen geglaubt which I had long
believed forgotten — whence, of course, also as simple predicate in
the corresponding passive expression: as, ha^ 't)au§ toirb IjO^
Qebaut the house is built high.
2. The appositive adjective follows the noun : as, tt)ir tt)aren
glDei ^inber, flein unb fro!) we were two childj-en small aiid merry,
2Borte fii^ mie DJionblid^t words sweet as moonlight.
3. For the adjective used as adverb, see below, 130.
4. The uses of the adjective in apposition, as predicate, and as adverb,
pass into one another by insensible gradations, and the same word
often admits of more than one understanding. The appositive adjective
is distinguished from the attributive rather formally than logically, and
sometimes, in poetry, an adjective really attributive in meaning is
treated as appositive : as, bei etnem SSirt^e [Sirte] tvunberntilb with a
host wondrous kind; einen 53Iicf sum ^imtnel ^q6) a look to Heaven high.
The attributive adjective was formerly permitted after the noun as well
as before, and was declined in that position ; as was also the adjective
used predicatively.
^/ll7, A few adjectives are always used predicatively,
and are therefore never declined ; others are used only
attributively, and are therefore always declined.
a. Of the first class, some of the most common are Bereit
ready, fetnb hostile, funb known, c^mahx aware, eingeben! mindful,
tfteil^aft [teilftaft] participating, nii^ useful.
b. To the second class belong many adjectives expressing,
formal relations — viz., certain pronominal adjectives, as jener
yon, jeber every, meinig mine, felbig self-same; some adjectives of
number, time, and place, as gtt)ett second, '^eutig of to-day, bortig
there situated, tdglirf) daily, Ci\\\'CiX[<^X\&^ in the first place; and, in
general, adjectives of material in en, ern, for which prepositional
phrases are usually substituted in predicate construction.
120] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 47
DECLENSION OP THE ADJECTIVE.
118..^ Each adjective, in its attributive use, is subject
to two different modes of declension, according as it is
or is not preceded by certain limiting words. These
we shall call the fiest and second, or stkong and weak,
declensions (see 132).
(ll9./ 1. The endings of the fiest or steong declen-
sion are the same with those of the definite article, al-
ready given (63).
Excepting that the nom. and ace. sing, neuter have e§ in-
stead of a§, and the nom. and ace. plural and fem. singular
have c instead of ie : that is, the final and characteristic letter
is the same, but differently preceded.
2. The second or weak declension has only two
endings, e and cu : e belongs to the nominative singular
of all genders, and hence also (see 72.2a), to the ac-
cusative of the feminine and neuter; en is found in all
the other cases. Thus
Adjective Endings of Declension.
First (strong) Declension. Second (weak) Declension.
Singular. Plural.
m. f. n. m.f. n.
^e -e :=e ==eu
-en =en ^cn ^en
=:en ^en -en ^en
-en ^e =e ^tn
3. It will be noticed that the first declension has more than
twice as many distinct endings as the second, and that it there-
fore makes a correspondingly superior, though a far from
conapl^e, distinction of genders and cases.
( 120. \l. The endings as given are appended through-
out to the stem of the adjective, or to the adjective in
its simple predicative form.
Thus, from gut good are formed, in the first declension, Quter,
Qute, oute§, fiutem, gutenj in the second, gutc, guten.
Singular.
Plural.
m.
f. n.
m. t. n.
N.
^er
=:e ^c§
=e
G.
:=e§
:=er ^c^
^er
D.
=^em
-er :=em
==en
A.
=en
=e ==e§
-e
48 ADJECTIVES. [120-
2. But adjectives ending in e reject this e in every case be-
fore taking the en^ding (or, what is the same thing, reject the c
of every ending).
Thus, from trdge lazy come trdQer, trage, trageg, tragem, Iragen.
3. Adjectives ending in the unaccented terminational syl-
lables el, en, er, also usually reject the e either of those syllables
or of the declensional ending.
Thus, from ebel noble come ebler, eble, eble§, and generally
eblem and eblen, less often ebelm, ebein ; from l^eiler cheerful come
usually l^eitrer, l^eitre, 5^itre§, and :^eilerm and l)ettern, or l^eitrem
and ^eitren; from eben even come ebner, ebne, ebne§, ebtiem,
ebnen. The full forms of these words, however — as ebener, l^eite*
rer, and, less often, ebele^ — are also in good use, especially in a
more stately or solemn style.
4. §DC^ high loses its c when declined: thus, ^ol^er, fto^e,
6Qi>£|, etc.
/ 121. \ 1. The adjective takes the more distinctive
endings of the first declension, unless preceded by a
pronominal limiting word (i. e. an article, pronoun, or
pronominal adjective: see 123) which itself has those
endings.
Thus, as we say ber 5Jlann the man, so also guter Wann good
man, but ber Qute 3JJann the good man; as bie grauen the women,
so gute Srauen, and gute fc^one grauen, but bie guten fd^onen
Srauen the good handsome wanien; as bem ^inbe to the child, so
fiutem ^tnbe, and gutem, frf)onem, artigem ^inbe, but bem guten,
jc^onen, artigen ^inbe to the good, handsome, well-behaved child.
2. Or, in other words, a pronominal limiting word
before the adjective, if it have itself the more dis-
tinctive adjective ending characteristic of the case and
gender of the qualified noun, takes that ending away
from the adjective, reducing the latter from the first to
the second declension : the distinctive ending is not re-
peated upon both words.
Note that certain cases — the ace. sing, masculine, the nom.
and ace. sing, feminine, and the dat. plural — have the same
ending in the one declension as in the other, and are therefore
not altered, whatever the situation in which the adjective is
placed.
122] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 49
^^ Apparently by an irregular extension of this tendency to
avoid the unnecessary repetition of a distinctive ending, a gen.
sing. mascuUne or neuter ending in § takes before it usually
the second form of the adjective (in en), instead of the first (in
e§).
Thus, fallen SSafferS of coU water, frozen Tlni^t^ [mum] with
joyous spirit, (jro^en %\)n\^ [Xeil§] in great part, and so on, are
much more common than !alte§ 2Baffer§, ]xo^t% 2Jlutl)eg [2)Zute§]
etc., although the latter are not incorrect.
C 12^. Examples :—
1. Complete decj^nsion of an adjective, gut good, in both
forms.
^lEST Declension.
m.
N. guter
G. gute^
D. gutem
A. guten
Singular,
f.
gute
guter
guter
gute
Plural.
m. f . n.
gute
guter
guteit
gute
Second Declension.
Singular.
N. ber gute
G. be§ guten
D. bem guten
A. htn guten
bie gute ha^ gute
ber guten be§ guten
ber guten bem guten
bie gute ha^ gute
Plural.
m. f. n.
bie guten
ber guten
ben guten
bie guten
2. Declension of noun and accompanying adjective: rotifer
[roter] 2Bein red wine, gro^e 3reube great joy, fd^lei^teg ^elb had
money.
First Declension.
Second Declension.
Singular,
m.
N. rotter [roter] 3Sein
G. rot^eS [roteg] or rot{)en Seined
D. rot^em [rotem] SSeine
A. rotfjen [roten] StSein
ber rot^e [rote] SSein
be§ rotI)en [roten] 2Beine§
bem rotfien [roten] ^eine
ben rottjen [roten] SSein
50 ADJECTIVES. [12a-
Bingidar, .
N. groge S^eubc bte groge Sreitbc
G. groBer greube ber groBen greube
D. grower greube ber gro^en greube
A. gro^e greube bie gro^e greube
N. f^tec^teg ^etb ha^ fd^Ied^te ©etb
a fc^Ie^teg or 4eu ©elbe§ be§ fc^Iec^teu @etbe0
D. fc^Iec^tem (S^elbe bent fd^lecl^ten ©elbe
A. fc^lec^teg ®elb bag fc^tec^te ®elb
Flural
m. f. n. m. f. n.
N. rot^e [rote] SSeine 2C. bte rotten [roten] SSetne 2C.
G. grower greuben 2C. ber gro^eu greuben 2C.
D. f(^led)ten ©elbern :c. ben fc^Iedjten (^elbern 2C.
A. gro^e greuben 2C. bie gro^en greuben jc.
123. The words which, when placed before an adjec-
tive, take away its distinctive ending, or reduce it from
the first to the second declension, are —
1. The two articles, ber and ein, with fetn (195.2), the negative
of the latter.
2. The possessive adjectives, mein, bein, fein, unfer, euer, il^r
(157 etc.).
3. The demonstrative, interrogative, and relative pronominal
adjectives ber, bie§ and Jen (163), and ml<i) (174).
4. The indefinite pronolomal adjectives and numeral adjectives
ieb, iegli(5^, foli^, mand), anber, etntg, etli(^, afl, t)iel, trenig, me^r,
me^irer (170, 189-194).
But )o\^ after ein is treated as a simple adjective, and does
not affect a following adjective : thus, ein fold^er guter 5!Jlann.
5. A few proper adjectives: namely, t)erjc?^tebene pi. sundry
(nearly equivalent with einige and me^rere), and folgenb, eriDd^nt,
obig, and their like, used idiomatically without the article (66.6)
to indicate things which have been specified or are to be speci-
fied.
124. 1. Since, however, a part of these words —
namely, ein, fein, and the possessive adjectives — lack the
125] DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 51
distinctive ending in three of their forms, the nominative
singular masculine and the nominative and accusative
singular neuter, the adjective following those cases
retains the ending.
Thus, as we say guter DJlann, Qute^ ^inb, so also em Quter ^ann,
ein Qute§ ^inb (as opposed to bcr Quk Tlann, ba§ gute ^inb), be-
cause there is nothing about the ein which should render the
full ending upon the adjective unnecessary.
2. In this way arises what is sometimes reckoned as
a " third " or " mixed " declension, composed of three
forms taken from the first declension, and the rest from
the second. For example, mein guter 7ny good is declined
Singular, Plural.
m. f. n. m. f. n.
N. mein guter meinc gute mein gute^ meine guten
G. meine§ guten meiner guten melne§ guten meiner guten
D. meinem guten meiner guten meinem guten meinen guten
A. meinen guten meine gute mein gute§ meine guten
There is neither propriety nor advantage in treating this as a
separate declension. For each gender and case, there are two
forms of the adjective, and only two, and the learner should be
taught to distinguish between them, and to note, in every case,
the reason of their respective use — which reason is the same in
the " mixed " declension as elsewhere.
3. In like manner, when mand), n)el(^, and fold) are used with-
out an ending of declension (see 170, 174, 191), the succeeding
adjective takes the full ending of the first declension.
Thus, mcM) reic^er §inimel what a rich sky, but me((^er reicl)e
C)immel; mand) Bunte 33lumen, but manege bunten 33Iumen many
variegated flowers.
4. The same is true after all, Dtel, mentg, and me'^r, when they
are undeclined : thus, t)iel gute§ Dbft much good fruit, me^r off ene
SOBogen mxyre open carriages.
/^125. 1. The adjective follows the first declension not only
when it has no other limiting word, or only another adjective,
before it, but also when preceded by an indeclinable word, such
as ettt)a§, genug, allerlei, and the numerals.
2. After the personal pronouns (which do not take the endings
of adjective declension), the adjective ought, by analogy, to be
of the first declension ; and this is not absolutely forbidden ; but
52 ' ADJECTITES. [125-
in common usage the adjective takes the distinctive endings
only in the nominative singular (with the accusative neuter), and
follows in the other cases the second declension. — That is to
say, the adjective after a personal pronoun is declined as after
ein, or by the "mixed" declension (124.2).
Thus, id) armer Xl^ox I poor fool, bu IkU^ lluib thou dear child;
but tDir armen 5:i&oren we poor fools, i^r fii^en Sieber ye sweet songs.
126. 1. The ending e§ of the nom. and ace. neuter in the first
declension is sometimes dropped : this omission is especially
frequent in poetry.
Thus, fd)5n ^tikx firie weather, ^ al\ 6) (Btlh false money, ein
anber geft a different festival, ber 35ol!er ^eilig 9te^t the sacred
law of nations.
2. In old style German, and in poetry, the ending is sometimes
dropped in other cases also : thus, licb SJJutter dear mother, Ueb
^nabe dear boy.
3. Adjectives used as collective nouns are uninflected in such
combinations as mit ^ro^ unb ^lein with great and small, bei ^Ht
unb Sung among old and young.
4. Certain adjectives are in all constructions indeclinable ;
thus,^ a. those ending in lei (415.11) and those in er from nouns
of places (415.5) ; b. lauter mere, mtfjx more, mniQU less; c. certain
foreign names of color (properly nouns) as, rofa rose, lila lilac.
127. After a part of the pronominal adjectives mentioned
above, 123.4, it is allowable, and even usual, to use the ending
of the first declension instead of the second in the nom. and ace.
plural.
Thus, einige Qto^e ^aften sundry big boxes, mandjt QlndU^t
^blkx many fortunate races, me^rere lange (Stra^en several long
streets.
128. 1. When two or more adjectives precede and qualify
the same noun, unless the first be one of those mentioned in
123, all regularly and usually take the same ending.
2. Rarely, however, when the following adjective stands in a
closer relation to the substantive, as forming with it a kind of
compound idea, to which the preceding adjective is then added
as a more adventitious determinative, the second is allowed to
be of the second declension, though the first is of the first ; but
only in the genitive and dative cases.
Thus, l^ofte f(^atttge 33dume high shady trees, mit frobem leti^tem
©inn with light joyous mind, guter alter foftbarer SBein good old
120] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 53
costly wine ;— hut tion f(^onem tollmen [rolen] Sluc^c of handsome
red cloth, frif(^erI}o(Idnbtf(^en .t)dnnGe of fresh Dutch herrings, mit
etgnem inneren DrganiSmu^ ivlth peculiar internal organization.
3. Occasionally, what is more properly an adjective qualifying
the noun is treated in German as an adverb limiting a following
adjective before the noun, and so (130) is left undeclined : thus,
bie SBoIfen, bie forrnlo^ graucn 2od)ter ber 2uft the clouds, the gray
shapeless daughters of the air, bie unGlucfjelig h'aurige 53eGcgnim(i
the unhappy sad meeting, ber uralt fromtnen ©itte of the ancient
pious custom.
4. So also, of two adjectives connected by unb and, the former
is occasionally left without an ending : thus, ein unglaublid) reid^
unb Ueblid)er 9J^unb an incredibly rich and lovely mouth.
[Exercise 6. Adjectives of First Declension.]
[Exercise 7. Adjectives of Second Declension.]
The Adjective used as Substantive.
In German, as in other languages, adjectives are
rerj often used as substantives, either with or without
an article or other determining word.
2) When so used, the adjective is written with a
capital letter, like any other substantive ; but it retains
its proper declension as an adjective, taking the endings
of the first or of the second declension according to the
rules already given.
3. An adjective used as a substantive in the masculine or
feminine gender usually denotes a person; in the neuter
(singular only), a concrete abstract — a thing which, or that in
general which, possesses the quality designated by the ad-
jective.
Thus, ber ®utc rdumt ben $Iafe bem 33cjcn the good (man) gives
vUwe to the ivicked, ba^ l^ie unb ia ein ©liidlid^er QetDefen that here
and there has been one happy person, eineSc^one a beaidy, mcine
©eliebte my beloved, 3^re 9flc(i)te your right hand,—\vo ha§ ©trenae
mit bem S^i'ten, mo ©tarfeg fid) unb 5DliIbe§ paarten where the hard
has united with the tender, where what is strong and ivhat is gentle
Imve combined, burc^ 0einere§ gum ©ro^ern mic^ geiDO^nen ac-
custom me by the less to the greater.
4. Some adjectives are so constantly used in this way as to
have quite acquired the character of substantives, From these
64 ADJECTIVES. [129-
are to be distinguished certain neuters derived from adjectives
without a suffix, and declined as nouns of the first declension :
as, @ut property, 9te(^t right, ^ot^ [9iot] red, ^eutfd) German
(language).
5. After etlt)a§ something, tr)a§ what, something, ni(^t§ nothing,
an adjective is treated neither as attributive nor as appositive,
but as an adjective used as substantive, in apposition : it is
therefore of the first declension, and (regularly and usually)
written with a capital initial.
Thus, e§ mu^ no(^ ettr)a§ @ro^ere§,no(f)etn)a§ Q^xxVx^txt^
fommen there must he coming something more that is greater and
more splendid, tt)a§ id) ©raufameg erlitt wlutt that was dread-
ful I endured, e§ ift nid)t§ ^i e u e § it is nothing new, t)on ettr)a§
5lnbercm of something else.
6. There is no strict and definite limit between the adjective
belonging to a noun understood and the adjective used as a
noun, and many cases admit of interpretation as either the one
or the other.
The Adjective used as Adverb,
ly adjective, in German, may be used in its predica-
tive or iininflected form as an adverb.
Thus, ein ganseg ^avi§ a whole hx)me, but ein g a n a fc^oncg ^a\i§
a wholly beautiful house, and ein flans fd}on gebaute§ |)au§
a quite heautifuUy built house, er |(^reibt o u t he writes well, er
Ia(^te no^ t)tel bummer he laughed ijet much more foolishly.
See further 363; and, for the adjective with adverbial form,
128.3.
[Exercise 8. Adjectives as Substantives and Adverbs.]
131. Participles as Adjectives. — Participles, being verbal ad-
jectives, are treated in nearly all respects as adjectives — as
regards their various use, their mode of declension, and their
comparison. See further 349 etc.
132. The double declension of the adjective is in some respects
analogous with the two-fold mode of declension of nouns, and is often,
like the latter, called "strong" and "weak" declension. The second
or "weak" declension of adjectives, like that of nouns, is made upon
the model of a theme ending in n. But the other shares in the pecu-
liarities of the old pronominal inflection ; being originally formed, it is
assumed, by the composition of a declined pronoun (long since lost in
separate use) with the adjective theme. The principle on which the
136] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIYES. 55
distinction in the use of the two is now based - namely, the economical
avoidance of unnecessary explicitness — is of comparatively recent intro-
duction. The first declension was formerly used when the logical
emphasis rested on the attribute ; the second, when it rested on the
person or thing to which the attribute related ; the "strong" adjective
qualified an indefinite or abstract object ; the **weak," one definite or
individualized.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
133. Although the subject of comparison, or formation of
derivative adjectives of the comparative and superlative
degrees, comes more properly under the head of derivation or
word-formation, it will be, for the sake of practical convenience,
treated here.
134. The German adjective, like the English, is sub-
ject to variation by termination in order to express
degree of quality indicated ; a comparative and a super-
lative degree are thus formed from the simple adjective,
which, with reference to them, is called positive.
135. 1. The endings forming the comparative and
superlative are the same as in English — namely, er and
eft. But
2. Adjectives ending in c add only r for the comparative;
and those in el, en, er usually (before the endings of declension,
always) reject the e of those terminations before er.
3. Except after a sibilant letter (3, §, ^, jd)), and a b or t usu-
ally (especially when preceded by another consonant: and
excepting the nb of the present participle), the e of the super-
lative ending eft is regularly omitted, and the ending reduced
to simple ft. After a vowel, except e, the e may be either omit-
ted or retained.
136. Monosyllabic adjectives whose vowel is a, 0, or
U (not an) more usually modify those vowels in the
comparative and superlative : but there are many (about
fifty, including several which may follow either method)
that leave the vowel unchanged.
56
ADJECTIVES.
[136-
These adjectives are :
baitgt, anxious taljl, bald fcinft, gentle
hax\d), harsh !arg, miserly fatt, sated
hlant, shining !Iart, clear tc^taff, relaxed
6Ia^t, pale tnapp, close \d)lani, slender
blo^, bare la^m, lame ff^^offf rough
bratt, brave la%, weary ftarr, stiff
Bunt, ^ay ^^^*' ^^^ ^**'^^' ^^^^
bumpf, dull morfc^, ro«eri ftraff, fense
\alil, fallow mdt, naked ftumm, c?um6
falb, *• na^t, ioe< ftumpf, obtuse
\a\\(i), false p\att,Jki,t toK, mad!
\iad), flat ^Jtump, blunt r)oU,full
fro^, happy y:ci\^, q^^ck UJa^r, /rue
frommt,piows roi), rowgf/i tt)unb, wounded
gtattt, smoo<^ i^«ni>/ ^^wnd gflfjmt, tame
\)0^l, hollow fac^t, sq/i( gartt, tender
j^olb, gracious
Adjectives marked with a f in the list sometimes modify the vowel in
comparison, but the unmodified form is in better usage.
137. The formation of comparatives and superlatives by the
endings er and eft is not, as in English, hmited to monosyllabic
adjectives. But superlatives of harsh combination are avoided ;
nor are adjectives compared which (see 11 7^) are used only
predicatively, and are incapable of declension.
Of course, as in English, some adjectives are by their sig-
nification excluded from comparison: e. g., gang entire, tobt
dead, trben earthen.
138. Examples : —
Positwe.
Comparative.
Superlative.
\^m, beautiful
f(^oner
ftf)onft
Ifieife, hot
^ei^er
l^ei^eft
Irdge, la^y
trager
trdgeft
fret, free
freier
freift, freieft
alt, old
alter
alteft
fromm, pix)us
frfimmer
frommft
furg, short
fiirger
fiirgeft
froi joyous
fro!)er
fro^ieft
bunfel, dark
bunfler
bunfelft
tnagcr, thin
magrer, magerer
magerft
offen, open
offner, offener
offenft
bemorfen, abandoned
bertDorfener
bertDorfenft
Bebeutenb, significant
Bebeutenber
Bebeutenbft
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 67
139. Irregular and Defective Comparison.
1. A few adjectives are irregular in the comparative, or in
the superlative, or in both : namely —
Gut, good Befler beft
t)lel, mwih mel^r meifl
1^0^, Ugh l^ol^er pd^ft
nal^, nigh na!)er nd(i)]t
gro^, great grbfeer 9ro|t (rarely gro^cft)
2. A few are defective, lacking a positive :
little tninber minbeft
mid mittler mittelft
especially, a class derived from prepositions or adverbs :
[in, in] inner innerft
[au§, out] au^er du^erft
[ober, oben, above] oBer oBerft
[unter, unten, hehw] unter unterft
[t)or, in /ronq t)orbcr Dorberft
[l^inter, ^inten, behind] l^inler l^interft
3. Two lack (as adjectives) both positive and comparative :
Me, ere] [e^er, sooner] ti\\, first
Me le^t, lajst
From these two superlatives are irregularly formed new
comparatives, erfler /ormer and letter latter. So also, from the
comparative me^r more, the double comparative me'^rer (used
almost only in the plural me^rere several) is made.
140. Declension of Comparatives and Superlatives.
1. In general, comparatives and superlatives are
subject to the same rules of declension as their
positives, the simple adjectives.
That is to say, they are uninflected when used in apposition,
as predicate, or as adverb (with exceptions noted just below),
and declined when used attributively or Substantively ; and
they have the same double declension as simple adjectives,
determined by the same circumstances. The comparative
presents no irregularities, but—
2. a. The superlative does not often occur without an article
or other limiting word before it, and is therefore more usually
of the second declension.
It occurs of the first declension especially in the vocative,
after a limiting genitive, and in phrases which omit the article :
58 ADJECTIVES. [140-
thus, ItcBfter 35rubcr dearest brother, auf beg 9Jleere§ tiefunterftem
^runbe on the sea's very lowest bottom, in. Joc^fter (Jile in extreme
(higfwst) haste, meiner 2Bunf(i^e tuarmfter, innigfler the warmest, most
heartfelt of my wishes.
b. "What is of much more importance, the superlative is not,
Uke the positive and comparative, used predicatively in its unin-
flected form ; but for this is substituted an adverbial expression,
formed with the preposition an and the definite article bem (dat.
sing, neuter), contracted into am.
Thus, er ift mir am 1 1 e b ft e n he is dearest to me, m ©ommer
finb bie Sage ju fur 3; im C>erbfte, no(^ fiirger; aber am fur =
S e ft c n tm SBinter in summer the days are too short ; in autumn
yet shorter ; but shortest in winter.
This expression means literally * at the dearest,' ' at the short-
est,' and so on, but is employed as general predicate in many
cases where we could not substitute such a phrase for it. Its
sphere of use borders close upon that of the superlative with
preceding article, agreeing with a noun understood ; and it is
often inaccurately used in place of the latter : e. g., er ift am
flei^igften unter alien ©d^iilern he is most diligent of all the scholars,
for er ift ber flei^igfte 2c. lie is the most diligent, etc. Thus, we
ought to say, biefer ©turm mar geftern am fteftigften this storm was
most violent yesterday, but ber fleftrige ©turm mar ber l^eftigfte the
storm of yesterday was the most violent (e. g., of the year).
Only aUerliebft is used directly as predicate : ha^ mar aHerliebft
that was charming.
c. For the superlative as adverb are also generally substi-
tuted adverbial phrases formed with am, auf§, and gum (see
363.2).
[■ 141. Comparison with Adverbs.
1. Adjectives not admitting of comparison in the usual man-
ner, by er and eft (137), may be compared, as in English, with
help of the adverbs mz^x more and am meiften most.
Thus, er ift mir meftr feinb, alg i^ iftm lie is nmre unfriendly to
me than I to him, er mar mir am meiften niife lie was most useful
to me.
2. When, of two qualities belonging to the same object, one is
declared to be in excess of the other, the comparison is usually
and more properly made with mel^r.
Thus, er mar mel^r ta|)fer al§ flug he was more bold than prudent ;
but, ma'^rer, al§ tlug unb fromm more true than prudent and
dutiful (Goethe).
145] COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 59
142. Additional Bemarks.
1. The superlative has, as in other languages, a twofold mean-
ing and use: one implying direct comparison and eminence
above others (superlative relative) ; the other, general eminence,
or possession of the designated quality in a high degree (super-
lative absolute).
Thus, f(^onfte 33Iumen ifnost beautiful (exceedingly beautiful)
flowers, bie fi^onften 33Iumen the most beautiful flowers (of all those
had in view).
This distinction appears especially in adverbial superlatives :
see 363.2c.
2. Less often, the comparative is used absolutely, without
direct comparison implied: thus, cine Idngere Sfiebe a lengthy
speech, I)ol}ere (5d)ulen high schools.
3. To a superlative is often prefixed aHer, in order further to
intensify its meaning: thus, ber aUerfd^bnfte the rnost beautiful
of all.
^Iler is the gen. pi. of all all, and so is used in its hteral sense,
only combined with the adjective, and often in connections where
its introduction as an independent adjunct of the adjective would
be impossible.
[Exercise 9. Comparative and Superlative of Adjectives.]
MODIFYING ADJUNCTS OF THE ADJECTIVE.
143. The adjective, in all its uses as adjective and as substan-
tive (for its adverbial use, see under Adverbs, 363), is hable to
be hmited by modifying adjuncts of various kinds.
144. 1. The customary adjunct of an adjective is an adverb :
as, ]"e^r gut very good, l^erglii^ fro^ heartily glad.
2. An adjective may be limited by an adverbial clause, con-
taining a verb and its subject, and introduced by a conjunction
(see 438.36).
Thus, er ift fo gut, ba§ \^ iftn nur licBen !ann he is so good, that
lean not but love him, frdnfer al§ man glaulite sicker than was
supposed.
An adverbial clause can hardly qualify an adjective, except as
a specification of degree, where a comparison is made.
145. An adjective is often limited by a noun (or pronoun)
dependent on it.
1. By a noun in the genitive case : thus, lebtg aHer ^f(i(^t free
from all obligation, x^x^x ^tnk gemi^ sure of its prey: see 817.
60 PRONOUNS. [14:5-
2. By a noun in the dative case : thus, t'^m ctQCn peculiar to
Mm, glei(^ einer Seid^e like a corpse: see 223.
3. By a noun in the accusative case, but only very rarely, and
in predicative construction : thus, id^ bin e§ miibe I am tired of it :
see 229.
4. By an infinitive, with its sign gu to: thus, leic^t gu t)erf(^affen
easy to procure : see 344.
146. An adjective is limited by a prepositional phrase : that
is, by a noun whose relation to it is defined by a preposition :
thus, t)om ©(^aumc rein free from scum, anQcnel^m t)on (55eftalt
agreeable in figure.
147. 1. An adverbial adjunct to an adjective always pre-
cedes it — except the adverb genug erumgh.
2. An adjective used attributively must be preceded by all its
modifying adjuncts : thus, aller t)on bem beut]d)en 9f{ei(^c abl^dngi=
gen, ober bagu gel^briQen SBolferftdmme of all tJw rax^es dependent on
the German empire, or belonging to it.
3. Adjectives used in the predicate or in apposition may take
the limiting noun, with or without a preposition, either before
or after them : but the adjective more usually follows ; and
necessarily, if the limiting word be a pronoun without a prep-
osition.
148. Participles, as verbal adjectives, share in most of the
constructions of the adjective ; see 349 etc.
PRONOUNS.
149. In German, as in English, substantive pronouns and
pronominal adjectives (or adjective pronouns) are for the most
part not distinguished from one another (as they are distin-
guished in French) by different forms, but the same word is
used, according to circumstances, with either value. It will be
convenient, therefore, to treat both classes together, explaining
under each word its own proper use or uses.
L15CL The principal classes of pronouns are —
1. The personal;
2. The possessive ;
3. The demonstrative (including the determinative) ;
4. The interrogative ;
152]
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
61
5. The relative (all of which are also either de-
monstrative or interrogative) ;
6. The indefinite, with the indefinite numerals.
The determinative, indefinite, and numeral pronouns are in
part of ambiguous character, being intermediate classes through
which the pronouns shade off into ordinary adjectives and
numerals.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
161.
r
The personal pronouns are
First Peeson.
Singular, ' Plural.
1
N.
^ ^
^
t^ir
we
G.
meiner, mein
of me
unfer
of us
D.
mtr
to me
un^ K-^vW to us
A-
ntid^^
me
un0
us
Second Person.
N.
bu
thou
xf)X
ye
G.
beiner, bein
of thee
euer
of you
D.
bir
to thee
euc^
to you
A.
bic^-
thee
tu6)
you
\
Third Person,
Singular,
masc.
fern.
neut.
N.
er
he
fie
she
e§
it
X^.
feiner, fetn of him
t^rer
of her feiner, fein of it
D.
if)m
to him
if)r
to her it)m
to a
A.
i()n
him
fie
Plural
m. f. n.
her
e§
it
/
N. fie they
G. i^rer of them
D. i^nen , to them
A. fie them
Si(^, the special reflexive of the third person (see 155.3), is
also a member of this class, a personal pronoun.
152. 1. 5[Rein, bein, jein are older forms of the gen. singular,
now antiquated, but still met with in certain phrases ; i()r, for
62 PEONOXTNS. [152-
t^rer, does not occur ^, unferer, for unfer, and curcr, for euer, are
not unknown, but rare.
Examples are : il)r Snftnimente f^ottet mein ye instruments mock
me, n)a§ bebarf man fein what do they require of him? ntd)t au^
SSerac^tutiQ euer rmt out of contempt of you.
2. These genitives in composition with l^alBen, tDegen, and
tDiHen add a wholly anomalous et ; and unfer and euer, in like
manner, add a t: thus, meinetl^arben, beinettt)eQen, urn feinettDillen,
unferttDegen, euert!&alben, etc.
3. Genitives of the personal pronouns are everywhere of rare
occurrence, and only as objects of verbs (219) and adjectives
(217). For the genitive Umiting a noun is substituted a posses-
sive adjective (158.2).
il53v Use of the Personal Pronouns in address.
1. In German, as in English, the pronoun of the second pers.
singular, bu thou, is no longer used in address, in the ordinary
intercourse of Ufe.
It is retained (as in English) in the language of worship and
of poetry : and further, in that of familiarity— the familiarity of
intimacy, between equals, as between husband and wife, near
relations, or particular friends, also among children; — the
familiarity toward inferior age and - otation, as on the part of
any one toward young children, or on the part of teachers or
employers toward youthful pupils or .A^^vesitsf; — and even,
sometimes, the familiarity of insult or comtempt.
2. The pronoun of the second pers. plural — il)r ye etc. — was
at one time generally current in Germany for the singular (like
our you), and is still met with in poetry or narrative: but
modern use authorizes it only in addressing more than one of
such persons as may, singly, be addressed with bu.
3. The singular pronouns of the third person — er he, fie she,
etc. — were also once used in customary address, but soon sank
to the condition of address by an acknowledged "superior to an
Inferior — as by a monarch to a subject, a master to a servant,
and the like — with which value they are still retained, but are
going out of vogue. *
Employed in this way, er and fie and their cases are usually
and properly written with a capital.
4 At present, the pronoun of the third pers. plural
^[ie they — and its possessive, xijx their, are alone
154] PBONOUNS m ADDRESS. 63
allowed, in the sense of you, your, in common life,
in addressing either one person or more than one.
When thus used, they are, for distinction, written with
capital letters, @te, S^nen, Sljr, etc. (but the reflexive
fti^ is not so written).
Thus, id) banfe Sl^nen fiir S^re ©efalliflfeit, bag ©ie fi(^ bie
93Zuf)e QCficben l^aben I thank you for your kindness, in that you
have given yourself the trouble.
The verb with (gie is always in the plural, whether one person
or more be intended. But a following adjective is either
singular or plural, according to the sense : thus, ©ie ungliicf=
Ii(f)er you unhappy man! but ©ie unglucfUd)en you unhappy ones!
The use of @ie in address is quite modem, not having become
generally established till about the middle of the last century.
5. Some authorities write all the pronouns of address with
a capital, even ^u, ^i(^, (Ju(f), etc. ; but this is not to be ap-
proved, except in such documents as letters, where the words
are to reach the person addressed through the eye.
\154} Peculiarities in the use of Pronouns of the third person.
1. As a general rule, the pronoun of the third person,
in the singular, takes the gender of the noun to which
it relates.
Thus, when speaking of a hat (ber Qvi\), we use er and i'^n ; of
a pen (bie Seber), fie; of bread {)ia^ 33rob), e§.
Excepted from this rule are such words as SBeib woman, which
are neuter, thou^ designating female persons ; also diminu-
tives (neuter) of personal appellations, such as 5!Jidbrf)en girl,
f^rdulein young lady, ^ndblein little hoy : a pronoun referring to
one of these often follows the natural gender, instead of the
grammatical. I^inb child is represented by e§ it, as with us.
2. But these pronouns are seldom used in the genitive or
dative for things without life. For the genitive is substituted
the genitive of a demonstrative, ber or berfelBe ; for the dative,
the dative of the same : or, if governed by a preposition, a
combination of that preposition with the adverb 'tio, (or bar)
there.
.Thus, bamit therewith, bat)on thereof, barin therein, barnad^
thereafter, and so on, are used instead of mit i^m or i!^r with it,
etc. ^ar is put instead of ba before a vowel or n.
64 PBONOUNS. [154r-
Similar substitutions of the demonstratives are often made
also in other cases where we employ the personal pronoims :
see below, 171.
3. The neuter accusative c§ is, in like manner, almost never
allowed after a preposition, but is replaced by ba before the
preposition : thus, bafiir, barum, for fiir e§ for it, urn e§ about it.
4. The neuter e§ has certain special uses.
a. It is, as in EngUsh, the indefinite and impersonal subject
of a verb : thus, e§ regnet it rains, e§ tft fein 33ruber it is his brother,
e§ freut m\^, ©ie gu f el^en it rejoices me to see you.
b. In this use, it often answers to our there before a verb : as,
e§ ttjar ein ^ern barin there was a kernel in it, e§ mirb Sf^iemanb
tommcn there will no one come.
c. Yet more often, it serves the purpose of a mere grammat-
ical device for shifting the true subject to a position after the
verb, and is itself untranslatable : as, e§ fperren bie 9flie|en ben
ctnfamen SBeg the giants bar the lonely way, e§ fur(i)te bie (^btter
^a§ 5Jlenf(5^en0ef(!^Ie(5^t let the human race fear the gods.
d. In all these uses, the verb agrees in number with the fol-
lowing noun, the logical subject or the predicate : thus, e§ tDaren
bie alIerfd)onften it was ("or, they were) the very finest ones.
e. (J§ also stands as indefinite object ; also as predicate,
representing another word or phrase already used, and of
which the repetition is avoided (to be rendered, then, by so,
be so, do so, or the like) : thus, \^ felber bin e § ni(i)t me^r
I myself am so [what I was] no longer, al§ i(^ e § no(^ fonnte
when I was still able to do so.
/. Instead of it is I, and the hke, the German reverses the ex-
pression, and says \^ bin e§ I am it, ©ie njoren e§ you were it
(i. e., it was you), etc.
g. (^§, in all situations, is liable to be abbreviated to ^§ : the
apostrophe should in such case always be written, but is some-
times omitted.
166.) Beflexive use of the Personal Pronouns.
XTa. reflexive pronoun is one which represents the same per-
son or thing as the subject of a sentence, but in the relation of
object — namely, as object, direct or indirect, of the verb in the
sentence ; or (less properly) in a prepositional adjunct to that
verb.
155] PEBSONAL PEONOUNS. 66
It is usually to be rendered by a personal pronoun with the
word self added: thus, id) tr)af(^e m\^ I wash myself, \^ f(^mei(^Ic
ttitr I flatter myself \^ fc^one tnetner (or nttc^) I spare myself i^
fto^e fie t)on mir I thrust them from myself (or, from me).
\2^ In the first and second persons, singular and
plural, the reflexive pronoun is the same with the per-
sonal in every case, the latter being used in a reflexive
sense, without any adjunct corresponding to our self
(but compare 5, below).
The same is the case with the genitive of the third person —
as, er fd)ont feiner he spares himself— hut
ir3.)ln the third person, there is a special reflexive
prbnoun, ftc^, which must always be used instead of the
dative or accusative of a personal pronoun, after either
verb or preposition, when the subject of the sentence
is referred to. It has the value of both accusative and
dative, of either number, and of any gender.
Thus, er, fie, e§ tDcifd^t fi(^, fd)mei(^elt jic^ he, she, or it washes or
flatters himself, herself, or itself, fie n)afd)en fic^, fc^meic^eln \i^ they
wash themselves, or flatter themselves, ba§ ift an unb fiir fid) gut
thut is good in and by itself.
4. In German, as in French (there is no corresponding usage
in English), the reflexive pronoun in the plural is not seldom
employed in what is called a "reciprocal" sense, answering to
our one another.
Thus, tt)ir 1;)aikn un§ nte fe^en foUen we ought never to have
seen one another, \\)i "^affet euc^ %ie hate each other, fie (©ie)
geben ft c^ ba§ 3eid)en they (you) give one another the signal.
Instead of the reciprocal reflexive (or, rarely and redundantly,
along with it), the word einanber one another is often employed.
Only the connection and the requirement of the sense can
show in any case whether the pronoun has its directly or its
reciprocally reflexive value.
5. ©elbft (or felBer) self may be added to any reflexive pro-
noun, for greater emphasis ; or, in the plural, to exclude the
reciprocal sense.
It may also be added for emphasis to any pronoun, or noun,
answering to our myself, thyself, itself, etc.
66 PEONOUNS. ' [156-
156. The dative of a personal pronoun is sometimes intro-
duced into a clause expletively, for liveliness of expression : as,
Ia| mtr ^min ben %lkn let the old man in here {for me):
compare 222. III. c.
[Exercise 10. Personal Pronouns.]
POSSESSIYE PKONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
157. The personal pronouns are always substantive ;
their corresponding adjectives are the possessives :
namely
mem, my
unjer, our
bein, thy
euer, your
fein, his, its
xtjX, their
t^r, her
(3i)r, your)
The possessives of the masc. and neut. singular are the same,
{ein. The possessive of the fern, singular and that of the plural
of all genders also agree in form ; and, as the latter (see 153.4:)
is used in the sense of a second person, \tjx has three meanings,
her, tlieir, and your (the last of which is distinguished to the
eye by the capital initial).
158. 1. It will be noticed that the possessives correspond
closely in form with the genitives of the personal pronouns,
being, in fact, the same words in a different condition.
2. The ofQce, also, of the possessive, agrees with that of the
genitive of a noun. The genitive of the pronoun is very seldom
used to limit a noun, but for it is substituted a possessive in the
form of an adjective, qualifying the noun (216.3).
Thus, bie ^Irme be§ 9Jlanne§ the man's arms; but feine ^rme his
arms, not bie ^rme feiner the arms of him. Karely, such cases
occur as 33el^errfrf)un() eurer felbft control of yourself (a verbal
noun imitating the construction of the verb).
(^§^i As regards their declension, possessives are
treated in the same manner as other adjectives.
1. They are used predicatively in their simple or thematic
form.
Thus, ber 33e(i)er tft bein the goblet is thine, bie ^raut jei mein he
the bride mine.
169]
POSSESSIVES.
67
2. When used attributively (their regular and or-
dinary office), they are declined, not like ber tlm, but like
cin a (63). Thus, mcin my is declined—
VI
N. mein
Gr. meineg
D. meinem
A. tneinen
and unfer our —
N. unfer
G. unfereg
D. imferem
A. unferen
Singular,
t.
meine
meiner
tneiner
meine
unfere
unferer
nnferer
nnfere
n.
mein
meine§
meinem
mein
nnfer
nnferel
unferem
unfer
Plural.
m. f. n.
meine
meiner
meinen
meine
unfere
unferer
unferen
unfere
Unfer and eucr follow the same rules as other adjectives (120.3)
respecting the contraction of their endings : thus, we may have
unfere or unfre, unfere^, unfer^, or unfre§, and so on.
3. The possessive is also often used substantively, or with
the value of a pronoun (not qualifying a noun expressed, but
representing one understood) ; in that case, it is declined in full
like an adjective of the first or strong declension: thus,
nominatives meiner, meine, meine§, meine.
For example, ba§ ift nid)t bein ^ed)er; c§ ift mein er that is not
thy goblet; it is mineji. e., my goblet); fein Q'xxn, Vok meineS his
brain, like my own.
4. In the same substantive use, the possessive may be
preceded by the definite article ; and it is then declined hke any
other adjective in like circumstances, or by the second or
weak adjective declension (119.2) : thus, nom. ber, bie, ba§ meine,
gen. bc^, ber, bc§ meinen, etc.
For example, fein 9lid)tcrfhil)l ift nid)t ber meine his judgment-
seat is not mine ; loft mir bag ^^ers, baji id) b a§ eure riiftre set my
heart free, that I may touch yours.
5. Again, for the simple possessive, in its absolute or pro-
nominal use after the definite article, is substituted a derivative
in ig: thus, mcinig, unfrifi, etc. These are never used except
with the article, and therefore always follow the second ad-
jective declension. The nominatives of the whole series are —
68
PBONOTJNS.
[159
m.
bcr meinige
ber beinige
ber feinige
ber i^rige
ber unfrige
ber eurige
ber i'^rige
[ber Sl^rige
Singular,
f.
bic meinige
bie beinige
bie feinige
bie i^rige
bie unfrige
bie eurige
bie il^rige
bie 3t)rige
bag meinige
bag beinige
ha^ feinige
bag i^rigc
ha^ unfrige
bag eurige
bag il^rige
bag 3^rigc
Plural.
m. f. n.
bie meinigen, mine
bie beinigen, thine
bie feinigen, his, its
bie i^rigen, hers
bie unfrigen, ours
bie eurigen, yours
bie il)rigen, theirs
bie S^rigen, yours]
Neither the derivatives in tg, nor the simple possessives pre-
ceded by the article, are ever used attributively, quaUfyiQg a
noun expressed.
SJJein etc., used predicatively, assert o^vIlerslup pure and simple : thus,
ber §ut ift mein the hat belongs to me, and to no one else. Tlnntx, ber
meine, and ber meinige are nearly equivalent expressions, adding to the
idea of property that of particularizing or identifying the thing owned :
thus, er ift meiner etc. it is the one that belongs to me. S)er meinige etc.
are most common in colloquial use ; ber meine etc. are preferred in
higher styles.
160. The absolute possessives preceded by the article (ber
meine, ber meinige, etc.) are sometimes used substantively (like
other adjectives : see 129) : the neuter singular denoting 'what
belongs to one' (his property, his duty, or the hke) ; the plural
* those who belong to one' (as his family, his friends).
Thus, unfere $f(id)t ift, auf ba§ Unfrige gu feften, unb fiir bie
Hnfrigen gu forgen our duty is to attend to our business and take
care of our dependents, er ermunterte bie ©einen he encouraged his
men, gemorbet t)on ben ©einen auf bem ©emen murdered by his
own people on his own ground.
161. The German, like the French, avoids the use of the pos-
sessives in many situations where we employ them : either put-
ting in their stead the definite article only, where the possessor
is sufficiently pointed out by the connection ; or, along with the
article (or even without it), using the dative of the correspond-
ing personal pronoun, where it can be construed as indirect
object of the verb in the sentence (see 222. III. b).
Thus, er fc^iittelte ben ^opf he shook his head, ber grofl bringt
mir burd) afle ^noc^en the frost penetrates through all my bones,
er pel i^r um ben §al§ he fell upon her neck, e§ !am mir in
(Sinn it came into my mind.
164] DEMONSTKATIVES. 69
162. ®cro and ^ftto are old-style expressions, used in cere-
monious address, before titles, etc. : thus, ^^^ro 3}laieftdt your
majesty, ^ero 33efe^le your commands.
Before titles, jeine and feiner are often abbreviated to ©e. and
©r. ; and for cucr, cure, is written ^tt).
DEMONSTEATIYES.
163. The proper demonstratives are bcr this, that,
bie^3 this, that, and jcn yon, that. Their original value is
that of adjectives ; but they are now with equal free-
dom used adjectively, qualifying a noun expressed, and
absolutely, or as pronouns, standing for a noun under-
stood.
3)er is historically the same word with our the, that, and they; bieS is
our this, these, those ; jen is our yon, and may by this correspondence be
conveniently distinguished from jeb (jeber) every (see 190), with which
it is apt to be confounded by learners.
164. 1. ^er when used adjectively is declined like
the article \)tx (63) : being, in fact, the same word, and
distinguished from it only by greater distinctness, of
meaning and of utterance.
Thus, ber Drt ift iibel regiert that place is ill governed, ber einc
6ot bie, bie anberen anbere, ©aben one has these gifts, others have
other.
2. ^cr when used absolutely, or as pronoun, has pecu-
liar forms in a part of its cases — namely, the genitives
singular and plural and the dative plural — where it
adds cii to the adjective forms, at the same time doub-
ling their final §> : thus,
Singular. Plural.
m. t. n. m. f. n.
N. ber bie ha§> bie
G. beffen, (be^) beren, (ber) beffen, (be^) beren, (berer)
D. bem ber bent benen
A. ben bie ha^ bie
The genitives singular be^, ber, be^ are also allowed, but very
rarely used, except the neuter in certain compounds, as be^^
we^en, beS^db (also written be^megen^ be^l^alb).
70 PRONOUNS. [164-
In the genitive plural, berer is used instead of beren when a
limiting addition, usually a relative clause, follows : thus, berer,
bie mi^ lieben of those who hve me, berer t)Dn $ari§ of them of
Paris (^people from Paris).
165. ^te^ and jen are declined as adjectives of the
first declension, or like the definite article (only with c^
instead of a^ in the nom and ace. neuter) ; and without
any difference, whether they are used as adjectives or
as pronouns. Thus,
Singular. Plural.
m. f . n. m. f. n.
N. biefer biefe biefe§, (bieS) biefe
G. biefeg biefer biefe^ biefer
D. biefem biefer -biefem biefen
A. biefen biefe biefe^, (bie§) biefe
The nom. and ace. neuter biefeS is often abbreviated to bie§
(or bie^), especially when the word is used as a pronoun.
«
166. Use of the Demonstratives.
1. liefer is a general demonstrative, answering to both this
and that. If, however, the idea of remoteness in place or time
is at all emphasized, either by the antithesis of this and that, or
in any other way, that must be represented by jener. Often, biefer
and jener are to be rendered the latter (biefer, the one last men-
tioned, the nearer) and the f<yrmer (iener, the one mentioned
earlier, the remoter). ^ie§ and ba§ are also sometimes con-
trasted as this and that.
2. ^er has a great range of meaning, from the faint indefinite-
ness of the article to the determinateness of biefer — depending
mainly on the emphasis with which it is uttered. Special uses
worthy of note are as follows :
a. ®er is the demonstrative employed in such phrases as
unfere $ferbe unb bie ber Sremben our horses and those of the
strangers, ber mil ben ^ellen ^ugen he (the one) with the sharp
eyes.
Karely, berienige (168) is used in the same sense.
h. It takes the place of the pronoun of the third person used
emphatically : thus, b i e mu^ rec^t bumm f ein she (this person)
must he right stupid, ber fiittrc ^rdl)'u mciy he (that one) be food
for CTQW^,
169] DEMONSTBATIVES. fl
3. The neuters singular, bQ§, bie§ (or bie|, biefe^), and (rarely)
iene§, are used, like e§ (154.4), as indefinite subjects of verbs ;
and, if a plural predicate noun follows the verb, the latter agrees
with the noun: thus, ba§ ift mcin 3Sater that is my father, ba§
finb bie Sftcisunflen those are the charms, bie§ ift ber ^ampf ber
^^ferbe unb f^if(i)e this is the combat of horses and fishes. ®q§ is
sometimes used in a half-humorous, half-contemptuous way of
persons, singular or plural: e. g. \)a^ fc^lenbert tt)ie bie ©d^neden
tliose people loiter like snails.
4. Compounds of the adverbs ba and ^ier with prepositions
are very frequently used instead of cases of the demonstratives
with governing prepositions : thus, ):)ami therewith, barin^/iemn,
for mit bem, in bem ; ftiermit herewith, pterin herein, for mit biefem,
in biefem.
5. For the demonstratives as substitutes for the personal
pronoun, see below, 171.
DETEEMINATIYES.
167. Certain pronominal words, connected with the demon-
stratives in derivation or meaning, or in both, are ordinarily
called determinatives.
168. ^erienige. — 1. This is made up of the definite article ber,
and ienig, a derivative from |en yon, that (like meinig from mein,
etc., 159.5). The latter part never occurs without the former,
and they are written together as a single word, although each
is separately declined, the one as the article the other as an
adjective of the second declension. Thus,
Singular. Plural.
m. f. n. m. f. n.
N.
berjenige
bicienige
bngjeuige
bieienigen
G.
begienigen
berienigen
be^jenigen
berienigen
D.
bemjenigen
berjenigen
bemieuigen
benienigen
A.
benienigen
bteienige
ba^ienige
bieienigen
2. ^erienige is used both as adjective and as pronoun, more
often the latter. Its specific ofiice is that of antecedent to a
following relative ; in this ofQce it is interchangeable with the
demonstrative ber, as the latter 's more prosaic and colloquial
substitute : thus, berienige, or berjenige 5J?ann, mclc^er tt)eife ift, ift
gufrieben he (that man) who is wise is contented.
169. ^erfelbe. — 1. This word is composed of the definite ar-
ticle and the adjective fclb. Both its parts are declined, after
the manner of berjenige (168.1).
72 PRONOUNS. [169-
2. ^erfelBc is both adjective and pronoun, and means literally
the same. But it also interchanges with the demonstratives as
substitute for the pronoun of the third person (see 171).
3. For berjelbe are sometimes used berfclbige and felbiger,
which, however, are antiquated expressions, ^er namlic()e is its
equivalent in the full sense of the same.
©elber and felbft (155.5) are indeclinable forms of the same
adjective jelb, always following, appositively, the noun or pro-
noun which they qualify, often at a distance from it. Selbft is
also used adverbially, meaning even, and as substantive in the
phrase t)on felbft of its own accord.
©elb is also, rarely, declined after biefer as after bet. The
genitive of berfelbe is written either be^felben or befjelben: the
former is theoretically preferable (3.1), the latter more usual
(likewise baSfelbe, neuter).
170. ©dIc^. — 1. ©oI(?^ is the English such, and is used, both
as adjective and as pronoun, in nearly the same manner. It is
declined like biefer (165) ; or, when preceded by ein, as any other
adjective would be in the same situation (124).
2. Such a is either fo^ ein, or ein foI(f)er, the adjective being
undeclined when placed before the article. For as, when used
after such with the value of a relative pronoun, the German uses
the relative: thus, foI(i)en, bie i^n fannten to such as knew him.
171. The Demxmstratives and Determinatives as Substitutes.
The pronouns of these classes are often used where we put
the third personal pronoim or its possessive :
1. For the emphatic pronoun of the third person (166.26), and
the antecedent of a relative clause (168.2), as already explained.
2. Where the demonstrative meaning helps avoid an ambi-
guity: as, er ging mit meinem ^Setter unb beffen ©o{)n, or bem
©ol^ne b e § f e I b e n he went with my cousin and his (the latter' s)
son;— or an awkward- repetition : as, er fjai eine ©c^mefter: fennen
©ie btejclbe (for fennen ©ie fie)? he has a sister ; do you know
her?
3. In the obUque cases, where things and not persons are in-
tended : as, [^ bin beffen benotI)iGt [benotigt] I am in need of it
(fetner would mean of him, rather). In like manner, with prepo-
sitions, instead of the adverbial compounds with ba (154.2,3) :
as, id) "i^aU einen (Garten, unb Qtijt oft in bemfelben (or barin)
fi)a3ieren I have a garden, and often go to walk in it.
174] INTEBKOGATIYES. 73
4. The substitution, especially of berfelbe, is often made, in
popular use, in cases where no reason can be assigned, and
where the personal pronoun would be preferable.
[Exercise 11. Possessive and Demonstrative Pronouns.]
INTEEEOGATIVES.
172. The interrogatives are U)er who, tt)a^ what, and
it)ctd)er what, tvhich. 3Ser and lt)a§ are pronouns only;
n)eld)er is primarily adjective, but also frequently used
as pronoun.
173. 1. SBer and tva^ are peculiar in having no plural ;
also, in conveying no idea of gender, but being distin-
guished precisely as our who and what, the one denoting
persons, the other things. They are declined as follows :
N. tDer who tva§ what
G. meffen, (tre^) whose meffen, (tDe§) of what
D. tuem to whom
A. tt)en whom tr»a§ what
2. SSefe as genitive of mx is antiquated and out of use, and as
genitive of tt)a§ is hardly met with except in compounds like
TDe§tt)egen, tDcS^alb (or me^tregen, mefe^alB). 2Ba§ has regularly
no dative ; for both its dative and accusative as governed by
prepositions are substituted compounds of those prepositions
with the adverb tt)0 or iDor where: thus, tDomit wherewith, with
what, tDorin wherein, in what, trofiir wherefore, for what (hke
bamit, ftiermit, etc. : see 154.2, 166.4).
3. Popular colloquial usage sometimes puts tt)a§, both as ac-
cusative and as dative, after prepositions : thus, tnit toa^ with
what, |iir tDa§ for what, and instances of such use are occasion-
ally met with in hterature.
4. 2Be§ is, quite rarely, used adjectively : as, tt) c ^ 8inne§ bcr
§crr fei of what disposition the master is.
174. 1. SSeld^ is declined like btc§ (165), or as an
adjective of the first declension. As an adjective, quali-
fying a noun expressed, it means either what or which;
used absolutely, it is our which.
74 PRONOUNS. [174r-
2. Before etn or an adjective, especially when used in an ex-
clamatory way, tt)el(^ generally loses its declensional endings,
and appears in its undeclined form.
Thus, tt)el(^e§ 33u(^ what (or which) hook, ml^t§ t)Dn biefen
^iic^ern which of these books:— votl^ tiefe§ 6ummen, trelc^ ein l^eller
^on what deep mmimiur, what a clear tone ! tDeld) f (^Ie(i)te Sitten
what bad manners !
175. 2Ba§ with the preposition fiir fm- after it (sometimes
separated from it by intervening words), is used in the sense of
what sort of, what kind of. It is then invariable, and the words
to which it is prefixed have the same construction as if they
stood by themselves.
Thus, n)a§ Iiaft bu fiir einen 5tf(^ Gefangen what sort of a fish
have you caught ? t)on tt)a§ fiir 3^ii9^TT, unb mit n)a§ fiir eitiem 2Ber!-
geuQe, mac^en ©ie ba§ of what kind of stuffs, and with what sort of
an instrument, do you make that ?
176. 1. All the interrogatives are used also as rel-
atives (see 177).
2. 2Ba§ stands often for ettt)a§ something; tt)er, in the sense of
some one, is quite rare ; tt)el(f), as pronoun only, is famiUarly,
but not elegantly, used to signify some.
Thus, nD(^ raa^ mertft [mert] still worth something, \^ mo(^te Xva^
^jrofitiren I would fain profit somewhat, meinte mer aii§ ber ^efell=
fdjaft remarked some one in the company, ^aBen <Bk ^flaumen ?
geben Sie mtr tDclc^e have you plums? give me some.
3. 2Ba§ is used not rarely for um n)a§, or tDorum why? thus,
tt)a§ Birgft bu bein (^efid)t why hidest tJwu thy face? and sometimes
for it)te how: thus, \va^ mein arme§ Q^x^ gittert how my poor heart
trembles!
RELATIVES.
177. The demonstrative pronoun (not adjective :
164.1) ber, and the interrogatives Wqx, Wa^S, IDQ^ fiir, and
treldjer (both adjective and pronoun), are used also as
relatives ; they are declined, as such, in the same man-
ner as when having their more original and proper
value.
178. ®er and tt)eld)er are the ordinary simple relatives follow-
ing an antecedent, In the nominative and accusative, they are
179] RELATIVES. 75
used interchangeably, according to the arbitrary choice of
spealier or writer. In the dative (except after prepositions) the
cases of ber are rather preferred to those of tt)el(^er; and, in the
genitive (as pronouns), only befjen and beren are ever met with.
179. 1. 2Ber and ma^, Voa§ fiir, and tDeId)cr used adjectively
(also absolutely, when meaning which), like who and what in
English, are properly compomid relatives, or antecedent and
relative combined.
Thus, met Bel 9lad)t t)orBeifu5r,. 'jatj bie Slammen he who (who-
ever) went by at night saw the flames, tt)a§ im DJ^enfc^en nic^t tft,
fommt au(^ nic^t aua i^m what (wliatever) is not in a man does not
come out of him, id) tt)ifl Deraeffen, tDcr id^ Bin, unb \va§ id) litt
I will forget who I am and what I have suffered, mit iiix iranbelt,
tt) c m fie bie SBei^e liel^ with her walks he on whom she has bestowed
consecration, man fnd)te gn t)ergeffen, n)eld)e ^otl) [5^ot] uBeraH
5errf(^te one sought to forget what distress was everywhere prevail-
ing, rt)er mei^, m a§ f iir eine Sift ba^tnter ftedt who knows what sort
of a trick is hidden in that ?
2. But the demonstrative is repeated, for distinctness, after
the compound relative, much more often in German than in
English :
Thus, tt)er nid)t t^ormart^ ge'^t, ber fommt guriide who (whoever)
does not advance, he (that one) falls back, to a § bu nie Derlierft, ha^
mu^t bu Beiceinen what you never lose, that you have to bewail,
tt)a§ id) fiir §errUd)feit Gefd)ant, ba§ ftel)t nid)t in ber SBorte ^ad)t
ivliat kind of magniftcerice I saw, that is not in the power of words
to tell
3. As occasional irregular variations of the mode of relative
expression may be noticed the use of the personal pronoun in-
stead of ber as antecedent after mer, of ber instead of mer as
preceding relative, of tDer instead of U)eld)er after ber, etc.
4. The examples show that mer and tt)a§ are sometimes to be
translated by whoever and whatever. To give them more
distinctly this indefinite sense, they may be followed (either im-
mediately, or, more often, after one or more interposed words)
by auc^ even, nur only, or immer ever, especially the first: thus,
iDaS er and) tftue whatever he may do. ^lud) is often added
with the same sense to relative adverbs : thus, mo er and) fei
wherever he may be, \mt fie fid) and) baQegcn ftreBcn however they
may remt.
76 PRONOUNS. [179-
5. After a neuter pronoun, personal, demonstrative, or in-
definite (as c§, ba§, alle^, ettt)a§, md)t§, manrf)e§, Did, tDcnig), also
after an adjective (especially a superlative) taken in a general
sense and not referring to some definite object, the compound
relative tDa§ is used, instead of the simple relative ba§ or tt)el(^e§.
Thus, iiber ba§, h)a§ er jelbft erja^Ite about that which he was
himself relating, qKc^ U) a § t)on bir mir fom all that came to me
from thee, ni(^t§ tt)a§ meine 5!JieinunQ ftorte nothing that sliould
shake my opinion, ba§ erfte tuaS fie i)orten the first thing which
they heard.
That is to say, for an adjective clause qualifying the ante-
cedent is substituted a substantive clause in apposition with it
(436.3c.).
6. Like ba§ (166.3), tt)a§ is sometimes used collectively of
persons in the singular or plural : thus, \x\i\) iibt jt(f) tt)a§ ein
9}^eifter tDerben tuiU whoever would he a master begins to practice
early.
^ 180. For the dative or accusative case of a relative (either
simple or compound) governed by a preposition is usually sub-
stituted, when things and not persons are referred to, the com-
pound of the preposition with an adverb (as in the case of the
demonstratives and interrogatives : see 166.4, 173.2). But the
compounds of ha (bat)on, barau^, etc.) are only rarely used rela-
tively, those of tt)o (n)Dt)on, tDorau§, etc.) being preferred.
181. A verb agreeing with a relative is put in the third per-
son even when the antecedent of the relative was a pronoun of
the first or second person (or a vocative), unless that pronoun
be repeated after the relative.
Thus, um mid), bcr f id) rettet su bir about me, who am taking
refuge with tlwe, U\i bu e§, ber fo gittert is it tlwu who art trem-
bling thus?— hut um mi(!), bcr td^ mi(f) rette ; bift bu e§, ber bu fo
3itterft ;— gliirffeliger ^lepnber, ber bu ^ialknm^,i\dt)Z]i fortunate
Alexander, that didst never see Italy !
182. 1. In antiquated or archaic style, f o is used as indeclin-
able relative, representing the nominative and accusative cases
of ber and votl^tx : thus, ber DJlanu, f o e§ f agte the man who said it.
2. In a like manner, ba is appended to a relative to express
indefiniteness, itself being wholly untranslatable : thus, trer ba
atl^tnet fatmet] im rofiQcn Sid)t whoever Weathes in the rosy light.
188] INDEFINITES. 77
183. The relative, often omitted in English, must always be
£xpressed in German: thus, bic greunbe, b ie id) IteBe the friends
I love.
[Exercise 12. Interrogative and Eelative Pronouns.]
INDEriNITE PKONOUNS AND INDEFINITE NUMERALS.
184. A class of words needs some attention under the above
head, in connection with the pronouns, as being more or less
related with the latter, and differing from ordinary nouns and
adjectives, in derivation or in office, or both.
185. 30^ an one.—^an (originally the same word with 3!Jlann
man) is employed as wholly indefinite subject to a verb, like the
French on, our one, they, people, we, taken indefinitely. Thus,
man f acit cme says, they say, it is said. If any other case than a
nominative is required, einer (195) is used instead.
186. Semanb some one, 5^iemattb no one.— These are com-
pounds of DJlann man with the adverbs je ever and nic never.
They ought, therefore, to be declinable only as substantives of
the first declension ; and it is proper always so to treat them,
adding § in the genitive, and leaving the other cases like the
nominative. But (especially where the phrase would otherwise
be ambiguous or indistinct) they are allowed to take the endings
em or en in the dative, and en in the accusative.
3^iemanb no one must be used instead of nt(^t Semanb not any
one, except in an interrogative sentence.
187. Sei^si^ntann every one. — This word is made up of Jeber
every (190) and 5}^ann man, but is used without distinction of
gender. Its first part is undeclined, and it is varied only by
adding § to form the genitive.
188. (Jttt)a§ something, nid)t§ nothing. — These words are in-
variable in form, and always have a substantive value. A fol-
lowing limiting adjective is treated as a substantive in apposi-
tion with them (129.5) : and the same construction is usual with
a noun after etlDaS : thus, etir)a» ©elb some money. Both are
often used adverbially.
For n)a§ in the sense of ettDa^, see 176.2.
5^i(^t§ is usually and regularly used instead of nlc^t etn)a§ not
anything, except when the sentence is interrogative as well as
negative.
78 PRONOUNS. [189-
189. Sinig, etli(^ some. — These are used chiefly in the plural,
and declined like hk§ (165). They are employed both adjec-
tively and substantively.
@tU)eI(^ is a word, now antiquated, having the same meaning :
for this, tt)el(f)er is often used colloquially (176.2), as tt)a§ for
190. 3^^/ icfiUt^, iebmeb each, every.— Only the first of these
is in familiar use. All are declined like bte§ ; or, the first two as
adjectives of the "mixed" declension (124.2) when preceded by
ein, the only limiting word which can stand before them. They
are used either adjectively or substantively.
The original themes are {eber and jebtDcber, and their er has
not until modern times been treated as ending of declension
only. For Sebermann, see above, 187.
191. Tlan^ many. — In the singular, mancf) means many a;
in the plural, many. It is usually declined like bie§ (165), but,
before an adjective, may be left uninflected : thus, mand) bunte
^Inmtn many variegated flowers, mand) giilben ®ett)anb 77iany a
golden garment. It is also used substantively.
192. SSiel much, tuenig little. — 1. After another limiting word,
t)lel and toenifi are declined as any other adjectives would be in
the same situation — except in ein tt)enit3 a little. If they precede
the noun which they qualify (or another adjective qualifying it),
they are sometimes declined and sometimes left unvaried — and
the former more when the meaning is distributive, the latter
more when collective : thus, t)iel 2Bein a great quantity of wine,
but Dieler SBein wine of many kinds; t)iel Iei(^t bej^mingte ^dfte
anumber of light-winged guests, but j^iele anbere 2^^ier[2^ier=]ge=
flalten m^any other animal shapes (individual) — but this distinc-
tion is by no means closely observed. Both words are used
substantively as well as adjectively, and may govern a partitive
genitive : as, uiele ber gufecjanger many of the pedestrians.
2. 3CReI)r more and tueniger less, comparatives of bid and tDenig,
are generally invariable. But nie^r has a plural, me^re, or (irreg-
ularly, but much more commonly) mel)rere, meaning several,
many.
193. %U all. — 1. When it directly precedes the noun it quali-
fies, aU is fully declined (like bie§, 165) ; but before a pronominal
word (adjectively or substantively used) it may remain unvaried
(with a tendency toward the same distinction of collective and
distributive meaning that appears in Diel : see 192.1).
197] INDEFINITES. 79
Thus, allcr 2[Betteifer all 2eal;—aUt beine ftoften 2Ber!e all thy lofty
works, afle bte %aq,t be§ gefteg all the days of the festival, t)on all
bent flange by all the splendor, bei all biefen 35erl)dltnif)en in view
of all these circumstances.
2. In certain phrases, a He is used instead of aH undeclined :
thus, Bei alle bent in spite of all that.
3. The neuter singular alle§ (hke the corresponding case of
other pronominal words) is employed in an indefinite way of
persons, meaning every one: thus, aEe§ nal^ert ftc^ einanber all
draw near to one another.
4. The plural of aH is sometimes used distributively : as, aEe
2So(f)en every week.
194. ^nber other is a pronominal word, but not distinguished
in its uses from an ordinary adjective.
For nD(^ ein in place of anber, see 198.3c; for anber as ordinal,
203.1a.
195. (Sin one, an, a, fein not one, none, no. — 1. The numeral
ein one is also used as indefinite pronoun (see 198.2), and as
article (63).
2. ^ein is the negative of ein, and is everywhere dechned as
the latter would be in the same situation. Like D^iemanb (186)
and nid)t§ (188), it often requires to be taken apart in translat-
ing into ein and nic^t not; e. g. fo fein ^efi^t ja^ id} in meinem
Seben such a face I never saw in my life.
NUMERALS.
196. Although the numerals do not form in the proper sense
a separate part of speech, their peculiarities of form and use are
Buch that they require to be treated as a class by themselves.
197. 1. The fundamental words denoting number,
the CA.RDINAL numerals, are as follows :
1. ein
11. elf
21. ein nnb gtrangifi
2. gmei
12. amoif
22. atuei nnb siDangiG
3. brei
13. breigel^n
30. breifjig
4. t)ier
14. Dierse'^n
40. Diergifi
5. fiinf
15. fiinfjelin
50. fiintsig
6. ]ed)§
16. fed)3el)n
60. ]cdm
7. jieben
17. fiebijel)n
70. fiebaig
8. a^t
18. ad)t3eftn
80. ad)t3ig
9. neun
19. neun3el)n
90. nenngig
LO. seftn
20. gtnanaiQ
100. l)unbert
1000.
taujcnb
1,000,000. DJaUion
80 NUMERALS. [197-
2. An older form of elf 11, now nearly out of use, is cilf. For
fiinfseftn 15, and funfatg 50, the less regularly derived forms
funfge^n and funf^ig are also in good and approved use. 6ieben=
ge^n 17 and fieBenaifi 70, instead of the contracted fieBje^n and
fieBgig, are not infrequent, ©ed^ae^tt 16 and fediaig 60 are ab-
breviated, for ease of pronunciation, from |e(^§3eftn and ferfjSgtg,
which may likewise be employed.
3. The odd numbers, between twenty and a hundred, are
formed always by prefixing the name of the unit to that of the
ten, with unb and interposed : thus, brel unb gti^ansig three and
twenty (not gtuanatg^brel twenty-three). With the higher numbers,
the odd numbers follow, as in English : thus, l^unbert unb fieben
107 ; tauf enb unb bret unb biergig 1043 ; and the unb and may be
dropped, especially when more than two numbers are put to-
gether : as, ein taufenb ad)t ^unbert neun unb fe(f)gig, or a(f)tael^n
l&unbert neun unb fe(i)stg, 1869.
4. The higher numbers, l^unbert, taufenb, mtHion, are multiplied
by prefixed numbers, as in English : thus, fe(^§ ^unbert 600 ;
brei unb ac^tgig taufenb 83,000. The German says eine 9}liflion
a million, as we do ; but simply l^unbert a hundred, taufenb a
thousand: ein ^unbert, ein taufenb, mean one hundred, one
thousand.
198. ^in is the only cardinal number that is fully inflected.
1. K used adjectively, or qualifying a noun expressed, it is
(unless preceded by another qualifying word : see 3) declined
when numeral in the same manner as when indefinite article (63).
Thus, ein SJiann one man or a man, ein ^inb one child or a
child.
2. When used absolutely, or pronominally, standing for a
noun understood, it is declined like bte§ (165), or an adjective
of the first declension (but eine§ is usually contracted to etn§ in
the nom. and ace. neuter).
Thus, um ein (^\\th, unb bann urn nocf) ein§ Idnger longer by one
joint, and then by one more, einer t)on end) one of you, einer ber auf
ein ^benteuer auSge^^t one who goes out upon an adventure, t)on \\6)
gu iagen, n)a§ etnem lieb ift to drive away from one's self what is
dear to one!
3. When preceded by another limiting word (usually the def-
inite article), it is declined as any adjective would be after the
same word.
Thus, ber eine ]pxad^ the one spoke, mtt biefer ein en Strung
with this one error, auf f etnem ein en ^eine on his one leg.
200] CARDINALS. 81
a. ®er etnc is often employed where we should say one
simply ; occasionally it forms a plural, bie einen the ones, some.
b. In numeration, the pronominal neuter, ein§, is used : thus,
cin§, gmct, brei one, two, three; einmal ein§ \\t ein§ once one is one.
c. 5^o(^ ein one mare is employed instead of ein anber another,
where simple addition, not difference, is signified : thus, ntmm
no^ ein (55olbflii(i take another gold piece (i. e. in addition to the
one you have) ; but ntmm ein anbereg take another (i. e. in place
of the one you have).
d. In the compound numbers, ein unb StDanjig 21, etc., ein is
invariable : also, usually, in ein unb berfelbe, ein paax, ein mmq,
ein l^alb, etc : thus, mit ein tt)enifi SBafjer with a little water, mil
ein paax ©(^ritten with a few steps, ein ^x'xtkl Don ein Qalb a third
from a half.
, e. In order to distinguish to the eye ein used as pronoun or
'numeral from the same word as article, some write it with a
capital, ©in ; others, with the letters spaced, e i n (the ordinary
German equivalent of our italics) ; others, with an accent upon
the e, ein : others leave the difference of value to be pointed out
by the connection.
/. The neuter ein§ is sometimes used in an indefinite way of
persons : thus, unfer ein§ one of tis, nun f ag^ mir ein§, man foil !ein
SBunber glauben riow let any one tell me we are not to believe in
miracles !
199. 3^^^ 2 and brei 3 are generally unvaried, but have
gen. and dat. plural forms— gmeier, gweien ; breier, breien— which
may be used whei-e the case would not otherwise be indicated.
a. For gn)ei, the old masculine gtt)een (twain) and feminine 3tt)o
are antiquated, but still occasionally met with : thus, ttJaren mit
mir 3n)een C^enoffen were with me two comrades, gmo ©djmdben
fangen um bie SBette two swallows were singing in emulation.
b. 33eibe both is often used where we say two: thus, meine
beiben SBriiber my two brothers.
200. 1. From the other units and tens, only a dative in en is
occasionally formed, when the words are used substantively ;
or, yet more rarely, from all the units, a nom. and ace. in e (a
relic of a former fuller declension)— namely, in certain special
uses, as aUt SSiere all fours ; or in poetry, to make an additional
syllable ; or in colloquial and low style.
82 NUMEEALS. [200-
2. §unbert 100, and taufenb 1000, are frequently construed
and declined as (neuter) collective substantives. SJliOion (fern.)
is regularly and usually so treated.
3. As names of the figures designating them, the numerals
are treated as feminine nouns [Qdijl f. number being understood),
and take the plural ending en, and sometimes e in the singular :
etn forms bie ^in§, bie ©infen.
201. 1. The cardinal numerals are used in general with equal
freedom as substantives and as adjectives : thus, ein ^inb a
child, ein§ ber ^'inber one of the children, t)ier ober fiinf folrfier
9Jldb(?^en four or five of su^h girls, tuir brei greunbe we three
friends, unf er brei three of us, etc.
2. For the use of a singular instead of a plural noun of
measure after numerals, see 211.2.
202. From the cardinals come, by derivation or composition, :
all the other classes of numerals, the most important of which
are explained below.
203. Ordinals, 1. The ordinals are a series of ad-
jective derivatives, formed from the cardinals by the
suffixes t and ft : from the numbers 2-19, by adding t ;
from the higher numbers by adding ft.
Thus, 3tt)eit second, neunt ninth, fec^gel^nt sixteenth, gtDanstQft
twentieth, l^unbertft hundredth, taufenbft thousandth.
a. But the ordinal of ein is tx\t first; brei forms irregularly britt,
and a(i^t, ad^t (instead of ad)tt); anhtx other is sometunes used
instead of gtDeit second.
h. Compound numbers add, as in EngUsh, the ordinal ending
only to their last member: thus, ber gtDei unb stDangigfte 22d, ber
l^unbert unb erfte lOls^, im ac^^tge^n ^unbert fieben unb aditgigften
Saftre in the ISSlth year.
2. The ordinals are not used predicatively or adverbi-
ally and consequently do not appear (except in compo-
sition) in their simple undeclined form. They are
declined in all respects like other adjectives.
[Exercise 13. Cardinal and Ordinal Numerals.]
204. Multiplicatives. These are formed by compounding
the cardinals with the words fad) or fdltig : thus, einfa(| or ein*
208] NUMEKAL DERIVATIVES. 8S
fdltia simple, gmeifac^ or gtDeifdlttQ double, gel^nfad) or geftnfdltig
ten-fold. They are adjectives, and are treated in all respects
like other adjectives.
205. Variatives. These add eriet to the cardinals: thus,
einerlei of one sort, breierlei of three sorts, tiielerlei of many sorts.
They are used as adjectives (see 415.11), but are incapable of
declension.
206. Iteratives. These are adverbs, formed by compound-
ing the numeral with mai (literally mark; hence repetition,
time): thus, einmal once, gel^nmal ten times, tnand^mal many
times, often.
a. The word mat is often written apart from the numeral,
sometimes with a capital, as an independent word.
h. As the examples have shown, derivative words of these
three classes are formed also from the indefinite numerals.
207. Derivatives from the Ordinals.
1. IXmidiiatives are formed by adding ^alB half to the ordinal
as ending in te (or t), and denote a quantity half a unit less
than the corresponding cardinal. Thus, t)ierte^alb or t)iertl)alb
four less a half or three and a half. They are construed as invari-
able adjectives.
The implied meaning is, ['the first, second, and third
complete; but] the fourth, [only] half* Instead of gtDeiteftalb
1|, anbertt)al6, irregularly fortned from anber other, in the sense
of second (203.1a), is in use.
2. Fractionals are originally compounds of the ordinals with
%\)Z\\ [^eil] part, but are abbreviated by the contraction of the
latter into tel, before which the final t of the ordinal is dropped :
thus, brittel (britt=tcl, britt Xfteil [^eil]) third, mxizi quarter, ixom=
gigftel twentieth part.
Instead of gmeitel second part is used only I)alb, ^a\\k half.
3. Ordinal Adverbs add the ending en§ to the ordinal theme :
thus, n\izx[^ firstly, gipanjiflften^ in the twentieth place.
208. Other derivative numeral words it belongs rather to
the dictionary than to the grammar to explain.
84 USi;S OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [209-
USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION.
209. The following rules apply only to nouns and to words
(pronouns, numerals, adjectives, infinitives : see 113) used as
nouns ; since the declension of all adjectives and words used
adjectively (articles, pronominal adjectives, and participles) is
determined by that of the nouns to which they belong, and
with which they are made to agree in number, case, and gender.
NUMBERS.
210. The value and use of the numbers are, in general, the
same in German as in English.
211. 1. This does not exclude minor differences in regard to
particular words, which the one language may, in general or in
certain connections, use as singular and the other as plural :
for example, Sange (sing.) tongs (pi.), Slattern (pi.) small-pox (sing.),
auf bem ^rm (sing.) in the amis, (gie (ht. they pi.), you (meaning
one or more : see 153.4), etc.
2. Masculine and neuter nouns used to express measure-
ment, of extent, quantity, weight, or number, generally stand
in the singular instead of the plural after numerals (whether
cardinal or indefinite); also, the fem. ^Dlarf marks.
Thus, fie ^aben fieben bi§ a6:jt 3u^ Sdnge they have seven or
eight feet of length, gebn 5 a ^ 33ier ten casks of beer, n)ict)iel
^funb Su^er how many pounds of sugar? ein ^ulf^^cer t)on ge^n
taufenb 3Jlann an auodliary army of 10,000 7nen, gmanaig ^D^f
Sflinber twenty head of cattle, brei Soil breit three inches broad.
But brei ® 11 e n (f.) %Vi^ three yards of cloth, fiinf ^ e i I e n (f.)
tt)eit Jive miles distant ; — and also taufenb © d) r i 1 1 e (m.) lang
1000 paces kmg. Kespecting the form of the noun expressing
the thing measured, see below, 216.5a.
3. In the familiar expressions for the time of day, U^r hour
is also unvaried after a numeral : thus, neun U^r nine o'clock.
CASES.
Nominative.
212. The proper office of the nominative is to stand as the
subject of the sentence : as, ber 3}lenf (^ benft, ^ott lenft man pro-
poses, God disposes.
Of course, also, a noun in apposition with a subject nom-
inative is put in the nominative ; since (111.2) an appositive
noun always agrees in case with the noun it explains.
215] GENITIVE. 85
213. 1. With the verb jcin to he, and a few others, of kindred
meaning — such as tuerben become, bleibcn continue, l^ci^en he
called, fd^einen appear — also, with the passive of verbs that
govern a second accusative as objective predicate (227.36), a
noun may be used in the nominative as predicate: (i. e. as,
through the verb, describing and qualifying the subject: com-
pare 116.1).
Thus, mein 33ruber tft b e r 2 e "^ r e r biefe§ ^naben ray brother is
this hoy's teacher, ber bleiBt e in 91 art fetn Seben lang he (lit. that
one) remains a fool his whole life long, er tDtrb etn(^eigl^al§ ge*
fd^olten he is called reproachfully a miser.
a. With icerben, however, the noun is often put in the dative,
after the preposition gu: as, ba tt)erben SBeiber gu C)t)dnen
then women heccnne hyenas (turn to hyenas).
2. The nominative is sometimes used in apposition and pred-
ication relating to a word (usually a pronoun) in an oblique
case. Thus, la^ mic^ bein greunb (more usually beinen Steunb)
fein let me be thy friend, id) fel)e jte ein (or einen) 9taub ber glam^
men tuerben I see them become a prey to the flames, er nennt mii^
fein (or feinen) greunb lie calls me his friend, al§ i(^ mid) einen
grembling in biefem l^reife \at} (Schiller) as I saw mijself a stranger
in this circle; but@ie fet)en mic^ ein Uanb ber Snellen (Lessing) you
see me a prey to the waves; so also after tt)ie and al§ : thus, ber
3flu!)m biefeg ^JJlanne§ al§ berebter 3ftebner (or al§ eineg berebten 9teb:=
ner§) mar meit oerbreitet this man's fame as an eloquent speaker
was spread widely abroad, always jein 9lubm al§ 3flebner his fame
as orator, einem 9Jlanne mie 6ie fann e§ nid)t an ^elb fel)len (Les-
sing) a man like you cannot want for money.
214. The nominative is used in address (as a " vocative ").
Thus, l^olber griebe, fii^e ©intrac^t, meilet iiber blefer ©tabt lovely
Peace! sweet Concord! linger aver this city.
Genitive.
215. The genitive in German, as in the other related lan-
guages, is primarily and especially the adjective or adnominal
case, denoting by a form of the noun a variety of relations
such as might be expressed by a derivative adjective. As was
remarked above (under 158.2), it is in part traceably of adjective
origin. But its later uses arise also in part from its being
merged with other primitive cases — particularly the ablative,
the case representing the /ram relation, of origin or removal—
86 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [215-
and assuming their office. To trace all these uses to their
origin would require vastly too much of detailed historical dis-
cussion, and will not be attempted here.
216. Tlie Genitive with Nouns.
1. The German genitive is especially the case of a noun that
is added to another noun in order to limit or define its meaning.
2. It is used, accordingly, in all the senses in which we use
the possessive case of a noun, or a pronominal possessive (my,
your, his, etc.) ; also, in most of the senses belonging to a noun
connected with another noun by the preposition of: thus,
a. As genitive of possession or appurtenance: ha^ ^an^
meine§ 35ater§ the house of my father, be§ 9Jlanne» ^op\ the man's
head.
6. As genitive of origin or cause : in be§ (3(^rerfen§ ^aijn in
the madness of terror, ber ^rtcb ber (^ro^mut^ [(^ro^mut] the
impulse of magnanimity.
c. As complement of relation (designating that toward which
the relation expressed by the governing noun is sustained) : 't)tx
SSater beS ©otineg the father of the son, be§ 3Sater§ ©ol^n the
fatJwr's son, ^onig biefeg 9fteid)§ king of this realm.
d. As partitive genitive (expressing a whole of which the
governing noun is a part), in all its varieties : bet ©c^rerfUi^fte
ber ©(^reden the most terrible of terrors, ein§ ber fleinften ^inber
one of the smallest children, iebeS biejer 33eburfni[fe each of these
needs, allgut)iel be§ ©pa^e§ quite too much of the joke.
e. As genitive of material, constitution, or equivalence : ein
SS)a(^ fc^attenber ^ud^en a roof of shady beeches, ber Sraeige Iau=
BigeS fitter the leafy trellis-work of the branches, eine ^nga^I
f(^reienber ^naBen a number of shouting boys, be§ ®oIbe§ ©trbme
streams of gold.
f. As genitive of characteristic : ein Tlann ^o^en 9iange§ unb
grower ^ugenb a man of high raiik and great virtue, ein .f)irten=
ftamm tiirftfc^er ^bfunft a slwpherd-race of Turkish descent.
g. As subjective genitive (implying an action of which the
thing designated by the genitive is the subject) : be§ SturmeS
©aufen the roaring of the storm, ber 9Jlagnete ©ciffen unb Sieben
the hating and loving (attraction and repulsion) of magnets.
h. As objective genitive (implying an action of which the
thing designated by the genitive is the object) : bein SBunfcf) be§
^uten thy desire of good, SSerbefferer ber SBelt unb be§ ©efe^e§
Improver of the WojM and of the Law.
216] GENETIVE. 87
The relation of the genitive to its governing noun is so in-
flnitively various that neither the above classification nor any
other is exhaustive or peremptory.
3. In these relations, the genitive of a personal pronoun is
rarely admitted ; but for it is usually substituted a possessive
pronominal adjective, qualifying the noun to be limited (158.2).
Exceptions : certain cases of partitives, of genitives followed
by a qualifying word, and a few others : as, unf er einer ofie of us,
\f)xtx Beibcn (Jinbriicfe the impressions of them both, il^rer 5}lcifter
tt)erben to get the better of them.
4. For the genitive, in all these uses, may be substituted a
dative with the preposition t)on o/, as in English.
a. The substitution is made, especially, when the expression
would otherwise be ambiguous or unclear, from the want of a
distinct ending to the genitive, or of a limiting word showing
its character: thus, bie ^IntDO'^ner t)Dn ^ari» the inhabitaiits of
Paris, 35ater t)on jed)§ ^inbern father of six children; but bie (&'u\=
moaner 55erUn§ the inhabitants of Berlin, 33ater biefer |ecl)g ^inber
father of these six children; — or, to avoid a succession of several
genitives: as, ber ©oftn t)on bent Dftetme ^aijer @manuel§ the son
of tlie uncle of Emperor Emanuel. And the construction with t)on
is the regular and usual one instead of the genitive of material
and of characteristic.
5. a. After nouns signifying measure, of extent, quantity,
weight, or number, the noun designating the substance measured,
if not preceded by an adjective, is usually put neither in the
genitive (partitive genitive), nor in the dative with tion of, but
is treated as indeclinable.
b. Thus, ein (^Ia§ SBein a glass of wine (i. e., wine, to the extent
of one glass), gmei ^funb %^zt two pounds of tea, brei ©Hen Xnd)
three yards of cloth, einige 33u(^ papier a few quires of paper,
gro^e 33Idtter 9iauf(i)gDlb great sheets of gold-tinsel ;— hut, cin ^Ia§
biefe§ SSeing or t)on btefcm 2Betne a glass of this wine, jtrci ^^^funb
guten %l)tt^ two pounds of good tea.
c. Exceptions are occasionally met with: thus, ben beften
33e(^er 2Betng the best goblet of wine, 300 Centner @oIbe§ 300 cwt.
of gold.
d. By abbreviation, the name of the month is left unvaried
after a numeral designating the day : thus, ben neunten 9Jlai the
ninth of May.
6. The genitive, in any of its senses, may be placed either be-
fore or after the noun which it limits (aj^ is shown by the exam-
88 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [216-
pies given). But its position before the noun, especially if lim-
ited by any other word than an article, belongs rather to a
higher or poetic style ; in plain colloquial prose, the genitive
ordinarily follows the noun that governs it. An objective gen-
itive most rarely precedes ; and never, if another genitive be
dependent on the same noun : thus, be§ ^onigg 2BaT^l eine§ Tl\=
nifterg the king's choice of a minister.
As in English, the noun preceded by a dependent genitive
takes no article : thus, meine§ greunbe^ ^n^ my friend's heart,
but ba§ §er3 meine^ greunbeg the heart of my friend.
217. The Genitive with Adjectives.
About thirty adjectives (with their corresponding negatives)
are followed by a genitive, denoting that in respect of which the
action or quality they express is exerted.
Thus, be§ 6ingeti§ miibe weary of singing, tt)iirbtger be§ 9ling§
more worthy of the ring, etne§ ©ultonS untoiirbig unworthy of a
Sultan, jii^er ©rinnerung \)oUfull of sweet memories.
a. These adjectives are mostly such as are followed by of in
English, although some admit a different construction. Among
the commonest of them (besides those already instanced) are
BetDU^t conscious, fd^ig capable, getBi^ sure, fc^ulbtg guilty, fatt
sated, uBerbriiffig tired, )3oUfull. Some of them also are construed
with prepositions, and a few (229) even govern an accusative,
when used with the verbs jein and tDerben.
218. The Genitive with Prepositions.
About twenty prepositions govern the genitive.
Thus, tDcgen feiner ©iinbe on account of his sin, tt)dftrcnb meincr
toUen SaQh during my mad chase, ungea(^tet biefer ©rfldrung not-
witJistanding this explanation, ftatt buf tiger ©drten instead of fra-
grant gardens.
a. The prepositions governing the genitive are mostly of
recent derivation from nouns and adjectives. For a list of them,
see below, under Prepositions (373).
219. The Genitive as Object of Verbs.
1. A genitive immediately dependent upon a verb has gener-
ally the office of a remoter object, further qualifying the action
of the verb upon its nearer personal object.
2. A number of transitive verbs govern a genitive in addition
to their direct object, the accusative.
219] GENITIVE. 89
a. These are verbs of removing, depriving, accusing, convict-
ing, admonishing, assuring, and the hke, and one or two others
(miirDigcn esteem worthij, Dertroften console).
Thus, er flagt ben Wiener be§ i)ieBftal^l§ an he accuses the servant
of theft, er ft at un§ einer gro^en gurc^t entlebigt he has rid us of a
great fear, cr berauBt ben Ungliidliiiien ber '^offnung he robs the
wretched man of hope.
3. A number of reflexive verbs admit a genitive in addition to
their reflexive object.
a. These verbs are of too various meaning to admit of classifi-
cation. Some of them may be rendered in English either by a
construction resembling the German, or as simple transitive
verbs taking a genitive as direct object : thus, freue bi(^ b einer
Sugenb rejoice thyself of (enjmj) thy youth, er entfinnt \i^ jebeg
2Borte§ he bethinks himself of (recollects) every word, fic^ 9efdftr=
Iid)er SBaffcn bebienen to serve one's self with (employ) dangerous
weapons; — others, only in the latter method: thus, mit @ifer
ftab' ic^ m^ ber ©tnbten befltfjen zealously have I pursued my
studies, bemer fteiltgen Seii^en, o 2Baftrfteit, ftat ber 33etrug fi(^ an=
gema^t thy holy signs, Truth ! has deceit usurped.
4. A few impersonal verbs take a genitive of the object, with
an accusative of the subject, of the feeling they represent.
a. They are erBarmen pitij, geliiften long, jammern grieve, reuen
or gereuen rue: thus, mid) erbarmt feine§ @lenb§ I pity his misery.
5. A number of verbs may take a genitive only (corresponding
to a direct object in English).
The commonest of these are ac^ten regard, Bebiirfen neea,
brau(^en use, benfen think of, entbeftren do without, ermangeln lack,
eriDdftnen mention, gebenfen remember, genie^en enjoy, gefdjmeigen
keep silence about, ftarren await, ftiiten guard, Iad)en laugh at,
pflegen nurse, )d)Dnen spare, fpotten mock, uerfeftlen miss, t)ergefjen
forget, \QOi^xx[t\)mtxi perceive, voaxiiXi wait for.
Thus, er a^)kiz ntd)t ber marmen ©onne he heeded not the warm
sun, e§ Bebarf ber ^nnaftme nicftt it needs not the assumption,
anbrer greoel nidjt gu gebenfen not to mention other atrocities, la^
mid) ber neuen greifteit genie^en let me enjoy the new freedom, jebeg
,\^eiben§ i^ergeffenb forgetting every trial, \{)x fpottet mein ye mock
me, mo id) beiner xoaxit where I wait for thee,
6. Many of the verbs in these various classes may take instead
of the genitive an accusative, or else a noun governed by a
preposition : for example, all the impersonals, and all but two
&0 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [219-'
(ermanG^In and gejd)tt)etgen) of the last class. The construction
with the genitive is an older one, which has for some time been
going gradually out of use, and is now mainly antiquated or
poetic : thus, biefc grei^eit, b i e i(i) {e^t genie^e this liberty which I
now enjoy, benen, auf bie bie emigc gi^eil^eit tDartet to those for
whom eternal freedom is waiting, er f reut \\^ ii b e r f ein ©liidf
he rejoices at his good fortune.
220. Other uses of the Genitive.
1. The genitive of a noun is often used in an adverbial sense,
especially (with or without a limiting adjective) to denote time ;
also (with adjective) not infrequently manner, more rarely place.
Thus, eine§ %aQt^ im Senge one day in spring, be§ 2Binter§ jinb
tDtr tt)ie t)ergraben in bem ©(^nee in the winter we are, as it were,
buried up in the snow, bie 2BoI!en, bie 5!Jlor9en§ unb ^^benb§ iiBer
tl)n l^in f egelten the clouds which sailed along over him of a morn-
ing and evening, er fdiliirft langen -!palfe§ he sips with outstretched
neck, prft bu'§ flingen mdd^ttgen 9lufe§ dx)st thou hear it ring with
mighty sound ? \^ ermal^nte iftn afle§ ©rnfte§ I admonished him in
all seriousness, ja^te f4)Iei(^^ x^ meiner SBege I softly steal off on
my way.
a. A large number of adverbs are, by origin, genitives of
nouns or adjectives, or of a noun and a limiting word which
have grown together by familiar use : see 363-5.
2. A genitive is sometimes used with a verb (especially jein
and tuerben) in the sense of a predicative adjective, or as predi-
cate genitive : thus, fie tt)aren munter unb Quter ^inge they were
merry and of good cheer, bie toaxtn oft ni(^t jo gro^, ober gleid^en
^Iter§ mit tl)m they were often not so big, or of equal age with him,
alle raerben auf einmal eine§ ©tnne§ all become suddenly of one
mind, \^ bin SSiEen^ I am of a mind.
a. The genitive in this construction is allied with the genitive
of characteristic (216.2/).
3. By a construction formerly not rare, but now little used, a
partitive genitive is used with verbs : thus, er tranf be§ 33a(i)e§
he drank of the brook, fie brac^tc be§ flaren ^errlid^en 2Beine§ she
brought of the clear excellent wine.
4. Yet more unusual are cases of the occurrence of a posses-
sive genitive and of a genitive of origin with verbs : thus, tl^ue
n)a§ betne§ %mk§ tft dx) what belongs to (is of) thy office, |)unger§
flerben to die of hunger.
222] DATITE WITH VERBS. 91
5. A genitive is sometimes used with an interjection, to signify
the thing which is the occasion of the exclamation : thus, ad) be§
Ungliitf^ alas for the mishap (see 392).
Dative.
221. 1. The dative is originally and properly the case of the indirect
personal object, designating the person or persons with reference to
whom, or as aSectmg whom, anything is or is done — a relation which is
ordinarily (though not always) expressed in English by the preposition
to or /or. In this sense, the dative in German is usually the adjunct of
a verb, much less often of an adjective, very rarely of a noun.
2. The dative has also inherited the offices of primitive cases, now
lost ; especially of the instrumental, expressing the with or by relation,
and the locative, expressing the in relation. In these senses, it is ordin-
arily governed by prepositions.
222. The Dative with Verbs.
The dative, in German, is most often the indirect personal ob-
ject of a verb.
a. It is thus doubly contrasted in office with the genitive : the
latter usually limits a noun ; and, as indirect object, it is prevail-
ingly not personal : thus, [^ i)er|id)ere iftn einer ©ac^e / assure
him of a matter, but i(^ t)erfid)ere i^m eine ©ac^e I assure (vouch
for) a matter to him; \i) Beraube i^n feine§ (^elbeg Iroh him of his
money, but {^ raube \tim fein (^elb I steal from him his money.
h. The connection of the dative with the action of the verb is
of every degree of closeness, from constituting its essential or
necessary complement to indicating a mere incidental interest
in its action: thus, er bot mir bie §anb he offered me his hand,
i^ legte e^ i^m auf ben %\\d^ Ilaid it on the table for him.
I. 1. A large number of transitive verbs take, along with the
accusative, a dative as more or less necessary complement of
their action. Such are
a. Many simple verbs, especially such as denote a bringing
near or removing, a giving or taking, imparting, commanding,
permitting or refusing, and the like.
Thus, er brac^te ben 9ting ber Allien he brought the ring to the old
woman, id) fdjrelbe meinem SSater einen 33rief I write my father a
letter, man eriaubt afle§ einem greunbe one permits a friend any-
thing,
h. Many verbs compounded with inseparable or separable
prefixes, especially ent, er, t)er, and auf, a^, bet, nadi, dor, $u.
92 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [22^
Thus, er Dermarfit ben 9fling bem liebften feiner ©bl^ne he makes
over the ring to the dearest of his sons, er mollte 'xi)m bie ^rone auf=
fefeen he wished to set the crown on his head, fie mu^te i^m bie
Sungfrau gufagen she had to promise him the girl.
c. A few verbs that require a reflexive object in the dative,
forming a class of improper reflexives (290) : thus, i(^ l^abt mir
33eif qE Derbient I have earned myself applause.
d. A few verbs compounded with adjectives, or verb-phrases
akin with such : e. g., tra^rf agen prophesy, funb ma^tn make
known.
2. In the passive of these verbs, where the object-accusative
becomes a subject-nominative, the dative remains as sole object :
thus, ber Sling murbe ber ^Iten gebracS^t the ring was brought to the
old woman, e^ tt)irb mir !unb gema^t it is made known to me.
3. As the examples have shown, the English also often uses
its objective without a preposition (when placed next the verb)
in a dative sense. In other cases, it expresses the dative
relation by prepositions, especially to. But, where the verb
implies removal, the dative frequently answers to our objective
with from.
Thus, nimm meiner Dlebe ieben ©tad^el take from my words all
sting, e§ ftaftl mir ba§ SeBcn it stole my life from me, e§ betnem
5}litleib gu entgie'^en to withdraw it from thy compassion, er foU
mir ni(^t lebenbig geften he shall not get away from me alive.
a. The same is true of the dative after intransitive verbs : see
below.
4. Either the direct or indirect object may often be omitted,
and the verb used with the other alone: thus, einem ein 33u(j^
borlefen to read a book aloud to some one, ein 53u(^ Dorlefen to
read a book aloud, einem t)orIefen to read aloud to some one; also,
simply t)DrIefen to read aloud, lecture.
II. 1. Many verbs take a dative as their sole 'object.
These, as not admitting an accusative, are reckoned as in-
transitive ; but many of them correspond to verbs which in
English are looked upon as transitive (227.1«, b).
a. A number of simple verbs, together with a few that have
the inseparable prefixes be, ge, er ; also, the contraries of several
of them, formed with the prefix mi^.
The commonest of these are antmorten answer, banfen thank,
bienen serve, bro^ien threaten, f(uc!)en curse, folgen follow, l^elfen
222] DATIVE WITH VEKBS. 93
help, f(^aben harm, fd)meid)eln flatter, tro^en defy, trauen trust,
h)el)ren control, Begegnen meei, gefaEen please, ge^orc^^en obey,
criDtebern answer.
Thus, feib il^r tl^nen nic^t begegnet did you not meet them ? folgt
hnxd) ben ^etfter bem ©tral^l follows the beam of light through the
ether, nok'§ t^nen gefciHt as it pleases them, mnn e§ mir nic^t mi^fiele
if it did not displease me, iann e§ bir nic^t f(^aben can it not harm
thee ? :^elft mir help me ! ben 9taumen unb Seiten gu tro^en to defy
space and time.
b. A large number of verbs compounded with the inseparable
prefix ent, and with the prepositions ab, an, auf, au§, bet, ein,
entgegen, nad^, nnter, t)or, miber, su ; deriving their power to take
the dative object from the modification of meaning given by the
prefix.
Thus, bie ©(^tt)erter entfliegen ber ©(^eibe the swords leap from
the scabbard, t)iele ftimmten biefer ^nftd)t bei many acceded to this
view, fommt einer \i)m entgegen if one comes to meet him, urn d5n=
Ud)en ©reigniffen uorsubengen in order to avoid such occurrences,
ml^tt ben ^efe(i)ten gnfa^ who was looking on at the contests.
The meaning added by the prefix is, as the examples show, to
be very variously rendered in English.
c. A number of verbs compounded with nouns, adverbs, and
adjectives ; also, of verbal phrases akin with such.
Thus, ba^ fein (SJefang feinem 0eibe gleic^fommen miiffe that his
song mu^t correspond with his attire, er elite feinem SSater jn ^\ii\t
he hastened to the help of his father, e§ tl)nt mir leib it pains me,
er ma^t biefer ^ame ben ©of he is paying court to this lady, e§
tDarb i^m gu XtjiW \%t\\'\ it was granted him (fell to his share).
d. SSerben become is sometimes used alone with a (possessive)
dative in the sense of gu ^l^eil [%t\\\ merben : thus, bagn n)arb bem
5[Renf d^en ber 35erftanb for that end was understanding given to man
(became his). Quite rarely, such a possessive dative follows f ein :
as, e§ ift il^m it is his (belongs to him).
e. A few impersonal verbs, or verbs used impersonally, take
a dative designating the subject of the feeling or condition they
express : thus, e§ grant mir lam horrified, il^m fd)n)inbelt he turns
giddy. Some of these take also the accusative.
/. Also fein, tuerbcn, and gel^en or ergeften, with adverbial ad-
juncts, are frequently thus used impersonally with the dative
(292.4:) : thus, if)m tt)ar bange he was in anxiety, mir mirb fo mol^l
94 USES OF THE FORMS OF DECLENSION. [222-
so pleasant a feeling is ccmiing over me, \o\t \\i mir benn Iww is it
then with me ? bcm ift f o the case is thus (it is thus with regard to
that).
2. Of the intransitive verbs governing the dative, a part —
especially those that denote an action proceeding from a
person — may form an impersonal passive governing the same
case (see 279.2).
Thus, e§ waxh mir l^art beocQnet I have been harshly dealt with
(met), e§ tpurbe i^m gel^olfen he was helped.
III. In a looser and less strictly dependent construction — as
denoting the person (or thing) in behalf of whom, or as affecting
whom, anything is or is done, the dative ( " dative of interest " )
is used so freely, and with so many verbs, that to attempt giv-
ing rules for its occurrence would be useless. Only one or two
points call for special notice.
a. A dative grammatically dependent on the verb is often
used instead of a possessive genitive quaUfying a noun in the
sentence: thus, bem '3)iener urn ben Qa\§ faEenb falling upon the
servant's neck, leget ben 3D^toEner ber 9Jiaib in ben ©d^oo^ lay
Miollner in the maid's lap.
b. This is especially common with the personal pronouns :
thus, e§ Bli^t au§ htn ^ugen i^m fii^n a daring look beams from
his eyes (see 161).
c. The personal pronoun is sometimes thus used in a manner
that seems to us expletive : thus, jiel^ mir oh fie fommen see (for
me) whether they are coming (compare 156).
IV. For the dative dependent upon a verb, in all its varieties
(but not with all verbs : especially not with those which take
the dative after the manner of a direct object, Il.la), is some-
times substituted a case governed by a preposition (as gu to, fiir
for, Hon from). This substitution is notably more frequent with
a noun than with a personal pronoun ; a dative of the latter is
often used where one of the former would make a harsh or
forced construction.
223. The Dative with Adjectives.
1. The construction of the dative with adjectives is analogous
to its construction with verbs. Some adjectives call for the
case as their essential or natural defining complement ; others
admitit in a looser relation, after the manner of a " dative of
interest " (above, 222.III.).
2U] DATIVE. 9^
2. Adjectives taking the dative as their more essential com-
plement are especially those that signify nearness or remoteness,
likeness or unlikeness, suitableness, property, inclination, ad-
vantage or disadvantage, and the like. Usually, they require
in English the preposition to before a noun Umiting them.
Thus, mt nai) fii^r i^ m\^ bir how near I feel myself to thee!
bem ^Idferbau fremb strangers to agriculture, 2BoI!en qU'i^ gittigen
clouds like wings, einen il^m eigenen SBertft a value peculiar to it,
eine ©eele, bie ber %\)0i\ nit^t getDac^fen ift a soul that is not equal to
the deed, ein mir unDer^offteg (^lixd a happiness unhopedfor by me.
3. Participles of verbs governing the dative admit a comple-
ment in the same case, in analogy with the uses of the verbs
from which they come, and according to their own character as
active, passive, or neuter participles.
4. Verbal derivatives in Bar and It(^, signifying possibility,
take a dative of the person whom the possibility concerns:
thus, mir begreiflid) comprehensible to me, bem 9!Jlenfcf)en unbetro^n-
bar uninhabitable by man.
5. Almost any adjective qualified by gu too or getiug suffi,-
dently, enough admits an adjunct in the dative : thus, ba§ 0eib
ift mir gu lang, i^m aber nid)t lang genug the garment is too long for
me, but not long enough far him.
6. Many adjectives admit a dative adjunct more readily, or
only, when used with a verb, either predicatively or forming a
more or less closely compounded verbal phrase : thus, ba§ ift
mir rec^t that suits me (seems to me right), ba§ tt)trb bem £naben
fc^tt)er that grows hard for the boy.
For such phrases, with transitive, intransitive, and impersonal
verbs, see above, 222.1.1(^, II.lc,/.
7. For the dative with an adjective, also, is often used a case
governed by a preposition (especially Don /rom, fiir/or).
224. TJie Dative with Prepositions.
1. About twenty prepositions govern the dative.
For the list of them, see under Prepositions (374).
2. Nine prepositions govern the dative when the relation ex-
pressed is that of situation or locality ; but the accusative, when
motion or tendency toward anything is implied.
These are an, auf, I)inter, in, neben, iiber, unter, Dor, 3tt)if(f)ett
(see 376).
96 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [225-
225. The Dative in other constructions.
1. The use of the dative as a virtual possessive genitive,
grammatically dependent on a verb, but logically, or according
to its real meaning, qualifying a noun, has been explained above
(222.III.a,&). Karely, the dative js found having the same value
with a noun alone : as, bem 9liefen giir Sufi /or the gianfs pleasure
(for a pleasure to the giant), er gab, iftm gu (S^ren, mandie gefte he
gave many festivals in his honor. Yet more rarely, it occurs with
a noun in other relations usually expressed by a genitive, or
with the aid of a preposition : as, ein 9Jiufter ^iiroern unb 33auern
a model for citizens and peasants, ©emipeit einem neuen 33unbe
assurance of a new covenant.
2. The dative sometimes follows a noun in exclamatory
phrases (as if the imperative of jein to he were understood) :
thus, bem 33uben unb bem ^nt^t bie ^(^t outlawry to the villain
and flunkey! greube bem 6terbli(!)en joy to the mortal! Some
words habitually employed as exclamations are also followed by
a dative signifying the person toward whom the feeling ex-
pressed by the exclamation is directed: such are tt)0^l, §eil,
SIBe^, and the like (see 392).
ACCUSATIVE.
226. The relations of the accusative are more simple than those of
the other oblique cases. Its proper office is to stand as direct object
of a verbal action ; and also, in the relation, most nearly akin with the
former, of the goal of motion ; but this it has in German only in part.
The German uses it also as the case absolute,
227. The Accusative with Verbs.
1. The accusative is especially the case belonging to the
direct object of a transitive verb : as, ic^ fe^^e ben 9JJann; er trdgt
clnen S)ut I see the man; he wears a hat.
a. And a transitive verb, on the other hand, is one that takes
a direct object in the accusative. The classification of verbs as
transitive and intransitive is in part formal rather than logical
(i. e. a matter of usage, and not of essential meaning), and —
h. Some verbs which in English are regarded as transitive
take in German the genitive (219.5) or the dative (222. II.l), and
therefore belong to the class of intransitives. Again, some verbs
which to us are intransitive are in German, uniformly or oc-
casionally, transitive: as, i^r Ijobt mid) fpre(^en iDoHen you have
desired to speak to me.
227] ACCUSATIVE. 97
2. The accusative is also sometimes used as the object of a
verb properly intransitive.
a. Some verbs may be followed by an accusative of meaning
akin with their own, or signifying a substantive idea which they
themselves virtually involve ( " cognate accusative " ).
Thus, tt)ir fterben ^ier ben 2:ob ber greien we die here the death
of the free, betet einen frommen ©pruc^ way a piom phrase, fie
](^ldft ben le^ten ©d^Iaf she sleeps the last sleep.
h. By a pregnant construction, an intransitive may be fol-
lowed by an accusative of that which is effected or made to ap-
pear by the action it designates: thus, tont bie ^lode (^rab^efang
the bell tolls a funeral hymn, wa^ grinfeft bu mir Ijzx what grinnest
thou at me (what does thy grinning signify) ?— or by an accusa-
tive and an adjective or other equivalent expression as objective
predicate, signifying the condition into which that which is
designated by the accusative is brought by the action described
by the verb : thus, \i^ ^alb tobt [tot] lai^en to laugh one's self half
dead, \^ tranm^ al§ ^inb m\^ ^uxMt I dream myself back into
childhood (as child), bu tt)irft bie SBdd^ter an§ bem ©djlafe fc^reien
tliou wilt scream the guards out of sleep.
c. Some impersonal verbs, denoting a personal condition or
state of feeling, take an accusative signifying the person af-
fected : thus, e§ liiftet feinen, euer 9Jlann 3U tuerben no one desires
to become your husband, mid) T^ungert Jam hungry. See 294.
With these are included also biinfen, bdu(^ten [beuc^ten] seem
(the only verbs in which a like construction still appears in
English) : thus, mi^ hmitmethii^ks, mid) bduc^te [beud)te] methought
(292.2). These (and some of the others also) admit a dative
instead of an accusative object (222.II.le).
d. For the accusative after Jein or merben with certain adjec-
tives, see below (229).
3. A few transitive verbs govern two accusatives : namely —
a. Se^ren teach takes an accusative of the thing taught to-
gether with an accusative (or sometimes a dative) of the person
to whom it is taught : thus, id^ lebre iftn (or i^m) bie Tln\it I teach
him music. §ragen ask and bitten beg also sometimes add to their
personal object a pronominal accusative of the thing desired:
thus, \^ bitte bid) nur bie§ I beg of thee only this.
b. C)ei^en and nennen call, name, fd)impfen and fd^elten call by
way of reproach, and tauf en christen, which add to their personal
object a second accusative as objective predicate, denoting the
^8 USES OF THE FOEMS OF DECLENSION. [227-
name or title given: thus, t(^ toill alk§ eine (Sd)ictunQ nennen
I will call the whole a wm^k of destiny, er fc^impfte feinen ^egner
einen DIarren he reviled his adversary as a fool.
c. A noun in the accusative as objective predicate now and
then appears with other verbs— as, fo glaube jeber feinen ^ting ben
ed^ten then let each believe his own ring the genuine one ; but tliis
construction is generally avoided by the use of a different ex-
pression : as, man ma^i or nja^It tftn gum ^onifl tliey make, or
choose, him king (for king), \^ l^alte i^n fiir meinen greunb I deem
him my friend, \6) fenne iftn al§ einen ^l^renmonn I kmm him a
man of honor.
228. The Accusative with Prepositions.
1. Eight prepositions always govern the accusative.
They are bi§, bur(i), fiir, Qegen or gen, ol&ne, fonber, urn, n)iber
(see 375).
2. Nine prepositions are followed by the accusative when they
indicate motion or tendency toward ; otherwise, by the dative.
They are an, auf, Winter, in, neBen, iiber, unter, t)Dr, gtt)if(f)en
(see 376).
229. The Accusative with Adjectives.
A few adjectives, when used predicatively with fein or h)erben
(especially the latter), may take an object in the accusative.
They are anfii^tig, bemu^t, gema^r, gemol^nt, Io§, miibe, fatt,
iiberbriiffig, gufrieben: thus, bie ©eifter njerb' id) nun nid)t log
I cannot now get rid of the spirits, id) \mf eg gufrieben I should be
content with it, menu mx nic^t fein (Jingreifen gema^r tt)iirben if we
did not feel its taking hold.
This anomalous construction is of quite modern origin, and
in part owing to a misapprehension of the old genitive eg as an
accusative. It is easier with a pronoun than with a noun as
object, and in the case of gufrieben contented is limited to a
pronoun. The governing force belongs to the combination of
adjective and verb (compare 223.6).
230. The Accusative in absolute construction.
1. The accusative is used absolutely (that is, as adverbial ad-
junct of a verb or adjective, but not properly governed by them)
to express measure — whether of duration of time, of extent of
space, of weight, of value, or of number.
230] ACCUSATIVE. 99
Thus, er I)or(^te eincn ^lugenbUc! he listened for a moment, an bie
id) Diele 3at)re nirf)t ocbad)t of which I have not thought for many
years, man I)atte fie nur mn'm 2.age border Gcfeften they had been
seen only a few days before, stDangig 3a^^^ ^^^ twenty years since,
al» fie eine oute ©ti-cc!e fortgcoanaen tuaren when they had gone on
a good piece, cine !)albe Stiinbc )oox bcm (Bdjlo^ half a league outside
the castle, ad^t 9J2orGen tief eight furlongs deep, c^ luieflt ein ^funb
it weiglis a pound, ba§ foflet ivozi %\)a\tx that costs two dollars, ein
C)eer 300,000 Wann ftar! an army 300,000 men strong.
a. To an accusative expressing duration of time is often
added the adverb lanG long : as, er lag fieben 3a^re lanfi he lay
for seven ijears, ben flangcn %a(^ lang the whole day long; — less
often other adverbs: as, bag Qange 3al)r burc^ tlie whole year
through, biefe '^txi iiber all this time.
h. By a similar construction, an adverb of direction or motion
is very frequently added to an accusative of space, in such way
as almost to have the value of a preposition governing it : thus,
bie ^reppen l^erunter down the stairs, ben 58erg l^inan up the
mountain, ben SBcg am 33ad) l^tnauf up the path by the brook, ben
Oangen (S^orfo I)in unb n)ieber through the whole Corso and back.
2. The accusative is also used to express the time of occur-
rence ("time when").
Thus, ba§ ficfd)at) iebe§ ^al^x that happened every year, ben
^benb beim %aniz that evening at the dunce, er fie^t bie SKelt faum
einen geiertag he sees the world only on a holiday.
a. This use of the accusative borders on that of the adverbial
genitive (220.1) : but the accusative has the more definite mean-
ing, and cannot be used witliout a defining adjunct : thus,
^lbenb§, be§ ^benb§ of an eveniiig, in the evening (now and then,
or habitually) ; but bicfen ^benb this evening, le^ten ^benb last
evening, and so on.
3. a. A noun in the accusative is sometimes used absolutely,
with an adjunct (prepositional or adjective), to express an ac-
companying or characterizing circumstance — as if governed by
with or having understood.
Thus, bie D^lilttcr crfc^icnen, ben ©dugUng im ^rme the mothers
appeared, (with) their infants in their arms, anbere fliet)en, iDtlbc
^Ingft im funfelnben ^ugc others fly, wild terror in their flashing
eyes.
h. This is especially usual with a participle as adjunct of the
noun : thus, mnli ung, bie ^-acfcl unuicmanbt beckons to us, with
100 CONJUGATION. [230-
torch inverted, man aeiDoftnt e§, ben ^op^ Qegen ben ^orfo Gend)let;
ftill gu fte^en it is trained to stand still, (having) the head directed
toward the Corso, jelbft ^ranfe nic£)t auSgenommen even sick persons
not excepted.
c. Allied with this is , the so-called imperative use of the
participle (see 359.3).
CONJUG-ATION.
231. Conjugation is variation for mode, tense, number,
and person.
Only verbs are conjugated : hence, the subject of con-
jugation is coincident with that of verbal inflection.
VERBS.
232. The essential characteristic of a verb is that it predi-
cates or asserts something of a subject: that is to say, it
ascribes some action, or state, or quality, to some being or
thing expressed by a noun or pronoun.
This predication or ascription is not always direct and positive ;
it may be contingent, inquiring, or optative : compare 427.
233. Verbs are variously classified.
1. They are divided into transitive and intransitive, accord-
ing to the nature of the relation they sustain to a noun repre-
senting the object of their action : a verb that admits an object
in the accusative is called transitive ; otherwise, intransitive.
Thus, transitive verbs, ii^ lobe \^\\ I praise him, er jdjIdQtmid)
he strikes me; — intransitive, ic^ \\t^t, er fdflt I stand, he falls, er
fd^onet feitie§ Setnbeg he spares his enemy, tcE) banfe 3^nen I thank
you.
a. That the distinction of transitive and intransitive is in part formal
rather than essential, has been pointed out above (227. la, 6) ; practically,
however, it is one of importance.
2. Under these classes are distinguished —
a. Reflexive verbs, which take an object designating the
same person or thing with their subject.
h. Impersonal verbs, used only in the third person singular,
and either with an indefinite subject or without an expressed
subject.
236] SIMPLE FOEMS OF, THE VEEB. , 101
3. Transitive verbs, again, fornl by'"tl]LeTielp bf'ah auxiliaiy
verb a passive voice, denoting the suffering of an action, and
talcing as its subject what was the object of the transitive verb :
which latter, by contrast with the other, is said to be of the
ACTIVE VOICE.
4. Nearly all verbs, moreover, admit of being compounded
with certain prefixes, of a prepositional character ; with refer-
ence to such composition, therefore, they are distinguished as
SIMPLE and COMPOUND.
234. The general rules of conjugation apply alike to all verbs,
of whatever class they may be. They will be first stated and
illustrated in their application to simple personal verbs in the
active voice.
SIMPLE FORMS OF THE VERB.
235. The German verb has the same simple forms
as the English, namely :
1. Two tenses, the present, and the preterit, or indef-
inite past
a. The value and use of these tenses nearly correspond in the
two languages. But the present is sometimes employed in place
of our perfect, or our future ; and the limits of the preterit and
the perfect are also not precisely the same in both : see 324 etc.
2. These tenses are formed each in two modes, the
indicative and the subjunctive.
a. The subjunctive is nearly extinct in English : the German
subjunctive is employed sometimes for our potential and con-
ditional ; others of its uses have no correspondent in English :
see 329 etc.
b. The rendering of the subjunctive tenses in the paradigms,
therefore, by may and might is only conventional, and for the
sake of uniformity; such rendering gives but one of their
various meanings.
3. Each tense is declined in two numhers, with three
persons in each number, as in English.
4. Of an imperative mode there are two persons, the
second singular and the second plural.
5. An infinitive, or verbal noun (339).
102
VEEBS.
[235-
6. Two PAETiciPLES, or verbal adjectives (349): one
present and active ; the other past, and prevailingly
passive.
a. The infinitive and participles are not proper verbal forms, since
they contain no idea of predication. They present the verbal idea in
the condition of noun and of adjective respectively; but, as regards
their adjuncts, they share in the construction of their corresponding
verbal forms : see 348 and 357.
236. Examples :
1. Iteben love (root, IteB).
Indicative.
pers. singular.
1 \6) lieBe Hove
2 bu liebft thou lovest
3 er (iebt he loves
PLURAL.
1 W'w lieben we love
2 x^x Hebt ye love
3 fie lieben they love
SINGULAR.
Subjunctive.
Present
SINGULAR.
\(i) liebe / may love
bu Itebeft thou mayest love
er Hebe he may love
PLURAL.
tvxv lieben ive may love
xi)X liebet ye may love
fie lieben they may love
Preterit,
SINGULAR.
1 id§ liebte I loved id^ liebte, =bete I might love
2 bu liebteft thou lovedst bu liebteft, :=beteft thou mightest love
3 er liebte he loved er liebte, -bete he might love
PLURAL.
1 U)ir Itebteu we loved
2 i^r liebtet ye loved
3 fie liebten they loved
PLURAL.
Wix liebten, =beten we might love
xijx liebtet, ==betet ye might love
fie liebten, ==beten they might love
Imperative,
singular.
2 liebe, liebe bu love thou
Infinitive.
lieben to love
PLURAL.
liebt, liebt xl)x
love ye
Participles.
Present.
liebenb loving
Past.
geliebt loved
236]
SIMPLE FOEMS OF THE VEEB.
103
Bemarks. 1. This verb illustrates the mode of inflection of
verbs of the New or weak conjugation, corresponding with what
are wont to be called " regular verbs " in English. The special
rules concerning the inflection of such verbs are given below :
see 246 etc.
2. The forms liebeft and liebct may be used also in the present
indicative and the imperative, as well as UeBete etc. in the preterit
indicative, and geliebet in the past participle ; see below, 237.3.C.
2. geben give (root, geb).
Indicative.
SINGULAR.
SUBJUNCTIVK
Present,
1 tdf) gebe I give . id^ gebe
2 bit giebft, giOft thou givest bu gebeft
3 er glebt, gibt he gives er gebe
SINGULAR.
/ may give
thou mayest give
he may give
PLURAL.
1 tt)ir geben we give
2 \i)x gebt ye give
3 fie geben they give
PLURAL.
tt)tr geben we may give
\S)x gebet ye may give
fie geben they may give
Preterit,
SINGULAR.
SINGULAR.
1 \6) gab
2 bn gabft
3 er gab
/ gave
thou gavest
he gave
i(^ gabe
bn gab eft
er gcibe
/ might give
thou mightest give
he might give
PLURAL.
1 n)ir gaben
2 i^r gabt
3 fie gaben
we gave
ye gave
they gave
PLURAL.
iDir gdben
ibr gcibet
fie gaben
Imperative.
SINGULAR.
2 gieb, gib bn give thou
Present.
gebenb giving
Infinitive.
geben to give
Participles.
we might give
ye might give
they might give
PLURAL.
Q^thi, gebt \^x give ye
Past
gegeben given
104 YEEBS. [236-
Bemarks. 1. This verb illustrates the mode of inflection of
verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, corresponding with
what are wont to be called "irregular verbs" in English. The
special rules concerning the inflection of such verbs are given
below: see 261 etc.
2. The forms geBet, QaBeft, Qobtt (for gebt, fiabft, Qobt) are
occasionally met with ; also gaBft, Qobi (for gabeft, Qabel). For
the double forms giebft, gibft, etc., see 268.16.
237. General Rules respecting the Simple Forms of the Verb.
1. Of the forms thus given, three are called the
PKiNcrPAL PARTS, because, when they are known, all the
others can be inferred from them : these are the infin-
itive, the 1st pers. sing. preterit, and the -pBist participle:
thus, lieBen, Itebte, geliebt; geben, ^ab, gegeben.
or. The infinitive always ends in n, and almost always
in en. The rejection of this n or en gives us the eoot
(3935) of the verb.
Not ending in en are only fein he, iljnn do, and infinitives from
roots of more than one syllable ending in I or r, as tt)anbeln walk,
tDonbern wander.
K There are, as the examples show, two ways of
forming the preterit and past participle : the preterit
adding ete or te to the root, or else adding nothing, but
changing the radical vowel ; the participle taking the
ending et or t, or else en or n. According to these dif-
ferences, verbs are divided into two conjugations (see
below, 246).
2. The endings of tense inflection are
first pers. singular, e, — first pers. plural, en, n
second pers. " eft, ft, e, — second pers. " et, t
third pers. " et, t, e, — third pers. " en, n
The rules for their use are as follows :
a. The first persons sing. pres. indicative and subjunctive
are the same, and formed by adding e to the simple root.
Exceptions are only bin am, f ei may he, and the pres. indicative
of the modal auxiharies (see 251.3), and toiffen Imow (260).
237] SIMPLE FORMS OP THE VERB. 105
h. The first (and third) pers. singular of the preterit sub-
junctive, and of the preterit indicative except in verbs of the
Old or strong conjugation (269.1.1), also end in e.
3. a. The third pers. sing. pres. indicative has the ending t or
ct (our th, s in loveth, laves) : in all the other tenses, the third
person is like the first.
Exceptions : without the ending t are only the modal auxiliaries
(see 251.3), and a few other verbs (268.5).
h. The ending of all second persons singular (except in the
imperative) is ft or eft (our sHn Invest); of all first and third
persons plural (excepting only finb are), en or n ; of all second
persons plural (with the single exception fetb are) et or t.
c. The retention or rejection of the vowel e of the endings eft,
et (also of e before the te forming the preterit of one conjuga-
tion) depends partly on euphony, partly on arbitrary choice.
The e must always be used when the final letter of the root is
such that the consonant of the ending would not otherwise be
distinctly heard— thus, we may say liebeft or liebft, but only
lief eft readest, tangeft dancest; liebt or \kM, but only bittet begs,
rebet talks — also, when a harsh or unpronounceable combination
of consonants would otherwise occur— thus, only at^meft [atmeft],
atfimet [atmet] hreathest, breathes; fe^neft, fegnet blessest, blesses.
In other cases, the writer or speaker is allowed to choose
between the fuller and the briefer form ; the latter being more
familiar or colloquial, the former more used in stately and
solemn styles. But the e is more often retained in the sub-
junctive, and especially when the distinction of subjunctive and
indicative depends upon it.
The e of the ending en of the first and third persons plural is
rarely dropped except after unaccented er or el, in the indicative.
Special rules affecting some of the forms of the Old or strong
conjugation will be given below (268-9).
d. The final imaccented e of all verbal forms (as of all other
words in the language) is not imfrequently cut off, especially in
poetry, and in colloquial style. An apostrophe should always
be used, to show the omission ; but this is sometimes neglected.
4 The inflection of tlie tenses is always regular, ex-
cept in the second and third persons singular of the
pres. indicative, which often show a difference of vowel
or of consonant, or both, from the other persons of the
y
106 VERBS. [237-
tense. The same irregularities appear in part also in
the imperative singular (see 268, 270).
5. The imperative singular ends in e in nearly all verbs (for
exceptions, see 270.2) ; the plural is the same with the second
pers. pi. indie, present. Both numbers admit of use, as in Eng-
lish, either with or without a subject pronoun.
For the filling up of the imperative with subjunctive forms,
see 243.1.
6. The form of the present participle may always be
found by adding b to the infinitive.
Only t!)un cto and fein be form t^uenb, (eienb.
7. The past participle has usually the prefix j^e. For
exceptions, see 243.3.
8. Notice that the third pers. plural of all verbal forms is used
also in the sense of a second person, singular or plural
(see 153.4), its subject fie being then written with a capital : thus,
<5ie liebcn you love, 8ie gab en you gave.
(Exercise 14. Simple Forms of the Verb.)
COMPOUND FOKMS OF THE VEKB.
238. As in the case of the English verb, again, the
scheme of German conjugation is filled up with a large
number of compound forms, made by the aid of
auxiliary verbs.
239. Conjugation of the Auxiliaries of Tense.
The auxiliaries used in the formation of the tenses
of ordinary conjugation are three : namely, Ijabcn have,
fein he, tDerben become. The simple forms of these verbs
are as follows : ^
1. §aben : — principal parts t)aben, l^atte, gcljabt.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present.
SINGULAR. SINGULAR.
1 ic^ ^abe I ham ic^ ^abe I may have
2 bu ^aft tlwu ha4 bit Ijabeft thou mayest have
3 er ^ai he has cr \jciiK he may have
239]
PLURAL
2 \[)x ])aht
3 " ' '
AUXILIARIES OF TENSE.
107
fie ^aben
we have
y[e have
they have
SINGULAR.
1 id^ '^atte"" ^ ^ rhad
2 bu ^atteft \Xj'^u hadst
3 er f)aitt^)^ he had
PLURAL.
I tvxx 'fatten s , we had
i^r ^attet
fie fatten
ye had
they had
Present.
tt)ir Ijaben
fie ^aben
PLURAL.
we may have
ye may have
they may have
iPreterit.
SINGULAR.
x6) f)aii^
bu ^atteft
er l^citte
/ might have
thou mightest have
he might have
PLURAL.
irtr fatten ive might have
\f)X f)dttet ye might have
fie Ijdtten they might have
Imperative.
SINGT
f;abe have thou
PLURAL.
^abt have ye
Infinitive.
l^aben to have
Participles.
Present.
l^abenb having
Past
ge'^abt had
2. (Sein he: — principal parts fetn, Voax, cjeUjefcn.
Indicative.
singular.
1 \6) bin I am
2 bu bift thou art
3 er ift he is
PLURAL.
1 \mx finb we are
2 if)r feib ye are
3 fie finb they are
Present.
Subjunctive.
SINGULAR.
td§ fet I may be
bu feieft thou mayest be
er fei he may be
PLURAL.
tvxx feien
i^r fcict
fie foicu
we may be
ye maybe
they may be
108
VEBBS.
[239-
SINGULAR.
idf) tvax I was
bu tuarft thou wast
er toax he was
PLURAIi.
tt)ir tt)aren we were
\i)x tvaxtt ye were
fie tuaren they were
SINGULAR.
2 fei be thou
Preterit,
SINGULAR.
id^ tDcire / mty/i^ be
bu hjareft //iow mightest be
er tt)dre /le mi^Ti^ be
PLURAL.
iDtr iDaren ii?e might be
Imperative.
Infinitive.
i^r tuaret
fie tDciren
ye might be
they might be
PLURAL.
feib be ye
fein
to be
Participles.
Present.
fetenb being gettjefen been
3. SSerben becorm: — principal parts tuerben, tvaxh or
ttjurbe, getDorben.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present.
SINGULAR. SINGULAR.
1 i6) ttjerbe / become id^ lt)erbe / may become
2 bu tDirft ^/iow becomest bu tr»erbeft //loit mayest etc.
3 er tt)irb Ae becomes cr U)erbe Ae may become
PLURAL.
1 tDir tDerben if^ become
2 i()r tDerbet ye become
3 fie tDerben ^/iey become
PLURAL.
iDir tuerben i^e may become
\l)X iDerbet ye may become
fie trerbeu they may become
Preterit.
SINGULAR. SINGULAR.
1 id^ UJarb, I became id^ tt)iirbe I might become
iDurbe
2 bu marbft, thou becamest bu iDiirbeft thou mightest etc.
iDurbeft
3 er tDarb, he became er tDiirbe he might become
tpurbe
239J AUXnJARIES OP TENSE. 109
PLUBAL. PLURAL.
1 Wiv tDurben loe became ttjir iDiirben loe might become
2 i^r tDurbet ye became i^r tDiirbet ye might become
3 fie murben they became fie tDiirben they might become
Imperative,
singular. plural.
2 njerbe become thou tuerbet become ye
Infinitive.
IDerben to become
Participles.
Present. Past.
trerbenb becoming getnorben become
4. Irregularities in the Conjugation of these Verbs.
a. §aben is analogous in its conjugation with lieben, above,
but the frequency of its use has led to abbreviation of a few
of its forms. Thus, {)aft and f^at are for older l^abft and l^abt,
and ^atte for l^abte. The modification of the vowel in l^dtte,
pret. subj., is against the prevailing analogy of verbs of its class
(see 250.2).
b. ©ein is of the same conjugation with gebcn, above. Its
irregularity, which is far greater than that of any other verb in
the language, comes mainly from its being made up of forms
derived from three independent roots : bin and bift are from the
same root as our be, being, been (original form bhu; Lat. /m,
Greek phuo) ; the rest of the present from the same root as our
pres. indicative am etc. (original form as; Lat. sum, etc., Greek
eimi); while the preterit wax and past participle, Qett)efen, are
from the root of our was, were (original form vas, dwell, abide.
Some authors still retain eij for ei (see 19.3) in fein, in order to
distinguish it from the possessive fein (157).
c. SBerben is a nearly regular verb of the same conjugation
with fleben. For its persons mirft and mxh, see below, 268.5. In
the double form of its pret. ind. singular, it preserves a solitary
relic' of a condition once belonging to many verbs in the lan-
guage, whose preterits had a different vowel in the singular and
plural. SBarb is the original form, and n)urbe is a quite- modern
and anomalous fabrication, made after the analogy of the plural
wurben^
no VEEBS. [240-
240. Formation of the Compound Tenses.
1. From ^akn or fetn, with tlie past participle of any
verb, are formed a perfect and a pluperfect tense, in-
dicative and subjunctive, and a perfect infinitive.
a. The Perfect tense, indicative and subjunctive, is formed
by adding the past participle to tlie present tense of l^aBen or of
fein : thus, trf) l)abe oeliebt I have loved, or I maij have laved, id)
bin gefommen I have (dm) come, id) fei gefomtnen I may have
come.
h. The Pluperfect adds the participle to the preterit of the
auxiUary : thus, [^ ^atte gelieBt J had hved, \^ ^^citte gelieBt I
might have loved, id) tDar gefommcn I had (was) come, i^ waxt
gefommen I might have come.
c. But the modal auxiliaries (251) and a few other verbs
(namely laffcti, I)ci^en, I)elfen, l^oren, fe^^en, le'^ren and lerncn— the
last two not uniformly), when construed with another verb in
the infinitive, form their perfect and pluperfect tenses by adding
the infinitive instead of the participle to the auxiliary (see 261.4).
d. The Perfect Infinitive prefixes the participle to the sim-
ple or present infinitive : thus, gelieBt ^ahtn to have loved, ge^-
fommen fein to have come.
e. "What verbs take 'tjdbm and what take fein as their auxiUary,
will be explained below (see 241). Por omission of the auxiliary,
see 439.3a.
2. From ti:)erben, with the infinitives, present and past,
of the verb, are formed a future and a future perfect
tense, indicative and subjunctive, and a conditional and
conditional perfect.
a. The Future tense, indicative and subjunctive, is formed by
prefixing to the present infinitive the present tense, indicative
and subjimctive, of tDcrben: thus, i^ merbe lieben or fommen I
shall love or come.
h. The Future Perfect prefixes the same tenses to the per-
fect infinitive: thus, i(^ tt)crbe gelicbt ^aben I shall have loved,
id) merbe gefommen fein I shall have come.
c. The Conditional and Conditional Perfect are formed by
prefixing to the present and perfect infinitive the preterit sub-
junctive of iBerben : thus, \i^ n)iirbe lieben or fommen I should love
or come; i(^ miirbe geltebt l^aben I should have loved, \6) miirbe
gefommen fein IsJiould have come.
241] COMPOUND TENSES. Ill
3. The uses of these tenses so nearly agree with those of the
corresponding English phrases with which they are translated
that they need no explanation here : for details, see 323 etc.
4. The German is the only one of the Germanic languages which, in
its modern extension of the conjugational system by composition, has
chosen iDerben as its auxiliary for forming the future tenses. 3d) tnerbe
geben, hterally lam becoming io give, receives a future meaning through
the idea of I am coming into a condition of giving, i. e. I am going to give.
a. In the tenses formed with l)al)en, the participle is originally one
qualifying the object of the verb in the manner of an objective predi-
cate, or expressing the condition in which Ihae (possess, hold) the
object. This, as being the constructive result of a previous action, is
accepted as a description of that action, and ic^ ^abe bie ^ilrme auggeftved t,
for example, from meaning I have my arms stretched out, comes to signify
J have stretched out my arms.
h. On the other hand, in the tenses formed with feiu, the participle is
originally one qualifying the subject in the manner of a direct predicate,
and defining a state or condition in which the subject exists. This, in
English, has become (by a process quite analogous with that just above
described) also a passive, or an expression for the enduring of the action
which produced that condition. But the German uses (see below, 275)
another auxiliary to form its passives, and, in its combination of fein
with the participle, it only adds to the assertion of condition the less
violent implication that the action leading to the condition is a past
one : ic^ bin gefomnien lam here, being come : i. e., my action of coming
is a thing of the past; or, I have come.
c. In strictness, then, t)aben should form the past tenses only of trans-
itive verbs, and when they take an object; and fein, only of intransitives
which express a condition of their subject. But, as have in English has
extended its use until it has become the auxiliary of all verbs without
exception, so, in German, l}aben has come to be used with transitive
verbs even when tLey do not take an object, and with such intransitives
as are in meaning most akin with these ; until the rules for the employ-
ment of the two have become as stated in the next paragraph.
241. Use of Ijahcn or fcin as Auxiliary of Tense,
1. Yerbs which take Ijiibcn as auxiliary are
a. All transitive verbs (including the reflexives and
the modal auxiliaries).
b. Almost all intransitives which take an object in the
genitive (219.5) or the dative (222.II.la).
_— jC— A^argcfnumber of other intransitiv^.s, especially
such as denote a simple activity, a lasting condition, or
112 VERBS. [241-
a mode of motion (including all the proper impersonal
verbs).
2. Verbs wliicli take fetn for auxiliary, as exceptions
under the above classes, are —
a. Especially, many intransitives which signify a
change of condition, or a movement of transition, from
a point of departure or toward a point of arrival.
These intransitives are partly such as do not take an object —
as, tt)erben become, fommen come, f aHen/aW, finfen sink, trac^fen grow,
fterben die, berften hurst, erftarren stiffen, erlofd^en become extin-
guished, einf(^Iafen fall asleep, guriirftreten retreat;— ^a.vt\j such as
may take a dative object in virtue of the meaning given them
by a prefix: as, entlaufen run away from, tt)iberfaftren happen to,
cntQCQenQe'^en go to meet, auffaHen strike the attention of.
b. A few others, without reference to their meaning : namely,
of verbs that take an objective dative, begefitten meet, folgen
follow, tceiij^en give way, gelingen and gliiden turn out success-
fully (with their opposites, mi^IinQen and mi^glurfen) : also jein
be, Heiben remain, gc'^en go.
3. A small number of verbs may take either auxiliary.
a. Some that are used with different meanings : as, ber ®edeb
l&at aufaeftanben the cover has stood open, mein 33ruber ift auf*
ficftanben my brother has got up.
b. About twenty verbs of motion, which take ^aben when the
act of motion or its kind are had^'in view (as in answer to the
questions liow, how long, when, where ?), but f ein when reference
is had to a starting-point or an end of motion (as in answer to
the questions whence, whither, Jww far?): thus, ber ^nabe ^at
fiefpruttQcn the boy has jumped, but er ift t)Dm 33aume gcfprungen
he has jumped from the tree; fie l^aben t)iel gereift they have
travelled muxih, but er ift na^ ©nglanb gereift he has gone to
England.
c. ©te^en stand, liegen lie, fifeen sit (especially the first), are
sometimes conjugated with fetn, but properly take ^aben under
all circumstances.
242. Oth^er verbal Auxiliaries.
Besides the three heretofore spoken of, there are a number
of verbs, generally or often used with other verbs, to impress
upon them modifications of meaning more or less analogous
243] AUXILIARIES. 113
with those expressed by the forms of conjugation of some lan-
guages. Such are
1. The MODAL AUXILIARIES, of wMch there are six : fonnen can,
moQm may, hixx^m he permitted, mn\\^n must, ]oUtr\ shall, tDoIIen
will. They have, however, a much more independent value and
use in German than in English, and are not to be treated as
bearing any part in the ordinary verbal conjugation. Their
peculiarities of inflection and construction will be explained
below (251 etc.).
2. The CAUSATIVE auxiliaey, laffen, which (as one among many
uses) is often employed in a causal sense with the infinitive of
another verb : as, einen ^od mad)cn to make a coat, einen D^orf
macf)en lafjen to have a coat made (cause to make it) : see 343.1.5.
3. ^"^un do (267-5), which we employ freely as auxihary in
Enghsh, is not used as such in German. Some of the German
dialects, indeed, make an auxiliary of it ; and it is now and then
found having that value even in the literary language : thus,
unb tl^ u' nid)t me^r in SSorten framen and do no longer peddle out
words.
243. Other points in general conjugation, affecting the Impera-
tive, Infinitive, and Past Participle.
1. The third pers. singular, and the first and third pers.
plural, of the present subjunctive are very commonly used in an
imperative sense (see 331), and may be regarded as filling up
the defective declension of that mood. Thus, for the two verbs
first given,
Imperative.
Singular, Plural.
1 licben U)ir let u^ love
2 lieBc, liebe bu love liebet, liebt xijt love
3 liebc cr let him love lieBen fie let them love
1 Qebett tt)ir let us give
2 Qxtb, gib bu give gebt, Qebet iftr give
3 gebe er let him give geben fie let them give
Of these forms, the third plural is in especially frequent use
as substitute for the second person of either number (153.4) :
thus, gcben ©ie mir ba§ 33u(^ give me the hook.
Other imperative phrases — as, er foil (jeben he shall give, Ia§
un§ fleben, la^t un§ geben, laffen 6ie un§ geben let us give-^-avQ
more or less employed, but need no special remark.
114 VERBS. [243-
2. The infinitive, as in English (though not so commonly), takes
often the preposition gu to as its sign ; this is always placed
next before the simple infinitive form : thus, gu QeBen, gegeben gu
For details respecting the use of p, see 341 etc.
3. The past participle of nearly all verbs has the prefix ge.
Exceptions are
a. Verbs that begin with an unaccented syllable, especially
1. Those ending in the infinitive in iren or ieren (being verbs de-
rived from the French or Latin, or others formed after their
model) : as marfd^iren [mar((^ieren] march, part, rtiarfc^irt [=fd)icrt] ;
ftubiren [ftubieren] study, part, flubirt [=biert]. 2. Those com-
pounded with an inseparable, and therefore unaccented, prefix :
as, t)ergeben forgive, part. jjerQeben. 3. A few others, such as
prop^^eaeien prophesy, Irompeten trumpet.
b. SSerben, when used as passive auxiliary, forms U) orb en
instead of getoorben (see 276.1aj.
c. The syllable ge was not originally an element of verbal inflection,
but is one of the class of inseparable prefixes (see 307.5). It was
formerly used or omitted as special prefix to the participle without
any traceable rule, and has only in modem times become fixed as its
nearly invariable accompaniment. Hence, in archaic style and in
poetry, it is still now and then irregularly dropped.
\^^^Synopsls of the complete conjugation o/^aBen and jein.
The synopsis of iDerben will be given later, in connection with
that of the passive voice of the verb (277).
Indicative.
Present, I have etc, /am etc,
s. I tjobt Bin
Peeteeit, I had etc. I was etc.
s. I ^latte tDor
Pebfect, I have had etc. I have been etc.
s. I l^aBe ge^abt Bin gettjefen
Plupeefect, I had had etc. I had been etc.
s. I ^atk Qti)aU \oax getoefen
FuTUEE, I shaU have etc. I shall he etc.
s. I U)erbe %aBen n)erbe fein
FuTUEE Peefect, I sholl have had etc. I shall have been etc.
s. I merbe ge^aBt l^aBen merbe gemejen fein
245] AUXILIARIES. 115
SUBJTJNPTIVE.
Pbesent, I may have etc. Immj he etc.
s. I ftaBe fei
Peetekit, I might have etc. I might he etc.
s. I \aiit tt)dre
Peefect, I may have had etc. I may hxive heen etc.
s. I l^aBc %t))aU jei fletDcjcn
PiiUPEEFECT, I might have had etc. I might have heen etc.
s. I fjcitte ge!)abt iDare Qewefen
FuTUEE, J s^aZ/ Aaue etc. / shall he etc.
s. I merbe ftaBen tuerbe fein
FuTUEE Peefect, I shall have had etc. I shall have heen etc.
s. I tDerbe gel^abt ^aben merbe flemefen jein
Conditional.
Conditional, I should have etc. I should he etc.
s. I miirbe ^^aben tt)urbe fein
Cond'l Peefect, I should have had etc. I should have heen etc,
s. I tDiirbe ge^abt ijaUn miirbe getuejeu fein
Impeeative.
have etc. 6e etc.
s. 2 :f)abe fei
* Infinitives.
Peesent, to have to he
l^aben fein
Peefect, to have had to have heen
gel^abt l^aben getDefen fein
Participles.
Peesent, having heing
l^abenb feienb
Past, had heen
gel^abt fleniefen
[Exercise 15. Simple and Compound Forms of the Auxiliaries.]
CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS.
245. Yerbs are inflected in two modes, called respect-
ively the Old or Strong, and the New or Weak conju-
gations.
116 VEEBS. [246-
246. 1. Verbs of the Old or Strong conjugation form
tlieir preterit by a change of the vowel of the root, with-
out any added ending, and their past participle by the
ending en : thus, geben, (\ab, gec^eben ; fingen, fang, gefnngen.
2. Verbs of the New or Weak conjugation form their
preterit by adding te or ete to the root, and their par-
ticiple by the ending et or t: thus, (ieben, liebte, geltebt;
reben, rebete, gerebet.
3. The Old and New Conjugations correspond to what have been
generally called in English the "Irregular" and *'Eegular " verbs. The
former, as the name implies, is the more primitive method of inflection ;
its preterit was originally a reduplicated tense, like the Greek and Latin
perfects (as dedoka, tetigi) ; and, in the oldest Germanic languages, many
verbs have retained the reduplication (as I)ai^atb held, from l^atban hold:
jaiflep slept, from ftepatt sleep). By phonetic corruption and abbrevia-
tion, however, this reduplication led to an alteration of the radical
vowel, and then was itself dropped, in the great majority of verbs ; pro-
ducing phenomena of conjugation so various that there was left no
prevailing and guiding analogy by which to inflect the new derivative
verbs, that were brought in as needed, to supplement the old resources
of expression. Hence the need of a new method of conjugation ; which
was obtained by adding the preterit of the verb do (did) to the theme
of conjugation. The preterit-ending te of the New conjugation is the reUc
of this auxiliary (as, in English, I loved stands for an original I love-did).
The Old conjugation therefore includes the more primitive verbs of
the language ; the New, all those of later origin. Only, as the latter have
become the larger class, and their mode of conjugation the prevailing
one, some of the old verbs (although to by no means such an extent as
in English) have been changed, in part or altogether, to conform to it.
See below, 272. ^
The wholly fanciful names "Strong" and "Weak," now generally
adopted, are the invention of Jacob Grimm (compare 73, 132).
We shall take up first the New conjugation, as being simpler
in its forms, and easiest to learn.
NEW OE WEAK CONJUGATION.
247. The characteristics of the New or Weak con-
jugation are that its preterit ends in te, and its participle
in t.
NEW OB WEAK CONJUGATION.
117
248, Examples : reben tolh, manbern wander.
Principal Parts.
reben, rebete, gerebet wonbern, wanberte, Qewanbert
Indicative.
Peesent, IMk etc.
I wander etc.
s. I rebe
2 rebeft
3 rebet
tt)onbere, tt)anbre
tt)anberft
ttjanbert
P.I reben
2 rebet
3 reben
tt)anbern
tt)anbert
wanbern
Peetekit, I talked etc.
I wandered QUi.
s. I rebete
2 rebeteft
3 rebete
tDanberte
tt)anberteft
n)anberte
P.I rebeten
2 rebetet
3 rebeten
tt)anberten
n)anbertet
tt)anberten
Perfect, I have talked etc.
I have wandered etc.
s. I ^aht Qerebet
2 5aft Qerebet
3 i)ai Qerebet
bin getranbert
bift gemanbert
ift geiDanbert
p. I ftaben Qerebet
2 ^abt Qerebet
3 ^aben Qerebet
ftnb gen)anbert
feib getDanbert
finb gett)anbert
Plijpeefect, I had talked etc.
IhM wandered etc.
s. I 5atte gerebet
2 l^atteft gerebet
3 ftatte gerebet
tt)ar QetDanbert
XocLX\i gett)anbert
xoax getDanbert
p. I fatten gerebet
2 ^attet gerebet
3 fatten gerebet
tt)aren getronbert
Xoaxi getoanbert
U)aren gen)anbert
FuTUEB, I shall talk etc.
IsMl wander etc.
s. I merbe reben
2 tnlrft reben
3 tuirb reben
tt)erbe n)anbern
tt)irft ttjanbern
iDirb tuanbern
118
VERBS.
[248^
P. I toerbctt rcbctt
tDerben tDanbern
2 tt)erbet reben
merbet manbern
3 merben reben
tDerben raanbern
FuTTJEB Peefect, I shttll have talked etc.
/ sTiall have wandered etc.
s. I merbc gerebet tjobm
toerbe getoanbert fein
2 h)trft fierebet l^aben
mx\t gett)anbert fein
3 tDirb gerebet \)ahm
mxh gemanbert fein
P. I n)erben oerebet ^aUn
njerben getranbert fein
2 merbet gerebet ftaben
mxhzt geraanbert fein
3 toerben Qerebet l^aBen
n)erben gemanbert fein
Subjunctive.
Peesent, I may talk etc.
I may wander etc.
s. I rebc
tt)anbere, njanbre
2 rebeft
tt)anbereft, n)anbreft
3 rebe
wanbere, iuanbre
P.I rebcn
tt)anberen, tranbren
2 rebet
tt)Qnberet, nianbret
3 reben
toanberen, manbren
Pbeteeit, I might talk etc.
I might wander etc.
s. I rebete
n)anbertc
2 rebeteft
tt)anberteft
3 rebete
tt)anberte
p. I rebeten
tDanberten;
2 rebetet
toanbertet
3 rebeten
tt)anberten
Peefect, Im^y have talked etc.
I may have wandered etc.
s. I ^aU gerebet
fei gemanbert
2 l^abefl Qerebet
feiefl geraanbert
3 ftabe Qerebet
fei gemanbert
p. I fiaben gerebet
feien gemanbert
2 ^aM oerebet
feiet getuanbert
3 Ibaben gerebet
feien genianbert
Plupeefect, I might have talked etc.
I might have wandered etc.
s. I ptte gerebet
n)are gemanbert
2 ptteft gerebet
tt)dreft gett)anbert
3 ^citte gerebet
njdre gemanbert
p. I !)dtten gerebet
n)dren gen)anbert
2 i\aM gerebet
iDciret getuanbert
3 Mtten gerebet
tt)dren gemanbert
248]
NEW OB WEAK CONJUGATION.
119
FuTUEE, Ishcdl talk etc.
s. I iDcrbe reben
2 merbeft reben
3 tDerbe reben
p. I n)erben reben
2 tt)erbet reben
3 ttjerben reben
FuTUEE Perfect, I shall hxjLve talked etc.
s. I tt)erbe gerebet ^aben
2 merbeft gerebet ^dbtn
3 mxht Qerebet ^dbm
p. I merben Qerebet ^aben
2 trerbet flerebet ftaben
3 toerben gerebet 'iiobtn
I shall wander etc,
tt)erbe toanbern
werbeft n^anbern
IDerbe tcanbern
toerben manbcm
tt)erbet tt)anbern
irerben nianbern
I shall have wandered etc.
tDerbe gemanbert fein
n)erbeft Gett)anbert jein
tt)erbe getoanbert fein
werben gemanbert fein
toerbet gett)anbert fein
merbcn getDanbert fein
Conditional.
Conditional, I should talk etc.
s. I iriirbe reben
2 tt)iirbeft reben
3 tDiirbe reben
p. I miirben reben
2 miirbet reben
3 tt)iirben reben
CoND. Peef., I should have talked etc.
s. I n)iirbe gerebet l^aben
2 miirbefl gerebet l^aben
3 tt)iirbe gerebet ^aben
p. I tt)iirben gerebet ftaben
2 iDiirbet gerebet baben
3 miirben gerebet l^aben
I should wander etc.
n)iirbe n)anbern
Wiirbeft njanbern
Wiirbe njanbern
h)iirben n)anbern ♦
tDiirbet manbern
tDiirben tt)anbern
I should have wandered etc.
tt)iirbe gettjanbert fein
tDitrbeft gett)anbcrt fein
tt)iirbe gett)anbert fein
tt)iirben geiDanbert fein
njiirbet gett)anbert fein
miirben gewanbert fein
Imperative.
talk etc.
s. 2 rebe, rebe bn
3 rebe er, er rebe
p. I reben tt)ir
2 rebet, rebet I'^r
3 reben fie
loandfer etc.
n)anbere, toanbere bu
tDanbere er, er tt)anbrc
tt)anbern tt)ir
ttJanbert, tt)anbert if)r
wanbern jle
120
YEEBS.
£248-
Infinitive.
Present, to talk to vender
reben, gu rebcn toonbern, gu manbern
Pbefect, to have talked . to have wandered
gerebet l^aben, gcrebet 3u l^obcn Qetuanbcrt jetn, Qcmanbcrt gu jetn
Pbesent, talking
rcbenb
Pabticiples.
wandmng
tDanbernb
Past, talked
gerebet
^^ wandered
gewanbert
Bemarks. The conjugation of reben exemplifies the necessity
of retention of c of the endings et, ete after a consonant with
which t would be confounded in pronunciation. SGSanbern is one
of the verbs which (241.36) take sometimes !^aben and some-
times |ein as auxiliary. It exemplifies the loss of e of the ending
en, and other peculiarities of the combination of endings with
verbal roots in el and er.
Irregularities of the New Conjugation.
249. A few verbs, all of which have roots ending in nn or nb,
change the radical vowel e to a in the preterit indicative (not the
^^bjunctive also) and in t^e past participle. Thus :
Participle.
gebrannt
gefannt
genannt
gerannt ^
gefanbt
gemanbt
a. The last two, fenben and n)enben, may also form the pret.
indicative and the participle regularly: thus, jenbete, gefenbet;
ttjenbete, gemenbet.
250. 1. Two verbs, Brtngen hring and benfen think, are still
more irregular, and agree closely in their forms with the corr
responding EngUsh verbs. Thus :
Infinitive. Preterit. Participle.
indicative. subjunctive.
brlngen hring bra(f)te brdc^te gebrad)t
benfen think ba(i)te Va^ii gebacC)!
InfinUive.
brennen hum
fennen krww
Preterit.
indicative. subjunctive.
brannte brennte
fannte fennte
nennen
name
nannte nenntc
rennen
fenben
tt)enben
run
send
turn
rannte renntc
fanbte fenbete
tDanbte wenbete
251]
MODAL AUXILIARIES.
121
2. The irregularities of ^aBen have been given in full above
(239.4:a) ; bringen, benfen, and fjobtn, with some of the modal
auxiliaries, are the only verbs of the New or weak conjugation
which modify in the preterit suhj. the vowel of the indicative,
like the verbs of the Old or strong conjugation (269.11).
V
[Exercise 16. Yerbs of the New or Weak Conjugation.]
251. Modal Auxiliaries.
1. These are (as already-noticed)
biirfen be allowed miiffen must
jjonnen can
jollen shall
tDolIen will
tnoQen may
2. While the corresponding verbs in English are both
defective and irregular, these have in German a com-
plete conjugation (only lacking, except in tuoUen, the
imperative), but with the following irregularities :
a. For the singular of the present indicative are
substituted forms which properly belong to a preterit
of the Old conjugation.
These are, in fact, relics of an ancient preterit used in the sense of a,
present— thus, fann can is literally I have learned how, foE shallis I have
owed, mag may is I have gained the power ^ — and the rest of their conjuga-
tion is of more modern origin.
h. Those which have a modified vowel in the infinitive
reject the modification in the preterit indicative and the
past participle.
c. All the rest of their inflection is regular, according
to the rules of the New conjugation (except that ntogen
changes its c\iod) before t in the preterit and participle).
3. Thus, the simple forms are —
Indicative Peesent.
S.I barf
!ann
mag
mufe
foil
tt)ill
2 borfft
fannft
tnagft
mu^t
fonft
miflft
3 barf
!ann
mag
mu|
foH
tt)ill
P. I biirfen
fonnen
mogen
miiffen
follen
moEen
2 biirft
fonnt
mogt
mii^t
foEt
tDOEt
3 biirfen
fonnen
mogen
miiffen
foHen
moHen
122
YERBS.
[261-
Indicative Peeteeit.
S.I burfte
etc.
fonnte
etc.
mo(5^te
etc.
mu^te
etc.
foEte
etc.
n)oflte
etc
Subjunctive Peesbnt.
S.I biirfe
etc.
fonne
etc.
moge
etc.
miiffe
etc.
fone
etc.
ttJoKe
etc.
Subjunctive Peeteeit.
,
S.I biirfte
etc.
fonnte
etc.
mo(?^tc
etc.
miifete
etc.
foUtC
etc.
tDoUte
etc.
Impeeative.
S.2
moUe
P. 2
tt)om
Paeticiples.
Pres. biirfenb
Past geburft
fonnenb
gefonnt
mbgenb
gemo(i)t
miiffenb
gemu^t
foHenb
QefoEt
mollenb
QetDoEt
Infinitive.
biirfen
fonnen
mogen
miiffen
foHen
njoflen
4. The compound tenses are formed in the same
manner as those of other verbs — with one important
exception, namely —
* a. When used in connection with another verb (infin-
itive), the infinitive is substituted for the participle in
the perfect and pluperfect tenses.
Thus, er l^at e§ nt(f)t g e ! o n n t , but er ftat e§ nic^t tl)un f o n n e n
lie has not been able to do it; toa^^abi\i)X g e tt) o U t what have you
wished?, but \^t !)abt m6) fprei^en tDolIen you have wanted to
speak to me; xm ftaben n)arten miif f en ^^6 have been compelled to
wait.
5. The compound tenses are, then, as follows :
Peefect (first person the same in both modes).
s. I l^abe geburft, gefonnt, 2C.
or l^abe biirfen, fonnen, :c.
Indicative Plupeefect.
s. I 5atte geburft, gefonnt, :c.
or 5atte biirfen, fonnen, :c.
Subjunctive Plupeefect.
s. I 5citte geburft, gefonnt, 2C.
or :f)dtte biirfen, fonnen, it.
253] MODAL AUXnJAEIES. 123
FunmB (first person the same in both modes),
s. I tt)erbe biirfcn, fonnen, :c.
FuTUBE Pebfect (first person the same in both modes).
s. I tDcrbc Qeburft 5aBen, gefonnt l^aben, :c.
CoNDinONAIj.
s. I toiirbe biirfen, fonnen, 2C. .
CONDinONAIi PEEFECT.
s. I mxht geburft ^dbtn, Qefonnt f^aUn, :c.
Inflnitive Peefect.
Qcburft ^aben, gefonnt ijobm, k.
6. a. The absence of a complete conjugation of the correspond-
ing auxiliaries in English makes it necessary for us often to
render the German verb by a paraphrase: substituting, for
example, he able for caii (fbnnen) ; be compelled, have to, for must
(miijfen) ; he willing, wish, desire, for will (tDoIIen), and so on :
compare below, 253-9.
6. The same absence has led to the use of certain idiomatic
and not strictly logical constructions in English, in which the
auxiliary of past time, have, is combined with the principal verb
in the participle, instead of with the modal auxiliary ; while the
Germa^, more correctly, combines it with the latter. Thus, he
would not have done it is not, in German, er tDoHte e§ nid)t Qd^an
]&aben, unless it signifies he was not willing to have done it; if, as
usual, it means he ivould not have been willing to do it, it is er ^attc
e§ ntd)t tl)un mo Hen. Thus also, he might have come (that is, he
would have been able to come) is er ftdtte fommen fonnen, not er
fonnte gefommen fetn. The logical sense of the sentence may be
tested, and the proper German expression found, by putting the
corresponding verbal phrase in place of the simple auxiliary ui
the EngUsh.
USES OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.
252. Although the exposition of the meanmg of these auxilia-
ries belongs rather to the dictionary than to the grammar,
yet such is the frequency of their use, and the intimacy of their
relation to the verbs with which they are combined, that it is
desirable to give here some account of their chief uses.
253. ^iirfen. — 1. This represents two separate verbs of the
older language, the one meaning need, require^ the other dare,
124 VEEBS. [253^
venture, trust one^s self. The former sense is nearly lost, appear-
ing only occasionally with ttur and faum, and in a few other
phrases : thus, er barf nur befe^len he needs only to command. The
other has been in modern use modified into be authorized,
permitted, and, even where it approaches nearest to dare, means
properly rather /eeZ authorized, allow one's self. Thus, Dliemanb
barf |)Iunbern no one is permitted to plunder, barf ic| Bitten may I
ask? einem ^aifer barf bie 9Jitlbe nte fe:^Ien an emperor may never
lack clemency, er burfte i^n tn§ ^ngefiiit ^retfen he was allmued to
praise him to his face.
2. The preterit subjunctive biirfte signifies, by a quite special
use, a probable contingency: as, ba§ biirfte todt^x ]tin that is
likely to be true.
254. ^bnnen. — The original meaning of fonnen, as of our can,
is to know how ; but both have alike acquired the sense of be
able, and signify ability or possibility in the most general way,
whether natural, conceded, or logical. Thus, icf) !ann lefen, I
can read, meinetmegen !antt er ge^en he can (may) go, for all me,
iene ^age !i)nnen mieber fommen tlwse days may return (their
return is possible), er !ann f(^on gefommen fein he may possibly
have already arrived.
265. 9Jlogen. — This verb meant originally to have power, but
its use in that sense is now antiquated and quite rare : thus,
tDenn feiner fie ergriinben mag though none is able to fathom them.
At present, it has two leading significations :
1. That of power or capability as the result of concession on
the part of the speaker ; and that, either a real permission — as
er mag t^n Beftalten he may keep it — or as a logical concession or
allowance, as \)a^ mag mo^t 3U '^ixitu fommen that may happen at
times.
2. That of choice, liking, desire : thus, maS fie bir ni(f)t offen*
Baren mag what she does not choose to reveal to thee, ba§ m o d^ t e
er gar nt(^t ^bren Jie did not like to hear that at all. This meaning
is most frequent with the preterit subjunctive : thus, e§ m b (^ tc
!ein §unb fo Idnger leBen no dog would care to live longer thus,
au(i) t(f) m d) t^ mit bir fterBen I too would like to die with thee.
a. WoQtn has other uses (akin with the above, but of less
definite character), in which it approaches very near to equiva-
lence with the subjunctive tenses : thus, in expressing a wish,
mi3ge nie ber ^ag erf(i)etnen may the day never appear, mo^k bie
gauge SBelt un§ f)oren would that the whole world might hear us;
251] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 125
also, in clauses expressing design or purpose : as, bamit fie nii^t
ou^Gleiten mogen that they may not slip; or after an indefinite
pronoun : as, tx)a§ er au(^ t^un mag (or ll^iie) whatever he may do.
256. 9Jlufjen. — This, like ntogen, has wandered far from its
primitive meaning, which was find room or opportunity, and now
designates a general and indefinite necessity (as fbnnen a
correspondingly indefinite possibiUty), either physical, moral, or
logical. It is rendered by our he compelled to, he ohliged to, have
to, cannot hut, and the like. Thus, alle 5[Rcnfd)en miifjcn fterben
all men must die, luir miifjen trcu jctu we must be faithful, e§ mu^
in biefer SBcife (icjc[)e^en fein it must have taken place m this way,
toir mu^ten umtDenben we had to turn hack, :^eute mu^ bie ^(otfe
IDerben to-day the hell has to came into existence, man mu^te olau=
ben 07ie could not hut suppose, i(f) mn^te iiber bie Seute lad^en I could
not help laughing at the people.
a. As mu^t in English is present only, such phrases as those
above given should always be used in translating the other
tenses of miifjen.
257. (SoKen. — Its proper sense is originally that of duty or
ohligation, and in the past tenses, especially the preterit, it is
often still used in that sense : thus, e§ foHle fo, unb ni^t anber§
fein it ought to he thus, and not otherwise, er l^dtte fommen foKen
he ought to have come.
But to this meaning has now become added, in prevailing use,
the distinct implication of a personal authority, other than
that of the subject, as creating or enforcing the obligation :
thus :
1. Proceeding from the speaker ; in which case the auxiliary
intimates a command, a promise, a threat, or the like : as, bn
follft (^ott lieBen thou shalt love God, meine io(^ter foGen bic^ n)ar=
ten my daughters shall wait on thee, man brol^t, biefer ober iener
^onig fofle geflen xtju gie'^en it is threatened that this or that king
shall take the field against him.
2. Recognized by the speaker, but not proceeding from him ;
in which case foUen is to be rendered by to he to, to he intended
or destined to, or other like expressions : as, menn man gule^t
Jjalten fofi, mill man lieber ftier bleiben if one is finally to stop, one
will rather stay here, ma§ ]oU Qt]d:)ti}tn what is to happen? man
smeif elte metc^en 2Bea man einf (^lagcn f oHe they douhted which road
they were to take, ma§ mog \(i) T^ier moftl l^oren foKen what can I
126 VERBS. [257-
be meant to hear here? bariiBer foUtc er bitter enttauf(i)t tuerben he
was destined to be bitterly undeceived upon that point.
3. A special form of this use of follen is its employment to
report something that rests on the authority of others, is
asserted by them : thus, 35erBred)en, bie er Begangen l^aben foE
cjimes which he is claimed to have committed, t)iele follen an biefem
%aQt umgefommen fein many are said to have lost their lives on
tJiat day.
4. In conditional and hypothetical clauses, joKte is sometimes
used like our should, nearly coinciding in meaning with the
proper conditional tenses : thus, follf er auc^ ftriiudjeln iiBerall even
should he everijwhere stumble ; so, elliptically, in interrogation :
foEte ba§ tDaJr fein \is it possible that] that should be true?
258. StBoHen. — This signifies will, intent, choice, on the part
of the subject of the verb : thus, \d) mU h'x&i gleic^fall^ Begleiten
I will accompany thee likewise, feiner WxH ben 53e(^er geiDinnen no
one wants to win the goblet, n)a§ er 3terUrf)e§ aup^ren mti what-
ever he intends to bring forward that is pretty, id) tooUk i^n mit
(Sd^d^en Belaben I would load him with treasures.
a. Occasionally it indicates a claim or assertion (compare the
correlative use of follen above, 257-3) : thus, er mil bid) gefe^en
]j)aBen he claims to have seen you (will have it that he has done so).
b. Not infrequently it implies the exhibition of intent, or
impending action, and is to be rendered by be on the point of
and the like; thus, er tr)iE Q^l)tn he is on the pohit of going, t'm
SBaner, tDeld^er fterBen tDoIIte a peasant who was about to die, 33ra-
ten \mU t)erbrennen the roast is on the brink of burning.
259. The Modal Auxiliaries witJwut accompanying Verb.
All these auxiliaries are sometimes met with unaccompanied
by an infinitive dependent upon them. Thus :
1. When an infinitive is directly suggested by the context,
and to be supplied in idea : thus, baB jeber fo toE jein biirfe al§
er moEe that every one may be as wild as he will (be), id) t^ue, tt)a§
i(^ !ann I do what I can (do).
2. Very often, an adverb of direction with the auxiliary takes
the place of an omitted verb of motion : thus, tt)ir miif jen oud)
baran we mujst also [set] about it, fie ffinnen nid)t t)Dn ber 6teEe
they cannot [stir] from the place, n)ol)in f oEen bie whither are they
to [go], ber immer bat)on wolik who all the time wanted [to get]
262] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 127
away, er barf nt(i)t toeit genug l^inau§ he may rwt venture [to go]
far enough out.
3. Other ellipses, of verbs familiarly used with these, or
naturally suggested by the context, are not infrequent : thus,
tua^ foH id) what am I to [do] ? U)a§ foE biefe Utebe what is this talk
intended to [signify] ? bie fal((^en Sftinge merben ba§ ntd)t fonnen
the false 7nngs will not be able [to accomplish] that, tiic^t S5er=
goIbuHQ tDtll man mel^r one will no longer [have] gilding.
4. The auxiliary is thus often left with an apparent direct
object, really dependent on the omitted verb. In other cases
the object may represent the omitted verb — as, ^atte id) nuc^ ge-
freut, al§ id) e§ nod) ionnk had I enjotjed myself when I was still
able to do so — or be otherwise more really dependent on the
auxiliary. SBolIen is most often used thus as a proper tran-
sitive : thus, Tii(^t er mU euren Untergang not he wishes your ruin,
tt)a§ ®ott getDoflt what God has willed — also, mogen in the sense
of like: as, i^ mag i()n nic^t I do not like him — and fbnnen in the
sense of know (a language): as, fonnen ©ie 2)cut](^ do you know
German ?
260. SBiffen know, knmu how, has a conjugation nearly akin
with that of the modal auxiliaries : namely —
lYes. InMc. meiB, tuei^t, \m\^, miffcn, tDi^t, iDtffen.
Pres. Subj. miffe, etc.
Pret. Indie. wn^k, etc. Pret Subj. toix^k, etc.
Past Partic. gett)n^t.
[Exercise 17. Modal Auxiliaries.]
OLD OR STRONG CONJUGATION.
261. The characteristics of the Old or strong con-
jugation are : the change of radical vowel in the pre-
terit, and often in the past participle also ; and the
ending of the past participle in en.
With these are combined other peculiarities of inflection, of
less consequence, which will be found stated in detail below.
For the reason of the name *'01d" conjugation, see above, 246.3.
Change of Badical Vowel.
262. The changes of radical vowel in verbs of
the Old or strong conjugation are, in general, as fol-
lows :
128 VERBS. [262-
1. The vowel of the infinitive and that of the present
tense (indicative and subjunctive) are always the same.
But the vowel of the present is sometimes altered in the
second and third persons singular indicative : see below, 268.
2. The vowel of the preterit is always different from
that of the infinitive and present.
3. The vowel of the past participle is sometimes the
same with that of the infinitive and present, sometimes
the same with that of the preterit, and sometimes
different from either.
263. According to the varieties of this change, the verbs
are divided into three principal classes, each with several sub-
divisions.
Class I. Verbs whose infinitive, preterit, and participle have
each a different vowel.
Class II. Verbs in which the vowel of the participle is the
same with that of the present.
Class III. Verbs in which the vowel of the participle is the
same with that of the preterit.
a. This is merely a classification of conyenience, founded upon the
facts of the modem language. The latter have undergone too great
and too various alteration to allow of our adopting, with practical
advantage, a more thorough classification, founded on the character of
the original radical vowel, and the nature of the changes it has suffered,
264. First Class. Verbs whose infinitive, preterit, and par*
ticiple have each a different vowel.
I. 1. Verbs having the vowels t — a — u in the three f orm«
specified.
Example : jingen — fang — Qefunaen (sing, sang, sung).
To this subdivision belong 16 verbs, all of them having roots
ending in ng, n!, or nb.
2. Vowels i — a — o. 6 verbs : root ending in tin or mm.
Example ; fpinnen— jpann— gefponnen (spin, span, spun).
3. Vowels e — a — o. 22 verbs.
Example : bre(^en — brac^ — gcbrD(f)en (break, brake,
broken).
One verb, Qcbarcn, has irregularly d for e in the infinitive.
266] OLD OK STRONG CONJUGATION. 129
4. Vowels i or te — a — e. 3 verbs.
Examples : fi^en — f a^ — Gefeffen (sit, sat, sat).
Hepen — lag — gelegen (lie, lay, lain).
These are properly verbs belonging to the first division of the
next class, II. 1, but have their vowel irregularly varied in the
infinitive.
265. Second Class. Verbs having the same vowel in the in-
finitive and participle.
II. 1. Vowels c — a — e. 10 verbs.
Example : fe^en — \ai} — gefe^en (see, saw, seen).
Three verbs properly belonging to this division have changed
their vowel to t or te in the infinitive, and thus become a fourth
division of the first class (see above).
2. Vowels a — u — a. 10 verbs.
Example : jc^Iaflcn— f(^Iug— Qef (^laQcn (slay, slew, slain),
3. Vowels a — te or t — a. 16 verbs.
Examples : fallen — fiel — gef alien (fall, fell, fallen).
Sangen — l^ing — ge^angen (hang, hung,
hung).
4. Vowels an, u, or o — te — an, u, or o. 4 verbs.
Examples : laufen — lief — gelaufen (leap) run,
rufen — rief — gerufen cry.
fto^en — ftie§ — gefto^en thrust.
266. Third Class. Verbs having the same vowel in the
preterit and participle.
m. 1. Vowels ei — t — i. 22 verbs.
Example : bet^en — bi^ — geBifjen (bite, bit, bitten).
2. Vowels ei — te — te. 16 verbs.
Example : treiben — trieB ^ getrieBen (drive, drove, driven).
These two divisions differ only in the length of the vowel of
the preterit and participle. One verb, I)et^en, has the participle
gel&ei^en (below, 267).
3. Vowels te or ii — o — o. 24 verbs (only 3 with u).
Examples : fliegen — flog — geflogen (fly, flew, fkmn).
liigen — log — gelogen lie (speak falsely).
4. Vowels au — o — o. 4 verbs.
Example : f augen — fog — gef ogen suck.
130 VEBBS. [266-
5. Vowels, t, e, d, b, or a — o — o. 20 verbs.
Examples : fUmmen — flomm — geflommen climb.
tt)eben — toob — geiDoben (weave,wove,woven).
lodgen — mog — geiDOfien weigh.
f(S^tr)bren — ](^tt)or— Qefi^tDoren (swear, swore,
sworn).
jc^allen — f(^oE — gej(i)oEen sound.
All the verbs in this division are stragglers, irregularly altered
from other modes of conjugation. Of those having e in the in-
finitive (Uke tueben) there are eleven ; of the other forms, only-
one, two, or three each.
6. Vowels t — u — u. 2 verbs.
Example : f ^inben — f (^unb — gefdjunben flay.
These, also, are stragglers, from I.l.
267. Verbs with irregular change of vowel.
1. fommen — !am — gefommen (come, came, come):
an exception under 1.3, the original vowel of the infinitive being e.
2. 1)i\^t\i — l)ie^ — ge^et^en he called:
an exception under III.2, as noted above.
3. geften — ging — gegangen go :
an exception under II.3, the original infinitive being gangan.
4. fte^en — ftanb — geftanben stand:
in Old High-German, belonging to II. 2 (ftantan — ftuont— ftantan).
6. tl^un — tftat — gef^an (do, did, done).
FORMATION AND INFLECTION OF THE SIMPLE VERBAL FORMS.
268. Present Tense,
The first person singular and all the plural persons
of the present indicative, together with the whole of
the present subjunctive, are, without exception, reg-
ularly formed (see 237), and need no remark. But the
second and third persons singular of the indicative are
subject to various irregularities. - 2-"*^
^ Verbs having c as radical vowel in the first person change
it to ie or t in the second and third — short e becoming i, and
long e becoming te (that is, long i: see 18) : thus, ^elfe, l)tlfft, l)i(ft;
fte^Ie, ftieWft, ftiel)lt; effen, iffeft, i^t; feften, fietift, jiebt. But^
OLD OR STRONG CONJUGATION. 131
d. A few verbs leave the e unchanged : namely, ge^en, [tel^en,
l^eben, meBen, pfleaen, betDegen, melfen, genefen — besides a few
which here, as in others of their forms, follow the New or
weak conjugation.
h. Two or three verbs that have long e in the first person
shorten it to i in the second and third: namely, ne^men, nimmft,
nimmt; treten, trittft, tritt. @eben makes either cicbfl, gicBt, or
gibft, gibt.
r2r)Verbs having a as radical vowel in the first person modify
it (to d) in the second and third : thus, trage, trcigft, trdgt ; laffe,
Id^eft, Idfet. But—
a. The a remains unchanged in f(f)affen and fd)aflcn, and in
other verbs which substitute in part the forms of the New or
weak conjugation.
3. Saufen, f aufen, and fto^en also modify the vowel in the same
persons ; fommen does so sometimes, but not according to the
best usage ; Iof(i)en forms Ii](i)eft, \\\^t
4. gliegen and about a dozen other verbs of its class (III.3)
have a second and third person in eu — as flicge, flcugft, fleugt;
liige, leugft, leugt — which are now antiquated, and only met with
in archaic and poetic style. One or two that have roots ending
in )) change this letter to cC) after eu.
5. The tendency to reject the e of the endings eft and et is
stronger in these persons with altered vowel than anywhere else
in conjugation. The e of eft is rarely retained except after a
sibilant— as in eriifrfjcft, Id^eft, given above. The e of et is always
omitted, even when preceded by t, i^, b ; hence, after these
letters, the t, being no longer audible, is also dropped in writing.
The verbs which thus lose the ending of the third pers. sing,
pres. indicative are fed)ten, fid)t; berften, birft; flerf)ten, flid)t;
gelten, gilt; fc^eltcn, fd)ilt; it)crben, toirb ; l^ilten, I)dlt; ratten [raten],
rdtt) [rdt] ; braten, brdt ; bieten, beul. Only laben forms Idbt.
^265>. Preterit Tense.
I. 1. The preterit indicative is formed by the change
of radical vowel alone, wdthout an added termination,
and therefore ends in the final letter of the root, what-
ever that may be. But —
a. A few roots, ending in the infinitive with a double con-
sonant, and lengthening their vowel in the preterit, reduce the
132 VEEBS. [269-
double consonant to a single one : namely, f d)reden, f (i)ra! ; treffen,
traf; Bitten, Bat; Barfen, But; fd^affen, f(^uf ; faEen, ftel; fommen,
!am.
h. A few others (fifteen), on the contrary, shortening their
vowel in the preterit, double the following consonant ; and three
of them, ending in b, change it to tt : namely, kiben, Utt ; f (^ttei=
ben, f (^nitt ; fieben, f ott.
All of these save three (triefen and fieben, 111.3 ; and faufen,
111,4) are of division IILl : e. g., teiten, ritt, Qeritten {ride, rode,
ridden).
c. More isolated cases are gie'&en, gOQ ; fta^en, l^ieB ; ji^en, fa^.
For Qel^en, aing ; fteften, ftanb ; tt)un, t:^at, see 267.
2. The second person singular strongly inclines to the abbrevi-
ated form of the ending, [t instead of eft, and in ordinary use
rejects the e except after a sibilant or in order to avoid a very
harsh combination of consonants.
3. Traces of an ending e in the first and third persons are,
very rarely, met with : especially f a^e, for f a^ saw ; also Bielte.
Tor tDurbe, from n)erben, see 239.4c.
4. A few verbs have a double form in the preterit, of which
one is in more common use, the other archaic or provincial.
But fc^tt)or and f(^n)ur are of nearly equal authority : of the
others, those most often met with are :^uB, for ;^oB (!)eBen, 111.5),
and ftunb, for ftanb (ftelf)en).
This double form (as in like cases in English : e. g. , hegan or 'begun) is
due to the fact that in the ancient language many verbs had different
vowels in the singular and plural of the preterit indicative, both of
which, in the later usage, appear in either number of a few verbs. The
vowel of the subjunctive preterit agreed with that of the indicative plu-
ral, not the singular : whence the double forms of the subjunctive, noted
below.
n. {1^ The preterit subjunctive is regularly formed
from tne indicative by adding e (in the first person),
and modifying the vowel, if the latter be capable of
modification: thus, jang, ftingc; \a\), fdt)e; fdjlug, fdjliige;
fiel, fiele; flog, floge; fd}tt)or or fdj^itr, f(^ti:)ore or fc^tDiire;
t^at, tl)ate. But—
a. Some verbs have a double form of the subjunctive, of
which one differs in vowel from the indicative : thus, all in divis-
ion 1.2 have a second in d— e. g., fpann, fpdnne or fpbnne— which
271] OLD OE STEONG CONJUGATION. 133
is as common as that in a, or more so ; and others (especially
in 1.3) have second forms in 5 or ii : e. g., gait, Qdlte or golte, \Daxh,
tt)arbe or rvixxht ; the latter being the preferred one, probably as
better distinguished from the present gelte, tDerBc, etc. All that
have two indicative forms have the two corresponding sub-
junctives : thus, ftcinbe and pnbe, pBe and pbe.
270. Imperative.
1. The imperative singular regularly ends in e, the plural in et
or t, adding those endings respectively to the root of the verb
as shown in the infinitive : thus, fingen, fittGC ; f(f)Iagen, ](!)IaGe ;
rufcn, rufe ; fommen, fomme ; Qcften, ge^e. But—
2. Verbs which in the second pers. sing, of the pres. indicative
change e to i or ie (268.1) take the latter also in the imperative
singular (not in the plural) — at the same time rejecting the e of
the ending.
Thus, l^elfen, l^ilf ; fte^len, ftiel)l; effen, i^; fe^en, fie"^.
a. So, also, verbs that have an archaic second person in eu
(268.4) have a corresponding archaic imperative : thus, fliegen,
fliege or fleug. (Jrlojc|en (268.3) forms erUf(^. But verbs that
modify a, an, o to d, du, o (268.2,3) retain in the imperative the
unchanged vowel and the ending: thus, tragen, Irage; laufeti,
laufc ; fto^en, fto^e.
6. Exceptions are: mxhtn (tuirft) has iDerbe; feT^en (fte!)ft) has
either jie!)e or fie:^.
3. The e of the singular ending is dropped much more freely
in the other verbs of this than in those of the New conjugation,
and in some — as fomm, la^ — is almost never used.
271. Past Participle.
1. The ending of the participle is en.
The e of the ending is ordinarily retained in all cases, but may
be occasionally dropped, especially after a vowel or )): thus,
gefet)en or geje^^n. When, however, the participle is used as an
adjective and declined, it is subject to the same abbreviation as
other adjectives ending in en (120.3) : thus, t)crgangner ^age of
past days, t)erf (!)tt)unbncr ^rac^t of vanished splendor.
2. A number of participles share in the irregular changes of
a final radical consonant exhibited by the preterit : namely —
a. All those that shorten in the preterit the vowel of the infin-
itive (269.1.15): thus, reiten, ritt, gerittenj leiben, lilt, gelitten j
faufen, foff, gefoffen.
134 YEKBS. [271-
6. Of those that lengthen the vowel (269.1.1a), only one,
namely Bitten, hat, Qebeten ;— but treffen, traf, Qetroffen ; f aflen, fiel,
QcfaHen, etc.
c. Also, gteften (gog), gegocen; ji^en (fa^), oefeffen; ge^en (ginQ),
Qegangen; fte^^en (ftanb), geftanben; iftun (t^at), gctftan.
3. (Jffen eat has the prefix twice : thus, Qegeffen (geffen from
Qe=effen, and gc again prefixed).
272. Mixed Conjugation.
The same tendency which has converted a large number of
the "irregular" verbs in English into "regular" has been active,
though to a much less degree, in German also. Besides those
verbs which have entirely changed their mode of infiection, and
therefore no longer require to be made any account of under
the Old or strong conjugation, there are others which form a
part of their inflection by the one method and a part by the
other, or which have equivalent forms of either conjugation.
Thus,
1. Some have a double series of forms through the whole or
nearly the whole conjugation : the forms of the Old conjugation
being then either poetic and unusual (as in xa^m),.or else
belonging to the verb in certain special meanings (as in tDtegen)
or in its transitive use (as in bleirf)en).
2. Some have certain forms of either conjugation — especially
the second and third pers. ind. present and second sing,
imperative, with differences of use as above stated ; most often
with intransitive meaning for the Old forms : such are jc^rerfeit/
Dcrberben, fieben, lofd)en, fd^mclgen, fdjtrenen, and others.
3. Some have retained only a participle of the Old conju-
gation; and even that in special uses or connections. The
participle is in general the form that has maintained itself most
persistently.
These irregularities, as well as those which are explained in
more detail above, are exhibited in a table of irregulak verbs,
given on pp. 278-284
^^73)) Examples of Verbs of the Old or Strong Conjuga-
tion.
S3inbcn (1.1). ^ommen (267.1).
Principal Parts.
Mrtbcn, banb, geBunben, fpmmen, !am, gefommen,
273]
OLD OR STEONG CONJUGATION.
135
Indicativk *^
Peesent, I bind etc.
I come etc.
s. I buibe
fomme
2 binbeft
3 binbet
tommft
fommt
p. I binben
fommen
2 binbet
fommt
3 btnben
fommen
Pbeteutt, I hound eta.
I came etc.
s. I banb
fam^
2 banbft
3 banb
famft
fam
p. I banben
famen
2 banbet
famt
3 banben
famen
Peefect, J/iave6oMndetc.
I have c(yme etc.
s. I fiaU gebnnben
etc.
bin gefommen
etc.
Plupeefect, I had hound etc.
I had come etc.
s. I 5atte Qebunben
etc.
mar gefommen '
etc.
Futuee, I shall bind etc.
I shall come etc.
s. I tt)erbe binben
merbe fommen
etc.
etc.
FxjT. Peef., I shall have bound etc.
I shall have come etc.
s. I mxht gebunben ftaben
etc.
merbe gefommen fein
etc.
Subjunctive.
Peesent, I may bind etc.
I may come etc
s. I binbe
fomme
2 binbeft
3 binbe
fommeft
fomme
p. I binben
fommen
2 binbet
fommet
3 binben
fommen
136
YERBS.
[273-
Peeteeit, I might bind etc.
I might come etc.
s. I banbe
!dme
2 bdnbeft
3 bdnbe
fdmeft
fame
p. I bdnben
fdmen
2 bdnbet
fdmet
3 bdnben
fdmen
Peefect, I may have b<mnd etc.
I may have come etc.
s. I l^abe gebunben
etc.
fei gefommen
etc.
Plupeef., I might have hound etc.
I might have come etc
s. I l^dtte Qebunben
etc.
tDdre gefommen
etc.
FuTiJEE, I shall bind etc.]
I shall come etc.
s. I tperbe btnben
toerbe fommen
etc.
etc.
FxjT. Peef., I shall have hound etc.
I shall Imve come etc.
s. I tuerbe Qebunben l^aben
etc
merbe gefommen fein
etc.
Conditional.
Conditional, 1 should bind etc.
I should come etc.
s. I tt)urbe binben
tt)urbe fommen
etc.
etc.
CoND. Peef. I should have hound etc.
I should have come e\
s. I ttjiirbe gebunben l^aben
etc.
tDiirbe gefommen fein
etc.
Imperativk
bind etc.
come etc.
s. 2 binbc
fomme, fomm
3 binbe er
fomme er
p. I binben tt)tr
fommen ton
2 btnbet
fommt
3 binben fie
fommen fie
276] PASSIVE. 137
Inhnitive.
Present, io hind to come
binben fommcn
Peefect, to have hound io have come
flcbunbcn \jabtn Qefommen fein
Pabticiples.
Pbesent, hinding coming
Binbenb fommcnb
Past, hound come
oebunbcn gcfommcn
[Exercise 18. Yekbs of the Old or Strong Conjugation.]
PASSIVE VEKBS.
274. The passive voice is a derivative conjugation of
a transitive verb, in which that person or thing which
in the simple conjugation is the object of the transitive
action becomes a subject of the suffering of that action :
thus, active, ber §unb bi§ ben Snaben the dog bit the hoy ;
passive, ber Slnabe tDurbe Horn §nnbe gebtffen the boy was
bitten by the dog.
a. That a kind of passive is also formed from some intran-
sitive verbs is pointed out below (279.2,3).
b. The passive is mainly a grammatical device for directing
the principal attention to the recipient of the action, and the
action as affecting him, and putting the actor in a subordinate
position.
275. The German passive, like the English, is
formed by the aid of an auxiliary verb — but by a
different one, namely the verb tDer ben become.
276. 1. To form the passive of any verb, its past participle
is combined with iDerben, throughout the whole conjugation of
the latter. In this combination —
a. The past participle of the auxihary, wherever it occurs, is
abbreviated from getoorben to worbcn.
h. The participle of the main verb is put after the proper
verbal forms (simple tenses) of the auxiUary, but before its in-
finitives or participles.
138
VERBS.
[276-
This is in accordance with the general rule for the position
of any word limiting an infinitive or participle: see below,
348.2, 358.
2. Hence, to produce any given person, tense, and
mode of the passive of a verb, combine its past parti-
ciple with the corresponding person, tense, and mode of
tperben.
277. Synopsis of the Forms of tuerben and of a Pas-
sive Verb,
Indicative.
Peesent, I become etc.
s. I merbe
Peetebit, I became etc.
s. I tt)arb, iDurbe
Peepect, I have become etc.
s. I Bin getDorben
Plupeefect, Ihad become etc.
s. I \oax Qeraorben
FuT¥EE, IshaU become etc.
s. I tDcrbe tuerben
Fur. Peef., I shall have become etc.
s. I tDcrbe Qemorben fein
I am loved eto,
tt)crbe fleltebt
I loas loved eto.
ttjarb, tDurbe gelicBt
I have been loved etc.
Bin geliebt iDorben
IJiad been loved etc.
xoax gelieBt morben
I shall be loved etc.
tt)erbe geliebt merben
I shall have been loved etc.
iDcrbe geliebt ttjorben fcin
Subjunctive.
Peesent, Imay become etc.
s. I merbe
Peeteeit, I migM become eiXi.
s. I wiirbe
Pbefect, Iwxiy have become etc.
s. I fei gett)orben
Plupeefect, I might have become etc.
s. I mare gen)orben
FuTUEE, I shall become etc.
s. I merbe merben
FuT. Peef., IshaU have become etc.
s. I tperbe geiDorben fein
I mxiy be loved etc.
tt)erbe geliebt
I might be loved etc.
njiirbe geliebt
I may have been loved etc.
fei geliebt tt)orben
I might have been loved etc.
tt)are geliebt ttiorben
I shall be loved etc.
tt)erbe geliebt ii^erben
I shall have been loved etc.
tt)erbc geliebt toorben fein
279] PASSIVE. 139
Conditional.
CoNDiTioNAii, I should hecome etc. I should be loved etc.
s. I miirbe trerben miirbe Gdiebt iDerben
CoND. Peef., I should have hecome etc. I should have been loved etc.
s. I tDiirbe fletDorben jein njiirbc geliebt toorben fein
Imperative.
become etc. be loved etc.
s. 2 tDcrbe toerbe gelieBt
Infinitives.
Peesent, to become to be loved
tuerben geUeBt tDerben
Peefect, to have become to have been loved
QctDorben fein geliebt tDorben jein
Participles.
Peesent, becoming being loved
trerbenb geliebt tDerbenb
Past, become been loved
getDorbcn Gcltebt toorben
Bemark : geliebt tt)orben is used only in formiag the compound
tenses, since the past participle of a transitive verb has by itself
a passive value.
278. The passive voice of a transitive verb has one peculiar
form, a kind ot future passive participle, formed from the pres-
ent active participle, by putting ju before it: thus, gu lieBenb.
It implies a possibility or a necessity: thus, ein gu Iie6enbe§ ^inb
a child to be loved — i. e., which may or should he loved. It can
only be used as an attributive adjective, and therefore hardly
deserves to be called a participle.
a. It is in reality a quite modern and anomalous derivative
from an infinitive, answering attributively to the infinitive with
3U taken predicatively (343.in.l&) : as, ba§ ^inb ift gu Ueben tJw
child is to he loved — i. e., may or should be loved.
279. 1. Transitive verbs, with hardly an exception, may form
a passive voice, with a complete scheme of conjugation, as given
above.
§aben have is not used in the passive.
140 VERBS. [279-
2. Many intransitives (especially such as denote a mode of
action by a person) may form an impersonal passive — that is, a
passive third person singular, with indefinite subject e§, or with
omitted subject (291).
Thus, e§ tDurbc geia(^t utib gefunfien there was laughing and
singing, urn ^ntttjort tt)irb Qcbeten an answer is requested.
a. These passives do not represent any subject as suffering
an action, but simply represent the action, without reference to
an actor.
3. Those intransitives which, by a pregnant construction
(227.2?>), govern an accusative along with a factitive predicate,
are also convertible into passives in corresponding phrases:
thus, fie tDerben aw^ bem <5(i)lafe gejc^rieen they are screamed out
of sleep, er tDurbe frei Qcfpro^en he was acquitted (declared free).
280. 1. Verbs which govern two accusatives (227.3), except
le^retl, take in the passive the second accusative, either as ob-
ject (fragen, etc.), or as predicate nominative (nennen, etc.).
2. Transitive verbs which, in addition to their direct object,
govern a genitive (219.2) or a dative (222.1.1), retain the latter
along with the passive : thus, ber Wiener tDurbe be§ 2)ieBfta^I§
anQcflaflt the servant was accused of robbery, afle§ tt)irb einem
greunbc erIauBt everything is permitted to a friend.
3. Of the intransitives that form an impersonal passive, such
as govern a genitive or dative take the same case in the pas-
sive : thus, e§ tDirb melner gefc^ont lam spared, i^m tt)urbe gejolfen
lie was helped.
281. The passive is veiy much less frequently used in
German than in English, being replaced by other modes of
speech. Sometimes a full active expression, with subject and
object, is employed instead. Most often, the intent of the pas-
sive form of speech is attained by using an active verb with the
indefinite subject man one, etc. (185.) : thus, man fagt it is said,
ein ^efe^, tDcltfie^ man erlie^ a laic which was passed. Not infre-
quently, a reflexive phrase is substituted, the return of the
action upon the subject being accepted as signifying the latter's
endurance of the action : thus, e§ f ragt fi(f) it is questioned (asks
itself), ber ©diliifjel fiat fic^ gefunben the key has been found.
282. 1. By its use of tuerben become instead of fctn he as auxiliary
forming the passive, the German is able clearly to distinguish between
the actual endurance of an action, and existence in a state wtiieh is the
283] EEFLEXIVES. 141
result of such action. Thus, alle genfter tt)erben nadj unb na(^ mit
jteppid^en be^cingt all windows are hy degrees hung with tapestry, and rt)ie
atte ^enftei* mit Xeppic^en bepugt finb as all the windows are hung with
tapestry; elugelaben wiirben fie they were invited, and eingetaben fmbfieatt'
they are all invited— the latter phrases, in either pair, signifying the con-
dition to which the act described by the former led. As we use the same
verb, he, in both senses, of copula and of passive auxiliary (accepting
the simple statement of the resulting condition as sufficiently implying
the suffering of the action), our expression is liable to ambiguity— an
ambiguity which we are sometimes forced into removing by the use of
the phrase he heing: thus distinguishing it is being cleaned (eg n)irb
gereinigt) from it is cleaned (eg ift gereinigt). And our sense of the
distinction is so obscured that the English pupil finds it one of his
greatest difficulties to know when to translate to he before a participle by
fein, and when by luerben. Only assiduous practice in noting the distinc-
tion as made in German will remove this difficulty. A practical rule
which will answer in a great number of cases is this : if, on turning the
expression into an active form, the sam;e tense (pres. or pret.) is required,
it was passive and requires iuevbeit ; if the tense has to be changed to a
perfect (perf. or plup.), fein is the proper word. Thus they were invited
is fie ttjurben eingelaben when it means / invited them, but fie njaren ein=
getaben when it means I had invited them; and fmb is used in eingelaben
finb fie aWf because it means I have invited them.
2. The German itself sometimes loosely accepts the statement of con-
dition, with the pres. or pret. of fein, in Meu of the full passive ex-
pression in perf. or pluperfect. Thus, ber ^ifc& Wax gefangen the fish had
heen caught (for wax gefangen morben), fie ift ermorbet auf ber £onbner
©tra^e she has heen murdered, in London street.
REFLEXIVE VERBS.
283. A reflexive verb is one that represents the
action as exerted by the subject upon itself.
1. Such verbs are formally transitive, since they take an
object in the accusative; they all, then, take l^aBen as their
auxiliary.
2. Logically, or according to their real meaning, they are
rather to be regarded as intransitive, since they do not signify
an action exerted by the subject upon any object outside of
itself : thus, \^ f iirc^te mic^ (literally I frighten myself) I am
afraid is in idea as much intransitive as i(^ gittere I tremble.
And, as noticed above (281), a reflexive verb is often used even
in a passive sense, the idea of the endurance of the action on
the part of the subject being more conspicuous to the mind
than that of its exertion of the action.
142
VERBS.
[284-
284. Such a verb, therefore, takes as its object a re-
flexive pronoun, of the same person and number with
its subject.
1. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second persons are
the same as the personal ; that of the third person is fi(^, in
both numbers (155).
2. The reflexive pronoun is placed where any other pronoun
would be placed as object of the verb : namely, after the verb
In the simple tenses, but before the infinitives and participles.
285. Conjugation of a Reflexive Verb.
©td^ freuen to rejoice (rejoice or gladden one's self).
Principal Parts.
©ic^ freuen, freute fic^, gefreut.
Indicative.
s. I \^ frcuc mi(^
2 bu freueft hi^
3 er freut \\^
p. I h)ir freuen un§
2 i:^r freut eu(^
3 fie freuen fief)
s. I t^ freute m\^
etc.
Peesent.
S. I
x6) 5a'6e mtc^ fiefreut
bu ^aft bt(^ gefreut
er ):jat fie!) gefreut
tt)ir ftaben un§ gefreut
iftr !)abt eu(^ gefreut
fie l^oben \x^ gefreut
s. I \6) l^attc mi(^ gefreut
etc.
s. I x$) merbc m\^ freuen
2 bu iDirft bi(^ freuen
3 er tt)irb \\(i) freuen
Peeteeit.
Peefect.
PliUPEEFECT.
Subjunctive.
i(^ freue mid^
bu freueft h\^
er freue fid^
n)ir freuen un§
i'^r freuet eud^
fie freuen fid^
id^ freute mid^
etc.
x^ l)aht mx^ gefreut
bu ^abeft bid^ gefreut
er ):jahz fic^ gefreut
tt)ir l^aben un§ gefreut
i^r fjobtt eud^ gefreut
fie IjaUn fid) gefreut
x^ ^dtte mid^ gefreut
etc.
FUTUEE.
id^ tt)erbe mid^ freuen
bu tt)erbeft btd^ freuen
er ttjerbe fid^ freuen
286] EEFLEXIYES. 143
P. I njtr tuerben un§ freuen ton tDcrben un§ freuen
2 i^r merbet eu(f) freuen \t\x tuerbet eu(!) freuen
3 fie n)erben fid) freuen fie tt)erben fi^ freuen
FUTUEE PeEFECT.
s. I \6) merbe mic^ gefreut ftaben td^ tDerbc mid) gefreut 5aBen
etc. etc.
' Conditional.
CoNDinoNAii. CoNDinoNAii Peefect,
s. I ic^ n)iirbe mi(f) freuen id) tDiirbe mid) gefreut :^aben
etc. etc.
Imperative.
SiNQTJIiAR. PLUEAIi,
1 freuen mx un§
2 freue bi^, freue bu hx^ freut eud^, freut \^x tu(i)
3 freue er \x^ freuen fie fid)
Infinitive.
Present. Peefect.
fi^ freuen fn^ gefreut 5aBcn
Participles.
Peesent. Past.
fi(^ freuenb fic^ gefreut
Bemarks. 1. The reflexive pronoun is not given with the
participle in the principal parts, since, that participle being in
transitive verbs of a passive character, it can take no object
except as used with an auxiliary in forming the compound
tenses.
2. The fid) given with the infinitives and participles is, of
course, only representative of the whole body of reflexive
pronouns, with all of which those forms, not being restricted
to any one person or number, may be construed.
286. Any transitive verb in the language may be
used refiexively, or take a reflexive pronoun as object ;
but none are properly regarded as reflexive verbs
except —
1. Those which are only used with a reflexive object: as,
fi(^ f(^dmen be ashamed, \\6) fe'^nen long, fief) vrjiherfefeen resist.
144 VERBS. [286-
2. Those which are usually or often used reflexively, and
have a special meaning in that use, the object not maintaining
its independence, but combining with the verb to form a single
conception, the equivalent of an intransitive verb : as, |i(^ l^iiten
beware (i)uten guard), fid^ fteEen make believe, pretend (fteHen
plme), fid^ uerlaffen rely (t)erlaffen quit).
287. 1. A reflexive verb is thus often related to the simple
verb as a corresponding intransitive to a transitive — thus,
freuen give pleasure to, \x^ ^xzutn feel pleasure, fiir^ten fear, \i^
furd)tcn be afraid. But —
2. A few are intransitive, and of nearly the same meaning, both
as simple verbs and as reflexives : thus, irren and fi(^ irren be
mistaken, nal^en and fid) na^en draw nigh, ganfen and \\^ janfen
quarrel.
288. 1. An intransitive verb is much more often used tran-
sitively (227.26) with a reflexive object than with one of another
character : thus, er arbeitet unb Iduft fid^ tobt [tot] he works and runs
himself to death, bu follft bid^ einmal fait effen thou shalt eat thyself
full fUt. satisfied) for once.
2. An intransitive reflexive is sometimes used impersonally
instead of an intransitive passive (279.2), especially with adverbs
of manner, to express the action itself, without reference to a
subject : thus, e§ tangt fic^ Vxtx gut it is good dancing here, lebl&aft
Irdumt fici^'» unter biefem ^aum it is lively dreaming under this
tree, e§ ficl^t fi(^ gar artig in hk Rni!\6)tn t)\ntm it is very pretty
looking into the carriages.
289. 1. A considerable number of reflexive verbs take an
additional remoter object (not personal) in the genitive (219.3).
a. The construction of a reflexive verb with the genitive is
notably easier than of the same verb used otherwise than
reflexively— thus, id) erinnere m\^ meineS S5erge!^en§ I remember
(remind myself of ) my fault, but \^ erinnere \i)n an fein SSergel^en
I remind him of his fault — ^yet many of these also frequently
make their construction by the aid of a preposition, and many
others admit only a prepositional construction : thus, \^ jjer*
laffe mi(^ auf il^n I rely on him.
2. Only two or three reflexives take a remoter object in the
dative : such are \\^ nafjtn approach, fid) toiberfefeen oppose, fic^
bequemen submit.
292j IMPERSONALS. 145
290. A small number of verbs are used with a reflexive ob-
ject in the dative, in a manner quite analogous with the true
reflexive verbs, and therefore form a class of improper reflex-
ives.
a. Most of these require in addition a direct object in the ac-
cusative : thus, \6) ma^e mir fein Utirec^t an / make no unjust
claim, \^ bilbc miu ba§ nic^t ein I(3U) not imagine that, bu getraueft
^ir t)iel thou darest much. But ]i^ fd^meic^eln flatter one's self
is intransitive.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
291. 1. An impersonal verb, or a verb used imperson-
ally, is one by means of whicli the action implied in the
verb is represented as exerted, without reference to a
subject or actor.
2. Such a verb stands always in the third person
singular, and either without a subject, or, more usually,
with the indefinite subject e^ it.
Thus, e§ reflnet it rains, i. e. there is rain falling; e§ flopft it
knocks, i. e. there is a knocking; am ^angeg buftet'^ unb Ieu(i)tef §
on the Ganges are sweet odors and shining sights; mict) biiuft me
seems, I e. it seems to me; \t)n ^ungerte him hungered, i. e. he was
hungry (227.2c).
292. No verbs in German are absolutely and ex-
clusively impersonal : verbs impersonally used may be
classified as follows :
1. Verbs describing the phenomena of nature, which are
almost invariably impersonal in virtue of their meaning : thus,
e§ ftaQelt it hails, e§ ^ai aef c^neit it has snowed, es tt)irb bonnern unb
Bli^en it will thunder and lighten.
2. Certain verbs which by the idiom of the language are ordi-
narily used in an impersonal form: as, biinfen and bdud^ten
[beui^ten] seem, geliiften desire, Qelingen v^ove successful; and a
number of verbs signifying personal conditions and feelings, as
l^ungern hunger, biirflen thirst, frieren freeze, fd^minbeln be giddy,
Qrauen he horror-struck, etc.
a. All this class of impersonals take an object designating the
person affected by their action, or the subject of the feeling or
condition they describe: some take an accusative, others a
dative, others either an accusative or dative (222.n.le ; 227.2c) ;
146 VERBS. [292-
thus, mid) oeliiftete md)t nac^ bem t^euren [teuren] So'^n I should
not long for the costly prize, biirftet beinen Seinb, fo trdnfe iftn if
thine enemy is thirsty, give him to drink, mir Qrauet t)or ber (Spotter
5fleibe I dread the envy of the gods, e§ biinft mir or mid) it seems
to me. '
3. Almost any verb, transitive or intransitive, is liable to oc-
cur in impersonal use — if transitive, along with its ordinary
object.
Thus, mie fteftfg mit ben ^ottern Jiow fares it with the gods?
crQe!)f^ eu(^ tt)olf)( if it goes well with you, eg fetjlte an C)oIa there
was lack of wood, pibfeltd) regt eg fic^ im Utofire suddenly there is a
stir in the reeds, eg treibt il^n ben ^reig gu eriDerben he is impelled
to gain the prize, eg erf orbert eine ^re^ung it requires a turning,
eg bebarf ber ^nna^me nic^t it needs not the assumption.
a. The very common use of eg giebt it gives (i. e. there are given
or furnished), in the sense of there is or are, with following ac-
cusative, requires special notice : thus, 'ta Qdb eg ©c^aufelflii^Ic
there were rocking-chairs there, eg giebt t)iele, bie alter finb, there
are many who are older, "iid)^ eg meniger S()riften gdbe alg 6aracenen
that there were fewer Cliristians than Saracens.
4. Impersonal phrases formed with the verbs jein and merben
along with adverbial of adjective adjuncts, describing personal
conditions or states of feeling, and always accompanied by a
dative designating the person to whom such conditions belong,
are very frequent.
Thus, mir ift gang anberg i\\ ^O^ufft [^ut] I feel quite otherwise
(it is to me quite otherwise in mind), il^m Xoai jo bange he was so
apprehensive, mie mir tt)ol^I ift how well I feel! mie ift mir benn
Iww is it with me then ? — nun tt)irb mir immer bdnger now I grow
more and more anxious, mie n)e^ tDirb mir how I am beginning to
suffer ! je falter eg ift, befto l^ei^er tt)irb mir the colder it is, the Jwtter
I become, [{^m. iff g, alg ob'g ^n l^iniiberrief he feels as if he were
invited across.
5. Impersonal expressions are often made from intransitive
verbs in a passive or reflexive form (see 279.2, 288.2).
Thus, l)eute ^benb tt)irb getanat n)erben there will be dancing this
evening, eg fifet fi(^ fd)Ie(^t l^ier it is disagreeable sitting here.
293. The impersonal subject eg is (as is abundantly shown
by the examples already given) very often omitted — not, how-
ever, with the impersonals describing the phenomena of nature ;
nor, generally, with verbs which are not of common use in im-
297] IMPEBSONALS. 147
personal form ; but, as a rule, with verbs which are of common
impersonal use, whenever the e§ would, by the rules for the
arrangement of the sentence, come elsewhere than in its natural
place next before the verb.
a. That is, especially in the cases mentioned in sections 2, 4,
and 5 of the last paragraph, whenever the object of the im-
personal verb, or an adjunct qualifying the verb, is placed before
it — and the putting of the object first, with consequent omission
of e§, is the more usual construction.
294. Since the impersonal verb represents the simple action
without reference to an acting subject, such impersonals as
take an object, direct or indirect, representing the person or
thing affected by the action or condition, are virtually equivalent
to passives or intransitives, having that person or thing as their
subject — and they often may or must be so rendered in English.
a. Many of the examples given above have been so rendered,
and those with jein or it)erben hardly admit of being treated
otherwise : thus, further, e§ erforbert eine ^re^ung a turning is
required, e§ bebarf ber ^nnabme nic^t the assumption is not needed.
295. A verb having the indefinite subject e§ it is not always
to be regarded as impersonal ; the ey sometimes represents in-
definitely a subject which is contemplated by the mind, and ad-
mits of being definitely stated ; yet more often (154.4), e§ is a
grammatical subject only, standing for a logical subject which
is to be statetl later, whether a substantive clause, an infinitive
clause, or a simple substantive : thus, e§ freut un§, ha^ (Sie ^ier
finb it rejoices us that you are here, e§ freut ini§, <Sie bu fe'^en it re-
joices Its to see you, eg freut un§ biefe 9lad)rid}t this news rejoices us.
[Exercise 20. Passive, Eeflexive, and Impersonal Yerbs.]
COMPOUND VERBS.
296. Verbs in German admit of composition with various
other parts of speech— with nouns, adjectives, and adverbs.
The importance and frequent use of certain classes of these
compounds render it necessary that they be treated here, rather
than later, under the general subject of the composition of
words.
297. Yerbs are compounded especially with a class
of elements called prefixes. These are all of kindred
148 VERBS. [297-
derivation, being originally adverbs, words signifying
place or direction ; but they bave become divided in
modern use into two well-marked classes :
1. Prefixes whicb are also employed as independent
parts of speech, adverbs or prepositions. These form
a less intimate union with the verb, being separable
from it in many of its forms ; they are therefore called
SEPAEABLE PREFIXES, and a verb in combination with them
is said to be separably compounded.
2. Prefixes which, in their present form, occur only
in combination with verbs, and never admit of separa-
tion from verbal forms (or verbal derivatives) ; they
are called inseparable prefixes, and the verb with
them is said to be inseparably compounded. But —
3. A few independent prefixes sometimes form with
verbs combinations after the manner of the inseparable
prefixes, and therefore require to be treated as a class
by themselves.
verbs separably compounded.
298. The class of separable prefixes is divided into two sub-
classes, simple and compound.
1. The simple separable prefixes (including those sometimes
also used as inseparable — see 308 etc.) are :
db off, down ^oxt forth, away oB over, on
an on, at geoen afgainst -^ iiber over
auf up, upon — in in. - urn around
an^ out, from I)eim home ^unter under
Bei hy, beside, with ^er toward one ^ Dor before
^^ ^^ !• there at -'^^^ -^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ i ^9^^'^^ or
bar ) ' Winter behind tt)icber j again
burc^ through mit with mq away
ein in, into nad) after gu to
empor up, aloft nteber down guriid back
entamei in two, apart gufommen together
2. The compound separable prefixes are —
a. Combinations of many of the above with one another,
especially with the words of more general direction or place
l)n, I)in, ia or bar, tjor: as :^eran, I}inan, baran, t)oran.
299] SEPAEABLE COMPOUNDS. 149
6. One or two combinations of the above with preceding in-
separable prefixes : namely, beiDor before, entgeflen against (this,
however, is really derived from in^gegen).
c. .%a^\m\6)Z\\ between (gtrtfc^en by itself is not used as a
prefix), and l^intan behind (contracted from l^inten an).
d. Note that, of those given in the list above, several are
really compound adverbs (empor, entgtt)ei, guriicE, sufammen),
although not made up of two different prefixes.
299. Conjugation of Verbs compounded tvith Separable
Prefixes.
The conjugation of a compound verb is in general
the same with that of the simple verb : only one or two
matters regarding the treatment of the prefix require
notice :
1. The prefix stands before the verb in the infinitive
and both participles, but after it in all the other simple
forms.
a. In the former case, the prefix is written with the verb as a
single word ; in the latter case it is, of course, separated from
it; and, if the verb be followed by other adjuncts — as objects,
adverbs, etc. — the prefix usually and regularly stands last, at
the end of the whole clause : thus, from anfangen begin, \^
\a\w a\[Ibegin,\^ fing bicfen DJlorgen friil) gu ftubircn [ftubie^^
ren] an I began early this morning to study.
b. But if, by the rules for the arrangement of the sentence
(434), the verb is transposed, or removed to the end, it comes,
even in the simple forms, to stand after its prefix, and is then
written as one word with it : thus, al§ i(^ biefen 9!)Zorgen frii:^ gu
ftubiren [ftubieren] anfing as J began to study early this
morning.
2. The ordinary sign of the past participle, (^c, is
inserted between the separable prefix and the root;
also the sign of the infinitive, ^^u, whenever used.
Thus, angefangen begun, an^ufangen to begin: in the latter
case, as the example shows, the verb is written along with its
infinitive sign and prefix, as one word.
3. The prefix has the principal accent.
150
VEEBS.
[300-
300. Examples: anfanj^en begin (II.3), I)erQnnaf)en
draw nigh.
Principal Parts.
anf angen, fing an, angef atigen ]^erannal^en, natjk Ijerati, ^erangcnaftt
Indicative.
Peesent, I begin etc.
s. I fange an
2 fangll an
3 fangt an
p. I fangen an
2 fangt an
3 fangen an
Pbeteeit, I began etc.
s. I fing an
Peefect, I have begun etc.
s. I ]^aBe angefangen
Plupeefect, I had begun etc.
s. I l^atte angefangen
FuTTJEE, I shall begin etc.
s. I werbe anfangen
Fur. Peef., I shall have begun etc.
s. I n)erbe angefangen ^aben
I draw nigh etc.
na^e Beran
nal^fl Ijeran
naftt l^eran
na^en 5eran
naT^t T^eran
naften l^eran
I drew nigh etc.
na!)te fteran
I have drawn nigh etc.
bin fterangenal^t
I had drawn nigh etc.
xoax fterangenaftt
I shall draw nigh etc.
tDerbe ^erannaften
I shall have draicnnigh etc.
tDerbe Ijerangena^t fein
Subjunctive.
Peesent, I may begin etc.
s. I fange an
etc., etc.
I may draw nigh etc.
nafte ^eran
etc., etc.
Conditional.
CoNDiTioNAii, I should begin etc. I should draw nigh etc.
s. I mxht anfangen ttiiirbe ^eranna^en
etc., etc. etc., etc.
Imperative.
begin etc.
s. 2 fange an, fange bu an
3 fange er an
etc.
draw nigh etc.
nafte ^eran, na^e bu ^eran
na^e er l^eran
etc.
303] INSEPARABLE COMPOUNDS. 151
Infinitive.
Peesent, to begin to draw nigh
anfanaen, ansufangen l&eranna:^en, l^eranguna^en
Peefect, to have begun to have drawn nigh
angefangen l^aben ^^rangenaT^t fein
Paeticiples.
Peesent, beginning drawing nigh
anfangenb l^erannal^enb
Past, begun drawn nigh
angefangen l&crangena^t
301. 1- The meaning of the simple verb is often greatly-
altered by its composition with a prefix, as in anfangen begin,
literally take hold on: in other cases, each member of the
compomid retains its independent meaning nearly unchanged.
2. When the combination is of the latter character, no ab-
solute line is to be established dividing the employment of the
prefix as prefix from its use as independent adverb ; and there
are many instances in which the prefix (especially a compound
one) is treated in both ways indifferently, and either written
with the verb or separated from it ; thus, tDO man mager ^tnein
geftt unb fett fterau§ fomnit (or, l^ineinge^t, ^eraugfommt) where one
goes in lean and comes out fat.
[Exercise 21. Verbs Separably Compounded.]
VERBS INSEPARABLY COMPOUNDED.
302. The inseparable prefixes are be, ent (or emp),
cr, Q^c, i)er, and ^er.
a. These prefixes are, most of them, traceably descended
from those of the other class : their original form and present
office will be explained below (307).
303. They remain in close combination with the
verb to which they are attached, through its whole
conjugation, forming with it, as their name denotes, an
inseparable combination, of which the radical syllable,
and not the prefix, receives the accent. Hoijcq — •
152 VERBS. [303-
1. The sign of the infinitive, ^u, is put before the
combination (and separated in writing from it), as if it
were a simple verb.
2. The sign of the participle, ge, is omitted altogether.
a. Since, as was pointed out above (243.3a), this is never
prefixed to an unaccented syllable. Moreover, the ge is itself
an inseparable prefix, and no verbal form is ever allowed to
have two inseparable prefixes.
304. Examples : beginnen hegin (1.2), Derretfen jour-
ney away.
Principal Parts.
beginnen, begann, begonnen toerreifen, t)erreifte, berreift
JjfDICATr^K
begtnnc
begann
);)a^t begonnen
l^atte begonnen
tt)erbe beginnen
tt)erbe begonnen l&aben
fterrelfe
berreifte
bin t)erreift
war t)erreift
merbe Derreijen
ttjerbe derreift fein
Subjunctive. •
bcginne
beganne or begfinne
etc., etc.
terreife
t)erreifete
etc., etc.
Conditional.
tt)urbe beginnen
etc., etc.
n)urbe t)errelfen
etc., etc.
Imperative.
begtnnc
berrelfc
Infinitives.
beginnen, gu beginnen
begonnen ^aben
toerrelfen, gn berrclfcn
Derreift jein
Participles.
beglnnenb
begonnen
toerrelfenb
tterreift
307] INSEPAEABLE PEEFIXES. 153
305. A few inseparably compounded verbs are further com-
pounded with a separable prefix. Such combine the peculiar-
ities of both modes of conjugation, taking no ge in the
participle, and interposing gu of the infinitive between the two
prefixes : thus, anerfennen recognize, anjuerfennen, erfanntc an,
anerfannt.
a. Some of these, however— as anbetreffen, auferfte^en, au§-
erlcfen, einberleiBen, Dorentftalten— are never used except in such
verbal forms, or in such arrangements of the sentence, as re-
quire the separable prefix to stand before the verb : thus, al§
(^6rifhi§ auferftanb when Christ arose; but not gl^riftuS erftanb auf
Christ arose.
306. No verb separably compounded is ever further com-
pounded with an inseparable prefix.
a. The words sometimes given as examples of such compo-
sition are really derivatives from nouns : thus, tieraBfd^eueit
regard with horror is not from a verb a6fd)euen, but from the
noun ^Ibj^eu horror ; beauftragen commission, in Uke manner, is
from ^uftrag an errand, charge; benad^ri(^tigen inform from
9^a(^rid)t news, information, and so on.
307. Derivation and Uses of the Inseparable Prefixes,
1. The inseparable prefixes are elements which have become
greatly changed, both in form and in meaning, from their
originals, and have acquired such importance in the system of
word-formation as to call for special notice in the grammar.
a. While they have in part a distinct and clearly definable
force in the compounds they form, they in part also modify in
a very general and indefinite way the meaning of the verbs to
which they are attached ; and their spheres of use variously
approach, and even sometimes overlap, one another. Only
their leading applications will be stated below.
h. These prefixes are also freely used in forming derivative
verbs from other parts of speech (see 405.III) ; such derivatives
are conjugated in the same manner as the inseparably com-
pounded verbs.
2. ^e is the same with our own prefix he, and of kindred
force with the latter ; it comes ultimately from the separable
prefix and independent preposition bet hy.
a. Prefixed to an intransitive, it adds the meaning of ux>on,
about, or the like, converting the intransitive into a transitive :
154 VERBS. [307-
thus, flagcn moan, beflagcn bemoan, firtfien sing, Bcfinflcn sing
about, besing.
b. Prefixed to a transitive, it changes the direction of the
verbal action, converting into a direct object what was only in-
directly or remotely the object of the simple verb : thus, malen
paint a picture, bemalen paint over (as a wall), rauben steal
(something from some one), berauben rob (some one of something).
c. Rarely, it only slightly modifies the meaning of a verb,
usually in the way of a strengthening or extension of its action :
thus, berfen and bebeden cover ; brcingen and bebrdngen crowd,
oppress; l^arren and bel^arren wait, persist; fle^en and befteben
stand, subsist
d. Some of its compounds are restricted to a reflexive use :
thus, \\^ befinben^ncJ one's self, be; fid) bctragen bear one's self,
behave.
3. ©nt was earlier ant, in which form it appears in ^nttDort
answer and ^ntli^ countenance; it is by origin an adverb mean-
ing against, related to our and and the prefix of aiwwer (and-
swarian), etc. In combination with three verbs beginning with
f, it has taken, by assimilation, the form tmp : thus, empf angen,
empfe^len, empfinben.
a. Its primitive meaning appears in a few compounds, as cnt-
fpre(f)en correspond, answer; empfangen receive.
b. Its leading idea is now that of out; it denotes removal,
separation, deprivation, sometimes even negation: thus, ent-
geben, entfommen, entflieben escape; entgieben take aicaij; entlaffen
let off, release; entfagen renounce; entttjeiben desecrate.
c. It sometimes indicates transition into a condition : as, cnt*
brennen take fire, entfteben come into being.
4. ©r is the same word with the prefix ur forming nouns (411.4),
and means by origin forth, out, being related to au§ out, and
probably ultimately identical with it.
a. It has most nearly its primitive force in such verbs as
ergieben educate, bring up, erri^ten erect, erfd^retfen startle.
b. It often signifies a passing into a condition, a becoming,
the beginning of an action : as, erfd)einen (shine forth) appear,
ertbnen sound forth, tx^ittnn fall a trembling.
c. It strengthens the verbal idea, often adding an implication
of accomplishment or attainment : as, erf(i)o|)fen exhaust, ertrogen
endure, erleben experience, er]u(J)en request, erfinben invent.
i
307] INSEPARABLE PREFIXES. 155
d. Hence (its prevailing office in the production of new com-
pounds), it signifies an acquisition by means of the action ex-
pressed by the simple verb: thus, erjafien obtain by hunting^
ertrofeen get by defiance, ertangen bring on by dancing.
5. (55e is believed to have had at first the sense of with, together,
which sense appears, somewhat dimly, in a few of the com-
pounds it forms : as, tjcfrieren become solidified by cold, gerinnen
coagulate, gefaflen (fall in with) please, gefteften (stand by) confess.
But this sense has become so generalized and effaced, and its
applications are so various and indistinct, that it would be in
vain to attempt to classify them.
a. The adoption of this prefix as regular characteristic of past
participles has been already referred to (243.3c) as comparatively
modern, and hardly admitting of explanation.
6. a. 35er is historically the same word as bor forward, forth,
and its leading idea is that of forth, away : as in Derbrdttgen
crowd out, toeriagen chase away, t)er!aufen bargain away, sell, t)er*
reifen journey off, t)erfpielen lose at play.
b. Hence, as intimating removal through the action of the
verb to which it is attached, it comes further to imply loss,
detriment, destruction : as in uerbrauc^en wear out, uerberben
ruin; — or a removal from what should be, the production of an
untoward effect: as in ticrfii^ren lead astray, VitxxMznput out of
place; — or the commission of error : as in t)erre(^nen misreckoyi,
berfennen mistake; — or a reversal of action : as in berbieten forbid,
t)erad)teti despise.
c. On the other hand, it signifies a complete working-out of
the action of the verb : as in berBluten bleed to death, DerBrenuen
bum up; — which may imply a cessation of the action, as in
berBIii^en blossom out, fade, wither; or, more usually, a strength-
ening of the action, as in t)er]infen sink away, Dertilgen blot out,
toerfdjlie^en shut up, uerBinben unite; — and this intensive force in
a few cases makes transitive, as t)erla(f)cn deride, berfc'^Ien miss,
fail of.
7. 3er represents an older bi§, which is related to the Latin
dis, and means, like the latter, apart, asunder.
a. Accordingly, it either intensifies the meaning of verbs
which contain the idea of dissolution, of going to pieces or re-
ducing to pieces, or it adds that idea: thus, gerbrecf)en break
asunder, aerjprengen bJm) to pieces, $erf alien fall apart, jerrinncn
become dissolved.
156 VERBS. [308-
PREFIXES SEPARABLE OR INSEPARABLE.
308. A few prefixes, belonging properly to the
separable class (being all of tliem in nse also as inde-
pendent parts of speech), nevertheless sometimes form
compounds after the manner of inseparables.
309. These prefixes are —
burd} through iiber over unter under
t)tnter behind um about tDiber ) against
trteber ) a^ain
a. SBiber and tt)tcber are the same word, but differently spelt,
to indicate a difference of meaning. All verbs compounded with
tuiber are inseparable; all but one or two compounded with
ttjieber are separable.
310. In verbs separably compounded with these prefixes,
both members of the compound have their own full meaning,
hardly modified by the combination; the inseparable com-
pounds often take an altered or figurative sense.
a. Thus, as separable compounds, burc^bringen crowd through,
"^interge'^en go behind, iikrfe^en set across, umcje^en go around,
revolve, untermerfen throw under, tt)ieber!)oIen/e/c7i6acfc;— but, as
inseparable compounds, \)\xx6)^x\x[0,iX[ penetrate, permeate, I)inter=
geften deceive, u6er|e^en translate, umQeI)en evade, unteriDerfen ^6-
jugate, mieberftolen repeat. Yet the difference is not often so
marked as in these examples, and in a host of cases the two
classes of compounds are distinguished by only a slight shade
of meaning, if at all.
311. The compounds, of either class, are accented
and conjugated according to the rules already given.
That is to say —
1. The separable compounds are accented on the prefix ; they
put the prefix before the verbal form in the infinitive and par-
ticiples, but after it in other cases; they take the signs of
participle and infinitive between the prefix and the root.
Thus, from burcf)'bnngen crowd through come burd^'gubrinaen,
bringe burc^, brang burd), bin burc^^'gebrungen, merbe burd)'bringen,
burd)'gebrungen.
313] COMPOUND VERBS. ' 157
2. The inseparable compounds are accented on the radical
syllable, reject the ge of the participle, and put gu of the infin-
itive before the whole combination.
Thus, from bur^brin'fien penetrate come gu burc^brtn'Gen, bur(f)=
brin'ge, burrfibrang', ^obe burdjbrun'gcn, tocrbe bur(i)brin'gen, burc^^*
brun'gen.
OTHER COMPOUND YERBS.
312. Yerbs compounded with other adverbs than those al-
ready mentioned, or with nouns or adjectives, fall into two
classes :
1. True or close compounds, in which the first member has
become an integral part of the combination, and the whole is
treated as a simple verb.
Thus, l^anb'^aBen handle, manage, gu ftanb^aben, ^onblfiaBte, Qt^
l^anbftabt; todjt]aQtn prophesy, gu ma^rfagen, tDa^rfagte, gema^r*
fagt; liebfojen caress, gu Uebfofeti, licbfofte, geUebfoft.
2. Loose or false compounds, phrases, written together as one
word, in which the first member is treated as any such word
limiting the verb would be, and the combination is conjugated
like a verb separably compounded.
Thus, ftattfinben take place, ftattgufinben, f anb ftatt, ftattgefunben ;
ttJO^It^un benefit, tt)ot)lgutftun, t))at tDol^l, iroftlget^an ; feftlj(^lagen
miscarry, f eftlgufdjlagen, f dfilug fel^I, fel^Igef d)Iagen ; lo^fpreiien ab-
solve, Io§gufpred)en, fprac^ lo§, lo§gefprD(^en.
a. If a verb of the former class has not the accent on its first
syllable, it loses (243.3a) the ge of the past participle: thus,
fro^Iod'en, frol)locft.
b. From the same class are to be carefully distinguished
certain verbs which have the aspect of compounds, but are in
fact derivatives from compound nouns : such are frii^ftiiden to
breakfast (from gruftftiid breakfast), rat^|d)Iagen [ratj(i)Iagen]
consult (from 9ftatftf(i)Iag [9tatfcf)lag] consultation).
313. W\^ and doH are treated in part as proper prefixes, and
form both separable and inseparable compounds, which are
accented and conjugated like those made with bur(^, etc.
(308-11).
But mi^ is very rarely treated as a separable, and only by the
insertion of ^u and ge in the infinitive and participle : thus, m\^=
gut)erftet)en, mi^gegangen, but not irf) t)erftel^e mig, etc. ; and some
verbs take a prefixed ge in the participle: thus, gemi^brau(^t^
158 VEEBS. [313-
gemi^^tinbelt, etc. 35oII forms five or six inseparable compounds,
as t)oIIbrin9en accomplish, uoflsie'^en execute, and a number of
loose separables, as t^oUQXZ^tn pour full.
[Exercise 22. Verbs Inseparably Compounded, Eia]
ADJUNCTS OF THE VEKB.
314. A verb, in a proper verbal form (that is to say, exclud-
ing the infinitives and participles : see 339, 349), always stands
as the bare predicate of a sentence ; and all that constitutes the
complete predicate is brought in in the way of modifying ad-
juncts to the verb, variously limiting and qualifying its action.
a. The proper verbal forms, those possessing the char-
acteristic of person, are often called its " finite " forms : they are
better called its personal forms, and this expression will be used
here.
h. Even in the compound tenses of the verb itself, the rank of
verb belongs in strictness only to the personal auxiliary, the
other parts being adjuncts of the latter: thus, in id) l^abe i{)n Qe=
!ran!t I have pained him, ^dbt is the bare predicate, and ge-
frdnft is an attribute of the object, as much as finbe and franf,
respectively, in id) finbe i^n !ran! I find Jam sick; x^ merbe gefrcintt
I am pained, \^ bin gegangen I am (have) gone are analogous,
in like manner, with \^ merbe !ran! I become sick, [^ bin tt)eg I
am away; and \^ tcerbe gefrdnft tt)orben fein I shall have been
pained is made up by the addition of successive modifying ad-
juncts to merbe, each adjunct after the first being (see 348.2)
regularly prefixed to the one which it further limits ; the phrase
means literally I am entering (merbe) into a state of having (fein)
become (morben) pained (gefrdnft). That the auxiliaries have
more or less completely the inferior value of copulas, connecting
the subject with the chiefly significant part of the predicate,
does not alter their formal or grammatical character.
c. No personal form of a verb has the value of adjunct to
another pers-^nal form ; there are as many separate sentences
as there are separate verbs. All the other parts of speech (ex-
cepting the conjunctions : see 382. a) may enter, by connection
with the verb as its adjuncts, into the relation of parts of the
predicate of a sentence.
315. Object of a Verb. Most verbs may take an object — that
is to say, may be followed by a noun (or its equivalent) in an
316] VERBAL ADJUNCTS. 159
oblique case, designating the person or tiling upon which, or as
affecting which, the action which it describes is exerted by the
subject.
1. A "transitive" verb takes its object in the accusative case ;
and such is called a direct object: thus, er 1:jat ein en §ut, unb
trdgt il& n he has a hat, and wears it: see 227.
a. A few transitive verbs are followed by two accusatives :
see 227.3.
2. Many "intransitive" verbs take an indirect object in the
genitive or dative case: thus, ic^ frf)one meine^ Setnbe§ I
spare my enemy, er folgt mir he'follows me: see 219, 222.11.
3. Many verbs, besides their direct object, take a remoter
object in the dative or genitive, indicating the person or thing
affected less immediately by the action of the subject upon the
object, or further defining that action : thus, [^ rauBe b i e f e m
50^anne ba§ ^elb I steal the money from this man, i^ berauBc
tl^n f ein e § ®elbe§ I rob him of his money: see 219, 222.1.
316. Predicate Noun or Adjective. A noun or adjective is
called predicate, if it is brought by the verb into connection
with a noun or its equivalent (either the subject or the direct
object of the verb), as limiting or qualifying that noun.
1. a. A predicate noun stands in the nominative, relating to
and qualifying the subject of the verb, after jein be, tDerben
become, bleiben continue, fc^etnen, biinfen, and bduc^ten [beuc^^ten]
seem, and !)ei^en be called; also, with the passive of the verbs
that take a noun in the accusative as objective predicate: see
213.
These are verbs of incomplete predication, requiring a
complement. Especially fein be is the ordinary simple con-
nective of a subject with its predicated quality, and is therefore
called the copula.
b. After a few verbs — of calling, regarding, and the like — a
predicate noun stands in the accusative, brought by the verb
into relation with its object: this is called an objective predicate:
thus, er nannte m\^ feinen greunb he called me his friend: see
227.3&,c.
2. a. A predicate adjective is used after the same verbs as a
predicate noun : thus, er t[t unb Wxbi mir treu, unb tt)irb nte un='
treu tt)erben he is and continues faithful to me, and will never be*
come unfaithful.
160 VEKBS. [316-
&. With verbs of more complete predication, or of full pred-
ixjative forpe, an adjective is often used in a manner which it is
convenient to distinguish as adverbial predicate (116.1b) : thus,
bie ^inber ftanben ft u m m the children stood silent, bie Stimme
ftromte l^immlijc^ 1^ elle \)oxthe voice poured forth hearenly clear,
tDtrb^S au^ f d) o n gu %aq,t fommen will it also come forth beauti-
ful?
G. Some verbs are followed by an adjective as objective pred-
icate (116.1c), relating to and qualifying their object : thus, jic
ringen bie §dnbe ft)unb they wring their hands sore, bie \^ gerne
b r e i f a (i) biete which I gladly offer threefold, fie ftellt fid) ii b c r ^
r a f (^ t she feigns herself surprised, id) f iiftle meine ^raf te 1^ o 1^ e r
I feel my powers higher, er ftdit \\)Xi It) a rm he Jiolds him warm.
This predicative construction is much more common with
adjectives than with nouns, which generally require al§ as, fiir
for, gu to, or the like, before them : compare 227. Sc.
317. Adverb. The verbal idea is limited by an adverb, or
by more than one, in the most various manner, in respect to
time, place, occasion, manner, end, and so on. See Adverbs,
361 etc.
Thus, x6) gel)e je^t /am goiiig now, er too^nt file r he lives here,
fie fprec^en q u t they speak well, bu bift l^eute morgen fe^r fpcit er*
tt)a(J^t you woke very late this morning.
318. Prepositional Phrase. A phrase composed of a prepo-
sition along with the word (generally a noun, with or without
adjuncts) which it governs, and the nature ol' whose relation to
the verbal action it defines, is a very frequent adjunct to the
verb, taking the place of object, predicate, or adverb.
a. As direct object in place of an accusative, such a phrase
can hardly stand : but it may be used for a genitive object — as,
t(^ tDarte auf iftn, for id) tuarte feiner limit for him; for a dative
object— as, er folgt mir, or er folgt auf mid) he follows me; yet
more freely for a remoter obje t along with a direct object — as,
i^ freue tnid) iiber bteje§, for id) freue mid) befjen I rejoice at this,
id) f c^retbe einen 33nef an i^n, for \d) f d^reibe iftm einen Srief I write
a letter to him.
b. Examples of prepositional phrases with predicate value
are e§ tDar t)on entfc^eibenbcr 2Bid}tifl!eit it was of decisive im-
portance, bie ^ranten blieben in ber Witk the sick remained in the
midst, fie ertpd^Iten tl)n gum l^aifer they chose him emperor, bte§
tDXxh gum ^uSbrud ber ©eele this becomes an expression of the soul.
319] VERBAL ADJUNCTS. 161
c. Adverbial prepositional phrases are ber SSogel fpielt im
SauBe the bird plays in the foliage, mt betQcn ben Samen in ber
@rbe ©(i)oo& we hide tJie seed in th£ earth's bosom, er rief mit lauter
Sttmme he cried with a Imtd voice.
319. Order of the verbal adjuncts.
1. In the normal or regular arrangement of the sentence, all
the adjuncts of a personal verb are placed after it.
a. For the inverted order of arrangement, in which one of the
adjuncts is frequently placed before the verb it modifies, and
for the transposed order, in which the personal verb is placpd
after all its adjuncts, see the rules given for the order of
the sentence, below, 431, 434.
2. When the verb is modified by two or more adjuncts, the
general rule is, that one which is more closely combined in idea
with the verb, and more essentially modifies its predicative
meaning, is placed further from it than one of a more external
and accessory character. Hence —
a. The infinitive or participle, in a compound verbal form,
stands at the end of the sentence : thus, jie ft a 1 1 e iftre 3<iftne
f(ftarf in feine ginger Q e f e fe t she had sunk her teeth sharply into
his fingers, it)r merbct eucft fo Hutig enter Tla^^i nicftt liber-
ie b c n you will not presume so cruelly upon your power.
b. An infinitive dependent upon any verb, modal or causative
auxil ary or other, stands in like manner at the end of the
sentence: thus, [^ n)in t)or iftr mic^ niebernjerfen I wilt
humble myself before her.
c. A separable prefix belonging to the verb takes the same
place: thus, fie f aft babei re(ftt finfter nnb nnmiHig au§ she looked
at the same time right gloomy and out of humor.
d. Any part of speech compounded with a verb after the
manner of a separable prefix, or forming with it a verbal phrase
analogous with such a compound, takes the same place : thus,
i(ft naftm ni(ftt§ meftr t)on ber ftinler mir liegenben ©bene maftr
I no longer saw anything of the plain that lay behind me.
e. Of two cases governed by the same verb, the second ac-
cusative (227.3) is placed after that which is the more immediate
object of the verb ; the genitive (219.2,3) follows the accusative ;
the dative (222.1.1) usually precedes the accusative (except
when this is a pronoun or emphatic).
/. Of more than one adverb qualifying the same verb, an ad-
verb of time ordinarily precedes one of place, and both are
162 USES OF THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION. [319-
placed before one of manner or degree : thus, er arBeitet immer
flei^ig he always works industrioiisUj, bu mol^nft ^ier fel)r beqiiem
you live here very comfortably. Hence, also, the adverb of nega-
tion, ni(i)t, if it modifies the general assertion of the sentence,
stands last ; but if its negative force applies to some particular
adjunct of the verb, it is placed next before that adjunct.
3. The rules as above stated are subject to various modifica-
tion under the influence of accent or emphasis, or of euphony.
a. Any adjunct of the verb may be transferred to a position
other than its proper one (usually later), for the purpose of
being made more prominent.
h. Since a pronoun is, in general, a less significant and em-
phatic word than a noun, usage has established the rule that —
A pronoun immediately dependent on the verb (not governed
by a preposition), whether as direct or indirect object, comes
first among the verbal adjuncts.
Among the pronouns, a personal pronoun comes before a de-
monstrative, the briefer personal pronouns, especially e§ it, be-
fore the longer, and the reflexives first of all.
4 Prepositional phrases take, in general, the position belong-
ing to the part of speech whose equivalent they are ; but they
are more hable than single words to change place for euphonic
reasons.
5. The natural connections of the different verbal adjuncts
are regarded in the arrangement of the sentence ; those which
affect one another, and exert a combined influence upon the
verbal action, being put together.
6. The above are only the leading principles of the arrange-
ment of words in a sentence. To follow out their application in
detail, and illustrate their joint and mutual action, and the more
or less irregular and arbitrary modifications which they admit,
cannot here be attempted.
USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUG-ATION.
PERSON AND NUMBER.
320. In general, the verb is of the same person and number
as its subject.
a. Being, of course, of the first or second person only when
its subject is a personal pronoun of those persons respectively,
since all other words are of the third person.
322] PERSON AND NUMBER. * 163
321. Special Rules respecting Person.
1. When the same verb has subjects of more than one person,
it is of the first person (plural) if either of its subjects is of the
first person ; otherwise, of the second : thus, i^ unb bu f in b "^ter
land thou are here, bu unb er glaubt e§ beibe nid)t \^ou and he
both disbelieve it.
2. After a relative (ber) referring to an antecedent of the first
or second person, the verb is in the third, unless the personal
pronoun is repeated after the relative (compare 181) : thus, bu,
ber bem 33a]ili^! ben DJ^orbblic! gab tlwu wlw gavest to the basilisk
his deadly glance (but bu, ber bu Q(i^]i).
322. Special Bules respecting Number.
1. A verb having for its subject more than one singularnoun
is put in the plural.
a. To this rule there are frequent exceptions — either as the
several subjects are regarded as combined into a single idea ;
or as, when preceding or following an enumeration of single
subjects, the verb, by a familiar license of speech, is suffered to
agree with the one nearest it alone ; or as the verb is in fact
understood with other than the one subject with which it
agrees: thus, Winter mir lie fit nur Summer unb ®Ienb behind me
lies only sorrow and misery, 5el§ unb Wtn tt)irb fortcieriffen rock
and sea are hurried onward, e§ begleite burc^ ^eben unb ©terben
un§ Sieb unb :^iebe unb SBein may song and love and wine ac-
company us through life and death, Siiiien, 93lorben, ©tel)len unb
^^ebredien tjat iiber^anb genommen hjing, murder, theft, and
adultery have become prevalent.
2. A collective noun in the singular takes a verb in the singular
much more strictly than in English.
a. Exceptions are only such expressions as ein ^aar two or
three, eine 5Jlencje a number, ein '^ufeenb a dozen, which are fre-
quently used with plural nouns (ordinarily construed apposition-
ally with them : see 216.5a), and have gained a plural value by
association: thus, in tr)eld)em ein $aar SSbgel \)m unb mieber
l^iipf en in which a couple of birds hop back and forth, im C>ofe
jpielten ein $aar ber munteren ^inber in the yard were playing
two or three of the merry children, ein $aar ]inb getuoftnlic^ t)or=
au§ a couple are generally in front.
3. After the impersonal and indefinite subjects e§, bie§, ba§,
toa§, tt)eld^e§, etc., the verb is put in the plural if a following
t64 trSES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [322-
predicate noun is plural : thus, c§ f i n b unfer gtDei there are two
of us, ba§ finb meine greunbe tJiose are my friends.— ^o also
occasionally in a case like bie grud^t biefe§ 33aumeg finb fleine
'Beeren the fruit of this tree is small berries.
4. Out of exaggerated respectfulness, the plural verb is some-
times (the usage is happily going out of vogue) construed with
a singular title, or name and title : as, b e H e b e n bcr ^err biefen
©etfel gu erproben may the gentleman he pleased to try this purse,
6etne 9]laieftdt ber ^omq l^aben gerubt his majesty the king has
been gracwusly pleased to , §err doctor tDurben ha tak6)'\\ixt
the d/yitor was put through his catechism there.
MODE AND TENSE.
Indicative.
323. The use of the indicative mode, in its various tenses,
corresponds upon the whole pretty closely in German and in
English. The principal points of difference will be stated below.
324. Indicative Present. 1. The German present — e. g. \^
Hebe — answers to the three English forms of the present I love,
I do love, and I am loving: the shades of difference among these
different values are either left to be inferred from the context,
or are expressed or intimated' by adjuncts to the verb or by
verbal phrases.
2. In German, as in English and French, the present is often
substituted for the preterit in lively narration : thus, id) bielt
ftiHe, unb fal^ mic^ wa&j bem ©tanbe ber (Sonne urn. 3nbem ic^ nun
|o e m p r b H cE e, j e b e \^ iz. I stopped, therefore, and looked
about me for the position of the suji. While, now, lam thus look-
ing upward, I see etc.
3. In expressing a past action or state which is continued so
as to be present also (or in signifying what has been and still
is), the German, like the French, indicates the present part and
leaves the past to be inferred, while the English does the
contrary : thus, j i n b <Ste f c^on lange bier have you been (are you)
here already a hng time ? er f (^ I d f t feit fiinf S^bten nnter bem
(5(^nee he has been (is) sleeping for five years beneath the snow.
4. The German present, much more often than the English,
is used in the sense of a future : thus, n)ie fan g^ \df§ an ? id^
breb' mt(b urn, fo x\V§ getban how shall I set about it? I will
turn myself about; that will fetch it; bie ^iiter, bie cr bereinft erbt
the property which he will one day inherit.
326] mDICATIVE TENSES. 165
This future use of the present is a direct inlieritance from a
former condition of Germanic language (as represented to us by
the oldest Germanic dialects), in which the present and future
meanings were both habitually expressed by the present tense,
the later auxiliary futures, as I shall or will hve \^ toerbe lieBcn,
not having been yet brought into use.
325. Indicative Preterit. 1. The preterit answers to our
own simple past tense, in its three forms I loved, I did love, I
was loving — all expressed, without distinction, by [^ lieBte.
2. As the present for the perfect (324.3), so the preterit is
sometimes used for our pluperfect, to express what, at a given
time, had been and was still: thus, ft) a ten ©ie f(^on lange ha
had you been (were you) there long already ?
3. The distribution of the expression of past time between
the preterit and perfect is not precisely the same in German as
in English. As (326.2) the German perfect often stands where
we should use the preterit, so the contrary is also sometimes
the case: thus, i:^r ^brtet, ml6) f$rerflt(f)e§ ©eric^t be§ C>errn
iiber 3eru{alem e r g i n g you have heard what a terrible judgment
of the Lord has corne upon Jerusalem.
326. Indicative Perfect. 1. The perfect answers in the main
to our perfect, expressing completed action, or action in the past
with implied reference to the present, as no longer continuing :
thus, x^ !^a6e geliebt I have loved, or Mve been loving.
2. But the perfect is not infrequently used where we employ
the preterit ; the perfect is rather the tense by which something
is simply asserted as true, while the preterit implies a connec-
tion with other past events in continuous narration, or a
personal participation of the speaker, as spectator or joint
actor.
Thus, ©ott ftat bieJlBelt erfc^affcn God created the world (it was
God lohoetG.), ic^ bin geftcrn in ber J!trd^e geiDcfen I was at church
yesterday, un(er Sreunb ift neiilt(^ geftorben our friend died lately;
—but (S^ott erfd)uf bie SSelt in fcc^§ 5:agen, unb tul^te am ficbentcn
God created the world in six days, and rested on the seventh, ic^
tt)ar in ber ^irc^c, mo §err 9L cine t)ortreff(i(^e ^rebigt I)idt I was
at church, where Mr. JSf. preached an admirable sermon, unjer
SSater flarb gcftern our father died yesterday (in our presence).
a. Something of the same distinction ai>pears also in English
usage, and it is impossible to explain fully the difference in
idiom betweeri the two languages without a great deal of
166 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [326-
detailed illustration. Moreover, there are many cases in either
tongue where both tenses might be employed with equal
propriety.
3. For the present in place of our perfect, see 324.3 ; for the
perfect in place of the future, see 328.36.
327. Indicative Pluperfect. The pluperfect in German, as in
English, expresses action already finished at a time in the past
either defined or contemplated by the speaker : thus, id) i}aik
Qellebt I had loved or been loving.
328. Indicative Future and Future Perfect. 1. These tenses
ordinarily agree in use with their English correspondents:
thus, i(^ tt)erbe lieben I shall hve or be loving, [^ merbe QcUcbt
l^aben I shall have loved or been loving.
a. They express simple futurity, that which is going to be ;
and are carefully to be distinguished from the modal auxiliary
forms composed of the infinitive with tuoHen and foUen (267-8),
which more or less distinctly imply an assent or intent, and a
propriety or obligation.
2. The futures are sometimes used to indicate a claimed
probability, or to express a conjecture : thus, ba§ tDirb tco^I Sft^
33ruber fein that is ijour brother, is it not? er tt)irb tud)t lange bort
(^eblieben jetn I presume he did not stay there long.
3. a. In German, as in English, the perfect is often employed
where the future perfect would be logically more correct, the
implication of futurity being sufficiently made by the context :
thus, icf) raerbe fommcn, fobalb id) ntcincn 33rief G^ft^n^ben babe I
shall come as soon as I have written my letter (not gefd)riebcn l^aben
tDerbe shall have written).
b. A present or perfect is occasionally substituted for a future,
by a figure of speech, to indicate the certainty of what is to take
place: thus, jene tjai cjelebt, ttienn \^ bte^33Iatt an§ meinen §dnben
Qcbc she has ceased to live, if I let this paper go out of my hands,
ftel^', ober bu bift be§ Xohz^ stand, or thou art a dead man!
c. For the frequent use of a present nst ad of a future tense,
see 324.4.
[ExEECisE 27. Use of the Tenses of the Indicative.]
Subjunctive.
329. The subjunctive mode, which has almost passed out of
U^e in Enghsh, still continue^ in full currency in German,
331] SUBJUNCTIVE. 167
having, if the two " conditional " tenses be included with it (as
they are in fact subjunctive, both in form and character), more
than a corresponding tense for every tense of the indicative.
In some of its offices (the oj tative, potential, conditicnal) it
answers to what is left of our own subjunctive, and to the
compounded tenses (with the auxiliaries may, might, would, and
should) by whicli we have in part supplied the place of the latter ;
in other offices (especially in indirect statement, 333) there is in
EngUsh hardly anything analogous, though the classical tongues
present similar constructions in abundance.
330. The subjunctive is the mode of possibility, contingency,
subjectivity, in contradistinction to the indicative as the
mode of actuality, direct assertion, objectiveness.
a. The subjunctive of the Germanic languages is by origin an optative,
or mode expressing wish or desire, and there was another mode more
properly known as subjunctive. In the Greek, both still subsist to-
gether ; but in German, as in Latin, the two have become one, which
combines, with various modifications and restrictions, their several offices.
h. Not every statement of a hypothetical or contingent char-
acter requires the subjunctive: that character is often suffi-
ciently intimated by the radical meaning of the verb used, or of
the adverbs or conjunctions employed with it; the cases in
which this mood is availed of are those to be explained below.
c. Even in the cases detailed, there is considerable freedom
of choice between a subjunctive and an indicative expression,
depending on the degree of contingency or reality of the imphed
conception, the difference being sometimes so slight as to be
hardly definable ; and an indicative is occasionally used where
analogy would lead us to expect a subjunctive, as if, by a figure
of speech, to give a character of actuality to what is in itself
properly contingent. It is not possible to say, as in some other
languages, that certain grammatical constructions, or certain
particles, require or "govern" the subjunctive.
d. In the subjunctive, the distinctions of tense are of only
subordinate value, and are even to some extent effaced. The
tenses do not, therefore, require to be separately treated.
331. The Subjunctive as Optative.
1. The present subjunctive is frequently used in an optative
sense, as expressing a wish, request^ or direction on the part of
the speaker.
168 USES OF THE FORMS CP CONJUGATION. [331
Thus, flcfeanet fei er aUc S^xi blessed he he ever, lang leBe ber
^onifi, e§ freue fi(5^, tuer ba . . . . long live the king! let him rejoice
who . . . . , brdutlid^e§ Seinen legen mx bem Xftor an let us dress
Thor in bridal vestments, gefte^^ i(f) e§ nur only let me confess it.
a. This use is Umited to the first and third persons of both
numbers : for the second persons, the imperative is used ; in
the first singular, mbge may is common as auxiliary ; and the
same auxiliary may also be employed in the other persons.
b. The subject is put after the verb, except in the third pers.
singular, where it may have either position, and more usually
stands before.
c. The optative subjunctive is used, as already noticed (243.1),
to fill out the declension, of the imperative, and is practically,
in the third pers. plural, the most common imperative form,
since the use of the second person in ordinary address is no
longer approved (153.4:).
d. This subjunctive sometimes becomes, in appUcation, con-
cessive, or expresses a supposition or assumption : thus, man
begegne 3emanbcn im §au§; e§ fei eine ^efefljrf)aft beifammen let
one meet anybody in the house ; let a company be assembled (i. e.
supposing such to be the case); er tl^ue, tt)a§ er tDofle let him do what
he please (i. e. tliough he do).
e. Hence, with benn, it becomes, by an elliptical construction,
equivalent to unless; thus, er fitftre benn gretia 3ur 33raut mir
l^eim unless he bring me home Freya as bride (i. e. [if he
would gain what he wishes] then let him bring, etc.), i^r mit^tet
ttiir gur ©telle benn t)erf))red^en unless you promise me on the spot.
2. The preterit and pluperfect tenses are also employed in a
kind of optative sense, but only by elliptical construction, in ab-
breviated conditional and indirect phrases where the wishes
expressed are implied to be contrary to fact, or impossible of
attainment.
Thus, tt)are e§ bo(^ ^Benb if it were only evening! ^dtte x^ mx^
bod^ gefreut had I only enjoyed myself (while it was still in my
power to dx) so)! ad), ha^ meine ^ugen ^l)rdnenqueEen wdrcn
that my eyes were fountains of tears !
332. The Subjunctive as Conditional and Potential.
The conditional and potential uses of the subjunctive so pass
Into one another that they can hardly be treated separately.
We commence, for convenience, with the hypothetical period.
332] CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 169
1. The hypothetical period consists of two parts or clauses, the
one (the apodosis) expressing a conclusion or result which would
follow, if the condition were true which is expressed by the
other (the protasis) — it being at the same time implied that the
condition is not realized, and, generally, that the result is there-
fore also untrue. This, in its complete form, requires a past
tense (preterit or pluperfect) of the subjunctive in each clause.
Thus, regtcrte 3lled)t, fo laget iftr t)Dr mir im 6tauBe if right
prevailed, you would lie in the xlust before rue, it)enn'§ Idiiger Qe=
bauert l^dtte, mxt ic^ im groft erftarrt if it had lasted longer, I
should have been stiffened with frost, gliidlic^er tt)drc an^:) i(^, tt)enn
\6) \\a6) ^fien gegogen tDdre I too should be happier, if I had
marched to Asia.
a. Either of the two clauses may stand first, and the idea of
if in the clause of condition (protasis) may be expressed either
by a conjunction (tuenn) or by the inverted arrangement (433) —
as the examples show.
b. In the result or conclusion (apodosis), the conditional tenses
may be used instead of the proper subjunctive : see below, 335.
c. The implication as to the result is liable to modification by
various causes : for example, by its being put into the form of
a question— as, tt)a§ tDdre au§ mir gemorben, l^dttet xt\x mid) iu(^t
aufgenommen what would have become of me, if you had not
received me ? — or by an even involved in the condition : as, unb
tt)dren t)on (^olb fie, \6) gdbe fie bir even were they of gold, I would
give them to thee.
d. If the condition be regarded as doubtful merely, and not
contrary to reality, the verbs are put in the indicative mode :
thus, alw^ays when the tense is present or perfect — as, tcenn er
fommt, gel^e ic^ fort if he comes, I shall go away, wtnn er gefommen
ift mill id) il)n fel^en if he be arrived, I wish to see him; and often
when the tense is past: thus, menn er fi^on gefommen mar, mu§
er ung gefe'^en l^aben if he had already come, he cannot have failed
to see v^.
e. Rarely, a pret. indie, is used, for emphasis (compare 328.36),
in the clause of result, and even in that of condition : thus, 'tn
marft Derloren, l^'dik er ni^t fiir bic^ geft)rD(^en thou wast lost, had
lie not spoken for thee, mar id) ... . ber SBerrdtijer [33errdtcr], i(^
ptte mir ben guten (Sd)etn gef|)art had I been the traitor^ I might
have spared myself the fair show.
170 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [332-
2. In the incomplete hypotJietical period, either the condition
or the conclusion is unexpressed, but is more or less distinctly
intimated or implied.
a. The conclusion is wanting altogether, and the condition
has the value of a wish or prayer (see 331.2). In this case a bod)
or nut is more often introduced to help the optative expression,
but is not indispensable : thus, mdren mx nur ben 53er\i t)orI'.ei
[Jiow happy 1 should be] if we were only past the hill! fonnf i(^
tnit if I coidd hut go along with you I
b. The conclusion may be intimated by al§ as, and the con-
ditionality of the other clause expressed either by a conjunction,
ob or tt)enn, or (more commonly) by the inverted arrangement
(4336) of the clause after al§ :
Thus, i^r etlet [a, al§ tDcnn i'^r ^^Imd I)dttet you are hurrying as
[you would do] if you had wings, er tDiII bie 2SaI)rI}ett fo, al§ ob )ic
5D^unge tt)dre he demands truth in this way as [he would demand it]
if it were cash, ber ^oben flafft auf, aU tt)dre er Don ©rbfto^en er=
fcfliittert the soil cleaves open, as [it would do] if it were shaken
by earthquakes.
c. The analogy of this construction calls always for a past
tense, but a present is sometimes met with, as if the phrase
were one of indirect statement (333) instead of conditional : thus,
ha voaxh e§ mir qI§ fbnne id) burd^ ben 3Boben fel^en, al§ fei er Qriine^
©Ia§ then it seemed to me as if I could see through the ground as
though it were green glass. Occasionally, it really represents an
indirect phrase: thus, ic^ bad)te qI§ fei e§ . . ., for tc^ bad)te, eg
f ei . . . -f thought as if it were, for I thought it was, so and so.
d. The conclusion is expressed by some other and virtually
equivalent means: thus, \^ oebac^te, bafern ic^ !ein ^Ibenteuer
fdnbe, ben §eimn)eg gu fudjen I intended, in case I should meet with
no further adventure, to seek the way homeward.
e. On the other hand, the conclusion may be fully expressed
and the condition intimated by some word or phrase which
more or less distinctly implies it :
Thus, D mdre id) ein Qro^er 33aum! bann fonnte t^ meinc
3tt)et(\e au§brelten that I were a big tree ! then [if I were so]
I might spread out my branches, man(^e§ bdtf ic^ oetban; a lie in
toer fc^eutnidjt bie .^often Iwoidd have done much— only, who does
not fear the cost? [if Iliad not feared the cost]^ fonft n)dr' er ge=?
|aKen otherwise [if thi^ were not so] he would have fallen.
332] CONDITIONAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 171
f 3.f A yet less explicit implication of a condition makes of the
past subjunctive a. -proper potential, expressing what in general,
under the circumstances, might, could, or would be :
Thus, ha^ ginge no(^ tliat might answer yet, e§ ^tk fic!)^§ fetner
t)ertt)OGen no one would have presumed to do so, e^ fonnte mi(^
retten it might be able to rescue me, iiinun \l)x jeben ©tadjcl, ber
t)ertt)unbcn fonnte take from it (222.1.3) everij sting that should be
able to wound.
a. The potential subjunctive is sometimes used in place of an
indicative, when it is desired to soften the positiveness of an
assertion: thus, [i^ bdc^te I should think, for I think, id) niod)te
I should like (255.2), ic^ mdre faft Qegen ^^aumftdmme angerannt^
I came near r^unning against trunks of trees.
4. Analogous, on the other hand, with the clause expressing
the condition in the hypothetical period, are occasional phrases
like e§ n3irb nadjgea'^mt, tt)are e§ nur mtt eintQen ,^utfd)en it is
imitated, were it only with a few carriages, BefonbcrS, iDcnn er ]\^
t)er)c^o))en ^aben lollte especially if he should chance to have ex^
hausted his ammunition.
5. Akin with the potential and hypothetical uses of the sub-
junctive are the following more special cases :
a. The subjunctive present is used in a clause involving an
indefinite relative pronoun or conjunction {whoever, however,
etc.): thus, tDie and) ber menidjlid)e manfe however human (will)
may waver, jo flein fie auc^ fei however small it be, auf melc^e ^rt
e§ jci in whatever way it may be.
b. The subjunctive, present or past, is used after ba^, auf ha%,
bamtt in order that, to express the end had in view, or sought to
be attained: thus, loft mir ha^ ^zx^ '^ci^ ic^ "^ci^ cure riil^re relieve
my heart, that I may move yours, er tuunfd}te gu regieren, nur bamit
ber (S^ute ungel)tnbert gut fein moc^te he desired to rule only in order
that the good might be able to be good without hindrance.
The tense is governed by the requirements of the sense, gen-
erally according with that of the preceding verb.
c. In these, as in other constructions, the indicative is also
met with, especially after bamtt: thus, U)a§ au(^ bie ©innlic^feit
gu t^un gebrdngt ift whatever our sensuousness is impelled to do,
bamit man bicje ©tabt einne!)men !ann that the city may be (where-
with it is able to be) captured, baj^ icber Quell Oerfiegt that every
fountain may dry up (so that every fount sliall d^y up).
172 USES OP THE FORMS OP CONJUGATION. [332-
d. A subjunctive is used in a dependent substantive clause
(generally after tia^ that) to denote something that is provided
for or looked forward to, regarded as of probable, desirable, or
suitable occurrence : thus, er mu^te bleiben bi§ (or big ba^) bie
glut^en [gluten] \\^ Derltefen he had to remain till the floods should
subside, e§ lag i^m baran, ba^ ber Sriebe ni(^t unterbroc^en tt)erbe
he was anxious that the peace should not be broken, e§ gel^ort ftc^,
t)a^ bag ^eburfnip [^ebiirfnig] befriebigt tDerbe it is proper that the
want be satisfied.
In some of its forms, this construction passes over into that
of the subjunctive of indirect statement (see the next paragraph),
after verbs of wishing, anticipating, and the like.
[Exercise 28. Subjunctive as Optative, Conditional, and
Potential.]
333. The Subjunctive of Indirect Statement.
1. By a construction which has only partial analogies in Eng-
lish, the German subjunctive is often used to express a thought
indirectly, as reported, recognized, or contemplated by some
one.
Thus, er antmortcte, er a^tt 5rtebri(6 unb miinjc^e ben grie=
ben he answered that he esteemed Frederick and desired peace,
\mx miff en !aum, mag ju tftun ]i\ we hardly know what is to be
done, benft man er ge^e meg if one thinks he is going away, man
fieftt glelcf), me^ ©inneg ber ©err f ei one sees at once of what mind
the master is.
2. Such a subjunctive stands always in a (logically) dependent
substantive clause. The use of this mode more fully sub-
ordinates the clause to the action of the verb in the other clause,
upon which it depends, relieving the speaker from responsibility
for it or concern with it.
3. Verbs most often followed by the subjunctive of indirect
statement are especially —
a. Verbs that signify imparting, in every form, as statement,
report, assertion, confession, reminding, and the like.
b. Verbs that signify apprehension, as perceiving, knowing,
feeling, calling to mind, imagining, concluding, and the Hke.
c. Verbs that signify contemplation with feelings of various
kinds, as belief, doubt, dread, wonder, joy, sorrow, wish, hope.
333] SUBJUNCTIVE OF mDIEECT STATEMENT. 173
Some of these verbs complicate the idea of indirectness with
that of desire, doubt, or conditionality, as expressed by the
subjunctive in its other uses.
d. The verb upon which the clause of indirect statement
depends is sometimes unexpressed, being inferred from the
connection: thus, bie ;^ateinec murben ftart derfolGt, tDcil jener fie gu
fel^r Begiinftigt ^aht the Latins were severely persecuted, because
(it was claimed that) he had favored them too much.
e. Or, the clause is dependent on a noun of kindred meaning
with the verbs above mentioned : thus, au§ 33ef orgntB [^^ef orfltti^],
ba6 er Unruften erregen tDcrbe out of apprehension that he would
stir up disorders, unter bem SSormanb, cr {) a b e friifter befd)tr)oren
aHe§ angugeigen under the pretext that he had earlier taken oath to
denounce everything, bie ^ad)ri(^t, ha^ er fie in§ ©efdngni^ [(55e='
fcingniS] getDorfen ^abe the news that he had thrown them into
prison.
4. a. Eegularly and ordinarily, the verb in the indirect state-
ment has the same tense as it would have if the statement were
made directly, by the person and under the circumstances con-
templated.
Thus, fie glaubten, ha^ e§ voaf^t f ei they believed that it was true
(since they would have said ''we believe that it is true''); er ttnt==
tuortete, er f ei nic^t gefommen, (Sftriften feinblid) angugreifen, fonbern
tt)erbe nur (SJetDalt mil (S^etDdt guriidheiben he answered, he was
not ("I am not'') come to attack Christians, but would only (''I
shall only") repel violence with violence; balb fragte man nidjt
me'^r, mx mitgebe, fonbern n^er guriidbleibe soon it was no longer
asked w1k> was going along (" who is going ? "), but who was stay-
ing (''who is staying?") behind; ic^ I)abe gen:)iinfd^t,er f olle fid) auf
Sleifen begeben I have wished that he should betake himself to
journeying.
b. Hence, the use of the present, perfect, and future sub-
junctive in indirect statement is much more frequent than that
of the preterit and pluperfect and of the conditional. But —
c. The past tenses are used, when they would have been used
(either as indicative or as subjunctive) in the corresponding
statement made directly : thus, cr uninfd)te, bag er auf bem 33oben
geblieben mdre he wished he had remained in the garret, mcr fann
n)tffen, n)a§ ntd)t 3<^iTiiinb glaublid) fdube who can tell what some-
body might not think credible? be§ (Sjefiible^, baJ5 nid)t§ im Sebcn
rec^t gefd)dbe luenn e§ bloji gefc^dbe of the feeling that nothing in
life would be done rightly if it should be simply done.
174 tsEs 01* a^HE eorms o^ ooNJuaAHOi?. [333*
Barely, on the other hand, a subjunctive of indirect statement
is forced out of the past tense which it should have into the
present, as the more usual: tense belonging to the indirect
construction.
d. Moreover, in a clause dependent on a verb of past tense,
the subjunctive is quite often put in the past (as it always is in
English), contrary to strict rule: thus, fieglaubteu e§ tDdrc (for
fei) C>ci^nen^ef rfjrei they thought it was the crowing of cocks, jte frag-
ten o6 fie re(^t mii^te (for tutfje) mx i^r Wann tucirc (for fei)
tliey asked whether she really knew who her husband was, ging bei
mir 3u Silat^ [9tat], oB ic^ fie medte (for merfe) t^k counsel with
myself, whether I should wake her.
e. This assimilation of the subjunctive in tense to the verb on
which it depends is, in general, much more common in the
more careless and less dignified styles of writing, and in col-
loquial discourse, than in higher styles. But it is occasionally
met with in every style, sometimes without special assignable
cause, sometimes where a present subjunctive form would not
be distinguishable from an indicative, or where a clause is
dependent on another dependent clause, and needs to be
distinguished from the latter in construction: thus, er Bot burc^
©efanbte an, bie giirften moc^ten (for mogen, which would be in^
dicative as well) felbft entfc^eiben, tr)a§ er red)tmd§ig befd^e he
offered through embassadors that the princes might themselves
decide what he rightfully possessed.
5. The indicative may also be used in phrases similar to those
above cited, mostly with an impUcation of actuality, as recog-
nized by the speaker also : thus, roer toei^, lt)0 bir beln (^\Mt
Blii^t who knows where thy fortune is blooming for thee (as it
surely is blooming somewhere)? man mu^te glauben, ha^ er DoHig
t)ergeffen toar one could not but believe that he was wholly for-
gotten, er t)ertt)etlte, bi§ er fi(^ iibergeugt IjatU, ha^ !eincr Don ben
f einen j u r ii tf b It e b he delayed till he was persuaded that none of
his men was left behind.
But the difference of implication is often very indistinct, and
the choice between the two modes depends in part upon the
style used : too nice a use of the subjunctive in easy or col-
loquial discourse would be thought finical and pedantic.
6. The elliptical use of the subjunctive of indirect statement
with optative meaning, or to express a wish, has been referred
to above (331.2): thus, o bafj fie emtg griinen bliebe that it
335] OONDITIONAL. 175
might ever continue to flourish ! [i. e. id) mb(f)te, ba^ . , . , I should
wish that . . .).
7. A past subjunctive tense is sometimes used interrogatively,
by way of questioning or disputing something supposed to have
been asserted: thus, hn l^dtteft e§ Qefagt? bu l^aft mir ni(^t§ Qefafit
[is it claimed tJiat] you have said so ? you have said yiothing to me,
gaftfreunblid) ftdtte ^nglanb m^ empfangen? that England had
received me Jiospltably ?
[Exercise 29. Subjunctive of Indirect Statement.]
Conditional.
334. The conditional tenses are, in form, subjunctive
preterits corresponding to the future as a present: thus, er
tt)irb Ueben he is about to love, er irerbe lieben he may he about to
love, er tDiirbe Ueben he might oy would be about to love.
Their proper significance, then, is that of contingent futurity,
such a potentiality as may be signified by a tense past in form.
In this they coincide (as appears from the rules and examples
given above, 332) with the past subjunctive tenses, preterit and
pluperfect. In fact —
335. 1. The conditional corresponds in meaning with the
preterit and pluperfect subjunctive, being an admissible sub-
stitute for these tenses in some of their uses.
a. Especially, in the conclusion (apodosis) of a complete
hypothetical period (332.1): thus, lebteft hn noc^, \^ tDiirbe bi(^
It e b e n t)on biefer Sett wert thou yet alive, I should love thee hence-
forth, !cine§ toiirbe lenfjam oenuQ jein, menu tDU' blo^ fein^afein
in ber §anb ncn)a^r n)urben none would be manageable enough, if
we were mei^ely aware of its presence in the hand.
b. In a conclusion with condition only intimated (332.2e) :
thus, bie 35ogel tDiirben bann defter in meinen S^Jeigen bauen in
that case (if this were so) the birds would build nests in my
branches, prob' e§ lieber nic^t, benn bu njiirbej't gerfi^ellt ttjerben
rather, do not try it; for (if thou didst try it) thou wouldst be
dashed in pieces.
c. In a more strictly potential construction (332.3) : thus, \x^
crnftUc^ 5U me^ren ttiiirbe ]d)x Getdt)rlid) fein to defend one's
self seriously woidd be very dangerous, ba§ tDiirbe un§ gu tDeit
f ii 1^ r e n that would lead us too far.
2. The use of the conditional is much less frequent than that
of the past subjunctive tenses in the constructions above ex-
176 USES OF THE FOEMS OF CONJUGATION. [335-
plained. While the two are so nearly equivalent that the sub-
junctive may usually be put in place of the conditional, they are
not absolutely identical in sense ; the conditional may some-
times be preferred where the idea of futurity is prominent (as
in the first example above, under a) — as also for formal reasons,
where the subjunctive verb would not be plainly distinguished
from an indicative (as in the first example under b).
336. The conditional is sometimes employed in indirect
statement in place of the future subjunctive, in the same manner
as a preterit subjunctive for a present (333.4:C?)— that is to say,
with the value of a past subjunctive to the future: thus, er
tDu^te, ba§ biefe ^nerbietungen ben touggug nic^t aufl)alten
U) ii r b e n (for tuerben, which would not be distinguishable from
an indicative) he knew that these offers would not detain the
crusade.
Imperative.
337. The use of the imperative requires no explanation,
being the same in German as in English.
a. With the proper imperative persons (the second persons
singular and plural) the subject pronouns, bu and \t)x, may be
either expressed or omitted : if expressed, they follow the verb.
&. For the use of the present subjunctive as imperative in the
third persons singular and plural and the first plural, see 331.1c.
338. Besides the phrases mentioned at 243.1 as employed
imperatively, the present, indicative, or the future indicative,
sometimes intimates a peremptory order, as if from one whose
simple word is equivalent to a command ; the past participle
has, elliptically (see 359.3), a similar force ; and the infinitive is
used, dialectically or colloquially, with the same meaning (347.2).
Infinitive.
339. The infinitive is properly the verbal noun, and all its
uses grow out of its value as such.
340. 1. Any infinitive is capable of use directly as a noun,
either with or without an article or other limiting words. Such
a noun is always of the neuter gender (61.3c), and declined ac-
cording to the first declension, first class (76) ; and, having the
value of an abstract, it very seldom forms a plural.
Thus, ©otteSldftern, Siiaen, ^Jiorben unb ©te^leti ftat iiber^anb
Qenommen blasphemy, lying, murdering, and stealing have become
343] mPiNiTiVE. 177
prevalent, ml^ ein %ppti\i gum ©d)maufen what an appetite for
feasting ! er fing tuieber mit feinem Mfeli*^ ^oflidjen ©ru^en an he
began again with his odiously polite greeting.
2. As the examples show, such a noun is more usually to be
rendered by our verbal noun in ing (which we often call " par-
ticipial infinitive," although in truth it is quite another word
than the present participle); but also, not rarely, by other
verbal derivatives.
3. There are some nouns, originally infinitives, which are in
such constant use as to have won an independent value as
nouns : such are SeBen Ufe, ©ntfe^en horror, ^^nbenfen memorial,
and so on.
341. In German, as in English, the preposition gu to, which
was originally used only in its proper prepositional sense with
the infinitive, governing the latter as it would govern any other
noun under similar circumstances, has now become attached as
a kind of fixed accompaniment, or sign, to the infinitive in a
great part of its uses ; and therefore, in describing the different
infinitive constructions, it becomes necessary to distinguish
between the cases in which gu is employed and those in which
it is omitted.
342. T/ie Infinitive as subject of a verb.
The infinitive, either with or without gu, is often employed as
the subject of a verb.
Thus, mad^jen, groS unb alt merben, ba§ ifl ba§ eingig ©(^one to
grow, to become big and old — that is the only fine thing, xoo getaufc^t
gu tDcrben ung '^eilfamer tt)ar where to be deceived was more ad-
vantageous for lis, mitjolc^en tft nicf)t gut in ber^Jd^e tdmp^ixi fight-
ing at close quarters with such men is not good, gefd^rlici) i]T§ ben
Sen gu toerfen it is dangerous to wake the lion.
a. The infinitive as subject is in the great majority of cases
accompanied by gu.
b. More usually (as the examples show), the infinitive stands
as logical subject, the verb taking in addition e§ it or ba§ that,
or the like (especially the first), as impersonal or indefinite
grammatical subject (compare 295).
343. The Infinitive as object, or dependent on another verb.
I. The infinitive without gu is directly dependent on —
1. The various auxiliaries: as, merben, the auxiliary of the
future and conditional tenses (240.2) ; I)al)en, the auxiliary of
178 USES OP THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. 343-
the perfect and pluperfect tenses, in the cases where the infin-
itive is used instead of the past participle in forming those
tenses (240.1c) ; the auxiliaries of mode (242.1) ; if)\in, when used
as auxiliary in the sense of our do (242.3) ; laffen, as causative
auxiUary (242.2) : see below, 5.
2. §aBen have, in certain phrases, with an adjective: thus, bu
l}a\i gut reben that is easy to say (i. e. thou hast talking good, makest
an easy thing of talking).
3. 2!^un, and a few other verbs, followed by ni(f)t§ al§ nothing
[else] than, nothing but: thus, er t^at m6)i§ al§ fie anfrf)auen he
did nothing hut look at her, e§ foftet m^\^ al§ bie ©emeinc fein fiir
aUc it costs nothing but being the common one for all
4. Semen learn: thus, er ftatte ha^ ©utc toiirbiflen gelernt he had
learned to value what was good.
5. A number of verbs admit an infinitive in the manner of a
second object, along with their ordinary object : these are tjei^en
call, bid, nennen call, lel^ren teach, !)elfen help, madden make, lajfen
allow, cause, and a few that denote perception by the senses,
namely f eften (and rarely f d)auen) see, ^oren hear, \ixijkn feel, and
finben find.
Thus, er l^et^t i^n tueber Soften noc^ 9Jlul)e fparen he bids him
spare neither expense nor labor, toag man fo erfennen l^eifet (nennt)
what people call knowing, ba§ lel^rt un§ beurtfteilen [beurteilen]
ob . . . that teaches us to judge whether . . . , mx miifjen il^m ftelfen
^iiten we must help him tend his herd, bie greifteit mad^t end)
[(J^njdrmen this freedom makes you rave, ber ©ott, ber ©if en tcac^fen
iie^ tlie God who made iron grow, er fiel^t fie erbletd^en unb finfen
Jin he sees her turn pale arid sink down, \^ finbe fie auf bem
(5o|)I)a Itegen I find her lying on the sofa.
a. With most of the verbs under this head, the object taken
along with the infinitive has the logical value of a subject-ac-
cusative to the infinitive — which is the nearest approach made in
German to that construction, familiar in the classical tongues,
especially in the Latin: thus, id) ]^ore \ia^ (^ra§ n)a(^fen I hear
the grass grow signifies that the grass grows, and that I per-
ceive it so doing.
This construction, especially with fejen, l^oren, and laffen (and
by far oftenest with the last), is followed out into a variety of
other forms, some of them of a pecuhar and idiomatic character :
thus —
b. The proper object of the governing verb is frequently
omitted, and the infinitive then designates its action without
343] INFINITIVE. 179
reference to any definite actor : tlius, ic^ pre flopfen I hear
[scymeone] knock (hear a knocking), la^t flingeln cause to ring (let
the hell he rung), (ag iiberall fiir ba§ ^^reugfteer in ben ^trc^en beten
cause to pray for the C7'usading army everywhere in the churches
(let it he prayed for).
c. If, tlien, tlie infinitive itself talies an object, the construc-
tion is equivalent to one in which that object is directly de-
pendent upon the governing verb, and is the subject-accusative
of the infinitive taken as an infinitive passive ; and it is gener-
ally best so rendered : thus, i^ :^i3re eu(^ ieben %aQ ^reifen I hear
you to he praised evay day (hear [them] praise you), er lie^ bie
brei Ulinge fiir einen mad)en he caused the three rings to he made in
place of one (caused to make them).
d. That the construction has in fact, in the apprehension of
those who use the language, been virtually converted into a
passive one, and the real object of the infinitive transferred to
the governing verb, is shown by the circumstance that that
object, when designating the same person or thing with the
subject of the verb, is expressed by the reflexive instead of the
personal pronoun : thus, er moflte fid) nid)t ^alten (affen he would
not let himself he held (instead of would not allow [any 5ne] to
hold him), \ia^ Id^t f i ^ '^oren that lets itself he heard (i. e. is worth
hearing), al§ er fid) eltca^ t)DrIcfen Ue§ as he was having some-
thing read aloud, to himself, er la^t oft Don fid) Ijoren he lets himself
he often heard from, (lets [ms*] often hear from him). Occasionally,
the logical object of laffen is even added in the form of a
prepositional adjunct : thus, fie lie^en fid) b u r d) bie '^a&^t
nid)t abl)alten they did not suffer themselves to he restrained hy the
gwards— instead of fie lie^en bie "^a^z fie nid)t abl^alten they did
not suffer the guards to restrain them.
6. Special and more anomalous cases are — an infinitive
in the sense of a present participle after bleiben remain: thus,
fie biieben im Staffer fteden they remained sticking in the water;
and after ^aben with a direct object : thus, er ftat SBeiii im teller
Itegen he has wine lying in his cellar : — an infinitive of purpose
(below, III.l) without gu in a few phrases : as, la^ fie betteln gebn
let them go hegging ! er legt fic^ fd)Iafen he lays himself down to
sleep; — andfpajieren to he out for pleasure or exercise (expatiate)
after a verb expressing the kind of motion : as, ic^ reitc, faftre,
ge^e f])a3ieren I ride, drive, or walk out for pleasure.
180 USES OF THE EOKMS OF CONJUGATION. [343-
II. The infinitive with 311 is often construed as a direct object :
1. As the sole object of a considerable number of verbs, es-
pecially of verbs whose action points forward to something as
to be attained or done : for example, such as signify begin, un-
dertake, endeavor, venture, plan, hope, desire, promise, refrain ;
and some others.
2. Along with an indirect personal object, with verbs signify-
ing command, permit, impute, forbid, and the like.
Thus, er fieBot mir gii fi^njeigen he commanded me to remain
silent, bie 2Bad)e eriaubt 31iemanben tjorsutreten the guard allows
no one to step forward.
III. The infinitive with gu is construed in the manner of an
indirect object :
1. To express the purpose or design of an action : thus, t(J)
bin md}t ha 3ftdt:^fel [3^dtfel] gu Ii3fen lam not here to solve riddles,
bie D[Reere 311 Befreien, foflten aHe Scinber eroBert ttjerben to free the
seas, all lands were to he subdued.
a. This comes nearest to the original and proper purpose of
an infinitive with ju to, in order to, for to. The same meaning is
conveyed more explicitly by prefixing um (see below, 346.1).
h. "feie infinitive stands thus often after fetn to he and ftet)en
stand, with the logical value of an infinitive passive : thus, ba
tuar fo t)iele» 311 fe'^cn there was so much there to he seen (so much
for seeing, as object for sight).
This construction in itself evidently admits of either an active
or a passive interpretation, according as the thing mentioned is
put forward as subject or object of the verbal action conveyed
by the infinitive. German usage merely adopts the latter
alternative.
c. §aBen, with a following infinitive and gu, also sometimes
forms a phrase in which what is properly the object of ^abzn is
regarded and treated as if dependent on the other verb : thus,
n)ir 5aBen ben (^^orfo gu Befc^reiben we have to describe the Corso
(have Che Corso for describing, or as theme for description); — the
object may even be omitted, or an intransitive infinitive em-
ployed, leaving to !^aben simply the idea of necessity : thus, er
^at ntd^t me^r gu fiirc^ten he no longer has [aught] to fear.
2. In other relations such as are ordinarily expressed by a
remoter object, or a prepositional phrase having the value of
such an object, after verbs intransitive or transitive : thus, al^
345] INFINITIVE. 181
er iam gu fterBen when he came to die (to dying), ha treiBf § i!)n, ben
^rei§ gu ermerBen then he feels impelled to gain thepii-ze, man 9e=
lt)oI)nt e§ ftill 5U fte'^en ^^ is trained to stand still, m^t barf x^ bir au
Qleic^en mi(^ t)ermefien /ma?/ not presume to be like thee, tDirfreucn
un§, ba§ gu Wren w;e rejoice at hearing that, er rul^t iiic^t bie ©tabt
SU t)ersieren he ceases (rests) not to adorn the city, ba§ (^ebrdnge
flinbert i^n gu flie^cn the crowd forbids (hinders) him to fly.
As the examples show, the infinitive in this construction,
though it often has the value of a dative, which its governing
preposition gu to best fits it to fill, is also sometimes used in
the manner of a genitive, or of an "ablative" (expressing the
from relation).
[Exercise 30. The Infinitive as Subject and Object.]
344. The Infinitive as adjunct to an Adjective.
1. The infinitive, always with its sign gu, is used as limiting
adjunct especially to adjectives denoting possibility, ease or
difficulty, obligation, desire, readiness, and the like — to such, in
general, as point forward, to something to be attained or done.
Thus, bereit ben ^fetl)er gn burc^bringen ready to penetrate the
ether, leic^t gu frf)affen easy to obtain, bange, feinen ©(^mud gu t)er*
lieren afraid of losing his adornment.
2. Many adjectives when qualified by gu too or genug, etc.
enough, sufficiently, become capable of taking an infinitive as
adjunct : thus, mdrf)ttg genug, bie grogtcn ^l)iere [^tere] gu tobten
[tbten] poiuerful enough to kill the largest animals, gu flein ben
3ftaum gu fiiden too small to fill the space.
But after gu and an adjective, the infinitive governed by um
(346.1), or an awkward and illogical construction with al^ ha^
than that is more frequent.
Compare the power to govern a dative given to an adjective
by the same quahfying words (223.5) ; the cases are plainly
analogous, the gu in such infinitive combinations having its
proper prepositional force.
345. The Infinitive as adjunct to a Noun.
The infinitive, always accompanied by gu, is often dependent
upon a noun.
The cases of such infinitives may be classified under three
heads :
182 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [345-
1. The governing noun is one related in meaning to the verbs
and adjectives already specified as admitting a dependent in-
finitive : thus, (Jrlaubni^ [@rlaubnt§] ben 53aum gu |)Iunbern ver-
misswn to plunder the tree, o^nc ^offnung aufgufte^en without hope
to rise again (of rising), bie 33eaierbe, fie gu tt)ec!en the desire to
awaken her, ben 33orjd)Iag, feine ©fil^ne aBgufenben the proposal to
send off his sons.
2. The preposition gu has nearly its proper meaning as con-
necting the infinitive with the noun: thus, 3eit, fic^ gu ergo^en
time to please one's self (for pleasing), Wntl) [DJ^ut], mi(^ in bie
SBelt gu tnagen courage for venturing into the world, ber ^ugenblid
gu reben the moment for talking.
3. The infinitive represents a genitive, most often a genitive
of equivalence (216.2e), or has the logical value of an added ex-
planation of the governing noun : thus, bie (5(^lt)a(^^eit, jebem gu
Derfpred^en the weakness of promising to each one, ein ©efii^I be§
58erbtenfte§, biefe gauge ^'o^z au^gufiillen a feeling of the merit of
filling out this whole height.
These classes, however, variously cross and pass into each
other.
346. The Infinitive governed by a Preposition.
1. Only three prepositions— namely, um in order, o^ne without,
ftatt or anftatt i'nstead — are allowed in German directly to govern
the infinitive (preceded by its sign gu).
They are placed at the beginning of the infinitive clause, pre-
ceding all the words dependent on or limiting the infinitive,
which stands last, always with gu next before it, and which is
ordinarily to be rendered (except after um) by our infinitive in
ing: thus, iebermann fommt, um gu |e!)en ober gefe^en gu merben
every one comes in order to see or to he seen, o^ne euc^ ft^mer gu
t)er!Iagen without accusing you sorely, anftatt aber bie I)ieburd)
ergeugte giinftige ©timmung gu benu^en instead, however, of im-
proving the favorable state of mind thus brought about.
2. With other prepositions, when a similar expression is re-
quired, the infinitive clause is represented beforehand by a ba
or bar in composition with the preposition, and then itself fol-
lows, as if in apposition with this ba.
Thus, fie maren nabe b ar an, auf ibn gu treten tlwy luere near to
treading on him (near to this — viz. to tread on him), htVda1i)xit m\6)
b a t) r, bie Matter an ben ^ufen fetbft gu legen saved me from
348] INFINITIVE. 183
laying the adder to my own bosom (from this— viz. to lay etc.), fie
brangen barauf, \\6) red^t§ gu wenben they insisted on turning
to the right.
a. Such a phrase as they insisted on his turning to the rights
where the subject of the action signified by the participial infin-
itive is different from that of the verb with which this is con-
nected by the preposition, cannot be expressed in German by an
infinitive: for the infinitive clause is substituted a complete
substantive clause (436.3cZ), with a personal verb and its subject :
thus, fie brangcn barauf, ^a^ er fi(^ re(i)tg tDenben follte they insisted
on this — that he should turn to the right.
347. The Infinitive in Absolute Constructions.
1. In various elliptical constructions, chiefly analogous with
such as are usual in English also, the infinitive stands without
being dependent on any other word : thus, tt)arum mid) mdtn why
awaken me? a^\ auf ha^ mut^icje [mutige] 3fto§ mic^ gu fd)tt)ingen
oh, to leap upon a spirited horse ! o f (^one§ 33ilb, gu f el^en . . .oh
beautiful picture! to see ... , anbercr 3ret)el nid)t gu gebenfen not
to mention other outrages : and so on.
2. By a usage not authorized in good German style, an in-
finitive is colloquially used with an imperative meaning : thus,
ha bleiBen stay there!
348. Infinitive Clauses.
1. The infinitive used directly as a noun (340) has the con-
struction of an ordinary noun. But in its proper use as infinitive it
shares in the construction of the verb of which it forms a part,
taking the same adjuncts — whether predicate, object, adverb, or
prepositional phrase — as the personal forms of the verb ; thus
forming often extended and intricate infinitive clam^es, which
have the logical value of full substantive clauses, and are ex-
changeable with such.
Thus, man ift befi^aftigt, ba§ fd)one ^flafter, tt)o e^ abgutt)et(5^en
fd)eint, mieber neu in ©tanb gu fe^en people are occupied with set-
ting the nice pavement newly in order again, ivJierever it seems
to be giving way, or man ift bamit bef^dftigt, ba^ man in
©tanb fefet.
2. As a rule, the infinitive stands last in such a clause ; and,
in general, whatever is dependent on ^a infinitive is placed
before it.
184 USES OF THE FORMS OF CONJUGATION. [348-
a. See the examples already given. When two or three in-
finitives come to stand together, each precedes the one it
depends on, in the reverse of the EngUsh order : thus, i^r ^abt
mt(^ ermorben laffen tt)oEen you have wanted to cause to murder
me (have me murdered). But an infinitive used as participle
(240.1c) allows nothing to follow it, and an auxiliary infinitive
must be placed before it: thus, \^i tuerbet m6) t}ab en ermorben
laffen iDoIIen you will have wanted etc. Compare 439.2.
[Exercise 31. Infinitive as Adjunct and with Preposition.]
Partidxiles.
349. The participles are properly verbal adjectives, and all
their uses and constructions are those of adjectives.
350. The present participle has active force, representing in
adjective form the exerting of an action, or the continuing of a
state or condition, in the same way as this is represented by
the present tense of the verb.
Thus, ber reifenbe ^aler the travelling painter (i. e. the painter
who travels), eine lieBenbe 50^utter a loving motlier.
a. In rare cases, and by a license which is not approved, a
present participle is used passively : thus, eine melfenbe ^nt^ (eine
^u'^ tt)el(^e gemelft trtrb) a milking cow (a cow that is milked), bie
Doriabenbe 3fieife (bie 9leife bie man l^or^at) the intended journey
(the journey which one has before him), ber betreffenbe $un!t the
point concerned.
351. 1. The past participle of a transitive verb has passive
meaning, without any distinct implication of past time.
Thus, ba§ geliebte ^inb the beloved child, i. e. the child whom
one has loved, or loves, or will love, according to the connection
in which the term is used.
a. But such a participle, from a verb denoting a single act
rather than a continuous action, may sometimes be used with
a past meaning: thus, ba§ gefloftlene ^ferb the stolen horse, ber
fletrunfene SBein the imbibed wine.
2. The past participle of an intransitive verb has active mean-
ing, and is for the most part employed only in the formation of
the compound tenses of the verb. But —
a. The past participle of a verb taking fein as its auxiliary
(241.2) may be used adjectively, with a distinctly past meaning :
354] PAKTICIPLES. 185
thus, ber GefdHcnc 6(f)nee (ber (^(^nee, H)el(^cr Qef alien tft) the fallen
snow.
3. Many words have the form of past participles, but the
value of independent adjectives, either as having a meaning
which would not belong to them as participles, or as being di-
vorced from verbs both in form and meaning, or as derived
from verbs which are no longer in use as verbs, or as seeming
to imply verbs which have never been in use.
Thus, gclet)rt learned, befannt hiwwn, t)erbroffen listless i—tx^a-
Ben lofty (erftoben raised), gebiefienp^^re, sterling (aebte^en thriven);
—)dzx\io\)\in furtive, t)erjd)ieben different;— <^t\\xmi starry, beial^rt
aged.
a. Such past participles have not rarely assumed the value
of present participles : thus, Derfd^mteQen silent, t)erbient deserving,
beforgt anxious, |)fli(^tt)ergeffen duty-forgetting.
352. The future passive participle, as has been already no-
ticed (278), is formed only from transitive verbs, and is not used
otherwise than attributively.
Thus, bie 9tDlIe einer auf feme SBeife gu Beru!)t(^enben ^^xau the
part of a woman wJio was in no way to be pacified, bte gleic^geittg
angutretenben ^ilgerfa'^rten the pilgrimages to be entered upon at
the same time— hut bie grau ift auf feine 2Bei)e gu Beru^igen the
woman is in no way to be pacified (343.III.16).
353. The present participle is used freely as an attributive,
and hence also, like other attributive adjectives, as a sub-
stantive ; but it is rarely employed as a predicate.
Thus, bie jpielenben Siiftc^en the sporting breezes, er tt)e(fte ben
©c^lummernben he awoke the sleeper (slumbering one), ha§ triis
genbe 35ilb lebenber gutte the deceiving show of living f^dness, in
ber §anb be§ ©(^reibenben ober 3Jlalenben in the hand of the writer
or painter.
a. But there are a number of present participles which have
assumed the value and character of adjectives, and admit of
predicative use : for example, reigenb charming, ■^inrei^enb ravish-
ing, Bebeutenb important.
b. Such constructions as our he is loving, they were going,
though not unknown in ancient German, are no longer in use.
354. The past participle (except of an intransitive having
I)aben as auxiliary : see 351.2) is commonly employed both attrib-
186 USES OF THE FOKMS OF CONJUGATION. [354-
utively and predicatively, and may be used as a substantive,
like any other adjective.
Thus, bic berlorene ^txi the hst time, in mxQ tDieberftolter ©eftalt
in ever repeated form, gcbt ben ^efangenen lebig set free tlw
prisoner (imprisoned one).
355. Both participles admit of comparison, or form a com-
parative and superlative degree, only so far as they lay aside
the special character of participles, and become adjectives.
Thus, bebeutenbcrc ©nmmen more important sums, t)a^ erl^abenfte
S3ilb the most majestic image.
356. As adverbs they are used rather sparingly, except those
which have assumed the value of adjectives.
Thus, au§ge3et(^net gelel^rt exceedingly learned, fiebenb fieife
boiling hot, entgudenb oft ravishingly often, i'^re gefenft jc!)Iummerns
ben 35Iatter their droopedly slumbering leaves.
357. Both participles are, especially in higher styles of com-
position, very commonly used appositively (110.1&), either alone,
or with limiting adjuncts such as are taken by the personal
forms of the verb.
Thus, ber TOe fa^ !opffcf)uttelnb nieber the old man looked dmvn,
shaking his head; f(^lafenb ^atte jte mir fo gef alien she had so
pleased me sleeping; l^errlid^e ^aben befd)erenb erfd)etnen fie bestow-
ing splendid gifts, they appear; bem 33ei]'ptele folgcnb, empfingen
biefe iefet ba§ ^reug following the example, these now took the cross;
't)a^ §eer t)atte, buri^ fruc^tbare ©egenben t)orau§3te!)enb, unb reid)Ud^
mit SebenSmitteln Jjerforgt, bie ^rau erreid)t the army, moving on
through fruitful regions and abundantly supplied with provmons,
had reached the Drave; \^ bin ctn Sreunb uon (SJefc^ic^ten, gut er=
Sdlblt I cirii fond of stories, well told; x\o^ lefen uniflort bie ^lugen
bie ;3nf^rift nic^t my eyes, dimmed with grief, do not yet read the
inscription; ic^ fntete nieber, t)on SieV unb ^nbac^t gang burd)ftra^Iet
I kneeled down, quite irradiated with love and devotion; t)om
^O^ei^el befeelt, rebet ber fii^lenbe ©tein animated by the chisel, the
feeling stone speaks; icf) berlie^ fie tDeinenb Ileft her weeping.
a. Such a participle or participial phrase is used only in the
sense of an adjective clause, and expresses ordinarily an ac-
companying circumstance, or describes a state or condition ; it
may not be used, as in English, to signify a determining cause,
or otherwise adverbially : in such phrases as not finding him, I
went away, walking uprightly, we walk surely^ having saluted
360] PABTICIPLES. 187
him, we retired, full adverbial clauses must be substituted for
the participial phrases: thus, ha t^ x^n ni(!)t fanb;— tuenn toir
aufric^tig tcanbeln j — nad^bem mt iftn begrii^t fatten.
b. Rarely, however, the participle approaches a causative
force: thus, bte§ befur(i)tenb, tbhkk Ltotete] er ben ^Beauftragten
fearing this, he slew the messenger. Compare also 431.d
358. The participial clause follows the same rule of arrange-
ment as the infinitive clause (348.2) : namely, the participle
regularly and usually stands last, being preceded by all that
limits it or is dependent on it.
a. This rule is without exception, when the participle is used
attributively (compare 147.2); in the appositive clause, the
participle not very rarely stands first : thus, ber britte, mit ben
frofteften ©offnunoen beaonnene, mit feltener 0ufi6eit gefii^rtc
^reuggug the third criisade, begun with the gladdest hopes, con-
ducted with rare prudence; in ben Sbeen ber franjofifi^en Um-
tt)dlgung ern)ad)]en, rein ge^alten t)on il)ren 35erbre(5^en, begabt mit
ber ®etfte§fldrfe . . . grown up in the ideas of the French revolution,
kept free from its crimes, gifted with the strength of mind . . .
359. Special Uses of Participles. 1. The past participle is
used in the sense of a present participle, after one or two verbs
of motion, to express the mode of motion : thus, f o fam ^^dufig
ein Oafe angefprnngen a hare often came jumping along, :^eulenb
fommt ber ©turm gefloQen the howling storm comes flying.
2. After a verb of calling, a past participle is occasionally
used in an infinitive sense : thus, ba§ ftei^t auc^ fiir bie Su'^unft
Qeforgt that I call (is called) caring for the future also.
3. By an elliptical construction, a past participle has some-
times the value of an imperative : thus, ins x^dh, in bie ^retl^ett
QCjogen march forth (let tliere be marching) into the field, to free-
dom! ben UlajDpen gegdumt [have] the steed bridled! See 230. 3c.
[ExEBCisE 32. Participles.]
INDECLINABLES.
• 360. There are three classes of words not admitting inflec-
tion, or grammatical variation of form indicating change of
relation to other words, and which are therefore called indeclin-
ables, or particles, These three are adverbs, prepositions, and
188 INDECUNABLES. [360-
cjoNJUNcnoNS. They pass over into one another, to some extent,
the same word having often more than one oflSce.
fit- 3a yes and min no are particles which fall properly into
no one of the classes mentioned, each being by itself a complete
(abbreviated) expression, affirming or denying a thought as al-
ready expressed by another.
ADVERBS.
361. Adverbs are words qualifying verbs and adjectives, as
also other adverbs, and defining some mode or circumstance of
the 'action or quality signified by those parts of speech.
In certain exceptional cases, adverbs qualify prepositions
also : see 369.1.
362. Adverbs may be classified according to their
meaning as —
1. Adverbs of manner and quaUty: as, bUnbling^ blindly,
trcult(^ faithfully, t)oflenb§ completely, anber^ otherwise, alf o thus.
2. Adverbs of measure and degree : as, beina^c almost, gdnglic^
wholly, faum scarcely, gu too, fel)r very.
3. Adverbs of place and motion: as, I)ier here, hoxt yonder,
fjn hither, ^in hence, em|)or up, red)t§ to the right, m^ away.
4. Adverbs of time : as, bann then, einft once, oft often, jd^on
already, tnhW^ finally, nie iiever, ^eute to-day.
5. Adverbs of modality, or such as Umit not so much the
thought itself as its relation to the speaker, or show the logical
relation between one thought and another : thus, affirmative,
^iixwaijX assuredly, aIIerbtnQ§ by all means ; —negative, nii^t not,
!enie§tt)efl§ by no meaiw ; —potential, \)kM^t perhaps, tt)a^r}(i)em-
\\^ probably; — causal, ba^er therefore, xoaxnm. for what reason.
a. This last is a transition class between adverbs and conjunc-
tions : see 385.
h. These leading divisions may be very variously subdivided,
nor are their own limits precise or absolute. The relations ex-
pressed by adverbs are almost as indefinitely various as those
expressed by adjectives, and are in like manner incapable of
distinct and exhaustive classification. Hence it is of equal or
greater importance to note their various derivation, to which
we next pass.
363] ADVERBS. 189
363. Adverbs from Adjectives,
1. Almost all adjectives in German admit of use also
as adverbs, in their nninflected or thematic form (see
130).
a. Exceptions are : the articles and pronominal and numeral
adjectives (except erft) ; further, most participles having their
proper participial meaning (356); and a few others, as arm,
gram, todtjx, from which derivative adverbs have been formed
by means of endings (below, 3).
h. In an earlier condition of the language, the adjective when
used as adverb had an ending of inflection. A relic of this
ending is the e of lange long (adj. lang long), and that of gerne,
feme, ja(^te, flille, and a few others, which are now more com-
monly used without e.
2. Adjectives are thus used as adverbs both in the
positive and the comparative degree ; but only rarely
in the superlative.
a. Superlatives that are employed as adverbs in their simple
form are meift, Idngft, iiingft, tta(f)ft, ^o^ft/ ciu^erft, mogli^ft,
innigft, frcunbli^ft, ^^erjlii^ft, fliitigft, gefafligft, and a few others.
b. Instead of the simple adjective, is commonly used in the
superlative an adverbial phrase, composed of the adjective with
preceding definite article and governed by a preposition, an or
auf ; more rarely, in or ^u (compare the similar treatment of the
superlative as predicate, 140.2b).
Thus, tt)a§ am meiften in bte ^lugen fiel what most struck the eye,
ba§ ^t^rb, ha^:) fic^ geftern am fcf)Ie(^teften geftalten the horse that
behaved worst yesterday; man mu^ fie auf§ befte ergte^en one
must bring them up in the best possible manner, er bot burc^ ^e=
fanbte auf§ I)ofIicf)fte an he offered most courteously through ambas-
sadors; §erren nic^t im minb'ften eitel gentlemen not in the least
vain; ha tra} er sum erften %^xt)m then he smote Tlirym first (for
the first).
c. Of the phrases formed with am and auf§, respectively, the
former are used when there is direct comparison made, and
eminence of degree above others is signified (superlative rela-
tive) ; the latter, when general eminence of degree, without
comparison, is intended (superlative absolute : compare 142.1) ;
im and gum are used with certain adjectives, in special phrases.
100 mDECLINABLES. [363-
d. Many superlatives form a derivative adverb with the end-
ing en§ : see below, 3c.
3. A comparatively small number of adverbs are
formed from adjectives by means of derivative endings :
a. 2t(^ (our ly, originally the same word with like) forms a
number of derivative adjectives from adjectives, nouns, and
participles ; and of these a few (fifteen or twenty) nre used only
with adverbial meaning : examples are fretltc^, neultcf), fd^U)erIt(i),
fid)erli(^, Ireulicf), tDa^rlid^, foIfiUc^, l^offentIi(^.
h. Six or eight adverbs are formed from adjectives (or nouns)
by the ending ItnG§ : thus, BIinbltncj§ blindly, f (^rtttltnQg step by
step. The § of this suffix is originally a genitive ending.
c. The suffix en§ forms adverbs from many superlatives, and
from all the ordinal adjectives : thus, beften§ in the best manner,
tx\kn§ firstly, geftntenS tenthly; also from iibrig, uBrigen§ more-
over.
The en of this suffix is an ending of adjective declension, to
which a genitive § has become farther attached, irregularly.
d. The simple genitive ending § forms adverbs from a small
number of adjectives and participles : thus, Iinf§ o?i tJie left,
16crett§ already, anberg otherwise, eilenb§ hastily, iDcrgebeng vainly,
3ufel)enb§ visibly; t)oIIenb§ completely is a corruption of boKenS.
e. A few other derivatives are too irregular and isolated to
require notice here.
364. Adverbs from Nouns.
1. Besides the few adverbs formed from nouns by the suffixes
It(i) and ling? (above, 363.3a,&), there is also a small number
formed by the simple genitive ending § ; as, anf ang§ in the begin-
ning, flug§ in haste, tftetig [teil§] in part, nad)t§ in the night.
With these are to be compared the adverbial genitives of
nouns, either without or with a limiting word, noticed at 220.1.
2. A considerable number of adverbs of direction are formed
from nouns and prepositions by the suffix n)drt§ (by origin, the
genitive case of an adjective tt)drt turned, directed): thus, auf=
tt)art§ upward, oftmdrta eastward, l^immelmartS heavenward.
365. Adverbs by combination.
1. Combinations of a noun and a limiting word (article, ad-
jective, pronominal adjective — even adverb), which, from being
adverbial phrases, have become fused together into one word.
367] ADVEKBS. 191
a. Such are of every oblique case, most often genitives, least
often datives, but not infrequently with irregular endings or
inserted letters.
Examples are grofetentl^eil§ [gro^tenteilg] mostly, !elne§tt)eg§ in
no wise, bergeftalt in such wise, aHent^alBen everywhere, aKeseit
always, jebenfaflS in any event, einmal once, m\mal§ often, abtx^'
mal§ again.
h. Certain nouns are thus used with especial frequency, form-
ing classes of compound adverbs : such are ®ing, 5^^/ &(il^^/
9J^aI, Wa% 6eite, %\)t\\ [2eil], 2BeQ, SBeile, 2©eifc.
2. Combinations of a preposition with a following or preceding
noun, or with a following adjective. These are also fused ad-
verbial phrases.
Examples are untertDcg^ on the way, ab^anben out of reach, gu-
tDeilen sometimes, iiBer^au^jt in general, tnbeficu meanwhile;
bergab dx)wn hill, ftromauf np stream; guerft at first, \mvoa\)i
verily,
3. Combinations of adverbs with adverbs or prepositions^
more proper compounds. These are very numerous, and various
in kind ; one or two classes require to be especially noticed :
a. Combinations with the words of general direction or mo-
tion, such as are also used as compound prefixes to verbs;
see 298.2.
h. Combinations of prepositions with the adverbs ba or bar,
tt)0 or tDor, and Ine or I)i:r, used commonly as equivalents for
the cases of pronouns governed by those j repositions (see
154.2,3 ; 166.4 ; 173.2 ; 180), with a demonstrative, an interrog-
ative, or a relative value.
366. Adverbs of obscure derivation.
Many adverbs which appear like simple words are traceable
to combinations analogous with those explained above.
Examples are jmar to be sure (^\ tcare in truth), nur only (ni
n)are were it not), fonft else (\o ne \\i so it be not), );)t\xit to-day
rtiu tagu on this day), nie never (m ie not ever), nimmer never
(ntc me"^r never more), ni(^t not fne-mil^t no aught).
367. Original Adverbs.
Besides the classes already treated of, there remain a number
of adverbs which, though in part demonstrably forms of inflec-
tion of pronominal and other words, may be practically regarded
as original. The most important classes of these are—
192 INDECLINABLES. [367-
1. The simple adverbs of place or directi n, ab, an, auf, aua,
Bei, burc^, in or ein, oB, urn, t)or, juj— these are all of them com-
monly employed as prepositions, but retain their adverbial
value especially as prefixes to verbs (298.1).
2. Derivatives from pronominal roots : thus —
a. from the demonstrative root (in ber)— ba, bar, banti, benn,
bort, beflo, bo(i).
b. from the interrogative root (in tt)er) — tt)te, tPO, tDcnti, tt)ann.
c. from an obsolete demonstrative root hi — ]^ie, ^m, l)er, I)tn,
l^inter.
3. Farther derivatives from these classes, with adverbial or
prepositional meaning : thus, from in, inne and tnnen ; from oB,
ober and oBen, iiber and iiBen ; from bann, \oann, and l)in, bannen,
tt)annen, and pitmen ; and so on.
a. In several cases, forms in er and en stand related to one
another as corresponding preposition and adverb : thus, iiBer
and iiBen, Winter and l^inten, au^er and au^en, unter and unten.
368. Comparison of Adverbs.
Adverbs, as such, do not generally admit of comparison:
comparative and superlative adverbs, so-called, are for the most
part comparative and superlative adjectives used adverbially.
a. Only oft often forms ofter and i3fteft; and e^e (itself used
only as conjunction, ere, or in a few compounds, as e^ebem, with
prepositional force) forms efter and om e^eften.
b. A few words now used only as adverbs have corresponding
forms of comparison from other words, adjectives : for example,
Qcrn willingly has lieBer, am IteBften, from HeB dear.
c. Adverbs whose meaning calls for such treatment may,
rarely, form a kind of degrees of comparison with meBr more
and am meij'ten most, or other qualifying adverbs of similar
meaning : thus, mel^r red)t§ mxrre to the right, am meiften DoriDartg
farthest forward.
369. Certain special uses of Adverbs.
1. Some adverbs qualify prepositions — or, rather, preposi-
tional phrases of adverbial meaning : thus, mitten um ben i3eiB
midway about the body, baB er Beftdnbe Bi§ auf0 ^lut, B i§ in ben
^ob bte t^e^be that he might maintain his quarrel even to blood,
even unto dedth.
371] ADYERBS. 19S
2. Adverbs are not seldom governed by prepositions: see
below, 378.
3. Adverbs are used elliptically with the value of adjectives :
thus, biefer 50^ann l^ier this man here, (SJraber unb bie ^t)preffen
bran graves and the cypresses thereon ; — or, in predicative rela-
tions, nun tt)ar ber ^benb t)orbet now the evening was past, btc
3al^re finb no(^ nidjt urn the years are not yet over, a(le§ foil
anberg fein unb Qejc^marfDoII everything is to he otherwise, and
tasty, \\i fein 5D^orber mel^r untertt)ege§ is there no longer a
murderer on the way ? aller SCSetteif er tt)trb ijergeben^aZi emula-
tion becomes futile, id) f a^ D^ebel todi u m !) e r I saw mist far
about.
4. An adverb is often added after a preposition and its object,
to complete or to make more distinct the relation expressed by
the preposition : see below, 379.
370. Place of Adverbs,
1. An adverb precedes the adjective or adverb wliicli
it qualifies.
a. Except genUQ enough, which, as in English, follows the
word it Umits.
2. An adverb qualifying a personal verb is put after it in the
regular arrangement of the sentence ; one qualifying an infin-
itive or participle is placed before it.
As to the place of the adverb in relation to other adjuncts of
the verb, see 319 ; as to certain adverbial words which have ex-
ceptional freedom of position, see 385.4.
PREPOSITIONS.
371. A preposition is a word used to define the relation be-
tween some person or thing and an action, a quahty, or another
person or thing with which it stands connected.
a. The distinctive characteristic of a preposition is that it
governs an oblique ca^e of a noun (or of the equivalent of a
noun) ; and by this it is separated from an adverb : it is a kind
of transitive adverb, requiring an object in order to the comple-
tion of the idea which it signifies. Many words are either ad-
verbs or prepositions, according as they are used without or
with such object.
194 INDECLINABLES. [371-
b. Many of the German prepositions are of late formation
from nouns or adjectives, or from adverbial phrases containing
such. Some examples of these will be noted below.
372. Prepositions are most conveniently classified
according to the case they govern, as the genitive, the
dative, the accusative, and the dative or accusative.
a. A few govern either the dative or genitive, but their dif-
ference of use in this respect is not of consequence enough to
found a class upon.
373. Prepositions governing the genitive are anftatt or ftatt
instead of, f)aI6er or :^al6en for the sake o/— with the compounds
of l^alb, namely au^erl)al6 without, outside, inner^alb within, oBcr=
"ijoib above, unter^alb below— txa^i in virtue of, Idngg along, laut
according to, trofe in spite of, urn . . . trillen on account of, unge-
a^ki (or oI)nGea(^tet) notwitJistanding, unfern and unmeit 7iot far
from, mxikk or mittelft or t)ermittel[t by means of, t)ermofie by dint
of, xoa\)xtnh during, m^^m on account of, guf olfle in consequence of,
and the compounds of jeit, biefjeit or bicffeit^ on this side of, and
jenfeit or jenfeitS on the further side of, beyond (cf. also 152.2).
Thus, ftatt ber golbnen Sieber instead of the golden songs, um
biefer fremben S^ugen l^illen on account of these stranger witnesses,
^enugt:^uung megen ber getobteten [getoteten] S^rifteu satisfaction
on account of the slain Christians, jenfeit be§ gorfteS beyond the
forest.
a. Of these prepositions, ldng§, tro^, and gufolge also not in-
frequently govern the dative ; some others do so occasionally.
b. §al6en or '^alber always follows the noun it governs ; um . . .
tDilIen takes the noun between its two parts ; ungeQ(f)tet, tnegen,
and pfolge may either precede or follow (gufolge precedes a gen-
itive, but follows a dative).
c. These prepositions are of recent use as such, and all evi-
dently derived from other parts of speech. §alb is a noun
meaning originally side; megen was formerly Don tDcgen, which
is still in occasional use.
d. The adverbial genitives ^Ingefi(%t§ -in presence and ^e()uf§
in behalf, the adverbs tnmitten in the midst, aBfctt§ aside, and
some of those formed with vo'dxt^, as (eittx)drt§ sideways, noxhmxi^
northwards, also entlang along, and a few others, antiquated or
of rare occurrence, are sometimes used prepositionally with a
genitive.
375] PEEPOSITIONS. 195
374. The prepositions governing the dative are, of more an-
cient and original words, au§ out, bet by, mit with, oh above, for,
t)on of, guto; of recent and derivative or compound words,
nad) after, to, feit siiwe, gleid) like, fammt and neb[t along with,
ndif)ft next, binnen within, aujser outside, entgegen against, gegen*
iiber opposite, gemdB wi accordance with, gutDiber contrary to.
a. For prepositions wliich more regularly and usually govern
the genitive, but are sometimes construed with a dative, see
above, 373a. Of those here mentioned, ob (which is now anti-
quated), when meaning 07i account of, is occasionally used with
a genitive ; au^er governs a genitive in the single phrase au^er
£anbe§ out of the country.
h. dla^, oleirf), and gemd^ either precede or follow the governed
noun : thus, nad) ber (^taht to the city, ber ^ainx nad) according
to nature; gemd^ ben Urgefc^id)ten according to the old stories, ber
3eit unb ben Umftdnben gemd^ in ax^cordance with the time and the
circumstances; jie gte^t fid^ gleic^ einem 2}leere§arme ^in it stretches
along, after the manner of an arm of the sea, jie flog, etner ©ijlp^ibe
glei(^ she flew like a sylph, ^ntgegen, gegeniiber, and gumiber fol-
low the noun ; but gegeniiber is sometimes (by a usage no longer
approved) divided, and takes the noun between its two parts :
thus, gmei tauten fi^en gegen einanber iiber two ladies sit opposite
one another.
c. Occasionally, by a bold construction, a word which is
properly adverb only is construed as if preposition : thus, Doran
ben filftnen Slet^en in front of the brave ranks: compare 373c?.
375. The prepositions governing the accusative only
are bur(^ through, fiir/or, (]egGn or gen against, otjite tvith-
out, um about, tDiber against; also fonber without, big
unto, tiU.
a. ^en is now nearly out of use, except in certain phrases,
like gen ^immel toward heaven, gen SBeften toward the west.
©onber is hardly employed except in a phrase or two, as fonber
glei(^en without equal. 53iy usually stands adverbially before a
preposition (see 369.1), but also governs directly specifications
of place and time : thus, biy 'i}lntiod)ien as far as Antioch, trarte
nur bi3 morgen only wait till tomorrow.
b. Um is very often followed by ber after the noun : see 379a.
c. From the case of an accusative governed by a preposition
requires to be distinguished that of an absolute accusative of
196 mDECLlNABLES. [375-
place followed by an adverb of direction, as ben QBerg ^inauf up
the mountain (see 230.1&). This construction is interesting as
illustrating an intermediate step in the process of conversion of
adverbs into prepositions.
376. Nine prepositions govern sometimes the dative
and sometimes the accusative— the dative, when they
indicate locality or situation merely, or answer the
question "where?" the accusative, when they imply
motion or tendency toward, or answer the question
** whither ? " They are an on, at, auf upon, I^inter behind,
in in, into, neben beside, iiber above, across, unter under,
Dor be/ore, jiDifd^eit between.
Thus, t(^ "ijoik an ben ©c^ranfen, unb retc^e ben C>^Int an einen
^nappen ^mnd I stop at the bari-ier, and hand hack my helmet to
a squire; er tag auf ber ^.rbe, unb ^aik ha^ Oftr auf ben 3fta(en 9e=
legt he lay on the ground, and had his ear laid on the turf; fie
Briiten !)inter bem Dfen they brood behind the stove, er legte \i^
Vinkx eine 2abad§bofc he laid himself behind a snuff-box; er ging
tn§ ^an^, unb blieb lange in bemfelben he went into the house, and
staid a long time in it; bott liegt er neben einem Stein there it lies
beside a stone, fie fe^ten fic^ neben ben 33aum they seated themselves
beside the tree; ber 3flad)en f(^Ue^t fid) itber bem ©d^mimmer the
abyss closes over the swimmer, iiber biefen ©trom bin x^ einmal
gefabren I once crossed over this stream; ber ^abn trieb unter eine
^riide, unter btefer 33ru(fe n)Dbnte eine 9latte tlie boat drove under-
neath a bridge, under this bridge lived a rat; im^^ugenblid iDaren
fie t)Dr bem gelfen in a moment they were before the rock, er trat
t)or bie ^onigtn he came before the queen; ha^ ©eftrirfe rubte
3tDif(^en ibren §tinben the knitting-work lay between her Itands, fie
f^blupften aroij^en feine Stueige they slipped in among its branches.
a. The difference of meaning determining the use of the
dative or accusative after these prepositions is not always an
obvious one ; sometimes a peculiar liveliness is given to an ex-
pression by the employment of the accusative : thus, er mad^te
eine Deffnung in bie ^rbe he made a hole in (into) the ground, unb
fii^te fie an ben 5}lunb and kissed her on the mouth (impressed a
kiss), iiber ben 9lanb ber Xiefe gebogen arched over (thrown as
arch across) the edge of the abyss; or, the accusative implies a
verb of motion which is not expressed: thus, er fticg in ein
2[Birtb§baug [SBirt^bauS] ab he got dmn (and entered) into an inn,
378] PEEPOSITIONS. 197
cr rettctc fi(f) In bte 35urg he saved himself (betook himself for
safety) into the castle, fie fteften in bie ^bfte they stand up (rise to
a standing posture) ; or, the action is a figurative one : thus, an
t^n benfen think of him (turn one's thoughts on him), er fa^ auf aH
bic $rad)t he looked upon all the beauty, fie freueten ]\^ iiber bie
fd^onenSpfel they were delighted with the beautiful apples; or
there are phrases, the imphcation of which seems arbitrarily
determined: thus, auf bie befte SBeife in the best manner, iiber
taufenb Sa^re after a tliousand years.
b. It is only by its use of in and into (as also, in colloquial
phrase, of on and onto), that the English makes a corresponding
distinction ; and even this does not agree in all particulars with
the German distinction of in with the dative and with the ac-
cusative. Hence the ground of the difference of case is the less
easily appreciated by us, and needs to be carefully noted at
every instance that occurs.
c. The accusative and dative with these prepositions have
each its own proper value, the one as the case of directest ac-
tion, the other as representing the ancient locative (or case de-
noting the in relation).
377. 1. Some prepositions govern a substantive clause, in-
troduced usually by ba^, rarely by a compound relative (179) :
such are auf, au^er, bi§, o^ne, ftatt or anftatt, urn, ungeacfitet, h)dl)=
renb : thus, auf ba^ e§ bir tuofti (^e^e in order that it may go well
with thee, au^er mx feine ^Jlitfc^uIbiQen feien except who were his
accomplices.
a. This is closely akin with the office of conjunction ; and bi§,
ungeadjtet, and tt)df)renb may be used without ba6, as proper con-
junctions: thus, n)dt)renb ton ha blieben while we continued there
(compare 439.6c).
2. The prepositions um, oftne, and ftatt or anftatt may govern
an infinitive and its adjuncts, as equivalent of a complete clause
(compare 346.1).
378. An adverb not infrequently takes the place of a noun
as object of a preposition. Thus —
a. Many adverbs of time and place : as, na^ oben upward
(toward above), auf immer for ever, fiir ie^t for now, t)on fern
from afar, in tt)te fern /low far.
b. The adverbs b a or b ar, to o or tr ar, and T^ier or l^ie, as substitutes
for the oblic[ue cases of pronouns. These ^re compoundeci wjtti
198 INDECLINABLES. [378-
the governing preposition, forming a kind of compound adverb
(see 365.3&).
379. 1. After the noun governed by a preposition is often
added an adverb, to emphasize, or to define more nearly, the
relation expressed by the preposition. Thus —
a. The general adverbs of direction, \)m and l^er : as, um un§
fier, um \\)X[ l^er round about us or him, Winter xtjm l^er along after
Mm, na^ eiuer 9tic^tun(^ fjin in a single directwn, iiber bag 9)leer
l^in across the sea, Don alien ©eiten ^er/rom all sides.
In these combinations, the distinctive meaning of the adverb,
as denoting motion from and toward, is apt to be effaced. Um . . .
l^er is the commonest case, and a stereotyped expression for
round about.
b. The same adverbs, in combination with the preposition it-
self repeated : thus, um mi(^ lucrum rowid about me, in ben Sorft
l^inein into the forest, an^ bem SBalbe l^inaug out of the wood, an^
ber 33ruft ^erau§ forth from the breast, hm6) ®efal)ren l^inburd^
through dangers.
c. Other adverbs of direction, simple or compound, often ad-
ding an essential complement to the meaning of the preposi-
tion: thus, t)on nun an from now on, t)on bort an§ forth from
there, Don Sugtnb a\i\ from youth up, wad) hnWxik^n toward the
middle, fie flingen auf i^n gu they fell upon him, er I)i3rt bie Seinbe
l^inter fi(^ brein he hears the enemy (coming on) after him, l^inter
58dumen \\tx'oox forth from behind trees, gur hammer T^inein into the
room, gum ^l^ore I)inau§ out of the gate.
2. It may sometimes be made a question whether the adverb
of direction belongs to the prepositional phrase, or, rather, to
the verb of the clause, as its ^prefix : the two cases pass into one
another,
380. To what members of the sentence a prepositional phrase
forms an adjunct has been pointed out already : namely —
1. To a verb, with very various value : see 318.
2. To a noun : see 112.
3. To an adjective: see 146.
4. Hence, also, to an adverb, when an adjective is used as
such.
381. 1. The rules for the position of a preposition, whether
before or after the noun that it governs, have been given above,
io Qoiinectioii with the rules for ^overnraeot,
383] CONJUNCTIONS. 199
2. Between the preposition and its following governed noun
may intervene the various limiting words which are wont to
stand before a noun — as articles, adjective pronouns, adjectives
and participles, with their adjuncts — often to an extent dis-
cordant with English usage : thus, an§ fleincn, t)ieredig 3ugcl&au=
enen, steniUd) Qleid)en ^afaltftiiden of small, squarely hewn, tolerably
equal pieces of basalt; fiir bent ^ranfen Qeletflete ^ni\t for help
rendered to the sick man.
Respecting the combination of the preposition with a following
definite article into a single word, see 65.
[Exercise 33. Adverbs and Prepositions.]
CONJUNCTIONS.
382. Conjunctions are words which connect the clauses or
sentences composing a period or paragraph, and show their
relation to one another.
a. We have hitherto had to do only with the elements which
enter into the structure of individual clauses, and among which
conjunctions play no part. "When, however, clauses themselves
are to be put in connection with one another, conjunctions are
required.
h. If certain conjunctions — especially those meaning and and
or — appear to connect words as well as clauses, it is as such
words represent clauses, and may be expanded into them : thus,
er unb ic^ tt)aren ha — er Wax ba, unb tcf) ioar ha he was there and 1
was there, er ift mdcf)tiger al§ ic^ (bin) he is mightier than I (am).
c. Conjunctions, as a class, are the words of latest develop-
ment in the history of language, coming from other parts of
speech, mainly through the medium of adverbial use. A word
ceases to be an adverb and becomes a conjunction, when its
qualifying influence extends over a whole clause instead of be-
ing limited to a particular word in it. Almost all conjunctions
in German are also adverbs (or prepositions), and their uses as
the one or the other part of speech shade off into one another,
383. Conjunctions are most conveniently classified
according to the character of the relations they indicate,
and their effect upon the arrangeinent of the clauses
ihej introduce, as—-
200 INDECLINABLES. [383-
1. General connectives, which do not alter the arrange-
ment of the clause.
2. Adverbial conjunctions, causing the inversion of a
clause (that is to say, causing its subject to follow, in-
stead of preceding, the verb).
3. Subordinating conjunctions, which make the clause
dependent, and give it the transposed order (removing
the verb to the end).
4. The first two classes, in contradistinction from the third,
may be called co-ordinating conjunctions.
384. The general connectives are those signifying
and, but, for, and or and either.
Namely unb and;—dbtx, aEein, jonbern (and sometimes bodf))
hut;— htnn for;— tnimhn either and ober or,
a. Of the words meaning but, fonbern is more strongly ad-
versative than abet, being used only after a negative, and intro-
ducing some word which has a Uke construction with the one on
which the force of the negation falls, and which is placed in
direct antithesis with it: thus, tcetl nic^t eigne 9}^a(!)t, fonbern
(^ott, bte ^onige errettet because not their own might, but God,
saves kings; er geno§ nt(!)t lange fetne§ 9iu!)m§, fonbern tnarb be=
gn)ungen he did not long enjoy his fame, but he was subdu£d; mein
IRetter xcax fein 3}Jann, fonbern ein 33a(i) my preserver was no man,
but a brook ;~the combination ni(^t nur (or blo^) . . . fonbern an^
not only . . . but also is likewise common : thus, nic^t blo^ jenc
fiinbigten, fonbern an^ n)ir not they alone sinned, but also we.
%iit\n means hterally only, and is often best so rendered, being
more restricted than aber to the introduction of a definite ob-
jection. For bod^ as but, see below, 385.5c.
b. These connectives stand always at the head of the clause
whose connection they indicate : except aber, which has great
freedom of position, and may be introduced at any later point
— without any notable difference of meaning, although often to
be conveniently rendered by however.
385. 1. The adverbial conjunctions are originally
and strictly adverbs, qualifying the verb of the clause
which they introduce ; and, like any other of the ad-
385] CONJUNCTIONS. 201
juncts of the verb (431), when placed at the head of the
clause, they give it the inverted order, putting the sub-
ject after the verb.
2. No distinct boundary separates the conjunctional use of
these words from their adverbial use : they are conjunctions
when their effect is to determine the relations of clauses to one
another, rather than to limit the action of a verb — and these
two offices pass insensibly into each other.
3. They may be simply classified as —
a. Copulative (related to the general connective and\ uniting
different phrases with no other implication than that of con-
tinuation, order, or division : as, aud) also, aufeerbem besides, bann
then, ferner further, erften§, 3tt)eitcn§, britteny, firstly, secondly,
thirdly, and so on, f c^lie^Iid) finally, meber . . . nod) 7ieither . . . nor,
M\^ [tetl§] tftetlS [k'M partly partly, Balb Balb
now .... now.
h. Adversative (related to but), implying more or less distinctly
an opposition of idea, a denial or restriction : as, bod), ieboc^, ben*
nD(5^ yet, though, gleidjtDoI)!, befjenunaeac^tet nevertheless; bagegcn,
l^ingegen on the contrary, tnbeffen however, t)ielme!)r rather, gnjar
to be sure, tDol^l indeed.
c. Causative (related to for), implying a groxmd, reason, or oc-
casion : as, hat}tx, begmegen, be§l()a(6 therefore, alfo accordingly,
folglid), mitl^in consequently.
d. Adverbs of place and time, particularly the latter, some-
times assume a conjunctional value : as, nnterbcffen meanwhile,
t)OX^zt previously, barauf thereupon.
4. Although these words in their conjunctional office tend
toward the head of the clause, they do not always take that
place ; nor are they always conjunctions rather than adverbs
when they introduce the clause. Especially ndmli(^ namely, and
some of the adversative and causative conjuncti ns — as ho^,
iebo(^, inbefjen, gwar, n)O^I, alfo— have a freedom of position like
that of aber (3846).
5. The clause sometimes maintains its normal order, instead
of being inverted, after conjunctions of this class : especially —
a. When the emphasis of the clause, or of the antithesis in
two correlative clauses, rests on the subject, so that the con-
junction becomes a kind of adjunct of thtj subject : thus, an^
202 INDECLINABLES. [385-
bein 55ruber ^at e§ Qetriinf^t thy brother also has wished it, tcebcr
er, nod) tc^ tDaren ba neither he nor I were there.
h. When the conjunction represents a clause which is not fully
expressed, or is thrown in as it were parenthetically. Conjunc-
tions most often so treated are gmar, iiberbiefe, folQli^, gubem,
I)inge9en, and ordinals, as erften§, gmeiten^.
c. ^0(f) sometimes has its adversative force weakened to a
mere "but, and leaves the order of the clause imchanged, like the
other words that have that meaning (384).
386. 1. The subordinating conjunctions are such as
give to the clause which they introduce a dependent
(subordinate, accessory) value, making it enter, in the
relation of substantive, adjective, or adverb, into the
structure of some other clause (435). Such a dependent
clause assumes the transposed order — that is to say, its
personal verb is removed to the end of the clause (see
434 etc.).
2. The conjunctions that introduce a substantive dependent
clause are ba^ that, ob whether, and those that have a compound
relative value, namely iDte how, toann when, tDO where, and the
compounds of too, whether with adverbs of direction, as iDo^in
whither, iDo'^er whence, or with prepositions, as representing
cases of the compound relative pronoun tDer (180), as h)Dt)on
whereof, tDomit wherewith.
Thus, id) iDeiB, ba^ er I)ler Moax] ob cr nocf) Vxzx bleibt, tft mir un=
befannt; fragen 8tc nur narf), tDo'^in er jid) begeben babe I know
that he was here ; whether he still remains here is unknown to me ;
only inquire whither he has betaken himself.
3. The conjunctions that introduce an adjective dependent
clause are chiefly those made up of prepositions with the ad-
verbs ba and tr)0, representing cases of the simple relative pro-
nouns ber and tt)eld)er (180), or of words of direction with the
same adverbs. The simple conjunctions tt)o, tt)enn, XDann, ha,
al§, tt)ie, following specifications of place, time, or manner, also
sometimes perform the same office.
Thus, ha^ 33ett, toorauf er lag the bed on which he laij; tbr
OueEen, babin bte tcelfe 33ruft fic^ brdngt ye fountains toward
which the drooping breast presses ; ba§ Sanb, tDO bie ©ihonen bliibn
the land where the lemons blossom ; bte ^xi, tDte man ben ^rieg fiibvt
the way in which the war is carried on.
387] CONJUNCTIONS. 203
4. The conjunctions that introduce an adverbial dependent
clause are > f very various derivation, character, and meaning,
namely —
a. Conjunctions indicating 'place : as, tt)o, ha where.
b. Time: as, ha, al^, tt)enn, mie, tt)o when, tnbem, tnbeffen or
inbe^, tDeil, radljrenb while, nac^bem after, feitbem since, bi§ until,
t^t, bet)or 6e/ore.
c. Manner: as, toie as.
d Caitse; as, tr)eil, biemeil because, ha since, nun noit? that, ha^
that.
e. Purpose: as, bamit, ha% uuf ba^, urn bo§ in or(^er i/iai.
/. Condition: as, menu i/, jo, tt)o, rt)ofern, bafern, fafl§ m case,
inbem while; and, with implication of objection, unGcad)tet, ob=
glei(^, obiDo^I, ob)(5^on, ob gmar, ob auc^, tDeimQleid), mennfc^on,
tt)enn and), tt)iett)o^l although.
The compounds of ob and menn with filei(^, tt)O^I, and [(^on,
meaning although, are often separated by intervening words.
g. Degree: as, tDte as, Je according as, al§, benn ^/i'an.
/i. Besides these, there are numerous conjunctional phrases,
of kindred value, composed of conjunctions and other particles :
as, aU ob as if, in tt)ie fern so far a% je na(i)bem according as,
fo balb as soon as, fo lawQ so long as, etc.
i. (Bo, especially, with following adverb, forms (as in the last
two examples) a great number of conjunctional phrases or com-
pounds, after which the conjunction al§ as is sometimes ex-
pressed, but more often implied : thus, )o lang al§ e§ nur mbQlid^
ift, or fo lang e§ nur mogUc^ ift so long as it is in any way possible
(compare 438.3d).
5. Few of these words are exclusively conjunctions : many
are adverbs also, or prepositions, or both ; some, as tudl^renb,
ungeac^tet, are participial forms ; some, as fafl§, toni, are cases
of nouns ; many are combined phrases composed of a i reposi-
tion and a governed case ; as inbem, nai^bem, feitbem.
INTERJECTIONS.
387. The interjections have a character of their own, sepa-
rate from the other parts of speech, in that they do not enter
as elements into the structure of sentences or periods, but are
independent outbursts of feeling, or intimations of will, the ut-
tered ec^uivalents of a tone, a grimace, or a gesture,
204 INBECLINABLES. [388-
388. Nevertheless, they are not purely natural exclamations,
but utterances akin with such, which are now assigned by usage
to the expression of certain states of mind or will.
389. The interjections most commonly used are —
1. Of those expressing feeUng — o or ol&, used in a great
variety of meanings ; ad), tr)el), expressing painful or disagreeable
surprise or grief; p^m, fi, bal), expressmg disgust or contempt;
ei, joyful surprise ; ija, a^, wonder, pleasure, and the like ; l^eifa,
iud^^e, exultation ; ^em, ^)m, doubt, hesitation ; :^u, horror, shud-
dering.
2. Of those intimating will or desire — ))t, Ifieba, fjoUa, to call
attention ; |)ft, the same, or to command silence ; ljii]d), to indi-
cate quick movement ; topp, to signify the closing of a bargain.
3. Here may be best classed, also, the various imitations of the
cries of animals and other natural sounds, directions and c^ll-
words for animals, and the more or less artificially composed
and unintelligent words which are used as burdens of songs and
the like : as, ftopfafa, t)it)aGera, tumtebum.
390. As, on the one hand, the interjections are employed
with a degree of conventionality, like the other constituents of
language, so, on the other hand, many words that are proper
parts of speech are very commonly used in an exclamatory
way, quite as if they were interjections. Such are :^ei( hail! gott=
loh praise God! beit)al)r Godforhia! fort, tt)eg away! fie^ beJwld!
brat) well done! etc.; and the whole series of oaths and ad-
jurations.
a. The ordinary equivalent of our alas, leiber, is an abbrevia-
tion of the phrase n)a§ tnir nod) leiber ift what is yet more pain-
ful to me (or something equivalent to this), and is capable of
being introduced, parenthetically, at almost any point in the
phrase — even, when put first, sometimes causing inversion, like
an adverb.
391. The exclamatory or inter jectional mode of expression
prevails to no small extent in the practical use of language,
when emotion or eagerness causes that usual set framework of
the sentence, the verb and its subject, to be thrown aside, and
only the emphatic elements to be presented at all.
Thus, eud) gur ©rbin erfldren! ber t)errdt^ertfc^e [t)errdterif(^e]
gfatlftridt declare you my heiress! the treacherous snare! pie^M
393] INTERJECTIONS. 205
auf! 5tnou§ m§ toeite Sanb! flee! up! out into the wide country!
id) derfteV bii^; tDciter! I understand ijou : further!
The grammatical forms most frequently thus used are the
nominative of address (or "vocative : " 214), and the imperative.
392. Some of the interjections are also brought into a kind
of connection with the structure of the sentence, being followed
by cases, or phrases, such as would suit a more complete ex-
pression of the feehng they intimate.
Thus, 0, a^, pfui may stand before a genitive expressing the
occasion of the exclamation : as in o be§ Sftoren ! pfui ber 6c^anbe !
oh the fool ! fie on the shame ! — some may take a prepositional
phrase or a substantive clause after them : as, ad^ ba^ bu ba
liegft alas that thou liest there ! pfut iiber ben S^ifl^n fie on the
coward! — and nouns used inter jectionally often admit a dative
object, signifying that toward which the feeling is directed;
thus, §eil, grueling, beinem ©(^ein hail to thy brilliancy, O
Spring! mel& mir, '^a^ id) bir Jjertraut woe tome, that I have trusted
thee!
[Exercise 34. Conjunctions and Interjections.]
WORD-FORMATION, DERIVATION.
Introductory Explanations,
393. The etymological part of grammar, as thus far treated,
deals with the character and uses of the parts of speech, and of
their grammatical or inflectional forms, which are made from
simple roots or from stems, chiefly by inflectional endings, but
in part also by internal change.
a. Such grammatical forms (along with the indeclinable
particles, which are ultimately of the same character with them)
constitute the most essential part of the grammatical apparatus
of a language, its instrumentality for the expression of relations
of ideas, the means by which its names of beings, qualities, acts,
etc., are placed in connection with one another, in order to ex-
press the thoughts of the speaker.
h. Boot is the name given to an ultimate significant element,
itself containing nothing that is recognizably formative. From
roots, by the ordinary means of derivation, are made stems (or
themes, or bases), from which come inflectional forms, and also
other stems.
206 DEETVATION. [394-
394. Another and only less important part of the same
grammatical apparatus is the array of means by which stems
of declension and conjugation are formed from roots and from
each other. These means are of the same character with those
already described, consisting chiefly of suffixes, along with a
few prefixes, and supplemented by methods of internal change.
395. There is no fundamental diversity between the two in-
strumentalities. The suffixes and prefixes of inflection and of
derivation are equally, by origin, independent words, which
were first uttered in connection with other words, then
combined with the latter, and finally made to lose their
independence and converted into subordinate elements, des-
ignating the relations of other more substantial and significant
elements.
a. The working-out of grammatical apparatus, by the reduc-
tion of words once independent to the condition of endings of in-
flection or derivation, has been a part of the history of inflective
languages, from their beginning down to modern times. Of
many of the affixes formed in this way, as well as of some that
are much more ancient, the origin can still be distinctly traced ;
but their history is to a great extent obscured by the effects of
linguistic change and corruption. Compare what is said above
of the derivation of the ending tc, forming the preterits of the
New conjugation (246.3), and of the suffixes lic^, irdrt^, etc. (363-4).
h. The difference between the two classes of endings lies in
their mode of application, and in the frequency and regularity
of their use. Certain suffixes of derivation are so regularly ap-
plied to whole classes of themes, and produce derivatives so
analogous with forms of inflection, that they are conveniently
and properly treated along with the subject of inflection. Such
are the endings er and eft of comparatives and superlatives
(133 etc.), and those which form the infinitive and participles of
verbs.
396. Among modem languages commonly studied, the
German is the one which most fully and clearly illustrates the
processes of word-formation ; and the subject ought; therefore
to receive the attention of every advanced German scholar.
397. But no known language (not even such exceptional
ones as the Sanskrit) has preserved so much of its primitive
structure that we can carry back the analysis of its vocabulary
to the actual beginning. By the help, especially, of a careful
400] PEINCIPLES. 207
and searching comparison of related languages, the processes of
word-combination can be traced up until we discover of what
sort are the ultimate elements of speech, although we are by
no means certain of being able to point them out in their very-
form and substance.
Principles,
398. The words of German, as of other related languages,
are traceably derived, in good part, from roots.
399. The means of derivation, through the whole history
of development, have been chiefly suffixes or derivational
endings — with some aid from prefixes.
a. The almost exclusive use of suffixes rather than prefixes,
as means both of inflection and of derivation, is a characteristic
feature of the family of languages to which the German (with
our own) belongs. The few prefixes employed have retained
much more distinctly the character of independent words, form-
ing proper compounds with those to which they are attached ;
that character has been lost only by the inseparable prefixes
(307) and one or two others (see below, 411.11). The negative
un is the only German prefix of really ancient character and
obscure derivation.
400. Besides this, there have come to be in German two
other specific auxiliary methods of internal change, affecting
the vowel of the root or primitive word. These are —
1. The modification of vowel (14), or change of o, o, u, an into
a, 0, ii, au, respectively: thus, 9Jlann, 9JJanner man, men; %n^,
Sii&e foot, feet; 9)^au§, Tlm)^ mouse, mice; alt, alter, dlteft old,
elder, eldest; ^orn, l^ornlein corn, kernel; {)anoe,l)dnQt I hang, he
hangs; floQ, ftoQe I flew, I might fly; xotl) [rot], rotften [roten] red,
redden. This modification is by the Germans called Umlaut
change of sound.
a. This is a euphonic change, coming from the assimilation of
a hard or guttural vowel to a soft or palatal one (e, i) closely
following it — although finally applied by analogy, in many single
cases, where no such cause had been present. It is of compar-
atively recent introduction, although, as the examples show,
shared in part by the English. It is quite unknown in one
branch of Germanic speech, the Moeso-Gothic ; and, on the
other hand, most highly developed in the Scandinavian tongues.
208 DEEIVATION. [400-
b. In the present condition of the language, the cause of the
modification is generally no longer to be seen, the assimilating
vowel having been lost.
c. Some derivative words having vowels which are really the
effect of modification are now, usually or always, written with
the simple vowels e (for d or o) or t (for u). Again, some words
show a modified vowel as the mere result of an irregular varia-
tion of utterance, without etymological reason.
2. The variation or gradation of radical vowel : as in fingen,
fang,gefungen sing, sang, sung; merbe, n)irb,tt)arb, n)urben,gett)orbett,
from merben become; Breeze, Bri(!)t, Brad), geBrod)en, 33rud), from
Bred^en break. This variation is by the Germans called Ablaut
divergence of sound.
a. This second mode of vowel change is also, like the other,
originally of euphonic character, one of the accidents attending
the phonetic development of language, under the combined in-
fluences of quantity, accent, combination, addition of suffixes,
and the like. But it is much more ancient, being one of the
characteristic peculiarities of all the Germanic languages ; and
its specific causes and mode of evolution are in part obscure.
b. The sphere of action of the gradation of radical vowel is in
the inflection of the older verbs of the language, and the forma-
tion of their earliest derivatives.
401. The modes of consonantal change which accompany
the processes of word-formation are too various and irregular
to be systematically set forth here. Some of them will be
noticed belowj in connection with the derivatives whose forma-
tion especially calls them out.
402. To carry back the historical analysis of German words
to the farthest point attained by the aid of the languages kin-
dred with the German, would take the pupil into regions where
he is a stranger, and would be unprofitable. Such study requires
a knowledge of the older dialects, and belongs to a higher stage
of progress. Only the processes of derivation whose results
are traceable in the existing language will be set forth ; and
those words will be treated as "primitive" which have no
German etymons, or more original words whence they are
derived, even though evidence from other languages may not
only show them to be derivatives, but also exhibit the earlier
forms from which they came.
404] DERIVATIVE VERBS. 209
DERIVATION OP VERBS.
403. Primitive Verbs. Verbs to be regarded as primitive
are—
1. The verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, nearly two
Aundred in number (264-7), which constitute the most important
body of primitive roots in the language.
a. Several verbs of this conjugation, however, are demon-
strably derivative : thus, {rf)reiben (111.2) write, from Latin scribo;
|)reifen (ni.2) praise, from ^rei§ value (which comes from Lat.
pretium), etc. Others are doubtless of the same character;
since, down to that period in the history of the language at
which the mode of inflection of the New conjugation was in-
troduced, all verbs, whether recent or older, were inflected ac-
cording to the Old conjugation.
2. Many verbs of the New or weak conjugation: as, "^aBctt
Jiave, fagen say, reben talk, Ueben love, leben live.
a. A number of the verbs of the New conjugation formerly
be?^nged to the Old, having changed their mode of inflection
under the influence of the tendency to extend a prevailing
analogy and reduce more irregular to more regular forms.
Others, if originally derivative, have lost the evidence of it. To
the root of some there is a corresponding noun, and it may ad-
mit of question which is the more original, verb or noun.
b. All verbs whose root, or conjugation-stem, is of nore than
one syllable are to be classed as derivative : even though, as in
the case of f^meic^eln flatter, flettern climb, the original from
which they come is no longer to be traced.
404. Verbs derived from Verbs.
I. By internal change of the root itself :
1. By change (generally, modification or Umlaut) of the root
vowel, a class of causative verbs are formed, taking as their
direct object what was the subject of the simple verb: thus,
^aUzn fall, YdUtn cause to fall, fell ; ixinUn drink, trdnfen cause to
drink, drench; fi^en sit, je^en set; Ueoen lie, legen lay; faugen suck,
jdugen suckle; faftren go, fii^ren lead.
a. As some of the examples show, this class of derivatives
has its representatives in English also, but they are much more
numerous in German.
210 BEBIVATION. [404-
5. By change of the final consonant, with or without accompa-
nying change of vowel, a few verbs are made, with various
modification of the meaning of the simple verb : thus, T^angcn
hang, "^enfen execute hy hanging; Biegen hend, biiden how; netgen
incline, nirfen nod; tt)a(^en wake, watch, metfen awaken, arouse;
efjen eat, d^en corrode, etch.
n. By additions to the root :
1. The suffix el forms a few diminutives, as Ia(^en laugh, Id(^eln
smile; lieben hve, Uebeln dally, flirt; franfen he sick, frdnfeln he
sickly or ailing.
a. But most of the diminutive verbs in eln are derived from
nouns and adjectives : see below, 405.11.1.
2. The suffix er forms a few iterative, desiderative, or caus-
ative verbs, as Happen flap, flappern rattle; lad^en lau^h, Idcfjern
make inclined to laugh; f olgen /oWoiw, folgern infer, conclude.
a. But most verbs in ern, as in eln, come from nouns and ad-
jectives ; and those which appear to come from verbs are rather
to be regarded as formed in imitation of such, or after their
analogy.
3. The addition of ^ gives in a few cases intensive force : as
in^bren hear, ]^or(^en hearken; fd^narren rattle, fc^nari^en snore,
snort.
4. 3r or ter. This is properly a French ending, representing
the er or ir of the infinitive of French verbs ; and it forms
German verbs from French or Latin roots : thus, ftubiren [flu=
bieren] study, max]^mn [marfd^ieren] march, fpagieren expatiate,
go abroad for pleasure or exercise, regteren rule.
a. But a few verbs in iren [ieren] are formed, in imitation of
these, from German nouns : as buc^ftabiren [bn(^ftaBteren] spell,
(from 33ud)ftaBe letter), fc^attiren [f(f)attteren] shade (from ©(flatten
shadow).
b. At a certain period, about the middle of the last century,
the German language was well-nigh swamped by the introduc-
tion of a multitude of such foreign verbs in iren. The greater
part of them have been cast out from dignified and literary use,
but they are still rife in low colloquial and humorous styles.
c. The syllable ir or ter of these verbs receives the accent ;
and they therefore admit no prefix ge in the participle: see
243.3a.
405] DERIVATIYE VEEBS. 211
in. By prefixes to the root :
1. By the inseparable prefixes Be, ent or em^, cr, QC, t)cr, and gcr.
For the derivative (or compound) verbs formed by means of
these prefixes, see above, 302 etc.
2. By separable prefixes.
Verbs formed by means of such prefixes have no real right
to be regarded as derivative : they are compounds, rather : see
296 etc.
Bemark. — Derivative verbs in German coming from other
verbs directly are quite rare ; and, of those usually regarded as
so derived, some admit of explanation as denominatives, or as
coming from nouns and adjectives.
405. Verbs derived from Nouns and Adjectives.
Verbs from nouns and adjectives are commonly called denam-
inatives. They constitute in German, as in the other related
languages, the great mass of derivative verbs. The relation of
the verbal idea to the meaning of the primitive word is of the
most varied character. Verbs from adjectives usually signify
either, as intransitives, to be in or to pass into the condition
denoted by the adjective, or else, as transitives, to reduce some-
thing to that condition. Verbs from nouns signify either to
supply with that which the noun denotes, or to deprive of it, or
to use or apply it, or to treat with it, or to be like it, and so on :
for examples, see below.
I. By the simple addition of the endings of conjugation :
1. From nouns, more usually without modification of the
vowel of the primitive word : as, fu^en set foot, Jliid footing (f^uB
foot); :^aufen Iwuse, dwell {^an^ house); graicn graze ((S5ra§ grass);
altern grow old, age (^^Uter age); buttern make or turn to butter
(53utter butter); prunfen make a show (^ruiif show); arbeiten work
(%xb^\t labor): sometimes with modification of the vowel: as,
p^ixQtn plough {''^^nc^ plough) ; bammern hammer {^ammtx hammer);
ftiirgen fall or hurl headlong ((^turg fall).
a. Karely, a verb is formed from a noun in the plural : as,
bldttern turn over the leaves of, etc. (53Idtter leaves, from 53Iatt).
b. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in the unaccented syllable
en reject the e of that syllable in the derivative verb : thus,
reanen rain (^legen rain), fiffncn open (offen open).
2. From adjectives, usually with modification of the vowel :
thus, rotten [roten] redden (rot§ [rotj red), [tdcfen strengthen
212 DERIVATION. [405-
(ftar! strong), tbbten [toten] Mil (tobt [tot] dead), Qeniiaen suffice
(Qcnug enough), cinbern alter (anber other), du^ern utter (au^er
out) ; rarely, without modification : as, na^en draw nigh (naft
nigf/i), alien grow old (alt oZ(Z).
a. A number of derivative verbs are formed from adjectives
in the comparative degree: thus, nd()ern conie nearer (ndl^er
nearer, from xiQi% mtnbern diminish (minber less).
n. By derivative endings, forming stems of conjugation :
1. The ending el forms from both nouns and adjectives (with
modification of their vowel) verbs whicli have a diminutive, dis-
paraging, or reproachful meaning: thus, fiinfteln treat in an
artificial or affected manner (^unft art); altertl^iimeln [altertiimeln]
he foolishly or affectedly fond of antiquity (^Itertl^um [^Itertum]
antiquity); fliigeln subtilize, he over-critical (flug knowing); from»
meln affect piety, cant (\xomm pious).
a. Compare derivatives formed from verbs by the same
ending, 404.II.1.
2. The endings jc^, g, and eng form a few verbs : f d) forms only
l^errfe^en rule (.£)err master) and f eilf d)en chaffer (fell cheap) ; g forms
bugen to thee and thou (bu thou), and one or two others ; eng forms
faulengen play the sluggard (f aul lazy), etc.
3. The ending ig is properly one forming adjectives (below,
415.9) ; but it is sometimes attached both to adjectives and to
nouns in order to the formation of a special theme of conjuga-
tion, by analogy with the numerous verbs derived from adjec-
tives ending in ig : thus, reinigen purify [xnn pure); enbigen end,
terminate (@nbe end).
4 The ending ir or ier forms a few verbs from German nouns :
see 404.II.4a.
m. By prefixes (either with or without derivative endings) :
1. The inseparable prefixes (except ge) form a very large
number of denominative verbs, generally without any ac-
companying derivative ending, but occasionally along with
such. In these denominatives, the prefixes have a force anal-
ogous to that which belongs to them in composition (see 307) :
thus —
a. 33e forms transitives, denoting especially a furnishing,
making, or treating: thus, befeelen endow with a soul ((geele
soul); begetftern inspirit (©eifter spirits, from ^eift)j befreien /ree.
406] DERIVATIVE VERBS. 213
liberate {]xd free); hm\6)ttn enrich {xd^tx richer, f rom reicE)) ; Be*
f d^onigen beautify (fd^on beautiful) ; Benac^ric^ttflen inform [ila^^
xi^t news).
b. @nt forms especially verbs signifying removal, deprivation,
and the like: thus, tni^txmn withdraw (fern far); entblo^en strip
(Uo^bare); zni1)anpkn behead {i0an)i)i head); entfrdften enervate
(^raft power); ent^^eUtgen desecrate fteiliQ holy); enttDaffnen dis-
arm (2Baffen weapon).
c. (^x forms transitives, intransitives, and reflexives, chiefly
from adjectives, and signifying a passing into, or a reduction
to, the state signified by the adjective : thus, er{)arten grow hard,
er!)drten make hard (^art hard); ermatten tire (matt weary); er=
gdn^en complete (ganj entire); erniebrigen humble (niebrtg low);
eriofen release (lo^ loose); ertoeitern extend (roeiter wider, from
iDeit); erfldren explain (flat clear); — but sometimes with more
irregular meaning, from adjectives or nouns : thus, eroBern
conquer (ober superior) ; erinnem remind (inner interior); erQrun=»
ben fathom, explore ((S^runb bottom).
d. 3Ser has nearly the same value and office as er, but is more
prevailingly transitive in effect: thus, t)erdnbern alter (anber
other); Dereiteln frustrate (eitcl vain); t)ergnuGen gratify (gcnug
enough); uxlamtxw lengthen (Idnger longer, from lang); t)erglafen
vitrify, glaze ((Sla§ glass); t)erfilbern plate with silver (©ilber
silver) ; tjeratten become antiquated (alt old).
e. 3er forms a very few derivatives: as, jerffeifd^en lacerate
(Sleif^ flesh) ; gergliebern dismember ((S^Iteber limbs, from ®Ueb).
2. A small number of denominatives are formed with the
separable prefixes : such are abbad^en unroof {^a^ roof); au§-
fernen remove the stone or kernel of (£ern kernel); ein!er!ern
imprison (,^erfer prison); umarmen embrace (%xm arm); an]-
muntern cheer up (munter cheerful); auSmeiten widen {mxtwide).
406. Verbs derived from Particles.
A few verbs are derived from other parts of speech by the
same means as from nouns and adjectives.
Such are emporen excite, arouse {tmpox ahft) ; begegnen meei
(gegen afifains^); ern)iebern an8ii;er (mkhn again) ; t)erntd)ten, jer-
nid)ten annihilate (nic^t not); t)erneinen deny (nein no); bejaften
affirm Qa yes); dd)sen groan (ad) ah!); jaiK^jen exult (Jud^, iud)T^c
hurrah!).
214 DERIVATION. [407-
DERIVATION OF NOUNS.
407. Primitive Nouns.
1. Primitive nouns are in part monosyllabic words which
contain no evident sign of their really derivative nature, and of
which the original roots are no longer traceable in German.
Such are gjJann man, ^au§ house, ^aum tree, ^inb child, 35ol!
people, ^vi!^foot.
2. In part they are words of more than one syllable, the
evident products of composition or derivation, containing
elements more or less closely analogous with those by which
other recognizable derivatives are formed, but coming from
roots of which they are the only remaining representatives.
Such are DfJame name, ^naBe hoy, ^lufle eye, ®rbe earth, SSater
father, ^oii^ter daughter, Staffer water, ^ogel bird, ^Jabel needle,
(Segel sail
a. Some of the words in both these classes are traceable by
comparison of the kindred languages to earlier roots from
which they are descended: thus, 5!J?ann is usually (though
doubtfully) referred to a root man think (the same with meinen
think, mean); ^inb comes from the root gan generate; gu^ is
identical with Latin pes, Greek pous, coming from pad walk;
5^ame goes back to gna Ajtiou? ; ^o(!)ter to duh draw the breast,
milk, and so on.
408. Nouns derived from Verbs.
I. By variation or gradation of vowel (^Blaut : see 400.2) alone,
without added ending.
Thus, 33anb volume, 33unb bond, from Binben bind; ©i^ seat,
©a^ sediment, @a^ settler, from fi^en sit; 3u(i draft, from jie'^en
draw; %x\ii step, from treten tread; ©|)rud} speech, from jprec^cn
speak; ©prung spring, from fpnnoen spring.
a. All these words originally had endings of derivation, which
have become lost by phonetic corruption. They are prevailingly
masculine.
b. In words thus derived appear sometimes irregular altera-
tions of the root, especially of its final consonant, as the
examples in part show.
c. The relation cf meaning of such derivatives to the idea of
action, state, or quality expressed by the verbal root is very
various ; but they signify in general either the act or quaUty
408] DERIVATIV.E NOUNS. 215
itself, or the result of the action, or the person or thing that
acts, or to which the state or quality belongs.
II. By brief and obscure endings, relics of earlier fuller forms,
and no longer producing distinct classes of derivatives with
definable modifications of the radical meaning. Such endings
are —
1. %t, be, t (ft, ft), b: thus, 35urbe burden, from Bciren hear;
8(^arte notch, from jc^cren shear; ^d^xt passage, from fal^ren go;
<Sd)rift document, from fd}reiben write; ^rac^t dress, from tragen
ivear; 33runft heat, from Brennen burn; ^unft art, from fennen
know; ^unft coming, from fommen come; 33ranb combustion, from
brennen burn.
2. ^, which forms a very large number of derivatives : thus,
^inbe tie, from binben bind; Sprac^e language, from f^re(i)en
speak; (SJabe gift, from geben give; gllefle^!/, from ftiegenj^i/.
a. The derivatives of this class also share in the gradation of
radical vowel, and the irregular alterations of the final con-
sonant of the root, which characterize the older words of the
language. They are of as various meaning as those of the
preceding class. Their gender is prevailingly feminine — ex-
ceptions being appellations of males (persons and animals), and
a few that are of anomalous character.
III. By endings of more distinct form, and more uniform and
definable meaning.
The most important of these we will take up in alphabetical
order, for the sake of more convenient reference.
1. (^i. This suffix is of foreign origin, being derived from the
Latin and French ia, ie. It was used originally only to form
derivatives from nouns (see below, 410.2), but has come also to
form from verbs ending in eln and em abstract nouns of action,
often with a disparaging or contemptuous implication: thus,
©c^meic^elei flattery, from fd)metc^eln flatter; 2:dnbelet trifling,
from tdnbeln trifle; ^lauberei chit-chat, from plantittnl chatter ;
3auberei witchcraft, from ^anbtxn practise magic.
a. Words formed with ei are feminine, and take the accent
vipon this syllable, as is required by the derivation of the suffix.
2. ©I. This suffix forms a considerable class of masculine
derivatives, denoting generally an instrument, quite rarely an
actor: thus, §ebel lever, from i)c1)tn raise ; '^tdd cover, from
beden cover; 8(^ldoel mallet, from f(f)Iagen beat; 6(^IiiffeI key,
from f(f)lte§en lock; gliigel wing, from ^mtnfly.''
216 DEEIVATION. [408-
a. But a great many nouns in the language ending in el are
from lost or unknown roots, and therefore have the value of
primitive words (407.2) ; some of these are feminine or neuter :
as are also some others, whose gender is determined by their
signification.
3. ®n. Besides forming the infinitives of all verbs (237.1a),
which, when used as ordinary nouns, are neuter (340), en is the
suffix of derivation of a considerable class of masculine nouns,
as 35iffen bit, from bei^en Ute; (^xdbm ditch, from Qxdbtn dig ; .
©d)aben harm, from f(!)aben injure.
a. Of the numerous words of obscure etymology in eti, a few
are neuter, but none are feminine.
4. ®r. This suffix forms numerous masculine nouns denoting
an actor; thus, Steiter ri^der, from reiten ride; Tlakx painter,
from malen paint; Xanjer dancer, from tanjen dance; 33d(!er
baker, from baden bake. With these are closely akin a few
names of instruments, as 33o^rer auger, from bol^ren bore; gel*
ger pointer, from geigen point.
a. Of the older words ending in er, and requiring to be
reckoned as primitives (407-2), many are feminine or neuter.
b. J®r also forms classes of derivative nouns from nouns :
see 410.3.
5. Sing forms from verbs chiefly masculine nouns denoting
the recipient of the verbal action : thus, i^mhlim^ foundling, from
^nhm find; 2t^xlinQ pupil, from Itl^xm teach ; (BmQiinQ suckling,
from f dug en suckle.
a. For the derivatives in ling from nouns and adjectives, see
409.II.4, 410.6.
6. 9^i§ [ni§]. This suffix is chiefly used in German to form
abstract nouns from verbs ; much less often, like the cor-
responding English ness, to produce similar derivatives from
adjectives (see 409.11.5). Such abstracts come especially from
derivative verbs and those compounded with inseparable
prefixes, as be, er, t)er ; sometimes seeming to be formed from
the participle rather than the simple verbal root. Like all
abstract nouns, they may admit of use also as concretes, or
pass wholly over into such. Examples are gcugni^ testimony,
from geugen testify; §inberni^ hindrance, from l^inbern hinder;
S3egrdbni| burial, frombegraben bury; @retgnt§ occurrence, from
ereignen occur; 33erl^dltni^ relation, from t)er6allen stand related;
408] DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 217
(^t^ianhm^ confession, from gefte^en (geftanben) confess; (SJefattQ*
ni6 prison, from gefangen imprisoned.
a. The greater number of nouns in nt^ [nt»] are neuter, but
a score or more of them are feminine, especially such as have
retained more fully their abstract meaning. A few, as @rf|)arni^,
(Jrfenntrti^, are feminine when used abstractly, but neuter as
concretes.
7. (Sal, fel. These are two different forms of the same
original sufBx, which at first and more properly formed nouns
from nouns, but whose existing derivatives are to be referred
almost exclusively to verbal roots, and are akin in meaning
with those in rii|. ©el is only used in concretes. Thus, (B^id-
fal fate, from f^ttfen send; ^xx']ai error, from trren wander;
Ueberbleibfel remnant, from iiBerbleiben remain over; iRcit^fel
[Sldtfel] riddle, from ratten [raten] guess.
a. Derivatives in |al and jel are neuter, excepting two or three
in fal (^rangfal, 9J^uI)fal, iriibfal), which may also be used as
feminine ; and bet ©topfel stopper.
8. Ung. This suffix is nearly equivalent in meaning and ap-
plication with our ing forming verbal nouns (infinitives in ing),
but is peculiar in that it is hardly used except with derivative
and transitive verbs. The nouns it forms admit an object (ob-
jective genitive : 216.27i) nearly as regularly as the verbs from
which they come. Many of the nouns in ung, hke other
abstracts, pass over into concrete use ; and such as come from
reflexive verbs have an intransitive force. Examples are giil^rung
leading, conduct, 33elel)rung instruction, (Srfinbung invention, 35er=
gebung forgiveness, 3Bcmer!ung remark, 33ebeutung meaning, ^e=
megung mx)tion, ^eigimg affection— from fii^ren lead, bele^ren
instruct, and so on.
a. The derivatives in ung are feminine without exception.
9. Besides the suffixes above detailed, there are a few of in-
frequent use : such are anb (properly the old participal ending),
in §eilanb Savior, from !)eilen heal; — id)t, in ^el)rtd}t sweepings,
from !e!)ren sweep, etc. ;— at^^ [at], in Sierat^ [3istat] ornament,
from gieren decorate; — enb, in ^ugenb virtue, from taugeu be of
value ; — and one or two others, of too little consequence to -be
worth noting, ©cftaft (410.7) and t{)um [turn] (410.8) also form
from verbal roots two or three derivatives, as 2Bauber](^aft,
25^adi3tl)um [2Ba^glum],
218 DERIVATION. [409-
409. Nouns derived from Adjectives.
1. 1. That the adjective, of either number and of any gender,
is' capable of use directly as a noun, still retaining its adjective
declension, was pointed out above (at 129), and needs no further
notice.
2. A few nouns are derived from adjectives without a suffix,
being identical with the adjective theme, but being declined as
independent (neuter) substantives: such are SfJotl) [3tDt] red,
©riin green, 9ie(i)t right, (S)ut property, goods,
n. Nouns derived by the aid of suffixes.
1. ^. The suffix e forms feminine abstracts (convertible into
concretes) from primitive adjectives, the vowel of which is
always modified if capable of it. Thus, ®ro§e greatness, ^iitc
goodness, Streue truth, ^ief e depth ; from gro^ great, etc.
2. §cit. This suffix is ^he same with our head and hood (in
Godhead, manhood, etc.), and forms feminine abstracts both
from nouns (see below, 410.5) and from adjectives. Thus, grei*
):\t[i freedom, ^Blinb'^eit blindness, ^ibtxntjdi stupidity ; from frei
free etc.
3. ^eit is originally the same suffix with l^eit, taking the place
of the latter after most primitive adjectives ending in el and er,
and after all those formed by the suffixes Imr, ig, 1x6) and jam.
Thus, (Jitelfcit vanity, 33itter!eit Utterness, ^an!6ar!eit gratitude,
^xUiqUM cheapness, §ofIi(i)!eit courtesy, ©^arfamfcit economy;
from eitcl vain, etc. To many adjectives, the additional ad-
jective suffix tg (415.9) is added, with fcit after it, instead of, or
along with, fcit alone: thus, from ficin small we have both
0einl^eit and ^leintgfett; from juJ3 sweet, ©ii^igfeit; from ftanb=
);)a\i steadfast, 6tanbl^afttgfeit; from ixt\x[Q^ faithless, 2:reuIo{ig!eit.
4. Sing forms a few masculine personal nouns from adjectives :
thus, grcmbling stranger, Siingling youth; from fremb strange,
iung young. For derivatives with ling from verbs and nouns,
see 408.111.5, 410.6.
5. 5^t^ [ni§] (see 408.III.6) forms only four nouns from ad-
jectives ; namely, ginfltintB darkness, (Bc^eintnijj secrecy, SBilb*
nt^ wilderness, (SleicC)nife likeness.
6. ©^aft is chiefly employed in forming nouns from noims
(see 410.7); only a few adjectives admit it, as ^emetnf(f)aft
community, (5Jcf angenjcf)af t imprisonment, ©igenfd^aft pecuKarif?/;
from gemetn common, etc. For the derivation etc, of fc^aft see
below, 410.7.
410] DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 219
7. %t[^ from %f)t\l [%t\X] part, forms fractional numerals from
ordinals ; see 207.2.
8. ^l^um [turn]., like fd)aft, is a suffix applied chiefly to nouns;
see below 410.8. A few adjectives take it, as 9teid)t'5um wealth,
(^XQtni^nm property ; from reic^ rich, eigen oivn.
9. Yet rarer suffixes are uncj (compare 408.III.8, 410.9) in
x^t\tnr\Q fortress, from feft strong; — ic^t, in ®idi(^t thicket, from
bid thick; — ut^ [ut] in ^(rmut^ poverty, from arm poor; — enb in
Sugetib youth, from jung young.
410. Nouns derived from Nouns.
1. (J^en, lein. These are equivalent suffixes, forming from
nouns (always with modification of the vowel of the latter, if it
be one admitting modification) neuter diminutives : thus, ^m§^
rfien little Iwuse, Wdnn^tn little man, mannikin, ^nciblein little hoy,
58u(^Iein little hook.
a. These suffixes correspond to the English diminutive end-
ings kin and ling (in gosling, duckling, etc.). (S^l)en belongs more
to the northern dialects of German, lein (often shortened in
popular use to el or le) to the southern ; but in the literary lang-
uage their respective use is mainly determined by considera-
tions of euphony, and many words admit the addition of either.
h. The words formed by these suffixes often add to their
meaning as diminutives, or substitute for it, an implication of
intimacy or tenderness. Some of them have a well-established
value as independent words : such are grdulein young lady, Miss,
Wdh^tn girl, Wdnn^tn and 2BeiB(^en 'male and female of an
animal species.
2. @t. The foreign origin of the suffix et was explained above
(408.III.1). As added to nouns, it indicates especially the state,
condition, or occupation of a person ; also sometimes the place
where an occupation is carried on : thus, 3dgerei sportsmanship,
from 3dger hunter; ^xndtxdprinting-estahUsliment, from Cruder
printer. In a few words it has a collective force : thus, 3leiterei
cavalry, from 9teiter rider.
a. As it is itself accented, this suffix was added most easily to
unaccented terminational syllables, as el and er ; and there are
but few words — as ^btet ahhacy, 35ocitei hailiwick — in which it is
appended to radical syllables. Being oftenest used after er, it
has come to assume er in many c'&s s as a prefix to itself, form-
ing a kind of compound suffix erci, which is freely used with
220 DERIVATION. [410-
words accented on the final: thus, ©fladerei slavery^ ^inberci
childishness, S^elmerei roguery; from ©flat) slave, etc.
6. Especially in its recent derivatives, ei is apt to convey a
disparaging impUcation : for example, 3urt[teret lawyer's doings,
as compared with 3uri§))rubeng jurisprudence.
3. @r. a. Besides the numerous derivatives which it forms
from verbs (408.111.4), cr makes many names of a personal
agent from nouns expressing the thing dealt with or acted upon :
as, (BariQn singer, from 6anQ song; ©deafer shepherd, from 6d)af
sheep ; Partner gardener, from ©arten garden.
h. It is also added to names of countries and towns, to indicate
a native or inhabitant of the same : thus, ©d^tDeijer Switzer,
33erUner inhabitant of Berlin, geipgiger man from Leipzig.
These nouns are then frequently employed as uninflected ad-
jectives: see 415.5.
c. For the same purpose, it is sometimes combined with Latin
endings, forming compound suffixes, as aner and enjer : thus,
^merifaner America?!, ^tl^enien}er Athenian.
d. After nouns, as after verbs, it is in a few cases irregularly
converted into net: thus, ©locEner hell-ringer, from ^lodfe hell;
^arfner harper, from §arfe harp.
e. It forms a small number of mascuhnes answering to fem-
inmes in e : thus, 2Bitttt)er [2Bittt)er] widower, from SBittlDe [SGSittDe]
widow; dauber cock-pigeon, from Xaxxhz dove.
4. 3n (sometimes spelt inn). This sufiBx forms feminine from
masculine appellations: thus, ^irtin shepherdess, from §irt
shepherd; ^ijniflin queen, from ^onifi king; greunbin fcTiiale
friend, ^bc^in female cook, fiotDin lioness, grangbfin French
woman, 33erlinertn woman of Berlin. It is also added to titles
to signify the wife of the person to whom the title belongs : as,
$f arrerin pastor's wife, ^rofeff orin Mrs. Professor.
3n usually requires modification of the radical vowel, but
there are (as the examples show) numerous exceptions.
5. §cit, like our head and hood, forms abstracts, and a few
collectives, from nouns as well as from adjectives (409.11.2):
thus, (Siott^eit Godhead, ^mhtitxt childhood, %))ox1cint folly, 9)^enfd^=
l^eit humanity, @etftli^!eit clergy.
6. StnQ forms a few masculine personal names from nouns, as
from verbs (408.III.5) and adjectives (409.11.4) : such are ^dl^r*
ling yearling, giiid^tling fugitive, ©unftUng favorite.
411] DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 221
7. a. ^^aft is the same with our ship (in lordship, worship,
etc.), and is derived from ]^a^tr\ shape, create; it signifies pri-
marily the shape or make of anything, then its character, office,
rank, and the like: thus, ^xtnnh\d)a^i friendship, ^efanntfc^aft
acquaintance, 55ormimbf(^aft guardianship. All its derivatives
are of the feminine gender.
b. It forms also a number of collectives: as, ^riefterj(^aft
priesthood, ®tenerf(^aft body of servants, (SJefeII](i)aft company,
Sanbf(^aft landscape.
8. ^!^um [turn], our dom (in kingdom, wisdom, etc), is also a
noun, of obscure derivation, but of meaning and application as
a suffix nearly akin with those of fc^aft (above, 7). Its deriv-
atives are neuter, with only two or three exceptions (namely
3rrtl)um, 9letc[)t^um, and, according to the usage of some, 33e*
tDet§tl)um and 2[Bad)§t^um), which are masculine. It forms nouns
signifying character, rank, or authority, which then, in a few
cases, come to mean that over which authority is exerted : thus,
3f?tttertftum chivalry, ^apftt^^um papacy, g^rtflentftum Christendom,
^oniotl^um kingdom, giirftent^um principality.
9. Suffixes forming a few isolated words are x\^ in ®dnf erid^
gander, from ^an§ goose; ga^nrid) ensign, from gal^ne banner,
etc. ; UHQ in one or two collective words like SBalbuttQ woodland,
from 2SaIb forest; atft [at] in §eimat^ Iwme, from ^eim home.
5^tB [ni§] (408.III.6) appears to form a derivative or two from
nouns, as in 33unbnt& covenant, from 33unb tie; also jal (408.111.7),
as in 9Jlu^fal distress, from 5Jlii^e toil.
411. Nouns formed by means of prefixes.
I. A very large number of nouns contain as their initial
elements the verbal prefixes, both separable and inseparable
(297). For the most part, however, they are not formed as
nouns by means of those prefixes, but are derivatives, accord-
ing to the methods explained above (408), from verbs com-
pounded separably or inseparably. The only exceptions are, a
considerable class formed by Qt (below, II.l), and an occasional
anomalous case like ^Inp'^e rising ground, from ^b1)t height.
n. The proper prefixes forming noims are very few in
number, namely as follows :
1. ®e. T^is common prefix forms a large number of deriv-
ative nouns, both from nouns and from verbs, having in general
a collective or frequentative character. Thus —
222 DERIVATION. [411-
a. Collectives from nouns, generally with modification of
vowel, sometimes with other more irregular vowel changes :
such are ^eftrau(?^ shrubbery, from ©traud) shrub ; ®etr)ol! cloud-
mass, from 2BoIfe cloud; (^ebtrg or ®ebir(^e mountain-range, from
SBerg mountain; (^z^zhn plumage, from ^ttm feather.
b. A few collective or associative personal appellatives, from
nouns or verbs, in which (je has nearly its original meaning
(307-5) of with; thus, ^efpiele playfellow, from ipielen play ;
^efd^rte companion, from \d\)xtn go; ©eliatter godfather, from
SSater father; (Sef(f)n)i[ter brothers and sisters, from (5(f)tt)efter
sister.
c. From verbs, nouns signifying either the means or the effect
of the verbal action : thus, (S^e^or sense of hearing, from l^oren
hear; (^txot1:\t weapon, from tt)el)rcn defend; ^ebet prayer, from
bitten ^fc; ^zmalht painting, from ma\zu paint.
d. From verbs, frequentative or intensive abstracts, or nouns
significant of the verbal action : thus, (^ejprdd^ conversation,
from fprec^^en speak; ©efpott mockery, from fpotten mock; (^e=
iprdnge pageantry, from prangen make a show; (SJetofe din, from
tofen roar.
Eemarks. e. These are the leading uses of the prefix ge ; but
in not a few of the derivatives it forms, its effect is too indistinct
or various to be brought under any classification.
f. As the examples show, the words formed with ge exhibit
the gradation as well as the modification of vowel, and are
either without suffix, or take one of the simpler suffixes (408.11.),
especially e. In many words, this e may be either added or
omitted.
g. Excepting the class under b, above, which are masculine,
the nouns formed with ge are nearly all neuter. Masculine are
only about a dozen (©ebrauc^, ^ebanfe, ©efafleti, ©e'^alt, (^enit^,
®eru(^, (^efang, ©efc^marf, ^eftan!, ©etrinn, ^eminnft [@ett)inft]);
feminine, the same number ((SJeberbe, ^ebiibr, ^eburt, (^ebulb,
(i^efaftr, ^emetnbe, ^eniige, ^ej(f)t(^te, CS5ef(^tt)ul]t, (S5eftalt, ©emalt,
^etDdbr).
7i. Afew nouns, as ^IM luck, happiness, ^laube belief, contain
the prefix ge abbreviated to a simple g.
2. Wi^. This prefix is the same with the English mis, and
has a similar office. Its value is rather that of a compounded
element than of a prefix. It takes always the principal accent,
and does not affect the gender of the nouns to which it is
414] DEEIVATIYE NOUNS. 223
prefixed. Thus, ^Jli^Qriff mistake, 5)Ziffetl^at mwdeed, ^Jli^Qunft
disfavor, ^J^tpeT^agen discomfort.
3. Un is, as iu English, the negative prefix. It is used with
nouns more often than in our language, always taking the ac-
cent, without affecting the gender ; it either signifies actual
negation, or impUes something unnatural, repugnant, or inju-
rious. Thus, Unre(^t wrong, Unbanf ingratititde, Ungliid mis-
fortune, Unfutn nonsense; Unmenfc^ unnatural monster, Ungeftalt
misshapen form, Unt^at misdeed.
4. Ur. This is, as has been already pointed out (307.4:), the
same word originally with the inseparable prefix er, and ulti-
mately identical with au§ out. In a few words it still has a mean-
ing akin with that of er : thus, Urtfteil [Urteil] judgment (ert^eilen
[erteilen] assign), Urlaub leave (txiavihiw permit), Urfunbe document,
Urfprung origin, and so on. But in most of the derivatives which
it forms it has an intensive force, with the distinct implication
of originality or primitiveness : thus, Urfa(f)e cause (original or
fundamental thing), UriDelt primitive world, UrBilb archetype,
Hrflrojiuater greatgrandfather.
a. Ur always takes the accent, and it leaves unchanged the
gender of the word to which it is prefixed.
5. ^rg is identical in derivation and meaning with our prefix
arch, and denotes what is eminent or superior in its kind. In
respect to accent and gender, it is like the three prefixes last
treated of. Thus, ©raenQcl arc/t angel, ©rgl^ersoG arch duke, ^rgbieb
arch-thief.
6. %\\\, originally the same with the inseparable prefix ent
(307.3), appears in the present language only in 5lnttD0rt answer
(from SSort word) and ^ntli^ countenance.
412. From other parts of speech than those treated above,
nouns are only with the greatest rarity formed directly, or
otherwise than through the medium of derivative adjectives or
verbs. Such words as D^iebenmfl lowland, from nieber (adverb)
down, and ^nnung guild, from in in, are anomalies in the
German system of word-derivation.
DEEIVATION OF ADJECTIVES.
413. Primitive Adjectives.
Primitive adjectives, Uke primitive nouns (407), may be
divided into two classes :
224 DEKIVATION. [414-
1. Simple monosyllabic adjectives, the evidences of whose
originally derivative character are effaced : thus, gut goodf lang
hng, arm poor, l^art hard, Qxm green.
2. Adjectives containing an evident element of derivation, and
analogous with those derived from known primitives, but com-
ing from roots which are now lost : thus, Irage lazy, tjdkx cheer-
ful, eben even, bunfel dark.
a. Some of these, as of the "primitive" nouns (407.2a), admit
of being traced to more primitive roots by the researches of
comparative philology.
414. Adjectives derived without Suffix or Prefix.
Adjectives coming from verbal roots by simple gradation of
the radical vowel (Ablaut), without a suffix (hke nouns : see
408.1.)> ^^^ very few in German : examples are brac^ fallow, from
Bred^en breakup; glatt smooth, from Qkiknslip; hid thick, from
the root of gebeil^eti thrive; ^M fledged, from fliegcn fly.
415. Adjectives derived by Sivffix.
As the various endings forming adjectives are, almost without
exception, used in derivation from different parts of speech, it
will be more convenient to treat all the uses of each one to-
gether, taking the suffixes up in their alphabetical order.
1. 33ar. This suffix is regarded as a derivative from the verb
bdren bear, carry. It was of infrequent use in ancient German,
and only as attached to nouns.
a. Examples of its use with nouns are btenftbar serviceable
(servwe-bringing), \x\x^ihax fruitful (fruit-bearir\^), \\xx^i^ax ter-
rible, Qangbar current, fid^tbar visible.
b. In modern usage, it forms a large class of derivatives from
verbs (almost always transitive), having the meaning of our ad-
jectives in able, or indi?ating capability to endure the action of
the verb : thus, e^ar eatable, gente^bar enjoyable, f^eilbar [tetlbarj
divisible, unbett)o^)nbar uninhabitable, unfe^lbar incapable of
failing.
c. Very rarely, it is added to an adjective: thus, offcnBar
evident, from offen open.
2. @n, ern. The suffix en forms (from nouns) adjectives de-
noting material or kind: thus, golben golden, tooUtn woolen, trben
earthen, eid|en oaken. To words ending in er, only n is added :
thus, fupfern of copper, filbern of silver, lebern leathern. Out of
415] DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 225
the frequency of this combination has grown in recent use the
form erit, which was perhaps at first applied only to nouns form-
ing a plural in er: thus, plgern wooden, from ,§ol3 (pi. ©biger)
wood — but is now used indiscriminately, requiring modification
of the vowel of its primitive : thus, Bleiern leaden, tpnern of clay
CXfjon), ftd!)Iern of steel (©tat)!).
3. @n, enb. These endings, forming respectively the past
participle of verbs of the Old conjugation, and the present par-
ticiple of all verbs, are proper adjective sufiixes, but need only
be mentioned here, as their uses form a part of the subject of
verbal conjugation, and have been already explained (see 349
etc.).
4. %t, eft. These are the endings by which are formed, from
simple adjectives, adjective themes of the comparative and
superlative degree (see 133 etc.) : also, ft forms ordinal numerals
from cardinals (see 203).
5. (Jr. The patronymic nouns formed by the suffix er from
names of countries or towns (410.36) are very commonly used
also with the value of adjectives. When so used, they are not
subject to declension, but are treated as if they were com-
pounded with the noun which they qualify. Thus, 33erliner 33Iau
Berlin blue, \iCi^ ©tra^burfier ^Jliinfter tlie Strasburg catJiedral, ber
Seipstger 3}leffe of the Leipsiofair.
6. (5t forms the past participle of verbs of the New or weak
conjugation : see 246, 349 etc.
7. §aft. This suffix is regarded as derived from ^aben have,
or ^aften cling, indicating primarily the possession or adhesion
of the quality designated by the words to which it is attached.
a. It forms derivative adjectives especially from nouns sig-
nifying quality: thus,tugenbl)att virtuous, funbl)aft sinful, (c^rerfl^aft
frightful, ftanbl)aft steadfast; but also, not infrequently, from
names of persons and things : thus, mannl^aft manful, meifterl^af t
masterly, letb^aft bodily.
b. It is added to only a few verbal roots : as in tt)of)nl^aft
resident, fc^ma^ftaft loquacious.
c. Only three adjectives admit it: namely, bo^l^aft malicious,
franfftaft six^khj, n)at)rf)aft true.
d. To '^aft is sometimes added the further ending tg, as in
Ietb!)aftig, tt)af)rt)aftiG ; and this addition is always made before
the suffix !eit, forming abstract nouns (409.11.3) : thus, ^ugenb*
"^aftlgtext virtuovsness.
226 DERIVATION. [415-
8. 3^t forms adjectives only from concrete nouns, especially
such as denote material: thus, fteintcf)t stony, bornitf)t thorny^
f aljid^t salty. Its office is hardly distinguishable from that of i(|
(below, 9) ; and, in present use, its derivatives are almost super-
seded by those in ig, and are but seldom met with. Only t^ort(^t
foolish is in familiar use, and is also peculiar in exhibiting the
modification of vowel, and in being formed from a personal ap-
pellation (%):}0x fool).
9. 39- This suffix is the same with our y (in stony, holy, easy,
etc.), and forms, from every part of speech, a very large number
of German adjectives, which are constantly increasing by new
derivatives. Thus —
a. From nouns, of every class : thus, md(i)tio mighty, giinftig
favorable, fc^ulbtfl guilty, burftig thirsty, blutig bloody, mdfferig
watery, hxdtbpfiQ thickheaded, langarmig longarmed.
h. From verbs : thus, fdumig dilatory, nac^giebig yielding, ge=
fallig obliging.
c. From adjectives, in a few cases only: thus, giitig kind, Doflig
complete; and from the possessive and other pronominal ad-
jectives, as meirtig mine, etc. (159.5), jelbig self-same (169.3), jenig
yon (168), einig only, some (189).
d. From indeclinable words, namely prepositions, adverbs,
and adverbial conjunctions of various kinds : thus, uorig former,
from t)or before; iibrig remaining, from iiber over; jefeig present,
from \t^t now; :^eutig of to-day, from ^eute to-day; bortig of that
place, from bort there; abermalig repeated, from abermal^ again;
be^faHftg relating to the case in hand, from be^faES in that case.
e. The addition of tg to other adjective endings before the
suffix fett has been noticed above (409.II.3) ; also to f)aft in form-
ing adjectives (above, Id) ; to adjectives and nouns in forming
derivative verbs (405.11. 3) ; and to certain nouns in forming
derivative adjectives (below, 15e,/).
/. 3g added to the suffix jal of certain nouns (408.III.7), along
with modification of the vowel (written e instead of d), forms a
combination having the aspect of a separate suffix, felig ; thus,
tniiftjeUg painful, from ^Jlii^fal distress ; triibf dig afflictive, from
Sriibfal affliction. And the combination is in fact treated as an
independent suffix, by being added to words which do not form
derivatives in ] al : thus, gliitff dig blissful, from ^liicf happiness ;
feinbfdtg inimical, from feinb hostile; rebfdig talkative, from reben
talk.
415] DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 22?
g. A number of adjectives in ig are from lost roots, and so
have in the present language the value of primitive words:
thus, jelig happy, u|)))ig luxuriant.
10. 3jrf). This is the same with our English suffix ishi and is
used in much the same way.
a. It forms adjectives from noims of different classes : thus,
especially from proper names of persons, places, and peoples :
as, lutftertfc^ Lutheran, preu^ifd^ Primsian, baierijd) Bavari^an,
jpanijc^ Spanish;— ivom appellations of places, persons, and
animals : as, :^immli]c^ heavenly, \iah\\\6) townish, finbif c^ childish,
biebij^ thievish, bicl)teri)(^ poetical, l^ixnhx]^) doggish;— and from a
few abstracts or verbal nouns: as, aBergldubijcf) superstitious,
argtDO^nifd) suspicious, neibijc^ envious.
b. It often takes, in adjectives derived from the classical
languages, the place of our endings ic, ical, al, ian, etc. : as,
ftiftorifd) historic or historical, !ritif(^ critical, logifi^ logical, inbiji^
Indian.
c. In a few words, ijd) has a somewhat disparaging sense as
compared with Wd), much as in the corresponding Eniilish ad-
jectives: thus, finbifd) childish and ttnblid) childlike, tDcibijc^
womanish and tt)eibUd) feminine.
d. The use of ifc^ with proper names of places and with
foreign words is attended with some irregularities of detail, in
respect to the form of the theme to which the suffix is appended :
these cannot be dwelt upon here.
11. 2ei forms indeclinable adjectives from numerals and
words related with numerals, which, before it, take the ending
er: thus, einerlei of one sort, mam^txkx of many sorts, aflerlei ofaU
sorts.
The lei is by origin the genitive of a feminine noun, meaning
sort, and the preceding er is the proper ending of the adjective
qualifying it: hence the treatment of its derivatives as in-
declinable words.
12. Sid). This suffix corresponds with our like, ly (in godlike,
godly, etc.), and, like these, forms a very large number of
deriv itives. It is historically the same word with the adjective
like (German gleid)) : compare 363.3a.
Sic^tis also added to adjectives, perhaps as a mere variation
of lilf).
a. It is added to nouns of various classes (usually with mod-
ification of their vowel) : thus, mannlid) manly, Ddterlic^ fatherly.
228 BEEIVATION. [415^
fiinftli^ artful, ^tx^M) hearty, qIMIx^ happy, id^rlid) yearly, qeift.-
U(^ spiritual.
h. It forms from other adjectives (always with modified
vowel) adjectives that have in general a diminutive meaning :
thus, rotftlic^ [xbiM}] reddish, jduerlii^ somewhat sour, Idnglid;
longish. But some of its derivatives are free from the diminutive
implication ; and a considerable number (363.3a) are used only
in an adverbial sense, the ending having the same value as the
English ly in similar derivatives from adjectives.
In a few words— as fold), tueld), our such, which— it is greatly
corrupted.
c. It is appended to many verbal roots ; and either in an
active sense (especially with intransitive verbs) — thus, fc^dblirf)
harmful, hztiaxxlid) persistent, fterblic^ mortal, erfreuUci^ agreeable
— or, yet more often, in a passive sense: as QlaubUd^ to be
believed, credible, t)erdc^tlt(f) contemptible, begreifli(| comprehen-
sible, unfdglid) unspeakable. Of this class of passive derivatives,
many are in use only with the prefix un : e. g. there is no f dglic^
speakable. 2\d}, as thus used, is closely equivalent with bar
(above, lb), and it is in part a matter of arbitrary custom, or
determined only by euphony, which suffix shall be employed ;
in other cases, derivatives are formed with both, with a more or
less distinct difference of meaning.
13. ©am is our some (in wholesome, noisome, etc.), and is sup-
posed to be ultimately the adjective same (now lost in German).
It forms derivatives —
a. From nouns, mostly of an abstract character : thus, furd)t=
\am fearful, gemaltfam violent, miiftfam laborious.
b. From verbal roots : thus, aufmerffam attentive, folfifam
docile, lenffam manageable.
c. From a few adjectives ; thus, einfatn lonely, Qemeinfam com-
mon, langfam slow.
14 %, besides one or two isolated adjectives, like bid)t thick,
close, from the root of Qebeil)en thrive, forms the class of ordinal
adjectives from numerals below twenty (203).
15. There are certain words forming classes of derivative
adjectives which have not yet (like Bar, ltd), jam, above) lost
their independence of form and meaning sufficiently to be
reckoned as adjective-suffixes, although approaching very near
in value to such. The most noticeable of them are —
416] DEEIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 229
a. 2d§ loose, our less, forming numerous adjectives of depriva-
tion : thus, enblog endless, "^erslo^ heartless, treuIo§ faithless.
These adjectives, like those ending in l^aft, always add ig
before feit: thus, %x^nio\\Q,hii faithlessness.
b. 35oII fidl, our ful, in thankful, fearful, etc. : examples are
Ietbt)oII sorrowful, gebanfentioE thoughtful.
c. 9teid) rich: examples are Uebretd) gracious {2khthve), Qt\\U
rei(i) witty, full of esprit.
d. %a^ compartment, division, forms multiplicatives with
numeral words, cardinal or indefinite (204) : examples are ge^n-
fad) tenfold, Dielfac^ manifold.
e. gait fold is used in the same manner with fac^. But
multiplicatives with fait simply are antiquated and unusual;
they now regularly take the additional adjective ending ig
(above, 9), before which the vowel of fait (except in two or three
words, as mannlfifalttj) is modified : thus, geI)nfaItiQ ten-fold, t)iel-
fdltig manifold.
f. ^rtig is, like fdlticj, an extension of a noun, %xim,anner, kind,
by the adjective suffix ig, and forms a considerable class of
derivatives denoting sort or manner : thus, nebelartig cloudlike,
frembartig of strange fashion. Other similar formations are
f ormig, from the foreign noun gorm form (Lat. forma) : thus,
infelformig island-shaped; — miitftig [miitig] from g}^ut^ [9Jlut]
mood, disposition : as, fnebmutl)ig [friebmiitig] disposed to peace ;
—md^ig, from ^a^ measure: as, rec^^tmd^ig lawful; etc.
416. Adjectives derived by Prefix.
The prefixes forming adjectives are, in general, the same with
those forming nouns (411), namely ge, mife, un, ur, erg, together
with Be.
1. 35e forms a very few adjectives, as Berett ready, Bequem
convenient.
2. a. (S5e aids to form past participles (243.3) ; and sometimes
from nouns which do not furnish any other of the parts of a
derivative verb: thus, geftiefelt booted (provided with boots),
geljfirnt horned, gefittet mannered, geftirnt starred.
b. It also forms, either without suffix or with ig, a class of
adjectives from verbs: thus, gene'^m acceptable (nel)men take),
geml^ certain (roiffen know), geldufig current (laufen run), ^etpdrtig
expectant (tpavten wait).
230 DERIVATION. [416-
c. (S)c is prefixed to a few simple adjectives without note-
worthy change of their meaning : thus, f|ere(^t righteous, (^etreu
faithful, geflretiQ severe. ®Ieid) like contains the same prefix ab-
breviated.
The other prefixes have the same value in adjectives as in
nouns: thus —
3. Wx^ forms such adjectives as mt^Qiinftig grudging, m\^=
trautjd) distrustful.
4. Un forms negative adjectives, as un!lar unclear, ungliicfUd^
unhappy,
a. That some of the adjectives formed with un have no cor-
responding positives has been noticed above (415.12c).
h. According to some authorities, the words formed with un
always have the principal accent on that prefix : others except
compounds of participles, as unbeloftnt unrewarded, and of
verbal derivatives with the suffixes bar, Ii(^, fam, as unbenf'bar
inconceivable, unenblid) unending, unbulb'fam intolerant.
5. Ur forms directly only a very small number of adjectives,
from other adjectives, adding to the latter an intensive mean-
ing, or an implication of primitiveness : thus, urplo^licf) very
sudden, uralt of primitive antiquity.
6. ^rj is prefixed, in a half -humorous way, to a few adjectives,
with intensive force: thus, ergbumm excessively stupid, ergfaul
very lazy.
Derivation of the other Parts of Speech.
417. Of the remaining parts of speech, the adverbs are the
only ones which are to any extent formed in classes, by means
analogous with those above explained ; and they have been al-
ready sufficiently treated (363 etc.) under Adverbs.
The derivation of the rest, so far as it is capable of being
shown, is a matter for the lexicon to deal with, under each
separate word.
WORD-COMBINATION, COMPOSITION.
418. A compound word is one that is made up ot two
(or more) independent words, each of which maintains
in tlie composition its separate form and meaning. It
is ijaade one word hj constanej^ of combination in prac-
419] COMPOUND WOEDS. 231
tical use, by the absence of inflection except in the last
member, and by being placed under the dominion of a
single principal accent.
a. Thus, SuttQfrau is distinguished from junge grau young
woman by the adjective j;ung being made indeclinable and
receiving a marked accent. By this means a unity of form is
given to the word, to which a unity of idea is then further added
by attribution of the meaning virgin, which naturally grows out
of the other, but yet is not the same with it.
b. As will appear hereafter (422.26 etc.), other members of a
compound than the final one sometimes take an ending of de-
clension, but irregularly and superfluously, and without liability
to further variation in the inflection of the compound. There
are also a few words which are arbitrarily written together as
if compounds, while both their parts are declined in full, and
they are not in fact of a different character from many colloca-
tions of words which the language writes separately : such are
berfelBe and berienige (168, 169), ^ol^erpriefter high-priest, etc.
(422.1a).
c. All derivation and inflection begin with composition. The com-
pound becomes in practical use an integral representative of the idea
signified by it, its origin is more and more lost sight of, and it becomes
liable to such alterations of form as more or less disguise its derivation :
thus, 3ungfrau has been in popular use abbreviated to 3ungfer; and
3ungl)err (iunger ^err young sir), in like manner, to 3uufer. And if the
final member of the compound happens to be one that in practice is ad-
ded to a large number of words, forming a considerable class of com-
posite words, it may be turned into an ending, of derivation or inflection.
Thus, britter jl^eit [Xdi] became the compound 2)vittt^ett [2)rittei(]
third part, and this was contracted into S)ritte( ; and, the same being
done with the other ordinal numerals, tel became a "suffix," forming
fractionals from ordinals (207.2). The conjugational ending ten, in
iDir l^otten we had, represents in like manner an originally independent
conjugational form, taiumis (yet older dadamasi) we did, which has gone
through a like process of abbreviation. Composition therefore forms,
in the grammatical treatment of a language, an appropriate transitional
subject between inflection and derivation on the one side, and colloca-
tion or arrangement on the other.
419. Compounds are very much more numerous in German
than in English, and the liberty of forming new ones, after the
model of those already in use, is much more freely conceded
than with us. In making practical acquaintance with the Ian-
232 COMPOSITION. [419-
guage, therefore, we are constantly meeting with them, of every
class — from those in which the final member has almost ac-
quired the value of a suffix (see above, 415.15), or in which the
fact of composition is otherwise disguised (as in ^utigfer and
3un!er ; or in f olci) and m\^, see above, 415.12), to the chance
combinations which each speaker or writer forms as occasion
arises, and which are not to be found explained in any dic-
tionary, however complete.
a. Compounds are often also formed in German of a length
and complexity unknown in English : thus, 5euert)erji(i)erunQ§=
fief ellfc^ aft fire insurance company, 5^Drbfeef(^ifffa^rt North Sea
navigation, Suftrbftrenfd}tt)inbfu(^t bronchial consumption, 9{eid)§=
Dberpoftamt^geitunfigf d)reiber editor of the imperial general postoffice
journal. Such, however, are for the most part met with only
in technical and official language.
6. The parts of a compound — especially if it be a long and
cumbrous one, or Uable to an incorrect division — are sometimes
separated by hyphens: thus, Seuert)erft(^erunfi§=gefeflf(f)aft, or
8euer=t)erfi(^erimQ§=9efeIIf(^aft. No rules are to be definitely laid
down respecting this division, it being mainly left to the taste
and choice of individual writers. Usage is also much at variance
as regards the employment of capital letters for the separated
parts of a compound noun — some writing, for example, geuer*
58erft(^erung§=®efeUf(f)aft. The preferable method is to avoid as
much as possible the multiplication of capitals.
c. Where two or more compound words having the same
final member would follow one another, it is the usage in
German often to omit that member except in the last word,
noting the omission in the other cases by a hyphen appended
to the former member : thus, alle ©Dnn= unb Sefttage eine§ Sciftre^
on all the Sundays and holidays of a year, in biefer baum= imb
queHenleeren @inobe in this treeless and waterless desert, t)on ber
fonn= unb fefttagiflen ©pagierfafirt of the promenade usual on Sun-
days and holidays. A similar liberty is even taken with words
of foreign origin : thus, al§ Df= unb ^efenfit)tt)affe as offensive
and defensive weapon ; but it is not to be approved or imitated.
Composition of Verbs.
420. The importance of compound verbs in the general
grammatical system of German has rendered necessary their
treatment under the head of verbal conjugation (296-313).
421] COMPOUND NOUNS. 233
Only a brief recapitulation of the different classes, therefore, is
called for here.
1. Verbs are compounded with the inseparable
prefixes be, ent or emp, er, (;e, \)cv, ^er ; being conjugated,
in general, in the same manner as when simple, but
losing the prefix ge of the past participle; retaining,
also, their proper accent. See 302-7.
2. Verbs are compounded with a considerable number
of separable prefixes, simple and compound — which
prefixes, however, stand before the verbal form, and
are written with it as one word, only in the infinitive
and participles : or in the personal forms of the verb
also, when the sentence has the transposed arrangement.
The prefix always has the principal accent. See
298-301.
a. A few of the separable prefixes, however — namely, burc^,
l^inter, iiBer, urn, unter, and miber or mieber— form with some verbs
inseparable compounds. See 308-11.
3. Verbs are compounded with nouns, adjectives, and
adverbs ; either closely, forming compound stems which
are conjugated like simple roots, or loosely, forming
stems which are conjugated after the manner of verbs
with separable prefixes. See 312-313.
a. There is no fixed line separating compounds of the latter
character from verbal phrases, and some combinations are
treated indifferently as the one or the other : thus, ^an! fagen
or banffaQen express gratitude, ©talt finben or ftattfinben take
place.
Composition of Nouns.
421. With few exceptions (422.6& etc.), compound
nouns are made up of a noun with a preceding limiting
word. The final noun determines the gender and mode
of declension of the compound ; the preceding member
of the compound has the accent.
234 COMPOSITION. [421-
1. Exceptions as regards gender are —
a. Names of towns, which are neuter (61.2c), even when they
are compounds whose final member is masculine or feminine :
thus, ba§ SSittenberg (ber ^Berg), ba§ aJlagbeBurG (bte 33urg).
h. Many compounds of ber 9Jlutl^ ^wi] mood, spirit, which
are feminine : for example, bic ^nmutft [^^iimutl grace, bte ^e=
muti) [^ernut] humility, bie SSe^mul!^ [SSeftmut] sadness.
These are, by origin, feminine abstracts from compound ad-
jectives, which have lost their suffix of derivation.
c. A few special words : thus, bic ^nttDort aiiswer (ba§ SBort
word), ber ^itttt)Ocf) Wednesday (literally mid-week, from bie
2Bo(i)e week), which has taken the gender of the other names of
week-days (61.2a) ; bie D^eunauge lamper-eel (Uterally nine-eyes,
from ba§ ^uge eye) ; and ^bfc^eu horror is masculine, and ®egen=
tf)eil [(^egenteil] opposite is neuter, while 6d)eu fear and 2:l)eil
[^eil] part are now respectively used in general as feminine and
masculine.
422. The varieties of compoimd nouns are —
1. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding qualifying ad-
jective: thus, S3ot(monb /u?Z moon, ^\iz\\km precious stone, ^od)-
gett wedding (lit. high time), ^urgtDeiie pastime (Ut. short while).
a. A very few nouns are written as compounds of this class,
although the adjective is declined as an independent word:
thus, .^ol)erprtefter high-priest, gangetoeile tedium, ©el^eimerratft
[(^i1:itmzxxai]privy -counsellor (alBo :^aiigtDetle,(S5e^etmrat]^ [©e^eim*
rat], as proper compounds).
2. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding limiting noun :
thus, 53u(!)brurfer bookprinter, @e((i)td^tf(^rei6er historian (ht.
history -writer), ©c^ufle'^rer school-teacher, ^onbfc^uJ) glove (lit.
hand-shoe), 2BetngIa§ wine-glass, 33aumtt)Dne cotton (lit. tree-wool),
Sagbleben life by hunting, (Jic^Baum oak-tree.
a. The relation of the first noun to the second is oftenest that
of a genitive dependent on it ; but it may stand in various other
relations, often such as could not be expressed by any simple
case, without the use of words of relation ; or, the two words
may be in apposition with one another.
b. Often the first noun is put formally in the genitive case :
thus, ^bmQf)o):}n king's son, 2ar\h^mann countryman, 3[Birtl)§^au§
CIBirt§l^au§] inn (Ut. host's house).
422] COMPOUND NOUNS. 235
c. And even, by irregular imitation of such forms, the first
noun takes an § or e§ which does not properly belong to it as
an independent word: thus, (^eburtStag birthday, ;^ieBe§Brief
hveletter.
d. The first noun sometimes takes a plural ending : thus,
S3Uber6u(^ picture-book (lit. pictures-book), SSorterbud) dictionary
(lit. words-book), ^Iciber)d)ranf clothes-press, SSaifen^au§ orphan
asylum (lit. orphans' house), ^ageBucE) journal (lit. days-book).
e. These endings of declension are introduced in part for their
meaning, in part for euphonic reasons; and insertions of a
similar kind are occasionally made quite arbitrarily : as, ^](?^er=
mittmorf) Ash- Wednesday, §)etbelbeere heath-berry.
3. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding verbal root
having the value of a qualifying noun or adjective : thus, (5ing=
t)OGel singing-bird, ^-Brennglag burning-glass, ©djreibfeber writing-
pen, ©tubirsimmer [Stubtergimmer] study-room,^(il\vi^i covetous-
ness (lit. desire of having).
4. Nouns made up of a noun and a preceding particle, with
qualifying force : thus, ^u^enfeite outside, 3nlanb inland, ^u§=
lani final sound (of a word), Wximm]^ fellow-creature, SSorfteil
[^Sorteil] advantage (lit. excelling part).
5. Nouns made up of an infinitive and words dependent upon
it: thus, ha§ ^nx\\(i)']dn the being by one's self, ba§ Sujpdtfommen
the coming too late. These are unusual cases, and not employed
in dignified style.
6. Compounds of a different and peculiar character, which
designate an object by describing some peculiarity belonging
to it, and which may be called possessive or characterizing
compounds. Such are —
a. A noun with preceding limiting word : as, ^al^Ifopf bald-
head (a person or thing having a bald head), 33lauftruTnpf blue-
stocking (person wearing such), ©c^reiftal^ bawler (lit. scream-
neck), 33ierecf square (lit. four-comers).
b. An adjective with preceding qualifying word: as, ber
Dlimmerf att the greedy-gut (Ut. never satiated), ha§ Smmergriiu the
evergreen.
c. A verb with a following object, or other limiting word or
phrase: as, Xaugenic^tg good-for-nothing, ©torenfrieb kill-joy
(lit. disturb-peace), (^tellbidiein rendezvous (lit, make thine ap-
236 COMPOSITION. [422-
pearance), (5))rtngtit§felb romp (lit. jump into the field), ^eT^raug
closing dance (lit. turn-out).
d. One or two more anomalous cases : as, (SJarau^ end (lit. all
over).
Composition of Adjectives.
423. Compound adjectives are always made up of an
adjective with a preceding limiting or qualifying word.
Their treatment, as regards declension, use as adverbs,
and the like, is the same with that of simple adjectives.
The first member of the compound takes the accent.
424. The varieties of compound adjectives are —
1. Adjectives made up of two adjectives, of which the former
either is co-ordinate with the latter— as in taubftumm deaf and
dumb, !aiferIic^=!ontglt(ij imperial-royal — or, much more often,
limits it in the manner of an adverb : as, l^ellblau bright-blue,
tobtfran! [totfranf] deadly sick.
2. Adjectives made up of an adjective (usually a participle) and
a preceding adverb : as, tBO'^lebel right-noble, worshipful, tt)o'f)I=
meinenb well-meaning, jogenannt so-called, meitaugfe^enb far-
looking.
3. Adjectives made up of an adjective and a preceding
limiting noun : as, f (^neetDei^ snow-white, troftbebiirfttG needing
consolation, ei§!alt ice-cold.
a. A very frequent form of this compound is made up of a
participle and its dependent noun : as, !^cilbrtngenb salutary (lit,
health-bringing), |)fli(^tt)ergef(en duty-forgetting, gottergeben god-
devoted.
b. The noun in such compounds, as in compounds with a noun
(422.26-e), often takes the form of a genitive or a plural : thus,
leben^fatt tired of life, loBen^lDurbig praiseworthy, ^offnung§t)Dll
hopeful, riefengro^ gigantic (lit. giant-great), !inberlo§ childless
(lit. children-less).
4. Adjectives made up of an adjective and a preceding verbal
root, having the value of a dependent noun : thus, merf tDiirbtg
remarkable (lit. worthy of noticing).
This form of compound is rare and exceptional, the infinitive
being generally used, instead of the simple verbal root,
425] COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 237
5. Adjectives formed by appending a suffix of derivation, es-
pecially ig (415.9), to the combination of a noun with a preceding
limiting word (which combination is not itself in use as a com-
pound noun) : thus, t)ierfu§ig four-footed, Qro^l)er3ig great-hearted,
Soc^naftQ supercilious (lit. high-nosed).
Compositimi of Particles.
425. 1. The modes of formation of compound particles have
been already sufficiently explained and illustrated, under the
head of the different kinds of particles (see especially 365).
Such particles are, in part, cases of compound words, analogous
with those just treated of ; in part, phrases composed of inde-
pendent and fully inflected words, which have simply run to-
gether into one by frequent usage ; in part, they are combina-
tions of particles.
2. a. Compound particles of the last class, and those of the
second which are made up of a governing preposition and its
governed case, are accented on the final member: thus, t) Driver'
previously, l^ertior' forth, gubem' besides, uberl)aupt' in general,
Bcrgab' down hill.
h. Such, on the other hand, as are originally cases of com-
pound words, or phrases composed of a noun and a preceding
limiting word, are accented on the first member : thus, l)tm'mcl=
tt)drt§ heavenwards, t)ie('mal§ often, fet'neSmeQg in no wise, bcr'-
geftalt in such wise.
c. A few are accented on either the first or second member ;
and either indifferently, or according to a difference of meaning :
thus, alfo' or arfo accordingly^ c\'\Da or d\v a' perchance ; ciii'mal,
when ein means distinctly one, rather than a; bar'um, tDar'iim,
l^ier'mit, when the emphasis rests on the pronominal element —
and so on.
d. There are occasional irregular exceptions to these rules of
accentuation, which may be left to the dictionary to point out.
238 'CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES. [42&
CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES.
Introductory Explanations.
426. 1. A SENTENCE is a combination of words having
completeness in itself as the expression of a thought.
2. It is composed of a subject, designating that of
which something is asserted (inquired, desired), and a
PREDICATE, expressing that which is asserted (inquired,
desired) of the subject.
a. That a thought cannot be signified or communicated without the
combination of a subject and a predicate is not claimed (compare 391) ;
but only that this combination is its full and regular mode of expression,
the norm to which all expressed thoughts may be reduced, or of which
they are to be regarded as variations.
h. The further division of the predicate, as above defined, into predicate
and copula (the latter being always a person of jcin he: compare 316.1a,
remark) — for example, of er Uebt he loves into er ift liebenb he is loving—
though of value in the logical analysis of expression, is unimportant in
grammatical analysis, and has no bearing upon the construction of the
sentence. All verbs except feiit he (and even that, in some of its uses)
contain the copula combined with a more or less complete predication
of some action, state, or quaUty ; some require more than others a
complement, to fill out their idea and make a significant predication : a
few (316.1), so especially as to be called "verbs of incomplete predica-
tion;" a transitive verb is in itself less complete than an intransitive,
and so on.
c. The completeness of a sentence composed of subject and predicate
is a relative one — namely, as compared with a word, or a phrase not
containing those two elements. A noun by itself suggests an object of
thought ; a noun with qualifying adjuncts implies certain things as
standing in certain relations to one another, an object as invested with
quaUties : so also a verb by itself, or with adjuncts, calls up an intel-
ligent conception in the mind ; and either, in certain circumstances, has
all the value of a complete expression, because the mind of the hearer
or reader understands, or intelligently supplies, whatever is wanting. But
we do not feel that anything is really said until a verb and its subject
are combined, until something is predicated of something.
d. A sentence may signify only a small part of the thought which is
in the mind of the speaker, and which he sets out to express ; it may
require to be set in connection with other sentences in order to perform
427] SENTENCES. • 239
its full office, as much as a word witli other words to form a sentence.
And, in the development of language, a means is found by which in-
dividual sentences are so combined as to form a higher unity— by which,
instead of being merely set side by side, they are twined together into a
complex sentence or period. This means is the conversion of independent
sentences into dependent clauses, having the formal as well as logical
value of parts of a sentence (see below, 435 etc.). For the simple sen-
tence still remains the norm and unit of complete expression : the de-
pendent clauses have value only as they enter into the structure of such
a sentence, in the quality of adjuncts either to its subject or to its pred-
icate. They themselves, then, though containing a subject and a
predicate, are incomplete, because they distinctly imply a relation to
something else, which requires to be also expressed.
427. Sentences are of three fundamental kinds, as-
sertive, interrogative, and optative (or imperative).
Thus, assertive, bu Itel)ft mi(^ thou lav est me ; — interrogative,
Uebft bu mid) lovestthoume? — optative, Itebe bu mi(^ love thou me!
a. Of only the first of these can it be truly said that it in-
volves the predication of something of a subject. The relations
of the three to one another are best developed by reducing
them to the common form of dependent clauses, expressing
what is affirmed, inquired, or desired by some defined speaker.
Thus, we say of another, er be'^auptet, bafj bu il)n Hebft he asserts
that thou lovest him; er fraflt (mill tDtffen), oh bu i^n IteBeft he asks
(wants to know) whether thou lovest him; er tjerlangt, ha^ bu il^n
iiebeft he requires that thou love him. "When, now, we come to
speak in our own persons, we change id) be^aupte, 'tia^ bu mid)
Iiel)ft Imaintain that thou lovest meinto bu lieBft mid) tlwu lovest me,
the assertion of the assertion being usually a quite unnecessary
formality ; id) mid mijfen, oB bu mid) liebcft I wish to know whether
thou lovest me becomes liebft bu mid) lovest thou me ? the wish to
know being intimated by arrangement and tone ; and id) t)er=
lauQe, ha% bu mic^ liebeft I require that thou love me is changed
into lieBe bu mid) love thou me ! the desire or demand being ex-
pressed by arrangement, tone, and appropriate verbal form.
That is to say, the usage of language has established modes of
expression by which the speaker can signify his desire to know,
or his request or command, directly, without putting it
necessarily, as he may do optionally, into the form of an asser-
tion.
6. All these kinds of sentence alike consist of a subject and a
predicate (save that the subject of the imperative sentence is
240 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [427-
often omitted as superfluous, when of the second person, or
representing the individual to whom the request or command
is directly addressed). And the assertive sentence is properly-
assumed as the norm or standard, of which the other two may
be treated and explained as variations.
c. The formal construction and logical office of the three
kinds of sentence do not always correspond. A variety of
modes of expression (338) may be used as intimations of a com-
mand ; a question may be expressed (432.16) in the form of an
assertive sentence ; and an assertion may be implied in the
asking of a question.
d. The direct assertive force of an assertive sentence may be
variously and greatly modified, either by the mode and tense
of the verb or by adjuncts, so that the statement is made un-
certain or hypothetical to any degree — yet without affecting
the grammatical character of the sentence. A negative sentence
is only one variety of the assertive, in which, of two opposite
and mutually exclusive things, one is affirmed by the denial of
the other.
428. 1. The subject of a sentence is always a sub-
stantive word — that is to say, either a noun, or one of
the equivalents of a noun (113) — along with such ad-
juncts (109 etc.) as may be attached to it for its limita-
tion and qualification.
2. The bare predicate of a sentence is always a
personal form of a verb, since this alone has predicative
force (232, 314) ; it may be accompanied by the various
modifying adjuncts (314 etc.) which it is capable of
taking.
429. The arrangement of the sentence, as thus con-
stituted, is subject to stricter and more intricate rules
in German than in English : which rules will now be set
forth.
a. The differences in construction be'.ween the two languages
are in good part of comparatively modern growth ; some of the
peculiar rules which now domineer German sentences were
only tendencies and preferences a few centuries ago.
h. Hence, in archaic style, as well as in poetry, the rules are
much less strictly observed than in ordinary prose.
430] EBGULAR ORDEE, 241
Begular or Normal order of the sentence.
430. 1. In its ordinary and normal arrangement, tlie
German sentence, like the English, requires the sub-
ject to be stated first, and to be followed by the pred-
icate.
a. This rule has reference to the simple assertive sentence ;
such a sentence, as explained above (427.&), being taken as the
standard from which the other forms are deduced. For the
arrangement of the interrogative and optative sentences, see
below, 432.
6. Taken in connection with the rules already given as to the
order in which the adjuncts of a noun and verb are respectively
arranged (110-12, 319), this rule determines the whole order of
the normal sentence ; but it is desirable to call especial attention
to the peculiarities which distinguish the German order.
2. No one of the adjuncts of the predicate verb is
ever allowed to stand between it and the subject.
Thus, for English he truly loves justice, and never willingly
commits a wrong, the German must say er Uebt treulid) ha§ ^t^i
unb beae!)t nie tDilUg ein Unred)t.
a. Earely, a word or phrase is found inserted between the
subject and the verb. Such a one, however, is never an adjunct
of the predicate, but one of the conjunctions having exceptional
freedom of position (385.4,5), or an asseverative particle, or a
phrase of parenthetical force. The words oftenest met with
in this position are abcr, ndmltd), alfo, tnbeffen, and jeboift.
3. Since the infinitive (348.2) and the participle (368)
are regularly preceded by whatever limits them, and
since (319.2) the word most closely combined in idea
with the verb as sharing in its predicative quality is
put farthest from it, it results that in sentences contain-
ing a compound tense, or a simple form of a separably
compounded verb, the non-personal part of the verb
(prefix, participle, or infinitive) stands at the end of the
sentence ; and the same place is taken by an infinitive
dependent on the verb of the sentence, or by a word,
other than a prefix, separably compounded with it, or
forming with it a verbal phrase.
242 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. [430-
Thus, ct Blttfte mit SBol^lgef alien auf ben em^orf^auenben
©ol^n ber ^rbe l^ernieber he looked down with complacency
upon the upgazlng son of earth, bu 1^ aft gtoar ni(!)t !IuQ, aber bod)
natiirlic^ unb na^ tinblic^er SOSeife gei) ati b e It thou hast acted, not
wisely, indeed, but yet naturally, and in childish fashion, \tjx
tt) e r b e t euc^ fo Blutig eurer ^lad)i ntd)t iib e rl^ e b e n you will not
presume so cruelly upon your power, id) tDtll mein Seben al§ ein
^efd)en! au§ curer §anb e m|) f an g en I will receive my life as a
gift from your hand, [^ naf)m ni(^t§ mel^r t)on ber l^tnter mtr lies'
genben Sbene n) a I) r I perceived nothing more of the plain that
lay behind me.
a. Where there is more than one non-personal part of the
verb in the sentence, the prefix stands before the participle, or
the infinitive, or the participle and infinitive ; and the participle
stands before the infinitive : thus, [^ gebe e§ auf, i^ ^abt e§ auf*
gegeben, ic^ njerbe e§ aufgeben, \6) merbe e§ aufgegeben l&aben, c§
tt)trb aufgegeben tuorben fein — since each element is prefixed to
that to which it is added as a limitation (314&).
b. In the greater nimiber of sentences, therefore, the two
parts of the verb, the personal and non-personal, form as it
were a frame within which are set all the verbal adjuncts, ac-
cording to rules of arrangement (319) which are (except the one
requiring the personal pronoun to come first) on the whole
somewhat loosely observed, and liable to manifold variation.
The three fixed points in the normal order of the sentence are
the subject, the personal verb, and the non-personal part of the
verb (if there be one present).
Inverted order of the sentence,
431. To arrange all sentences in tlie manner above
described would result in an intolerable monotony. The
German enjoys the same privilege as tlie English, and
with even greater freedom, of putting at the head of the
sentence any other member of it than the subject — for
the general purpose of attaining a euphonious variety ;
or, more often, in order to lay an emphatic stress upon
the member thus removed from its proper place. But,
when any part of the predicate is thus put in the place
of the subject, the latter is no longer allowed to stand
431] INVEETED ORDER. 243
before the verb, but is put next after it instead. This
is called the inversion of the sentence.
Thus, in normal order, ein Sanbmanu brac^te fcincn ^inbern an§
ber Slabt fiinf $firfid)e a countryman brought his children from
the citij five peaches : — inverted, with no other change of mean-
ing than as regards emphasis, fiinf gjfirfii^e Brac^te ein Sanbmann
f einen ^inbern au^ ber ©tabt ; or, again, au§ ber 6tabt brac^te ein
Sanbmann feinen ^inbern fiinf ^firfid)e ; or, feinen ^inbern bra(i)te
ein Sanbmann au§ ber ©tabt fiinf ^firfic^e.
a. This arrangement is styled inverted, because, when the
sentence consists of only three members, its effect is completely
to invert their regular order : thus, er liebt mid) he loves me :
inverted, mi(^ liebt er ; er ift gut he is good : inverted, gut ift er.
In all cases, too, the term is appropriate as denoting an inver-
sion of the natural order of the two essential elements of the
sentence, the personal verb and its subject.
h. The same inverted order, as occasioned by the same cause, is in
English sentences also more or less usual, only not imperative, except
in certain special phrases : thus, we say always "hardly had he gone,
when. . .," but either "thus was it," or "thus it was ;" and "slowly
and sadly we laid him down," but "few and short were the prayers we
said." In such phrases as "said I," "replied he," " added they, " in-
terjected in the midst of a quotation of some one's words, the inversion
(made aUke in English, German, and French) is best explained as falling
under the principle here stated, since the part of the words already
quoted is logically the object of the verb in the interjected phrase.
c. The only words (other than the subject) which are allowed
to stand at the head of the sentence without causing its inver-
sion are the general connectives (384), meaning and, hut, for, and
eitJier or or. Even the co-ordinating adverbial conjuncticms
(385) invert the sentence in their conjunctional use, as when
proper adverbs.
d. As will appear below (438.3/), an adverbial clause, if
placed at the head of the sentence of which it forms a part, has
the same inverting force as a simple adverb.
Even an adjective phrase belonging appositively to the sub-
ject, if placed at the head of the sentence, inverts it, being
treated as if it were an adverbial adjunct of the predicate (as it
often logically is so) : thus, etnfttDetlen Berubiflt, 309 tiun bag ^nx
5^i!o|)oli§ t)Drit6er being for the time tranquillized (i. e. since it was
so), the army now marched past Nikopolis; gart unb ebcl ent=
fproffen, tt)ud)§ bie toniolic^e ^lume l^eruor the royal flower , having
244 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [431-
tenderly and nobly sprung forth, continued to grow (I e. after
spmnglng fortli).
e. It is not usual, nor in good style, to remove to the head of
the sentence more than a single connected member of the pred-
icate : which may, however, consist of any number of words :
thus, not feinen ^inbern au§ ber ©tabt hxa^)it em fianbmann fiint
$fir]ld)e ; —but bort, !)inter biefen genftern, dertrdumf \^ ben erften
^raum yonder, behind those windows, I dreamed my first dream;
iefet (c^nell, el)' bie ^ranbuttfi tt)ieberfel}rt, Befie!)It ber SiiuQling jic!)
(S^ott now quickly, ere the surge returns, the youth commits himself
to God.
f. The members of the predicate most often placed at the
head of the sentence for emphasis, with consequent inversion,
are the object (direct, indirect, or remote), and the various ad-
verbial adjuncts ; less often a predicate noun or adjective (316) ;
least often one of the non-personal parts of the verb. No part
of the predicate, however, is exempt from such treatment, and
even —
g. The personal verb itself is sometimes placed first in the
sentence by inversion, with the effect of emphasizing the pred-
ication — that is to say, of strengthening or impressing the
general force of the assertion made. In such an inversion, the
verb is usually followed by boc^ though; much less often by \a
surely : but neither of these particles is absolutely necessary.
Thus, jinb boc^ ein tDunberlid) 35oI! bie 2Bet6er surely women are
a strange race of beings! 'tiab' id) bi(^ boc^ mein' ^age m^i gefelien
surely I never saw you in my life! ^a, fo finb jie! fc^redt fie alleg
gleic^, tt)a§ eine Xiefe !^at ! Yes, that is the way with them! every-
thing that Jias any depth straightway terrifies them.
h. In general, the inversion of the sentence affects the ar-
rangement only of the personal verb and its subject. If, how-
ever, the subject be a noun, and there be a personal pronoun in
the sentence as object of the verb, the pronoun generally
remains next the verb, and is put between it and the subject.
Thus, ha t)erlie§ mid) ber OJiann (S5otte§ in tiefem ©taunen then
the man of God left me in deep astonishment, banad) fd)IanG fid)
ber Sange urn fie bcibe in einen ^'rei§ after that, the tall fellow
twined himself round about both of them.
The same thing is customary in the interrogative and^ the
optative sentence (432) : thus, mt ))abtn eu(^ bie fd)onen Spfel
gefc^medt how did the beautiful apples taste to you? i)ett)al)re bid)
ber §immel may Heaven preserve thee!
432] INYEETED ORDER. 245
A similar transfer of the pronoun from its proper place is
usual also in transposed clauses : see 439.1.
i. When, of two co-ordinate clauses following one another,
the first is inverted, the second usually retains its normal order,
even though the word or phrase which caused the inversion of
the one logically forms a part of the other also : thus, barauf
blieb er fi^en, unb id) Qing fort thereupon he remained sitting and
I went away.
432. Interrogative and Optative sentences.
1. In German, as in English, an interrogative sen-
tence is ordinarily arranged in the inverted order, or
with the subject after the verb. In a direct question
(one requiring "yes" or "no" as an answer), the verb
conies first of all ; in an indirect question, the inter-
rogative word (pronoun, pronominal adjective, or parti-
cle), or phrase involving such a word, comes first.
Thus, mirb bie junQe ©d)opfuncj aufprcn will the ijoimg creation
cease ? I)dlt fie mirf) nti^t mc^r does it not longer confine me ? — voo
\\i er where is he? voa^ fud)t K)r lohat seek ye ? tt)el(^e§ 58ud) ^at er
Qelefen lohat hook has he read ? mit tt)effen @elb "ijat er e§ gefauft
with whose money has lie bought it ?
a. When the interrogative word or phrase is itself the sub-
ject of the verb, the sentence necessarily retains its normal
order: thus, tDcr l)ai mir ba§ Gctl)au who has done that to me ?
tDcfjen ^ud) Ue^t l^ier whose hook lies here?
h. Often, however (also as in English), a sentence is made
interrogative by the tone with which it is uttered, while it has
the construction of an assertive sentence: thus, ii)x f^tueiot? bie
Dlinae IDtrlen nur guriid? tjou are silent? the rings only work
backward? ba§ foH bie ^Intmort fein auf metne S^age? that is to
he the answer to my question ?
Often or usually, an interrogative sentence so constructed
has a somewhat different force, implying "is it possible
that . . . !" or "do you mean that . . .?" or the like.
c. An exclamatory sentence sometimes^ has the interrogative
form : thus, tt)ie ]d)6u ift ber ^JZorgeu ! tt)te fdjetnt bie Sonne fo
waxm nnb milb 1 how heautifid the morning is! how warmly and
gently the sun shines t
246 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [432-
2. The optative or imperative sentence takes, as in
English, the inverted arrangement: that is to say, in
the second persons, singular and plural, of the im-
perative, and in the various persons of the subjunctive
used optatively or imperatively, the subject follows the
verb, instead of preceding it.
Thus, ]pnd) h\i, unb lt)lr "^oren do thou speak, and we hear, jud^'
^r ben reblidien ©eminn seek tJiou (lit. let him seek: 153.3) for
honest gain ! moQC nic ber Stag erf ^einen ynay tlmt day never ap-
pear ! tt)dre e§ ^m nur nic^t jo bunfel would that it only were not
so dark here! moc^f aud) bod) bie ganje 2BeIt un§ !)oren would tlmt
even the whole world might hear us! o U)dr^ i(^ nie QeBoren that
I had never been born ! Compare 243.1, 331.
a. But in the third person singular of the present subjunctive
(as already pointed out : 331.1&), the subject may also stand
before the verb, and more frequently does so : thus, Jeber fommc
tt)lc er ift let each one come as he is,
433. Conditional dauses.
A clause of a sentence is very often inverted in
German to express the conditionality of a statement —
that is, to add the meaning of if.
Thus, :^atte er oerufen, fo fatten jie iftn gefunben luid he cried out
(if he had cried out), they would have found him, !^ at t) on eu(^
ieber fetnen 9ling t)on fetnem 35ater if each of you has his ring
from his father, er^ebet ein Sloift fid) if a quarrel arises, l^at ber
^egrabene fic^ fi^on erl^obcn if the buried one hath already arisen,
Iicj3 er un§ ^ier ^uriid if he left us behind here.
a. This mode of signifying the conditionality of a sentence is
(as the first example shows) not unusual also in English, in the
past subjunctive tenses had and were, in the conditional clause
(protasis) of a complete hypothetical period (332.1) ; and it is
not wholly unknown under other circumstances : but in German
the construction is a very common one, with all the different
tenses of verbs of every -class.
b. The same construction is frequent in the conditional clause
(protasis) of an incomplete hypothetical period, after an al§
representing the omitted conclusion (apodosis: see 332.26): thus,
er Be^anbelte fie, al§ tuaren fie fetne Untertl)anen he treated them as
435] TRANSrOSED ORDER. 247
[he would treat tlwm] if they wliere his own subjects; cr nidfte mit
bem ^Dpfe, ttl§ tDoUe er fagen : 6d|on red^t he nodded his head, as
if he meant to say " quite right ! "
c. E-arely, of two succeeding conditional clauses, only the first
is inverted : thus, voax e§ bann SBinter, unb ber ©rf)nee lag rings
um^^er if then it was winter, and the snow lay about : compare
431i
_ [ExEECiSE 23. Normal and Inverted Sentences.]
Transposed order of the sentence.
434. The two modes of arrangement heretofore ex-
plained belong to independent or principal sentences
or clauses (excepting only the inverted conditional
clauses, treated in the last paragraph). The German
construction, however, is most peculiar in that it has a
special mode of arrangement for dependent (sometimes
also called subordinate or accessory) clauses. In these,
namely, while the other members of the sentence remain
in their normal order, the personal verb is removed
from its proper place to the end of the clause. This
removal is called transposit'on, and the resulting ar-
rangement is styled the transposed.
Thus, in normal order, ber 2ag neigt ji(^ gufetnem Snbe; but,
transposed, mir fefteii, bafe ber ^ag jld) gu feinem ^nbe wnc^iwe see
that the day is drawing to its close; — bie ^dmmcrung Ucrljiillt
tt)ie ein buftiger ©(^leier bie §H)en unb ^ftdler; but, bie ^dmme=
rung, mUjt trie ein buftiger ©d)Icier bie C)i3^en unb Sadler Der-
IjixUt the twilight which envelopes like a misty vail the heights
and valleijs ; —hk ©onne ftatte il)re 33a5n boHenbet; but, al§ bie
©onne i^re S3al)n boKenbet 1:jattt when the sun had finished its
course.
a. The name " transposed order or arrangement" is abbrevi-
ated, for the salie of convenience, from "arrangement with
transposed verb," which would be more fully and truly
descriptive.
435. Dependent clauses,
• 1. A dependent clause is one which enters, with the
value of a substantive, an adjective, or an adverb, into
the structure of some other clause*
248 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [435^
2. Dependent clauses are of three kinds, according
to tlie parts of speech wliicli they represent — namely,
substantive clauses, adjective clauses, and adverb
clauses.
436. 1. A svhstantive dependent clause is one wliicli
has the value and construction of a noun.
2. Such a clause is introduced by ho!^ that, oB whether,
the compound relative pronouns and pronominal ad-
jective trer, tra^, and Xod6)vc (179), or the compound
relative conjunctions (386.2) iDie, toantt, tDO and its
compounds, etc.
3. A substantive clause stands in various constructions:
thus —
a. As subject of a verb : as, b a ^ cr bic ^cf anbten befreite, ift
IXoax Qiit that lie has released the ambassadors is, to-be sure, well;
iDann btefe ®rfcf)cinung jicf) jutrug, tDelc^e ^raft ben ©InBrud)
beftxmmtc, ift tief in ba§ i)un!cl bcr SSorgcit oe^iillt wheii this event
happened, what power determined the inroad, is deeply hidden in
the darkness of antiquity.
b. As object of a verb : thus, fie fragten, o b fie rcc^t toii^te, tt) c t
i^r 9Jlann U)dre they asked whether she really knew who her
husband was; i(f) tt)ill fe^en, tDO e§ licgt I will see where it lies;
ni(^t§ !ann iftm mieber erfc^cn, tt)a§ er terloren ))at nothing ean
make up to him what he has lost.
c. In apposition with a noun or its equivalent : thus, mit ber
gntfdjulbigung, ba^ er gum ^riege Berebet tDorben fei with the ex-
cuse, that he had been persuaded into the war; be§ (^eful^Ic§, b a^
ni(^t§ im SeBen rc(J)t gefc^dl^e, tDcnn c§ 6IoB gefdidbe of the feeling
that nothing in life was d^ne properly if it was simply done; —
after e§, as preceding indefinite subject (154.4) : thus, gwcifeHjaft
Hieb e§ je^t, tt) eleven 2[Beg man einf c^Iagcn. f oKe it remained dx)ubt-
ful now, which road one was to take; — after other neuter indefin-
ites, pronominal and adjective (see 179.5): thus, allcm, ma§ ba
blul)t to everything that blossoms; — explaining a preceding ba
that represents a demonstrative pronoun-case governed by a
preposition: thus, bie§ trug o^ne 3tt)etfel (b a gu) bei, b a ^ nur bil*
ligea t)cvlangt murbe this doubtless contributed to the i^esult that
nothing um^easonable ivas demanded ; fiebai^tenur barauf, mie
437] ADJECTIVE CLAUSE. 243
fic bie 9J^enfd^en in§ 35erberben locfen fonnte she thought only of how
she could entice men to destruction : see below, d.
d. As governed by a preposition : thus, o^nc ha^ er em ^Ia§
not^ig ftatte without needing a glass; l)arret t^r, bt§ ha^ ber red)te
3i\nQ ben SJlunb eroffne are you waiting till [the time that] the righh
ring shall open its mouth ? aufecr toer f cine 9Jlitf cf)ulbtgen f eten ex-
cept whoever were his accomplices.
Only a few prepositions thus govern a substantive clause
directly, and s ^me of these (377.1), the ba^ being omitted, have
assumed the character of conjunctions: thus, bt§ bie Slutl^en
[gluten] fid) Derliefen till the floods should subside;— in general, if
such a clause is to be placed under the government of a prepo-
sition, it is anticipated by a t) a in combination with the prep-
osition, and itself follows, as if in apposition with the ba : see
just above, c; and compare 346.2a.
e. As dependent on a noun: thus, bie§ Waren bie ^anpt='
urjac^en, h a^ fie nirgcnbg greunbe fal)cn obcr oeiDannen these
were the chief reasons [for the fact] that they nowhere found or
made friends.
f. A substantive clause not infrequently stands in dependence
upon a noun or a verb, by a pregnant construction, where a
simple substantive could not stand without a preposition, or
even sometimes more than that, to explain its relation to the
noun or verb : thus, er erlag bem ©d)mcr3e, ha^ foli^ Ungliirf in
feinen Sagen eintrdtc he broke down under his grief [at the fact]
that such a misfortune should occur in his time; [^ banfe (^ott,
ha^ id) meine ©ofine miebergefunben ftabe I thank God that I have
found my sons again; forgt, ha^ fie nid)t an§ meiner hammer
fommt take care that she does not leave my room.
g. A conditional clause after al§ (compare 4336) is sometimes
used with the value of a substantive clause : thus, bie anmut^ige
[anmutige] 3:dufd)unG, al§ fei e§ bie eigene feifteng, bie in alien
biefen ^n'^dngen mitfc^tt)eBt the pleasing illusion that (lit. as if) it is
our own personality which fl/)ats in all these appendages.
[Exercise 24. Transposed Order. Substantive Clauses.]
437. 1. An adjective dependent clause is one which
belongs to and qualifies a noun (or its equivalent : 113).
2. Such a clause is introduced by a relative pronoun,
ber or ipeld^cr (or a prepositional phrase containing such),
250 CONSTEUCTION OF SENTENCES. [437-
or bj a relative conjunction — namely, the compounds of
ha and tDO with prepositions or with adverbs of direc-
tion, and the simple conjunctions Wo, tvtnn, tvann, ha, aU,
iuie (compare 386.3).
Thus, ein SSunf^, ben au(^ \d) in meinen Siinglinfl^iafiren l^atte
a wwh which I also had in the years of my youth; bag etnaige
3JZd6rc^en, n)eld^e§ er geprt l^atte unb gu ergd^Ien \m)^k the only
story which he Jiad heard and knew haw to tell; ben 9)lenf(^en, fiir
beffen SSertfjeibigung [S^erteibigung] ifire 6tammDater fampften
the man in whose defense their ancestors fought ; ij^r Ouellen
haijxn bte welfe 33rul"t fic^ brdngt ye fountains toward which tJie
drooping breast presses; einen SSertrag, ID o n a ^ bie ©nec^en einen
frieblic^en ^urc^gug eriaubten a treaty by which the Greeks oer-
mitted a peaceable transit; ha^ 9anh, tt)o ber 58runnquelf beg
^laubcng entjprang the land where the fountain of faith first
sprang up ; tn ber ^legenseit, tt) e n n bag ^elta iiberfc^toemmt ift in
the rainy season, when the delta is inundated.
a. Any simple qualifying adjective may be converted by
means of a relative pronoun into an adjective clause : thus, ber
gute 9Jlann the good man into ber SJZann, ml^a gut ift the man
wlio is good; — and, on the other hand, the German often puts
into the form of an attributive adjective (especially a participle),
with modifying adjuncts, what we more naturally express in
English by an adjective clause : thus, er befiegte bie gu unt)orfi(^tig
unb in eingclnen ^btl^eilungen [^^Ibteilungen] borbringenben !Ror=
mannen he vanquished the Normans, who were pressing on too
incautiously and in isolated divisions.
The order of the parts of such a compound adjective is the
same with that of an adjective clause : thus, bie S^ormannen,
ml^^ gu unt)or]i(^tig unb in eingelnen ^bt^eilungen [^Ibteilungen]
borbrangen.
b. The German not infrequently uses an independent clause,
introduced by a demonstrative pronoun, where our idiom re-
quires an adjective clause, with a relative: thus, ba ift einer,
ber !ann tncl^r alg \^ there is one — he can do more than I (for ber
mcl)r alg id) !ann tvho can do more than I). The difference of ar-
rangement shows 1 lainly enough what such a clause Uterally
means.
c. An adjective clause is often employed, as in English, not so
much to describe or qualify a noun, as to add to the sentence,
in a more intimate way than by a simple connective, something
438] ADVEKBIAL CLAUSE. 251
relating to a noun : thus, bie nationale Seibenfd)aft tt)affnete \\^
oegen t^n; ber er unterlag, nac^bem . . ., the national passwn
armed itself against him ; to which he succumbed, after . . . — in-
stead of unb biefer unterlag er and to this he succumbed. Or, what
has logically a different value, as of a ground or reason, is cast
into the shape of a descriptive clause : thus, be^l^alb BefdjloB ber
^aifer, bem baran lag, fc^neU su jetnem ©o'^ne gu fommen accord-
ingly the emperor, who was desirous of getting quickly to his son,
resolved . . . — ^instead of ba e§ iftm baran lag since he was desirous.
[Exercise 25. Transposed Order. Adjective Clauses.]
438. 1. An adverbial dependent dause is one which
performs the part of an adverb, by qualifying a verb,
an adjective, or another adverb.
2. It is introduced by one of the subordinating con-
junctions mentioned and classified above, under Con-
junctions (386.4).
3. a. An adverbial clause, in most cases, qualifies a verb.
Thus, as adverb of place, tt) o in ber 2Stlbntg alleS f (^tt)teg, t)er^
na^m ic^ ha% ©eldute tuieber where in the wilderness all was silent,
I heard the pealing again ;—ot TIME, al§ nun bie 5}^orgenbdmme^
rung begann, bcru()rte (Sloaft ben Sc^Iummernben when now the
morning twilight began, Eloah touched the slumberer ; t))' e§ giDOlf
fc^lug, jaBen [ie \mt Dorljcr before it struck twelve, they sat as &e-
/ore;— of MANNER, bu magft allc§ fdjauen, tx)ie id) bir gcfagt l^abe
thoumayest belwld everything as I have told it thee; e§ rajdjelt mit
ben Sften, 'tia^ mcin ^aul tod tcirb it rustles with the branches in
siwh wise that my liorse becomes frantic; — of cause, id) Blieb urn
fie, tueil fie freunblid) gcgen mid) xoax I hung about her, because
she was friendlij towaixl me; — of purpose, ber mu§ mitgeften,
bam it xo'xx ben Self en megfd)affen he must go along, in order that
ive may get the rock out of the way; — of condition, menu hn mir
bienen millft, fo !omm mit if you would like to serve me, then come
along; obglcid^ fie il)m na^e maren, tonnten fie i^n bod) m^i er=
bliden although tJiey were near him, they yet could not espy him;
—of DEGREE, j e l^eifeer e§ ift, befto me!)r frier' id) the hotter it is (in
proportion as it is hotter), so much the colder am I.
h. An adverbial clause qualifying an adjective is usually one
of degree or manner, introduced by mie or al§, as or than, or by
252 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. [438-
fo ba^: thus, foI(i)e 33ebinGimgen, tt)te er fie t)or3uf(^lagen getDagt
^at such conditions as he has dared to propose; ein ©tab, leic^t urn*
fa^t, jo ba§ feme ^Bemeciungen einigen ©ptelraum ^aben a staff
lightly grasped, so that its movements have some play; icf) "^abe fo
l^elle ^lugen ba§ tc^ burc^ bte gange SBelt fe{)en !ann //lai^e so dear
eyes that lean see through the whole world; ba§ ifl beffer, al§ \d)
t)on i^m ertoartet I)atte that is better than I had expected of him.
Where a fo is present, it strictly qualifies the adjective as an
adverb, and is itself qualifi 'd by the adverbial clause.
c. An adverbial clause qualifying an adverb is for the most
part either introduced by ba^ as correlative to fo, or it follows
a demonstrative adverb of the same kind with that by which it
is itself introduced, and correlative to the latter : thus, fie !^ob
ha§ eine ^ctu fo ))o^ empor, ba§ er eg burc^aug ni(^t ftnbcn fonntc
she lifted one leg so high up that he could not find it at all; cr
fonnte f(^on b a, mo bie 33rurfe aufftorte, ben T^cEen %aQ erbliden he
could already see the bright day at the point where the bridge
ended; tiur barum, tucil eine ©eele t)or^anben ift only for the
reason that a soul is present; er fpottete ber 3bee ii b e r a 11, it) o
fie nx^t feineg (5inne§ mar he mocked at ideas in all cases in which
they were not of his way of thijiking; \^ fann fie erft bann
fteEen, m e n n bie ©riec^en anbere an^Uefern / can only furnish
them at the time when the Greeks deliver up others.
In the 1 itter class of cases, the preceding adverb is often
superfluous, and the adverbial clause logically qualifies the
rer(
d. Out of the frequent use of fo with a following adverb in
the principal clause, and limited by a succeeding adverbial
clause introduced by al§ — for example, er ifl f o b a 1 b gefommen,
al§ i^ iftn rief he came as soon as I called him — has grown a
very common construction in which the adverbial clause is it-
self introduced by fo and the adverb (often combined into one
word), and the al§ is usually omitted (compare 386.4i) : thus,
in ^frifa, f o m e i t mir e§ fennen in Africa, so far as we know it;
fob alb ber DJlenfc^ fid) bem ^rucfe ber au^erften ^ot:^ plot] ent*
munben \^CLi as soon as man has relieved himself of the pressure
of extreme need; fo lang^ ein 51ug' noc^ meinen, ein ^zxiv.0^
brec^en fann, fo lange mallt auf @rben bte (S^ottin ^oefie so long
as an eye can yet weep, a heart yet break — so long walks upon
earth the goddess Poetry.
e. A similar construction is sometimes made with an adjective,
predicative or attributive : thus, aber f o g r o ^ e n D^tu^m bicfcr
"^ d.
438] ADVEBBIAL CLAUSE. 253
6icg an^ ben ^itgcrn bxa^k hut, great as was the fame this
victory brought to the pilgriins, or however great fame this victory
brought, etc. — literally, .so great fame as it even brought.
In both these classes of cases, the imphcation of the omitted
al§ is clearly shown by the transposed arrangement of the
clause ; and they are thus readily distinguished from the cases
where job alb, fo lange, etc., have simply their literal meaning.
/. If an adverbial clause, or an inverted conditional clause
(4336), be put at the head of the sentence, the principal clause
takes the inverted arrangement, just as after a simple adverb
(431)": thus, tt) ie er ha^ ^orte, ftanb er auf when he heard that, he
arose; lue n n bie (^raSbcrfe in ©taub gerfallen ift, flafft ber erpr=
tete 33oben auf when the covering of grass has fallen into dust, the
hardened earth cleaves open; e^e jie gur 5^atur guriidfeftrt, !ommt
fie gur ^lanier before it returns to nature, it becomes mannerism;
tuell mir bie§ febr miBbebaGte, banfte ic^ i^m gang furg as this was
very disagreeable to me, I thanked him quite curtly.
g. After a prefixed adverbial clause, the principal clause is
very often introduced by a particle — fo, ba, or the like;
especially fo — correlative to the conjunction of the former, and
rendering easier the inversion : thus, tt) e n n ba§ ift, f o fann \^
bid) brauc^ett if that is the case, (then) I can make use of you;
al§ er bie ^anh guriitf^oG, ba ftob fid) bie ©(^o(le when he with-
drew his hand, (then) the clod rose. — A f o stands in like manner
as correlative to the imphed tt)enit if of an inverted conditional
clause: thus, faitn eud) ba§ tiiifeen, f o tuiH ic^ eud) gem bieneiyf*-..^^
tlmt can help you, (then) I will gladly serve you. /^
And the inversion of the principal clause comes so to depend
in appearance upon the correlative particle, that, when the
particle is omitted, the clause not very infrequently retains its
normal order: thus, ^^dtte er ben grieben getDiinfc^t, e§ iDtire feinetn
9lei(^e t)ort^cil'^aft [t)ortctII)aft] getrefen (for todre e§, or fo tt)dre e§)
had he wished peace, it would have been advantageous to his
realm.
h. An independent clause is often employed in German where
our usage requires a dependent adverbial clause. Thus, for
example, usually in a clause after one containing fautti hardly :
as, faiittt tear ber 35ater tobt [bt], fo fomttit ein ieber ttiit feiuem
Sting hardly was tlie father dead, when ("lit. then) each one comes
with his ring.
i. An adverbial clause, like an adjective clause (437c), is
sometimes made use of to add something to the sentence —
254 CONSTKUCTION OF SENTENCES. [438-
thus, bo^ ^liinberten diUQC an§ llbermutl) [Ubermut] ; n)c§l&alb
bic 3iifiiftr aufprte uub ^Jlangel entftanb yet some, out of wanton-
ness, committed pillage : on which account the supply ceased and
want arose — or to make an antithesis — or for other purposes
not wholly accordant with the office of a simple adverb,
[Exercise 26. Transposed Order, Adverbial Clause.]
439. Additional rules respecting dependent clauses in general.
1. In the transposed, as in the inverted (431/0 order of the
sentence, a personal pronoun as object of the verb not in-
frequently stands before the subject: thus, bafiir, ba^ tl^nen
bie ^riftlic^en ^ird)en in ^alaftina etngerdumt tuerben ioKten on
condition that the Christian churches in Palestine should be placed
in their possession; eln Sanb, too ft (^ alleg in SiiCe borfinbet a land
where everything is found in abundance; ai§ iDenn fie i !^ m ber
^ob Qcraubt ti'dtk than if death had snatched Iter from him.
2. When a clause ends with two or n;ore infinitives, of which
the last is used in place of a participle (240.1c), the transposed
verb is put next before instead of after them : thus, tt)etl id) nic^t
5ab e gc'^en fonnen because I have not been able to go; benn iftr
mi^t, ba^ \i)X mid) l^aht ermorben laffen moHen for ijou knmu that
you Imve wanted to have me murdered. Compare 348.2a.
By imitation of this construction, the transposed verb is also
sometimes placed before a participle and infinitive, or two
participles.
3. a. In a dependent clause, the transposed auxiliary (^aBen
or f ein) of a perfect or pluperfect tense is very frequently omit-
ted, and has to be inferred from the connection : thus, frii!^cr
al§ i^r fiebac^t (^attet) earlier than you had thought, ha^ T^ie unb
ba ein ^(urflid)er gemefen (ift) that here and there has been one
happy man, inbem er glt)ei ntd)t (!)at) briiden mogen as he had not
wished to do injustice to two, n)a§ 5cuer§ SSut^ [SBut] tftm au(^
geraubt (ftaBe) whatever the fire's fury may have taken from him.
b. Much more rarely, the transposed copula (a form of fein
be) is in Uke manner omitted : thus, ba^ mir e§ iinmer uncrfldrt
(ifl) that it is ever unaccountable to me, n)enn be§ f^ragenS t()r nic^t
miib' (fetb) if ye are not weanj of asking, bie 2Bege, auf n)eld)en ha^
S3efte gn '^aben (ift) the ways in widch the best is to be had.
4 a. An exclamation often has the arrangement of a
dependent clause : thus, n)er mit cud) ttJanberte if one could but go
439] DEl>Em)ENT CLATTSES. 2l55
with you! (lit. [how happy he] who should etc.) ; xok er \\^ tt)inbet
Jww he twists himself!
b. A question may be asked in the same manner : thus, oB fie
hJD^l ^orcf)t [I wonder] whether she is perhaps listening?
5. Whether a dependent clause shall be placed within the
framework of the one upon which it depends, or outside that
framework, is determined mainly by rhetorical or euphonic
considerations ; but it is much more usually placed outside :
thus, ha^ allererfte, tt)a§ ]ie in biefer 2BeIt Morten, al§ ber ^ecfel t)ott
ber ©c^ad^tel genommen murbe, in bei* jie lagen, \oai ba§ 2Bort:
„3innfolbaten!" the very first thing that they heard in this wo7'ld,
when the cover was taken from the box in which they lay, was the
word " tin soldiers ! "—not waS fie in biefer SSelt, ala ber i)e(fel t)on
ber ^^a^kl, in ber fie lagen, Qenommen tDurbe, ftorten, which would
be excessively awkward. But, as the example shows, clauses
qualifying the subject of a sentence have to be brought in
before the predicate — unless, indeed, as is often done, the prin-
cipal clause is inverted.
6. In general, no sentence in Germin takes the transposed ar-
rangement, as a dependent clause, unless it be grammatically as
well as logically dependent — that is to say, unless it be introduced
by a word (conjunction or relative pronoun) which gives it dis-
tinctly and formally a dependent character. Many a clause is
logically dependent (especially as a substantive clause) without
being so formally : thus, id) bd(5^te, e§ tDdre urn befto QottUc^er (or,
ha^ e§ urn befto flottIid)er rodre) I should think it was so muck
the more divine (or, that it was etc.).
Exceptions are —
a. A clause following another dependent clause, and implying
the same subordinating word by which the former was intro-
duced : thus, {)iegu !am, b a ^ bie ^TonxQt t)on Sictlien mil C>ofrdn!en
fdm^fen marten, ber Dlorben gu fern lag, unb ©panien fic^ !aum ber
nd^eren f^etnbe ertDe'^ren fonnte to this was added, that the kings of
Sicily had to contend with court intrigues, [that] tJie north lay too
far away, and [tJiat] Spain coidd hardly defend herself against
nearer enemies.
b. The cases explained above (438.3c?,e), where al§ is omitted
after fo followed by an adverb or adjective.
c. A number of words (adverbs, prepositions, and so on) which
were formerly construed with substantive clauses introduced
by ba^ tJmt — or, in part, are sometimes still so construed — have
^5Q CONSTEUCTION OP SENTENCES. [439^
now won the character of conjunctions (compare 382c), and
themselves introduce a dependent clause directly, the t^a^ being
omitted : thus, bi§ until (for 6i§ ba§ as far as the time that),
ungeac^tet although (for ungeac^tet ha^ it being disregarded that),
nun now (for nun ba^ now that), and others : compare 377.1.
d. It may be remarked here that an inverted conditional
clause (433) is really an adverbial dependent clause, both logic-
ally and formally — as much so as if it were introduced by mnn
if, and had the transposed order of arrangement ; only its de-
pendence is shown in another and pecuhar manner.
Summary of the Bales of Arrangement.
44.0. For the convenience of both teacher and learner, the
leading rules respecting the arrangement of clauses, those
which it is most important to commit to memory and keep con-
stantly ready for application, are presented below in summary.
Eeferences to the fuller statements above are added.
441. 1. There are tliree modes of arranging the
sentence in German :
a. The normal, or regvlar (430) ;
b. The inverted (431-3) ;
c. The transposed (434:-9).
2. The first two belong to independent clauses, the
third to dependent (434).
3. Their character is determined by the position of
the bare predicate, or the personal verb :
a. In the normal arrangement, the personal verb im-
mediately follows the subject ;
h. In the inverted arrangement, it precedes the sub-
ject ;
c. In the transposed arrangement, it is at the end of
the clause.
442. The order of the normal sentence is—
1. The subject;
2. The bare predicate, or personal verb ;
443] EULES OF AKRANGEMENT. 257
3. The various modifying adjuncts of the predicate,
as objects, adverbs, predicate noun or adjective ;
4. Finally, the non-personal part of the verb (if there
be one) — namely, prefix, participle, or infinitive : and,
if more than one be present, they follow one another in
their order as here mentioned.
Among the modifying adjuncts of the predicate, stand-
ing after the personal verb, or between it and the non-
personal part of the verb —
a. A personal pronoun directly dependent on the verb
regularly comes first ;
h. An accusative object precedes a genitive, and more
usually follows a dative ;
c. An adverb of time ordinarily comes before one of
place, and both before one of manner ;
d. A predicate noun or adjective, especially an ob-
jective predicate, usually comes last.
More special rules would be too liable to exceptions to be
worth giving.
Examples of a normally arranged sentence :
1. 2. 3. 4.
cr fd^irft;
er \&i\di ha^ ^u(^ ;
er \)Cii mir 'txx^ 33u^ Qcfi^tcft ;
mcin Sreunb tDtrb mir 'ba^ 33uc^ balb nac^ §aiife gunicfgefcfiirft ^aBcn :
that is, he aends; he sends the hook; he has sent me tlie hook;
my friend will soon have sent the hook hack home to me.
443. The order of the inverted sentence is the same
with that of the normal sentence, except that the sub-
ject comes next after the personal verb, instead of next
before.
The inverted order is followed —
1. When any adjunct of the predicate verb is put in
the place of the subject, at the head of the sentence
(431ay);
258 CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES. [443-
2. Rarely, for impressiveness ; with the personal verb
first, and usually with boc^ or [a surely, somewhere after
it (431^);
3. In interrogative sentences, or when a question is
asked (432.1);
4 In optative or imperative sentences — that is, when
a command or desire is expressed (432.2) ;
5. Often in conditional sentences, or to give the mean-
ing of if (433).
Special rules, a. The general connectives, meaning
and, but, for, or or (384), are the only words which, save
in rare and exceptional cases, are allowed to precede
the subject without inverting the sentence.
h. In an inverted sentence, a personal pronoun as ob-
ject is often put before the subject (431A).
Examples of inverted sentences :
1» tnir ftat er ba§ 35ud) flef(^irft ;
ha^ ^ud) l)at er mir Qefc^lrft ;
QejcE)i(!t ^at er mir ba§ 33uc^ :
that is, he has sent me the book— with varying emphasis, first on
me, then on the hook, last on sent.
2. Ijat er mir bocf) ba§ 33u(^ gefdiicft:
that is, surely he has sent me the hook.
3. 'i)at er mir ha^ 33u(^ flefd^icft ?
tt)a§ ^ai er mir gef^idt ?
ttjem ^t er ha^ 33ud) gej^icft ?
that is, has he sent me the hook? what has he sent me? to whom
has he sent the book ?
4. jd^ide er mir ba§ 33u^ !
that is, let him send m£ the book!
5. fd^idt er mir ba§ 35ud), jo Iftut er mo^l :
that is, if he sends me the book, he does well.
h. 5at mir mein greunb ha§ 33ud) gefdiidt?
that is, has my friend sent me the book ?
444] RULES OF ARRANGEMENT. 259
444. The order of the transposed clause is the same
with that of the normal sentence, except that the per-
sonal verb is removed from its proper place to the very
end of the clause.
The transposed order is followed in dependent dauses —
that is to say, in such as, being introduced by a sub-
ordinating word (relative pronoun or conjunction), are
made to enter as members into the structure of some
other clause (435).
Such a clause has the value either of a noun, an ad-
jective, or an adverb, and is accordingly reckoned* as
a substantive, adjective, or adverbial dependent clause
(436-8).
1. A substantive dependent clause (436) is either the
subject or object of a verb, or in apposition with or de-
pendent upon a noun, or governed by a preposition.
It is introduced by \io!^ that, ob whether, or a compound
relative pronoun or particle (386.2).
Example of a substantive dependent clause (objective) :
t(^ tt)eiJ3, baf3 er mir ba§ 33u(^ gefc^idt ftat :
that is, I know that he has sent me the hook.
2. An adjective dependent clause (437) belongs to and
qualifies a noun.
It is introduced by a relative pronoun or a relative
particle (386.3).
Example of an adjective dependent clause :
'tiOi^ 33u(^, n)e((^e§ er mir gefdjicft %ai :
that is, the book which he has sent to me.
3. An adverbial dependent clause (438) qualifies usually
a verb, sometimes an adjective or an adverb.
It is introduced by a subordinating conjunction of
place, time, manner, cause, purpose, condition, or degree
(386.4).
260 CONSTRtJCTION OF SENTENCES. [444r
Examples of an adverbial dependent clause :
aU er mir ba§ 33u^ fc^ldte ;
U)enn er mir ha^ ^gud) Gcjd)icEt l^at :
that is, when he sent me the hook; if he lias sent me the hook,
Sjoedal rules, a. In a transposed sentence, a personal
pronoun as object is sometimes put before the subject,
if the latter be a noun (439.1).
h. If the sentence ends with more than one infinitive,
the transposed verb is put next before instead of after
theiji (439.2).
Examples :
a. oB mir mctn Sreunb ha^ 33ucE) gef(^ic!t ^at;
h. mW er mir ba§ 33u(^ nii^t \)Cii \6)\dtx[ tDoUen:
that is, whether my friend has sent me the hook; hecause he has
not wanted to send me the hook.
Concluding Bemarks,
445. It must not be supposed that the rules of arrangement,
as drawn out in the preceding pages, are always and every-
where strictly observed, even in prose. The demands of eu-
phony, the suggestions of style, even sometimes the arbitrary
and unexplainable choice of a writer, lead to their not infrequent
violation. A few cases of such violation, of sufficiently prevalent
occurrence to constitute exceptional classes, have been pointed
out above ; but to show in detail the different degree of obli-
gatory force belonging to the different rules, and how and
under what circumstances their neglect is permitted, would re-
quire a treatise.
446. The construction of sentences has been taken up and
treated here only on its grammatical side. To treat it on its
rhetorical or stylistic side — to explain how and to what extent
clauses may be put together so as to form admissible or har-
monious sentences and periods — is not the duty of a grammar.
There is, in theory, no limitation to the expansion of a simple
sentence ; for both its subject and predicate may involve a
variety of modifying adjuncts in the shape of words, phrases,
447] RHETOKICAL CONSTRUCTION. 261
and clauses ; and each part of these clauses may take on further
clauses as adjuncts — and so on, ad infinitum. The usages of
the language, gradually established under the influence of a
regard for euphony and for convenient intelligibility, practi-
cally set bounds to this indeflnite expansion. But the bounds
are very differently drawn in different styles of composition, in
every language, and the variety in German is notably greater
than in most other languages. Between the style of simple nar-
ration and that excessive involution and intricacy in which
many German writers love to indulge, there is an immense in-
terval. It is because poetry is intolerant of involved periods
that German poetry is, upon the whole, decidedly easier to the
learner than German prose. No one, of course, can put together
German periods which shall be tolerable — much less, elegant —
after study of the rules of construction in a grammar ; familiar-
ity with the language as spoken and written, the acquisition of
what seems an instinctive feeling for the harmony of construc-
tion, but is in fact an educated habit, the product of much read-
ing and hearing, can alone enable one to compose such sentences
as Germans compose.
RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH.
447. 1. A part, and the most essential part, of our
English language — namely, that derived from the Anglo-
Saxon — ^is of near kindred with the German.
a. That other and very' important part of our language which
is more directly akin with the French and Latin was brought in
and grafted upon the Anglo-Saxon in consequence of the con-
quest of England by the Normans, in the 11th century. The
Normans were of Germanic (Scandinavian) race, though they
had been settled in France long enough to have substituted the
French language for their own. Thus our Germanic blood is
purer from intermixture than our Germanic speech.
2. This part akin with German includes, along with the most
frequently used and familiar words in our vocabulary, nearly
the whole of the grammatical apparatus of English— that is to
say, all its endings of inflection (393), most of its endings of der-
ivation, its suffixes and prefixes (394-5), and the larger part of
it^ indeclinable particles, or w^ords of relation,
262 EELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [448-
448. Kindred in language, as elsewhere, implies
descent from a common ancestor : the English and
German are modern dialects of one original language.
a. That is to say, there was a time when the forefathers of
the English-speakers and those of the German-speakers formed
together a single community, of uniform speech. By its division,
under historical causes, into separate and independent com-
munities, and by the consequently discordant changes which
these communities have wrought each upon its own speech, the
various dialects now spoken have gradually come to exhibit the
differences which characterize them.
6. Thus, the Englishman and the German both use the words
sinQj sang (jing', fang) in the same sense, because each has
received them with this sense by uninterrupted tradition —
going down from father to son just as language goes nowadays
— from ancestors who lived together and differed in their talk
no more than we ourselves and our immediate neighbors. Thus,
on the other hand, the one says slay, slew, and the other fd)laG^
fc^Iug (strike, struck) — ^words originally identical in pronuncia-
tion and meaning, though now different in both — because these
words have, in the course of their tradition, become differently
altered in the on^ and the other line, in the same manner as
words ar& altered nowadays.
449. The English and German are joint members of
a group or sub-fam ly of dialects called the Germanic
(often also "Teutonic"); which, again, is a member of
a larger family, called the indo-european (also " Indo-
Germanic," or "Aryan").
450. The Indo-European family includes most of
the languages of Europe and southwestern Asia. Its
divisions are —
1. The Germanic (4:51) ;
2. The Slavic (Eussian, Polish, Bohemian, Servian,
Bulgarian, etc.) and Lithuanic;
3. The Celtic (Welsh, Irish, Gaelic, etc.) ;
451] GEEMANIC BRANCH OF INDO-EUROPEAN FAMILY. 263
4. The Italic (Latin, etc. ; and, as modern represen-
tatives of the Latin, the Italian, French, Spanish, etc.) ;
5. The Greek (ancient and modern) ;
6. The Persian (Zend, Modern Persian, etc.) ;
7. The Indian (ancient Sanskrit, Pali, Prakrit;
modern Hindi, Bengali, Marathi, etc.).
a. The resemblances and differences of these languages are
of the same kind with those of the English and German, and
due to the same causes. If, where we say six and the German
fed^§, the ancient Koman said sex, the ancient Greek hex, the
Hindu sliash, and so on, it is all for the same reason for which
both the Germans and we say sing and sang (above, 448&).
Only, in this wider family, of races whose separation is much
more ancient, the remaining correspondences are proportionally
fewer and less conspicuous, the discordances more numerous
and deeper.
6. Although relationships for the languages here named have
been surmised, and are often claimed, on a yet wider scale (for
example, with the Hebrew and the other "Semitic" languages),
they have not been demonstrated.
451. The divisions of the Germanic branch of this
great family are as follows ;
1. The Low- German, occupying the lowlands of northern
Germany. To this division belong — the English, as modern
representative of the Anglo-Saxon, which was carried into
England, and made to displace the Celtic, by the invading
tribes from the northern shores of Germany, in the fifth
century ; the Dutch, or literary language of the Netherlands ;
the ancient Saxon and Frisian, no longer cultivated ; and the
various dialects now spoken among the people in northern
Germany, whose literary language is the cultivated High-
German, or " German."
2. The ITigh - German, occupying central and southern
Germany. The only existing cultivated dialect of this division
is the one which we know as "the German" language; its
history will be given with a little more fulness farther on
(462 etc.).
3. The Scandinavian, occupying the peninsulas of Denmark
and Sweden and Norway, with the island of Iceland (colonized
264 BELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [45L
from Norway in the ninth century). Its languages are the
ancient Icelandic or Old Norse, and the Norwegian, Swedish^
and Danish.
These are all the divisions represented by existing languages.
Besides them, however, is to be noticed —
4. The Gothic, represented by parts of a Gothic version of
the Bible made in the fourth century of our era in the dialect
of the Goths of Moesia (generally called, therefore, the Moeso-
Gothic), by their bishop Ulfilas. Of all the extant monuments
of Germanic language, this is by two or three centuries the
oldest, and therefore of the highest value in all inquiries into
the history of the whole Germanic family of languages.
452. 1. The more immediate connection of English
is with the Low-German languages ; but its relation to
the German is very near^ as compared with that to the
other European tongues, and the correspondences of
word, grammatical form, and meaning, between the
two are numerous and striking.
2. These correspondences — besides their intrinsic
interest, and their value as historical evidences bearing
upon the development of both languages, the relations
of the races speaking them, and the growth of ideas
and institutions among those races — have also a prac-
tical value, as a help to the scholar to whose attention
they are brought in retaining the meaning of the Ger-
man words he is endeavoring to learn.
3. It is the proper duty of a German-English dictionary to
point out in detail the English words which are to be regarded
as identical, or of kindred elements, with German words (a duty
sought to be fulfilled in the vocabulary to the author's German
Reader). But no small part of the correspondences are readily
to be discovered by the scholar himself, especially if his
researches are guided at first by a judicious and enlightened
teacher.
4 The varieties of difference, both of form and meaning,
which distinguish German words from their English correspond-
ents, are much too great to allow of their being set forth here.
To exhibit with fulness even the more important among them,
454] PROGEESSION OF MUTES. 265
and explain their reasons (so far as these admit of explanation),
would be the work of a professed comparative grammar of the
Germanic languages. There is, however, one set of differences
which are so regular in their occurrence, and which are of such
prime importance for one who undertakes to compare German
words with EngUsh, that they may not be passed without
notice.
TJie Law vf Progression of Mutes.
453. In regard to their mutes, the Germanic lan-
guages show a very peculiar set of changes as compared
with the other branches of the family ; and a part of
the Germanic languages themselves show, as compared
with the rest, another and similar, though less complete,
set of changes. These changes were first clearly es-
tablished and illustrated by the great German gram-
marian, Jacob Grimm ; and their statement is generally
called, after him, Grimm's Law — or also the law of pro-
gression or rotation of mutes (in German, the £aut*
t)erj(^tebimg pushing of sounds out of place),
454. The original mute letters of the Indo-European
languages are nine in number, and of three classes —
lingual or ^-mutes, palatal or A:-mutes, and labial or
p-mutes : each class containing a surd mute (t, k, p), an
aspirate (th, kh,pJi — more originally dh, gh, hh), and a
sonant (dy g, b). Thus —
surd.
lingual mutes t
palatal mutes k
labial mutes p
a. These aspirates are to be understood as uttered in the way
they are written— that is to say, with an h or aspiration audibly
following the mute letter which begins them : and not, for in-
stance, as we are accustomed to pronounce our th and ph. These
last are not aspirated mutes, but spirants, simple continuable
sounds, which have grown out of the aspirates, but are phonet-
ically of quite another character. Any aspirate in the Germanic
languages which had become a spirant was no longer liable to
the law of progression,
aspirate.
sonant.
dh or th
d
gh or kh
9
hh or ph
b
266 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [455-
455. It is found now that, as a general rule, in tlie
great body of the Germanic languages (Gothic, Scan-
dinavian, Low-German), each of these mutes has been
pushed forward one step in its own class, the surds hav-
ing become aspirates, the aspirates sonants, and the
sonants surds; while, in the High-German languages
(including the "German"), each has been pushed for-
ward two steps, the surds having become sonants, the
aspirates surds, and the sonants aspirates.
456. 1. This rule would in strictness require an
lingual labial palatal
original t, th, d p, ph, b k, kJiy g to have become
English thj d, t ph, b, p kh, g, k and
German d, t, ih b, p, ph g, k, kh;
but to the regularity of this result there are many ex-
ceptions :
a. Original p and k, in whole classes of words, at their first
change were converted into the spirants / and h, instead of
the aspirated mutes ph and kh, and so remained unaltered by
the second change.
6. The High-German dialects in general took the second step
of progression less completely and less strictly in the labial and
palatal than in the lingual series. In the two former classes,
some dialects, at a certain period, were more faithful to the
requirements of the rule than were others ; but, in the modern
German, the authority of these other dialects has prevailed.
Thus, for Bin he the older monuments give pirn [p for h) — and
so in a great number of other cases.
c. In the lingual series, the German has converted the aspirate
th, regularly required as the correspondent of English t, into a
sibilant, f or 3.
2. Hence, the actual correspondence between Eng-
lish and German, so far as concerns the law of progres-
sion, is in general as follows :
lingual labial palatal
to English th, d, t /, by p h, g, k correspond
German b, t, f,,^ h,\ h, f,p Ij, g, I
459] CORRESPONDENCES OF LETTERS. .267
Even these correspondences, however, do not hold strictly in
all cases : thus —
a. A mute is often protected from alteration by combination
with another letter: thus, d by n or I: as in ganb land, tt)anbern
wander, ©olb gold;—t by s, h (ch, gh),f: as in 6teln stone, §aft
haste, ^Jlad)i night, ^xa\i craft.
h. Even the oldest English and German (the Anglo-Saxon and
the old High-German) have their irregular exceptions to the
rules of correspondence; and these exceptions have become
much more numerous in later times, as each language, in the
course of its history, has suffered anomalous changes in some
of its words and letters.
457. Below are given examples of the more important cor-
respondences between German and English consonants — those
which result from the law of progression, and a few others.
458. Lingual series.
1. ^ in German answers regularly to English th: thus, ba§
that, benfen think, hid thick, bod) though, ^ur[l thirst, brei three,
S3ab hath, ^ruber brother, (Jrbe earth.
a. The most important exception is that of a b after n or I, as
noticed above (456.2a).
2. % (or t^^ : see 37) in German answers regularly to English d:
thus, ^ag day, tief deep, %dh death, i:^un do, Ilebte loved, ©ott^eit
godhead, felten seldom, 2Bort word, unter under.
a. Excepted especially is a t after f, ^, \, which (as noticed
above, 456.2a) usually corresponds to an English t.
3. The lingual sibilants in German, §, \\, §, g, often correspond
to English t: thus, h(x^, ba^ that, l)eife hot, e§ it, au§ out, Befjer
letter, gu^/oo«, ix^dtwo, gu to, '^txitide, '^al)\ tale, 3oIl to??.
a. But the sibilants are also in numberless cases the represen-
tatives of original sibilants, and are therefore found alike, or
with but slight variations, in German and English : thus, fing
sing, jo so, bte§ this, (Stein stone, (5d)am shame, Sdjnee snow,
f(5^elten scold.
459. Labial series.
1. a. 33, in German, when initial, regularly answers to English
J): thus, $gab bath, ^ruber brother, ^lut blood, ^]ebovcn born.
268 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [459-
6. In the middle of a word, or as final, it is usually represen-
ted in EngUsh by f orv: thus, ab off, of, l)arb half, taub deaf,
2Bei6 wife, lieb lief;—%aubt dove, fterben starve, jieben seven
^nabt knave, iiBer over, ^^khn fever.
2. ^ in German answers, with very few exceptions, to English
p: thus, \)a\\tn pass, ^i^ pitch, "^laQt plague, ©pie^spi^, jpringen
spring.
3. a. 5, like 5, agrees with English / when initial : thus, f aHett
fall, 5i]c^^7i, ^n^foot, fUegenyfi/, \vdfree.
b. Elsewhere in a word, it usually corresponds to English p :
thus, tief deep, ©d)Iaf sleep, auf up, reif ripe, frf)affen s/iape, l^elfen
help, merfen i^arp, offen open.
4. ^f is a peculiar German combination, occurring with great
frequency in words anciently derived from the Latin, as rep-
resenting a Latin p : thus, ^flanjc plant (Lat. planta), $f orte
dx)or (Lat. porta), ^feil arrow (Lat. pilum), ^feffer pepper (Lat.
piper), ^funb pound (Lat. pondus). But it is also found in a
good many words of Germanic origin : thus, ^pfel appZe, ^f(i(^t
i)Zigf7i<, ©(S^nepfe snipe, ppfen /top, $fro|)f prop.
460. Palatal series.
As a general rule, the letters of this series — ^namely, q, f, 5/
also n! and ng — are the same in German and English : thus,
©ott god, \)tm\]tn forget, griin green, ^aQtn wagon ;— Mi cold,
bid f/iic/c, tntrfen work, flax clear, ^nabc knave;— ^aat hair, §cr§
Tieari;— jinfen ^nfc, fingen sing.
Exceptions, however, of a more irregular kind, are very
numerous. Thus —
a. English ch is found not infrequently where the German
has !: thus, ^inn chin, ©trerfe stretch.
b. German ^ is variously represented in English, by k, gh,
tch, etc. : thus, 33u(f| book, ho^ though, leic^t light, ^ec^ pitch.
c. An original g, which the German has retained, has very
often undergone manifold corruption or loss in Enghsh : thus,
2:ag day, liege, liigc lie, mag may, 2Beg way;—Qnqtl hill, Siegel
tile, S5ogeI/oii;Z;— folgcn/oZtow, 33alg bellows, <BoxQt sorrow, borgen
borrow; — and so on.
d. §, as has been pointed out, is in German very often a mere
orthographical device for signifying the long quantity of the
neighboring vowel. Of course, where it has this character,
uothinsr corresponding with it in English i^ to be Jool^e^ for.
462] mSTOEY OF GEKMAN. 269
461. Into the discussion of the general tendencies and the
special causes which have led to the harmonies and dis-
crepancies of German and English words, and have produced
either classes of correspondences or single and apparently-
anomalous cases of difference, we cannot here enter : such sub-
jects would be in place in a historical grammar of German, or
a comparative grammar of the Germanic languages in general.
BRIEF HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE.
462. The German language is, as has been seen, one
of the dialects of the High-German sub-division of the
Germanic division or branch of the Indo-European
family of languages.
a. Every cultivated or literary language is, in the same way,
by origin one of a group of more or less discordant dialects —
one to which external circumstances have given prominence
above the rest.
h. Since unity of speech cannot be maintained over a wide
extent of country, or through a numerous community, except
by aid of the unifying influences of high civihzation and lit-
erature, it is only a matter of course that Germany, at the
beginning of the historical era, was filled with a variety of
dialects — many of which are yet far from being extinct.
c. Germany was first brought to the knowledge of the rest of
the world by the Eomans, whose attempts to conquer the
country, as they had conquered Gaul (France), proved in vain,
partly owing to the stubborn resistance of the German tribes,
partly because of the remoteness of the country, and the decay
of the aggressive force of the Roman empire. Later, nearly all
the European provinces of the empire were overwhelmed, one
after another, by roving hordes of Germans ; but these nowhere
estabhshed themselves in sufficient numbers to maintain their
own speech. Thus the dialects of the Goths, the Vandals, and
other noted German races, became extinct, by the absorption of
those races into the communities of other speech among whom
they settled.
d. The introduction of Roman Christianity, civilization, and
letters into Germany (beginning in the fifth century), the estab-
lishment of the Prankish empire under Chlodowig over nearly
270 EELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [462-
all the German tribes (about the end of that century), and its
yet more brilliant renewal under Charlemagne, three centuries
later (A. D. 742-814), produced in the country a state of things
favorable to a unity of customs, institutions, and language. It
remained then for circumstances to determine which of the
many existing dialects should win such importance in the eyes
of all the German peoples as to be accepted by them as their
literary language.
463. The history of tlie Higli-German dialects falls
into three periods:
1. The Old High' German period (5I(t^0(^beutf(^), down
to the twelfth century ;
2. The Middle High- German period (3J?itte(I)od^beutf(i)),
covering four centuries, from the beginning of the
twelfth to the time of Luther ;
3. The New High-German period (S^eu^odjbeutfd^),
from the Reformation down to our own days.
464. 1. The Old High-German period commences
with the eighth century; from which, however, only
fragments have come down to us.
a. As the oldest of these is regarded the Hildbrandslied, a
pre-Christian poem, in the alliterative verse which appears to
have been the original form of poetic expression of the whole
Germanic race.
2. The literature of this period is chiefly Christian,
and consists of versions from the Latin, collections of
words or glosses, paraphrases and comments of Scrip-
ture, and the like.
a. The most noteworthy productions of this class are Otfried's
Krist (A. D. 868), a harmony of the four Gospels, in the first
rhymed verse; a prose version of Tatian's harmony of the
Gospels, of about the same period; the works of the monk
Notker (about A. D. 1000) and his school, especially his prose
version and explanation of the Psalms ; Williram's (about A. D.
1075) prose paraphrase and explanation of Solomon's Song.
465] HISTOEY OF GERMAN. 271
6. Besides these, there are a few songs, forms of imprecation,
and other like remnants of a more popular and native class of
productions.
3. The leading Old High-German dialect was the
Frankish, as being the language of the ruling race and
dynasty; but there was no prevailing literary dialect
accepted through the whole country ; each writer used
his own native idiom.
a. Other dialects represented in this period are the Aleman-
nic and Swabian, and the Bavarian and Austrian.
465. 1. In the Middle High-German period, tlie
literary dialect was the Swabian.
a. Because it was the court-language of the empire under the
Swabian emperors, Conrad and Frederick Barbarossa and their
successors (A. D. 1138-1268).
h. The grand difference distinguishing the language of the
Middle period from that of the Old, is the reduction of the
former full and distinct vowels of the endings of words to
the indifferent and monotonous e. Thus, gebe I give was in the
first period gihii, geben to give was geban, gijc^en to fishes was
viscum, blinbe^ blind (neut. sing.) was hlindaz, blinben (gen. pi.)
was blindono, and so on. In this respect the Middle and New
High-German stand nearly upon the same level.
2. The literature is abundant and various, and of a
very high order of merit.
It may be divided into —
a. The works of the Mlnnesdnger (love-singers)^ of whom more
than three hundred are more or less known. Some of the
most eminent among them were Hartmann von Aue, Wolfram
von Eschenbach, Heinrich von Ofterdingen, Walther von der
Vogelweide, and Gottfried von Strassburg. They wrote songs
of love and chivalry, epics (chiefly founded on French and
Provengal subjects), didactic poems, fables — almost everything
excepting dramas.
b. The popular legendary epics, new workings-up of stories —
half-mythical, half-historical — which had long been current
among the German races, and even in part belonged to the
whole Germanic race. Their authors are unknown. Chief
272 RELATION OF GERMAN TO ENGLISH. [465-
among them is the Lay of the Nibelungen (^^ibelungenlieb), a
magnificent poem ; others are (SJubrun, and the lesser tales
which make up the §elbenbu(f) (Book of Heroes).
c. The works of the 2}leifterfdn9er (master-singers). These
were poets by trade, organized into guilds, and carrying on their
handicraft in a very regular and very uninteresting manner, in
the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries (and later), after the
decay of the national literature which had flourished under the
Swabian emperors. Their productions have mostly gone into
merited oblivion.
466. During the time of literary depression which occupied
the last century or two of the Middle period, the foundations
were laying for the New. The wearing-out of the feudal system ;
the rise of the cities to importance and wealth ; the awakened
sense for Art, both in architecture and in painting ; the estab-
lishment of universities ; the impulse given to classical learning
through Europe in consequence of the capture of Constantinople
by the Turks ; the invention of printing, which put literature
within the reach of a vastly increased class — all these circum-
Btances prepared the way for a national culture which should be
as much wider and deeper-reaching than that of the preceding
period, as this than that of the first. And whereas in the Old
period literature had been the property chiefly of the church
and the priests, with complete diversity of dialects ; and, in the
Middle, the property of courts and the great, with acknowledged
pre-eminence of the court-dialect ; so now it was to be shared
in by the great body of the people, and to possess for its use
something like a true national language.
467. Tlie New High-German period begins with the
grand national movement of the Reformation, and es-
pecially with the writings of Luther.
a. The dialect which Luther used was not a continuation of
the Swabian, which had long since sunk into insignificance,
while each author had again begun to write in his own idiom ;
nor was it the precise spoken language of any part of the
country : it was, as he himself states, the language of public
affairs in Saxony, and used by the various courts throughout
Germany. It had grown up in - measure on paper, in learned
and literary use, and united in itself some discordant dialectic
elements.
469) HISTORY OF GERMAN. 273
6. It was the nationality of Germany that created the pos-
sibility of a national language ; it was the excited and receptive
state of the national mind at the time of the Reformation, the
inherent force and vigor of style in the writings of Luther and
his coadjutors, the immense and immediate circulation which
they won among all classes of the people, and the adoption of
his version of the Bible as a household bock through nearly
the whole country, that gave to the particular form of speech
used by him an impulse toward universality which nothing has
since been able to check or interfere with. It has become more
and more exclusively the language of education and learning, of
the courts, the pulpit, the lecture-room, the school, the press :
and in the large towns and cities it has to some extent extir-
pated or deeply affected the old popular dialects, which are
now hardly met in purity except among the rude country
population. Thus —
468. The language of Luther, not a little modified
in spelling, utterance, and construction, and greatly
enriched by new formations and additions, is now the
speech of the educated in all Germany (both High-
Germany and Low-Germany), and therefore entitled to
be called the German language.
a. To illustrate the alteration which it has undergone during
the three centuries and a half of its existence, is here added
Luther's version of the Lord's Prayer, as given in his first
edition of the German New Testament (1522) : Vnstx l^ater stin
tiem ?l^imel, IBtin IXamt ^tjo f^t^liQ; IBt^n 3ancD feomej ©egn
^ilU gescfjefje auff JSvUtti toie gnit irem IB^s^ntl j Unstx UQlicf)
SSrott Qtb unnslieuttj santrberflifi uns uttsere Sci[jullre, totetoMt
unsrrnn Scfjullrifiern betBeben ; mnnti fure uns nitt mn Vtx^
sucJUTtfi; Sonlrern triose uns bon Iretn Ufiel ; 3ienit tregti ist tras
Hegcj^j ttittr trie IS^rafft, unntr trie J^erUcfeest in IStoicfeest. ^mzn*
b. The former dialects not only still subsist in Germany
among the uneducated, but their influence more or less affects
the Uterary speech, especially as regards its pronunciation ; so
that the educated even, from different parts of the country, do
not speak precisely alike.
469. To give any history of the language, its cultivation, and
its literature, during this its modern period, will not be
274 HISTORY OF GERMAN. [459-
attempted here : even to mention the names of the principal
writers who have distinguished themselves by their contribu-
tions in German to literature and science would require pages.
Such are their merits that to possess no knowledge of German
is to be cut off from one of the most important sources of
knowledge and culture within our reach.
GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER.
275
GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER.
The German written letters are as follows :
Cap.
a
Bmall. equiv't.
<^ a
Cap.
Bmall.
equiv't.
i
Cap.
small, eqniy't.
^
/
h
^
J
k
^
/
^
^
^
c
^
/
I
^/
M
/^P
J'
d
m
#^
m
^
It?
V
/
tf-
€
^
^
n
^
^^
W
^
/
f
^
<*
^
^
X
/
/
9
F
/
P
/
r
y
r
/
h
/
/
?
/
/
z
^
/
i
^
?r
r
Z'
sz
The general peculiarity reqmring especial notice in this char-
acter is the prevalence of angular instead of rounded strokes
among the small letters. Owing to this, i is distinguished from
c only by its dot ; also u from n only by the round stroke above
the former (which stroke, however, is omitted as unnecessary
when the u is modified). Further, e is distinguished from n
only by the strokes being made much closer together. For the
same reason, the a, g, o, q are not entirely closed at the top.
The use of the forms of small s corresponds precisely with
that of the two forms of the same letter in printed text : the
first is to be everywhere written for j, and the other for §.
For S2 is written a peculiar character (as shown in the table),
instead of a combination of those for s and z. Special forms of
combination of ss and si are also sometimes made.
276 GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTEB.
Examples :
'X^^^<p^.
t^f!t^
^^^^ff^»
^
»*^
7-
'^/^*.
1^5-
^^^^^^^ii^e^.
^'^ .^/^^^ t^^<f^t^-ff^/^-V^^
■e^*** 'V^^^^^^j
-CHi^-a^-^f^^i^^^i/ ^^^ ^
^*^*^
«f c^i5^^^^ ^^f^i^f^^f^ ^i^tX^H^y.
-tz-n^-v-^
7
^^^ii'^ff
'^■V^ ^;
^y/
^^^^^^y**^^i/%
GERMAN WRITTEN CHARACTER. 277
^^^^*j
/7J^ ^^^ *1t>/ff^ Hf*'^^^ e>^>k^
/M -6 ^ et>^ <A^ ^^^ *^* Jj^^*^
^* -^^^^^ ^^^^ -A^ff^P^j ^^^^ ^x;-^^
^eine.
^S«^^ ttJ.'^S^^ ^^W^^ c-^*^ ^^^^*
a* «Jd.^ M^/j^
— ^^i^ff^ Jif^
^^St*-^^^ #^i^#^ i^^^^^
/iS*»
AA^-a^ff^^^ ^^^iht2^ff-^f^^ /pp* <^^^^^*^y
^^^^ .^,
-^iX^^Jf^
^T^^^i^^ t/iif t*^^
Ooet^e.
278
IIST OF IRBEGULAR VERBS.
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR YERBS,
Including all the Verbs of the Old or Strong Conjugation.
Explanations. — In the following table are given the principal
parts of all the verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, together
with the preterit subjunctive ; also the second and third singu-
lar indicative present and the second singular imperative,
whenever these are otherwise formed than they would be in
the New or weak conjugation. Forms given in full-faced type
(thus, geBiff en) are those which are alone in use ; for those in
ordinary type (thus, bdrfft, bddt) the more regular forms, or
those made after the manner of the New or weak conjugation,
are also allowed ; forms enclosed in parenthesis are especially
unusual, poetical, or dialectic ; where two forms are given, the
one placed first (above the other) is the more usual or approved
one ; a subjoined remark gives additional explanation, if any
is needed.
The forms of the modal auxiliaries, as well as of the other
irregular verbs of the New conjugation, are included in the
List. They are distinguished by being put in ordinary type
throughout.
No verb is given in the list as a compound. If it is used only
in composition, hyphens are prefixed to all its forms, and an
added note gives its compounds.
Infinitive.
pres't indie, sing.
pret. indie.
pret. subj.
Imper.
past part.
f&aaen hake Ue.% Udi Inif Bfttc
usually of New conj., especially when transitive.
geftatfcn
sl^ftten Mn\i, =6iert
only in gcbircn hear, bring forth
sftat sftftte
', (formerly gcBcren).
=ttcr
sBoven
»elfeett hiu
Mft
blfTe
fieibiffen
Serflcn hide
Mteft, ^itfit
ibatfi
l&atfle
h\t^
ge^orgett
JBetftcn hurst
fcirftcft, btrft
Barfl
borft
Borftc
&&rftc
Blrfl
gcfcorftcn
93ie<)en hend
l>0d
f>Hc
^tbo^m
JBlcten offer
(Bcutft, bcut)
iboi
f>Mc
(Bcut)
^ihf>Un
»lttt)ett hind
}>ata>
^(int>e
^chwti^m
JBltten heg
hai
ibftte
geibeten
S^lafen hlow
aia(fe)ft, ftlftft
dlied
Ibliefe
geblafen
JBlciften remain
UU1>
U\tU
^tbiUhtn
SBleidjen hleadh
as intransitive, of either conj. ;
61t(^ bltd)c
; as transitive, of New only.
gcblt(!^en
LIST OF lEREGULAR VERBS.
279
imper. pait part.
— ^et>taten
gcbrannt
— Meftctt
— gcbac^t
sblrB sbor^en
only in wcibcrBcn perish ; which as transitive, destroy, is usually of New conj.,
Infinitive.
pre«'t indie, sing. pret. indie.
pret. subj.
SBtaten roast
Britft, brat brlct
Bricte
fBteihcn break
branntc
btftcOe
SBvenncn burn
brenntc
S3rtnctcn brin.g
except in gcbci^cn thrive.
brac^tc
obsolete.
'Mef)c
iJcnfen think
ba(^tc
bac^tc
s'bcthcn
=birbjt, =blrbt =bar6
'.iiivhe
^ingcn engage
^ve^^cn thresh
brifc^cft, brifc^t
slujiefictt (;breu^t)
only in tjerbrle|cn vex,
^ringen press — —
<Dilrfen be permitted barf, barfft, barf
men eat iffeft, Iftt
l^aJjwtt go fal)tft, fft^ti
$e(f)ten ^i?A<
fi(^it)ft fi^t
bang
(bung)
brofd^
brafc^
burfte
aft
Cneng
(bungc)
brofc^c
brif(^c
barftc
ful)te
flelc
Hcttge)
fd(f)te
brlfc^
(;breu^)
wanting
16
gcbungen
gcbrof(i)en
sbYotfen
OeMrunoen
geburft
gefal)tcn
OefaUen
ecHmen
defo<f)ten
forms of New conj. occasionally occur,
only in bcfet)Icn command, cmpfe^Ien comm,end; fe{)len/ai7 is another word,
^in^en find — — fan^ fanbe defunt>en
^Ud\im twine fll*(t)ft, flidjt ft0<f)t n<»**e flic^t flcftoditett
^ieihm apply — —- fllft ftiffe dcftiffen
antiquated excopt in fic^ beflei^cn exerf one's self.
'^lieQcn fiy
%lic^m flee
%lU^tn flov
gragcn ask
(fleugft, fteitv30
(flcuc^ft, fleu^t)
(flcu^eft, fle4t)
frug
frftgft, fragt
properly a verb of the New conj. only.
f^rrcffett devour fviffeft, ftlfet ftrafe
f^tletm /ree^e ftrot
©ftteit /ermen^ gor
also spelt gi^ren etc., with ^,
®j]feinfl^t>e fllcftft, aieftt Qah
fllbft, Q\bt
®eficn go — — ging
ISeUm be worth flUtft, flUt gttlt
only in Bcrgeffcn/or^re/.
^gcu^cfl, geu^O fidft
®ie6en
cginnen — -
only in bcglnnen begin.
tQdnn
noae
frftgc
ftafee
gore
flittfle
gaite
golte
sgdnne
soiinne
Cflcug)
(fleu^)
(fleu^)
fHft
g«t
(geu^)
0efl0l)en
geftoffen
gefragt
flcfrouctt
QCQehen
gegdlten
flegoffcn
sQonnen
280
LIST OF IRKEGULAB VERBS.
Infinitive. pres't indie, sing. pret. indie. pret. mbj.
Qleidten resembU flli* gti(i^e
usually of New conj. when transitive, make similar.
imp«r.
(Bleiten glide
®limmen gleam
®tahcn dig
©tclfcn gripe
iggfeen have
J^oltcn ho'd
^amcn hang
giitt
gtomm
gtttb
fltlff
^atte
glttte
glomme
Httc
lllno ftlttge
put part.
gegtt(^cn
gcglittcn
gcglommctt
degraben
geotiffen
ge:^a6t
sometimes confounded in its forms with ^ingcn hang (trans.). New conj.
^<iuen h,ew
j^eben raise
_ ^eiften call
^eifen chide
Bennett know
I^Ufft, ftllft
^tc6
l|ob
liff
fanntc
ttomm
I)dbe
f)ube
Jjttlfe
l)a(fe
fiffe
fcnntc
flommc
^ilf
forms of Old conj. very rare except from feeflcmmcn oppress.
SilUhtn cleave fIo6 flobc
^litnmen climb flomnt flommc —
j^Ungen sound
Hang
IlSngc
nangc
rarely of New conj., especially when transitive.
gc^aucn
0el^0ben
gcfiffen
gefannt
gcftommen
gcfloBen
geftommen
getlungctt
^neifen pinch
^nei^en pinch
.^dttt tttCtt com£,
^ornien can
SttUMn creep
S^hxtn choose
S^a'btn load
gdffC tt let
gttttf ctt >«»i
Seil)en Zend
gefCtt read
ISiegett lU
(fSmmjl, !6mmt)
fann, fanntl, fann
(frcuii^ft, freu^t)
I&bfi, labt
liefelt, Heft
only in wcrltcren lose.
fniff
fnlpp
fatn
fonnte
1X0^
for
luD
Heft
Hef
nti
la»
lag
tl0X
fniffc
fnippc
f&me
fonnte
fore
mbc
Hefte
Hefe
Wiit
Hel^e
Iftfe
sldre
gcfniffen
gcfntppctt
- defommett
wanting gefonnt
geforen
delal»m
- 0e(affen
- gclattfen
fleHUm
- geHe^en
gelefen
delegen
sloven
Hed
sHttden
slang siftnge —
sinngen
only found in gclingcn succeed, mi^IingenyatZ ; used in third person only,
j^dftfien extinguish Ilf(^cft, lifc^t lofc^ lofcf^c lif^ gelofc^cn
the forms of New conj. preferably limited to transitive meaning.
SiiA^tn lie
(leugfl, Icugt)
Idge
(Icug)
log
SFIalflen grlnb mai^ffl, maf>It muM mfl^tc
the forms of Old conj. now in use only in the participle.
avieiben shun ntleJ> ntieJ>e
SRelfen milk (mllfll, mllft) molf molfc (mtif)
gelogen
gema^len
gemiet»en
gemolfen
LIST OF IKREGULAR VERBS.
281
Infinltire.
pres't indie, sing.
pret. indie.
pret. subj.
imper.
past part.
aReffen measure
tnlffcft, mlfet
maft
mft^e
mlfe
^etneffen
ajtogen may
mag, magft, mag
mo(^tc
moiijte
wanting gcmo^t
ajJuffen must
mu^, mu^, mu&
mu^tc
mu|tc
wanting gemu^t
"^Iclintcn take
ttimmft, nimmt
ttal^m
nftl)me
nlmm
Qcnommin
^Wcnnen nam^
nanntc
nenntc
genannt
only in genefcn recover, get weU.
sna»
=nafc
— •
snefen
sntefeen
obsolete, exc
jept in gcnie^en enjoy
snofi
-.noffe
(sncu^)
sn0ffen
q^fcifCtt whistle
^fiff
»»fiffe
flc^flffen
qUHeflen cherish
Pfjog
Bflaa
Pflogc
gcpflogcn
forms of the New conj. are occasionally met with.
QcptUUn
SlucUcn gus'i qutflft, qutttt quoQ
usually of New conj when transitive, swell.
quoffe
soak.
quiU
gequoUcn
m&atm avenge
forms of Old
(rD(i)) (rcitc)
L conj. very rare, except the participle.
gcro^ctt
maiden advise ratf)ft, xm ttet^ rlet^c
New conj. forms mostly limited to the sense h^ld council.
gcrat^cn
fHeihcn rub
tUh
tUhc
aetUhcn
fHeifiCn tear
m
tm
gerifTen
mclten ride
titt
tUie
Qetitten
9fienncn run
——
rannte
(renntc)
renntc
gerannt
(gerennt)
{RlccDctt smell
(rcu(^fl, rcui^t)
t0d|
td<!)e
(reuc^)
0evod)en
fHittQcn wring
tang
tttttfl
v&nQC
tume
——
geruttden
aiinnen run
—
ttttttt
v&nm
v^nne
gevomten
atufen ca'l
very rarely (
Df New conj.
tlcf
ticfc
oetttfett
SttUfen drink
f&um, fauft
foff
faife
flefoffen
^amm suck
fog
foge
gcfogen
forms of New conj. occasional: sometimes confounded with fSugen su<:kle.
Sdftaffen create ft^uf fd)iife gcjciiaffen
generally of New conj. when meaning be bufsy, or procure.
<^^aUcn sound fc^oE fd^otte geic^otten
8f(^el)en sfdjlcljt .=T<ftoI> sfdjftije sfdie^en
only in gef;^c^en happen:
'Bdiei'^en part ^c^ieb
of New conj. when transitive, disjoin.
used in third person alone,
jc^icbc
gefcf^ieben
<S(f)einen appear
®cl)elten scold
@(^eren s'lear
<S(f)ic{>en shcve
ed)int>en fay
^(fllagcn strike
f(S^lerft, fct)lert
(f(i^cu|efl, ^(^cu^t)
fdjlftfff, fd)l.ift
f<Dlaort. fcDliiflt
frfjictt
fdialt
fdjotr
frfjllcf
f<ftJtt9
fd)iene —
|cf)dltc
fdidbe
fdjoffe
f(f) unte
fcf)(iefe
f<<)ltt9e
f(^ilt
f(J)ter
0efd)olten
gefdfoven
Oefdioffen
0cfd)unden
Ocf(f)(afcn
282
LIST OF lEREGULAR VERBS.
Infinitive. prcs't indie, sing.
pret. indie.
pret. 8ubj. imper.
past pwt.
@(^Iei(i)ett sneak
miiti
\m^^ —
deftfiUdien
e<ftleifen whet fc^Iiff fc^iiffc
in other senses than whet, sharpen, properly of New conj.
gcfc^Iiffen
&<Hleifi€n siu
^miH
mm —
fiefcftUffen
©dlUefen «?tp
f<IJloff
fcDldffe —
gefdiloffen
©djlleften shut (jc^Icufeejl; \mm fcDlofe
tdjloffe (f(^Icu^) gcfd)(0ffen
Si^Uneen sling
|(f)lanfl
fcDlftttflc
flcf<J)aingctt
edjtnei^en smite —
fcftmlfe
frfjmiffe —
flcfdimlffen
^^mclitn melt f(^mtls(cf)t, fc^miljt fd^mclj f^moljc fci^mtl
usually and properly of New conj. when transitive.
a gcfc^mcljcn
&d\nau1>ett snort
(®(»)ttlcben)
fc^nob
fc^nSbc
gefc^nofccn
©djncibcn cut
fc^nitt
fdjttltte —
0ef<f)ttittett
^dttauJ)en screw
f(i^rob
fd^robc
gcfc^roben
r @<f)rctfctt be afraid fi^rtcfft, f(^rictt \^tat
' "g* — of New conj. as transitive, ^pAfew.
ft^rSfe florid
gefc^rodcn
@cl)teilben wnTe — —
jOttUh
fdjtlcbe
eemtieUn
@(f)teien cry
frfiric
fdjHec
Oefd)tieen
ecDteiten «<ncte
f«titt
fcDHttc —
ficfdnrlttm
@cl))t)ftten suppurate (fc^retcrfl, f(^tt)iert]
1 fdltt»dr
fdltodire
TdittJttte
oef(()tt>o«en
regularly of New conj. as transitive, silena
|<Dtt»ie8C
flef<fttolcfiett
^ai\»eUen swell f(^wiafl, f(i>njiat
of New conj. as transitive.
fc^TOOtt
fcbaollc fdjwia gcf^aollen
@d|kt>immen swim
fdtlvatnttt fd)tt>dmtne —
0efd)kt>ommen
®(l)to>inbm vanish
fdjttiftnbe
f(()kputtt)e
fief(()tt)un^en
@(4tt)in0en swing fdltvano fd)U>anoe
\S)W\nQen furnish with wings is of the New conj.
0efd)tt>un0en
@d)ltidtett «wear
fdjIVOY
fdltvute
0ef(l)t«0ven
ge^cn «e« nenft, ffcHt
frt^
fft^e fie^
oefe^cn
^n 6e Mn, Mft, ift k.
tvav
te»fttr« fcl
gelDcfen
©cnbcn «cnd
fanbtc
fenbetc
fenbete
gefanbt
gefenbet
®lebm6oi7
fott
ficbetc
gefotten
gingcn «tnf7
fattfl
fftttge —
flefMttflen
©infCtt stnfc
fant
fftnfe —
gefunfett
^innm think
fann
fonnc
fannc
fafee —
gcfonnen
_gj^ett*«
f«ft
flcfeffm
©oaen shall foU, foH^ foff
foUte
folttc wanting gefollt
rarely of the New conj.
fplc
fplec
gefpiecn
^pinnen spin —
Spann
\ponne —
ip&nnt
eef»»0ntteit
^iifUi^cn split —
fpUB
fpUfie
gefpltffen
^^pV^Oim speak f^tld)ft, fM*l
f^rad)
\pv&aif f|>ti<^ ^e^ptoOtcn
LIST OF IKREGULAR VERBS.
283
Infinitive.
pres't indie, sing.
pret. indie.
pret suiij.
imper.
past part.
^pxitfitn sprout
(fpreuleft, fpreu^t) ^ptofi
T^tdfTe
(fprcu^)
flcl^tDfTcn
e^tringen spring
f>>tan0
f^Jtranee
6e\pvunQcn
<Stccf)cn prick
f«<D(4, fU*t
ftdd)
ftftcfie
ftlcf)
geft0<l)cn
BUden stick fttcffl, fticft jlaf ftafc
usually of New conj., especially when transitive.
Pit!
gcftorfcn
gt^hen stand
ftattb
ftttttb
ftattbe
Itunbe
fiefttttt^eti
eUfflcn steal
fticDlft, fUel^U
W
ftdrne
ftadie
ftieDl
0eft0l)len
gteigen ascend
ftleg
mcfle
deftiegen
^Utifen die
mvm, ^itht
ftata
fttttbe
ftat^e
ftltl^
fleftotaen
<SiUf>en disperse
ftob
ftd^e
fleftoOm
@«ttfCtt stink
ffanf
Cftunf
ftftnfe
ftitnfe)
geftunten
^t0ficn pmh
fid6(ef3t, fidfet
ftiefi
fticfee
geftofeett
®ttei(f)en stroke
itvim
fttljfte
oefttidjen
Strcttcn stHve
fitltt
fttltte
gefttlttctt
2;i)uit do — —
— > the pret.- indie. tt)at is common
tl)at t^ate
L in dialectic German, <
3specially as auxiliary.
%ta^m carry
traflit, tv&qi
ttUQ
tuttfle
octragen
Xtt^cn hit
tm% um
ttaf
it&U
tHff
gettoffcn
2:veil>cn drive
ttUb
tviebe
Qcitiehen
3:tcten tread
ttiitSt, itiit
itat
it&U
mtt
gettetm
atlcfen dHp
mm, tteuft)
troff
ttoffc
(trcuf)
gctroffen
^tinUn drink
— —
itant
Cttttttf
tirftttfe
ituttfe)
gcttunfen
Z^tuaen deceive
iV0e
Itdflc
g^itogen
SSI(i(()fen grow
n)ic^(fc)fl, wii^fl
t»nm
to)u*fe
gett)ad)fen
aSSftden wngh TOog
sometimes of New conj. ; compare ^wegcn
word.
njcgc
and ttjicgcn
;, which
gemogen
are the same
SSafdien wash
ruMc^lOfl, ttjifc^t
ttJUfdl
wttfdie
gekt>af(f)en
aS^eticn weare
mob
mobc
gcmotcn
smegen =n?og :^icoge swogcn
only in feeiuegen, which is of New conj., except in the sense induce.
SSeidien yield luid^ lutd^e
of New conj. when meaning so/?en (as trans, or intrans.)
Sfteifen show
SJBcnfccn turn
S&cthm sue
SESet)>en become
Fcr^cn throw
SSiegen weigh
— tolled
ttjanbte
itjcnbctc
tpavb etc.
tt>atf
ttJlcfe
wcnbetc
tttuvbe
lv(i¥lie
tDutfe
tviivfe
luogc
lt>i«ft
tt»itf
gcwtc^en
getviefen
gewanbt
gewcnbct
geuiovlben
getDOV^en
getttotrfen
the same word with toftgcn and swegen : wlegen rock is of New conj.
gcwogcn
S&itt^cn wind
toant)
toantt — - gclpun^en
284
LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
Infinitive.
pres't Indic. sing.
pret. indie.
pret. Bubj.
imper.
past part.
st»innm —
only used in gewlnncn win.
t\o(tnu
stvunne
~
det90ttnen
2Biffen know
wei^, wti^t, »cl^
wu|te
v>mt
gcnju^t
^ "^oaen will
roiU, iDittft, Witt
n^ottte
rcotttc
gewottt
3eir)en accuse
Sie^
jicUc
flejieftcn
3i«Jjctt ^'"O"'
{m^% Itn^t)
300
S^de
(aeu(i^)
flejdgeii
3tDin0en .force
%t»am
jtt»anfle
OeslDuttden
EXERCISES.
FIRST SERIES.
EXERCISE 1.
AKTICLES AND NOUNS OF 1st DECLENSION, 1st CLASa
[63-65 and 68-80.]
Vocabulary.
ber iBater
ihefaik&r
ber 33rubcr
the brother
bie abutter
the mother
bie jtoc^ter
the daughter
ber ?e^rer
the teacher
ber @d)uler
the pupil
ber %m
the apple
ber SSoget
the bird
ber ©arten
the garden
bag 3in^n^er
the romti
bag SO^effer
the knife
ber $?oP
the spoon
bag ^tofter
the cloister, monastery bag ©ebciube
the building
ber (Sngtcinber
the Englishman
bag S5og(ein
the little bird
utib
and
bag 3«abc^en
the girl
(Present tense of the verb
{)aben have, see
239.)
1. ^er S3ruber be§ ^aterg. 2. ^ie ^od^ter ber SD^iitter.
3. (Sinen Server beg SOf^dbc^enS. 4. ^ie ^ebaube be§ ^Hofter^.
5. ^lelBogtein beg J^^idbc^eng. 6. 2)er ^ater ^t bie ^ipfel.
1. $at ber ©c^iiler ein SlReffer? 8. SDer Sel^rer \(\i bie SO^effer
ber ©driller. 9. ^er,Sel)rer ^ai ein Bintmer. 10. ^ag ^lofter
!^at einen Garten. 11. ^ie Wab6)txi §aben bie Wz\\tx unb bie
Soffet. 12. ^er S3ruber ^at ben ^(pfel be§ ©c^iilerg unb tia^
^effer be§ ©nglduberg. 13. S[)ie SJiutter :^at einen SSoget.
14. ^ie Qimmer unb (Smarten beg S^lofterg. 15. $aft bu eine
^oc^ter? 16. 3c^ ^abe einen SBater unb eine SJJutter. It. S)ie
©ngldnber ^aben ©drten unb ©ebaube.
286 IXERCISES.
n.
1. A father's daughter. 2. To the Englishman's brother
and father. 3. The mother's brother. 4 To the gardens of
the monastery. 5. Of the birds of the garden. 6. Of the
buildings of the monasteries. 7. The knife and spoon of
the teacher. 8. The little bird of the pupil. 9. The English-
man's gardens and buildings. 10. The teachers of the mon-
astery have pupils. 11. I have a brother and a father.
12. Have you the apple ? 13. The pupil has the apple and
the Englishman's knife. 14. The pupils have apples, and
the teacher has the knife. 15. I have the girl's little birds.
16. We have the teacher's room. 17. The monastery has
gardens and buildings. 18. We have brothers, mothers, and
fathers. 19. Have they the spoons ? 20. The Englishmen
have the spoons and they have the knives.
EXERCISE 2.
KOUNS OF 1st declension, 2nd CLASS.
[81-86.]
Vocabulary,
ber ®o^n
the son
ber f^reunb
thefriend
ber ©aft
the guest
bie maQb
the maid
bie ^anb
the hand
ber ^u§
thefoot
ber ^rm
the arm
ber ®c^u^
the shoe
ber S3aum
the tree
bie l^ruc^t
thefruit
U?> %\)itx [Zm'\
the animal
ber 2:{)eil [^eit]
the part'
ber 5Ro(f
the coat
bie @tobt
the city
ber 9fJlng
the ring
ber O^rring
the earring
aber
hut
in (prep. taMng (
iative) in
(Present tense of the verb fein he^ see 239.)
I.
1. ^ie ^afte finb Sreunbe ber Wwiitx. 2. ®er So^n ift ber
(^aft beg greunbeg. 3. ^ie greunbe beg Se^rerg finb ^riiber.
4. ®ie SO^agb ^at bie Siucfe ber greimbe. 5. ®ie ^f)iere ^aben
git^e, aber vo'xx '^aben §anbe, 5lrme imb gii^e. 6. !^er ©o^n
be§ greunbeg ^at einen ^()eil be§ ^Ipfelg in ber* §anb.
7. ^ie greunbe finb in ber (Stabt. 8. ^er 9iing ift in bem 8im=*
* See 66.3.
EXEKCISES.
m
mer ber SO^dgbe. 9. SDie O^rringe finb in ben §anben ber ^oc^*
ter. 10. ^er Garten beg ^ater§ ift in ber ©tabt. 11. Qn bent
(Garten finb 33dnme nnb griic^te. 12. ©inb bie (Sc^ul;e be§
@afte§ in bent dimmer? 13. ^ie Ttag^h ^at bie ©c^n§e nnb
D^Dcfe in ber §anb. 14. ^ift bn ber ©o^n be§ greunbeg?
15. 3c^ bin bie Wao^h be§ 2e§rer§. 11. SSir finb grennbe be§
^afte§ unb n)ir Ijaben grennbe in ber ©tabt.
n.
1. The fruits of the trees. 2. To the trees in the gardens.
3. To the teacher's friend. 4. Of the shoes of the maids.
5. The animal's feet. 6. The hands ; of the foot ; the arms
and the hands. 7. A part of the fruit. 8. The guest of the
teacher is the pupil's friend. 9. The son's friend is the
father's guest. 10. The guests are in the garden. 11. In
the garden (there) are animals and trees. 12. I am a friend
of the guest. 13. The pupils' coats and shoes are in the
maids' hands. 14. The maids have the daughter's room.
15. The daughter has the maid's rings and earrings.
16. Have the animals hands and feet? 17. The birds and
the animals have feet, but we have hands, feet, and arms.
18. The trees are in the city's gardens. 19. Art thou the
son's teacher ? 20. I am a friend of the father. 21. Thou
art in the garden, but we are in the mother's room. 22. The
pupil's coat is in the teacher's room.
EXERCISE 3.
NOUNS OF 1st declension, 3ed CLASS.
[87-90.]
Vocabular'i/,
ber ^am
the man
ha^ SSclb
the woman
bag tinb
the child
bag ^aii8
the house
ha^ S3ud^
the book
ha^ S3Ub
the picture
ta^ ^elb
the field
tia^ %^ai
the valley
ber Salb
iheforest
ha^ mtih
the dress
ha^ 2)orf
the village
bag S)arf)
the roof
ha^ ?anb
the land, country
ba^ @c^Io§
the castle
cin
one
gttjei
two
brei
three
t)ier
four
(Present tense of the verb gebcn give, see 236.2.)
288 EXERCISES.
1. 5Da§ 2Bet6 tft bie Tlntttx hex ^tnber. 2. ^er Wlam gtBt
bem ^Hnbe* ein ^ud^. 3. ^ie ^D^dnner ftnb in bent getbe unb bie
SSeiber finb in ben |)anfern. 4. ^a§ §au§ be§ ^ater§ ift in bem
SDorfe. 5. ®a§ S3ilb beg .gaufe^ ift in bem ^ud^e be§ ^inbe§.
6. SDie ^inber beg SDorfeS finb imf SBalbe. 1. ®eg greunbeg §aug
ift in bem X^ale, aber bag ©d^tog beg $8aterg ift in bem SSalbe.
8. §aft bu bie ^ilber ber ©c^Ioffer? 9. Sf^ gebe ben ^inbern
bie ^ilber. 10. ^at ber Wawn ein gelb? 11. ^ie brei gelber
ht^ SO^anneg finb in bem ^t)a(e. 12. 2Bir geben bem tinbe ha§>
^leib nnb bie (Sd^nt)e. 13. ©ie geben ben ^dnnern ^uc^er nnb
SBilber. 14. ^ag SSeib f)at bie griid^te. 15. SDer ^ann §at brci
^inber, gtDei (So^ne unb eine 3:od^ter.
n.
1. The castles and villages of the country. 2. To the
roofs of the houses ; of the man's fields. 3. Of the men's
clothes. 4. In the woods and to the valleys of the country.
5. Are the men in the village ? 6. The women and children
are in the village, but the men are in the fields. 7. Are the
fields in the valley ? 8. The fields are in the valleys. 9. I
tave three houses in the village and a castle in the forest.
10. Have ye a picture of the castle ? 11. I have a picture
of the village. 12. Givest thou a book to the child ? 13. I
give the children books and pictures. 14. The man gives
the women a picture of the house in the valley. 15. We
give the child two dresses and a book. 16. In the book are
pictures of the castles of the country. 17. I have four
children, three daughters and one son. 18. The friend's
house is in the city, but the fields are in the village.
19. Art thou the child of the woman ? 20. I am the friend
of the woman. 21. The child's dress is in the woman's
room. 22. The woman gives the child the dress and the
shoes.
222.1a. t65.
EXERCISES.
289
EXERCISE 4.
NOUNS OF THE 2nd DECLENSION.
[91-95.]
Vocabulary.
ber ^ilrfl
<^e prince
bie giirftin
the princess
ber @raf
the count
ber ^mht
the boy
ber @tubent
the student
ber Offisier^
the officer
ber ©efeae
the comrade
ber ^reu^e
the Prussian
ber ^ranjoje
the Frenchman
bie ^ranjoftn
the Frenchwoman
ber ^err
the gentleman
ber ®atte
the husband
bie ^rau
the woman, wife
bie @c^tt)efter
the sister
bie iBIume
the flower
bie Ut)r
the watch
nic^t
not
(Possessive pronouns mein mine, bein thine, fein his, unfer our, euer your,
it)V their or her, declined like etn : see 159.2.)
1. ^te Srau ift eine granjoftn unb i^r (Satte ift etn ^reuge.
2. !5)ie ©D^ne ber giirftinnen finb Offtgiere. 3. ©tub bie ©tuben*
ten beine greunbe? 4. Qc^ bin nid^t ber grennb be§ (Stubenten,
aber er ift mein (^efeUe. 5. 2)er ^ater be^ S^^naben ift ein (^raf.
6. ^er ^raf gibt feinem (Sot)ne eine U§r. t. ^d) gebe meinen
©(^n)eftern jtrei U^ren. 8. §aben bie granen Q3(nmen in i^ren
§anben? 9. ^c^ i)aht eine ^lume in meiner §anb, aber bie
granen ^aben bie tinmen ber S^^naben. 10. S<^ ^^^^ ^i^ ^ilber
ber giirften nnb ber giirftinnen be§ Sanbe§. 11. ^er SSater be§
Solbaten ift Dffigier*. 12. (Sr ift im ©c^Ioffe be§ giirften.
13. ^ie gilrften nnb ^rafen finb feine grennbe nnb ©efellen.
14. Tltim ©o^ne finb bie ©d)iiter be§ granjofen. 15. S)ie
gran5ofen finb nid^t bie grennbe ber ^ren^en.
^ n.
1. The boy's father is a count and his mother is a prin-
cess. 2. My companions are the count's sons. 3. The
students are Frenchmen, and their companions are Prus-
sians. 4. My mother is a sister of the princess. 5. The
gentleman's son is an ofl&cer*. 6. He is a Prussian, but his
♦ See 66.8. Offijier is 1st decl., 2f1 p.l«i?s.
290
EXERCISES.
wife is a Frenchwoman. 7. The student gives his sisters
books and flowers. 8. Has he your watch ? 9. He has the
officer's watch. 10. We are Frenchmen, but the Prussians
are our friends and companions. 11. The student's friend is
the officer's son. 12. The gentlemen are friends of the prince.
13. Are the women in your house ? 14 They are not in my
house, they are in their garden. 15. Our maids are French-
women.
/-^.^
/— '
EXERCISE 5,
NOUNS OP MIXED DECLENSION, PKOPER NAMES, ETC.
[96-108.]
Vocabulary.
hex 9^a(^Bar
the neighbor
ber ^Setter
the cousin
bcr 25octor
the doctor
ber ^rofe[for
the professor
ber ''Rame
the name
t>a^ ©tubiurn
the study
bic ®ef(f|id)te
the history
S)eutjd^tanb
Oenrmny
©c^mibt
Smith
abutter
Miller
^riebrid^"
Frederick
Maxi
Charles
©o^{)ie
Sophy
and}
also
ja
yes
nein
no
ber ^aufmann
the merchant
bie ^aufleutc
the merchants
(Present tense of the verb Ueben Zove, like, see 236.)
1. SleBft bu beine ^a^haxn? 2. Qi^ Hebe bie ^inber meineS
S^ad^barS, aber \6) liebe mehien D^ac^bar nic^t. 3. ^2)ie ©tubenten
lieben i()ren ^rofeffor, aber fie lieben i^re Stubien md)t. 4. ^te
2)octoren finb greunbe beg §errn SJiiitter. 5. ®er 9^ame beg
^imben ift griebric^. 6. ^c^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ Seamen griebricl^ nic^t.
1. ^er ^ater griebric^g ift ein greuub beg ^octorg. 8. "i^a^
^n^ ^arlg ift ehie (Sefc^i^te SDeutfc^Ianbg. 9. $evrn
ai^iiHerg $aug ift in ber ©tabt. 10. Wdm ^ettern finb im
§anfe beg §errn (Sc^mibt. 11. §aft hn bag S3nc^ ©opl^ieng?
12. 3«r nnb (Sophie ^at nteine ^iid)er. 13. Unfere grennbe finb
ntc^t ^anfknte, fie finb ^rofefforen. 14. SDie Seamen ber ^ro=
fefforen finb (Si^mibt nnb SJiiiCCer.
EXEECISES.
291
n.
1. Are your cousins merchants? 2. No, but my son is a
merchant. 3. Mr. Miller's son has Frederick's book. 4.
Frederick is in Mr. Smith's house. 5. Charles gives his
brother a history of Germany. 6. Charles is in Germany
with the professor's brother. 7. Does Charles love his
studies ? 8. He loves his studies and his professors. 9. My
neighbor's name is Smith. 10. Sophy's father is my cousin,
and Sophy is my cousin's daughter. 11. The doctor's sons
are also doctors. 12. The names of his sons are Charles
and Frederick. 13. Do you like the name of Charles ? 14.
I love Charles, but I do not love his name.
EXERCISE 6.
ADJECTIVES OF 1st DECLENSION.
[114-122.]
Vocabulary,
fc^on
heauUful
^ rot^ [rot]
red
bunt
variegated, gay flein
little, smaU
frlfd^
fresh
arm
poor
neu
new
liaBtirfi
ugly
gut
good
xoaxm
warm
fleipg
industrious
1 Ueb
dear
grofe
big
gtiidUcfi
happy
griiu
green
bie greube
pleasure
blau
blue
bie (SItern
the parents
bie Wii6)
the milk
bie Seute
the people
I
1. !5)er Staufmann ^at fc^one ^pfel unb bunte S5Iumen. 2. SDie
^inber liebeu frifc^e Wiii). 3. SDer Se!)rer gibt ben ©c^iileru
neue, fc^one ^iic^er. 4. 3n hzn ^iicl^ern finb fc^one, bunte ^itber.
5. ^ute ^iuber finb bie greube \i)xc§> £ef)rer§. 6. ©inb bie
^iuber if)reg ©oljueg tjiit unb fteigig ? 1. Qn bent Garten finb
gro^e, griine ^iiume unb blaue unb rot^e [rote] tinmen. 8. ^d)
I)abe blaue Q3(umen unb h\i ^a]i rotf)e [rote]. 9. ^ie §au[er armer
Seute finb !(ein unb fjcifttic^. 10. ^ute grauen geben avmen
Stinbcrn fcf)bne, marme ^(eibcr. 11. ^ie (Sttern guter, flei^igcr
^naben finb gliic!iic^. 12. 2icbe§ ^inb, bu bift arm, aber bu bift
gliicftic^. 13. 2)ie ©tubenten f)aben rot^e [rote] unb blaue diode.
14. S)eutfc^laub ^at gro^e, fc^bue (Stable.
292
EXEKCISES.
n.
1. Good, industrious children are the joy of their parents.
2. The mother gives her children warm fresh milk. 3. In
the garden are beautiful red apples and little blue flowers.
4. Poor little children have ugly dresses. 5. The professor's
sons are big ugly boys. 6. The child is good and industri-
ous. 7. My garden is large and beautiful. 8. I have blue
and red flowers and big apples. 9. I give warm clothes and
red apples to poor little children. 10. The trees of my
garden are large and green, but my house is small and
ugly. 11. In the town are beautiful large houses and green
trees. 12. The teachers of industrious, good boys are
happy. 13. Good teachers love their pupils and good
pupils have happy teachers. 14 The merchants have gay
new ribbons. 15. Dear friend, you have beautiful good
daughters. 16. The cities of Germany are large and hand-
some. 17. My children have good books and gay pictures.
18. Have you fresh milk ? 19. I have fresh warm milk. 20.
Good teachers have good pupils.
EXERCISE 7.
ADJECTIVES OF 2nd DECLENSION.
[118-128.]
Vocabulary.
^od)
high
niebrig
low
att
old
!ronf
sick
tt)ei§
white
fcf| tears
black
ebel
noble
reidi
rich
barm'^erijig
charitable
unartig
naughty
trage
lazy
- Pbjrf)
pretty
gotben
golden, gold
fttbcrn
silver
ha^ 53rob
the bread
ber SBein ,
the wine
bie %a\\t
the cup
felir -
very
(S)iefer this, jcncr that, declined like ber, see 165.)
1. liefer ^aum ift fe^r f)Ofi). 2. ®er ^o^e, fc^line 33aum ift
in bem gro^en Garten meine§ rcicljcu 9Zac^bar§. 3. SDiefe guten,
EXERCISES. 293
ftei^igen ^tnber finb bie ©d^iiter be§ atten Sc^rer§, 4 ^d^ c3cbe
biefem alten, franfen SOhinne guten, rotten $3ein uiib iDeigeg
^rob. 5. SSir lieben bag luei^e Q3rob, aber tt)ir Ijaben imr
fc^marjeg. 6. 3ft 'i)a§> IjiiOfd^e ^inb imartiG ? 1. ^iefeS Ijubfdje
93Zabc^eii ift unartig uiib trdge, aber jene IjdfeUc^en ^iiiber finb gut
imb Peifjig. 8. S)er (^raf ift eiu ebler 3[Raun ; er ift fet)r reid) uub
l}at fc^pne, mj^igiijlDffer, aber er ift gut uub barmljer^ig. 9. (Seine
gute_gra3i^3^*b?n armeu, franfeu ^inbern gute§ ^rob unb
luarme ^Hetbei?. --i^-^yrc^ §au§ biefe§ alten 90^anne§ ift eiu nieb^
rige§, !(eiue§ §au§ in einer grofsen, fc^oueu (Stabt. 11. ©r ift
fet)r arm, aber er ^at gtrtc; flei^ige ©ofjue. 12. !J)iefer gute (So^n
gibt feiner armeu SO^utter eiu neu5§, U)arme§ S^leib uub eine
golbene Uf)r. 13. §aben biefe armeu Seute filberue Sliffet?
14. 9^ein, fie ijahcn gute Soffe(,aber nic!^t filberue. 15. ®er fleine
(Sot)u jeneg reic^en ©rafeu ^at feine frifc^e MM) in einer filber:^
nen ^affe.
n.
1. I love these pretty little children. 2. The old father of
these little children is a poor sick man. 3. My charitable
mother gives the poor man warm clothes and good black
bread. 4. Do you love this red wine ? 5. No, but I love that
good fresh milk. 6. My rich cousin has a very pretty house
in the beautiful valley. 7. That high white castle is the
castle of his noble friend. 8. We have a little low house,
but our trees are highland beautiful and our new garden
is very large. 9. This happy man has very good, hand-
some sons. 10. These pretty little girls are his daughters.
11. My rich neighbor has silver spoons and gold watches,
but his children are naughty and lazy and he is not happy.
12. My little son has a silver cup and a silver spoon. 13.
This pretty little girl gives her poor, sick brother her gay
pictures and her pretty books. 14. My neighbor's trees are
high and beautiful, but I have a beautiful high tree in my
little garden. 15. I love the beautiful green forest and the
gay flowers and the little birds, but I do not love this great
ugly city.
294 EXERCISES.
EXERCISE 8.
ADJECTIVES USED AS, SUBSTANTIVES AND AS ADVERBS.
(
j;P?:i30.] 1
V
-Vocabulary.
has, 5(ugc
the eye
bo« §aar
the hair
bag 2)orf
the village
bie ^utte
the hut
tie ©d^leife
the bow
fd)Ie(f|t
bad
etttjaS
something
tiid^tg
nothing
ijlel
much, many
gans
whole, quite
bunfel
dark
^ctt
bright, light
Ui^«
left
rcddt
right
hh^
pale
nur
only
(Preterit tense of l^aben have, see 239.)
1 '^er 5lrme ift ber ^ruber be§ Df^eid^en. 2. ^ie (^uten (ieben
Ott^ ' ^ute, aber bie ©d^led^ten lieben nur ba§ (Sc^Iec^te. 3. 5Die
(Sd^l^ne ^atte eine jcl^one rot^e B^ofe in ber fc^i3nen §anb. 4.
§atteft bu ein gan^eS §au§ ? 5. 9^ein, aber ic^ l)atte brei gnn^
fd)i3ne gintmer im $aufe meine§ ^ater^. 6. ®r giOt bemStleinen
ettDii^ (S(i)one§, aber er gibt bem ^(ten nic^t^. 1. 2)iefe ^nme ^at
bunfleg §aar unb bunfelblaue 5tngen. 8. §at fie ein bunf(e§
ober ein ^eHeg ^leib ? 9. (Sie 1)at ein bun!eIrot()e§ [rote§] Meib
mit blaplauen (Sd^Ieifen. 10. ^a§ ^inb '^atte ein ganj !(eine§
SSogtein in ber Sinfen. 11. ^er 5(rme ^at nur eine gan^ nicb=
rige §iitte, aber ber 9^eic!^e I)at ein fc^oneg ©c^Iofi unb biele
gelber unb 2)orfer. 12. SSir fatten tiiele* bunfelrot^e [rote]
dlo\tn, aber fie fatten nur irei^e.
n-
1. The rich and the poor are brothers. 2. I love good,
but they love evil. 3. Has your little brother dark eyes ?
4 No, he has bright blue eyes and quite golden hair. 5.
His coat is dark green, but mine "j" is quite black. 6. This
whole great building is a monastery. 7. Had he anything
pretty in his right hand? 8. He had nothing new; he had
only a pale blue flower. 9. "We had many dark and light
* See 192. f 159.5.
EXERCISES.
295
dresses, but this pretty girl had only wholly black dresses.
10. The beauty has black hair and dark blue eyes. 11.
The little one is pretty, but he is very naughty. 12. The
whole village is very poor and ugly, but this little hut is
quite pretty, 13. We love the good and the beautiful.
EXERCISlfjC)
COMPAKATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE OF ADJECTIVES.
[133-142.] \'^*)'\'^^' \U^ '
Vocabulary.
(Sttgtanb
England
(Suro|)a
Europe
gran!reid^
France
bie @(^tt)ei3
Switzerland
bic ?iUe
the lUy
bag 3Seitc^cu
the violet
!tug
clever
ftotg
proud
alt
old
iwng
young
m
sweet
oft
often
nodf (adv.)
stm
al6
than
^ 1. 5Deine ^(umen ftnb fd^on, atier meine Dftofen ftnb nod§ fifjoner.
2. ®te fi^onften Otofett finb in unferem (Smarten. 3. %tx %xo\ i'ft
reic^er al§ ber ^rofeffor, aber ber ^^aufmann ift am alterreic^ften.
4. ^ie @o^ne be§ ^rafen ftnb fcl^oner uub ftoljer aB meine
©b^ne, aber meine (So^ne finb nm beften unb am Hiiijften. 5. ^Oii
ber ^raf aucf) jiingere <Sb()ne ? 6. (Sv I^at nnr brei ©of)ne ; ber
Slltefte ift Df filler, ber ^iingere ift ©tnbent, aber ber Qiingfte ift
nocl^ jn ,§anfe. Y. ^Die 3fiofe ift fc^oner al» bie Sitie, aber \>^^ SSeit:=
d^en ift bie fd)onfte ber 331nmen. 8. ^ie 5lrmen finb oft gliic!licf)er
at§ bie 3^eic^en, aber bie ^nten finb am at(ergliic!licl)ften. 9. ^^ie-
fe§ ayjabc^en ift i^iet btaffer al§ i^re ©c^mefter. 10. 3a, fie ift
!ran!, aber bie fleine ift noct) !ran!er. 11. ©iefer ^nabe ift ^i)c^ft
unartig, er ift t)iel fcl^lec'^ter at§ feine jiingeren ^riiber. 12. ^leine
^naben finb oft artiger al§ ditere. 13. Qd^ liebe meine gi^eunbe
fe^r, aber irf) liebe am meiften * meine ^riiber unb meine
©(tern. 14. grantreic^ ift !(einer al§ ^eutfc^lanb, aber bie
©c^meij ift \iQi^ !(emfte Sanb ($uropa'§. 15. granfreid) unb
^eutfd^tanb finb gro^e unb reid^e 2dnber, aber ^ngtanb ift am
allerreid^ften.
*See 363.26.
296 EXERCISES.
n.
1. This child is larger than his brother, but Charles is
the largest 2. Charles is better than the older pupils, but
Frederick is the most industrious of the boys. 3. These
younger boys are cleverer than the older ones. 4 The
reddest apples are the prettiest, but these green apples are
sweeter than the red ones. 5. These flowers are very bright
and pretty. 6. Yes; but the pale red roses are prettier, and
these blue violets are the prettiest flowers in my garden.
7. The rose is the most beautiful flower, the lily is the
proudest; but the violet is the prettiest of all. 8. England
is a smaller country than Germany, but the Englishmen are
prouder and richer than the Germans. 9. Is Switzerland
larger than England? 10. No; Switzerland is still smaller
than England. 11. These poor children are sick and un-
happy, but the smallest one is the most unhappy. 12. She
is poorer and sicker than her brother, and she is also the
youngest. 13. The biggest of these girls is ugly; but
the younger is prettier, and the youngest is the prettiest.
14. She is quite beautiful. 15. We love our friends more
than our teachers. 16. I love the rose more than the lily,
but I love the violet most.
EXERCISEVIO/
PEKSONAL PKONOUNS.
[149-156.]
Vocabulary.
mlt (prep, with dative) with Don (prep, with dative) of, from
bag @tii(f the piece tie glajc^e the bottle
(Preterit tense of fein 6e, 239.2.)
L
1. Stebt btefcgraut^re^inber? 2. ^a, fie liebt ftc unb fie
Itebett fie. 3. ©ie lieben S^re ©o^ne, ahtx fie lieben ©ie nid^t.
4. (^tbt 3!)nen 3^r 35ruber bie§ ^u^ ? 5. 9^ein, meine ©c^trefter
gi6t e§ mir. 6. §atte er bie geber? 1. ®r ^atk fie in ber
§anb. 8. SSarft bu im Garten ? 9. ^^ wax mit i^m im (Garten.
10. §aben (Sie bie ^ilber Don Q^ren ^inbern in biefem ^nc^c?
11. 3^ ^abe fie barin. 12. 3d) gebe fie Q^nen. 18. Uaxl, bu bift
EXEKCISES. 297
ein fci^tei^ter ^nabe, aber ©opf)ie unb griebrid), i^r feib gute
^inber. 14. 2Bir fiiib (Sc^meftern unb tDir lieben un§. 15. Sd^
gebe euc^ biefe gtpei 5ipfel 16. ©inb ©ie fein ^ruber ?
17. 3d) Un e§. 18. $atteft bu ben Soffel? 19. 3c^ ^atte
xf)n in ber recr)ten §anb. 20. ^ibt er bir ein ©tiicE bon
feinem 93robe? 21. @r gibt mir ein ©tiic! babon nnb and) eine
giafdje 3Sein*. 22. ®a§ 9[)^ab(^en n)ar mit mir in ber ©tabt,
nnb i^r ^rnbcr n^ar anc^ mit nn§. 23. ®r tnar gliidlii^, nnb
Wix rtjaren e§ au(i). 24. (S§ n)aren t)iele Sente in ber ©tabt.
n.
1. Dost thou love me, my brother ? 2. I love thee and
thou lovest me. 3. Does his sister give him the flowers ?
/- 4. She gives them to him. 5. Was your sister in the garden
' too ? 6. She was with me in the garden. 7. Children, were
you good and industrious ? 8. We were so. 9. I have a
picture of you in my book. 10. No, it is not in it; it is in
my hand. 11. This picture is not a picture of me, it is a
picture of my mother. 12. There were many pupils in the
school. 13. Were you a pupil of the old man ? 14. I was.
15. I have a picture of the Englishman in my room. 16. I
was in your room, but it was not in it. 17. Have you the
apple ? 18. I have it and a piece of bread also. 19. Do
you love her or me ? 20. I love her, but I do not love you.
21. Your friends love you and you love them, but I do not
love you. 22. I have your pen and I give it to you. 23.
Were these boys with you in the monastery? 24. They
were with us, but we do not love them. 25. Have you the
bottle of wine in your hand ? 26. I have it in it. 27. That
girl has my ring. 28. No, she hasn't it ; your brother has it.
EXERCISE 11.
POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS.
[157-171.]
Vocabulary,
hex Ol^cim Ihe uncle ber S5ormunb the guardmn
ble Xantt the aunt baS jttjeater the theatre
bag ^ferb ihe horse ber ^unb the dog
ber S3rief the letter ha^ ^piti the game
* 2ie.5a.
298
1. 6tnb bte SDlcintier Sreunbe t)on Q^nen? 2. ®er tft mein
Ofjeim, unb jener ift rnetn ^ormunb. 3. ©inb biefe jtuei ^ferbe
bie feinigen ? 4. ®a§ ift mein ^ferb, aber jeneg tft ein ^ferb beg
$errn ©d)mibt. 5. ©ein ^ferb ift grofser ai§> ba§ meinige, aber
bag 3§rige ift am grogten. 6. SSaren ©ie in ber ©tabt ? 1. ^c^
tt)ar in Berlin mit bent (S^rafen unb einent greunbe beffelben.
8. ©eine greunbe finb nic^t bie nteinigen. 9. SSir maren im
^^eater mit feiner ^ante unb beren ^itbfc^er ^^oi^ter. 10. !5)a§
ift ein fc^bneg ^^eater. 11. Unfere S^inber unb bie unfereg ^ad^^
barg finb ©(filler ieneg Tlanm^. 12. Tldm ^inber finb bie
greunbe ber feinigen. 13. (Sie finb in berfelben ©c^ute unb ^aOen
immer biefelben ^iic^er unb biefelben ©tnbien. 14. Wnn §unb
unb ber meineg D^eimg raaren mit mir im SSalbe. 15. SD^einer tvav
gan§ unartig, aber ber feinige ift ein ()iibfrf)er, artiger $unb.
16. ©inb bie ^tnei ^riefe bein ? 17. ^er ift mein, aber jener ift
ber beinige. 18. SDag^inb bie ^riefe meineg D^eimg.
n.
1. Were you in Berlin with your brother ? 2. I was in
BerHn with my friends and those of my brother. 3. Our
friends are always the same. 4. I love his and he loves
mine. 5. Is this your dog or that of your uncle ? 6. My
uncle's dog is much handsomer than that. 7. Had you your
horses or your guardian's ? 8. We had my guardian's, his are
much better than ours. 9. This is my horse, but that is my
brother's. 10. This boy was in the forest with our neighbor
and his son. 11. He (that one) is a pretty little boy. 12.
Have you my letter or my aunt's? 13. I have our letter
and yours and hers. 14. I give you them. 15. That is his,
but I have also a letter from my mother. 16. I have a pic-
ture of her (the same). 17. I do not like dogs. 18. Yours
are bad, but your uncle's are the worst.
^ It,!, Yll
J'^-O^
(oaJ-j^) exeecises. 299
EXERCISE 12.
mrEEROGATIVE, RELATIVE, AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
/
[172-195.1\
Vocabulary,
geftern
ber abater
ber ^aijer
®ott
yesterday
now
the painter
the Emperor
Ood
^eute
berii^mt
bag ®etb
ha^ S^atl^auS [9tat^aug]
ta^ portrait*
to-day
famous
the money
1 the town-hall
the portrait
1. 2Ber ift btefer $0?ann? 2. ©r ift berfetbe,t ber geftern ^ter
ttjar. 3. SSem gebeu ©ie ben ^^rief , '^tw ©ie in ber §anb IjaBen ?
4. 3c^ gebe i^n bemienigen, ben ic^ am meiften Hebe. 5. SSer
!ein (S^elb ^ai, ift gtiicflic^er aB berjenige, ber feine greunbe %at
6. SDer, ber mic^ nic^t liebt, ift nic^t mein greunb. T. SSa§ fiir
ein Wamx ift fein ®aft? 8. (£r ift ein jnnger WoXtx, beffen
^ilber fe^r beriif)mt finb. 9. ©inb feine ^ilber fdjbner aB bie
be§ altcn Waltx^, ber geftern ^ier xoax ? 10. 2)er ift anc^ ein
beriif)mter Wa\tx, aber ber fiingere ift am beriif^mteften. 11.
2BeIcf)e ^ilber finb Don Sfjrem grennbe ? 12. ^a§ portrait be§
^aifer§, inelc^eg im 9^atr)^au§ ift, ift Doni^m. 13. SSelc^ ein
fc[)one§ Q3ilb ! 14. SSeffen finb biefe ^ferbe ? 15. (5^ finb bie
^ferbe be§ jnngen Dffi^ier^, ber je^t in nnferem §anfe ift.
16. 28er foIcl}e ^ferbe f)at, ift ein ^Uic!lic!)er. IT. SSer gtbt nn§
a((e§, mag \mx \)(\im\ ? 18. SE)er gnte ©ott gibt un§ a((e§, n)a§ unr
^aben. 19. (Sibt bcin ^ormnnb bir ettna§(Sd)bne§? 20. ©r gibt
mir immer tiiele fdjone (Sad[)en, aber er gibt mir '^eute nid^t^
9^eue§.
n.
1. From whom is this letter ? 2. The letter which you
have in your hand is from my sister who is now in
Germany. 3. In -which city is she ? 4. She is in the same
city in which I was. 5. Whom do you love? 6. I love
those who love me and who are my friends. 7. He who
* Pronounced, and often written, ^^ortriit. f 434. 437«
300
EXEKCISES.
has no friends is unhappy. 8. Whose horses have you ?
9. I have the horses of my uncle who is now sick. 10. He
is at the house of the doctor whose best friend he is.
11. What sort of pictures have you in your book ? 12. That
is a picture of the painter whose portraits are so famous,
and this is a picture of our good Emperor whom we love
so much. 13. What a pretty book! 14 Whoever has
money gives something to the poor who have nothing.
15. This good man gives all he has to the poor and sick.
16. What does he give them? 17. He gives them warm
clothes which rich people give to him. 18. He who has no
friends is more unhappy than he who has no money.
19. Those who do not love me are not my friends. 20. Whose
children are we? 21. We are the children of God, who
loves us and who gives us all we have. 22. Some have
much money and some have no money. 23. Several of my
friends were in our house to-day. 24. We have many fine
pictures in our town-hall, but the portrait of the Emperor
is the finest.
EXERCISE 13.
CAKDINAL AND OKDINAL NUMEEALS.
[196-203.]
Vocabulary.
bcr ^ag the day
ba§ 3a^r the year
bie 3JJinute the minute
bic SBod^e the week
3anuar January
9Rar5 March
9Jfai May
3uli July
(September September
9'Jot)ember November
bie 9Jiar! warfc (coin worth 24 cts.)
ber Wonat
the month
bie @tunbe
the hour
ber @eburt«tag
the birthday
bie 53ibUott|e!
the library
?^ebruar
February
5tt)rit
April
3uni
June
STuguft
August
October
October
2)ecember
December
1. §eute tft ber fiinf unb ^mangigfte Wcix^, Ci^i^^f)n ^unbett
fteben unb ac^tjig. 2. SDa§ Sn^r ^nt 12 Womtt, ieber Womi
EXERCISES. 301
^ai 30 ober 81 ^age, jeber Xac^ Ijat 24 (Stunben, itnb jebe (Shmbc
i)at 60 ar^iuuten. 3. Wdx^^ ift ber britte monai be§ 3a[)re^.
4, ■ efterii iDiir ber 16te 3:at3 b,e§ 9teii 9[)toiiat§ be§ 25fteu 3al)re§
meineg Sebeiig. 5. 9[)?ein (^etuirt^tag ift ben 9teu gebruar,
ber beine ift ben 29ften ^^(ut3uft. 6. SSie uiele ^iid)er ^aben ©ie
in ^i)XQX ^ib(iot()e! ? 7. ^d) ijahc ungefdftr 2450 S^iic^er, aber
ntein Oljeim ^at t)iele 3:anfenb ^iicl^er in feiner ^ibliot^e!.
8. SSir finb brei ^riiber, ^Boijut eine§ ^ater§, ber erfte ift 20
Sa^re alt, ber 2te ift 18 3al)re nit, ber 3te ift in feinem 16ten
3a^re. 9. SSir maren ben 25ften Quli 1878 mit unferen 10 ^in^^
bern in Berlin. 10. ^ie brei alteften ber Sl^inber finb ^naben,
\)a§> t)ierte unb fiinfte finb ^IRcibcl^en, nnb bie fiinf anberen finb
nnc^ ©o^ne. 11. ®er ^eic^e ^at 1,000,000 maxl* aber fein
armer 9^acf)bar t)at fein (S^elb.
n.
1. Yesterday was the 16th of July, 1887. 2. Was yester-
day your birthday? 3. No, my birthday is the 19th of
November, and my sister's birthday is the 6th of February.
4. I have three sisters, the first is 25 years old, the second
is 22, and the third is in her 20th year. 5. June is the 6th
month of the year. 6. The year has 12 months, 52 weeks,
and 365 days. 7. The Emperor's birthday was the 22nd of
March. 8. He is 90 years old, and his son is 48. 9. In the
city's library are 52,973 books. 10. Have you much money?
I had many thousand marks, but now I have only 57 marks.
11. My guardian is very rich ; he has 5,787,320 marks.
12. Whose are these seven children? 13. Two are my
brother's children, and the other five are mine. 14. July 4th,
1776. 15. Oct. 17th, 1519.
EXERCISE 14.
SIMPLE FORMS OF VERBS.
[231-237.]
Vocabulary,
like Uebcn conjugate : like geben conjugate :
njo^ncn dwell, live fel^en see
malen paint lefcn read
* 211.2.
3(^2 EXERCISES.
faufcn hay fru^er formerly
njiinfcl^cn vyish, ward ber ^ut the hat
toeit (conj.), becaiise alS (conj.), when
(See 386.46, 434.)
1. SSer gab gotten ha^ SBuc^ ? 2. Qdi gab e§ i^tn, trett id) i^n
liebte. 3. SSo tDoI)nen 3§re greunbe ? 4. (Sie mo^nten frii^er in
ber ©tabt, aber fie tDo^nen je^t l^ier im SSalbe. 5. 2Ba§ fauftc
bie grau, al§ ber S^aufmann ^ier wax ? 6. ©ie !aufte 9ftocfe unb
§iite fiir i^re ^^inber. 1. 2Sa§ fiir ein S3uc^ lefen ©ie ? 8. (Sr
liegt eine ^efc^ic^te Don 2)eutfd£)Ianb. 9. ®ib fie mir, icl^ lefe fie
aud^. 10. 2Sa§ fagte er, al§ (Sie e§ i^m gaben? 11. (Sr fagte
nic^tg, tueit ic^ if)n nic^t fa§. 12. 2Sa§ fie^ft bu, ge(iebte§ ^nb?
13. 3d§ fe^e jtDei fcljon gemalte ^ilber. 14. 2Ser malte ha§> '^ox^
trait Don S^^^itt Skater? 15. !5)er junge 93laler, ber in nnferem
§aufe tvo^nt, malte e§. 16. (Sage mir \va§^ bu miinfi^eft, unb id^
gebe e§ bir. IT. ^ib mir nid^t§, id) ^abe aEe^ tva^ id^ tt)iinfrf)e.
18. SSa§ fur ein ^ilb malten ©ie ? 19. 3d^ malte ein ^ilb \)on
bem §aufe ujorin id^ Wo^m,
n.
1. Love me because I love you. 2. Why did you give her
your picture ? 3. I gave it to her because she loved me.
4. What did you say to the merchant when you saw him ?
5. We bought books and pictures. 6. What sort of books
are you reading ? 7. I am reading the history which my
uncle gave me. 8. Eead it and give it to me. 9. This
painter lived seven years in Berlin, but now he lives in our
city. 10. He paints very beautiful pictures. 11. He painted
the portrait of the Emperor which you saw in Berlin.
12. This rich man bought the j^icture which I saw. 13. We
saw the Emperor the 15th of February 1879, when we were
in Berlin. 14. What did he want ? 15. He wanted nothing
more, he bought all he wanted. 16. I am cold because I
have no hat. 17. Buy a hat while the merchant is here.
18. I do not buy a hat because I have no money. 19. Give
EXEKCISES.
303
me money. 20. I have three loved and loving daughters.
21. Thou mayest love, he may live, you might paint, he
might see, we may read, give, he might buy, we might
see, you may paint.
EXERCISE 15.
SIMPLE AND COMPOUND POEMS OP THE AUXILIAEIES.
[238-244.]
Vocabulary.
ber ©cnerat
the general
ber ®otbat
the soldier
ber ^ru^Ung
the spring
ber ^erbft
autumn
ber @ommer
summer
ber SBinter
winter
blc 3a^re§5eit
the season
ha^ better
the weather
fatt
cold
^eiB
hot
fu^t
cool
3ufrieben
contented
tobt [tot]
dead
njenn, conj.
if, when
JU, adv.
too
gu,prep. (with dative or inf
1. S)tefe ^inber ttiurben fran!, tnetl fie feine tDarmen f^Ieiber
l^atten. 2. (jDa§ SSetter ttiirb je^t fii^tejJMub bie ^inber merben
gefunb. 3. ^nt @ommer ift ha§> SSetter fel^r ^ei^, aber tm Qtxh]t
tDirb e§ !uf)tcr, imb tm SSinter ift e§ am aderfalteften. 4. ®er
Srii^ting ift feljr fc()on gemefen, aber ber ©ommer ift bie fcl^onfte
Sal^re^jeit. 5. 3Barum ift ber alte Tlann fo berut;mt ? 6. @r ift
berii'^mt, iueit er ein grower (General gelDefen ift. 1. ^d) tv'dxt*
and} <SoIbnt gelDorben, iDeiuif ic^ nic^t !ranf getrefeu wave. 8. ®er
arme Slnahc Uiarb immer frdnfer, imb er ift je^t tobt [tot]. 9. ^d)
ijahc tiiele grcimbe geljabt, ader bu bift mein befter greunb, 10.
!5)er alte d)laUv I)at biele greunbe iinb 33e!amite gel^abt, al§ er reic§
imb beriif)mt mar. 11. Sejjt ^ai er feine Sreunbe, tt)ei( er arm
geUHirbeii ift. 12. (£§ ift gut reid) 511 fein, aber e§ ift beffer gute
greunbe gu ^aben. 13. (Set gut unb bu tt)irft gliidlic^ feiu.
14. !J)u bift !(eiu, meiu ^tiub, aber bu mirft jeben ^ag gri3ger.
15. ^er S3ater be§ ^uabeu ift eiu reidjer ^ann getuefeu, unb
biefer J Uilrb t)iel ^elb ijaimi, ineuii er citter ift. 16. (5ie ioer-
hQU morgeu fec^^ 5D^ouate in !ti3er in geiuefeu feiu.
*332.1. t386.4/. 434. tl66.1.
304 EXEBCISES.
n.
1. Tou were, they became, she miglit have, we had, they
might become, we may have been, had you had? they had
become, we shall be, we should have had, you shall have
been, he shall be, she had had, I have been, thou mightest
have been, we may have had, to have had, to have been, to
have become. 2. Be diligent, become good, have all that you
want. 3. It becomes warmer in the spring. 4. We were too
hot in summer* and we are too cold in winter. 5. We have
had beautiful weather to-day, but to-morrow will be more
beautiful. 6. If I were rich, I should be happy. 7. Be diligent
ftnd good, and you will become rich and happy. 8. I have
been very happy, but I am become poor and old, and I have
no friends. 9. I shall have been happy if you have been
my friend. 10. Why did this man become so rich ? 11. He
has been a poor soldier, but he became a famous general.
12. His sons will also be soldiers when they are older.
13. He would have been happier if he had had a son.
14. It is good to be a famous general, but it is better to be
a good man. 15. It is good to have money, but it is better
to have good friends. 16. The children would be happy if
they had warm clothes. 17. The weather becomes warmer
every day.
.Ok EXERCISE lie. )
VERBS OF THE NEW CONJUGATION.
[245-250.]
y^^
le^ren teach
lerncn learn
fc^tdeti send
f^ielen play
reben talk U a. b ^
i)oxtn hear
fagen say, tell
lob en praise
ieBen live ^s ^- . v.
reifen journey, go by travelling
arbeiten toork
geigeit show
foufen buy
bring en bring
fennen know (be acquainted with)
ntorgen to-morrow
bort there, yonder
lange, adv. long
*e6M.
EXEBCISES. 305
(L §a6en bte ^tnber gut gearBettet? 2. !5)er Secret to6t fie,
iSeu fie gut arbeiteu. 3. @r ^at fie alle§ gete^rt U)a§ fie geterut
fjabeu. 4. ^(i) lobe \^n, meil er bie .^Tiuber f o bieleg gele^rt Ijat.
5. SDie ^iuber tnerbeu im (^arteu fpieleu, tvtnn fie jmei ©tunbeu
gearbeitet ^abeu. 6. ©age mir, tt)ag bir §err (Sd)mibt gefagt ^at.
t. 3c^ rebete lauge mit it)m, uub er lobte meiueu gutcu ^Setter,
ber uacf) 5(meri!a gereift ift. 8. S)er reifte uacl) 5(meri!a, U)etl er
fo arm tuar, aber er I}at Diet gearbeitet, uub er ift jet^t reic^ ge=
IDorben. 9. @r '^at eiu grofee^ $au§ gefauft uub iDirb iu 5(meri!a
leben. 10. ®r fjai feiuem better eiu ^ilb baijou gefc^ic!t, luelc^eg
er mir gejeigt I)at. 11. (Sr Ijtitte e§ bir gejeigt, iueuu bu bort
gemefeu mareft. 12. §orteu ©ie ma§ ber ^rofeffor fagte?
13. kx ^ai bie 33ilber gelobt, bie ic^ i§m gejeigt I)abe. 14. @r
liebt auc^ bie fc^oueu ^ilbcr, uub I)at t^iete babou gefauft, at§ er
uac^ $ari§ reifte. 15. 3eigcu ©ie i()m auc^ meiue ^iid)er, uub
fageu ©ie mir, \m§> er baDou beuft. 16. ^r ^itt bie ^43itc^cr
gelobt, tuenu er fie getauut I)atte. 17. Qc^ feuue beu ^rofeffor
uic^t. 18. 2Ba§ brad)te er bir gefteru? 19. (^t ^at mir uicf)t§
gebrac^t, aber er mirb mir morgeu etma§ ©c^bueg briugeu.
20. ^r fauute meiue ©Iteru, al§ fie iu ^erliu lebten,
n.
1. What did you buy when you were in the city ? 2. I
bought books and sent them to my uncle. 3. Have you
read the books which you bought ? 4. I had read many
of the books, and I shall have read them all. 5. Did the
professor teach you much ? 6. He taught me all that I
have learned. 7. Have you talked with him ? 8, No, but I
heard all he said. 9. The professor had travelled much
and he bought many books and pictures. 10. He has
showed me his whole library, and he told me where he
bought the books. 11. He would not have journeyed to
Paris if he had not been rich. 12. Did you hear what the -^
children said when they where playing in the garden ?/^
13. They had played in the garden, but they were working
when I was in the garden. 14. Show them the pictures
i
306 EXERCISES.
which your brother brought you. 15. When they have
worked two hours I will show them the pictures. 16. He
talked with the children, and showed them pictures of the
country in which she had lived. 17. Tell me with whom
you have talked. 18. We were talking with Mr. Smith, but
he said nothing. 19. I know him, but I do not like him.
20. It is better to work than to talk. 21. I shall bring you
a new book to-morrow.
EXERCISE 17.
MODAL AUXILIARIEa
[251-260.]
I.
1. SSittft bu na^ $ari§ ? 2. ^^ ntoc^te na^ ^ari§ retfen,
aber id^ fann e§ nic^t. 3. 2Btr fonnten nic^t nac^ ^arig, tueil tt)ir
nacf) 33erlin l)aben reifen miiffen. 4. Qc^ mag ni(i)t a((em reifen,
aber ic^ tperbe e§ je^t miiffen. 5. 2Ba§ !)at er bem 9}Zanne
gefagt? 6. (Sr burfte nic^t mit i^m reben, tueil er eiii fc^Iecl^ter
Mann fein foil. Y. 3d) foUte mit i^m reben, aber id^ i)aht e§
nid^t getnollt. 8. (5r foil noc^ fjkx fein, man mill i^n gefe^en
l^aben. 9. S^onnen bie Slinber 2)entfc^ ? 10. ^d) l)abe e§ il)nen
geleljrt, aber fie mogen e§ nicl)t. 11. (Sie miiffen arbeiten, n^enn
fie lernen mollen. 12. Tlan fann alle§ \va^ man mill. 13. ^a§
9Jiabd^en ^ai nic^t fpielen !i3nnen, meil e§ l)at arbeiten miiffen.
14. SDie ^inber biirfen nic^t reben, fie follen arbeiten. 15. ^arf
tc^ fpielen ? 16. dlt'm, mein ^inb, bn follft jet^t arbeiten, aber
bu tt)irft fpciter fpielen !i3nnen. 17. ©r Wu\^tt nicljt Wa§> er nn§
fagen follte. 18. ^c^ foil ha§> ^ud) lefen nub id) mag e^nic^t.
19. SSir mu^ten bie fc^onen Spfel faufen, al^ ber ^^aufmann fie
mir geigte.
n.
1. Why do you go toBerlin?__2. I am obliged to go to-^^^^^
Berlin, but I should like to goto Paris. 3. I do not likeTo
travel. 4. These poor children cannot learn anything,
because they have to work. 5. They want to learn German,
EXERCISES.
307
but they cannot. 6. We should like to give them some
money. 7. This boy is said to be very lazy ; he is not to
play in the garden, because he was not willing to work.
8. He played when he should have worked, and he must
now work when he might have played. 9. Do they know
what he said ? 10. They do not know it, because they could
not hear him. 11. We had to live in the town, but we shall
now be able to live here. 12. I am to show you the book
which you are to read. 13. May I show it to the children?
14. No, you must not show it to them, because they ought
not to see it. 15. I wanted to show it to him, because he
knows German. 16. He would have been able to read it.
17. You ought not to have read the book. 18. I could not
but read it, it was so pretty. 19. One must not read every-
thing that one wishes. 20. The child claims to have read
the book, but she could not (do it). 21. Do you know what
she wanted to say to him ? 22. 1 know it, but I may not say
it to you. 23. Children, you must be very industrious.
24. You do not like to learn, but you will be obliged (to
do it).
EXERCISE 18.
VEKBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.
[261-273.]
Vocabulary,
laufen
fommen
fpred)cn
brec^en
triufen
fingen
geuug
ber %iVitx
run
come
speak
break
drink
sing
enough
the plate
foUcn
get)en
riifen
binbcu
finben
beigcn
tiie
bag Jieb
1. SSa§ fiir Sieber ^aljcn Siei ge
faU
go
call
bind
find
bite
never
the
song
mgen ?
2. 2Bir fatigeu bte
gfs^
arum
£ieber, bie vo'xx in bie[em a (ten !iWc()^ gcfnnben ()aben. 3.
fingen 3^re (Scf)mefternnid)t? 4. ®t^-^"inb nocf) nic^t gefommen,
unb fie fonnen nid^t fingen. 5. SBariQrUef \>a^ £inb, al^ xoxt e^
308 EXERCISES.
fallen? 6. (S§ tft gelaufen, lueil bcr §unb e§ gebtffen '^at.
T. SSerben <Sie ben §unb nid^t fc^lagen ? 8. 9^em, er bi^ haa
^'uxh, meit e§ i^n jc^Iug. 9. ©r beifet nur bie Stiuber,
njeld^e if;n gefc^Iagen ^aben. 10. Sf^ufen (Sie ben S^naben nnb
binben ©ie i^m bie §anb, bie ber §mib gebiffen ^cit 11. 5DZein
^inb, iDa§ f)aft bn getr)an ? 12. Qcf) ^abe ben teller gebrod^en,
ben mir bie Sc^mefter ^ah. 13. SBie f)a]t bu il)n gebroc^en?
14. Qc^ ftel, nnb ber better brad^. 15. !J)n mcireft nic^t gef alien,
inenn bn nic^t gelanfen i)attt\t 16. SSarnm famen ©ie nic^t, nl§
id) ©ic rief ? 17. ^cl^ fprnd^ mit meinem better nnb fonnte nic^t
fommen. 18. ®r fommtnie, menn man i^n rnft. 19. ganb beine
(Sc^tnefter i[)re ^ante, al§ fie nad^ Berlin ging? 20. ©ie ift ni^t
nad) Devlin gegangen, aber bie ^ante tDirb ^u un§ fommen.
n.
1. Have you called the dog ? 2. I called him, but he
did not come. 3. Why do you call him? 4. I shall
strike him, because he has bitten the little girl. 5. She fell
and he bit her. 6. Does he always bite the children ? 9. Yes,
he is a bad dog ; I have not beaten him enough. 8. The
boys fel^down when they were,.goi»g to schooL* 9. They
fell because they always run. 10. Children, do not run. j
11. Where are the plates? 12. The maids have broken
them. 13. Plates always break when they fall. 14. Have
you found your knife ? 15. I found it in your room, but
now I have broken it. 16. The little boys cannot sing,
because they cannot find their books. 17. Do they sing
well? 18. The little one sings very beautifully. 19. The
teacher gave her this book when she could not find hers,
and she sang with the children. 20. I should like to drink
some milk, but I find nothing. 21. I will call the maid.
22. Sophy, find some fresh milk. 23. The children have
drunk the milk, but I have found some good red wine.
24. He drank the wine, but he ought not to have drunk it.
25. Call that man ; I want to speak with him. 26. I have
spoken with him, but he will not come. 27. I will go with
you, and I will speak with him when you have found him.
♦66.5.
EXEECISES.
309
fe^eit
legen
fd)reibcn
ef[eu
ber 33ocf)
bcr ^farrer
ha^ 3)Httag§e[feti
EXEHCISE 19.
PKEPOSITIONS
[371-378.]
Vocabulary,
set
lay
write
eat
the brook
the pastor
the dinner
fifeen
Uegen
fpringen
bie ^riidc
bie birdie
ber 9^ad^mlttag
lie
spring
the bridqe
the church
the afternoon
1. SSo flnb bie ^iid^er, ton benen trtr fprad^en ? 2. (Sie ticcjeit
auf bent ^ifc^e in ntcinem dimmer. 3. (^e^en (Sie in bag 3ininier,
iinb legen <Sie bie 33riefe anf ben X\](i) neben bie ^iid)er. 4. SBir
lagen unter ben ^ciumen in nteinem ©arten nnb fprac^en Uon
nnferen greunben. 5. ©ie !amen in ben (Garten, aU \mx t)on
i^^nen fprac^en. 6. ®ie Wao^b 13racf)te einen ^ifcf) in ben Garten
nnb fe^te if)n nnter bie 33anme. 1. ©ie fel5te nnfer 3[Rittag§effen
baranf, nnb \mx fafeen urn ben 3:ifc^ nnb a^en baUon. 8. 5)ie
^aBen liefen bnrc^ h^n SSalb nnb fprangen iibe» h^n 33acl^.
9. (S§ tt)ar !eine ^rilcfe iiber bent 33acf)e. 10. Unmeit bc§ 33nc^e§
fte^t eine !(eine §iitte. 11. 3c^ gclje oft nad) ber §iitte nnb
fringe tnein 9l>iittag§efjen ben armen Senten, bie bort tno^nen.
12. 5(n tnen fdjreibft bn ? 13. 3d) fdjreibe an hen ^^fnrrer, ber
in ber ©tabt tnoljnt. 14. 2)n foKft ben i^rief in bie (Btaht bringen,
nnb if)n bent ^farrer geben. 15. 3So moljnt er ? 16. ©t tnol)nt
jcnfeitg ber Stabt, ber grogen ^ird)e gegeniiber. 1*7. ^ir finb
geftcrn trol^ be§ fjeifeen Setter^ in bie Slirdje gegangen. 18. ®§
wax fe()r \)d% ai§> tr)ir in ber S^ird^e maren ; aber n)af)renb bc§
a)Zittagg ift e0 !ul)t gen^orben. 19. 9?acl^ bent 9??ittag§effen
tt)erben tnir nac^ bent SSalbe anf^erljalb ber ^Btaht ge^en.
20. 2Bir n>erben binnen einer ©tnnbe ge^en.
n.
1. Come into the wood with me. 2. "Why do you go into
the wood? 3. We will lie under the trees, and I will read
310
EXERCISES.
the book of whicli we were speaking. 4 The pastor left
the book in his room. 5. Go into his house, you will find
it on the table. 6. I stood on the bridge over the brook,
and the children played around me. 7. The hut of this
poor man stood outside of the city, not far from the bridge.
8. Do you often go to church ? 9. I go to church every
Sunday*, but during the summer I do not go. 10. I can-
not go on account of the hot weather. 11. Do you know
the Pastor of this church ? 12. He lives opposite to me,
and he will come after dinner. 13. Set the apples on the
table, and lay the plates and the knives beside me. 14.
I will lay an apple on your plate. 15. Did you go into his
room ? 16. Yes, he was sitting at his table and was writing
a letter to his mother. 17. I laid the books beside him
and went out of the room. 18-. I must buy a warm coat
on account of the cold weather. 19. We have had very hot
weather during this week.
EXERCISE 20.
PASSIVE, EEFLEXIVE, AND IMPEESONAL VERBS.
[274-295.]
Vocabulary.
jtd^ freuen r^oice
regnen rain
l^ungern he hungry
fi^ jc^cimen he ashamed
tabcitt hlame
bcr 9J?orgen themorning
bie ^oft the post
t)or, prep, before, for, on account cif
fi(^ fiirc^ten he afraid
bonnern thunder
biirften thirst
tobten [totcn] kill
tragen carry
ber 3lbenb th^ evening
bie 5(ufg abe the task
ber !3)icncr the servant
1. SSarum mirb ber ^naht getobt ? 2. (Sr tt)trb getobt, tt)eil
feme ^tuftjabe fo c^ut gefc^rieben ift. 3. @eine ^(ufgaben trerben
immer gut gefd^rieben, aber bie ber anberen ^naben tuerben
gemo^ntii^ fe^r fi^lec^t gefi^rieben. 4. ©te fiird^teu \x6) t)OX
* 230.2.
EXEECISES. 311
i^rem Secret, benn fte flnb tmmer t)on t^m gctabett rt)orben.
5. 3c^ mocf)te hzn ^rtef lefen, ben bu gefc^riebeu Ijaft. 6. (£r tft
fc^on nad) bcr ^oft getratjeii morben. 1. SSir tDoKten in bie
©tabt tjeljen, aber eg reguete unb bonnerte ben ganjen 9^ac^^
mittat3*. 8. giirc^teri Sie fk^ Dor bem Conner ? 9. S^Jein, aber
id) freue mic^, uieit e» uid)t me^r regnet. 10. Widj I)ungert '§ ;
Qib mir ehi ©tiic! 53rob. 11. Qd) fc^dme mid), meil id) fein guteg
^rob §abe. 12. ©ibt e§ feineu SSeiu im §aufe ? 13. $ier luirb
nic^t getrun!en. 14. ©e^en Sie fic§ auf biefen @tu^t man wixb
Q^nen etmag WiUf) geben. 15. 9[)^ein Keiner $nnb ift t)on einem
fc^lec^ten ^naben getobtet [getotet] morben. 16. 3ft er bom §unbe
gebiffen n)orben ? 11. 9^ein, aber er ^t fic^ immer t)or h^n
§nnben gefiirc^tet. 18. (Bx \mxh t)on feinem QSater getabelt
tt)erben, ttieil er 't>tn $unb getobtet [getotet] i)at 19. ©eftern niurbe
in ber Sl'irc^e gefnngen. 20. SStireft hn bort geuiefen, hn I)dtteft ein
neneg Sieb ge^ort, tnelc^eS t)on atien gelobt JDorbcn ift. 21. 9J^ir
mar nic^t gan§ mol)!, id) burfte mcf)t in bie ^tircl^e ge()en. 22. @§
freut micl^, ©ie ju fe^en. 23. 2)iefer 33rief ift Don il)m gefc^rieben
worben unb tuurbe mir bon feinem ^Dicner gebra^t.
n.
1. Has the letter been carried to the post ? 2. It has not
yet been written, but it will be carried into the city this
afternoon. 3. The servant was blamed because the plates
were broken. 4 We were very hungry, but nothing was
given us. 5. We rejoiced when the dinner was set upon
the table by the servant. 6. Seat yourself and eat. 7. This
boy is ashamed because he has eaten so much, but we are
very glad. 8. How was the child killed ? 9. He was bitten
by his dog. 10. I was very much afraid when I saw the
big dog with the child. 11. Are you not well ? 12. I always
am afraid whenf it rains and thunders. 13. It rains this
evening, J but it will not thunder. 14 We could not come
because it rained, but it will not rain any more, and I will
come to-morrow. 15. I want to see the pictures which
have been praised by every one. 16, They were praised by
* 230.1a. t tt)enn. % 230.2.
312
EXERCISES.
the friends of the painter. 17. Are there no fine pictures
in this city ? 18. There are many beautiful paintings in
the library. 19. Where were you yesterday when you
were called? 20. There was singing and dancing here
yesterday. 21. We should have rejoiced if you had been
able to come. 22. The children will be very much ashamed
when they are blamed by their father. 23. They will be
blamed because the exercises which were written by them
are so bad.
EXERCISE 21.
COMPOUND VEEBS
}.— SEPAEAELE.
[296-301.]
•
Vocd)ulary,
anfangcn
begin
aufl^oren
stop^ cease
auffte^en
get up
jic^ an^ie^eit
dress
aufge^en
rise (the sun)
untergel)en
go under, set
^inausge^en
go out
jurudfommcn
come hack
^umadjen
shut
aufmacf)en
open
abreifen
go or journey away
mitne^men
take along
abf(f)rei6en
copy
bie 9?ad^t
the night
bie @onne
the sun
ber aJlonb
the moon
bie %\^nv
the door
bo8 genfter
the window
bie eifenba^n
the railroad
ba§3)flittag8cffen</ic dinner
balb
soon
fobalb, conj.
as soon as
1. SDie Sonne tft untergegangen unb ber Wlonb ge^t auf.
2. ^te ^rbeiter, bie ben ganjen ^ag* gearbeitet ^aben, fommen
je^t au§ bem gelbe priiS. 3. 93Zac^e bie ^^iir anf, ber ^ater
mirb balb 5uriic!!ommen. 4. ^<i) max ^inau^gegangen, aB er
Snriidfam. 5. 5Sarum ge^en ©ie je^t ^tnau§? 6. Qc^ n)erbe
nid^t ^inaugge^en, ic^ mH nur bie ^T^iire unb genfter jnmad^en.
1. 2Bir miiffen ntorgen frii^ anffte^en, n)ex( tnir unfere 5Iufgabe
ni(^t abgefc^rteben l^aben. 8. @r \tanh auf, jog fi^ an unb fd^riel)
feine ^ufgabe ab. 9. SSirb bie (Sonne balb aufge^en ? 10. Qd^
* 230.L
EXERCISES. 313
toetg nt(^t, e§ fdngt an gu regnen, unb td^ ^abe bte genfter
gugemac^t. 11. 3ft beiii ^ater mit ber (Sifenbal)n abgereift?
12. (Sr reifte geftern ab, aber er ift f)eute guriidgefommen.
13. SDie 5trbeiter naljmeu i§r SJiittag^effen mit, al§ fie in bie
getber §iuau§gingen. 14. SSarum ^aben ©ie ^i)x^n Wiener ni(^t
mitgenommen, a(§ ©ie abreiften? 15. Qc^ miiufc^te ii)n mitju-
ne^men, aber er tuurbe !ran! unb fonnte nidjt mitge^en. 16. (Sr
ift nod^ nicl^t aufgeftanben, tneil bie (Sonne nic^t aufgegangen ift.
It. @r fcingt an §u arbeiten, tnenn bie (Sonne aufgeljt, unb ^bxt
auf, Ujenn fie unterge^t. 18. 3Sir fitrdfiteten un§ fe^r, aU e§ ju
bonnern anfing, aber mv fd^amen un§ je^t, meil tt)ir un§ ge^
fiird^tet ^aben. 19. 3ct) mac^te bie ^f)iiren unb genfter auf,
fobalb ber 3^egen auf^iirte. 20. SSen Ujerben (Sie mitnel^men,
tt)enn (Sie in bie ©tabt ge^en ? 21. Qd^ ttjerbe eud^ mitne^men,
^inber ; fte^et auf unb jie^et eud^ ^iibfd^ an. 22. SDarf bie ^(eine
aud^ mitge^en ? 23. D^ein, fie barf nic^t mit ;* aber tt)ir merben
i^^r ttrva^ (Sd)onc» gcben, tucun luiv 5uriicf!ommen.
n.
1. When do the workmen come back ? 2. They come
back when the sun sets. 3. The sun has already set, and
they will soon come back. 4. It is growing cold; shut the
doors and windows. 5. The moon will soon rise; do you
see it? 6. The rain has begun, and we cannot go out.
7. Have you copied the letters which you had begun?
8. Yes, I got up early and copied them. 9. Get up and
dress yourself; we must go away. 10. Why did they not
take the child along when they went away? 11. They did
not take it along, because it had not dressed itself. 12. The
servant will go out as soon as it ceases to rain. 13. He will
go into the city, and will take along the letters which we
have copied. 14. He did not shut the door when he went
out. 15. Get up and shut it. 16. My aunt will not go away
to-day, because it has begun to rain and she is afraid of
the thunder. 17. She went away onf the railroad as soon as
it stopped thundering. 18. The night has come, and the
« a59.a t mit
314 EXEBCISES.
moon will soon rise. 19. I want to go out. 20. Go, but
come back soon. 21 I began to work, but it became too
hot and I had to stop. 22. Why did the child not get up ?
23. It was not allowed to get up, because it was sick.
24 They went out into the forest, and took the books with
them which they had begun. 25. They will come back as
soon as the sun has set. 26. We must go away to-morrow,
but we shall soon come back. p ^ ^p^' <^^ ^ ^ ^^^^^-^
EXERCISE 22.
COMPOUND VERBS.— n^SEPAEABLE.
[302-313.]
Vocabulary,
ttergeffen forget Derfpred^en promise
Derfte^en understart^- em^jfaugen receive
Uerdubern change t)er[u(^en try
n)egne^mcn(sep.)tofce away Dertieren lose
iiberje^en translate, set over n)ieber^oIen repeat, bring back
beja^ten ^^ Derfaufen sell
fic^ erinnern -f^JJtemter gef alien please
ha^^tx\pvt^tn the promise bie @ad^e the thing
fran;5bftf(^ French englifc^ English
ber !?aben the shop ta^ ®tbidjt the poem
1. §aben (Ste fc^on t)ergeffen, \va§> ©ie niir Derfproc^eu I)a6en ?
2. ^tin, k^ erinnere mtd^ metne§ ^erfprecl^eng* unb id) iT)ieber:=
l^ole e^ 3t)neu. 3. 3Sa§ ^at S^iienf biefer ^aufmann Derlauft ?
4. (^x ijerfaufte mir 9loc!e unb Sd)u^e fiir meine ^inber unb einen
$ut fiir mtc^. 5. 3ft alk§> beja^tt morben, tva§> er Sfjiien t)er'
fauft f)ai ? 6. (S§ ift nod) nic^t be^ap morben, tDeil ic^ meui
^etb t)ertoren "^abe, abcr ic^ n)erbe morgen alle^| be5al)len.
1. (befallen 3^nen bie ©ac^en, bie ©ie in fctnem Saben gefer)en
l^aben ? 8. (£§ gefafft mir olIe§ gan^ gut, aber ic^ mug ba§ ^(eib
beranbern, tt)eil e§ ju grog ift. 9. §at l^arl feine franjoftfd^e
*219.3. t 222.1,16. X 227.I&.
EXERCISES. 315
^ufgabe uberfe^t ? 10. (Sr ^at fie iu§ ^eutfc^e unb in! (Snglifd^e
iiberfelt. 11. ^axl, ^oU mir ba§ ^ucl) tnicber unb tDieber^oIe
mtr betn ^ebic^t. 12. 3*^ ^ei& e§ nic^t mefjr, ic^ ^abe e§ t)er^
geffen. 13. ^ii t?ergi^t aKel ma^ man bic^ le^rt; bu gefaUft mir
gar nid^t. 14. 3c!^ ttjerbe t)erfucl^en, jel^t ffcifsiger gu tt)erben.
15. §aben Sie bie ^iidjer empfangen, bie er ^ijncn Derfproc^en
5at? 16. D^ein, aber ic^ luerbe fie empfangen, fobalb er 5urM:=
!ommt. 11. 3c^ tjerftelje gar nic^t, ma§ fie mir gefagt '^at.
18. (Sr r)at fie nic^t t)erftanben, meil er nidjt ^eutfc^ fprecl^en
!ann. 19."*3cl£) ^aht bzn ^rief nic^t t)erfter)en !i3nuen, '!)tn ic^
geftern empfing, ttieil ic^ nic^t 5)eutfd) lefen !ann. 20. SSir
^aben angefangen, htn ^rief ju ilberfe^en, aber wix l)aimx noc^
mct)t angefangen, i^n ab^nfc^reiben. 21. Qc^ iuerbe bir* ha§> ^uc^
tDegne^men, n)enn bu e§ njieber Derlierft.
n.
1. In what shop did they selljjM these books? 2. I
forget who sold them to me ; do tll^Pplease you ? 3. They
please me quite well. 4 You cannot buy any, because they
have all been sold already. 5. I do not want to buy any,
for I could not understand them. 6. l^j^^B not under-
stand German ? 7. I have quite f orgotti^Prerman, but I
understand French. 8. Promise me to learnf German. 9. I
will try to learn it, but I cannot speak it at all, I can only
translate it. 10. I remember a German book, which I read
when I was in Germany. 11. It pleased me, but I do not
remember its name. 12. Why did I not receive the letter
yesterday ? 13. You did not receive it because I forgot to
copy it, but you will receive it to-morrow. 14. Did the child
lose his book ? 15. The teacher took it away from him, because
he was lazy; but the boy repeated his promise, and the
teacher brought him back the book. 16. The merchant
wanted to sell me many pretty things when I was in his
shop, but I had lost my money and could buy nothing.
17. He will lose much money if he cannot sell these
things. 18. These things do not please me; I will not
pay for them. 19. My cousin is much changed, and hag
* 222.1,3. 1 348.2.
316
EXEBCISES.
quite forgotten me. 20. Children change very quicMy,
and easily forget their friends. 21. They tried to
translate the poem which they had received, but they
could not understand it. 22. I received a German letter,
and I understood it quite well. 23. I understand all
that I read, but I can not translate it into English.
Note. It is thought best, before taking up the special uses of the
moods, tenses, etc., to give the pupil some exercise in the formation
of the German sentence, it being quite impossible to introduce the sub-
junctive, infinitive, etc., without making use of longer and more involved
sentences than the pupil is as yet prepared for.
EXERCISE 23.
NORMAL AND INVERTED SENTENCES.
[430-433.1
%mivita
^^Vocabulary.
.Mmca ber ^meri!ancr
the American
bic SSo^niing
the dwelling
bte 9ieftauratton
the restaurant
nieub(ireii*Im|
juMieren] to furnish
miet^en [mieten]
hire
fru!)ftucfen
^^^k breakfast
jpeifen
eat
tt)euer [teuer]
^^^P dear
bittig
cheap
bcr ^ottig
^^T the king
blc ^onigin
the queen
mac^en
make
ber ^^Jrdfibent
the president
ber §rembc
the stranger
bie (Srbe
the earth
ber ^rei0
the price
eittmat, snjeimat
once, twice, etc
lange, adv.
long
tt)ot)t, adv.
loeK, perhaps
1. ^er grembe milt ftc§ eine f(^one SSo^nung in ber ©tabt
miet^en. 2. (Sine SBoljnung ^at er fd^on gefunbett, alier fie ift
i^mf 5U tr)eiier. 3. 3c^ Ijaht m berj Sriebrld^ftrage eine fcT^on
menbtirte SSoftnuiuj ju eiiient fe^r Ijiltigen ^reife gemict^et.
4. SSerben (Sie (angc ^ier WeiCen? 5. ^en ganjen SBinter
merbe ic^ in 33ev(in bfeiben, aber im grii^Iing§ tuerbe icf) nad)
$ari§ abreifen. 6. SSerben ©ie S^re gantilie nac^ ^ari§ ntit^
ucljmen ? 1. ^eine gran unb meinen cilteften (So^ n)erbe ic^
tDo§l mttne^men, bie anberen aber miiffen in Berlin Meiben.
* Pronounced, and often written, mob-, f 223.5. % 66.46. § a6.4a.
EXEECISES. 317
8. <S(^ott ift ^ertin nic|t, aber eine relc^c unb grole ©tabt tft e§.
9. ^iermal bin tc^ na^ granfreic!) gerelft, ^tDetmat ^a6e ic^ ©ng^
laiib gefe^eu, unb id) 6in auc§ oft in 5lmeri!a gemefen. 10. ^ath
tnerbe id^ eine D^eife nm bie (Srbe madden. 11. 2)ie (Entgtanber
unb bie 5lmeri!aner reifen fe^r t)iet, t)iet Itjeniger reifen bie
2)entfc^en, nnb am attertrenigften bie granjofen. 12. §aft
bu ben ^^onig gefel^en, aU bu in ^ari§ luarft? 13. dnnen
^rafibenten l^abe ic^ in ^ari§ gefei)en, nber feinen ."ftimtg.
14. ©inen ^\iifer ^aben n)ir in ^eutfd)(nnb, aOer in ©nglanb
t)at man nnr eine Slonigin. 15. Qm let^ten 3al)rc, al§» wix in
^ari§ maren, ^aben tuir in einem menblirten ^intmer geluo^nt.
16. Sir ^ahtn in nnferem 3inimer gefriifjftiicft, nnb jn 9[^ittag
fpeiften tnir in einer S^eftanration. 17. O, mdre* id) in $ari§ !
18. SSarnm finb ©ie nid)t mit nn§ gegangen ? 19. §atte ic^
nnr ^Uva^ ^e(b, fo ginge id) gemi^ nad) |$ari§. 20. §aft bu
noc^ nicl^t gefrii()ftiicft, fo !omm' mit mir.^1. Qn biefer 9^eftau=
ration !ann man fe^r gut unb 5u einem bWgen ^reife frii^ftiicfen.
iTmctei
n.
1. Has your friend hired a beautiful dwell4Bf 2. Beauti-
ful it is not, but good and cheap it is said^jp^fbe. 3. Has
your brother come back from Paris? ^kYesterday he
came with his two friends and his servant. 5. These
three Americans have come from France to Germany.
6. The queen of England they have already seen, and they
wish to see the Emperor of Germany too. 7. In Berlin they
cannot see the Emperor now. 8. He went away last month
with his whole family to Ems. 9. Have the Americans
never had a king in their country ? 10 . Formerly the king
of England was also their king, but now there is no king.
11. A president they have, but no king. 12. Old our
Emperor is, but strong and handsome he is also. 13. Where
do the Americans live? 14. In a furnished apartment in
Frederick street they live. 15. If they live in Freder-
ick street they must pay a good deal. 16. Such a dwel-
ling one cannot find for a cheap price. 17. Every thing
• 831.2. t foK, 257.a
318 EXEBCISES.
they pay for very dearly. 18. In tlie dearest restaurants
they eat, and they buy many beautiful things in the shops.
19. Oh, were I only rich. 20. Were we only rich, we would
buy every thing we want. 21. Whom do you wish to see ?
22. No one do I wish to see, only I want the book* I have
lost. 23. If you do not see the stranger, he is not here.
24. Last Monday, when I was in the city, I breakfasted in
a restaurant. 25. In Berlin I always breakfast in a
restaurant in Frederick street. 26. If you came with me,
I would show you a much better restaurant. 27. Are you
living in a furnished room ? 28. A room I have, but fur-
nished it is not.
EXERCISE 24. \/^{Cdi .
TBANSPOSED SENTENCES.— SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.
^ [434-436.]
Vocabulary.
cinlaben ^IkvUe
befud^en
visU
brudten itlf^
txial)Un tea, relate
Derberben
spoil
anne^men
accept
bev 35ei-faffcr the author
ha^ SBerf
the work
ha^^exQnuQtn the pleasure .^
ha^ @et)eimmg
the secret
ber Sftomon the novel
hex ©ebanfc
the thought
bie ©inlabimg the invitation
unbefannt
unknown
befannt known
einerlei, adv.
indifferent
I
1. §n^en (Ste ben ^f^ontan gelefen, bon bent \^ ^^nm erjaf)!!
I^abe ? 2. DZein, irf) fjcibe i^n nt(f)t gelefen ; fennen ©te ben ^er^
faffer beffetben? 3. SSer i^n gefi^rieben 1i)at, ift nitr unbefannt;
ober id^ tt)t\%, ba^ er in biefer ©tabt gebrncft n)Drben ift. 4. Qd^
Ijerfpred^e S^^^^i bnfs Sic ben 9^oman ntorgen erljalten foEen.
5. ^iffen ©le, ob ic^ bejaljlt Ijabe, Wa§> ©ie ntir ber! auf t f)aben ?
6. Ob @te bejatjit l)aben ober nicljt, ift mir einerlei ; id) tueig, ha^
©ie oKeS beja^len merben. t. (S§ freut mid^, ba^ fie mid^ ein=s
* 183.
0*
EXERCISES. 319
getaben ^at ; aber fte tt)eif3, baf5 id) ifjre C^inlabung ntrf)t amtel)men
fann. 8. SSarum bu bie (Sinlabuug nic^t annimmft, ift mir un^
befannt 9. Stiffen 8ie ntc^t, ha^ ic^ f)eute mlt ber (SifeuOaljtx
abreifen merbe? 10. ^er ©ebanfe, bafs bu nic^t mitfommen
fonuteft, UerbarO mir ha§> Qan^t ^ergniitjen. 11. ^^at er Sljiieu
gefagt, woljin er je^t ge^t? 12. gd^ tierfte^e gar nid)t, tt)a§ er
mir gefagt '^at. 13. (£g ift eine grage, ob fie bic^ befu(i)eu follte,
obcr bu fie. 14. 2SiiJ3te id) uur, tuo fie tDof)nt, uub tuo id) fie
fiubeu fiiuute, fotuiirbe ic^ fie befuc^eu. 15. ^^ ift fein©e^eim=
nife, ha^ fie morgen abreifen ixiiU.
1. Did she tell you that he had gone away ? 2. She told
me that he had gone away, but she did not tell me where
he had gone. 3. Had he not visite^you ? 4. Whether he
visited me, I do not know, but I know that I inyited him.
5. Did he give you that of which he spoke ? 6. What he
sent is unknown to me, but he knew that I could not
accept it. 7. The merchant tells me tha^e has sold all
the works of this author. 8. I am rejoiced ^at he has sold
them all ; but will he not print this novel again? 9. Whether
he will print it or not is not known. 10. I am glad that I
have not paid for these books. 11. You told me where you
had bought them, and to whom you had given them.
12. Whether you read them or not is indifferent to me, but
you know that you must pay for them. 13. It delights me
that you will visit me. 14. Will you come to-day or to-
morrow? 15. When I can come I cannot tell you, but I
will come soon. 16. It is a secret who has written this
book, but it has been read by every one. 17. The thought
that you are certainly coming makes me quite happy.
18. It rejoices me that I can accept your invitation. 19. All
that we have made is now spoilt.
320
EXEBOISES.
EXERCISE 25.
TRANSPOSED SENTENCES.— ADJECTIVE CLAUSES.
[437.]
Vocabulary.
jlerBcn
die
leiben
suffer
betuelrtcn
lament, mourn
aufgebcn
give up
frag en
ask
jubringen
pass (time)
ber Srbc
the heir
bie ^ranf^eit
sickness
blc ^offnung
hope.
bie ^rembe
foreign lands
elnfam
lonely
furc^tbar
fearful
barum
therefore
1. ^er grcmbe, ber g?ftern in unferer (^taht geftorben ift, tvax
ein (Snglcinber. 2. (Bv ftarb an einer ^ran![)eit, an ber er fdfjon
lange gelitten ^atte. 3. ^er ciltefte (Sot)n be§ (Sngldnber^,
toelc^er auc^ fein (Srbe ift, lt)irb r)ierf)er !ommen. 4. SSarnm
belDetnen ©ie einen SJJenfc^en, ben ©ie gar nid^t gefannt ^ben ?
5. 3c^ beltjeine j^en, ber einfam in ber grembe (eiben nnb fterben
mnJ3. 6. Qn ber Qeit, ha ic^ anf Dieifen mar, bin id^ in ©nglanb
gemefen. t. Qn Sonbon, mo ic^ einige SSoc^en ^nbrad^te, bin id^
!ran! gertjorben. 8. Sine (Stabt, morin id^ fo fe^r gelitten ^aht,
merbe id§ ijie nergeffen fonnen. 9. ^er Wann ift ein Ungtiicflid^er;
ber ^at t)tet gelitten. 10. SDer ^i tme__beffe n, bon bem id§ end^
erja^tt ^abe, ift mir nnbefannt. 11. (Sr fprid^t bon einem il^m
unbefannten SD^anne. 12. (£r fragte nac^ bem 9}?anne, beffen
^ater fo !ran! ift. 13. ^ie ^ranf^eit, on ber er leibet, ift eine fo
furd^tbare, ba^ man alle §offnnng ^at anfgeben miiffen. 14. !Da=
rnm ift fein <So^tr, ber ben ^ater nocl) einmal fe^en mollte, an§
$art§ 5uriidfge!ommen.
XL
1. The gentleman of whom he was telling you was my
Uncle. 2. He died in the house in which we now live.
3. He was a noble man and we still lament him. 4. Were
you not the heir of him of whom we are speaking ? 5. Yes,
EXERCISES. 321
I am tlie heir of his name, and I also suffer from the sick-
ness of which he died. 6. He was asking about a novel
wtiich he wanted to read. 7. It is a book of which I have
heard much, but it is written by a man who is quite un-
known to me. 8. The poor stranger who died here
yesterday was the author of the novels of which so much
has been said. 9. He died in a city where he was quite
unknown. 10. In the time when he was still rich and
happy he lived in Berlin, but when he became poor he
went into a foreign land, where he died. 11. He had long
suffered from a fearful sickness, and had given up all hope.
12. He had no children who will mourn for him. 13. He is
an unhappy man, who must live and die so lonely.
EXERCISE 26.
TRANSPOSED SENTENCES.— ADVERBIAL CLAUSES.
[438-439.]
Vocabulary,
reltcn
ride
jagcn
hunt
tocrjammctn
assemble
begleitett
accompany
fortreiten
ride away
fortfein
be away
BetBunbern
admire
bie 3agb
the hunt
ber 3lnfang
the beginning
bag (Snbe
the end
bic ®efeEf(^afl
t the ccmpany
gteicf)
like
j(f)nett
quick
mitbe
tired
t\)t
ere, before
tt)ie
how, as
ic....,bcfio
the the
jo iangc
as long as
1. 5lt§ bie ©otine oufging, rttten fie aHe nac^ bem SSatbe.
2. ^ie ^a^h mxh anfangen, f obalb bie ^efellfd)aft firf) t)erfammelt
l^at. 3. ^6) tucrbc ©ie becjteiten, bamit id) ha§> ®nbe ber S^Qb
fe^e. 4. (Sf)e fie 5uriic!!ommen, tDirb e§ gauj biiuM fein. 5. SSenn
©ie miibe fiub, mcrbcu mv fot3leid) wad) ^^aufe ^djzn. 6. SDeu
ganjen S^ag waxen fie im SSalbe, imb ai§> fie nad) §aufe !amen,
njaren fie fef)r miibe. Y. 2)iefe ^ame ift iiicl^t \d)on, waxuni
bettjunbern ©ie fie ? 8. ^d^ beirunbere fie nur barum, meil fie fo
322 EXEECISES.
fc^on reitet unb etn fo fc^bneg $ferb '^at. 9. SSotlen @te etrt)a§
fc^oneg fe^en, fo fommen ©ie mit mir. 10. (So Initge er fort ift,
fo lange mu^ id^ 1)kx bleiben, aber fobalb er §uruc!fommt, barf
i(^ fortge^en. 11. ®§ ift ^ter fo fd)on, ba^ ic^ iiic^t fortge^en
mitt. 12. 'aSo ic^ je^t bin, ha tDerbe icf) ben ganjeii 3:ag bleibeu.
13. ;3c^ bin fo ntiibe, ba^ icf) nid)t in bie (^efe((fd)aft gefjen !ann.
14. (Sriiebtfie gar nid^t, \vk tvh fie geliebt l^aben; er bemunbert
fie nnr, meil fie fo fc^on ift. 15. Se mel^r mir i^n fennen, befto
meniger lieben mir i^n. 16. S^sft bu nic^t, fo merbe id)
nic^t iagen. 17. SSie ber 5llte reitet, fo moc^te auc^ id^ reiten.
n.
1. We must ride to the forest before the sun rises. 2. If
you want to hunt, then accompany me. 3. Where the
forest begins, there the company assembled. 4. They
only assembled in orderf to see the hunt. 5. If you
want to see the hunt, you must ride fast. 6. When the
hunt was at an end, the hunters rode home. 7. Hardly
had he come home, when he rode away again. 8. Because
he is old he hunts no more. 9. The older I am, the
more I hunt. 10. The lady was so beautiful that we
had to* admire her. 11. Although she is the wife of my
friend, I have never seen her: 12. Where she now is, I do
not know, but I will tell you how you can see her. 13. As
soon as she came home, I saw her. 14. She is beauti-
ful ; but the more I admire her, the less I love her.
15. The company is larger than I had thought. 16. As long
i*s she is away I cannot visit you, but as soon as she comes
back we will come to you. 17. Wlien he visited us we were
not at home, but we shall see him before he goes away.
18. He rides so fast that we cannot accompany him. 19. As
he lived, so he died.
muffen, 256. f 332.55.
EXEBCISES.
323
EXERCISE 27.
USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
[323-328.]
s
Vocabulary.
raecfen
wake
fc^Iafen
sleep
auftx)acl)en
aijoake
befinben
be (as to health, etc.)
brennen
hum
retten
save
iiberteben
survive
jufaninienftuqen
fall together
ijerle^en
injure
ba§ 53ett
the bed
hie ^lamme
ihe flame
tobt [tot]
dead
f(^n)er
hard, difficult
pr6^ii6)
suddenly
untoo^l
unwdl
jeit, prep.
since
1. SSie Befinben (Sie ftc^? 2. ^c^ Befinbe ntiif) feit geftern fe^r
nnnjol)!. 3. (Sr^ci^len ©ie mir, tt)ie (Sie jic^ t)erle^t ^ben. 4. ^cf)
nmr geftern fe()r mlibe nnb ging friif) ju 33ctt. 5. $(o^(ic^ tvad^t
id) auf, ic^ fel^e glammen, baS) §au§ Brenut. 6. S<^^ ftel;e auf,
n)ec!e meine gran nnb nteine ^inber, nnb fie lanfen au^ bem
§anfe. 1. ^i§> n)ir aKe branfeen finb, erinnere id§ mic^, ba§ ic^
bag iiingfte ^Hnb bcrgeffen Ijahc. 8. Qd) iPiK jnruc! lanfen nnb
e§ retten, aber ba§ $au§ ftilrjt iiber mir 5nfammen. 9. 9J^an
'ijat micl^ gerettet, aber id) bin fcl^mer l^erletjt nnb icl^ iiberlebe e§
getni^ nidjt. 10. ^ein 53rnber mivb tnoljl Derreift fein? 11. Qa,
aber er !ommt fc^on morgen 5nriic!. 12. ^]t ha§> ^inb fd)on
langefran!? 13. ©» ift feit einer SS^od^e tobt. 14. ^efanb ber
Wamx \\d) \d)on lange in 53erlin, aU ©ie il)n fafjen? 15. 511^ ic^
in Berlin tnar, fa^ id) if)n nid)t, aber fpdtcr Ijabe id) if)n gefel^en.
16. it'ommt er nic^t, fo gel)e id) gteid) fort. 11. (£t fd)Iaft feit
brei (Stnnben, nnb id) !ann if)n nidjt n^eden.
n.
1. Have you seen the poor man ? 2. I saw him when his
house was burning. 8. What did he do ? 4. He was in the
town. 5. Suddenly they tell him that his house is burning.
6. He runs back, he calls his wife and his children. 7. But
they are asleep, he cannot wake them. 8. He wishes to
324
EXEECISES.
save them, but the house falls in. 9. Was no one saved?
10. One child was saved, but it is much injured. 11. If the
child dies, he will die too. 12. Yes, he will probably not
survive his family. 13. Have the children been long asleep?
14. They have been sleeping for five hours. 15. They will
certainly wake up soon. 16. Were you in the church
yesterday ? 17. When you were in the church I was also
there. 18. Had he been long unwell when he died ? 19. He
had lain in bed for 5 years. 20. Now he has been dead for
two years. 21. I am going into the city to-morrow, but I
am coming back early. 22. If you go, I shall go along.
EXERCISE 28.
SUBJUNC
rrVTE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL.
[329-332
'■■]
Vocabulary,
anfe^ctt
looked
au«fe^cn
look, appear
tattsen
dance
citen
hurry
mitfmgen
si7ig (at the same time)
anfommen
airive
tie mvLfxt
music
bie "Stimnic
the voice
bcr Siingting the youth
blc S)ame
the lady
ntiibe
tired
tpst
late
gem
wUlingly
bod^, (adv.)
stiUf nevertheless
attein (adv.
and conj.) alone, hut, only
fonft
otherwise
tc6 iSmtm^
1. SBareftbunurgefteru f)ier getDefen! 2. SBcire ic^ aii^
Qetaben tuorben, jo tt)are ic^ hod) tiic^t gefommen. 3. SSaren 8te
gefommen, fo l)dtten ©ie Diel fc^one Tiu\xt geI)Drt unb ba ^'dtkn
%ie auc^ mitfingen fbuneu. 4. ©r fpricl^t, alg fiinge er trie. 5. @r
f)at eine fel)r fc^one (Stimme, fonft ficitte man i^n gar nid^t tm^
gelaben. 6. ®er Qungling fte()t an§, al§ mare er fe^r miibc
Y. (Sr '^atte gem getanjt, aftein er wax ju miibe. 8. ©r eilt nur,
bamtt er friif) ()in!omme. 9. ^omme er, ober fomme er nic^t, e§
ift mtr einertet. 10. Unb tDcire e§ nocl^ fpdter, ie() fame boc^ ju
^^nen. 11. S<^ niod)te gern biefe 33ilber anfe^en, aKein ic^ ^aht
!eine Beit. 12. (Site er, fo t)ie( er !ann, er fomntt boc^ ju fpcit an.
13. Dt), tDciren biefe ^ilber nur bie meinigen, bann fa^e id) fic
EXEEOISES.
325
ben gonjcn 5:Qg an. 14. ^er Qungting fte^t bie iungc ^ame an,
aU benjnnbere er fie. 15. @ie trirb i^ nte tieben, fo biel er ftc
ond^ ben)unbert. 16. SSir moc^ten fie anii} fe^en, aber fie tft nid^t
l^ier.
n.
1. Why do you not sing with us ? 2. I would gladly sing
too, only I have no voice
ought not»to have come
wise I should not have . _ .
6. Why are you hurrying so mucnr 7. I am hurrying in
order thgjt I may not^rrive toa late. 8. If you arrive too
late, youwittja?^ be^leto^an^T^ like to
dance, butT arn^too tired/ iO.^Oh, were I only^younef acfain, . ^ ,
ft^^^tn^n I could dance, '^ll. Look at this lady; she looks ^iS if . ' '
she had danced too much. 12. If I were tired I wout3not .C5M-A.^yxi
dance any more. 13. How could you have danced if she
had not come. 14. This youth is hurrying as if it were
very late. 15. He is only hurrying in order that he may
hear the beautiful music. 16. Let him hurry as much as
he will, he will still arrive too late. 17. I should like to see
the beautiful ladies, but they are already gone.f
18. Had you only hurried yourself, then you would have
seen them all.
EXEHCISE 20.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT STATEMENT.
[333.]
.
Vocabulary,
btc Bettnitg
the newspaper
ble Sna^xxdjt
the news
ber 5Ir5t
the doctor
bev @taube
beliefJaUh
bebauern
pity
ent^altcn
contain
^offen
hope
anttuorten
answer
ttJi^tlg
important
^cutlg
of to-day
befcfiSftlgt
busy
gcfunb
healthy
traurig
sad
tt)at)r
true
ber hunger
hunger
tfovt.
ble Sa^r^ett
the truth
♦ foUen 251.6.
326 EXERCISES.
1. ©abcn (Sie ble "^eutige S^itmig getefen? Tlan fagt, fte enU
l^atte h)id^ttge 9Mc^ri^ten. 2. 3^ (jabe gelefeit, ha^ ber Slaifer
geftorbeu fei, aber ic^ glaube e§ nirf)t. 3. Qcf) fragte meinen ^ater,
oh er biefeDlac^ric^t glaube, imb-er mitmortete, er glaube niemal^
\)a^, toa§> er iu ber ^eitumj tefe. 4. (Sr fragte bie ®ame, ob fie
mitge^en tvoiic, aber fie antmortete, fie fei fe^r miibe unb biirfe
nid^t au§ger)en. 5. (Sie fc^reibt uit§, fie fei nic^t ^u un§ gefommen,
lt)ei( fie geglaubt fjabe, baf^ iDir abgereift tDciren; fie bebaure fe^r,
ha^ fieuu§ nic^t gefef)en ^abe unb ^offe, wix trerbcn balb gu i^r
!ommen; fie fomte m\§> nic^t tuieber befuc^en, tueil fie ^u befc^df*
tigt fei. 6. (Sr glaubt, bafj fein 8o§n !rau! fei unb miinfc^t, bag
icl^ nac§ bent ^(rjt fcl^icfe. 1. ^er meint, er f)abe ju Diet gearbeitet,
barum fei er !ran! geiDorben. 8. ^er ^ebanfe, ha^ er nic^t tnel^r
arbeiten !onne, mac^t \i)n fe^r traurig. 9. 2)er ^Irjt glaubt ni(i)t,
bag er mieber gefunb tuirb. 10. SSir gaben i^r ha§> ^elb, treit
fie un0 erja^lte, ha^ \f)x Tlann geftorben fei, unb bog fie fein
G^elb ^abe. 11. (S^lauben ©ie, ha^ fie bie SSa^r^eit fpric^t ? 12. Ob
fie bie 2BaI)rf)eit fprid^t, meig id) nic^t, ic^ moUte aber nidjt, bag
fie an §nnger ftiirbe.
n.
1. Have you heard the great news? 2. They say the
Emperor is coming to-morrow. 3. Do you believe that it is
true ? 4. My mother said she had read it in the paper, but
she did not believe it. 5. The belief that he is coming
makes the whole city glad. 6. What news did his letter
contain ? 7. He wrote he was still in Berlin and working
as usual; he was sending me a book which he had read,
and hoped I should read it also ; he did not know when
he was coming home, but he hoped he could come soon.
8. I came back in the belief that he was very ill, but I find
him quite well. 9. I asked him whether he was ill, but he
was only tired because he had worked too much. 10. I
asked the young man who he was and where he was going,
but he only answered he did not know me and would not
tell me. 11. I think I am going away to-morrow, but
my friend wishes that I remain long^er. 12. His father
EXERCISES. 327
said he must come home to-morrow; but he says he cannot
and will not go away before his friend has arrived. 13. The
lady said she was very sorry that he was so sick, and hoped
he would soon be better again. 14. The doctor thinks he
will soon die, but I think he is not so sick as they believe.
15. The story that he is busy and therefore does not come
I do not believe.
EXERCISE 30.
INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT OR OBJECT.
[339-343.]
Vocabulary,
raud^eii sraoke trinfcu drink
^ei^en command, call taffen allcm, cause
befe^ten orcZer jd^tDeigen hesUent
*Jor(ejen read aloud (to someone) oerbieten forbid
fpasieven gel^en go to walk f^ajieren fa^ren go to drive
t>oi'fa{)ren drive up fa{)ren drive
ber SSogeu the carriage ber ^utfd^er the coachman
gefci^rtid) dangerous gornig c^ngry
kidjt easy toeit far, distant
1. SDo§ Sefen ^aBe td^ geternt, a6er ha^ ©d^reiben ift mir nod^
fd^tDer. 2. (Srinnern ©ie fic^ feineg (Sd^tDetgeiig, al§ mir i^
fa^en. 3. ^§> ift fd)itier ^u fc()iDeigen, tDenn man ^ornig ift. 4. ©§
ift mir nic^t leic^t, feine (^efd)ic^te 511 glaubeu, aber ic^ tuerbc
l)erfuct)en, i[)m gu I)elfen. 5, C^inem folc^en 9)(enfc^eu ^elb ju
geben, ift fef^r gefci^rlic^, aber (Sffen uiib ^rinfen barf man il;m
geben. 6. ^^ Ijore fingeu. 1. (Sie ^oxtn ben {uiigen "^Dlann
fingeit, h^n 3()r ^ruber mitgeOrac^t ^at 8. SSo I)at er ben
giingling fenuen gelernt ? 9. (Sr (ernte ir)n in 53cr(in fennen.
10. ®r lieJ3 if)n jeben Xa^ 5U fict) fommcn nnb leljrte if)n fingen.
11. (Sr (;ie§ ben fungen 93hnn ^eute fommen unb befall if)m,*
un§ etnjag Dorjufingen. 12. (Sr Ici^t fic^ bie ^ebicr)te Oortefen.
13. 3c^ mottte fpajieren ge^en, aber er blieO im Garten fi^en unb
^ * 222.n, la.
328 EXERCISES,
iDiinfcl^fe ntc^t Qu§§uget)en. i4. ^r tft ju mnht, fpajteren ju
ge§eu, aber er tt)iil gent fpa^ieren fasten. 15. ^axi, la^ beit
^utfd^er rufeu unb ben SBagen borfa^ren, ttJir iDoUen nad^ ber
©tabt fa[)ren. 16. 3Sir ()aben ben ^(r^tnoc^ ju befud^en. 17. S^n
gu befuc^en, miiffeit ©ie fe^r tt)eit fa^^ren. 18. 2Bir ^abeti tt)eiter
nid^t§ §u fagen, aber er l;ort nicljt auf, un§ ju rufen. 19. ^rinfen
unb ^iauc^en finb im ^^eater ijerboten.
n.
1. I do not like writing, but I like reading very mucli.
2. Why do you not smoke ? 3. The doctor has forbidden*
me smoking. 4. To be silent is better than to talk when
one is angry. 5. I ordered him to be silent, but he
wished to talk. 6. To tell the truth is impossible to him.
7. I tried to help him, but he would not tell the truth,
and I could not give him anything. We became acquainted
with him in Paris. 8. Will you go to drive with me V 9. I
rejoice to go with you. 10. I will have the coachman
called. 11. When I called him he remained standing and
did not come. 12. Do you not hear talking ? 13. I hear
talking and singing. 14. Have you heard the children
sing ? 15. I tried to hear them sing, but the teacher for-
bade me to come into the school. 16. He teaches them to
sing and to read aloud. 17. Let Sophy be called; I see her
coming and I want to ask her something.f 18. I had her
called, but she was reading aloud to her sister and could
not come. 19. We will have them work an hour, then they
can go to drive with us. 20. Have the carriage come, the
children want to go to drive, but I shall go to walk.
EXERCISE 31.
INFINITIVE AS ADJUNCT AND WITH PREPOSITIONS.
[344-348.]
Vocabulary,
Benu^cn use lad^en laugh .
an^orcn listen to fld^ jurflrfjlcjcn withdraw
* 222.1,1a. 1 227.3a.
EXEBGISES. 329
Bcrclt ready
ru^lg
^ia
furj short
fd^ttjad^
weak
bic ©elegen^eit the opportunity
bag @d|aufpicl
the play
ber ©ete^rtc the scholar
bie Unitjerfitat
the university
amufiren amuse
amiifant
amusing
1. (Sr fagte mtr, er ^a6c feme (^etegen^ett ge'^aBt, mtt g^nen
ju fprec^en. 2. ^c^ bin bereit, i^m alle§ ^u er^d^Ien, aber er ift
5U sornig, mid^ an^oren gu tDoUen. 3. ^ie§offnuug, halb trieber
abreifen gu fbnnen, mac^t fie fe^r gliidtid). 4. ©ie fam nac^
Berlin, um i()re (Slteru ju befudien. 5. ^uftatt nac^ Berlin 511
fommen, mare e§ if)r leid)ter geiuefen, gleic^ nac^ §aufe ju ge^eii.
6. Qc^ iDerbe biefe ©elegen^eit benugeu, um ing 3:^eater ju
ge^en. 7. 2Bir mbc^ten nic^t ing ^^eater ge^en, o^ne ha^ @c§au^
fpiel tjor^er gelefeu ju ^abeu. 8. 2)ie geit ift ju !ur§, alg ha^
fie bag (5d)aufpiel lefen fonnen. 9. (Sr fpracl^ baUon, iin§ nad)
bem 3:f)eater ju begleiten, aber er mu^te nod^ arbeiten. 10. ^c^
!ann bag Sieb uic^t fiugen ^oren, o^ne §u n^einen. 11. 5lnftatt
ntit feinen greunben 'm§> ^(jeater gu ge^eii, ^at er fic^ juriidge^
gogeu, um in feiuem Qii^ttier rul)ig arbeiten gu fonnen. 12. (Sr
bentt nur baran, ein grower (SJele^rter gu merben. 13. (Sr tDiinfd^t
nad^ ber Unitjerfitat 5U ge^en, unb fein ^ater ift reic^ genug, if)m
geit unb ©elegen^eit ba5u ju geben. 14. ^c^ ^abe ben Bfioman
gelefen, um mic^ p amiifiren. aber er ift gar nid^t amiifant.
15. 5tnftatt 5u tad^en, ^be ic^ i^n nid^t tefeu fonnen, o^ne 5U
ttjeinen. 16. Qd^ "^aU i^n tng ^§eater ge^en laffen ttJoEen, aber
er ^at nic^t ge(;en fonnen.
n
1. Are you ready to go with us to tlie theatre? 2. I have
no time to go to the theatre. 3. I have seen this play too
often to want to see it again. 4. I cannot see any play
without haying read it before. 5. What will you do in
order to amuse yourself? 6. Instead of staying here, I shall
go to the university in order to see the learned professor.
7. He. thinks only of seeing learned men and reading
learned books, but we think only of amusing ourselves.
330
EXEECISES.
8.. Why did lie withdraw instead of going to walk with us?
9. He said he was always ready to go to walk with you,
but to-day he was too tired to be able to go out. .10. We
came in the hope of hearing him sing. 11. I cannot go
away without hearing him sing. 12. I have no time to
listen to him, but I hope to hear him sing later. 13. You
cannot help this poor man without giving him much
money. 14. I let him tell his story in order to know
whether he spoke the truth. 15. I have no hope of being
able to help him. 16. Instead of listening to my story he
forbade me to speak. 17. They will not go away without
having spoken. 18. We have used every opportunity of
helping them, but they are bad enough to be dangerous.
19. This novel is too amusing for me to read it without
laughing. 20. I had wished to teach him to read aloud,
but he had too weak a voice to be able to read aloud.
EXJjJKCISE 32.
PARTICIPLES.
[349-359.]
Vocabulary/.
c^rcn
honor
t)oIIenbcn
complete
fii^rcn
lead
befprec^en
talk over
mitt^cUcn
communicate
empfangen
receive
gcboren
horn
ertt»arten
await
fcrtig
finished
ciUg
hasty
bcr 3)om
the cathedral
SfJom
Borne
^Oltt
Cologne
' 1. SSer rt)kb bte anfommenben (^cifte empfangen? 2. SO^eine
5D^utter empfdngt bie §erau!ontmenben. 3. §aft ^u ben an-
gefangenen ^rief bollenbet ? 4. (Sobalb \v\x i^n fertig l^aben,
foKen ©ie ha§> ^efdjriebene lefen. 4. ©nben ©ie ben ©eftor-
benen gefannt ? 6. (Sr tvav mein geliebter greunb. 1. @r ging,
ba§ ^hib nn ber .$anb fiiljrenb, in bie .^ircl^e ^inein. 8. SSir
gingen and) mit, nm bie fc^on gematten ^ilber jn fe^en. 9. §aben
EXEECISES. 331
Ste frli^er fo botteubet f c^buc ^ilber gefetien ? 10. ®r fa^ fie.
bciDuiiberub an uub ging fdjmeigenb fort. 11. 5(((e ^erfprec^ungeit
tjcrcjeffeub reifte er goftern ah. 12. 3Sann incrben bie D^eifenben
juriicffommeit ? 13. (Sr fan: eiligft [)ine3efaf}ven, uni ung bie
9^ac^rid)t iiitt5utr)et(eu. 14. Uii§ ben empfangenen ^rief t)orIefenb
unb mit nn§ bie 9lad)rid)t [)efpred)enb, blieb er lange bei nn§.
15. ©ie aufge^enbe (Sonne fanb i^n noc^ im ^ette liegen.
16. ®er im 3a^re 1248 angefangene '5)om ju ^'oln ift erft 638
Saf)re fpdter ijodenbet tDorben. 17. ^er arme, in einer niebrigen
$iitte geOorene ^nabe, ift fpdter ein berii^mter ^rofeffor ge=
iDorben. 18. ^ie tt)einenbe gran ift bie SJ^ntter beg geftern an§ bem
brennenben §aufe geretteten ^inbeg. loeld^eg ^ente geftorben ift.
H
1. Have you found the lost book ? 2. They have brought
it back to me quite spoiled. 3. AVhy does she go weeping
into the church ? 4. Her most beloved son is dead. 5. I
knew the dead, he was a beautiful boy. 6. The child came
running in order to give me the long expected letter.
7. Talking over with me the news, he forgot to give me the
paper. 8. She looked admiringly at the beautifully
painted pictures, but she said nothing. 9. Do you know
this much admired lady ? 10. She is the daughter of my
beloved uncle, she is a beautiful woman. 11. We
remained a week in Kome looking at the great churches
and admiring the beautiful paintings. 12. As soon as
the expected newspaper arrives, I will communicate to
you the news contained in it. 13. Having lost my paper
I shall have to read yours. 14. I have found your lost
paper. 15. The emperor Napoleon I., born in Corsica in
the year 1769, died at St. Helena in 1821. 16. They were
not able to save those sleeping in the burning house,
because they could not wake them. 17. The traveller
arrived too late to see the dying man. 18. Arrived in
Cologne I went at once to their house, but I found the
house shut and the whole family away. 19. She went away
weepuig without having seen her beloved ones.
33
EXERCISES.
EXERCISE 33.
ADVERBS AND PEEPOSITIONa
[361-381.]
Vocabulary/,
ber iBerg
the mountain ba§ ©emitter
the thunder-storm
ber ^fab
the path bie «anf
the bench
bic Sotfe
the cloud bie ©r^ie^ung
the education
ta^ @efcl)aft
business ber ®ter«
the star
fteigen
cZim6 blicfen
look
einjiel^cn
move in auS^ie^en
move out
t)erfd)ttjinben
disappear bitten
beg
unterttJegg (adv.) on the way
1. 9d^ bin untermegg, meine gi^^uube gu 6efu(^en, bte ber
^trd^e gegeniiber tno^nen. 2. grii^er tDo^nten fie auf bent
Sanbe jenfeit^ beg gluffe§, aber fie ftnb megen ber (^gie^ung
i^rer ^inber in bie ©tabt gegogen unb mo^en je^t unn^eit ber
©c^ule. 3. ^ro^ be§ ^eifeen Setter^ bin id} :^eute fammt meinen
^inbern fpajieren gegangen. 4. SSir gingen tief in ben SBalb
l^inein, \6) feljte mid^ unter bie ^dume auf eine ^anf, unb
bie ^inber fpielten urn mic^ l^erum. 5. ^lo^Iic^ tnurbe e§ bunfel,
td§ fa^ nad^ oben, bie Sonne mar Winter ben fd)tDar§en SSoIfen
berfc^ttjunben, unb binnen furger ^t\i fing e§ an gu regnen.
6. SSir (iefen eiligft au§ bem SSalbe l)inau§. *l. SBalb aber tt)ar
ber ©turm i)orbei, unb bie ©onne !am mieber ^inter ben SSoIfen
l^ertior. 8. Qc^ modte auf ben 33erg ^inauf fteigen, urn bie unter^^
ge^enbe Sonne gu fe§en, aber er ttJlinfc^te, long§ be§ gluffeg
fpagieren gu ge^en. 9. ^^6) bat i^n, gu mir ^eriiber gu fommen,
aber er mollte e§ nic^t. 10. SSir ftanben auf bem fleinen, Icingg
be§ S^uffe§ fii^renben ^fabe unb fa^en nac^ oben ^inauf, unb
alte Sterne beg §immelg blicften auf ung Ijernieber. 11. ^^c^
faun nict)t an i§rem §aufe Dorbeige^en, o^ne ^inein gu ge^en.
12. Sie ^at ntic^ oft eingelaben, ^erein gu fommen, ober id§
mu^te beg (Sefd^ciftg megen in bie Stabt §inein.
n.
1. Why does your friend now live outside of the town?
2. He has a sick child, and for its sake he has moved out
EXERCISES.
333
of the town. 3. They have planted trees along the path by
the river, and have set benches under the trees. 4. The
horseman who rode past us was riding on a very beauti-
ful horse, and two dogs were running round about him.
5. I looked long after him as he rode away into the woods.
6. The sun has come out from behind the black clouds, and
in spite of the storm the evening will be fine. 7. We will
climb up upon the mountain and look down upon the
city. 8. When the sun disappears behind the mountains
the stars will look down upon us from above. 9c As I went
by his house he was looking out of the window. 10. He
called me over to him and invited me to come into the
house. 11. He said he could not (go) out of the house, and
wished to speak to me concerning business. 12. I went in
to him and remained with him during two whole hours.
EXERCISE 34.
CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEKJECTIONS.
[382-392.]
Vocabulary,
ber ^affec
the coffee
ber Zljtt
(he tea
ha^ ^tcifcf)
the meat
ha^ ©entuje
the vegetable
bic ^artoffel
the potato
bag SBaffer
the water
bag ^mtv
the fire
\ia^ mi
the wood
!oc^en
cook
bacfen
bake
anpnben
light
DerBrennen
hum
f)oten
fetch
gubereiten
prepare
fic^ crfciUen
catch cold
^)ftucfen
pluck
1. S^ mod^te \>(i^ grii^ftiic! juberetten, affein man ^t \>a^
geuer nocf) nic^t angejiinbet. 2. ^ie Wac(b ift ^inauggegnnc^en,
enttueber urn §0(5 511 jiid^en obcr iim (S^emiife §u pf(iic!en.
3. 3ii«^ei^ ©tc ici^ Seuer an, unterbeffen tucrbe irf) SSaffer ^oteu
uitb ben ^affee mac^en. 4. ^u trinfft immer JIaffee, ic^ bagegen
trinfe nnr ^^ce. 5. ^(jo mac^en tt)ir ni(f)t nur ^^affee, fonbern
and^ ^5ee. 6. (Sobalb ba§ SSaffer !ocI)t, t^un ©ie bie ^artoffeln
334 EXEKCISES.
^\m\n. 1. ^a^ Staffer fod^t ^Wax fc^on, aCtein idj ^abe feitie
^artoffeln, beS^att) merbe ic^ in ben Garten ge^en miiffen. 8. SSo
@ie bie ^artoffeln finben merben, tt)ei§ ic^ nic^t, ahtv inbem ©ie
fie fuc^en, merbe ic^ ba§ Sleifc^ gubereiten. 9. SSci^renb id^ im
(Garten mar, ift bag gleifcl^ ' berbrannt. 10. D Wtf), ha^
e§ tierbrannt ift, je^t tnerbe ic^ nicl^t§ 5U effen ^aUn.
11. Obgteic^ e0 Derbrannt ift, merbe ic^ boci) berfuc^en, ein ©tiic!
bat) on 5U effen. 12. ^fui be» fc^Icc^ten 5(eifd)e§, iDeg mit il^m.
13. SSeber bn noct) ict) n)erben e§ effen fbnnen, aber biefe airmen
merben e§ gerne effen. 14. ©eitbem fie fic^ erlciltet l^at, ift fie
immer Iran! gemefen, aber beffen nngeai^tet arbeitet fie nad^
tt)ie tjor h^n gan^en XaQ. 15. ^a fie arm unb fran! ift, n)ot(en
n)ir i()r (^elb geben, fie tviti e§ aber nic^t ^aben, fonbern fagt, fie
tt)olIe lieber fterben, aU ha'^ fie meine §nlfe anne^men ttJoKte.
n.
1. Alas for these poor people ! 2. Although the weather
is so cold, they have no warm clothes. 3. Not only have
they no warm clothes, but they have also no bread and
no fire. 4. I should like to give them something, only I do
not i;now whether they would accept it. 5. They would to
be sure accept no money; nevertheless you can help them.
6. Either you can give them potatoes, or you can look for
wood and make a fire. 7. I will get some potatoes; mean-
time you light the fire. 8. Neither you nor I can cook
potatoes without burning them. 9. It is true, I can not
cook potatoes; on the other hand I can bake meat ven
well. 10. While the meat is cooking, give the children these
vegetables, in order that they may have something to eat
at once. 11. Since I have caught cold I have not been able
to eat anything. 12. Try nevertheless to drink this coffee;
besides I have some white bread, which you can eat.
13. Alas for me, that I cannot work ! 14. Until I can work
again the children will have nothing to eat. 15. Although
we have little money, we will nevertheless help you
as long as you are sick. 16. Accordingly I will take the
children with me, as I promised you.
SECOND SERIES.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES I.
USE OF THE AKTICLES.
(66.) 1. SDa§ ^artenfpiel ift ein ^rieg. mmtj, 2. SDte
©eid)i^te jott feme SoOrebuerin fein. ((Sd^.) 3. ^te ^DZenfc^en
fiub gefd^affen fiir bie a^cnfc^eii. (5c^.) 4. 5(m ^aum be§
©c^tDeigen^ ^dngt feine gruc^t, ber gviebe. (®^r.) 5. 2)ie 9teU=
gion, biefe ^oc^ter be§ 63inimeB, ift bie getreue ^efd^rtin be§
a^enfc^eit. Wf.) 6. S)ie Surest be§ ^obe§ iftbeg SeDen§ fc^arfe
SSiirje. (9lucf.) T. ^ie 93iutter lag auf ben S^nieen Dor bent '^dtt
unb I)atte ben ^rm um if)r ftofjiicube^ ^^inb gefcl^Iagen. (§ei).) 8.
^^rdnen ftanben bem atteii Tlanm in ben 5Iugen. (§aiiff.) 9.
5((-3 nun ber SD^ai fic^ ju (Snbe ncigte, unb ber SBalb iin erften (^riin
ftanb, !am ein 53rief. (^e^.) 10. ^ie (5Iegien ()offe id) auf htn
©onnabenb ju fc^icfen, unb benfe ben ^J}^ontag barauf fetOft 5U
fommen. (@.) 11. SSenn id^ nur im SSinter einige 3eit 6ei 3I)nen
fein !ann! {(^,) 12. Qn bem ^tamin be» un§ um^lOefannten
(Sa(on§, in ber ^^^einftra^e ^0. 21, brannte ein IjeKeg geuer.
(^et).) 13. Tldn ^ater fc()ien mit ben ^einigcn in ber (SdjtDci^
nid)t. im beften dnutierftdnbni^ [(Sinl)erftdnbni§] 5U leben. G^auff.)
14. ©ie Uerlangen if)ren Oberft, ben Wa^c, ^uriic!. (@d^.) 15.
Sidi (efjnte ba§ ^i(b bc» Drcfteg. ha^ fie eben in ber §anb l)ielt,
ftidfd)tueigenb an bie 3Sanb. M^ZarUtt.) 16. !5)ie !(eine acf)tidl)rigc
©den ftanb bla§ unb ftumm baOei. (^etj.) It. 2)a§ gtiidlic^e alte
^aar tierbringt bie gtittermoc^en abtnec^fefnb im btii^enben
Stalien unb im luftigen ^ari». (?euau.) 18. (Sr luanbelte, in
feinen fc^mer5lic§en (^ebanfen uertieft, iiOer bie 9i()cinbrUc!e htm
alten ©tragburg 5U. (^ei).) 19. !$)ie ©tabt (ag bereit§ im ©d^tafe,
unb and) im §anfe be§ ^ommanbanten tvav fd)on aik^ 5ur 'knijt
gegangen. (SSerner.) 20. ©anj cbcnfo ftanb SQ^ic^elangelo 5mifc§en
d35
336 EXEBCISES.
^ergangen'^eit unb gufunft. (®.) 21. ®a0 tvax in ber ^^at
(^otteS ginger. (@(^.) 22. ^(^ mug ^nnbert t)on biefen neu
brutfen laffen. (®(^.) 23. 3tnfang Wdx^ gie^t ber ^aifer norb=
vo'dxt^, tDQ^renb Siemens nad) ^om ^nrMfe^rt. (^. @r.) 24. gur
^orgefd^ic^te biefe§ ^uffa^eg ^ah^ id) golgenbe§ gu bemerfen.
(tar^Iee.)' 25. (^§ freut mic^, ha^ ©ie je^t toCftcinbig gered^t^
fertigt bafte^en, fagte er gu (Srflerem. (Sinterfelb.) 26. SDe§
a)iorgen§ ben!' an beinen ©ott, be§ 5(benb§ ben!' nn beinen ^ob.
(S^r.) 27. Siebe ma^t ben ^liigften gum S^^arren. (@)3r.) 28.
a^ein ^ater beftimmte ntic^, aU id) 20 Qa^re alt unb gut getrac^fen
Wax, 5um ©olbaten. (^auff.) 29. (Sr tnar 48 Qa^re alt, at§ er
e:arbinat murbe. (§. ®r.) 30. ^ie§ ift IXrfad^e, hci^ id) ben
aJ^eifterl" fo tange be^ielt. (@(^.) 31. (Sr iDar jc^on langft SSitt-
tner [SSitmer] gemorben. (C^auff.) 32. (Sie finb 6oIbat mie id§,
unb ju unferem ^erufe ge^ort nun einmal bie ©efa^r. (Seruer.)
(67.) 1. Tlit feftem ©c^ritt ging er tno^l cine ^albe ©tunbe
in fetnem Qelte auf unb nieber. ((Sber«.) 2. ^c^ ^atte nie* gebad^t,
hai in bem ernften, flillen SJiann ein fold^er Duett \)on §umor
fpruble.f (§e^.)
1 THEME L
USE OF THE AUTICLES.
1. Life is an eternal war, and only death brings us peace.
2. I do not like history, for it tells only of war and of
death. 3. Man was not created for war, but for peace
and for happiness. 4. The old woman held the child in
her arms, while I was reading the letter. 5. Her son
wrote the letter Wednesday and he will come himself Sun-
day. 6. He went away in February. 7. In summer my
friends are in Switzerland, but in winter they live in
Rhine street. 8. Have you seen the picture of little
Henry? 9. Old Charles sent it to me, when I was in
Southern Germany. 10. I love the good and wise books,
and I am now reading Goethe. 11. When I was in Italy I
spent several weeksj in old Rome and in beautiful Florence.
^Wilhelm Meister, a novel by Goethe.
See 332.3. f 333.36. :|:230.
EXERCISES. 337
12. Italy is tlie most beautiful country on earth. 13. The
children go early to bed, and when we came back, they al-
ready lay asleep. 14 We have at least a hundred of his
letters, in the first we read the following. 15. He was 70
years old when the death of his wife made him a widower.
16. "VVe visit him twice a week. 17. We always find him at
home of a morning. 18. He is the brother of my old mas-
ter, and he was formerly a soldier. 19. I have never
known so good a man. 20. He has been very ill, but such
a man does not fear* death. 21. We passed half the win-
ter in Berlin.
HiLUstbative seistences h.
adjectives.
(115.) 1. 5Iti bemfelljen 5l6enb fanb nod^ em ^Ibfd^teb ftatt,
ahcx luir ein brieflic^er. (^e^.) 2. ^ie ganje alte 2BeIt fe^t
bie miitterlic^e Siebe iiOer bie Udterlicl^e. (3. ^. 9^.)
(116.) 1. ®te SSett iDirb alt unb \v\xh tuieber fimg, bod^
Dcr TltnU^ fjofft immer ^erbefferung. (®(^.) 2. ©bel fel ber
9J^eufcf), ^^iilfreid) uub gut. (®.) 3. Unermej^Hc^ unb mieublld^,
Hegft bu t)or tntr au^gelireitet, alte§, fjeilige^, emige§ SD^eer.
{%, (3x,) 4. 3c^ wiii mic^ frei xtnb gliicflid^ traumen. (@(^.)
5. SDer 5tlte iijar fremb in biefer ©tabt, er fiiljlte ftc^ emfam.
(§au[f.) 6. 5)ocr) r;att' tc^ cinen ^ruber, \>tn ^ruber fc^Iugt Q^r
tobt [tot]. (®eiM.) 1. (Bo Utid) ^attt fie ber ^iiitftler felten ge*
fe^en.. ((Sbers.) 8. Qn emem ^^al, bei nrmen §irtei!, erfc^teu
. . . . em 3}iabcl)en, fc^on imb ttjunberbar. {@(^.) 9. ^ fe^t bie
^rone golben if)r in§ nupraune §aar. (U().)
(121.) 1. ©0 tDar i{)nen immer gtuetfello0, ha'^ er eine
geiftige aRarf)t erften 9^ange§ .... fel. (?aube.) 2. §ilfe ift jebeS*
mat \)a^ ^inb eifrigen ^eftreben§. (53en3et=®teruau.)
(123.) 1. ©in folc()cr bimfeKjaftcr unb uubaterlanbifd^er
90?enfcl) ^t §o(^t)erratr} [^rat] begaugeu. (^o^.) 2. ®er grembe
erfunbigte fi^ m6) beu ^efi^eru \?er{c^iebener gro^ett ©ebftube.
*ji(^ fftn^ten t)cc
338 EXERCISES.
(124.) 1. 0, fonnteft bu in meinem ^nnern lefen, trie ttjentg
SSater uitb ©o^ii folc^ einc^ 9flu^me§ \mxti) gemefeu ! ((^.) 2.
SSielgoIbene 33itbcr fa^ ic!^ urn mtc^ fc^trebeu. (^%uer.) 3. 3BeIc^
anberer ©c^ulb* tierflagt bicf) bein ©etDtffen ? (®cf).) 4. (Sie Der-
lebten ntanc^eu faueren ^ag. (®d|.) 5. SDu ti:)Dtlteft atten biefen
(^lan^ berlaffeti ! (@d^.)
(125.) 1. (Sr tuar beim ^onig 5tDeit)otte ©tunben. (S(^.) 2.
SDa moc^t' ic^ ^infinfen auf bie ^iiiee unb rufen : bu unenblii^er
lieber ^ater, n)ie ift beine SBelt fo fi^bu ! (^ocfi.) 3. G^i'mftig ift
biefe Sage fiir un§ europdifc^en ^tduber. (Berber.) 4. S)u im §im^
met, ^ilf mir armeu, fc^ir)ar5en SO^anu! (Staubius.) 5. ^a, unb
bu mirft aud^ ntic^ armen ^riippel nidjt gang Dergeffen. ((Sbers.)
(l26.) 1. @r bringt fein treu oltengli]^ §er5 ^uriicf. (®c^.)
2. (S§ ift ber ^rieg ein ro^, getDaltfam ganbmer!. {B(i).)
(127.) 1. 2Bir joHen !eine eigene ^buige me()r ^aben,
feinen eingeborenen §errn. (<Sd^.) 2. $8ie(e raei^e ©c^mdnc
jd^trimmen ftiU auf be§ (Surota§ SBogen. {TlnUn.) •
(128.) 1. (^eeubigt nac^ langem, berberblidjen (Streit, Wax
bie faiferlofe, bie fd)rec!(id)e B^it- (^c^^-) 2. lieber $l)rgo§ unb
Saranba ^atte man bie ^Befi^ungen be§ (^riftlic^ ornienifd^en
giirften £eo erreic^t. (Sflaumer.) 3. ^a§ ift ein feltfam number'
bare§ B^ic^^i^ • ®^ ^^^^^ ^iele, bie ha§> nic^t gefeljen. (®d^.)
(129.) 1. Siebe bie ^uten mit treuem muii)e [SRute], bann
^aft bu ha§> (^ute. (§ammer.) 2. 3eber ^^iinftler ift ein ^riefter :
bag ^ei^t, ein ^erfiinbiger be§ (^ottlic^en. (33urott).) 3. ^er
SSeife befommt alk§ t)on ficl^, ber J^or olleS tion anberen. (3. ^.
^.) 4. Df^eic^er, frage nict)t ben 5trmen, tt)ie er arm gen)orben ift.
(aJJiitter.) 5. ^er ^rieb ber (Selbfter^altung erlnac^t, ha ic^ etmag
^oftbareres ju er^alten \)aht aB mid). (?eff.) 6. Sd) bring' bir auc§
mag §iibf^e§ mit t)om (S^ni. (@c^.) 1. 6ie treten unter bie gen=^
fter, unb empfangen, ftatt 5IImofen, Budermer!, ^iiffe unb m^
man i'^nen fonft 5trtige§ geben mag. (®.)
(130.) 1. 9lun trugen un§ ^bie SSeHen ftid unb fanft
^erunter. (tomer.) 2. ©§ ift leii^t ben ^ag, fd)tt)er bie Siebe, am
fdjtDerften bie ^(etd^giiltigfeit ju ertragen. (Some.)
(140.) 1. SDer ©liter ^i3d)fte0 biirfen voix bert^eibigen [Der^
*See219. 2.
EXERCISES. 339
teibigen] gegen (^sietualt. (ad).) 2. ^ItteS (Sdjone ift fanft, ba^cr
fhib bie fc^bnften golfer bie ruTjigften. (3. ^. 91.) 3. SDer gag
§mifd)en ^erfalleiicii greiuibeii ift gemiifjiilid) bcr gvimmigfle unb
um^erfofjiilic^fte. (®(^.) 4. ^apfer ift ber Somenfietjer, tapfererift
ber SBeltOc^tuimjer, bodj am tapferfteu ift, toer fid) felbft ()e5mang.
(Berber.) 5. (Sin ebter §elb ift, ber fiir§ SSaterlaub, ein eblerer,
ber fiir be§ ^anbe§ 3So^I, ber ebelfte, ber fiir bie SD^eufdj^eit
fiimpft. (Berber.) 6. 3u ben ^ropen finb bie ©etucidjfe Don
frifc^erem ^riin, mit (jriif^cren unb gidnjenberen ^Icittcrn gejiert,
aU in h^n nLirblid)crcn (Srbftric^en. (^um.) 1. ®er !(are ^ac§
fc^eint am fc^onftcn in fcinem ru^igen Sauf, ha^ tiefe M^^v
om er[)aOenften in fcincr ^etuegung. (@(^.) 8. ^c^ fterbe ! ha^
ift balb gefagt unb Otllbcr noc^ get^an. (®.) 9. 'Diefe jungen
SBdume, unb e§ iDaren gerabe bie aIIerfct)onften, be^ielten immer
aKe i^re 3rt)eige. (?lnberfon.) 10. Sebe§ bcr a}lenfd)^eit* ermiefene
Unred^t rcic^et auf» fiird)terU(^fte fid) felOft. (Berber.) 11. 5ltter^
liebft fc^offen bie golbencn (SDnnen(id)ter burd) ha§> bid^te ^^an*
nengriin. (C»ei.)
(144.) 1. 3c^ bin bod) erfc^redlic^ neugierig mie fie nur
au§fe^en mag. (tomer.)
(145.) 1. Xcx kronen miirbig fein, ift me[)r al§ kronen
trogen. (^rouegf.) 2. ^ie Settler finb ben gunben feinb, unb
bie gunbe ben ^ettlcrn. {Bpx.) 3. @§ ift bem Tltn\^tn Ieid}ter
unb getaufigcr 5U fd)meic^eln al§ 5U loben. (3. ^. 9^.) 4. ®en
SSein aber tran! cr gleid) au§ ben gdffern, of)ne ba^ er ein ©Ia§
nott)ig [notig] r)atte. (3. ®r.)
(146.) i. g(orcn§ ift rcid) an feinen 2Ser!en. (^. ®r.) 2.
(Sr fii^Ite fid) nun fo arm an (^nabe, an (^iitern, unb fremb in
bem, toa§ er Uon Sugenb auf aB fein (5igent()um [©igentumj
betradjten fonntc. (®.)
(147.) 1. (Sr fannte bie D^amen ber auf bem SSege nad)
Valencia licgenben (Stdbte. ((Sbcrg.) 2. 5(u^er ben Don ©panien
mitgebrad)tcn (Solbaten, I)atte ^arl bie Oor 9[RaiIanb fiegreid)en
^ruppen bei fic^. (^. (3x.) 3. '^^iefe (Stabt lag auf ber am norb^
lic^ften in§ 30^eer I)ert)orragenben ©pi^e 5lfri!a^, ha, wo je^t ^
^uni§ liegt. (®rube.)
*See 222. Vk
340 BXEBGISES.
THEME n.
ADJECTIVES.
1. Who does not love old. friends more than new ones?
2. The young man had to* leave the city and go into a
strange one. 3. Never had his home appeared to him so
beautiful. 4. Now he was alone among strangers, and he
felt himself sad and lonely. 5. But he found new friends,
good and helpful (ones). 6. He had often dreamed him-
self rich and powerful ; now he had become rich, but he
was also old and unhappy. 7. He gave us a glass of good
beer and a piece of black bread. 8. With the help of eager
endeavor he became a very learned man. 9. What a spiri-
tual power this man has been. 10. Has he truly committed
such a treason ? 11. Several strange men have asked after
the owner of this building. 12. Such beautiful maidens
appear seldom in our valley. 13. Many a noble man have
these soldiers struck dead. 14. O, ye poor shepherds, what
a happy year have I passed in your valley. 15. We poor
men never see our king. 16. The king is good ; he will
surely help thee, poor unhappy man.
17. Forget not the poor and unhappy. 18. Only the
eternal, the unending, is godlike. 19. The true artist must
only love the eternally beautiful. 20. Have you brought
me anything pretty? 21. You foolish children always
want to have something new. 22. The fool does not un-
derstand anything, whatever wise thing one* may say
to him. 23. The most costly thing which I have to pre-
serve is not my own life.
24. The two enemies look at each f other grimly. 25.
I bear more easily the hatred of my enemy than his indif-
ference. 26. The noblest man fights, not only for his
fatherland, but for humanity. 27. The brave man van-
quishes his enemies, but only the bravest can vanquish
himself. 28. In the more northern countries the plants
are smaller p-nd less beautiful than in the tropics. 29. The
EXERCISES. • 341
most terrible movements of the ocean are the most sub-
lime. 20. The ocean is not always most beautiful when it
is quietest. 31. These little trees which have kept all their
twigs are charming. 32. I cannot praise a man quite un-
known to me. 33. The brother, by three years younger, is
taller than the older one. 34 The troops victorious at
Tunis now had to go to the city lying on the most north-
ern point of Africa.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES, HL
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
(152.) 1. SDer $err ^t meiti nod§ nie bergeffen, t^ergig,
ntein ^erj, and) feiner nic^t. (©ettert.) 2. 9Hc^t metnet^atben,
fonbern mehtcr 8o§ne megen, feufjte idf) in ber finftcrcn Dlac^t :
§ei'r, erf)a(te un§ ! (M.)
(154.) 1. ^a ift ber 9^ing ©eOen (Sieger, fagte id)
(jaftig unb flecfte if)n in ber 3erftrenung an ben ginger, orbentlic^
frof), i^n tDieber 5n Ijaben. (§et).) 2. ®ie 9Zelfe foil man nic^t
t)cr)c^md()en, fie ift be§ (partners SSonne. (®.) 3. ^er ^rief htn
hu gefc()rieben, er mac^t mid) gar nic^t bang. (§ei.) 4. 5lC(e§
ging burd) ein gute§ $Beib, melc^e^ nid}t fern iDofjnte. {®.) 5.
2)enn mein Siebc^en, fie fc^reibt \va§> id) xijv bic^tete. {(B,) 6.
^er SSifle ift gut, aber 3Sinb nnb SSetter fdmpfen bagcgen. (@ci^.)
T. 9JZand)er ift ein 33ofetr)ic^t gemorben, toeil er faf), baf^ man i^n
bafiir ^ielt. ((lampe.) 8. §ier ein (Sjemptar be§ 5l(manad§§.
§umboIbt fenbet mir beren brei au§ 53ertin. (@(^.) 9. (Sriauben
die mir eine grage, t3ie((eid)t mai^t bie ^eantrt)ortung berfelben
^a^ Seitere iiberftiiffig. (®^iet.) 10. (Sd^on fangt e§ an ju bdm=
mern. (®eibet.) 11. (£^ regnet ! ©ott fegnet bie (Srbe, bie fo
burftigift. ((Sn§Uu.) 12. (S§ trarcn einmal fUnfunbjmanjig 3inn^
folbaten. (^ubeiiou.) 13. (£§ mar aber eine 5Irt bon ^ermirrnng
iiber bie 'Dieuerfctiaft gefommen. (?enjolb.) 14. ®a mar e§ fait
unb finfter, e§ fc^ricen bie 9taben Dom ^ac§. (abutter.) 15. 'i)ie
Seute, melcf)e im ^orfe mDf)uten, a^nten gar nic^tg batjon ; benn
eg maren gan^ gemo^nti^e Seute. (?eanber.) 16. 5)er Qa^ ift
parteiif(^, aber bie S^iebe ift eg noc^ me^v. (^e(f.) XT. 9?^it meinen
342 ^ EXERCISES.
5lrBeiten bartn Inn ic^ t)iel beffer gufrieben, a(§ ic^ e§ mit benen
im borigcn 3a!)re bin. (@d^.) 18. ^anit tt)dren tt)ir ©!Int)en,
iinb Uerbieutcii e§ 511 fcin. (3c^.) 19. 3ft'§ jeuer 2^antn.tu§, ben
Supitcr 5u 9kt§ unb ^afel 509 ? (Sr ift e§. (®.) 20. SSer ift
ha? fragte er. 3c^ tun e§, antmortete bie Sitonigin. (JBeauber.)
(155.) 1. m<^t^ 2Sai:)re§ Idfst * fic^ Don ber 3n!nnft tDiffen.
(®c^.) 2. (£r felbft riicfte fic^ ben §tr»eiten gautenil Ijeran. (®^iel.)
3. DZacI) ber 3uU^9^e^oIution crn)d[)Ite er fid) ^ari§ ^nm SSo^n^
orte. (!^aube.) 4. Unb nnn niiiffen toir nn§ trenneu. SS>aiin inir
un§ mieberfeljen — trer nieig e^ ? (®^iel) 5. 9}(an miirbe ein^
onber beffcr feuneit, menn fic^ ntcf}t intnier einer bent anberen
gleicl)fte(len moc^te. (@.) 6. Ste f)ielten fic() lauQt feft aneinanber
gebriich nnb fc()dmten fic^ ifjrer ^^fjrdnen nicl)t. (§ei).) 1. ^erliere
bic^ felbft nnr nid)t, bann Oleibft bn bet jebem 53crlufte reid^
genug. (©ebaucr.) 8. ^er (^eijige gonnt fic^ fclber bie unfc^nlb-
igften ^ergniignngen nic^t. (trugge.)
(156.) 1. kBiegt bie mod' mir an§ ber ©ruft (@d^.) 2.
SSer berbnrb mir uneber biefe§ S^apitel ? (toc^.) 3. 2)er grembe
irarf bie ©igarre meg, bie i^m Icingft Qu^gegangen Wax. (^e^.)
4. 9Zun greift mir gn nnb feib nic^t faul. (®.)
THEME nX
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
1. If you have the ring, do not forget to give it to me.
2. I gave it to the child and he put it on his finger. 3. I
was very much rejoiced to receive your letter ; if it was
not long, it was very well written. 4. The young girl
wrote it, and she writes me many letters. 5. Give it to
me. I want to read what is f in it. 6. You may read it,
but you must not speak of it. 7. Is not this man a
I camp ? I have always held him for one. 8. Allow me a
question about it. 9. Not this man, but a brother of his is
the scamp. 10. I know his history, do not speak to me of it.
11. It began to rain and it became so cold and dark that
we were afraid. 12. There were many people in th^
*See343. 1.5d f fte^t.
EXERCISES. 343
house, but they only screamed and did ^nothing, for they
were very stupid people. 13. They were afraid, and I
was * too, but I said nothing of it. 14. He is not contented
with his work, but we are. 15. When I asked: is it y(^u?
he answered : it is not I, it is we. 16. If you are un-.
happy, you deserve to be so. 17. He chose himself a
friend who was worthy of his love. 18. But now they
have parted, and they are ashamed of their friendship.
19. They hate each other and wish never to see each
other again. 20. He is a bad man ; he is only a friend to
himself. 21. When one loses ones self one has lost every
thing. 22. Don't be lazy and don't spoil my work for me.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTEIJ-CES IV.
POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTEATIVE PRONOUNS.
(169.) 1. ®ie§ grauenfc^irffal ift l^or alien mein§. (®.)
2. ^f)ue beiue ^flic^t, ic^ ttjerbe meine t^un. (®.) 3. dJldn ^t^
f)eimniB [-ni^] !ann eucl^ gar nic^t^ nii^en, tr>enn ic^ nic^t gubor
t)C[§> cure ^abe. (^e[[.) 4. 3c^ freue mic^ meine§ Seben^ f in biefer
^etjenb, bie fiir folc^e Seelen cjefc^affen ift, wk bie mehte. (®.)
(160.) 1. ©eitbem ber Honig feinen (So^n bcrloren, t^er-
traut ev SSentgcnt bcr (Seiuen ntefjr. (®.) 2. SSarum foKtcn luir
nic^t mimfrfjcn, ncOcn ben Unfrigen gn ru^en ? {®.) 3. ^a bin
ic^ tDieber ! ®a§ ift meine §iitte ! 3c§ fte^e iDieber auf bem
SJ^einigen! (@cf).)
(161.) 1. "^zx (Srnft, wd6)tv i^m anf ber ©tirn lag nnb au§
ben 5(ngen fc[)aute, gaO iljin haS' ^Infefjcn eine§ ^OZanncS. (^ber«.)
2. 3:obt [tot] Iat3 er ha in feinem ^alafte, i^m jn .^auptcu §
ftanb ha§> unnoUcnbete (^emiilbe. (^. (Bv.) 3. D^oc)^ jittert i()r ber
©d)rec! biirc^ {ebe Dkrtie. (^eff.) 4. Sturj t)orI)er wax cinein in
glorenj ber S^opf al)i3efrf)(agen tDorben. (C). ^v.)
(166.) 1. (eie finb) meine Slinber nnb bie meiner lieben
(Sd^inagerin, antmortete ber ^eiftlic^e. (^^rei.) 2. !I)er Xjat ben
©4ilb, be§ ift bie ^ron', ber tt)irb ha§> Meinob bringen I (U^
*t^ot eg. t 219.3. X 222.11. § Antique phrt^se ; at his head.
344 £XE£€ISES.
3. ^ie SBefc^eiben'^eit ]oUtt bte ^ugenb berer fetn, benen btc
Qitberen fe^Ien. (53vummer.) 4. Xtx ift'§, \)a§> ift er ! 5)er rettete
bie Stonigin. (@(^.) 6. ^iele ijermec^feln gar bie 9}iittel imb ben
Q\v^d, erfreuen jid^ an jenen. .oI)ne biefen im 5luge §u befallen.
(®f5 6. 9^ur einjelnen ©iinftlingen t^eilte [tettte] er ^teg ober
3ene§ gur ^(nfic^t mtt. (^. ®r.) Y. SSaren ba§ bie Sippen,* bie er
fo oft gefii^t,* bie§ bie golbigen $aare, bie er fo oft urn feine
§anb gemitfelt ? (Srenjel) 8. S)ie betDeine md)t me^r, bie fd)on
5ur S^u^e gegangen, bie bett)eine, bie fiirc^ten ben f ommenben ^ob.
(Berber.) 9. 5)ie in feiner ©trafje tr»o^nten, fannten i^n atte.
(^e^.) 10. ^a, \)a^ roaren bie 5lugen, bie treuen flaren 5tugen,
bie er t)orf;er gefe^en. (®piel.) 11. ^a§ tDoUen a((e $eroeii fein,
unb feiner ift $err Don fic§. ((S.) 12. ^auer: „©nabige §erren,
einen Q3iffen nnb ^rnn!." ©olbat: „©i, ha^ mng immer fanfen
nnb frcffen." (@d^.)
(168-71.) 1. ^emiemgen, ber t>a§> (Sc^reiben ber S^tegier*
ung iiberbringt, ftofet er feinen ^olc!^ in bie ^ruft. (^. ®r.) 2.
<Bk (bie ^teligion) ift tnie ha§> $DZeer, }e nie()r man baffelbe beob*
Oi^tet, befto imenblid^er fc^eint e§. (33rummer.) 3. 5(m meiften
fc^abet ber bofe 1Rat§ [^at] bemfelOen, ber i^n gegeben ^at.
(@|)r.) 4. D^lotanb ritt l^interm ^ater ^er, tnit beffen ©peer unb
©d^ilbe. (U^.) 5. ^ie Sugenb iiberiDinbet ben (Sturm ber
Seibenfd^aften, ^a^ fitter unterliegt bemfelben. {<Bpx4
THEME IV.
POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTRATIVE PEONOUNa
1. He does not do his duty and I will not do mine. 2.
The secret is ours, it cannot be of use to you, and it will
never become yours. 3. I rejoice in the beauty f of this
country, which seems to be created for me and mine. 4.
Each one loves his own (people), his own (possession)
best. 5. We travel no more, we live quietly among our
own people. 6. He had the appearance of deep earnest-
ness, but when I looked into his eyes I saw that he was
« 439.30. t^iaa.
EXEKCISES. 345
laugMng. 7. My hands tremble, fear penetrates every
nerve, I cannot look liim in the face. 8. What do you
fear ; he cannot cut off your head ? 9. The fright has
spoiled my pleasure, too. 10. These are my children, the
others are those of my brother. 11. This (man) has all
the virtues, to this one they are all lacking, even modesty,
12. He is always promising to tell us this or that thing,
but he really has nothing to say to us. 13. These weep,
because they fear death, those because they are not
already gone to rest. 14. No, those are not my true friends,
those I do not know. 15. These (fellows) want to be the
friends of every one,* but not one of them knows what
friendship is. 16. That is the one who gave the bad ad-
vice to the government, 17. He is the same who brought
us the writing. 18. His head will be cut ofL 19, Youth
rejoices in life,"!" age contemplates it.
HiIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES V.
INTEKKOGATIVE AND KELATIVE PEONOUNa
(173.) 1. 28eg ift ber ©rbenraum ? ^e§ gteigiGen. SSe§
ift bie §errfc^aft ? ®e§ ^erftanbigen. (Berber.) 2. SSa§ Derfiirjt
mir bie Qzxt ? ^()atig!eit. 2Ba^ macl)t fte unertraglic^ lang ?
TOlfeigsang. ((^.) 3. 3^i5er ift eiti unbraud)linrer SQknn? S)er
nid^t befe()ten imb nic^t tjefjorc^en fann. (®.) 4. SSoburd^ tDirb
SBiirb' unb ©(iic! er fallen lange 3eit ? S<^ nmm : burc^ niii)t§
me^r aU burc!^ ^efc^eiben()eit. (?ogau.)
(174.) 1. 3SeIrf^e^3 ^(luje \md)t ilber bie ©d^irffate ber Wtn^
fc^en ? SSetc^e gerccfjte §anb tl^eilt [teilt] bie ©liter be§ Selieng
au§ ? (©ngel.) 2. 3Setc^' ein ©efii^l mu^t bu, o grower Tlann,
6ei ber ^ere^rung biefer SJ^enge ^aben. (®.)
(175.) 1. 3Sag inccfen nu§ bem ©djtummer mtc^ fiir fiij^e
flange boc^ ? {\X%) 2. SSa^ fiir ein gottlicljer Sllenfc^ miigte ber
nid^t merben, ber fic^ entJcft(offc,J immer treu 511 fein I (3acobi.)
(176.) 1. ^ittft bu, mein ©o^n, frei bleiben, fo lerne voa^
3fie(f)te^ ! (®.) 2. SSer feine ^lage ^at, ber mad^t fid^ ttJeld&c
* eltte« Seben. t geiiitive case. :|: 332.3.
34G EXERCISES.
(.^o^eBuc.) 3. ®r tt)trb (^elb tjon tnir borgett, tuenn er fetbft
tretc^eg ju tierlei^en ^at (Seff.) 4. SSag fi^t S^r ^ier auf bent
naffen ©teiti, 9J^utter Sami^ ? fragte ic^. (^e^.) 5. 2Ba§ tDeint
i^r,SJlabc^eti? 223a§ flagt t§r, SSeikr? (»uer.) 6. e:iott, tt)a§
iftba§.^%b fc^on! (§ei).) t. SSa§ bie{e§ 9}Mbc^en loemerHd^
tt)irb, bad^te fie. (grei.)
(178.) 1. S^aQalie t)atte tierfc^iebene S3(umen bon feltfamer
(SJeftalt gebroc^en, bie SSil^elmen boKig unbefannc tDarett, unb
ttad^ beren Sf^amen er fragte. (®.) 2. SDie ^elbengro^e, mit ber fie
ftarben, na^m fiir ben (S^IanOen ein, fiir meli^en lie ftarben. (@c^.)
3. 9^i(f)t an bie (filter §ange bein ^er^, bie ha§> 2ch^n t)ergdnglic^
gieren ! (®(^.) 4. Tlan !annte ben geinb t)ott!ommen, bem man
je^t gegeniiber ftanb. (Bdj.)
(179.) 1. SSer aKgubiet bege^rt, ^at o(te§ oft tierloren.
(Sici^tnjer.) 2. ^ie 9}^enfcf)en finb nic^t immer, \va^ fie fc^einen,
(Seff.) 3. SSa0 ic^ t)ermod)te, '^ab^ t(^ gem get^an. (®.) 4.
SBem fie erfd^eint, loirb au§ fic^ felbft entriicft. SSem fie ge^i3rte,
tDarb 5n ^ofi) begliirft. {(§>.) 5. Sa§ t)or oKen ^ingen bir er^ciljlen
xva§> in ^abt)lon fiir einen fd^onen ©toff icl^ bir gefouft.
{?eff.) 6. Sc^ tiebe, n^er mir @nteg t^nt. i^d).) 1. SSer fie (bie
DZac^ric^t) ^orte, f(^reibt ^Safari, bem begann ber 53oben nnter
htn gii^en gu manfen, ber tmrbe bleic^ tDie ber ^ob. (^. @r.) 8.
SSen ba§ ©liic! p ftiirjen benft, ber mirb oft erft t)on i^m er^oben.
($!ogau.) 9. 2Ser nie fein ^rob mit 3^f}rdnen a^ ber fennt
euc^ nic^t, if)r ^immlifc^en Wd6^t^ ! (@.) 10. 9^un, licben greunbe,
luer ratten [raten] !ann, ber rat^e [rate], (l^eifeiri^.) 11. 2Ba§
bem ^erjen gefallt, ha§> fnc^en bie 5(ngcn. (@^r.) 12. SSeffen
2^h^n feinen frent, meffen IXmgang jeber fc^eut, ber I)at nic^t
t)iel fro^e 3eit. {^\>v.) 13. 2Ser mir bringt bie Sfron^ er foil fie
tragen. (@c^.) 14. 3^ ber ^iittefte^t ein£el)nftul)(. . . ber bar:=
onf fi^t, ber ift gtiicflic^. (^ei.) 15. !J)er ift ber §err ber (^be,
iDert^re ^tefe migt. (9?ot)ati8.) 16. SSer itn§ bc^a^It, ba^ ift ber
^aifer. (^d^.) 11. ^a ftng er an ^u (anfen, ma§ er lanfen fonnte.
(?eanber.) 18. SSa§ i^rer aucl^ •maxkn mag, nnb tro t^r fie trieber
fe'^en roerbet, i^r merbet fie in grieben n)ieberfe^en. (^e^.) 19.
SSa§ tc^ au(^ in biefem ^a'^re bertoren '^abc, meine (Selbftad^t^
ung ^abe t^ nid^t Derloren. [%xel) 20. SlSev bu an^ feift,* idft
* 332.5a.
EXERCISES. 847
njiinfc^c ^etturtg bir. (@(^.) 21. ®a§ ^efte, nja§ bu miffen
faimft, barfft bu bem ^uben boc^ nic^t fagen. (®.) 22. ^Itteg ift
5u ertrageu,* \m§> nur eiuen ^(ugenblicf bauert. (3. ^. 9ft.) 23.
2)n§ SSenige, iua§ cr fprac^, murbe mlt einem tDibrigen 3:on
nu§gefto6en. (^c^.) 24. (S^ ift nic^t irbtfc^e mu\\l tt)a§ mic^ \o
freubig macljt. (U(}.) 25. (S§ ift nur ein§, tDa§ un§ retten fann.
(180.) 1. §ier liegt ntir etmaS auf bem ^erjen, iroriiOer
ic^ aufgeflart gu fein triiinf^te.f (<S.) 2. SSer n)ei^ ii?orau§ ba§
^riinnlein quillt, tt)orau§ W'xx trinfeu roerbeu. (9leim.) 3. Sf^
ftel;e i30u bem <a\an!enbette auf, auf ba§ micl^ ber (Sc^mer^ iiber
ben ^erluft meiue§ Wanm^ marf. (?e[f.^ 4. Somit eiuer fiinbigt,
bamit mirb er gcftraft. (a|3u.) 5. ijod^mutl) [^oc^mut] ift'g, \\)o^
burci§ bie (Sucjel fieleu, morau ber |)oHettgeift ben SJlenfc^en fagt.
(®Cf).)
(181.) 1. SScirum bin ic^'§ adetu, ber uucjeliebt, auf eUJtg
liebt ? (tlo^.) 2. ©eib mir gegriiBt, befreuubete ©c^aaren, bie
mir 5ur 8ee 33et3leiter maren ! (@c^.) 3. S)u ©c^o, ^olbe
(Stimme biefe§ Zi)aU, bie oft mir "iJtutuiort gab auf meine Sieber,
Qo^anna ge^t ! {<Bd).) 3. Uub ©ie felbft, ber ©ie hen Seiertag
an 3^rem ©c()reibtifc^ gu ^eiligen pf(egeu, luie ftetjt e§ mit
Q^rem grof5en SScrfe ? (§ei).)
(182.) CSiu 9ieiter, fo nur ein ^ferb Ijat, foK nid)t $afer
ne^men fiir jniei. (@pr.) 2. §eilig ift ha§> (^efe^, fo bem Stiinftler
©c^on^eit gebietet. (@d^.) 3. SSer ba tabelt, ber fiit)It fic^ bem^
jenigen iiberlegen, gegen ben er fict) auf hen 9^icl)terftuf)l fc^t.
((Sberg.) 4. Sebe mol)t, bu ^eilige (Sd)tt)elle, too ba n^anbelt
Siebc^en traut. (§ei.)
THEME V.
INTERROGATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
1. Who are the happy ? the industrious. 2. "What are
the greatest virtues? Industry and modesty. 3. For
what did you hold him ; who told you that he was a use-
less man? 4. Of what did he command you to speak?
*84ain.l&. t 832.80.
348 EXERCISES.
5. "What sweet tones wake me from my slumber! 6.
Whose eye watches over the fates of men ? 7. What a
feeling of freedom I had, when I came out of the crowd !
8. What kind of feelings did you have when they waked
you ? 9. What kind of a man will this boy become, if he
learns nothing right ? 10. What can he learn when he
has no books? 11. Why does he weep and complain? It
he has no books I will give him some. 12. How stupid
he is becoming ; he will never learn anything right.
13. The gentleman, after whose name you ask, is quite
unknown to me. 14. All those whom I loved and with
whom I have lived, h^e died. 15. The people among
whom I now live, are the children of those whom I knew
formerly. 16. He who has lost his friends is unhappy and
lonely. 17. What I have bought for you I will give you.
18. I love those who love me. 19. I will tell you what it
is and to whom it belongs. 20. Tell me what sort of
beautiful things you saw in Babylon. 21. What I have
seen, that I am unable to tell you. 22. He who brings me
the bad news, he must advise me. 23. What he advises,
that does not please me. 24. He whom fortune has never
lifted up, he will never be cast down. 25. He who has
lost his self-respect, has lost everything, 26. Whatever
the emperor may pay me, I shall be contented. 27. Who-
ever may have come,* I wish to see him. 28. We have
lost all that which made us hapi3y. 29. He told us
nothing we did not know already. 30. There is only one
thing which is not to be borne. 31. It is not my self-
respect which I have lost this year. 32. You will soon see
the brook of which you have heard, and from which you
can drink. 33. The arm-chair in which I was sitting stood
beside the sick-bed in which the poor woman lay. 34. It
was pride through which she sinned. 35. I, who have
lost my husband, have been sufficiently punished. 36.
"WHiy am I punished, who am already so unhappy ? 37.
Happy man, who hast never yet lost a friend. 38. Was
• 832.5(1.
EXEECISES. 349
it you, who gave me the answer to my questions. 39. And
you yourself, who have always lived in this valley, why
do you now leave it ? 40. You I blame who seat yourself
upon a judgment seat.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VL
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS.
(185.) 1. Man I)atte if)n getra^It, ot}ne re^t ju toiffen tr)o§
man tijat {^. (3v.) 2. 2Sa§ man ni^t m\% t)a§' eben brand)t
man, unb tva^ man meife, fann man nic^t braucl^en. (®.) 3.
S)em 9^a(^ften mu§ man ^elfen. (Sd).) 4. (Sin lieOer SSeg mirb
einem nid)t lang ; gem ge()t man gemoljnte (Straj^en. {Md.)
(186.) 1. 9^iemanb lebt fo, iDte er modjte, jeber lebt
nur, mie er !ann. (Crtle^jp.) 2. 5((Ier SSett grennb ift 9Hemanbe§
grennb. (@^r.) 3. ^erfc^toffener SJiunb unb offene ^ugen ^aben
noc^ Dliemanbem gefc^abet. (<Spr.)
(188.) 1. Sa, bann fommt ^t\va^ ^effere§, nod^ meit ©(^one*
re§! (5luberfeu.) 2. 9?i^t§ SSa^reg la^t fic^ t)on ber Su^unft
miffen.* (ed).) 3. 3Ser S^Jic^tg au§ fic^ mad)t, ift Td6)t^. (epr.)
(189.) 1. ©0 lebte id) etlid^e glnrf(icf)e 3af)re. (Stelanb.)
(190.) 1. ^r (ber (Solbat) mu^ fic^ af(e§ nel)men, man
giebt if)m nid)t§ ; unb jeglic^emf gegtDungen ju neljmen, ift er
jeglid^em ein ®reue(. {<B6).) 2. ®a» ift ber grofste ^ort^eil [^or=
teil] fiir bie ^[Renfc^^eit, ha^ jeber fiir bie anberen alle§ tl;ue.j
(@(^efer,)
(191.) 1. ^ann mu§ id^ mein Seben laffen, tc^ unb mand^er
^amerab. (U^.) 2. SSer t)iete§ bringt, iDirb monc^em cttva^
bringen. (®.)
(192.) 1. 3n bunten SBilbern Ujenig ^ar^eit, t)iel Strt^itm
[Qrrtum] unb ein Siinfc^en SSa^r^eit, fo mirb ber befte ^ran!
gebraut. (®.) 2. ^iete§ miinfc^t fic^ ber 9J?enfd), unb bo(^ be*
barf er nur menig. (®.) 3. Qd) !i3nnte \\)m rcd)t biel SSofe^
bafiir t^un. {B^.) 4. SJ^e^rere neue Xox\^x famen jum fQox^
fc^ein. 1®.)
*84ai.5d. 1 222.L3 and 857. ;3d3.3a
360 EXEECISES.
(193.) 1. 5tu§ aii ben fvcmbeu (Sttimmen . . . . finbcit bic
(Sc^tDt)feer 3J?anner fid) ()erau§. (@d^.} 2. Qc^ cjrub'^ mit alien
\)tn SSiirjIem nu». (®.)' 3. ©ie fuunten mir mit all S^rem
guten SSideii nic()t Ijelfeit. (^ei).) 4. 5l(Ie§ beugte jtrf) Dor bent
^ilbe be§ (^elrenjicjten, unb and) S5eit iparf ficl^ nieber. (Corner.)
5. (^riifsen ©ie a((e§, ipa§ ©ie nnujiedt. (@c^.) 6. ©inb ba§ ade
enre Stinber? fragte ber .^^onig. {^vel) 7. ^ie 9^ac^t ift ein^
getreten, nnb ein jeber tt)nnfd}t ficl^ 5n eigener D^lnfje ©IM. (@.)
8. 2Bir ntiiffen jel^t alte filnf 3^^^^^ umlernen, tt^enn W)\x nic^t
gan§ au§ ber ^J^obe fommen ir)oI(en. (®.)
(194-195.) 1. 3Sa§ bent einen recl)t ift, ift bent anberen
bidig. (®cf).) 2, ^i§ bag ©ffen fertig Wixh, n)onen n)ir ein§
trinfen. (®.) 3. JJrin! an§ bent befrdn^ten ^ecl^er. @o ! nod^
eing ! (tteift.) 4. ®er SSinter ift ein biifterer (^aft, unb enget
einent bag §er5. (®c^.) 5. 3c^ arOeite gar nici^tg, unb- !ann
!eine fed^g S^i^^^ ()intereinanber fc^reiben. (^ei.) 6. SSenn ic^
mix felbft !ein ^eufet tndr' ! (®.) 1. ^ir finb in !eine f(^Iec^ten
|)anbe gefatten. (®(f|.)
THEME VL
INDEFINITE PEONOUNS AND NUMERALS.
1. One lives as one can, not as one would like to. 2.
People do not always say what they think. 3. What we
need, we never have. 4. They have chosen no one yet,
but they must soon choose some one. 5. The good man will
always help one, even when he is himself unhappy. 6.
This man helps no one, he has injured every one.*
7. One does not need to say anything true, if one only
can say something interesting. 8. Each one takes what
he can for himself. 9. We have lost many a comrade and
this day will again bring death to many a one. 10. They say
much evil of the soldier, but the soldier needs little and
is contented with little. 11. I haVe known several
soldiers ; they were all good men. 12. Of all the pic-
* einen Sebeiu
EXERCISES. 351
tures I like only one. 13. Every one admires the pictures,
but not all understand them. 14. I buy every year a few-
pictures. 15. All these old clothes have gone quite out of
style. 16. I love this little village with all its old houses.
17. We have drank two glasses of beer already, but we will
drink another. 18. I always drink another beer. 19. The
one drinks too much, the other will not drink at all. 20. I
have not written him a single line ; I am no friend of his.
rLIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VIL
FORMS OF DECLENSION. NUMBERS.
(211.) 1. SSeber t)on SU^afern noc^ SSinbdlatterit Ukh \^
Derfc^ont. (®.) 2. sr)ie 9[)^iitter erfd^tenen, ben <SaugHng im
^trme. (®.) 3. ®ret Zao, imb brei ^ad)t ^at bie ©^^ac^t ge^
!rac^t. mM.) 4. Sni fiibinbifc^en ^Irc^ipet ^at bie ^liit^e [^liite]
ber ^afflefia faft brei gug ^urc^meffeu unb tt)iegt iitier 14 ^funb.
(^um.) 5. 3m ^Ipril ftub bie 10,000 mann X^alatefta^g auf bie
$a(fte ^ufammengejc^moljen. (§. ®r.) 6. Qn ber Wittt UcM
fiir bie SBagen mir ber 0taum Uon jmlilf bi§ t)ier5et)n ©c^ritten.
(®.) 7. SDiefe ^ame ^at einen Dfjrring Don imgefci^r 3,400
^^der SSertf) Pert] berloreit. (^et).) 8. ^ie grofeeren Simgen
^atkn beim 9ie!tor Don 10 bi§ 11, unb tt)ir fleinen t)on 11 bi^
12 Ufjr ^riijatftnnbe. (toc^.)
ILIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES VIIL
THE NOMINATIVE.
(212.) 1. ^D^aria (Stuart mirb aB eiue .^onigin unb ^etbttr
fterben ! (@(^.) 2. ©ie jinb \)a§> §oc^fte, Uia§ 9[Rirf)eIangelo aU
S3i(b^auer gefc^affen ^at (^. ®r.) 3. (Seine 5(bfi(^t trar, ha^
^Ittejanbro, fein ©otju obcr 5^effe, ^erjog Uou glorenj iDiirbe.*
(213.) 1 . Scf) '^ei^e ber reic^fte 5J?nnn in ber getauften SSelt.
(®(^.) 2. ^arto§ ift gejonnen, ber Ungliicffeligfte in biefer SSelt
* 8d3.3e.
852 EXERCISES.
gu 6Iet6en. {®d^.) 3. S^ WdijU, tt)a§ ha§> ^cffere m\d) biinft.
^<Sc^.) 4. ©ie ^att'* e§ nie t)on i^m erfatjren, ha% fie eine C£f)riftm
geOoren fei, itnb feine Qiibin ? ($?eff.) 5. 9lic^t ein iUnh bin ic^
erfc^ienen. (@.) 6. ^a§ Seben ift !ein ^raurn, e§ mirb mir 5um
S^raume burd^ bte ©cfiulb be§ S^lenfc^en. (^eu(^ter§kben.) 7.
S)ein ^ater ift ^um ©c^elm an mir getnorben. (@c^.) 8. Qm
5(c!erbau ift ber SDZenfd^ 511m 9D^enfc{)en geiDorben. (3JJaftno.)
(214.) 1. ©liicffeliger SD^enfc^, ber ru^ig an ber ©eite be§
Sreunbeg fd^Inmmert, o^ne 5l^nung t)on 33errat^er [^errciter].
(^en3el=@ternau.) 2. SSidfommen, filberner Sli^onb, fc^bner,
fliaet ©efa^rte ber 9^ad^t ! [mop.)
THEME Vn.
NUMBEKS AND THE NOMINATIVE.
1. The small-pox did not spare me. 2. These blossoms
are several feet long and weigh many pounds. 3. Mala-
testa left Florence with 10,000 men; in April he had only
5,000 men. 4 The street is only 30 paces broad and 3 miles
long. 5. We remained in the wagon from 2 to 3 o'clock.
6. Elizabeth, queen of England and cousin off Mary
Stuart, was her bitterest enemy. 7. Carlos, the son of the
king of Spain, was a most unhappy prince. 8. The duke
appears to be a great hero. 9. Michael Angelo was born
a poor boy, but he became the most famous sculptor of
Italy. 10. This man is called a Christian, but he will al-
ways remain a Jew. 11. He has become the betrayer of his
friend. 12. Happy man, who has chosen the highest. 13.
Beautiful, unhappy queen, thou didst die like a heroine
and a Christian.
ILIiUSTRATIVE SENTENCES IX.
THE GENITIVE.
(216.) 1. S^e§ giirften ©^a| liegt am ftc^erften tn be0
SBoIfeg §anben. (®.) 2. SBet (^ott unb 9J?enf^en finb tjer^a^t
* 88a7. t ee.4c
EXEBCISES. 353
be§ §O(:^mutt)0 [^oc^mut^] 3etcf)cn. {md.) 3. ^oUfommene^
mM ift nid)t be§ aRenfdjen £od§ [2o§]. (SSielanb.) 4. ^ie
(Sc^rift ift bie jungere @cl)tx)efter ber ©pradjc. {S3en3et=@teruau.)
5. ©in grower Zijdi [^eil] unferer gel)ler Id^t ftc^ tierbeffern
utib trteber gut madden. (9ftetn^arb.) 6. ®a§ Seben ift ber ©liter
l^oc^fteS ni(^t, ber IXebet gri3^te§ aber ift bie 6c§ulb. (®c^.) 1.
S)er SSorte finb genug getredjfelt. (®.) 8. Seonarbo er^iett ben
^itet eineg 30ZaIer§ Reiner 5lKer-d3riftIi(^fteti a)kieftat. (§.®r.)
9. 5lnbrea bel ©arto* fe^Ite tuenig, urn eiti (^enie erften 9^ange§ 5U
l^eigen. (^. ®r.) 10. 9Zad) ^rieg unb ^ranb !ommt (S^otteg
(Segeti ing Sanb. (®^r.) 11. ©§ ift an bir, ba§ 3Ser! talenti^oHer
©c^iiter ^u beffern. ((Sbers.) 12. ®ie (Srfenntni^ [(!^r!enntni§]
be§ Srrt^unxg [Srrtum§] ift ber erfte ©c^ritt gur SSa^rljeit.
(^rummac^er.) 13. SDa finb i^rer Uiete, gro^e nnb Heine, rief fie.
(^rei.) 14. (S§ traren i§rer fieben. ((Sber«.) 15. Sieber ©ontt,
trie barf unfer einer feinen 5(ngen trauen? (?eff.) 16. SDie
fd^onften 3::raume t)on greiljeit iDerben im ^er!er getraumt. (@c^.)
li. OTe§ in ber SBelt Id^t fid) ertragen, nur ni djt eine 'iRtiijt bon
guten ^agen. {(§>.) 18. D, ha§> ift ein greunb bon unferm §errn
9[)^a}or. (!Be[f.) 19. 9^un "^olt mir eine ^anne SBein. (^reiltgrotf).)
20. ^effer ein Sotl) [Sot] grei^eit, aU 5e^n $funb ©olb. (@pr.)
21. Qc^ fet^te nti(^ ju ben ^auern unten in ber ©dienfftube nnb
tran! ntein ©Ia§ ^ier. {^e^.) 22. ^a§> ©tiic! ^ap^i^ ift eine
eite breit unb ^dlt 20 ©tten. (®.) 23. ®a ic^ n).enig ©lauben
l^abe, muJ3 ic^ barauf fel)en, mid^ mit ein bigc^en guter 23:>er!e in
ben ^immel ^inein^ufc^minbeln.f (^etj.) 24. Qd| gebe jebem
brei^ig OTer Sanbeg. {^d).) 25. Qd^ brac^tebie 3^*^}^^ -^^^^^
unb ^iereg ^erbor. (®.) 26. 5lm gtDangigften £)!tober fiel Tla\U
x\d)t in bie §dnbe ber (Spanier. ((Sberg.)
(217.) 1. (£t ftanb ba trie ein S3erbred§er, feine§ SSorteg
mdc^tig. i§ei).) 2. SSenn Qtjr mid^ ©uere§ S5ertronen§ miirbig
ad)tet, fo mi3get 3T}r mir mit (Surer ©efc^idjte t)ergeltcn. (^auff.)
3. !I)ie (Sbelfte bleibt nidjt ber Seffeln frei. (®cume.) 4. Q^r feib
unwiirbig be§ :^o^en ®enuffe§ ber (SItcrnfreube, bie if;r euren
(Sltem ftatt greube nur Qammer geboten. (3l(^o«e.) 5. Seber
^ittenbe ift fetneg S8eiftanbe§ Ijemig. (Sbere.) 6. ^te ganje
» dative case, f 846.2.
354 EXEECISES.
SSeig^eit bon jungen ^^^fen ift feinen ^ag (Srfa^rung mcrt^
[tt)ert]. ("ipfeffel) T. ©a fte^t boit fc^onen ^(umen bie ganje
(219.) 1. 2Bte biete SO^enf^en !(agt man ber ^oS^elt an,
inbe§ man fie nur ber ®nmm^eit anflagen follte. (3acob«.) 2.
SSeil i^r mtd^ meineg Sebeng f)abt geftc^ert, fo mH x6) end) bie
SSafjr^eit griinblic^ fagen. [Bd).) 3. Q^r gmangt bie S^iitter, ben
(S(f)iilbigen be§ 5D^orbe§ to^jufpred^en. (@(^.) 4 9^id§t§ !ann
i^ feine§ (Sc§lDur§ entbinben. (5Sielanb.) 5. $D^an not^igte
[nbtigte] if)n, feine Untert^anen aller ifjrer ^^fUc^ten ^u enttaffen.
((©c^.) 6. Seben 8ie recl^t \vo% freuen ©ie fic^ be§ 2eben§ unb
S5re§ 3Ser!e§. (@(^.) 7. (2cine§ §anbmer!§ fott ficl^ !einer fd^amen.
(@pr.) 8. d'g Tjabcn bie (^rofsen biefer SSelt firf) ber ©rbe be==
mad^tigt. (®.) 9. 2)er ^erjog !ann fid§ be§ (^ebrange^ !anm
enttebigen. (@d^.) 10. (Sr freute fid^ feiner rafd^en ^§at. (@ber8.)
11. S<^ fd[}ame mid^ ber Unerfa^ren^eit nnb meiner Qugenb
nid^t. {®.) 12. ^arob erbarmt'S ben $irten be§ atten, ^o'^en
$errn. (U^.) 13. (^ott erbarme fic^ beg Sanbe§ ! {8d^.) 14.
©ie bebiirfen in ber ^§at ber '3iui)^. (^iubauj 15. (Sin tugenb-
l^after 9[l^ann benft nie be§ ^obe§, er ben!t be§ Sebeng. d^M.)
16. ^ie SBelt fonnte feiner SSo^It^aten genie^en, nnb be§ (S^eber^
tiergeffen ? (®.) 11. 2)ie ^ienfte ber (^rofsen finb gefci^rlid^ nnb
lo^en ber Tln^t, be§ 3rt)ange§, ber (Srniebrigung nid)t, bie fie
foften. Wf.) ^ 18. ^d^ meig, ba§ (Sie tm (Srnft fpred^en, unb bod^
ift e§ mir faft, aU* tDoIIten ©ie meiner fpotten. (@ptel.) 19. Sag
mid^ ber neuen grei^eit geniegen. (®(^.) 20. @eben! ber Slrmen
gu ieber grift. (Slaubiug.) 21. (Sr ad^tete nid^t ber tt)armen
©onne nnb bet> frif d^en Suft. (Hnberjon.) 22. d'g fd^ont ber
^rieg and^ nid^t ha§> jarte ^inblein in ber SStege. (®c^,) 23.
SDe§ 50?orgeng ben! an beinen @ott. (@^r.)
(220.) 1. ^dC) r)abe biefer Stage hen §omer jnr §anb ge-
nommen. (®(^.) 2. Seiber itieig ic^ nod^ nid^t, ob id^ $0?ontagg
!ommen !ann. ((^.) 3. ^er ^rin^ §atte eine§ ^age§ mit feinem
(Sefolge bie (^allerie befnd^t. (.^auff.) 4. gtat)io ftiir§te l^inein
in fc^anber^after ©eftatt, bermorreneg §aupte§, jerfel^ten ^lei*
be§. (®.) 6. (Sr tpili eilenben gngeg boriiber fUe^en. (@c^.3 6.
* 433.6.
EXEECISES. 355
S3ei bent ^farr^ofepffegteber §err {ebe§mat anju^atten, fo oft er
beg SSegeg fu^r. (grei.) 1. Seic^ten ^au\§> ift ber 9^ul)m nid)t
gu '^aben. (C^erbev.) 8. ©ie^e tDte fc^mebenben ©c^tDungg im
Zan^t bie ^atire jic^ bre^en. {Bd).) 9. ^eine ^Irbeiten finb meljr
eineg ^ilbl)auer§, al§ eine§ ^olbfc^miebg. (@.) 10. C£'lifaOet^
ift meine§ (Stammer, meineg ^efd)led^t§ unb 9^ange§. (@c^.) 11.
S(^ ijaht il)n au^gefd^Iagen, unb nun ift meine§ 33(etben§ t)ier
nic^t Idnger. (§et).) 12. Wtt^zv ^at gefd^rieben unb ift rec^t guteg
mnt\)^ [mui^], m 13. Sm erften 5lugenblic! mx er SSilteng
ab^ufc^reiben. (§ei).) 14. ©ie tranfen be§ foftlic^en SBif^ofg.
(5SoB.) 15. ©ebrauc^t ber 3eit, fie flie^t fo f^nell t)on ^innen.
C@d^.) 16. ©in fleifeiger ^ann ftirbt niemalg §unger§. {(£taubiu6.)
IT. Seib guten mni^ Put^], fprad^ ber ©rei§, 3^r tt)erbet
mc^t biefeg Sager§ fterben. (@ru6e.) 18. SSir t^un, 'wa§> unfer§
5tmte§. gort ntit i^nt ! (@c^.) 19. 5)iefe§ §au§ ift nteine§ §errn,
be§ ^aifer§. ((©c^.) 20. ^ofe S^nge unb bofe D^ren finb be§
!^eufef§. (®pr.) 21. ©buarbS merb' ic^ nie. (®.) 22. D be§
(^Iiicf(i(^en, bent e§ tjergonnt ift, eine Suft mit eud§ ju at^men
[atmen] ! (®d).) 23. ^f"t be§ ^ofemid^t^ ! (Berber.)
THEME VnX
THE GENITIVE.
1. The prince's life lies in the hand of God. 2. Joy and
sorrow are the companions of mankind through life. 3.
Each one of our faults is hateful. 4. Pride is the greatest
of faults. 5. The name of the greatest painter of Italy was
Leonardo. 6. He was a painter of the first rank. 7. Italy
is the country of painters and of sculptors. 8. The
greatest part of his work is* in Paris. 9. The description
of these paintings is very interesting to me. 10. There
are only a few of them in my country. 11. The friends
of my children are also my friends. 12. The young
man's dreams were dreams of freedom and of happiness.
13. He drank several glasses of beer and ate two pounds
of meat as he sat in the bar-room. 14 Get me a bit of
befinbet ft^
356 EXERCISES.
bread. 15. Each one had twenty acres of good land. 16.
The first of February he went to Berlin. 17. He was
unworthy of freedom. 18. We are weary of this man's
stories. 19. The best man never remains free from faults.
20. Every young fool is sure of his own wisdom. 21. He
is my enemy, for he robbed me of hope. 22. I rejoice
in his friendship and love. 23. Why did you release him from
his work. 24. They accused him of murder, but the prince
has secured him his life. 25. The duke gained possession
of his confidence and then forced him to tell him all.
26. He is not ashamed of his deeds. 27. The duke took
pity on his youth and inexperience. 28. He needed his
kindnesses, for he was poor and ill. 29. You can never
quietly enjoy your good fortune, unless you remember
the poor and wretched. 30. He heeded not the words of
his parents, and mocked at their love. 31. Our happi-
ness in this world does not reward (us) the trouble which
it costs. 32. The young man rejoices in life and thinks
not of death, but death does not spare even the youngest.
33. In summer we can travel, but in winter we must
stay at home. 34 We went one day to see the old man,
but we did not find him. 35. With fresh courage he went
on his way. 36. Our friends are not all of the same age
with us. 37. Your words are more an enemy's than a
friend's. 38. This lady is of high rank and noble race.
39. They were of good courage when we went away.
40. I do not believe that they will die of hunger. 41.
Alas for the friends whom I have lost ! 42. Alas for the
happy days which are now past.*
rLLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES X.
THE DATIVE.
(222.) 1. ^en etgnen ^(aukn foUft bu btr ntd^t laffen
rauben ; attetn au(^ rauben foEtft bu feinem fetnen ^taubeii.
♦ toorbel.
EXEECISES. 357
md.) 2. ^onigitt ©opljie e;5ar(otte ^aljlte 3t ^a^x^, aU fie
bcr Xoh 1705 il)rem fonigli^en ®ema^(, i^rem eingtgen (Bo^n
raubte. (^ofer.) 3. ^em grlebli(f)en getra^rt man gem ben
grieben. (@(^.) 4. ^er red^te ^elbenfinn reic^t feft, !u^n unb
rur)ig ber ^efa^r bie §anb. (53euset=@ternau.) 5. ®er gute ^ontg
telnet bent SSetfen gern fein D^r. (^linger.) 6. Qc^ tnoUte t^r
ben ^ogcl njieberbringen. (§ei).) 1. SSenn bn ha§> tijnft, fo n^trb
®ott beinem SJlanne feine ©iinben t)ergeben. (?eanber.) 8. (^e^
fang nnb Siebe in fc^onem herein, fie er^Iten bem Seben htn
^ugenbfc^ein. (@(t).) 9. ^iBer miberfe^t fic^ bem ^efe^I be§
^ogteg ? (@c^.) 10. SSer fic^ bem ^otljtnenbigften [DZottnen^
bigften] inibmet, gefjt am fid)erften jnm S'l^U. (®.) 11. ^n
fannft bir jeben geinb t)erfo()nen nnb t»erbinben. (Sifci^enung.)
12. ^lanbe nur, bn Ipft t)iel getf^an, menn bir (S^ebnlb bn ge=
tno^neft an. (®.) 13. Qd^ fjabe mir'§ oft t)orgenommen, il)r ^erj
^n reinigen. (@d)tege(.) 14. Saft bir eine .^(einig!eit nic^t ndt)er
treten, aU fie tnert^ [mert] ift. Wf.) 15. ®a bn ber SSelt nii^t
fannft entfagen, erobere fie bir mit (^etualt. (platen.) 16. (Sr
foil mir nid^t lebenbig gel)en. (®.) 11. 2)iefe gaftfreien 50Mnner
'fatten bem jnngen SO^anne erianbt, i^re ^itber fo oft ^u befnc^en,
alg er immer toollte. (§auff.) 18. Scf) entlie^ ben grennb nnb
banfte i[;m. (^auff.) 19. 5ltte ^^onige (:^uropa§ T^ulbigten bem
fpanifc^en Seamen. {@(^.) 20. Qc^ folge gern bem eblen ^eifpiet,
ha§> ber jiingere giebt. (@(^.) 21. 2Ber 5l((en gefallen tt)i(l, inirb
ben 33effcrn immer miftfallcn. (@(i^e(Itng.) 22. Unfer (^^efiil)! fiir
bie D^atnr gleidjt ber (Smpfinbnng be§ .^ranfen fiir bie (^efnnb^eit.
im.) 23. !J)a§ ©die! I)ilft benen, bie fid) felbft I)elfen. ((Sngel.)
24. ^d) (jordje Uergebeiig iljrer ©timme nnb i()rem fommenben
gnfstritt. (33o^.) 25. ^f^ fef}e bem ^obe rn!)ig, ober ijielme'^r
mit ftitlem ^erlangen entgcgen. (Sietatib.) 26. $DZid)eIangeIo§
gamitie ge^iirte bem I)oI)en 5(bel ber ©tabt nid)t an. (^. @r.) 21.
S^Jur bnrd) bie bnnfle ^forte geljt man ber §eimat() [§eimatj
5n. (^oltt).) 28. 28er bem §en!er entlcinft, entlauft barnm bem
3:enfel nod^ nid^t. {<Bpx.) 29. SSertran bem gnten ©eift and^ in
ber fd^Ied^ten ©tnnbe. {md.) 30. (Sine innere S^^ot^menbigfeit
[^Zotmenbigfeit] treibt nn§, in attem nad) SSa^rl^eit 5n ftreben,
and) menu fie unferen S^eignngen nnb ^iinfc^en entgegenfte^t.
358 EXERCISES.
(Sielanb.) 31. SBeld^ grci^li^em (Sntf^tuffe gibft bu ^aum ? {®.)
32. Qd^ m)e Q^nen ubvigeng nic^t S^iebe ju fte^eit, fonbern ©ie
mir. (Sinterfelb.) 33. ®ie 28a^rl)eit ()at ijon je^er nur ben
©c^urfen \v^^ get^an. O^laten.) 34 i)e§ Seben§ ungentifi^te
greube Waxh feinem Qrbifc^en §u 3:^ei(. (®(^.) 35. SSer ift ein
^ruber mir ? SDer in ber 92ot[) [9^otJ mir gn §ilfe fommt. (Berber.)
36. ©rofeen ©teinen ge^t jeberman au§ bemSBege. (§ippet.) SI.
IXnfer fc^neKeg (^Uic! I)at un§ bem §a6 ber SQ^enfc^en b(o§geftettt.
(@t^.) 38. 9^o(^ geftern fiinbigt' man ben ^ob euc^ an, unb ^eute
tt)irb enc§ plo^Ud) f old^e grei^eit ! {@ci^.) 39. ^em ^ater grau^^
fet'§, er reitet gefc^minb. (®.) 40. (^nten erge^t e§ am (£nbe bod^
gut. (@(^.) 41. (S§ 5iemt bem eblen Tlann, ber grauen SSort
p ad^ten. (®.) 42. SSie ge^t e§ bir benn ? SSie ge^t e§ benn
beinem $errn ^ater unb beiner gran SO^utter? (?canber.) 43.
Wxx ift'g, al§ t)orte t(^ bie Sinben tior bem genfter raufc^en.
(Corner.) 44. SSie tvaxh mir, aU ic^ in§ Qnnere ber ^irc^e trat !
(@d£).) 45. ^er eine fprad^, tt)ie n)e§ iDirb mir! (^ei.) 46. 3(^
T^abe mir im ©tiden getobt, nur meinen (Srinnerungen gu leben,
unb meinem ^inbe. (§et).) 47. (Sin r)eilenb S^raut mad^ft jeber
SSunbe. (9^ot)oU§.) 48. ®em SSerbrec^er gtan^en, mie bem ^eften,
ber 9J^onb unb bie ©onne. (@.) 49. (^aftfreunblid^ tout bem
SSanberer im frieblid^en ^orfe bie ^benbgtocfe. (^olbertin.) 50.
9^un aber !amen bem ^apfte gang anbere ^inge 5U O^ren.
(^. ®i'.) 51. 3:^ranen ftanben bem atten Tlanm in 'i)tn 5tugen,
oB er mit ^eftigen, bro^nenben ©c^ritten bie (^allerie t)erlieg.
(^auff.) 52. 5Im 24ften gebruar ujurbe bem ^aifer bie ^rone auf'§
§aupt gefe^t. (^. ®r.) 53. (Seine gii^e trugen i^n tt)ie ein
n)atee§ ^ferb, bem ber S^leiter ben Qng^ti iiber ben §at§ ge^dngt
^at i^etj.) 54. ^ie 9teife nac^ 9^om hot je^t bie ©elegen^eit,
bem neuen §errn au§ bem SSege 5U ge^en. (^. @r.) 55. Seic^t
fet bir ha§> §er5 ! (@d§efer.) 56. ©ie miffen nid^t, mie t)otl mir
ba§ §er5 ift. (^et).) 5t. (Sr ftort mid^, n)ei( id^ i^m bie 5Ingft
anfetje. (tod^.) 58. ^d^ jiiubete if)m fein Sid^t an, unb fteltte e§
auf ben ^ifd^. (^etj.) 59. ©ei mir gegrugt, bu ett)ige§ SD^eer !
tt)ie (Sprad^e ber §eimat^ [©cimat] raufd^t mir bein SSaffer.
(§et.) 60. (S§ fod im S^ieic^e !eine frembe ^ac^t mir SSurjet
faffen. (@d^.)
EXEBCISES. 359
(223.) 1. SSerfteKung ift ber offenett ©eete fremb. (®(^.)
2. SSa[)r^cit ift ber ©eele notr)lt)enbig [notmenbig]. (^e[f.) 3.
!5)em iua()ren SSeltaieijen mu^ ber Zoh niemal§ fc^recfUc^ fetn.
(aJZeubel^siol)!!.) 4. ^ie §of(i(^!eit tuar bent ©blen, bent ^iirger tpie
bent ^auer gemein. (®.) 5. ^f}euer [teuer] ift mir ber greunb,
boc^ au6) ben geinb fann id^ nii^en. (@(^.) 6. (Sein §er5 ift
itidjt bent ^ol!e geneigt ; trarunt ift al(e SSett bent (^rafen (Sg-
mont fo ^oih ? (®.) 1. SSa§ i^n eu(^ inibrig tnac^t, ntad)t i^
mir mertl) [mert]. (@d).) 8. 2)ent ntiiben SSanber^mann ift bod)
bie S^ac^t n)it(!ommen. (9?ucf.) 9. ®er tpeltregierenben SKadjt
ift !ein eingtger SD^ann unerfe^Iid^. (!i?e[f.) 10. 5lber ba^ tc^ mit
ber 3ett i^nt imentbe^rlid^ gen)orben bin, ift itic^t menig. (^e^.)
11. Penned) njurben bent Sf^eifenben bie 9}?eilen be§ SSegeg ju
lang. (?5rei.) 12. (S§ tDarb mir fc^mer, mid^ Don bem SSeibe Io§=s
§umac]^en. (®.) 13. Unfer §errgott !ann'g nid)t alien red^t
mac^en. (@pr.) 14. SSie fid^ ber Sut^ enblic^ umfa^ in ber nieb:=
rigen SDJanfarbe, marb'g it)m fd^mill unb fnrd^tbar, tt)ie in einer
3:obten!ammer [^otenfammer.] (^e^.) 15. (Sinen ^on an§ ber
^e^te 5U bringen, mar mir nnmoglic^. (^eij.)
(225.) 1. 5(c^, mir ^nm glud^e mirb mein Sle^en er'^ort!
(@d^.) 2. Sr)iefer Untftanb, meldfjer bie SO^einigen in gro^e 9^ot^
\j!flot] berfe^te, geriet^ jebod^ meinen 9[Ritbitrgern gum ^ort^eit
[^orteil]. m 3. mix gur Suft fi^uf er biefe (S^egenb gum
^arabiefe. (@(^.) 4. §offnung ift Sabfal bem mnnbeften ©erjen.
((S^atis.) 5. 3c^ bin ein Wiener bem ®ebot be§ altergro^ten
Wanm^. (@d^tegel.) 6. ^er loniglidje (Sinnefjmer blieb bem
SDoctor ber liebfte unb bertrautefte Umgang. (grei.) 1. §ei( htn
utibefannten, ^ot)eren 3Sefen, bie mir a^nen ! (®.) 8. 3Sef) bir,
t)ertaffene§, armes (Sd^iff! 2Se^ alten ^affagieren. (©run.) 9.
®an! biefen freunblid^ griinen ^ciumen, bie meineg ^er!er§
Tlamxn mir berfteden ! (@d^.)
THEME IX.
THE DATIVE.
1. Death lias robbed the king of all his children. 2.
He forgave him and gave him his hand. 3. This youth
has devoted himself to the service of God. 4. He op-
360 EXEKCISES. '
posed himself to the commands of the king, and now the
king has undertaken to punish him. 5. He who reconciles
his enemy to himself has done much. 6. I shall conquer
the world for myself, or I shall give it up entirely. 7. He
who opposes my commands shall not go from me alive.
8. He thanked me because I allowed him to see the pic-
tures. 9. In vain does one help those who do not help
themselves. 10. Nothing pleases him, and none can help
him. 11. I wish to be like this noble man, and I will fol-
low his example. 12. One cannot run away from death.
13. Trust not to others, but help yourself. 14. America
belonged formerly to the Spanish kings. 15. He came to
your help, and now you trust him no longer. 16. Health
has never been my portion. 17. It does not beseem a noble
man to explain himself to such a scamp. 18. I feel as
if I were* in a church. 19. How is she ? 20. How glad I
was when I heard of her happiness ! 21. Tears stood in
his eyes as he fell upon my neck. 22. The emperor's
head was cut off. 23. We hung a beautiful necklace
around the young girl's neck. 24. Quite other things
have come to my ears. 25. My heart is too full, I cannot
speak. 26. She lighted the old man's lamp and set it on
the table for him. 27. This man is quite strange to me.
28. To the true philosopher no one is indispensable, al-
though his friends are dear to him. 29. Politeness is
necessary for the nobleman as for the peasant. 30. The
way was too long for the weary wanderer, and it was hard
for him to reach the village. 31. It was impossible for
him to get away from the boy. 32. I was not inclined to
him, but with time he has become dear to me. 33. It was
hard for him to see about in the low mansard. 34. For
thy honor I have done it. 35. The need of his fellow-
citizens became an advantage for him. 36. Alas for me,
poor, weary wanderer ! 37. Thanks to my friends, who
even in danger remained true to me.
* See 332.
EXEKCISES. 861
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XI.
THE ACCUSATIVE.
(227.) 1. @r t^at eintge frdftige ©c^Idge an bte feftgefugtc
§oft()ur. (§et).) 2. ©ie luoKten mic^ auc^ attetn fpred^en. (@c^.)
3. St ftirbt ben tangen 9[fiartertob. (Sietanb.) 4. Unb fo 5tef)et
^inaug, t^r ^iingtinge, imb fcimpfet einen guten ^antpf nut gnten
SSaffen. (§et).) 5. ^fjrcinen filler ©eljnfnc^t mirft bu tneinen,
(@(f).) 6. (Er f^ldft ben ©(^laf be§ (^ererf)ten. (@pr.) t. 3a,
bu fonneft nocf) ben ©rant au§ ber (Seele mir. (9lu(!.) 8. (Sr^ebet
(^ott, ifjr ar^eere! ^rauft fein Sob! S^r giii^e, rauf^et e§ !
(^leift.) 9. ©ie ntcfte i^m fii^I einen ®ru^ ^u, unb fat) mieber
bon i^m meg. (^et).) 10. (Sin §a^n frci^t ben 9[Rorgen n)ad§.
(9^u(!.) 11. ^^ mdfjnte nttd^ berlaffen t)on atler SSelt (6d^.)
12. ^u fd^iltft bic^ felbft, menu bu bein ^inb f(^t(tft ungejogen.
(9lucf.) 13. (Sr rief mit tecl^jenber 3i»^9e* ^ater, mic^ biirftet!
(^\op.) 14. (Sie fontmt Don i^rem ^faffen, er fprac^ fie aHer
(Siinben frei. (®.) 15. ®en SSotf getiiftete nac^ bem fetten
^iffen. (®.) 16. Wif^ trunbert, ha'^ ic^ babei nid}t nod§ trdger
unb eitler gemorben bin. (^eij.) 1*7. ®§ biinft i^n, aU lag er
tm gieber. (®.) 18. 2)iefer ^ag biinfte i^m ber glorrei^fte
feineS Seben§. (®.) 19. (Sag an, mein ^flitter niertf) [niertj, tt)er
^at bic^ folc^e ©treic^e gelefjrt? (Uf).) 20. ©leic^mo^I beto^te
^eter biefen 99^ann, ttjeil er i^n eine ^unft lefjrte, metcf}e x^m
t)iet ^ergniigen ma(f)te. ((Sngclien.) 21. ©ie fonnen benfen, n>tc
i(^ iiberrafc^t tdax, aU er mir eine altlid^e SDame t)orfteEte, unb
fie feine ©ema^Hn nannte. (^aiiff.) 22. Wan nennt htn ©torc§,
tnegen feiner fflnijc unb ^efonnent)eit, ben $t)i(ofop§en unter hen
^ogeln. (aJJaftug.) 23. Tlan ^ie§ i^n nur ben tapferen 2Ba{tt)ar,
bort liegt fein ^ut am DfJ^ein. (^feffel.) 24. SSd^renb biefer
grd^Iid^en SSocl^e ^orte er nid^t auf, fid) fetbft einen ^errdtf)er
[^errdterj ^u fc^elten. ((Sbers.) 25. (Sin (Sfel fdjimpft ben anberen
einen Sangor)ren. (@^r.) 26. ^einen 9^eimer mirb man finben,
ber ftc^ nid^t ben beften ^iette. (®.) 21. 9[^ad^e nid^t frf)nell
jemanben beinen Sreunb. (S:raubiu«.) 28. (Sr iuar ^um (^arbinat
gemad^t tt)orbentm Qa^re 20. (^. ®r.) 29. ^ud) hen ©Item ift
bie Qtxt rafd^ jur 6aae gemorben. (grct.) 30» (Sd^ergenb erfldrte
S62 EXERCISES.
er x^n fiir fetnen ^efangenen, unb bertangte al§ Sofegetb ha§
S8erfpre(^en, ein 33ilb fiir il)n gu malen. (^. (3x.) 31. ^\)x \)aU
mi(^ ftet§ al§ eine geinbtn nur betrac^tet. (@c^.) 32. SSa^Ie
nid^t bie glie^enbe jum greunb, nid^t bie ^letbenbe 5um geinb.
(229.) 1. ^a ic^ hen 3ftoman log bitt, fo 5«be ii^ tDieber gu
taufenb attbern ^ingen Suft. (®.) 2. (Sin laufenber geittb ift
feinen 6c^u^ $ult)er luert^ [inert], (^ip^el.) 3. SDie SDurc^^
marfd^e ber granjofen mar man jmar getnoljnt. ((S.) 4. ^er $IRann
fonnte in einer SSiertelftunbe ^uxM fein ; ^ant njar e§ gufrieben.
(@^iet.) 5. 5nfo traten fie neOeneinanber in bo§ (Stiibd)en nnb
blieben beibe ben (^rn^ fd)ulbig." i^ct}.) 6. ©ttt)a§ iRaufd^ l^alt
trarm, unb ba§ ^ier ftnb iDir einmal getno^nt (^rei.)
(230.) 1. Qn biefer ganjen Qtit berlie^ bie ^od^ter fie
nid^t einen einjigen 3;:ag. (."pei?.) 2. ©ie blieb ben ^benb ftill nnb
feierlidf). (^^rei.) 3. ^jat fie mir nid§t nteineg S5ater§ Siebe fd^on
gefoftet? {^d}.) 4. ©o biele ©trome ^lut§ e§ ben SBarbaren
gefoftet \)aitt, emige ^onigreid^e in (Suropa gn griinben, fo biel
foftete e§ je^t i§ren d^riftlid^en 9^adf)!ommen, einige ©tabte in
(Sl)rien jn erobem. (@^.) 5. Qd^ fa^, ba§ er ein paar Mai bie
Sippen offnete, unb bann bod^ tt)ieber fd^tDieg. i^ttf.) 6. Siebe
©^arlotte, fagte er, id^ tange ^eute feinen (Srf)ritt, atg nur ntit
S^nen. {^tt}.) 1. ©ie fc^erjen mutljig [mutig] :3l)re Qa^re (jin,
bi§ \>a^ ein ©lenb fommt, bann gittern Sie ben fReft ber ^age.
(Smmerman.) 8. ^a^re lang, S^^i^^i^^^^i^^^ ^^^Q> ^^<^9 ^^^ SJ^umie
bauern. (@c^.) 9. SSeifet bu no(^, tnie tt)ir einmal eine (Stunbe
lang iiber ben ©a^ ftritten, ber mir fo fe^r gefiel? (^eij.) 10.
^a§> ungliidflicfie SSeib marb gefragt, inomit fie fid^ bie t)ier ^age
iiber genci^rt I)abe. (§umb.) 11. 'Sie reifen bie S^ac^t burd§, unb
fommen fd^on SJiorgen frii^. (^e^.) 12. ^en ^ergpfab ftieg id)
fteil l^inauf. (gbert.) 13. ©r ging mit unfid^eren, langfamen
(Sd^ritten ben SSeg ^inab. (^ei).) 14. 9}Junter fci^rt ber gro^e
ba^ 2ehtn ^inunter. {Zkd.) 15. §err (5kaf, e§ !ommt ein $aufe
\>a§> obere 3:%l ^inab. (U^.) 16. ^§> wax tt)enige S'l'^i^e ^^^^ ^^^
franjofifd^en ^riege. (^etj.) IT. (Sine l^atbe ©tunbe barauf
ft)urbe bie ^pr t)on au^en geoffnet. (SBinterfelb.) 18. S5on ®o§s
lar ging id^ ben anberen SD^orgen ttjeiter. (-^e^.) 19. (^leid^
EXERCISES. S63
barauf trat hex ^ontg ein, tm §ut auf bent §aupte, ben ©tod
in ber §anb, offenbar nic^t in gutet Sanne. (^rei.) 20. ©tide
§offmmg im ©eficl^t, fa^ er ha attein. (>Sc^.) 21. ©in 5D^ann
fte^t oben, Iran! unb blag, bie §aare milb, bag 5Inge nag. (Sbert.)
22. Qc^ eile fort bor mir ben ^ag nnb I)inter mir bie S^ai^t,
ben §immet iiber mir nnb nnter mir bie SSetten. (®.) 23. ^anm
bie 5ingen au^gerieben, ^inber, tangtneilt i^r eucl^ fc^on. [&.) 24.
2)iefe§ gefagt, entblogte ber reblic^e ^ater bie ©c^eitel. (SSo§.)
25. SDiefeg nun. auf ben Sao!oon angemenbet, fo ift bie Urfac^e
!Iar. (2eff.)
THEME X.
THE ACCUSATIVE.
1. I wish to speak to thee; come with me. 2. Why do
yon weep such bitter tears ? Did he not die the death of
the righteous ? 3. I dreamed myself happy and gay; but
when I awoke, I found myself deserted and alone. 4. Why
does he scold the boy as rude ? He is a very good boy.
5. He was hungry, but he had nothing to eat. 6. Me-
thought I was lying* sick. 7. Who taught you this art ?
8. This old philosopher has taught me much, which gives
me pleasure. 9. They call her the most beautiful of
women, but she seems to me idle and vain. 10. Why did
he choose me for his friend if he did not trust me ? 11.
Now he reviles me as a betrayer, but I am nevertheless
true to him. 12. I still regard him as my friend, but
he has declared me his enemy. 13. War made me his
prisoner, but he always regarded me as a friend. 14.
Now that we are rid of the war, we shall have time for
other things. 15. They are accustomed to beer-drinkingf
and smoking, but we are tired of it. J 16. If he has read
my novel, I am contented. 17. He remained here only a
quarter of an hour. 18. It cost the Christians streams of
blood to conquer a few small cities in Syria. 19. The visit
cost me a whole day, but I shall visit her a couple of times
♦833.3. t840. l^aBencefatt
364 EXEBCISES.
more. 20. Slie was silent a moment, then she said: I will
not go a step, if you do not go along. 21. Thirty years did
the war last. 22. I climbed up the mountain and remained
an hour up there.* 23. They asked me where I had re-
mained over the hour. 24. A few moments after I saw
the man coming down the valley. 25. The next evening
I went away and on the seventh day I arrived at Goslar.
26. Hat in hand, he awaited the king. 27. On the moun-
tain stands the old, deserted house, the doors and windows
shut, the rooms empty, everything cold and sad.
XLLUSTRATiVJ!! SENTENCES XIL
MODAL AUXILIAEIES.
(253.) 1. ^ic 2:ugenb barf beg 9iu^me§ ntc^t. (SBterattb.)
2. (S^ott gebe mlr nur jeben ^ag fo t)iel ic^ barf ^um Seben.
(dlaubiug.) 3. !J)arf eine folc^e 93^enf(^enftimme f)ier ertbnen?
(®.) 4. ©ie ge^orten ju ber fetnereu %xt (t)on ©pielleuten),
tDxe fie fic^ aucl^ Dor giirftetx unb (^rafeu pren laffen burften.
((Sbergj 5. Qd) moc^te gern reifen, aber ic^ barf in biefem 3af)re
ntc^t an§ 9^eifen ben!en. (®.) 6. 2)er (3ianb' ift etntg, irbifc^ ift
bie gorm; fie blirfen mx derbeffern, [a, mv foKen'§. (9Jaupac^.)
1. ^n einer fot(f)en ^afc^e barf fcf)on ein Soc^ fein, e§ fcitlt nic^t§
]^erau§. (^ebel.) 8. ^er (Sd^luiegerbater biirfte i^m nic^t iuieber
bor 5(ugen. {®.) 9. ^eine SD^etnung ift gefd^rlic^, fobalb ein
jeber bie feinige frei fagen barf. (3ocobi.) 10. (S§ biirfte Wo^l
fo fommen, tt)ie \^ gebad^t ^abe. (®..) 11. ©§ biirfte nid^t fcl^mer
fein, ha^ nac^5un)eifen. ((SJ.) 12. (£r erjafjtte ]i^ ©ef^id^ten,
tt)ie fein grennb SSerner i^n itberrafc^en !onnte, ha^ Waxmm
bielCeic^t erfc^einen biirfte. (®.)
(264.) 1. $8erad§tnng 1)ah^ ic^ nie ertragen fonnen. (®.)
2. Siebe granci^fa, icf) ^abe bi(^ nocl^ nii^t njillfommen l^eigen
fonnen. [^e\\.) 3. (Sin treuer "^atf) [^at], ein triiftenb SSort,
fann mand^e ^f)rdne trorfnen. (^ranj.) 4. !5)er Wlann Wax alt,
unb fa^ ju e^rnjiirbtg au§, al§ ha^ man btefen 5lu§brud^ beS
bort obcn.
EXEECISES. 365
©efu"^t§ ^cittc ISd^ertid^ ftnben fonnen. (^auff.) 5, S5et metuer
armen ©eele, ic^ !ann'§ bergeffeu I)aberi. (?eff.)
(266.) 1. ^'cin (Sacrament mag Seben bem ^obten tDteber^
geben. (33.) 2. ®^e bie grau e§ ^inbern mod)te, ftie^ er mit
bem <Sd)mert fief) burc^ unb buret). (Sietaub.) 3. Si)ie Seute mogen
e§ immer iDtffen, ba^ id) nic^tS meljr Ijabe. Wf.) 4. (Sin e^r^
ticker StRann mag fterfen in it)etd§em Slteib er mU, man mu^ i^n
lieben. (?eff.) 5. SSo^I mag e§ eud) beangftigen, ic^ glaub'g, t)Dr
eurem 9^id§ter ^u erfd)einen. (@c^.) 6. ^ie ^ogte troKen mir
tjerjagen unb bie feften ©cutoff er bre^en ; boc^, n^enn e§ fein
mag, o^ne ^lut. ('Sc^.) 7. (Sr moc^te au§ einem guten §aufe
fein. (?e[f.) 8. 3^^^^ ^eijj ic^ t)iel, bod) mod^t' id) alle§ tniffen.
{®.) 9. 3n biefer ^^uuft mbc^t' ic^ tva§> profitiren. (®.) 10.
5(uf bie ^erge mod^t' ic^ flicgen, mocl^te fe()'n ein griineg ^^at.
(^atler^Ieben.) 11. j[)em ^abe id) bitter tlnred)t get^an in meinem
^ergen, ^ott mag e§ mir bergei^en! (^ouff.) 12. Qd^ tuiinfd^e
in gar Dielen 3fiiidfi(^ten, ha^ S^r SSatlenftein balb fertig merben
moge. (®.) 13. 5((le gro^en ©ebaube t)erfallen mit ber Qeit, fie
mbgen mit ^unft ober o'^ne ^unft gebaut fein. {2c\l) 14. !5;)arum
mag, ma§ mid unb !ann, gefd^e^en. (®.) 15. ^eine ^^orr)eit,
tt)ie unfc^ulbig fie auc^ fein mag, faun einen gteibrief gegen ben
©pott berlangen. (Sielanb.)
(256.) 1 . §eut' milffen (Sie mir geftatten, ha'^ auc^ id^ ben
Sf^itt mitmad)e. (^rei.) 2. SSiber SSiHen mugte id^ ftet)en bleiben,
unb i^r nad)ftarren. (.Corner.) 3. ^n feinem §aufe mu^te alle§
folib unb maffit) fein. (@.) 4. ©in fpanifd^er ,^onig mugte ein
red^tgtaubiger ^4^rin§ fein, ober er mu^te bon biefem ^^rone
fteigen. {Bd}.) 5. (S§ mu^te nid^t tiieteg barin fte^en, benn fie
ttJar im 5lugenblide p (Snbe. (^rei.) 6. ®a§ let^te ^atte Tlon^
bragon auf ,^efe^t be§ §er5og§ t)on ^Itba erbauen miiffen. (@c^.)
t. ^i§ je^t mu^t' icf), ber ©rbprinj (Spanien^, in (Spanien ein
grember fein. (@ci^.) 8. ^d) mufs Iad)en, menu id) an hen ^on
ber Unfe^Ibarfeit benfe, mit bem er fprad). (Sietanb.)
(267.) 1. ^er partner ^at beftod^en n:)erben fotlen. (@d^.)
2. SSer ha§> 9le^te !ann, ber foil e§ mollen. (®.) 3. SS)ie ^or=
traitmaler fotten nid^t blo§ barftellen, lt)ie fie einen SD^enfc^en
faffen, fonbern Vok jeber i^ faffen miirbe. (®.) 4. ^a^ einfad^
366 EXERCISES.
(Sd^one foil ber* tenner fcl^a^en. (®.) 5. tlnb !am^ bte ^bUt
fclber in bie ©c^ranfen, ntir foil ber SD^utt) [$D^utJ ntc^t tDeic^en
unb nicl^t tt)an!ett. (@(^.) 6. Qc^ gtng iljn gu befui^en, ireil ic^
l^offte, er folle ntir^elfen. (@.) 1. SDanfenb pret§^ id^ metneg
®otte§ (^nabe, ber nicl^t getuoUt, ha^ id^ p eueren SiiB^it fo
liegen foUte, tt)te iljr jeljt gu meinen. (@c^.) 8. (S^ fte^t in ben
©ternen gefd^rieben, ha^ Wix atte ^eibe nid^t fi|en bleiben f ollen.
(^e^.) 9. (Sin glorreid^er (Smpfang foEte bent jnngen ©ieger
bereitet merben. ((Sberg.) 10. S)a Wax e§, tt)o icf) bie gro^e (Snt=
bedung nia^te, bie fiirmein gan§e§ Sebenber^angni^Dott trerben
f ottte. (^e^.) 1 1 . (Soil einft bie S^ad^melt bid^ mit ©egen nennen,
mngt bu ben glnd^ ber S^^itluelt tragen fonnen. OJoupad^.) 12.
SDie (£f)axlottt ^aih, ^or' i^, fott n)ir!lic^ in (S^efa^r fein, blinb
gu tDerben. (@c^.) 13. (g§ ftammt au§ bem Dlac^Ia^ be§ $tu^
tard^, tct) fann e§ bert)eifen, unb e§ f oK ein ©efcC)en! be§ ^aifer^
Trajan fein. ((Sberg.) 14. ^er ^apfere flreitet fiir ha^ dtt6:)t,
fiir ha^ ^eje^, fiir (^ott, unb f ottte e§ fein auf Sebenunb (Sterben.
(Sofobg.)
(258.) 1. Wan mu§ nid^t reid^er fd^einen tt)oIten, al§ man
ift. (eeff.) 2. SSitt man einen ^egriff bon ber ^^unft motto' ^
unb feiner ©d^iiter l^aben, fo mu| man ha^ (l^ampofanto bon
^ifa betreten. {^. ®r.) 3. ^(i) felbft moUte fie bitten, mir einigc
9[^inuten ju fd^enfen. (^rei.) 4. $8iele be^aupten, baf? fie fid^
nad^ 9[^ontmartre 5uriidEge5ogen ^abe, tt)o man fie nod^ im Sa'^re
It 60 gefe^en ^aben tuill. (3fc^o!.) 5. ^Iber \va§> finb benn ha^
fiir SDienfte, bie ber SSirtl) unferem §errn 3)?aJDr tviU ertniefen
l^aben ? ($?ef|.) 6. (Sr blieb n)ieber einige 5lugenblidfe fte^^en, tok
einer ber einfd^Iafcn mill, (^rei.) 1. ®u riffeft mid^ bon ber
^er^meiflung lo§, bie mir bie 8inne fd^on jerftoren mollte. (®.)
(259.) 1. ©0 meit ge^t niemanb, ber nid^t mug. (@c^.) 2.
golge il)m millig unb fro!) ; millft bu nid^t folgen, bu mugt.
(C)erbcr.) 3. Qeber mill gem leben, fattg er nur biirfte. {% % 5ft.)
4. ^u gel^ft nun fort; o §einrid§, fount' x^ mit! (@.) 5. Qd^
mitt nidt)t in§ Sodt), ic^ mitt fort unb bi§ uf) fort !ann, fottft bu
mid^ berftedfen. (gret.) 6. S5ormart§ muf5t bu, benn riicfmart§
fannft bu je^t nid^t me^r. (©d^.) 1. Wtxn $ferb fc^eute, mie td^
5um @d^(ogt§or l^erein itiottte. (®.) 8. SBo fott td^ l^in ? Qd^ faun
EXERCISES. 367
\>odj mcE)t betteltt ge^en. (?eanber.) 9. SHwd) bcr atte (^lauBeng*
fafe, bag ©ebeti* feliger fei, aU ^Mjmtn, tPoEte mtr nte in htn
^opf. (§et).) 10. (Sie fann nidjt burcf) unb mag nic^t guriic!. {@c^.)
11. 2Ba§ foil ntir ha^? SSo^u fott bag alTeg ? ((S.) 12. 2Sa§
fonnte fie aud^ bafiir, baf? id) nidjt auc^ ber 9J?utter ai)nlicr) fa^.
(|)e^.) 13. ^a§ :^atte er gar nid}t gefonnt, aud^ njenn er gemoKt
l^atte. (?aube.) 14. ^d) !ann bie (Srsie^er nid^t loben, bie f oId)C
(S^egenftanbe nid)t Dor i()reu 5lugeu tiertjeimlic^ten. Um S3cr5ei5^
ung ! tt)ie fatten fie \)a^ foKen ? unb trie l)dtten fie e§ gefonnt ?
(®.) 15. 92id)t beinen 5Irm btog trill id), and) bein ^uge. (@t^.y
16. SSolten ©ie tt)ieber einen $Iat^ in meinem (S:Dntoir, ober
n)oIIen ©ie, tt)ie e§ ben 5Infc^ein ^at, noc^ mel)r? (^ret.) 11, ^s^
l^abe bie 9}?enfc^en nie tierftanben imb noc^ tDeniger beneibet,
bie eine 5Irt (SI)re barein fe^en, gu fagen : magft bu mi^ ttid)t,
mag id^ bid^ au^ nid^t ! (§e^.)
THEME XL
MODAL AUXTLIAHIES.
1. May these players aj^pear before you ? 2, I should
like to see the players, but I must not think of it. 3. No
one is allowed to tell his opinion freely to the king. 4.
"Who dares try to improve the laws ? 5. It may be as you
say, but it will be hard to prove it. 6. I have never been
able to advise him. 7. "Who could think such an outbreak
of feeling laughable ? 8. I may possibly have seen him al-
ready. 9. He may be rich, but he is not an honorable man.
10. I should like to appear soon before my judge, but, if
it may be, not alone. 11. I should like to do him no wrong,
but I do not want to see him. 12. I do not demandf to see
the queen, however beautiful she may be. 13. The French
have driven out their emperor, may God forgive them for
it ! 14. To-day I must read your Wallenstein, J whether it
be finished or not finished. 15. I was obliged to allow
840. t barnac^; 346.2. % A play by Schiller.
368 EXEKCISES.
him to read my new book. 16. We had to take the ride
too, or to stay at home alone. 17. I could not help weep-
ing when I saw the poor Spanish prince. 18. He cannot
have been an orthodox prince, for he was obliged to de-
scend from the throne. 19. This painter had to paint his
portrait on command of the king. 20. Everything in his
house ought to have been massive and solid, for he was
very rich. 21. He ought to love the right, but he does
fiot. 22. This portrait painter shall paint me a portrait
of my wife. 23. Every rich man ought to cherish art
and to help artists. 24. I was to have visited you, but
I could not. 25. How am I to make a great discovery?
26. If I am to paint his portrait, he must visit me every
day. 27. The young victor is, I hear, in great danger.
28. The gardener is said to have been bribed. 29. If
I am to believe his story, he must prove it. 30. I must
have the Plutarch, even if it should be very dear. 31. I
do not wish to appear richer than I am. 32. We wanted
to help her, but we did not want to give her money. 33.
She claims to have eaten nothing to-day. 34. The land-
lord claims to have given her something, but we cannot
believe what he says. 35. We must help her, even if she
should deceive us. 36. I was on the point of giving her
something when you came. 37. We gave her something,
for we had to. 38. You may go with him, but I may not
(go) too. 39. What am I (to do) here ? 40. I cannot (go)
back and I am not allowed (to go) forward. 41. I should
like (to go) into the house, but we must (go) away. 42.
If you like tho horse, I will give it to you. 43. I should
like to praise your teacher, but I cannot. 44. I dare not
(go) away, although I want to. 45. I do not like him and
he does not like me. 46. Do you know English ? 47. I
do not know it and I do not like it.
EXEECISES. S6&
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XHX
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
(279.) 1. Sf^ingg urn i§n i^er tuurbe gemeitit, gefungen imb
gebetet, aljer 5lntinou§ \a^ unb ^orte nic^tg t)on attebem. ((Sber§.)
2. (Sine SSelt fi^mtngt fi(^ in etrigen ^reifen urn bie anberen.
5(uf jeber mirb gefcimpft iinb gerungen unb geliebt unb ge^offt.
(^od^.) 3. SSo mx erfd^ienen unb pocfjten an, luarb nic^t gegriifet
nocl^ aufget^n. {B^.) 4. ^i§ gum le^ten ^lut^tropfen n)irb
gefcimpft. (^. ®r,) 5. Qn Seipgig tear (^d beina^e tobt [tot]
gefc^Iagen tnorben. (®rube.)
(280.) 1. ^(m 10. 9hit)em()er 1483 n^arb p (^i§Ieben etnem
ormen ^ergmanne §an§ Sntf)er ein ©o^ntein geboren, ba§ am
folgenben 3:age getauft unb 9Jiartinu§ genannt luurbe. (@rube.)
2. Hub tt)ie bie fittlic^en, fo luaren bem ^oI!e and) bie geiftigen
gortjc^ritte auf bie) em SScge Derfagt. (®ermnu§,) 3. Unb fo
raarb mir ha§> SSerfprec^en abgenommen, ha^ id) nac^ 9l)tain§ fot*
gen fottte. (®.) 4. .^cilt er bie 9[)Zebai((e fiir ci^nlid^, bie Arbeit
fiir gut, fo ift tjielleicl^t ber Pal^ fiir SSittig gefunben unb ber
^unftfc^ule unb bem jungen Tlanm gebient. ($?en)alb.)
(281.) 1. Wan ^cilt micf) ^ier gefangen, toiber attc SSolfer*
re^te. (@(^.) 2. gur tobt [tot] X)oh man mid) auf. (@.) 3. ©§
flingelte, bie 3^f)iir offnete fic^, bie ^ertr)anbtfd)aft erfc^ien. (^rei.)
4, (So iDeit mar id^ geftern gefommen, al§ man mic^ abrief. (®.)
5. §ier giinbete fid) frol) ha§> fd^one Sid^t ber SBiffenfd^aft, be§
freien j[)en!en§ an. (®.) 6. 5lu§ ©tiefeln mac^en fid) leic^t ^an^^
toffeln. m
(282.) 1. 3d^ iDerbe eben gum SRittag^effen gerufen. {@d^.) 2.
gerrara marb, mit 9fiom unb mit glorenj, t)on meinem ^ater
t)iel gepriefen. (®.) 3. ^nrc^ eine l^intere ^forte fii'^r' id^ end),
bie nur burci) einen Wann tiert^eibigt [tierteibigt] njirb. (@^.)
4. Seonarbo'g (SJemcitbe im ©aale be§ ^a(afte§ ift nie boHenbet
iDorben. {^. ®r.) 5. Dttilie erinnerte fic^ jebeg SSorte^, n)a§ ge*
fproc^en marb. (®.) 6. Wx^t e^er benf ic^ biefe§ ^att ju
brauc^en, bi§ eine '^f)ai get^an ift, bie untt)ibcrfter)Iid) ben §odf|*
berrat^ [^oc^uerrat] bejeugt. {^^.) 7. SDie ^ud)bructer!unft
370 EXERCISES.
ttjar fd^on iiber ^unbert ^a^re erfunben; beffenungead^tet erfi^ieti
ein ^uc^ nod^ al§ em §eiltgeg. (@.) 8. SDer ^rief tft ja er*
l&rod^en 1 S)a§ !ann mo^I fein. (S?e[f,)
THEME Xn
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
1. When I was in Europe there was fighting in France.
2. Wherever we appeared there was singing and dancing.
3. On the 12th of August the Pope was found dead in his
bed. 4. Luther is called the greatest son of Germany.
6. The right of preaching* was denied him by the
Pope, and he was called an enemy of God. 6. If he
goes to Leipzig he will be killed. 7. He was told that
there was fighting in Leipzig, but he would go. 8. A
place was found for Wittig in the art school, and he was
helped f . 9. The place was given him because his work
was considered good. 10. The door opened and I was called
away. 11. This medal was given my father by the artist,
and it has been much praised. 12. The painting was be-
gun by Leonardo, but it was never finished by him. 13.
Science and free thought were denied to the people. 14.
He was led through a back door into the hall of the palace.
15. The letter had been found in his hands, but it had not
been broken open. 16. The painting had been finished
before Leonardo went to Rome. 17. When the child was
baptized, the relations appeared.
ILLUSTRATIVE SEKTENOES XIV.
REFLEXIVES.
(286-87.) 1. ©ine m^ ber anberen alfo berl^etrat^eten [*ra*
teten] ftd^ aHe i^re Sugenbfreunbinnen. {^et}.] 2. (S§ ftredft fid^
eine ©kite bt§ m^ ^inttuerp. (@d^.) 3. 2)od^ toie Derge^t ft^
* 845. t babur(i^ ge^olfeiu
EXERCISES. 371
^rant unb (Se^nen; id) \mu}k mic^, an btc^ §u fd^reiden.
((Sottj^eb.) 4. @§ ^nben bie ^rogen biefer SSelt fid) ber (Srbe be^
mac^tigt. (@rf).)
(288.) 1. X^onnt'* ic^ boc^ in beinem ^^au gefunb tnic^ hattnl
(®.) 2. Qf^ ttjitt mid) frci unb gliidlic^ traumen. {<B6).) 3. ^a
mitt id^ mid^ mieber gefunb ober t)ottig rafenb gaffen. (®.) 4.
DZiemanb fc^Inmmert ftc^ fromm. (@^r.) 5. ^e§ ©onntag^ in
ber 9[Rorgenftunbe mie rtianbert'^ fid) am D^^ein fo fc^on. {aRiilter.)
6. S3on eurer ga^rt fe^rt'^ fid) nic^t immer it)ieber. (@cf|.) 7. ©S
giemt fi(^ nic^t, ba§ ic^ bcin ©(^ulbner bin. ($?e[f.)
(289.) 1. ^(^ erinnere niic^ mit grenben meiner ^ngenb. (®j
2. ©T ttjnnberte fid) aucl^ iiber hm Sauf ber SSelt, benn er ^atte
bie ganje franjbfifc^e 9f^et)oIution eriebt. {^xtl) 3. Qd^ f)aht
mic^ iibcr gernon)'^ 5tu§fef)en mirffid) erfc^roden, fo t)eraltet er^
fd)ien er mir. {Bd}.) 4. ^ein (Sf)renmann mirb fid) ber ©c^mac^
bequemen. (@d).) 5. ®er red^te ©c^iiler lernt au§ bem ^e!ann=
ten ha^ Unbefannte entmideln, unb na^ert fid) bem ^Zeifter. (@.)
6. ^6) tvxii mid^nic^t ber 9k(^enfc^aft entjie^en; bie 9fiid)ter finb
e§ nur, bie ic^ t)erlDerfe. {Bd).)
(290.) 1. ©n innger Slater n)iinfc^t fid) ai^aufe. (@pr.) 2. ^c^
^aht mir biefen 9[)tenfd)en ^um ^iele gemac^t, ^ah^ mir t)orge=s
fe^t, i^n nid^t auf5ugeben, alfo r)ab' id) if)n gerni^. (@(^.) 3.
28ag fid^ ber ^ett getraut, ha^ fonntet Q^r nic^t magen ? {B^,)
ILLUSTRATIVE SEnSTTENCES XV.
IMPEESONALS.
(292.) 1. D lt)ie ift e§ tali gcn)orben, unb fo traurtg, ob^ unb
leer ! {^aUtx^khtn.) 2. ©§ regnet ! (^ott fegnet bie ©rbe, bie fo
burftig ift. ((Snslin.) 3. ^er SSinb ge'^t fait unb mic^ froftelt
burd^ ben ^elj. (^rei.) 4. Wit ben 3fif)^^e^i Q^^^H ^^ ^^^' ^^^
^anbe dottig §u Ibfen. (§um.) 5. $D^ir o^nt ein ungliidffeliger
51ugenblicf. (@(f|.) 6. §einrid^, mir grant t)or bir! (®.) 1.
^o^nen f fie un§, eg reuet fie morgen. (Sielanb.) 8. ^id) hixnlt,
* 831.2. t332.1d. 324.4.
372 EXEECISES.
icl^ tuet^ a\i§> metd^en gefjieru uufeve ^ugenb feimt. ($!eff.) 9.
^ief baiiert mid^ euer. (35oB.) 10. (Sie finb ungerec^t, ttienn ©ie
eineti fotd^en ^erbacl)t au^fpredjen, unb mir 5iemt nic^t, i§n ^u
ertragen. (^^ret.) 11. ^ud) braucl)te e§ eigeutiid) immer ^wti
SKeufcl^en, eiiien, ber'g jd^e, unb eiiien, ber'g befc^rieOe.* (®.) 12.
3e^t treibt e§ mic^ unmiberfte^Iic^ in ^i)xc 9Jd§e, unb id) mu^
S^nen fagen, tDte ey in mir au^fie^t. (^rei.) 13. W\v i)at 'oon
biefen Sl^bnigen unb ©(^(ac^ten unb Sl^riege^t^aten nur getrdumt.
(@d^.) 14. 5ll§ er mieber in bag §e(Ie trat, gidnjte e§ feud)t in
feinen 5tugen. (^ret.) 15. ®em 9}liiffiggdnger fel)!! eg ftetg an
8eit sunt ^f)un. (^iicf.) 16. SSenn e§ Hopft, fo !ann eg ein @Idu=
biger jein. (@berg.) It. §orc^, 9}?art()e, braufjen po(^t eg ! (®eibl.;
18. (Sinen fiirc^terlic^en JftMeg giOt eg. {®.) 19. 5(u(^ im Sager
gibt eg ber braDen SDtdnner genug. (^d^.) 20. 5([ier einen f(^o^
neren (§engft) faun eg nidjt geben, rief ber ^rinj. (@ber«.) 21.
SOfJir tt)ar eg ©rnft niit meiner ©eligfeit. (@c^.) 22. 2Bem ju
tDoI}! ift, ben getliftet immer nac^ ncuen ^ingen. (3. ^r.) 23. 9^un
tv\x]i bu begreifen, n)ie mir tvax, aU ic^ nac^ Saf)ren ber ^ren-
nung if)n guerft mieberfa!^. (^e^.) 24. Wix ift 5U SOZut^e [3[I^ute],
begann ber doctor, alg mdre ic^ r)ier nicl^t fremb. (grei.) 25.
Wix ift, atg oO id) bie §dnbe auf g §aupt bir legen foUt' ! (^et.)
26. SSie tvaxh mir, alg ic^ in'g ^nnere ber ^iri^e trat ! (®c^.)
21. 5Iug (S^oburg mirb gefc^rieben, ha^ bie granjofen in tnenig
^agen barin einriiden merben. (@(^.) 28. ®cnn gcmalt tt)urbe
in ^enebig tt)ie iiberalt ancT^ im fitnf5el)nten 3ar)rr)unbert. (^. ®r.)
29. SSir bebattiren [==tieren] iiber ben ^egriff beg D^ec^teg nnh ha
tt)irb juraeilen orbentlic^ berniinftig gefprDd)en. (@d).) 30. Wtvi\]t*
eg fo rafc^ gel^orc^t fein? ((^(^.)
(294-95.) 1. (^g Idfet fid) im ©injelnen iiber bie ©c^rift
nic^tg fagen. (@d^.) 2. ^g mu^te ein anberer 3Seg gefunben
merben. (^. ®r.) 3. ©g tvax ber S^^iefe ©otiatf) ein ganj gefd^r-
lid^ SO^ann. (Staiibiug.) 4. ®g r)at if)n nie in bie grembe gejogen.
(33of)tau,) 5. (5g foU mic^ trunbern, mag biefeg ^u(^ eigentlid^
ent^alten mirb. [^06).) 6. ©g furd^te f bie (Spotter t)a§> Wltn^
fd^engef c^te^t ! m
•332.5(2. t331.c
EXEECISES. 373
THEME Xm.
REFLEXIVES AND IMPEESONALS,
1. She did not dare to take that way. 2. The en-
emy have gained possession of the whole city. 3. This
man has worked himself dead tired. 4. The poor old
woman dreams herself young and beautiful again. 5.
Do you remember the morning hour when we wandered
together by the Rhine ? 6. We were wondering about
your journey. 7. He drew near to me, and I rejoiced in
his friendly words. 8. He was really frightened at the
news, for ho remembers the French Eevolution, and he
fears to experience another. 9. I do not trust myself to
write to him. 10. I wish for myself no better judge than
he is. 11. When we went out it was raining, and later it
snowed. 12. It became cold and he was chilly. 13. I am
horrorstruck at his treason, but I am deeply sorry for
him. 14. You will regret having spoken out such a sus-
picion. 15. It is not suitable for me to describe it to you.
16. You have certainly not seen that; you have dreamed it.
17. I pity the poor king, but I pity more his unhappy
l^eople. 18. There is need of several good men in the camp,
for there is always a lack of soldiers. 19. There was knock-
ing, and Martha went to the door. 20. How she felt when
she saw him again ! 21. She felt as if he were not a stran-
ger to her. 22. There are many who debate over the idea
of right, but there are few who understand it. 23. There
was no one who spoke sensibly about it. 24. In the church
there was singing and praying, and I felt as if I must sing
too. 25. It was told him that he must obey quickly,
26. It delights me to hear what he says about the writing.
27. I wonder what is written from France.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVL
PERSON AND NUMBER.
(321.) 1. SSir oben unb tfir unten fotteu ein0 fein tn bcr
Stebe. (®5rre«0 2. ^a^ tarn e0 mix nun ^elfen, ^a^ bu unb
374 EXEKCISES.
mein SSater emft greunbe ttjaren ? (?eff.) 3. ^rin§ ^arto§ unb
i(^ begegnen biefett TOttag itn§ tm SBorgemad^ ber ^onigtn. (®d^.)
4. 2)er ha unb i(^, tDtr ftnb au§ (Sger. (@(^.) 5. D bu, ber bie
^tmmet fd^uf ! (Mop.) 6. ^u, ber auf ben SSoIfen t^ront in
ber ^1a6)t (5lrnbt.) t. SStr anberen, ble \vh t)on ber ^efettfd^aft
Qb^ngen, mliffen un§ nac^ i§r bilben. (®.) 8. SSciret i^r auii)
bei un§, bie i^r mic^ feme liebt: o fo bauten mir ^ier §)iitten ber
greunbfci^aft un§. (Mop.)
(322.) 1. (Sr fomo^I at§ ber ^erjog jeigten fi(^ milbe nnb
5ugangli(^. (^. @r.) 2. (£in §arfner mit feiner ^oc^ter gingen
t>or mir ^er. (®.) 3. D^ic^t Siebe bto^, au(^ 3orn unb $eftig=
!eit trdgt eine bunfle ^inbe bor ben 5Iugen. (O^tenfd^Iager.) 4.
9Zoc]^ ©tanb, nod^ filter tt)irb gefpart. (SBielanb.) 5. ©efa^r
unb $rei§ unb aud^ ber fRu^m fei mein. (®.) 6. (Sd^on^eit,
9^eid^tl)um [Dteid^tum], ®f)r' unb dJladjt finft mit ber B^it in
obe D^ac^t. (33o§.) t. ^aneben tvo^nt bie fromme ^ilgerfd^aar.
(®.) 8. ^arauf fam be§ 3Sege§ eine d^riftenfc^aar, bie auc^
guriicfgebtieben mar. (U^.) 9. (Sin ^rupp SKdnner ftanb am
®ren§ftein. {$vtl) 10. (Sine 5ln5a5I (Solbaten fatten fid§ ge=
fe^t. (®.) 11. 3c§ griff fogleicb nad^ bent ^eutel, in melc^em
eine gute 9[^enge ((S^olbftiicfe) fic^ befanben. (®.) 12. ©in
l^alb §unbert foId)er ^emerfungen madden einen ^^^ilologen.
(geff.) 13. ^a fommen ein $aar au§ ber ^iidje. (@(^.) 14. ^a§
finb meine Sflid^ter. (^c^.) 15. ©§ maren nur ^unbert 3:^aler,
fagte ber ^tlte. {^xtl} 16. ^a, ha^ tnaren bie 5(ugen, bie treuen,
flaren ^ugen, bie er t)or()er gefe^en. (@piel.) 17 (Sure foniglid^e
SO^ajeftat finb au^er fic^, unb fc^einen tief bemegt. (@(f|.) 18.
(Suer (Sjceffen^ ^aben 3^re ^ienerfd^aft iiberrafc^t. (®.) 19. ^er
gerr ^ebodma^tigte l^aben bie le^ten 9^ad§te tt)enig gefc^tafen,
fagte ^art (^ret.)
THEME XIV.
PEESON AND NUMBER.
1. He and I will help you, for we were friends of your
father. 2. I, who am poorest of all, cannot help you. 3,
EXERCISES. 375
•
Charitable man, thou who helpest every one, help me also.
4. You and the prince are to * meet me to-morrow in the
ante-chamber of the queen. 5. The Duke and Prince
Charles went into the hall first; my father and I followed
them. 6. The king and queen met us and showed them-
selves kind and gracious. 7. Beauty, riches, and friend-
ship have deserted me, but my self-respect I have not lost.
8. A troop of pilgrims met us on the way. 9. A crowd of
men had remained behind, and a pair of them had seated
themselves. 10. A couple of gold pieces were found in
the bag after he had gone. 11. There were a number of
gold pieces in the bag when I gave it to him. 12. Those
were the thalers which the old woman gave me.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVIL
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
(324.) 1. ^a§ Staffer raufc^t^ \>a§> SSoffer f^moU, etn gifd^er
fag baran. . . . Unb tt)ie er fi^t, imb mie er laufc^t, t^eilt [teilt]
fid^ bie S^ut^ [glut] empor ; au§> bent betregten SSaffer raufd^t
em feuc^teg SSeiO IjerDor. (®.) 2. 5(B ii^ ^ai)n mir mac^e
burcl^g ©etrii^I, ha tritt ein bxaim' ^o^emeriDeib mtc^ an, fagt
mic^ in§ 5(uge fc^arf unb fpridjt. (@d^.) 3. ®te trauernbe ®er^
mania fragt feit Sa^ren, wami fo(( bie red^te Qt'it fommen. {%xtl)
4. Qc^ liebe ^^thha felt ^mx Qa^ren, feitbem icl^ fie juerft in ©.
fennen lernte. (®^te(.) 5. ©ie fennen mic^ bort feit Uielen Sal)-
ren aU einen reblic^en ^iirger. (^^ret.) 6. 9}Zorgen ift fie meine
gran unb iibermorgen ge^e \^ mit i^r fort. {$?e[f.) 1. 5lbcr id^
ge^e ^erum, fie aufjufuc^^en, unb fomme mieber, fobatb ic^ fie
finbe. (®.) 8. ®a§ (Sct)tog erfteigeu U^ir in biefer 9lac()t, ber
©d^liiffet bin id) mad)tig. SflMr ermorben bie filter, reifjen
bic^ au§ beincr Slammer. {@(^.) 9. 33erlag bic^ barauf, fagte
er, ic^ fomme eud) nac^. (^etj.)
(325.) 1. Unb alg i^ traurig burrf) bie (Sale ging, ha fa^ id^
^erjog §anfen in einem ^xttx tx)einenb fte^n.f {®(^.) 2. (Seit
*iotten. t 343.1.5,
376 EXEECISES.
o(^t ^agen unb langer fel^tte e§ ntir fotDo'^t an Suft unb Sonne
al§ an ^efunb^eit jn meinen ^efcf)aften. (@d^.) 3. S)er gmeitc
(Sto(f be§ ^orber^anfeg mar feit Dielen Sci^t:en nnbeltjo^t.
f^ret.) 4. SSa§ er f^un tDottte an biefem ^age, ftanb jeit SD^ona^
ten tt)ie eine nnabanbertic^e S^of^ttjenbigfeit [9^ottt)enbig!eit] t)or
feiner ©eete. (^eij.) 5. ^er giii^ft nac^^er berfc^affte mir in bret
^agen, it)a§ tc^ gn SSien in brei^ig nid^t eriangte. (@c^.) 6. (Sr
felbft bertraute mir, tva§> id^ gmar langft anf anberem 2Beg fd^on
in (Srfa^rnng brac^te. ('Sd^.)
(326.) 1. (£r fommt ntir nic^t juriic!, tnie er gegangen. {^dj.)
2. ^ie Hcicfje gran au§ ber grembe ift in bcr Slac^t geflorben.
(^rei.) 3. SSag ic^ tjermoc^te, ^ah' id) gent getf)an. (Bdj.) 4.
®a ^aben ^ingemorfne SSorte tnid^ bele^rt, ba^ feine ©eete feft
ber SSnnfdfj crgriffen ^at, bid) gn befi^en. (®.) 5. ©inige $D^onate
Derftrid^en, e^e an§ 9}labrib eine Stntmort !am. (@c^.) 6. ^ift bu
nid^t me'^r HJJinifter? S^ bin'§ gen)efen, n)ie bn fie^ft. (6d^.)
1. Qd^ ^abe fie gefannt, in Valencia, 13 or ^manjig ^a^i^en. (^au[f.)
8. Tlit fiinf (^efeHen mar er an^ge^ogen, mit gmeien fe^rte er
jnriic!. (@Ber8.)
(327.) 1. SSa§ ber 5Ib|d)eu ber gan^en nieberldnbifd^en S^a^
tion nid^t bermoi^t ^citte, inar bent geringfd^ci^igen 33etragen beg
Slbely gelungen. (®c^.) 2. .3ii^ Sc|miebe ging ein junger $elb,
er '^atte ein gtite§ (Sd)tt)ert befteKt. (U^.)
(328.) 1. Qc^ bringe bie le^ten SSorte meiner grennbin, bie
©ie ni(i)t oljne ^f^ii^rnng lefen trerben. (@.) 2. ©r mirb anf mid^
flnd^en, menn id§ i^m ha§> ^ucl) nid^t balb bringe. ($?eff.) 3. (£§
mirb tt)of;( (^elb im Coffer fein, bacl)ten bie Sentc. (!i?eanber.) 4.
SJJan mirb nngefd^r anf eben bie 5lrt berfa^ren fein. (Stn!el^
ntann.) 5. ^^x (Sc^reiben fod 5ng(eid§ ntein ^ebitit) fein, mit
bem id§ mid^ einfteHe, fobalb id§ e§ er^alten.* (®.) 6. 28er im-
mer finftere SJ^iene mad^t, ^at balb bie (^nnft berloren. (®.) T.
liefer gebrnar ift alfo ^^ingegangen, o^ne ©ie gn mir ^n bringen,
nnb idf) !)abe, ermartenb nnb ^offenb, balb ben SSinter iiberftan^
ben. ((S(^.) 8. Unb menn eg (bag llnterne:^men) glitcft, fo ift eB
ijergeben. {B^,) 9. SSenn id& geftorben bin, finbet er htn
*439.a
EXEKCISES. 377
(Sd^tiiffet in ntelner SKeftentafc^e. (^ret.) 10. graulein, er (ber
SBrief) ift unfe^Ibar jerriffen, tt)enn ©ie ftc^ nic^t balb anber§
erflaren. (?e[f.) 11. ^enn bu btc^ aufric^teft, bift bu mit ein
paar ©d^ritten bort. (^. ®r.)
THEME XV.
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
1. My friend and I were walking slowly through the
city. 2. Suddenly a strange man stands before him, he
looks at him, says something to him, and they both leave
me. 3. I try to follow them, but they are soon lost in the
crowd. 4. I have been seeking them for two hours, but I
do not find them. 5. As soon as I find them, I will bring
the man to you. 6. Do you know the man? 7. I have
known him for years. 8. She has been my wife for two
weeks. 9. Had you known her long when she became your
wife ? 10. I had known her twenty years, and I had loved
her since the first day. 11. As soon as she asks me I shall
tell her the truth. 12. If I see that man now I shall mur-
der him. 13. He had not been long in the prison, when
his friends murdered the keeper and freed him. 14. The
duke wrote me, what he wanted in * Vienna. 15. I pro-
*cured for him everything which he had been wanting. 16.
Have all your friends gone away? 17. One went yester-
day, the other will go to-morrow. 18. Several months have
passed since his letter came. 19, He went to Vienna, but
he did not do all that he promised. 20. I knew the minister
in Madrid. 21. As soon as he came into the church I knew
him. 22. He had been minister, but he was so no more.
23. "We had brought him the letter as soon as we had re-
ceived it. 24. He had cursed us because we had not
brought it sooner. 25. The young hero cannot receive his
sword until he has ordered it. 26. You will weep when
*5U.
378 EXERCISES.
you hear tlie last words of my friend. 27. I presume they
are very interesting. 28. In February my friend will
probably come, thought L 29. If I do not find him soon,
I am lost. 30. When he is dead, I have not a single friend.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XVHL
SUBJUNCTIVE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL.
(331.) 1. SSe^ eu^, i()r ftotjen fallen ! mz tone fiiBer £Iang
burc^ eure Manim mieber ! (U^.) 2. ^a§ tDotte @ott nic^t, ha^
bu bag bollbringft ! (®rf).) 3. Q3ilben mv un§ ein, mx W'dxtn
auf ber (Sifenba^u ; plauberii iDir trie in einem ^oupe. ($?ett3alb.)
4. 3Ser ©ebnib i)at, ber irarte. ((Sberg.) 5. WoQt nie ber ^ag
erfc^einen, wo be§ ran^en ^riet3e§ §prben biefeg ftitte Zljai
bnrd)toIien ! {<Bd^.) 6. jS)iirft' id) njoljl bie^mnt mi(^ entfernen ?
(®.) 1. ^Ic^ ! lieber, guter WHamx, mljni (Sr * niic^ n)o^I anf feineu
SSagen. (aJJu^kr.) 8. Qd^ fei, gemd^rt mir bie 33itte, in eurem
^unbe ber britte. (®(^.) 9. SSir mbgcn bie SSelt fennen lernen,
trie mir luoEen, fie trirb immer eine ^ag= unb 5^a(^tfeite ^aben.
(®.) 10. Unb tt)er ber SDic^tfunft ©timme nic^t tjernimmt, ift
ein ^arbar, er fei and), incr er jei. (®.) 11. ^ie ginfternig
[=ni§] fei noc!^ fo bicftt, bem Sic^te triberfte^t fie nic^t. {<B)?x.)
12. (@r fagte) ha^ niemanb treber (S^efcingni^ [^ni§] noc^ San-.
be^Dermeifung jn fiirc^ten I}abeu foKte, er ^citte fic^ benn eine§
politifc^en ^erbred)en0 fc^ulbig gemacl^t. (@c!^.) 13. Tlan foE bie
alten ©c^nr)e nicl^t fortroerfen, man ^ahz benn neue. (^^r.) 14.
SDie (Sonne fin!t, hdh teud)ten mir bie ©terne ; o, mcirft bu ^a,
(®.) 15. grommer '^tah ! o '^citt' ic^ nimmer mit bem ©c^trerte
bid) tiertaufcl^t. (@(^.)
(332.) 1. (^emiffe 9}^enfc^en fatten ^ugenben, menn fie @elb
:^atten. (3. ^. m 2. QatV id) bicf) frii^er fo gerec^t erfannt, e§
mare ^iete§ ungefd^e^'n gebtieben. (@d^.) 3. SSenn mir aEen
l^elfen Ibnnten, bann maren mir ^n beneiben.f (i^eff.) 4. SSenn
©ina ^ter mcire, fagte er ganj taut ju fic§, fie mad|te ein ^ebid^t,
* 158.3. t843.ni,l&.
EXERC5ISES. 379
ober au(^ gtuet. (^e^.) 5. ^onnt id) bod^ ^tn 5tu§gaitg finbett,
a^, tr)ie \n^lV i(^ mt^ begtiicft ! (®c^.) 6. SSie ftiinb'g urn euc^,
§og' id^ mein §eer jurM. (®d^.) 1. ®u.!ottnteft ^ott banfen,
unb bi(^ t)or ber SSelt gro^ mad)en, tDenn bu in beinem Seben
eine fo ebte ^^t get^an ^atteft, tr)ie bie ift, itm tuelc^er tDtllen ic^
gefangen ft^e. (®.) 8. Wix^V kf) je^n 9teic^e mit bent "iRMtn
fc^anen, i^ rette mid^ ntd)t mit be§ grennbe§ Sebcn. (@(^.) 9.
(Sinb auc^ bie alten ^iic^er nic^t gnr §anb, fie finb in nnferen
gerjen eingefd^rieben. (®cf|.) 10. IXnter ben a^^enfc^en tvxxh
man nic^t beffer, iDenn man nic^t f(^on gut nnter fie fommt.
(3. ^. 9i.) 11. SSenn biefer ftarle %xm enc^ nic^t ^ereingefit^rt,
i{)r fa^et nie ben IRaud) Hon einem franfifdjen famine fteigen.
(®(^.) 12. D fonnt ic§ bod) ben ©treit in ber S^atur t>erfo§nen,
unb 5ur ^ertrciglidjfeit bie 9[)^enfd)en auc^ getDo^nen ! [Md.) 13.
ptten ttiir'y mit frifc^er Xi)ai bollenbet! {@(^.) 14. §atte
i(^ boc^ immer gefdjiniegen ! (®.) 15. @r trar fo ftolj hax^
auf, al§ nienn bie (Smpftubung fein gemcfen trcire. (@.) 16.
S^ommt, fe^t euc^, tijut, al§> loenn i^r gu §aufe mcirt! (®.) lY.
Ueberm * |)errfcf)er i^ergi^t er nur ben Si^iener ganj unb gar, aB
tijar^ mit feiner SSiirb' er fd)on geboren. (@c^.) 18. ^er ©d}tu^
(be§ ^riefe§) mar ganj, ai§> menu er i§n felbft gefd)rieben f)atte.
(®.) 19. d^ gilt bie Seben^pfltc^t ^u erfiillen, a(§ ob man emig lebe,
unb mieberum, aU ob man ftiinblid) ftiirbe. (^luerboc^.) 20. ©ie
nidte nur leife, al§> ob biefer SSunfd) i^r gefatle. {(S6ev«.) 21. Q3ete,
al§ :§iilfe fein 5lrbeiten. ^Irbeite, al§> ^iilfe fein ^eten. (@^r.)
22. i)a§> tjerfc^tog mir hen 9J2unb, unb l)dtt' icf) ben ^ob be§
$8erbrec^er§ barum (eiben miiffen. (^offmami.) 23. '2)a§ fRecl^t
gur ^rone mar nidjt erbtid^, unb bod^ f)atte ein langere§ 2then
feine§ SSaterS bie 5Infpriid^e feine§ einjigen ©oljneg me^r
befeftigt, unb bie §offmmg ^ur Sl\one gefic^ert. (®.) 24. 33ei
langerem Seben bei grogen f aiferg, mare er (ber ii!reu55ug) ge:=
mi6 nid^t in biefem SO^af^e bereitelt morben. (9?aiinter.) 25. Unter
fed^§ 5tugen mad)t man bie biimmften ©treic^e, bie man unter
bieren gar nid)t §u ©tanbe hxad)tt. (^e^.) 26. ^a§ ift ein Sreunb,
ber fid^ fiir i^n tobtfd^Iageti tie^e. (Seff.) 2t. 3lber fageu @ie
•65,
380 EXERCISES.
felBft, §err; m§> ^atte e§ ge^otfen? (§c^.) 28. (g§ ift !etn
9lRenfc§ fo arm, ha^ er nic^t fterben !5nnte. (triiger.) 29. 2Setc|er
XXnban!6are ^dtte ftc^ nic^t p entfc^ulbigen getpu^t! (?eff.)
30. ©eftern ^Ibent) entftanb auf einmal ein leb^after grieben§=
ruf. S^^i^iefern er gegriinbet jet, mii§ ftc^ balb ^etgen. (®.)
31. Or)ne Siebe t3mge bie t^iecifc^e SSett ju ©runbe. (3afob§.)
32. (El, ^aia, tt)arum mare benit ha§> fo unglaubltc^ ? (?eff.) 33.
©0 mbd^f ic§ leben, ba^ \(i) iydtit, raeitn icl^ fc^eibe, gelebet mtr
5ur Suft imb anberen nic^t gu Seibe. (9lucf.) 34. ^ie greube
iiberrafcl^t un§ oft auf einer ©pur, tt)o trir fie uic^t ertrartct
^citteu. (SStelattb.) 35. ^c^ tuiiufc^te, ha^ bei S^ueu iu Weimar
bie (^efc^afte beffer ge^en mbgeu, al§> bei mir. (@c^.) 36. SSarum
fottten tvxx nic^t miinfc^eu, ncbeu ben Unferigen gu ru^en, unb
menu e§ aud^ nur fiir ein 3ar)rr)unbert iudre. ((S.) 31. ^er
SD^^eufd^ ift frei gefd)affeu, ift frci, unb \mx' er iu S^^etten geboren.
(@(^.) 38. 3Ser bu aud^ feift, ic^ tt)iinfcl}e 9!ettung btr. (®.) 39.
SSie fe'^r aud^ euer 3uu're» miberftrebe, geljorc^t ber Q6t unb
bent (^efe| ber ©tunbe. (®(^.) 40. 9lur eine§ meig ic^ fic^er,
ic^ merbe ungtii(ili(^, tnie biefe 3SaI)l aucl^ auSfcittt. (^^rei.)
41. IXnter alien Umftanben mugte er ber^inbern, ba^ bie ©tabt
in frembe (^ettjalt fame. (^. ®v.) 42. SBon ben giiBen 5ie^t er
bie ©c^u^e bel)eub, Damit er ha^ ^dc^Ieiu burc^fd^reite. [<BA),) 43.
S^er^ei^en mir, bamit man un§ Uerjei^e. (©eiime.) 44. ®er alte
9JZeufc^ in un§ foil fterben, bamit eine neue 3:ugenb in un§ em^
porfeime. (C^erber.) 45. (Ettva^ fiird^ten unb ^offen unb forgen
muB ber 9}?enfc^ fiir ben fommenben forgen, ha^ er bie ©cl^mere
be§ ^afein§ ertrage, unb ha§> ermiibenbe (^leid^maj^ ber ^age.
(@d^.) 46. Ser einmal liigt, bent glaubt man nid^t, unb menu
er and) bie 3SaIir^eit fpricl)t. (@pr.) 41. SSie grof3 bid) auc^ bie
^onigin gu mac^en berfpric^t Iran' i^rer ©c^mei^etrebe nid^t.
(@(^.) 48. garret i^r, bi§ bag ber recl)te 9f^ing htn 9JJunb
eroffne ? (?eff.) 49. ©d^ictt einen fid^eren 33oten i^m entgegen,
ber auf ge^eimen 2Beg i^n ^u mir fiil)re. (@*.) 50. ^u finbeft !ei^
nen, ber fic^ feineg S^ac^barn p fd)amen braud^e. (®.) 51. (S§ift
unmoglii^, \>a% ein unb berfelbe Tltn\^ biefer SSelt unb gugkid^
^ott biene. (Slaubiug.) 52. Qd^ mar nid§t fo eingenommen, hai
EXERCISES.
381
icl^ nid^t (lemcrft T)dtte, \vk nur uicutgc t^n (Sinn bcv garten
3Sorte fii^tten. ((^.) 53. ^em t()dttgen SlRenfc^cn fommt e§ bar=
anf an, \)a^ er ba§ Sf^ed^te t()ue; ob bag 9fted)te gefc^e^e, foil i^n
nid^t fiimmern. (@.)
THEME XVI.
SUBJUNCTIVE AS OPTATIVE, CONDITIONAL AND POTENTIAL.
1. He who has anything to say, let him speak. 2. Let
him rejoice who hears the voice of poetry. 3. May war
never appear to this peaceful valley. 4. May he never
finish what he has begun. 5. Come when you can; be it
morning or evening, you will be welcome. 6. Let him
think what he will, I shall still love him. 7. Let us sit
down and chat until he comes back. 8. May the world
never become worse than it is already. 9. He has not
been guilty of any crime, unless it be of a political one.
10. I will bless him, unless he opposes me. 11. O, that I
were not guilty of this crime ! 12. Would that I had
never beheld this man ! 13. Had we not exchanged
peace for war. 14. We should not have been afraid, had
we not been guilty. 15. Had you known the world better,
you would never have trusted this man. 16. He would
not be imprisoned here had he not done that noble deed.
17. Had I been able to help him, I should have felt my-
self happy. 18. How could I have saved myself, if his
strong arm had not led me out ? 19. If I can find the
outlet, I will thank God. 20. He will make a poem if
he hears of this noble deed. 21. 0, that all had remained
undone ! 22. If we could but help everyone ! 23. He
knows that poem as if it were written in his heart. 24.
She nodded, as if she understood everything. 25. They
acted quite as if they were at home here. 26. He is as
proud as if he were forgetting that he was not born with
this rank. 27. He certainly would have worked well,
only he was ilL 28. O, that he had lived longer, then my
382 EXERCISES.
hopes would not have been frustrated. 29. A longer life
of the great emperor might have secured the crown to
his son. 30. No; it certainly would not have helped him.
31. I should not like to suffer the death of a criminal.
32. He may have written the letter himself; but that
would be incredible. 33. I should like to know why busi-
ness does not go better. 34. They will certainly come,
were it only for a few hours. 35. We shall surprise them,
especially if they have not expected us. 36. However un-
grateful he may be, he will know how to * excuse himself.
37. Whoever he may be, and whatever he may do, she will
excuse him and love him. 38. Man was created that he
might work and pray. 39. Man must fear and sorrow, so
that he may not love life too much. 40. He wishes to be
rich that he may help everyone. 41. He will find not one
who does not obey the law. 42. He had to wait until the
city should come into his power. 43. It does not matter
to me whether they forgive me; I only hope that I may
not need to be ashamed.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XIX.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIRECT STATEMENT.
(333.) 1. (Sr fiil^Ite, ba^ er ein anberer SJJenfd^ 511 tDerben be*
gtime. (®.) 2. S5)u follteft nid^t beiifen, id^ fei iiber dlai^t em
geiglincj iinb ein ^errcit^er [^errater] gemorbeu. {§e^.) 3.
^^orncr f^reibt mir, ha^ er 14 ^age l^ier §u§ubringen ^offe.
(Scf).) 4. SJteinft bu, id) fei ein ^inb ? m 5. S^ ^efte^e bar^
auf, boB ficl^ ber Sorb entferne. (@d^.) 6. (Sie berlangen ifjren
Oberft, ben dJla^, jnriicf; er fei ^ier auf bent (Sc^Io^, de^anpten
fie, bu ^alteft i^n mit B^^^l^' ^nb menn bn xijn nic^^t Io§ge(ift,
tt)erbe man i^n mit bcm ©d^tnerte §n befreien n)iffen. {^^.)
7. (£r erblicfte bie nftc M(\(\h, bie iftm mit gang t)erftortem (^e^
ftd^t pfliifterte, fie fud^e iljn feit einer ^albeu ©tunbe, er miiffe
* 343.111,2.
EXEEdSES. 383
^eimfommen. (^c^.) 8. ^ie ©ignorie* eutfc^utbigte flc^, ber $apft
laffe $0iicf)elangelo ntcl^t fort; fobalb man f enter '^aO^aft iDerbeii
fonne, miirbe ha§> SSer! abgeliefert merbcn. (^. ®r.) 9. 2)en
SBorfcl^Iag, Uo§> feine <So^ne nac^ bem 9}ZorgenIanbe abjufenben,
tnieg ber .(l^aifer al§ unpaffenb guriic!, bettn er ^abe, obgleid) im
ftebenunbfec^jigften Qa^re be§ 5IIter§, noc^ Siraft gemig, ftc§,
tt){e e^ fcin ^eruf er^eifc^e, an bie ©pil^e ber S^riften^eit 511
ftellen. (9^aumer.) 10. ^on entfcf)eibenber SSlcr)ttg!eit tt)ar e§,
tuelc^en (Sutfcl)IuJ3 ^aifer griebricl^ in biefem 5(ugeubltc! ergreifen
ttjerbe. [dtanxmv.) 11. (Sr baif)te nicl^t ouber§, al§ ba^ ber
©c^aiifpieler ba§ 3:()eater auffuc^en merbe. (@.) 12. (^§> ge^t bie
9iebe, baft e§ if)m Suft bereite, fterben gu fe^en. (Sberg.) 13.
^ennoc^ erfcl^rerfte bie ^^ac^ric^t, ba^ ber ^rieg erflcirt fei. (grei.)
14. ®ie ^ermut^ung [^ermutung], ba§ ein SSalb^iiter ^ier feine
SBo^nung ^abe, gab ic^ auf. (^et).) 15. 2Benigflen§ finbe ic^ e§
ntc^t billig, ha^ Ottilie aufgeopfert tuerbe. {®.) 16. SSer
fpric^t i^m ah, bci'^ er bie SO^enfcl^en fenne, fie gu gebranc^en
iDiffe ? (®d^.) 17. ^Ifo befa^f er un§ gn t^un nnb bir gn met*
ben, e§ fei bein ©ofjn ^on (S^aefar, ber fie fenbe. {<Bd).) 18. Tlan
fii^Ite, baJ3 o^ne bie gi^ei()eit aiU^ tjertoren fei. (§. ®r.) 19. ©r
fagte bem ganbernben 5tmtmann ^eimlic^, er moc^te boc^ ber
©a(^e ein (E'nbe ntacf)en. (®.) 20. ^d) tt)oI(te, fie tjatten taufenb*
ntal 9kc^t, bn aber lebteft noc!^. (?aube.) 21. SSie fe^^r tnnnfcfjte
ic^, ha% (Sie in biefen 3;:agen bei un§ trciren. (®.) 22. ©alabin
antttjortete : ^er ^aifer mlige bebenfen, ba^ e§ iDeniger
(If)riften gcibe at§ ©aracenen, nnb baJ3 nic^t gro^e Sanbftrecfen
nnb unfid)ere ^eere bie Mac^t ber kitten trennten nnb fc^neKe
$iilf§leiftnng t)err)inberten. SDennocl^ tnode er, gegen (Srnenernng
be§ griebeng, 3:t)rn§, 3:ripDti» nnb ^Intioc^ien, luelc^e ©tcibte bie
Sfjriften nod) befdJ3en, nid)t angreifen. (9Jaumer). 23. 90^ir melbet
er an§ Sinj, er tdge !ran!. [B6).) 24. (£r fragte fo angfttic^, ob
S^r ntc^t berfeljrt wnret. m 25. Sd^ fixrc^te, Dberft Antler,
man f)at mit enc^ ein fc^dnbtic^ ©piet getrieben. (@(^.) 26. ^
tnollte nic^t fommen nnb n)ir mn^ten bod^, er Xoax anf bem SSege.
(®.) 27. ^a§ ic^ i^ren 9^amen nie ge^ort ^atte. I (Self.) 28.
♦ Governing body of Florence in the 16th century.
384 EXEEOISES.
ha% er feiii (^emiit^ [(^emiit] lute feme ^imft an beinen Se'^ren
bilbe ! (®.) 29. <Sie tDii^te nic^t, wa§ fie geboren fei ? (5ie ^citte
e§ nie Don ir)m erfa^ren, ha^ fie eine dfjriftin geboren fei, unb
fetne Qiibin? ^ie. {?eff.) 30. SSa§ fagft bn U? fragte er be^
troffen. 5((§ td^ gn SSei^na^ten l^ier wax, "^atte id^ ni^t me^r
an bid^ geba^t ? (^e^.)
HiLUSTRATIVB SENTEN-CES XX.
CONDITIONAL TENSES.
(334-36.) 1. SSenn id) nur an mic^ f eft ft benfen biirfte, tt)iirbe
id^ mic^ ^artnacfig lueigern, beine (^ab^ an^une^men. {(B.) 2.
SSiirben fo oft neue ^eifpiele jur SSarnimg bienen, ioeun bie
SSarnung atterer ^eifpiele gefrud)tet ^(itte? ((Sngel.) 3. ^ie
gliicfUc^ tDiirbe manc^er teben, n)enn er fic^ urn anberer Seute
©acl^en fo toenig befiimmerte, a(§ urn feine eigenen. (^id^tenberg.)
4. ^u tierbienteft, ^remierminifter im Sanbe 5U fein ; e§ miirbe
bann too^t gan^ anberg im gangen ^urfiirftent^um [^tum] fte^en
(3|d^o!fe.) 5. Tlan glaubte bie ^o^men ^um ©c^meigen 5U brin*
gen, menn §ug'en§ * Ser)re buret) ben greunb fefter Derbammt
n)iirbe. (®rube.) 6. (^efe^t, Seanber tniirbe burc^ fie glii(i(ic^ —
njerbe ic^ fein gi'euub bfeiben fonnen ? M.) 1. Xk boppelten
SSinbungen ber @c^tangen n^iirben ben ganjen 2^xh tierbectt
leaden. (?e[f.) 8. ^iefe§ ©ingen, 331umenmalen nub ^omobie*
fpielen miirbe mi(f) nic^t einen 5tugenblirf gliicflic^ madden fonnen,
(^e^.) 9. (Sr freute fi(^ baxan in ber ©offnung, ta^ ber %xnf)^
ling batb atte§ nod^ reic^lic^er beteben miirbe. (®.) 10. !I)ie Un*
tu^e nnb Ungemil^ett, n)ie td^'^ ^ier finben tt)urbe, ^at mir
untern>eg§ alien §nnger Dertrieben. (§e^.)
THEME XVn.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF INDIKECT STATEMENT, AND CONDITIONAL
TENSES.
L He asked me whether I had become a coward. 2. I
answered I was not afraid of him, and would soon show
•i05.
EXERCISES. 385
him that I was no child more. 3. Max wrote he did not
demand that I should deliver the work now, but he hoped
to receive it as soon as it was finished. 4. When I found
him he excused himself ; he had been looking for me also,
and could not find me. 5. They say the emperor will send
his sons alone to France; for he is * in his 76th year, and haa
not strength enough to put himself at the head of the
army. 6. The prince told me that war had been declared,
and that everything would be lost without the emperor.
7. The emperor answered: he wished for peace and would
like to make an end to the war. 8. But he could not
forget that the French themselves had begun the war.
9. He would not lead back the army unless the enemy
should give up all the German cities which they had
possessed before. 10. I do not think it just that the
French should pay so much. 11. I thought they still
lived there. 12. Did you believe I was afraid ? I believed
he was lying sick at Berlin, and did not know that he
was on his way to England. 13. O, that he would soon
appear ! 14. What do you say ? I had ordered you to do
that? I never did so. 15. If you heard my warnings
you would be happy. 16. We would not take your gifts
if we were richer. 17. I should like to be rich, then I
would help everyone. 18. If you had only concerned
yourself with your own affairs, you would be rich already.
19. Such a hope would not make me happy. 20. A wise
king would not have condemned the teaching of Huss.
21. They did not know how they would find it here. 22.
He wrote me in the hope that they would soon arrive.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XXL
THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT AND OBJECT OP VERBS.
(341.) 1. (Sin (Sffen tutrb gegeben auf bent ©c^to^. (@(^.) 2.
S)a§ 2e6en ber grau ift eiu eiuigeg ^e^en unb ^ommen, ober
286 EXEBCISES.
§ebett uttb ^ragen, ober ^eretten unb (Sd^affen fiir ^nbere. ((S.)
3. grei tDttt id^ fein im §anbeln imb tm 5)i(^ten. ((S.) 4. Hn§
(Sntbeorett, 9JJiffen, ^erlieren, DHc^t^^aben getcu^nt ber §tmmet
feine (^elteOten. (^abater.) 5. D, fegne, §err, mein SSer!, meiti
9^eben unb mein ®en!en. (. * .) 6. Qe^t rebe tntr Reiner mel^r
t)on 33Iei0en, t)on ^erOergen ! (@(^.)
(342.) 1. ©terben ift tiid^tg, bod^ leben unb uid^t fe'^eu, ba§
ift ein IXnglM. {Bd}.) 2. SO^enfc^enliebe iiben, l^ei^t gut fein.
{(Sberg.) 3. UnreC^t letben fc^meid^elt grofeen ©eelen. (@d^.) 4.
(£r Itebte bie ^ferbe unb e§ t^at i^m melj, bie ebten ^^lere
[^tere] tobten §u fe^en. ((Sbers.) 5. ^ie braunen, flugen 5lugen
gu malen mar nic|t§ Seic^teg. ((Sberg.) 6. ^^ begriff e§ freilid^,
ober mid§ bariiber gu troften, moKte mil tro^bem nic^t gelingen.
(^ei).) 1. (S§ ift fo elenb betteia gu miiffen. (®.) 8. (S§
fd^merjte niic^ leb^aft, biefe fc^onen Sac^cn t)er!aufen gu fe^en.
(®.) 9. (£§ t^erftanb fid) t)ou felbft, ba^ trol^ aEem einem fold^en
SP^anne §u t^un gegeben trerben mugte. (^. ®r.)
(343.) 1. 5Iner!ennen t^un mir bie 9^ic^tig!eit ber Sorberung.
(®.) 2. 99?ir mar's, al§ tf^at' fein ^luge l^inab in§ ^erj mir
fe^en. mMcv.) 3. ^er (^(Mlic^e, ber ^e^aglic^e, ^at gut
reben. (@.) 4. SSem ba§ fe^It, ber ^at gut im 3Sin!e( filjen unb
ttjeife bie ^df)feln §ucfen. (§e^.) 5. ^enn od^, bie 9}?enfc^en lieben
lernen, e§ ift ha^ ein^ige ma^re ©lite!, (platen.) 6. ©rfa^rung
unb Uebung im Ungliict lernt fd^meigen. (^ebel.) 7. ®ie i8atat>ier
:^atten i()m biefe ^nfeln erobern ^etfen. (<Sci^.) 8. Qd^ banfe bir,
^ott, ba§ bu mic^ if)n ^aft fe^en laffen. (®.) 9. DftmalS lie^ er
t^ in ben ^igianfaat berufen. (Sbers.) 10. 5lIIe§, tt)a§ ber^aifet
iiber feine ©iege fc^reiben ta^t, ift ertogen. (^rei.) 11. Qd^ l^ore
ben SSagen borfa^ren. Sebc mo^t. {^ttj.) 12. ^a ()ie6 ber
®o!tor mi(^ bleiben. (@ber8.) 13. (Sd^nett mirft bu bie 9^ot^^
menbigfeit [9^otmenbig!eitl berfd^minben, unb "^zdjt in Itnred^t
fic^ t)crmanbe(n fe^en. (®(^.) 14. ^^ fiil)le iunge§, f)eilige§
SebcnSgliidf ueugtii^eitb mir burd^ D^eri) unb 5(bern rinnen. (®.)
15. SBon ^uQ^ttb auf l)ab' id) gelernt ge^ord^en. ((^.) 16. (So
bitte id^ iSie mir 4 ©tik! bon ber griinen ^apete au§ granffurt
fommen ju laffen. (<^c^.) It. S)er ^raf !§at mid^ fi^en fe^en. (®.)
EXEKCISES* 387
18. Wan ^attc ha^ ^offerd^en in ber Wxik be§ 8tmmer§ fte^en
gelaffen. (®.) 19. ®ag ^etgt nic^t (^ott t)ertrauen, ba§ :^ei6t
(^ott berfuc^en. (@(^.) 20. ©tiff ! jagte fie, ^aft bu nid^t flopfen
fjoren ? (ipe^.) 21. S^^ ^<^^e nie fiirc^terlid^er fluc^en ^iiren, oI§
(Sie Iad)en. ($?e[f.) 22. SSir fatten feit me^reren 3Sod)en t)ou
einem ^aume fprec^en geI)ort, beffen ©aft eitte naf)renbe WM)
\]t (§um.) 23. Sa§ fingen, (befell, (a^ raufc^en, unb ftimmeit
munter brein. ( ) 24. ©prec^en 8ie nic^t baDon, lieber
greunb, e§ ift mir ti3btUc!^ [totlic^], tnemt ic^ bariiber fpred^en
Ijoren mu^. (!^inbau.) 25. ^u(^ in Tld^tv. f}bvt man (Snc^ §erren
ni^t befonberg preifen. (@(^.) 26. S^om fi^eren ^ort lagt'^
fi(^ gemiit^lic^ [gemiitlii^] ratljen [raten]. (@c^.) 21. 2a^ f(ie^,
iuag fic^ nic^t ^Iten Icijst. (Hrubt.) 28. Safet fic^ an§ einem
SDemifd) benn nid)t§ macl)en ? (?eff.) 29. SSer blieb nid^t fte^en,
menn biefe 33eiben lancjfam burd) bie ^romenabe tpanbelten?
(^aiiff.) 30. ®ie ^raut tt^ar auf ifjrem $Ia^ mitten an ber langen
^afet fil^en geblieben. (^ei^.) 31. ®er ^erjocj SQZilon fc^Iafen
lag. (U^.) 32. 9^eben fic^ I)atte fie einen ()o^en ^orb fte^en.
(®.) 33. Qd^ ^b' im tiefften ©runbe ber (2ee(e ru^'n ein Sieb.
(9?u(f.) 34. Segt mid^ ^^n, \vo fein Siebenber fommt iDeinen.
(Berber.) 35. (Inblic^ ber^tpeifelte er an bem ©elingen feiner
5(rbeit, marf ben nnoottenbeten ^rief in bie ^ifte, nnb legte fid^
fd^Iafen. ((Sber«.) 36. £'ommt, laj^t nn§ ge^'n fpagieren in htn
t)ie(griinen SSalb. (O^ife.) 3t. 9lie Dergi^t ber griiljUng tDieber^
gufommen. {Zkd.) 38. ^er 5l(te lub 5(bam ein, ben ad^ten ^la^
im gu^rmer! einjunetjmen. (Sberg.) 39. Qljr 5(uge gebot t)er^
ftcinbig gn reben. (®.) 40. Sleraunu§ befoljl feiner ^od^ter, i'^m
einen ^ed^er SSein ju reic^en. (eber§.) 41. ^ie le^ten SSorte
9^utf)'§ fatten i^m gn ben!en gegeben. (^berg.) 42. SDem freien
SD^anne l^at ®ott empor jn fd)anen eriaubt. {^M.) 43. (S§ lebt
ein (S^ott, 5u ftrafen nnb jn rcicl^en. ((2c^.) 44. Xcn grennb ju
erfennen, muf^t bu erft einen ©c^effel (Salj mit i()m gegeffen
l^aben. (@pr.) 45. ®en ^rei§ be§ 2Sett(auf§ ju getninnen, barfft
bu nic^t fte()n nnb bid^ befinnen. {@Ieim.) 46. ^ier ^retter
braud^t'§ nur, biinn nnb fc^mat, ein miibe§ 9[Renfd^ent)er5 ju
betten. (Srager.) 47. ®r ift thtn auSgegangen, mit ein n)enig
388 E^RSISES.
S3attb gu ^anbeln. (3. ®r.) 48. Unb bocl^, ber Qube rt)arni(^t
gu retten, unb ^atte berbient, ma§ i^m broI)te. (@ber§.) 49. 2Be^
ntg ober nicl^tS fte^t ^u gemmnen. (^. ®r.) 50. ^er getter
bleibt bettter (5^nabe ju Derjet^en. (®.) 51. j?aum fd^eint eg gu
gtauben. (®.) 52. 3c| blicfte in ben unfauberlid^en glur ^inein,
e§ njar !eine 9}^enfd^enfeete brinnen 5U fe(}en ober §u Ijoren. (§ei).}
53. 5Da0 53efte, n)a§ man bon t§m (ernt, ift nicl^t mitjut^eilen
[4eilen]. (®.) 54. ®ie 3^^^ tnurbe i^m nic^t (ang, benn aud^ er
l^atte Diet gu ben!en. (§ei)J 55. Safari fd^etnt mit ber S^atnr
nte p t^un ge'^abt ^u l^aben. (§. ®r.) 56. 3Ser e§ je^t ntd^t
nterft, ha^ bie SCenien etn poeti]d)e§ ^robuct ftnb, bem ift nic^t
gn ^elfen. (@c^.) 5T. Sangfani !onnnenbe§ ©liicf pflegt cm Icings
ften 5U bleiOen. (Berber.) 58. ^ariiber fc^Iief id^ ein, unb al§ td^
emad^te, glaubte id^ eOen nur getrdnmt p I)aben. (@.) 59. §ier
gilt'g, ntein (Sot)n, bem Sl\ii)er tt)o§l ju bienen. (Sd^.) 60. (Seine
Sartlic^feit gegen feine ^inber I)inberte ifjn nid^t, fie in guter
guc^t gu fatten. ((SruBe.) 61. SO^an mu^te fi(^ l^iiten, feine biel^
beutigen 5Cu§briic!e nic^t fiir eine ^eiDdfjrung ju ne^men. (3?au!e.)
62. @r fnnb Sotten bef(^dftigt, bem ^Uten ju^ureben. {(§>.) 63. ®r
befann fid^ nid^t (nnge, bon feinen im gelbe fte^enben ^eeren
fogleic^ ai^t^eljntaufenb Tlann ab^ubanfen. (®d^.)
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XXIL
THE INFINITIVE AS ADJUNCT, ETC.
(344.) 1. ^er S^^^tfjum [3rrtum] ift biet tetc^ter p er!ennen,
al§ bie 2Bar)rr)eit 5U finben. (®.) 2. Si)a§ ©ie mit eintgen
^artieen au§ bem (S^eKini* anfangen tt)erben, ift mir lieb 5U ^oren.
(S(^.) 3. ©auerlid^ Wax ba^ SSaffer, gefunb §u trinfen. (®.) 4.
©ie ift f(^on jugleic^ unb fc!^rec!(ic^ an5ufe()en. ((Sd^.) 5. S<^
bin nid^t jung genug, bor ©o^en mid^ 5U neigen, unb ^ro^ mit
%xo\} 5U bcinbigen, alt genug. (®.) 6. ^d) wax geftern fo un-
borfidC)tig, ein pnar .^apitet im ^erobot gu (efen. (§et).) Y. ^er
5l(te, ber anii) fonft fc^mer 5U lenfcn wax, ^attt fid^ feft gemei^^
* The life of Benvenuto Cellim : see 66 Ac,
EXERCISES. 389
gert. (^etj.) 8. (Sure S5erfof}nung mar etn h)entg ju fi^neH, al§
ba§ fie bauer^aft ^citte feiit foKett. (®.) 9. ^te ^naben marett
5U jung, iim felbft eine ^oKe 5U fpieten. (^. (Sr.)
(345.) 1. S3orgefterti ^atit id^ eine ^Ibe §offnung, ©ie biet-
letd^t §ier 5U feljen. {B^.) 2. @ein plo^Iid^er SSunfc^, glorenj
gu t)erlaffen, i)attt bieKeid^t aber noc^ anbere (^riinbe. (^. ®r.)
3. 5(uf ber golterban! I;atte er ha§> ^et^t guriirfgeiDonnen, fic§
felbft 5U ad^ten. (@ber8.) 4. Qd^ bin in ber Sage, mir in ber
grembe al§> ^ienenber erft Qittranen nnb gnte ©efinnnng er^
iDerben 5U miiffen. (grei.) 6. ^ie iible (Smpfinbung, tro| ber reb:*
lid^ften SO^ii^e ^uriicfgnbteiben, berbarb i^m ha§> ^afein. (@berg.)
6. ©ie grb^te ^erebtfamfeit befteljt in ber Slnnft 5U fd^meigen.
(C)ippet.) 1. ^ie $f(irf)t 5U beffern gibt nn§ ha^' ^fJec^t ju tabeln.
(@(^efcr.) 8. ®ann ^be id£) bie ^flid^t, i^n 5U rcic^en. (gvei.)
(346.) 1. ®ie SSeiber lieben bie 6tar!e, ofjne fie nad^p*
a^men, bie 9[)^anner bie ga^tljeit, oTjne fie ju ermiebcrn. (3. % 'St.)
2. Ttan^^txUi I)aft bn berfciumet ; ftatt ^n ^anbeln, ^aft ge;=
troumet, ftatt 5U ben!en, I)aft gefd^miegen. (®.) 3. D^atnr gab mt§
S5erftanb, urn red^t 5U benfen; nm red^t jn ^anbeln, gab fie un§
ha^' §er5. (531umauer.) 4. ©ie begniigten fid^ bamit, bie nmliegen^
ben Mofter p pliinbern. (@c^.) 5. ©ie tarn gar nid[}t baju, gegen
t^^n ben ©rant unb 3^1^^ augjntaffen. (5(uerBac^.) 6. ^d^ fonnte
midf) nid^t baran getDo^nen, mir bie fromme Stugnftine fo ju
benfen. (3f(^of!e.)
(347.) 1. Sd^ meine0 ^ruber§ ^inber nid^t erfennen ! ($?e[f.)
2. S^ eine§ 9[^anne§ 33ilb in meinem S3ufen tragen ! (@d).) 3.
Sieber, tanfenbmat lieber, ^ettelbrob effen nnb in ber Stnnft
(^rogeg erreid^en, at§ tm (S^Iiicle praffen unb fc^melgen. ((Sber«.)
4. 53arm^er§iger ©ott — biefe ©tunbe nur iiberteben unb bann
bic^ preifen, emig. (.^et).) 5. ©ie fprai^ : nur au§ bem ^ater=
lanb nid^t reifen! [Md.) 6. SDer fteine $aul tft l^iniiberge*
laufen unb ^at gerufen : ^ufmad^en, liebe 9[^utter, oufmad^en !
^Oer bie SJluttcr ift nid^t aufgemad^t. (toc^.)
(348.) 1. ^nfitten in bem (^IM, ^a\>a trieber p umarmen
unb mein ©c^mefterd^en, norf) biet reijenber, al0 td^ fie mir bor*
gefteUt, in (gmpfang 5U ne^men, ha^i^i^ i^ l^unbertmal baran.
390 EXEECISES.
(§e^.) 2. §ter hai ic^ i^n, ft(^ meberjufe^ett, 5i§ i$ tm Stanbc
getDefen fein iDiirbe, au§ ber ©c^Iud^t, tDO ein ^iemlic^ reid^Iid^er
Ouell gum H}^eere f(o^, unb tt»o roir bercitg eiuen furgen §alt
gemad^t fatten, abermaB 2Baffer gu l^olen. ((Spiel.) 3. 5ld^, ^rei=
lid^ tuerben fie i^ti I)abett umbringen tDotteti. (2cf[.)
THEME XVm.
THE INFINITrVE.
1. I am accustomed to this eternal coming and going,
and standing still is hard for me. 2. The selling of all these
beautiful things pained me much. 3. I have no time for
painting or reading, I must accustom myself to working.
4 To suffer wrong is a misfortune, but to do wrong is a
greater one. 5. To do without is easier than to beg. 6.
To remain quiet and to hide myself was quite impossible.
7. It pained the child to see such a noble animal killed,
and I did not succeed in comforting him for it. 8. He
can well be contented, for he has already all that he
wants. 9. We taught him to obey his parents and to love
all men. 10. He bade me come to him and helped me
write my letter. 11. You will soon see the wagon drive up
and the doctor go away. 12. I saw him go away, and I
felt all my hopes disappear. 13. I heard the emperor tell
of his victories, and he thanked God that he had let him
conquer* this country. 14. He had seen his only son killed
in this war. 15. We had her buy several pieces of the
green carpet. 16. I hear laughing and singing, who is it ?
17. Now they are coming, I hear a knocking. 18. She
caused work to be done for the poor in her house, and I
heard her charity praised everywhere. 19. Yes, we have
also heard her praised. 20. She does not suffer herself
to be hindered by her illness. 21. Nothing bad can be said
of her. 22. Nothing can be made of this man. 23. Why did
* 439.2.
EXEECISES. 391
you remain sitting at the table ? 24. I had a good friend
sitting beside me, and I wanted to talk with him. .25. "When
we went to walk together he often remained standing, in
order to look after the people. 26. He invited me to go to
drive and allowed me to take my sister with me. 27. He
commanded me to speak, but to speak sensibly. 28. He
did not forget to offer his guest a cup of wine. 29. Wo
have come to visit you, will you allow us to come again ?
30. Spring comes to make us happy again. 31. Your
story is not to be believed. You have not heard the whole;
the best still remains to be told. 32. There is not one soul
to be saved out of this house. 33. You have only to
command, we will do anything. 34 He is accustomed to
going to sleep over his book, and I take heed not to wake
him. 35. Nothing now hinders us from going away. 36.
What hindered you from seeing the emperor? 37. I was
busied in helping the old man, and did not believe I could
leave him. 38. Everything you say is pleasant to me. 39.
Truth is hard to find, but it is still harder to recognize it,
when one has found it. 40. I am too young to read
Herodotus. 41. He was too old to find new friends, but
he was still too young to die, therefore he lives lonely and
alone. 42. I have no wish to blame him, but I have also
no wish of seeing him again. 43. The hope of improving
him gives me the courage to blame him. 44. I had not
time enough to earn his confidence for myself. 45. He
had not the courage to avenge his father, so he lost the
right of respecting himself. 46. He has the misfortune to
have survived all his friends. 47. They praise the virtues
of this great man without imitating them. 48. Instead of
telling me the truth he was silent, and I went away with-
out recognizing him. 49. I did not think of blaming
him. 50. They had to content themselves with drinking
some water. 51. I eat his bread and live in his house ?
Never ! 52. Better be quite poor than not to live in one's
fatherland. 53. Oh, to avenge my emperor I then I can die
392 EXERCISES.
liappy. 54. I have no wish to survive my emperor, who
was killed in the last war. 65. I hope never to leave the
country where I was born, and where all my friends have
lived and died.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES XTOTT.
PAKTICIPLES.
(350.) 1. ^tht l^anbelnbe Station blent ftd^ unb anberen
^olfern. ((Sotjinger.) 2. S)u bift fein ©c^iiler me^r, fonbern ein
iDerbenber SO^eifter. (<5berg.) 3. ^ann folg' i<i) ber roeibenben
$eerbe. (®.) 4. SSarum follte td§ einen tanjenben Z^ct befurfien?
(^auff.) 5. ^eftern mu^te id^ mic^ munbern, tt)ie (Sie fid^ nad^
einer fd^led^tfd^Iafenben ^aii)t, unb unter SSolfen t)on 'Zabah
xauiS), no(^ fo gan§ gut unb bei §umor ^ielten. (0(^.) 6. ®a§
^ud^ miirbe ntir bei htn t)or§abenben 5trbeiten gute 2)ienfte
tf}un. (@d§.)
(351.) 1. SDer ^id^ter fd^meigt Don taufenb burd^gettjetnten
^ag^ unb 9^ad£)ten. (®.) 2. ^a§ 93^dbd^en ftanb mit gerungenen
^anben. (^^rei.) 3. !5)er geiftreid^e, ^eitere Qtaliener trar liberaH
ein gern gefe^ener (^aft. (^berg.) 4. ®a§ bolle, au^gefuttte
Seben, foraie bie Ieict)te (Srmiibung nad^ gett)aner 5(rbeit, bte§
alle§ mar gemig fc^on. ((Sbcr3.) 5. ^ie ^ftic^ten ber §au§frau
!ann tiielleid^t eine gemtet^ete [gemietete] §anb erfiiUen, bie
^flic^ten ber 30fJutter nie. (Sujom.) 6. SDer ^onig faun nic^t affe
Derbiente 9}Zdnner fennen. (?eff.)
(352.) 1. 5(uc^ bitte ic^ mir burd^ Gulping ba^ SSerseid^mg
ber t)on mir ein^ufenbenben ^iidfier 5uruc!fc^ic!en §u laffen. (@4)
2. SllU k^ mic^ luegen eine§ angufaufenben Sanbgut§ fur bid^
erfunbigte, inarb fogteid^ ein 50Zann berufen, ber mir berer ge^n
antrug. (3fc^o!!e.) 3. ^ie D^ac^a^^mung ift angeboren, ha^ ^a^'^
gual^meube trirb nid^t leid^t erfannt. (®.)
(353.) 1. ©ic^ felbft getreu mar er ein (Sd^affenber, ein ^or*
mart^ftrebenber bi§ gu feinen U^ttn ^agen. (^enjatb.) 2. SDiefe
SSorte mirften it)ie frciftige 'iSr^enei auf hQxi ©enefenben. (Sbers.)
3. ^er gal^renbe ftieg manc^mal bie neben i^m ©i^enbe an, bag
EXERCISES. 393
fie aud^ r)m5orc^e auf ha^, \m§> man fage. (?(ucrBacf).) 4. ^^ Un
ved§t tierlangenb nac^ ber ^Tu^fii^rung S^i^er Ijielfac^en ^been,
unb erinarte rec^t balb ettt)a§ babon. (@d).) 5. Unb tnenti ic^
in bie S^i'^ii^f^ f^^^ "^^'^^ lacl^enb erfc^ien fie mir ! (€>awff-)
(354.) 1. 5(uf Sl^iinftigeS rec^ne nic^t, unb ^aijV md)t auf ^er*
fprod)ene§, !(ag^ an ^erIorene§ nid}t, unb ben!^ ni(^t an ger-
bro^ene§. [Md.) 2. ^erorbuet ift im encjlif^en (^efe^, ba§
jeber 5Inge!Iagte burc^ @efcI)tt)orene t>on (Seine^gtei(f)en foil ge*
tic^tet n)erben. (@c^.) 3. (Sie befam tdgltc^ ettrag gefd)cn!t. (^.)
4. 3f§ IDu^te ©te bei il)m, unb fiiljlte ntirf) nid)t ganj ijon i^m
getrennt. (^rei.) 5. (Sr befam il)ren 5(nfur)rer gcfangen. (@(^.)
(356.) 1. ^ie SSette fc^manft unb fUe^t unb fc^i^eat, unb
beugt ftc!^ fcl^dumenb nieber. (@.) 2. (^uten 5lbenb, TOe ! fagte
t(^. ©ie nicfte nur tierbroffen mit bent ^opfe. (^ei}.) 8. SJ^einen
SBater? ftammelte U(rld), unb fd)aute bem 5lnberen bleic^ unb
fragenb in§ 51ntli^. ((Sberg.)
(357.) 1. ^on einem fo langen SSege fomntt ntan immer
ermiibet an. (®.) 2. 9^eben i^m reitenb, erijielt er au§ feinent
SRunbe 5Iu§!unft ilOer atte ^unfte. (^. ®r.) 3. -Da lag bie gran. .
in einem armltd)en ©arge bon tofjen ^(an!en gebettet. (Sbers.)
4. ©ie ^atte grauen in ber .^irc^e t)or folc^en ^itbern !nieenb
beten gefe^n. ((^orre^.) 5. gril^ aber Wax in bie ^ircl^e gegangen
unb ftanb neOen feinent gi^eunbe an bie '^f)nx gebriidt. (§et).) 6.
^a inarf fic^ ber ©chiller tueinenb an bie ^ruft be§ Wti]kx^.
((gbers.) 1. ^a erfdjien ploWid), alien unerujartet, ber berfc^oKene
93?eifter. (§e^.) 8. ^(It getuorben bet ununterbroc^ener ^efc^cif^
tigung mit ber ^Tunft, tDar e§ iljm unmoglid), fid) ber 0en)ot)nten
^^atigleit ganj gu entl)alten. (^. @r.) 9. (So Wax er ein paar
©tragen n»cit gegangen, al§ er, urn eine ©de biegenb, eine Wdn-^
nergeftalt t)or fic^ erOIirfte. (§e^.) 10. ^ie nja^re greube wan^
belt auf ber (Srbe, tuie bie ma^re SSei^^eit, bon tuentgen gefel^en,
bon ber 3fiuf)e begteitet. (@to(berg.) 11. @on)ie bieglamme be§
Sid^t§, and) umgetnenbet, ^inaufftra^It, fo, tjom ©d^idfat gebengt,
ftrebet ber C^ute empor. (Berber.) 12. SO^lod^teft bu begtiidt unb
n^eife enbigen be§ 2eben§ Sf^eife. ((^.) 13. ^^eitne^menb [teilnel^*
tnenb] an f einem guge, § off ten fie bie §errfcl^aft tnieber ju er^
394 EXEECISES
langen. (^, ®r.) 14. S8on ha ftd^ bxrect nnd^ Often tnenbenb, unb
im Zi)aU beg 5lnio marfc^irenb, tDiirbe er Slorenj am rafd^efteu
errei^t l^aben. (^. ®r.) 15. ^od^ enbfic^, nngetrieben burd^
meineii D^eim, angelocft burd) greunbe, bte fi(^ Dor mir in bie
SScIt ^inaugbegeOen, waxh ber (Sntfc^Iu^ sefagt. (@.)
(359.) 1. ^ine ^tugel tarn geflogen; galt'g bir ober gait e§
mir? (U§.) 2. (Sgmont fam anf ben 9}?ar!t geritten. (®.) 3. ^a
fommt einmat gefprungen fein jiingfter (Sbelfnab. (U^.) 4. ®a§
nenne id^ gefc^Iafen. (Corner.) 5. (SoKft aud^ nic^t lange fiagen
. . nur frifd^, nur frifc^ gefnngen, unb aKe§ mxh n^ieber gut.
(e:^ami[fo.) 6. S^ic^t (ang gefeiert, frifd^ ! ®ie 9}?auerfteine ^er-
bei ! ^en ^ait, ben 9J?brtet jugefnijren ! {2>d).) 1. ^f^ofen anf
ben SSeg geftreut, unb be§ §arm§ Dergeffen ! (§oIti).)
(358.) 1. (St unterric^tete fie t)on ben au^erorbentlid^en
©(^icffalen il^rer langft al§ tobt [tot] 6en)einten ^ante. (3fd)o'ffe.)
2. (£r begab fic^ anf ha§> i^m t)om ^urfiirften gef(^en!te Sanbgut.
(®rube.) 3. 5l((e geinbe ber t)om ^aifer ^ur ©riinbung unb
^ultur feineg unermegHc^en 9fteic§e§ begonnenen ^f^eformen
erttjarteten nad^ feinem ^obe eine altgemeine ^egenretiolution.
(^fc^offc.) 4. 2Bo ber ©trom eine ^anbban! iibrig la^t, ha liegen
mit offenen 9f^adt)en, unbemegtid^ mie gel^ftude ^ingeftrecft, oft
hthtdt mit ^ogeln, bie ungefd)tad^ten S^orper ber ^ofobile.
(^um.)
THEME XrX.
PARTICIPLES.
1. We ought not to wake these sleeping children. 2. If
we do not wake the sleeping ones, they will not be ready
for the intended journey. 3. I said many a consoling word
to the weeping maiden, but she did not cease to lament
her lost friend. 4. Nothing can bring us back the lost
ones. 5. I have not yet received the letters sent in by
you, but I hope they will bring us the wished-for news.
6. Instead of giving me the promised present, the traveller
gave me nothing. 7. Tired by the long journey, he re-
mained q^uiet the whole day. 8. Who is the one sitting
EXERCISES. 395
next you ? 9. I saw her coming into the church weeping
and wringing her hands. 10. Kneeling before the picture,
and praying, she tries to forget her unhappiness. 11. The
few words spoken by the judge taught the accused that
he had nothing more to hope. 12. He knew himself to
be parted forever from his friends and his home. 13.
Accompanied only by a few friends, he left Florence, and
turning toward the North, he soon reached the army. 14
Marching directly to Florence the army apj^eared
suddenly, unexpected by everyone, before the city. 15. A
man came running into the city, and brought the news
that the enemy so long feared by all would soon reach the
city. 16. Then one saw the women and children come
weeping and complaining into the market-place. 17.
Arrived in England, I asked after the sonof my long lost
but always warmly loved friend. 18. I hoped to find
him on the estate bought by his father and given by him
to this son. 19. But the son, enticed by bad friends, had
sold the estate inherited from his father and had betaken
himself to the city. 20. Turning around the corner, and
going a couple of streets further, I soon reached the house
hired by him. 21. Kiding beside me, he' begged me to
take part in his expedition. 22. On this way we met
many riding and driving. 23. It is impossible for a man
grown old in uninterrupted employment to abstain
entirely from his accustomed activity. 24. The children
came springing to me, and brought me the letter sent
by you.
VOCABULARIES.
ABBBEVIATIONS.
accus. accusative.
adj. adjective.
adv. adverb.
art. article.
conj. conjunction.
dot. dative.
dem. demonstrative.
determ. determinative.
/. feminine noun.
gen. genitive.
impers. impersonal.
indec'L indeclinable.
insep'le inseparable.
inteij. interjection.
irdr. intransitive verb.
irreg. irregular.
m. masculine noun.
n. neuter noun.
N. New or weak conjugation.
num. numeral.
0. Old or strong conjugation.
vers, personal.
vl. plural.
poss. possessive.
ppl. past participle.
prep, preposition.
prow, pronoun.
pronH. pronominal.
reflex, reflexive.
rel. relative.
sep'le separable.
tr, transitive verb.
EXPLANATIONS.
Verbs of the Old or strong conjugation, and of the New or weak if
irregular, are so noted (by an added , or irreg. ^ respectively). Their
forms are to be sought in the list of irregular verbs. Verbs taking
fein as an auxiliary have an f added after them; to this an 1^ is added if
the verb takes either jein or l^aben.
Nouns have the sign of their gender appended, and. the endings of
their genitive singular (except of feminines) and nominative plural.
Adverbs in -ly derived from adjectives and having the same form
with them (79) are not separately entered.
References are made to the grammar by paragraph and division, as in
the grammar itself.
398
GEEMAN-ENGLISH
I. GERMAN-ENGLISH YOCABULARY.
aB, odu. and sep'le prefix, off, away.
a^tlltnfctt^ tr. dismiss with thanks,
discharge.
5l6cnb, rn. -b§, -be. evening, eve.
sglorfe, /. curfew.
after, conj. but, however.
aBermalS, odi^' again, once more.
aB^iingen, 0. intr. depend, be de-
pendent.
abliefertt, tr. deliver, consign.
aftnel^men, 0. tr. take off or away,
remove, gain or obtain from
ttBrcifCtt, irdr. |. journey away,
depart, go away.
ttbrufen, 0. tr. call away.
Ebft^eu, m. -eiieg. abhorrence,
loathing.
^M^tctl, m. -b6, -be. departure,
leave.
aM(t)(^0Cn/ 0. tr. strike off, cut
off.
ttftft^reiben, 0. tr. write off, copy;
write and refuse.
abfentien, {reg. or irreg.) tr. send
off or away, despatch.
$l6ftd)t, /. -ten. view, aim, inten-
tion, plan.
ttbflirc^ett, 0. tr. refuse, deny.
abtuei^fetn, irdr. \) or I change,
alternate.
%^fel, /. -tn. shoulder.
%fi^i, num. eight, f^t^n, eighteen.
'-m, eighty.
a^ten, tr. have regard for, respect;
esteem, consider, value.
af^tja^ng, odj. eight-year-old.
%dtv, rn. -x^, 3lct!er. cultivated
field, acre. sBttU, m. agriculture.
%t^t\, m. -Ig. nobility.
%bcr, /. -rn. vein.
al^nen, tr. have presentiment of,
forebode, suspect.
li^nli^, adj. {or adv.) like, re-
sembling.
^^nung, /. -gen. presentiment,
foreboding.
aU, indef. pron. and pron'l adj.: col-
lectivdy, all, entire, whole ; dis-
iributivdy, every, each, any, alL
alleS, all, everything, everyone:
see 193.
alletn, adj. (or adv.) alone, single,
only. conj. only, but.
allel}em, adv. all that.
attcrt^riflti^, adj. most Christian
(title assumedbythe French Icings).
attgemein, adj. common to all,
general.
flttjUtliel, adv. all too much.
5llmttnttt^, n. -d}^, -d^e. almanach.
5ttmofcn, n. -n^, -n. alms, charity.
ClS, conj. as ; as being, in character
of ; after comparative, than ; after
negative, other than, except, but;
with past tense, when, as ; before
inverted clause, as if. — uft,
as if.
olfo, adv. and conj. thus, accord-
ingly, therefore.
alt, adj. (or adv.) old, aged, ancient.
sCnglifr^, adj. Old English.
fitter, n. -erS; -r. age, old-age,
epoch.
VOCABULABY.
399
'd\i\i^,(idj. (or adv.) elderly, oldish.
5lmcri!tt, n. America.
5lmcrif ttttcr, m. -rg, -r. American.
ttmcrifanif^, adj. American.
5lmt, n. -te«, lemter. office,
charge, place, smanit, wi. bailiff,
steward,
ttmiifant cidj- amusing.
amiiftcrcn, tr. amuse.
an, adv. and seple prefix, on,
along, up. prep.: of position {with
dat. or accus.), at, by, against,
along ; of time, on, upon, at ; in
other relations, in respect to, in
the way of, in, at, to, by, of.
anbet, pron'l adj. other, else ;
different ; next, second: see 194,
193. 3c, 203.1a.
anbctd, adv. otherwise, else, diffe-
rently.
Oncrfcnncn, {irreg.) ir. recognize,
acknowledge.
?lnfong, m. -gg, -cinge. beginning.
anfangcn, 0. tr. set about, begin,
xmdertake. intr. begin, originate.
5Cnfu^rcr, m. -x^, -r. leader.
ttltgcfiorcn, adj. (or adv.) inborn,
hereditary.
tLn^tf^OVCXlf'irdr. belong, appertain.
ongcltlb^ncn, tr. accustom, inure.
ttllgrcifcn, 0. tr. lay hold on,
seize, assail.
^Ingjl, /. 2(engfte. anxiety, fear.
(ingfilii, adj. {or adv.) anxious,
distressed.
an^ttltCtt, 0. tr. hold on to, stop,
detain, intr. stop.
anIlOten, tr. listen to, hear to the
end.
anlaufen, tr. purchase, buy.
anflagen, tr. complain against,
accuse, charge.
anfommen, arrive, come; {voith auf
and accus. ) depend on, eg !omntt
i^m uicl)t barauf an, it is a
matter of no consequence to
him.
onfuntigcn, tr. announce, notify.
aniocfen, tr. allure, entice, tempt.
annel^men, 0. tr. take on, take,
accept,
an|)0^en, intr. knock (at the door).
Slnfl^ein, m. -u^. appearance,
semblance.
anfel^en, 0. tr. look on or at, re-
gard.
5lnfc^en, n. -ng, aspect, look.
%nftdbt, /. -ten. view, sight, opin-
ion.
5lnf|iru^, m, -d^eg, -iid^e. address,
claim.
anfiatt, prep, {with gen.) instead,
in place.
anfio^eit, 0. tr. push against, strike
against, intr. stumble, offend.
5lnttt^, n. -^eg, -^e, face, visage.
antragen, 0. tr. lay before some
one, propose, offer.
dttttCtbcn, 0. ir. drive on, impel.
nniXtUn, 0. tr. tread on ; com-
mence ; approach, accost.
5(nttlI0rt, /. -ten. answer, reply.
antttJOrtcn, tr. answer, reply.
anDertrauen, tr. confide, trust.
anlDenbeit, {reg. or irreg. ) tr. turn
or apply to something, apply,
employ.
^(nja^I, /. number.
anjtel^en, 0. tr. draw on, attract.
refi. dress one's self,
ttltjuntcn, tr. kindle, light up.
5l|jfel, m. -% 5tepfe(. apple.
%pxi\, m. -U. AprU.
?(r6ctt, /• -ten. work, labor ; re-
sult of labor, performance.
arbeitcn, tr. or intr. work, labor,
toil,
^rficitcr, m. -rg, -r. workman.
3lrc^i|icl, n. -18. archipelago.
%xvn, m. -meg, -me. arm.
400
GEEMAN-ENGUSH
arm, adj. (or adv.) poor, needy, in-
digent, unfortunate.
ormCttift^, adj. Armenian.
artnlt^, adj. {or adv.) poor, needy;
mean, paltry.
%Xtf /. -ten. kind, sort, manner.
crtig, adj. (or adv. ) well behaved,
good, obedient, polite, pretty.
SlrgCttCi, /. medicine, physic.
Slrjt, m. -te8,-tc. doctor, physician.
airmen [atmcn], intr. breathe.
ttUt^, adv. or conj. also, too, even.
after iDer, tt)a§, :c. ever, soever.
ttuf, adv. and sep'le prefix, up, up-
wards; upon, open. prep, (with
dat. and accus. ) upon, on, onto,
unto, to ; after, on, toward,
against, auf Uttb nicbcr. Tip and
down.
SlttfftaBe,/. -ben. task, problem.
aufgcbCtt, 0. tr. give up, resign.
aufgc^cn, 0. intr. f. go up, rise.
auf$eben, 0. tr. heave up, lift up,
raise.
auf^iiten, irUr. stop, cease, finish.
auffldren, tr. clear up, explain,
brighten.
OUfmtt^cn, tr. open, reflex, get up,
rise.
aufo|)fern, tr. offer up, sacrifice.
aufrt^ten, tr. set up, erect.
?lufftt^, m. -^eg, -cii^e. something
set up, composition, essay.
OUfflC^en, 0. intr. I stand up,
rise ; get up.
auffudien, tr. seek out, look up,
search for.
ttUftl&Ult, 0. tr. open.
ttUfttlttJ^cn, intr, f. wake up,
awake.
5lu9C, n. -ge§, -gen. eye. in0 ^ugc
f off en, fix the eyes upon, uiltct
diet %U^tn, tete-a-tete.
^Ugenblitf, m. -!eg, -fe. moment,
instant
5Cugufl, m. -t§. August.
OUgBrcitcn, tr. spread out.
5lu0brud), m. -d}^, -iid)e. outbreak.
^U0bru(f, m. -d^, -iicfe. expres-
sion; phrase.
augfoHctt, 0. intr. |. faU out,
turn out, result.
Wulfit^rung, /. carrying out, exe-
cution.
ou^fuflcn, tr. fill out or up.
5tu^gan9, m. -ng8, -gange. issue,
event, outlet.
ttuSge^cn, 0. intr. f. go out, go
forth or away.
ouSgtttben, 0. tr. dig out.
tluSfunft, /. -iinftc. information,
CUSlttffcn, 0. tr. let out, let go;
omit.
auSxtibtn, 0. tr. rub out, rub open.
augfj^ta^cn, 0. tr. strike out, re-
ject.
au0fC^Ctt, 0. intr. look, appear.
au^ett, adv. out of doors, outside.
ttU^cr, prep, {with dat. ) outside of,
beside, except, au^et ftt^, beside
one's self. conj. except, unless.
ttU^cr tltt§, except that.
(iu^er, adj. outer, external.
auftcr^olfi, prep, {with gen.) out-
side, beyond.
ttUfecrorilcntUc^, adj. extraordinary.
OUgftire^cn, 0. tr. speak out, pro-
nounce.
aulflO^en, 0. tr. thrust out, expel,
utter abruptly.
ttttSt^cilen [steilcn], tr. deal out,
distribute.
aud^tel^en, 0. tr. draw out, extract,
undress, intr. \. move out, re-
95ttff), rri. -(^c8, -ad^t. brook.
JBttjftlcin, n. -ng, -n. brooklet.
baifen, 0. or K tr. bake.
6a)ien, tr. or intr. bathe.
VOCABULAEY.
401
©ttl^n,/. -nen. path, road, way.
bttltl, adv. soon, quickly.
93anb, n. -be^, -be. bond, fetter.
$antl, n. -beg, -anber. ribbon.
Biinbtgen, tr. control, subdue.
bang, adj. {or adv.) anxious, fear-
ful, eg ift or tt)irb einem bang,
one is or becomes fearful or
afraid.
95ttnf,/. -anfe. bench.
Sartor, in. -ren, -ren. barbarian,
savage.
Barmftcrjtg, ac|/. (or oc^u.) merciful,
charitable.
a^arm^crjigfeit,/. charity.
Satabter, w. Batarian.
Baucn, /r. build.
95aucr, m. -rg or -rn, -r or -xn.
peasant, rustic.
Saum, m. -me§, -aume. tree.
(eiingfltgen, tr. make anxious,
alarm.
Seanttoortung,/. -gen. answering,
reply.
Setter, m. -r§, -r. beaker, goblet.
kbauern, tr. pity, grieve for.
kterfCtt, ^r. cover.
bebcnfen, (irreg.) tr. think upon,
consider.
ficburfen, {irreg.) inir. {with gen.)
or tr. stand in need of, need, re-
quire.
93cfcl^l,m.-l«,-Ie. command, order.
Ibefel|len, O. tr. commend; com-
mand, order.
befinben, 0. reflex, find one's self,
be (in respect to health, etc).
6cfreien, tr. make free, free.
befreunben, tr. befriend, befreutts
bet, friendly, allied.
(egeBen, 0. reflex, betake one's
self, repair; occur.
begcgncn, intr. (with dat.) f. meet.
bcgel^en, 0. tr. go about; commit.
Begel^ren, tr, desire, covet.
kginnen, 0. tr. begin.
(egleiten, tr. accompany, escort.
Seglcitcr, m. -rS, -r. companion,
escort.
bcgliirfen, tr. give happiness to,
make happy, bless. Beglitlft,
blessed, happy.
begititgen, reflex, content one's self,
be satisfied.
Bcgrcifcn, 0. tr. comprehend.
Segriff, m. -ffg, -ffe. comprehen-
sion, idea.
Bc^aglil^, adj. {or adv.) pleasing,
comfortable.
Befallen, 0. tr. hold on to, keep,
retain.
Bel^au|)ten, tr. maintain, assert^ de-
clare.
Bel^ent), adj. {or adv.) handy, nim-
ble, quick.
Bet, sq)'le preflx and adv. near, by,
beside, prep, {with dat.)hy, near;
at, in, with, among; at the house
of.
Beibe, adj. both, the two.
Betna^e, adv. near, about, almost.
Seif^Jtei, n. -Ig, -le. illustration,
example.
Bei^en, 0. tr. bite.
Seiftanb, m. -b§. assistance, help.
Befannt, adj. {or adv.) known,
noted, acquainted; as noun, ac-
quaintance.
Befommen, 0. tr. get, obtain, re-
ceive.
Befrdnjen, tr. adorn with a gar-
land, crown.
Befummern, tr. afflict, trouble, con-
cern.
BeleBett, tr. enliven, revive.
BcleBren, tr. teach, inform, correct.
Belo^nen, tr. reward, recompense.
Bemiidltigen, reflex, {with gen.) take
possession of, get into one's
power, seize.
m
CERMAN-ENGHSH
Betnetfett^ tr, remark, observe.
©emcrfung,/. -gen. remark, ob-
servation.
Bcitfiiicn, tr. envy.
BettU^en, tr. turn to use, use.
BcoBdt^teit^ tr. observe, watcli.
Bequemen, tr. make convenient.
reflex, accomodate one's self, sub-
mit.
Sercbtfamfeit [SctCbW, /. elo-
quence.
Bcteit, cidj. ready, prepared.
BctCttcn, tr. make ready, prepare.
Bctcit^, cidv. already.
jSBerg, rn. -geg, -ge. mountain.
sUlttltn, m. miner. ?|)fttll, m.
mountain-path.
S5ctttf, m. -fg, -fe. calling, voca-
tion, office, profession.
Bcrufcn, 0. tr. call upon, summon.
Beritimt, past ppl. of Bctiil^men,
famous, renowned.
Bcft^ttfttgcn, tr. busy, employ, oc-
cupy.
JBcft^ttftigung, /. -geit. employ-
ment, business.
JBeft^cil^cnftcit /• discretion, mod-
esty.
Bef^retBen, 0. tr. describe.
Beftnnen, 0. reflex, bethink one's
self, reflect.
Beft^ett/ 0. tr. possess.
Scft^cr, in. -rg, -r. possessor.
iScft^ung,/. -gen. possession, prop-
erty.
BcfonJier^, adv. in particular,
especially.
Scfonncnl^cit, /. -ten. discretion.
Bef|ire$en, 0. tr. speak about, talk
of, discuss.
Bcffcr, adj. {or adv. : comp. of gut),
better.
Bcffcrn, tr. make better, improve,
correct.
Befie^en^ 0, tr* corrupt, bribe.
BefleBen, 0. tr. stand up, endure*
inir. stand firm, insist.
BefteUen, tr. arrange, order.
Befiimmen, tr. fix, determine, de-
sign.
BcfircBcn, re/lex. exert one's self,
endeavor, as noun, endeavor, ef-
fort.
Befu^cn, tr. go and see, visits call
upon.
Betett, intr. pray, offer prayer.
Bettad^ten, tr. dwell upon, con-
sider, look at, regard.
Betragen, 0. tr. amount to. reflex,
behave, as noun, bearing, con-
duct.
B etrcff cn, 0. tr. befall, surprise. Bc«
troffen, surprised, taken aback.
ajctt, n. -tte§, -tte or -iter or
-tten. bed.
95ctteIBrob, n. bread obtained by
begging.
Bettein, intr. ask alms, beg.
Betten, tr. make the bed, bed.
Settler, m. -r8, -r. beggar.
Beugen, tr. bend, bow, incline.
Setttel, w. -U, -t. small bag,
money bag, purse.
Beuottmtti^ttgen, tr. bestow full
power upon. SeHottmtt^ttgt,
(past ppl. as noun) plenipoten-
tiary, agent.
Betnegen, 0. and JV. ti\ induce;
move, stir, agitate.
Setuegung, /• - gen. movement,
agitation.
Betoeinen, tr. weep over, bewail.
BetDCifcn, 0. tr. point out, show,
prove.
BetDUnBern, tr. admire.
Beja^len, tr. pay.
Bejeugen, tr. bear witness to, testify.
BejtDingcn, 0. tr. subdue, van-
quish.
l8iBliat§Cf, /. -fen. library.
OEEMAN-ENGtISH
403
Biegeit/ 0. ir. bow, bend.
38tcr, n. -reg, -re* beer.
bteten, 0. tr. bid, offer.
ISBilil, n. -beS, -cr. picture, image.
ff^mtt, m. sculptor.
Bilt)en, tr. shape, form, build,
train.
fiittig, adj, (or adv.) reasonable,
fair, just ; cheap.
IStnbe, /. -en. something bound
on, bandage.
Btnben, 0. tr. bind, tie, confine,
constrain.
(tnnen, adv. within, prep, (with
dot. or gen.) within, inside of.
6i0, adv. and prep, as far as, until,
till, to. conj. (for bi§ ba^) till
the time that, till, until. — na^,
as far as. — ju, until.
3SBt0(^en, n. -n^, -n. little bit,
Httle.
S3if^0f, m, -% -ofe. bishop;
bishop (a kind of drink).
JBtffcn, m. -n§, -n. bit, morsel.
fditit, /. -ten. request, prayer.
Bitten, 0. tr. ask, request, beg.
Bitter, cidj. {or ado.) bitter.
BIa§, adj. (or adv. ) pale.
fdhii, n. -tte«, -atter. leaf ; leaf
of book, page.
Bltttt, adj. (or adv.) blue.
BleiBctt, 0. intr. f. continue, stay,
remain.
Bleit^, adj. (or adv.) pale, pallid,
faded.
BUtfen, tr. glance, look.
Blinil, adj. (or adv.) blind.
Blot, ^dJ' i'^'"' <^<^v-) bare, stripped,
destitute, mere. Bfo^fietteit, tr.
expose, lay open.
Blitl^en, irdr. bloom, blossom,
flower.
Slumc, /. -men. flower, blossom.
^Ittmcttmttlcn# w. flower paint-
ing.
93lut, n. - teS. blood; race,
^lut^tro^jfcn, m. drop of blood.
mmt bit], f. -t^cn. blossom,
bloom.
95oten, m. -ens, -oben. bottom;
ground, floor ; garret.
95ol^CniCr, w. -r6, -r. Bohemian,
gypsy. sttlCtB, n. gypsy- woman.
93dW^/ ^- ~f "/ ~^tt» Bohemian.
Botgeit, tr. borrow, lend.
Bo0 or Bbfc, adj. (or adv.) bad,
evil, wicked, angry, malicious.
SBof etc i^t, w. villain, scamp, rascal.
93u0!^eit, /. badness, wickedness,
anger.
Soten, rn. -n6, -en. messenger.
SrantJ, m. -be§, -dnbe. fire, con-
flagration, brand.
Brttttt^en, tr. use, employ ; be in
want of, need.
BrttUen, tr. brew.
Btaun, adj. (or adv.) brown.
BtdUfen, i^tr. move on tumultu-
ously, roar.
iiBtaut, /. -ante, bride; (in Oer-
many betrothed).
Bteit, cidj. (or adv.) broad, wide.
Bremen, 0. ir. break.
Btennen, (irreg. ) tr. or intr. bum.
Srett, w. - tte^, -tter. board, plank.
Srief, m. -fc§, -fe. letter.
Bricflit^, adj. (or adv.) by letter,
written.
Bringen, (irreg.) tr. bring, fetch.
93roi, n. -beg, -be. bread, loaf of
bread.
93nirfc, /. -en. bridge.
^ruter, w. -x%, -iiber. brother.
Sriinnlein, n. -n8, -n. little
spring.
93rui!, /. -iifte. breast.
^uBe, m. -en, -en. boy, youth.
S5ut^, n. -t^eg; -iic^er. book.
»tt(i^brurfetfun|t, /. art of book-
printing.
404
VOCABULABY.
SBuntl, m. -be§, -unbe. bond, tie;
league, compact.
fiUnt,cidj. (or adv.) many colored,
gay, variegated, bright.
iSBurgcr, wi. -rg, -r, townsman,
burgher, commoner.
lEBufen^ m. -n§, -n. bosom, breast.
^arbtnal, m. -I^/ -le. cardinal.
^Wi^f ^' -ten, -ten. (/. stin.)
christian.
G^l^rificnftcit /• Christendom.
€^rijtCttfc^ttttr, /. band of christi-
ans.
(^rifHit^, adj. (,or adv.) christian.
G^igarre, /. -reiu cigar.
6^ontotr, n. -re§, -re. counting
house, office.
@iOU|)e, n. railway car or car-
riage.
ha {or llttr), o,dv. there, then, at
that place, under those circum-
stances, after rdative, -ever, -so-
ever, in composiiion with preps,
see 154.3, 166.4, 180
tiaBci, ado. thereby; by it or them
or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180,
and bei. — fcin, be present, take
part.
2>at^, n. -(^e§, -cid^er. roof.
bafitr, adv. therefor, for it or that
or them: see 154.3, 166.4, 180,
and fiir.
bagegen, adv. against it or them
or that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180,
and gcgen.
htifitX, adv. thence, therefore.
^amc, /. -men. lady.
bamtt, conj. in order that.
ilammern, intr. become dusk.
JDttnf, m. -M, gratitude, thanks.
iJttnfcn, tr. thank.
bann, adv. then, at that time.
Hv, see ta.
tiaran, adv. at or on it or that of
them: see 154.3, 166.4, 180,
and an.
tliirauf, adv. thereupon, upon or
on it or them or that: see 154.3,
166.4, 180, and anf.
baraul, ad^). out of it or them or
that: see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and
anf.
baretlt, adv. thereinto {^^accus.
with in), into or to it, etc. : see
154.3, 166.4, 180, and in.
btttin (brin, or barinncn), adv.
therein (= dat. with in), in it, etc. :
see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and in.
tldtob, ad'\ on account of it, etc. :
see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and
oh.
tmtficUctt, tr. set forth, exhibit,
represent.
batum, adv. therefore, about it,
etc. : see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and
urn.
lJtt0, see bcr.
£)afein, n. -n§. being present; ex-
istence.
ba^e^cn, 0. intr. f. stand there.
baucrftaft, adj. {or adv.) lasting,
enduring.
bauern, intr. last, endure.
babon, adv. thereof; of or from it,
etc. : see 154.3, 166.4, 180, and
t)on.
ha^U,adv. thereto, to or for it, etc. :
see 154.3, 166.3, 180, and gu.
bcfiatticrcit, intr. debate.
December, m. -rg. December.
1- tJCtlt, poss. adj. thy, thine.
2. bcin (or ticincr), gen. sing. o/bu.
betnig, poss. pro. thine.
Uenfcn (irreg.) tr. or intr. think;
think of, call to mind.
ttCItlt, adv. then, in that case. tS
fet — tafi, unless, conj. than
(for aU), beginning a clause, for.
VOCABULARY.
405
ticnno^f conj. even in that case,
notwithstanding.
ber (bie, ba§), demonstr. pron. and
adj. this or this one, that or
that one, etc.; as emphatic
pers. pron, he, she, it, they.
def. article, the. rel. pron. who,
which, that; rarely ^ he who,
that which, etc,
Dcricnigc (bieienige, ba^ienige), de-
term, adj. and pron. that or that
one, those.
bcrfctftc (biefetbe, bo^fclbe). determ.
adj. and pron. the same; he, she,
it, etc.
^CrtOif^, m. -f(^e6, -jd^c. dervish
(IVIohammedan monk).
bclftttlft {or bC^^ttlb), adv. or conj.
therefore.
tieff enungeat^tet, adv. or conj. never-
theless.
ilCJIO, adv. so much the (before a
comparative) ; JC . . . Jjcflo, the
. . . the.
beutf^, adj. German, as noun: m.
a German; n. the German lan-
guage.
^Ctttft^Ittttll, n. Germany.
bit^t, adj. {or adv.) thick, dense.
ttl^tcn, tr. produce as the result of
thinking, compose {especially as
poetry), invent.
^i(^tcr, m. -r§, -r. poet.
^i^tfun ft,/, art of poetry, poetry.
tit, seettx,
titntn, intr. {with da,(.) serve, be
of service to, assist.
Wiener, m. -r§, -r. servant.
^icncrfl^aft, /. servants {collec-
tively).
^tenjl, m. -tc§, -te. service, em-
ployment.
^ien^ttg, m. Tuesday.
ilic0 (biefer, biefe, biefeS), dem adj.
pron. this or that, this one or that
one; the latter, sinaf, adv. this
time.
^ing, n. -ge6, -ge. thing, matter.
bitCCt, adj. {or adv.) direct.
tot^, adv. and conj. though, yet,
nevertheless, however; after all,
at least, surely; sometimes simply
but; or only for emphasis.
doctor, rn. -r^, -reu, doctor.
^Olk, ^' -^^^, -c^e. dagger.
2)0m, m. -meg, - me. cathedral.
bonncrtt, intr. thunder.
^Onncrjttt0, m. Thursday.
tlO|)|)C(n> tr. double.
tojljielt, adj. {or adv.) double.
^orf, n. -fe§, -ovfer. village, ham-
let.
tott, adv. there, in that place,
yonder.
ttau^en, adv. outside, out of
doors.
txt^tn, tr. turn, twist.
iirci, num. three, sjc^lt, thirteen.
'-m, thirty.
brinncn, see iitttinncn.
iiritt, num. adj. third.
txof^tn, tr. or intr. {with dai.)
threaten, menace.
tltb^ncn, intr. roar, ramble, groan.
brurfcn, tr. print.
briiden, tr. press, clasp, jam.
bu, pers. pron. thou.
tuxnm,adj. {or adv.) stupid, dull.
^umm^cit,/. -ten. stupidity.
tunf el, adj. {or adv. ) dark, gloomy.
biinfcl^ttft, adj. {or adv.) arro-
gant.
titnfcn, intr. {with dat.) seem, ap-
pear; seem or appear to.
Biinn, adj. {or adv.) thin, slender.
tlUt(^^ adv. and seple or insep'le
prefix, through, throughout, prep.
{with accus.) through; through-
out, during; by means of, by.
tlur^ttU0, adv. throughout
406
GEKMAN-ENGLISH
2>ttr(^mttrf^, m. -fc^eg, -arfd)e.
marclaing through.
^Urc^mcff cr, m. -r§, -r. diameter.
iiurt^ft^rcitcn, 0. tr. step through,
walk through.
t^ttx6)tohtn, tr. rage through.
tiur^tuetnen, tr. weep through.
IlUtfcn, (irreg.) tr. be permitted or
allowed, feel authorized, dare,
need: see 253,
turfien or burficn, intr. or impers.
thirst, be thirsty.
burfttg, adj. {or adv.) thirsty.
buffer, ctdj. {or adv.) gloomy, ob-
scure, dusky.
tbtn, adj. {or adv.) even, level,
plain, adv. evenly; usimlly, just,
exactly, precisely, sfo, adv. in
like manner, likewise.
^htnt, /. -en. even or level tract,
plain.
@(^0, n. -c^og. echo.
^dt,f' -!en. edge, corner.
ttiti, adj. {or adv.) of noble birth;
noble, exalted, sfnahc, tn. page.
Clle, adv. sooner, earlier, conj.
sooner than, before, ere.
Cllcr, adv. sooner, earlier, rather.
®^tC, /. -ren. honor, glory, good
repute.
elftren, tr. honor, respect, esteem.
^^rcnmtttttt, ra. man of honor.
e§rlt(^, adj. {or adv.) honorable,
honest.
Clrtoitrilig, adj. {or adv.) worthy
of honor, respectable.
ti, interj. why! oh !
eifrig, adj. {or adv.) eager, ardent.
Cigcn, adj. {or adv.) own, belong-
ing to one's self; real; odd.
©igent^um [4nm], n. -m§, -umer.
property.
eigenttil^, adj, proper, true. adv.
properly speaking, really.
cilcn, irdr. \ or ij, or reflex, hurry,
hasten.
ciUg, adj. {or adv.) hasty, quick,
hurrying.
1. tin, adv. and seple prefix, in, into,
corresponding as prefix to in as
prep.; in composition with ad-
verbs, into, or in with accus.
2. tin, num. one; a person, they,
one.
3. cin, indef. article, an, a.
etnanber/ indecl. pron. one an-
other, each other.
einbttten, tr. {with reflex. pr(m. in
dat.) form in one's mind, imag-
ine, fancy.
etncrlei, adj. of one sort, the same,
indifferent.
Cinfa^, adj. simple.
etngebortn, adj. inborn, native.
tini^, adj. {or adv.) one, united,
accordant, in pi. some, a few.
Cinlabcn, 0. tr. invite.
^inltttung, /. -gen. invitation.
einmal, adv. once, one time; once
for all.
Ctnnc^mcn, 0. tr. take in, receive,
accept; take possession of, capti-
vate, prepossess, etngenemmeit,
prejudiced.
C^innc^mcr, m. -x^, -r. collector.
etttritlfen, intr. f. move in, enter.
tin\av\,adj. (^orodu.) lonely, alone.
Cinfc^lttfen, 0. irdr. f. fall asleep.
einfj^rcificn, 0. tr. write in or
down, inscribe.
etnfcnbeit, tr. send in, remit.
^inftt^t, /. -ten. insight, intelli-
gence.
cinfi, adv. one time, once (in the
past); some day (in the future).
Cittflcttcn, tr. put in. reflex, pre-
sent one's self, appear.
ctntretcn, 0. intr. f. step in,
enter.
VOCABTJLAEY,
407
C^tnUcrjlantmi^ [m§], n. -ffe§,-ffe.
understanding, agreement.
einjeln^ (^dj. single, individual.
CtnjtCl^cn, 0. tr. draw in or on.
inir. move in.
cinjig, adj. (or adv.) only, single,
sole, unique.
^IHnH^n, /. -nen. railroad, rail-
way.
tiki, adj. vain.
®(C9tC, /. -ten. elegy (plaintive
poem).
tltnti, adj, {or adv.) miserable,
wretched.
clf, num. eleven.
©item, pi parents. sfrcuilC, /.
parental joy.
®m|lftttt0, m. -gg. reception, in —
nt^mtn, receive.
Cmjlfttngcn, 0. tr. receive, accept.
©nUlpintlUng,/. -gen. feeling, sen-
sation.
CXttpOXf adv. and seple prefix, aloft,
upward, on higli. sfcimcn, spring
tip. sf^ttucn, look up. sflrckn,
strive upward, st^cilcn, reflex.
divide itself upward.
(Snte, n. -be§, -ben. end, issue,
conclusion, am — , in or at the
end, finally, ju — , at an end.
— ntttt^cn, {withdat.) put an end
to, stop.
Ctttligcn, tr. stop, finish.
cnt^n^, fiidj. (or adv.) final, con-
cluding, last.
CngC, adj. [or adv.) narrow.
(gngd, m. -U, -I angel.
en gen, tr. narrow, contract.
(^n^imttv, m. -rg, -r. (/. stin)
inhabitant of England.
englif^, adj. {or adv.) English.
Cttts, inseple prefix, forth, from,
out, away: see 307.3.
entfiefiren, tr. {orintr, xoith gen.) do
without.
entBtntien, 0. tr. unbind, set freey
release, absolve.
entMiJ^en, tr. denude, uncover.
©ntberfung, /. -gen. discovery,
disclosure.
entfcrncn, tr. put far off, remove.
reflex, go off, withdraw.
entgegen, adv. and sep'le prefix.
against, toward, j^rep. {with
dative preceding) against, to
meet, sfiel^en/ stand against,
oppose.
ent^ttlten, 0. tr. hold away; hold
in, contain, reflex, keep from,
abstain.
entlttjlen, 0. tr. let go, permit to
leave, dismiss, absolve.
entlttttfcn, 0. intr. I run away,
escape.
entlebigen, tr. set free, deliver.
tniiodtXif tr. entice or allure away;
elicit.
cntrUden, tr. carry away, trans-
port.
entfttgen, intr. {with dat.) renounce,
give up.
entft^eibcn, 0. {or N.) tr. decide,
determine. cnlfd)eiJlCntJ, deci-
sive.
cntf^lie§cn, 0. tr. disclose, reflex.
make up one's mind, decide.
©ntf^lu^, m. -ffeg, -iiffe. resolu-
tion, resolve.
Cntf(^uIti9Cn, tr. exculpate, ex-
cuse, reflex, excuse one's self.
C^ntfC^en, n. horror, dread.
entjicjen, 0. Mr. f. arise, spring
forth, originate.
entto Ctcr, conj. either {followed by
uber or).
enttntlfeln, tr. unwrap, unfold; de-
velop, solve, explain.
entjtel^en, 0. tr. withdraw, remove
or take away.
tXf P^rs. pron, he.
408
GEKMAN-ENGUSH
tXs, insep'le prefix, see 307.4.
erBarnten, tr. move to pity, reflex.
pity.
etBauett, tr. build up, erect.
1. ^Xhe, m. -en, -en. heir, in-
heritor.
2. @rBe, n. -be^. inheritance.
etBU^^ cidj' {or adv.) hereditary.
txhiidtn, tr. catch sight of, per-
ceive.
(EtBlJnnj, wi. hereditary prince.
crBrcd)Cn, 0. tr. break open.
C^ri^e, /. -ben. earth, ground;
world. ©tbcntttUm, m. earth,
surface of earth, sflrit^, wi. zone,
region.
erfal^ren, 0. tr. come upon, make
experience of, learn.
C^rfttftrung, /. -gen. experience.
in — BringCtt, learn by expe-
rience, learn.
etflnben, 0. tr. find out, invent.
CtftCUCn, tr. give pleasure to, glad-
den, reflex, {with gen.) enjoy, re-
joice at.
etfutteit/ tr. fill; fulfil, perform.
tX^e^tn, 0. Mr. I go on, fare,
happen.
crgreifcn, 0. tr. lay hold of, seize
upon.
txf^dhcn, cidj. {or adv.) elevated,
lofty, subUme.
erl^alteit, 0. tr. obtain, receive;
keep, preserve.
erl^eBen, 0. tr. heave up, lift, ele-
vate; extol.
Ctl^cif^cn, tr. require, demand.
Cr^iircn, tr. hear, hear of; grant.
crittttcrn, tr. remind, reflex, {with
gen.) remember, recall.
©rinncrung, /. -gen. remem-
brance, memory.
erialten, reflex, catch cold.
erfennen, {irreg.) tr. perceive, rec-
ognize.
erfcnntni§ \^n\S\, /. -ffc percep-
tion, knowledge.
%xitX, m. -rg, -r. balcony.
CtflatCtt/ tr. make clear, explain ;
declare, announce. [inquire.
erfuntligen, reflex, make inquiries,
etiattgcn,, tr. reach after, obtain,
reach, attain.
eriauben, tr. allow, permit.
CXhhtU, tr. live to see, experience,
have happen to one.
Ctliigcn, 0. tr. produce by lying, in-
vent, eriogen, fabricated, false.
Crmortcn, tr. murder.
Ctmiibcn, tr. weary, tire.
^rmittiung, /• weariness, fatigue.
©rncucrung, /. -gen. renewal,
renovation.
©rnictJtigung, /. -gen. lowering,
humiliation, abasement.
C^tttH, m. -teg. earnestness, grav-
ity, seriousness.
Crnfi, cidj' {or adv.) earnest, seri-
ous, grave.
tXObtxn, tr. overcome, conquer.
CroffllClt, tr. open, reveal, disclose.
tX(\\lidtn, tr. quicken, revive, re-
fresh.
ettett^en, tr. reach, arrive at.
etf^etnen, 0. intr. f. shine forth,
come in sight, appear.
Ctft^rcrfcn, 0. (or N.y Mr. f. {or
reflex.) be frightened or startled.
crfj^rcrflil^, adj. {or adv.) fright-
ful, dreadful.
crfl, adj. first, adv. firstly, at first.
crftcigcn, 0. tr. ascend, climb.
txioncn, Mr. sound forth.
Ctttttgcn, 0. tr. endure, bear.
ertoa^en, Mr. f. awake, be
aroused.
ettna^len, tr. elect, select, choose.
tXtOaxttn, tr. wait for, expect.
crtocifcn, 0. tr. show, prove,
render.
VOCABTJLAKY.
409
CrttJCtBctt, 0. tr. procure by effort,
earn, gain.
erhlicbcrn, tr, give back; return,
answer.
erjal^Ien, tr. relate, recount, tell.
C^rja^Iung,/. -gen. tale, story.
etjiel^en, 0. tr. educate, train.
^rjic^cr, m. -rS, -r. educator,
teacher.
C^rjicftung, /. education, training.
t§,pers. pron. it: see 154.3,4.
C^fcl, m. -U, -I ass, donkey.
cffcn, 0. tr. eat. as noun, meal, re-
past.
etltC^, pron. adj. {chiefly in pi.)
some, sundry.
etttiad, indef. pron. {indeclinable)
something, somewhat, used ad-
verbially, in some measure, a
little, rather: see 188.
1. CUer, poss. adj. your, yours.
2. CUCr, gen. pi. of iu. of you, your.
@ur0^a, n. -Qg. Europe.
CUrO|ittif^, adj. European.
etotg, adj. {or adv.) everlasting,
eternal.
©yem^tttr, n. -re§, -re* specimen,
copy.
^CCllCttJ, /. -gen. excellency.
fal^ren, 0. intr. f or I}, fare, go,
drive, be drawn in a wagon; go
in a boat, sail. tr. drive, row.
fpttjicren fn^rcn, take a drive.
^tt^rt, /. - ten. journey, voyage,
drive.
foacn, 0. intr. I fall
foils, conj. in case, if.
f alf(^, adj. {or adv.) false.
^amilit,/. -ien. family.
^tt§, n. -ffe§, -affer. vat, cask.
fttffcn, tr. hold, contain; lay hold
of, grasp, seize; comprehend,
conceive.
fttfl, adv. almost, nearly.
fttUi, adj. {or adv.) decayed ; lazy,
indolent. [{French).
i^auteuil, n. -(g, -(g. armchair
§c6ruar m. -rg. February.
^Clicr, /. feather, pen.
fcl^Icn, intr. {with dot.) fail, be
wanting (to), be deficient; be in
fault, err. c0 fc^lt ttJl . . . {im-
pers.) there is a lack of . . .
^cftlcr, wi. -rg, -r. fault, defect;
error.
feicrlit^, adj. {or adv.) ceremoni-
ous, festive, solemn.
f cicrn, intr. make holiday, tr. cele-
brate, solemnize.
^Cicrtag, m. holiday.
^Cigling, m. -gg, -ge. coward.
f eitt, adj. {or adv. ) fine, delicate.
fetnti, adj. hostile, inimical.
Sfctnll, m. -beg, -be. (/. stilt)
enemy, foe.
^tlti, n. -beg, -ber. field, plain.
%tU, m. -fen, -fen. rock, clitt.
sfiurf, n. piece of rock, cliff.
^eitflcr, n. -rg, -r. window.
fern, adj. {or adv.) distant, far off,
remote.
fcrtig, adj. {or adv.) prepared,
ready, finished.
^Cffel, /. -In. fetter, chain.
fcfl, adj. {or adv.) fast, firm,
strong.
SeH, n. -teg, -te. festival
fcflgcfugt, past p'ple of fcflfiigcn,
fast joined.
feu^t, adj. {or adv.) moist, damp.
gcucr, n. -rg, -r. fire.
iJicber, n. -rg, -r. fever.
finten, 0. tr. find, discover; (ioi<^o6-
ject. pred ) deem, consider, think.
i^ittgcr, rn. -rg, -r. finger.
flnflcr, adj. {or adv.) dark, ob-
scure.
§tnftctnife [sni5], /. -ffc» dark-
410
GERMAN-ENGLISH
8fif(!^cr, m. -rg, -r. fisherman.
Jlammc, /. -men. flame.
gfttf(^C,/.-f(^en. bottle.
flel^en, tr. (or intr. with dot.) im-
plore, entreat, as noun, suppli-
cation, entreaty.
3f(etft^, n. -f(^e6, -fd)c. flesh,
meat.
ffet^tg, adj. {or adv. ) industriotis.
fftcgcn, 0. intr. f or fj, fly; rush.
ffte^en, 0. intr. \, flee, escape.
f[te§en, 0. intr. ] orl), flow, run.
Slitter taOt^Cn,pZ. honeymoon.
Sforcnj, n. Florence.
SIu^, m. -d)zQ, -iidje. curse.
Kuc^en, intr, {with dat.) curse,
swear.
^lur, /. -ren. field; floor; hall.
§lu§, m. -ff eg, -iiffe. river.
glutfi [glut], /. -tf)en. flood,
wave, tide.
folgcn, intr. f. {with dat.) follow;
imitate. fotgctltJ, following.
'goiter, /• -t'U. instrument of tor-
ture. sBanf, /. rack.
^orbcrung, /. -gen. demand,
claim.
^orm^ /. -men. form.
fott, cidv. and sep'le prefix, forth,
forward, onward; away, gone,
off. sfcin, he away.
fortrcitcn, 0. intr. f, ride away.
^ortfd^riti, m. ~tte§, -tte. forward
step, progress, improvement.
forttOCrfcn, 0. tr. throw away.
^ta^t/f. -gen. question.
fragen, intr. or tr, {K or 0.) ask,
question.
franfifj^, adj. Frankish.
^tttttfrci^, n. -d^g. France.
^ranjofc, m. -en, -en. French-
man.
^ratljoftn, /. -innen. French-
woman.
ftttlljoftfc^, adj. French.
^xan, /. -auen. woman, wife,
lady.
^rttUCnft^trffttl, n. woman's fate.
ftci/ 8idj, {with gen.) {or adv.) free;
exempt. sBticf, m. charter, pri-
vilege.
^Xti^tit, /• -ten. freedom, liberty.
fteili^, adv. to be sure, certainly.
^reitttg, m. Friday.
frcml), adj. (or adv.) strange, for-
eign, not one's own, unfamiliar,
unusual, as noun, stranger, for-
eigner.
grcmtC, /. foreign country, re-
gion away from one's home.
ftcffcn, 0. tr. eat {said of animals,
not men), devour.
grcttte,/. -ben. joy, pleasure, de-
Hght.
frcutig, adj. {or adv.) glad, joy-
ous.
fteuen, tr. give pleasure to. reflex,
be glad, rejoice.
Steunb, rn. -beg, -be. friend.
fteunblil!^, adj. {or adt;.) friendly,
kind.
SreunJlf(^ttft, /. -ten. friendship.
griciJC, m. -beng, -ben. peace.
§ricticn|!ruf, m. report of a peace.
frietlUd), adj. {or adv.) peaceable,
peaceful.
^rtctltif^, in. -cf)g. Frederick.
frilt^, adj. {or adv.) fresh; gay,
lively.
^riji,/. -ten. period, time.
frol^, adj. {or adv.) glad, joyous,
happy.
ftomm,adj. {oradv.) pious.
froflcht, impers. {with accus.) freeze
or shiver, be chilly.
Sfrut^t,/- -iid^te. fruit.
frud)ten, intr. bear fruit; be of
profit.
frtt^(c), adj. {or adv.) early; in
early morning; speedy.
VOCABULAEY.
411
frul^Ct, 0^3' (or adv.) earlier,
sooner.
^rii^Uttg, m. -gg, -gc. spring.
frill^flUifen, intr. breakfast.
ful^icit^ tr. feel, touch; be con^
vinced of.
fullrett, tn carry, bring; lead, con-
duct, drive.
^U^rtoerl, n. -U, -fe. vehicle,
wagon.
fiinf, num. five, sjc^lt, fifteen, sjig,
fifty.
i^unfll^en, n. -n^, -n. little spark.
int, prep, with accus. for; in behalf
of; instead of; before dbjec, pred.
as.
Sfurc^t, /. fear.
fur^tbar, adj. (or adv.) fearful,
terrible.
.f itr^tCtt, tr. be afraid of, fear, reflex.
be afraid, become frightened.
flirt^tcrlic^, adj. {or adv.) fearful,
terrible.
^iirfl, m. -ten, -ten. prince.
gfurflitt, /. -nnen. princess.
guft, m. -ufeeg, -iiBe. foot, strttt,
m. footstep.
®tt6e, /. -ben. gift, present.
gaffen, intr. gape, stare, look with
astonishment.
©oncttc, /. -ten. gallery.
gttltj, adj. entire, whole, complete.
adv. wholly, quite.
got, adj. (inded.) finished, com-
plete, done. adv. completely,
quite, absolutely; very, exceed-
ingly. wUh negative, not at all.
©orten, m. -m, -drten. garden.
©tirtnet, m. -r«, -r. gardener.
@ofl, m. -teg, -afte. guest, visitor.
sftet, adj. liberal to friends, hos-
pitable, sfreunblilft, hospitable.
®attt, m. -ten, -ten. husband.
ge, insep'k prefiXf see 307.5.
©cBtiuilC, n. -c§,-C. building, edi-
fice.
^thtn, 0. tr. give, bestow, imp. t$
gifit, etc. there is or are.
®ibtX, m. -rg, -r. giver.
©cBct, n. -tg, -te. prayer.
gcbtetcttf 0. tr. order, command,
bid.
gebotctt, past pple (of geBaren).
born.
®tM, n. -tg, -te. commandment,
bidding.
gcbtttUC^cn, tr. {rarely intr. with
gen.) use, employ.
@e6urt0tag, m. birthday.
©cbttttfc, tn. -!eng, -fen. thought,
idea.
gcbcnfcn, {irreg.) intr. {genVy with
ace. , less often with gen.) think of,
remember.
©ciJicdt, n. -teg, -te. poem.
©cbriingc, n. -geg, -ge. crowd,
throng.
©eUttlb, /. patience.
©Cftt^t, /. -rcn. danger, risk,
peril.
gcfii^rlit^, adj. {or adv.) danger-
ous.
©cftiftrte, m. -ten, -ten. com-
panion.
©cfii^rtin, /. -innen. companion.
1. gefatten, 0. {with dat.) suit,
please, meet the approbation of.
2. gefttUcn, past pple o/foBcit.
gcfttngcn, past pple of fangcn,
caught, captured, imprisoned.
as noun, prisoner, captive.
©cfiingni^ [sniS], n. -ffeg, -[fe.
prison.
©Cfolgc, n. -geg, -gc. following,
escort, retinue.
©Cfufti, n. -teg, -te. feeling, sensa-
tion, sentiment.
gegen, prep, (with ace.) against,
opposed to; over against, oppo-
412
GEEMAN-ENGUSH
site to. stCtlOluttOtt, /. coTinter-
revolution.
©egcnftanb, m. -H, -anbe. object,
topic, subject.
gegcniikt, adv. opposite, prq).
(wUhdat.) opposite, over against,
gel^etm, adj. (or adv.) private,
secret.
@c^cimni§ [mB], n. -[fe«, -ffe.
secret, mystery.
gel^en, 0. tr. |. go, move, walk.
impers. {with dat.) go or fare
with, be (in health etc.).
gel^Or^en, intr. {with dat.) listen
to, obey.
{^el^Otcn, ii^r. {with dat.) belong to,
appertain to.
®cifl, m. -te8, -ter. spirit, mind.
geifitg, adj. {or adv.) relating to
the mind or spirit, spiritual,
mental.
getflU^, adj. {or adv.) spiritual;
clerical, as noun, clergyman,
minister.
fieiflreit^, adj. [or adv.) spirited,
witty, clever.
getjig, adj. {or adv.) avaricious,
covetous.
geliiuftg, adj, {or adv.) current,
fluent, voluble, easy.
@c(tl, n. -beS, -ber. money, coin,
cash.
©elcgcnl^cit, /. -ten. opportunity,
occasion.
gele^rt, adj. learned, as noun,
learned man, scholar.
geltngett, 0. Mr. \. {withdal.; used
in 3d pers. only) prove success-
ful, turn out as desired. t§ gCs
lingt einem, etc., one succeeds
or prospers, as noun, success,
prosperity.
gcloben, tr. promise, vow.
gelten, 0. intr. {used in 3d pers. or
impersonally) have value; {with
dat.) concern, have to do
with.
gelit^en, tr. or intr. (with dat. or
accus.) usuattyin 3d pers, desire,
hanker.
©Cmttl^I, m. -te§, -le. spouse, con-
sort, husband.
©cma^Hn, /. sinncn. spouse, wife.
(^emdttJe, n. -beg, -be. painting.
gemetn, adj. {or adv.) (wUh dat.)
common, belonging in common
to; public.
©Cmiife, n. -\t%, -fe. vegetables.
©cmutft b\ii] , n. -tt|e«, -t^er. soul,
spirit, disposition.
gCttlut^lit^ [siitti^], adj. {or adv.)
good natured ; comfortable,
cozy.
genetgt, see nctgcn.
©Citcrtti, m. -leg, -ak. general.
gencfcn, 0. intr. \. get well, re-
cover.
@cnie, n. -leg, -leg. genius.
gcnicftcn, 0. tr. {less often inir.,
with gen.) enjoy; use as food or
drink, eat.
genug^ adv. enough, sufficiently;
us&l as indecl. noun, enough,
plenty.
©cnuft, m. -ffeg, -iiffe. enjoyment,
pleasure.
geraDe, adj. straight, direct, even;
erect; plain, adr. directly, just,
precisely.
gcrttt^cn [sratcn], 0. intr. f. get,
come, fall; turn out, happen.
gere^t, adj. (or adv.) righteous,
upright, just, right.
gcrc^tfcrttgt, past pple from
tCC^tfcrtigcn. justified, vindi-
cated.
geringflfta^ig, adj. depreciating,
contemptuous.
©cmittttitt, /. Germany (person^
ijkd).
VOCABULARY.
413
gCttt, ctdv. with pleasnre, gladly,
willingly, mot^te — , would like.
e0 — if^nn, like to do it. c§ —
l^aben, be fond of or like it.
©cfttng, m. -g§, -cinge. song, sing-
ing.
@Cf(!^ttft, n. --t§, -te. business, af-
fair.
9Cf(ftc^cn, 0. inir. f. (impers.)
happen, come to pass, befall,
take place, be done.
©Cft^cnf, n. ~U, -fe. gift, present.
@cf(^i^te, /. -ten. story, tale,
history.
@ef(^tc^t, n. -m, -ter. species,
race, family.
geft^hlinb, adj. {or adv.) swift,
rapid, quick.
©efctt or sUtfTn. -en, -en. comrade,
companion; ai)j)rentice.
@cfcUftf)ttft, /. -ten. company, so-
ciety; party.
(Scfc^, n. -^eg, -^e. law; rule.
©Cfif^t, n. -t^, -te or -ter. sight;
(pZ. -ter) face, visage; {pi -te)
vision.
gcftnncn, 0. intr. f. be minded,
intend, purpose. ^cfonncn,
minded, disposed.
©cfinnunfi, /. -gen. state of mind,
disposition, intention.
©Cftttit, /. -ten. appearance, as-
pect; form, shape, figure.
gcftttttcn, tr. allow, permit.
fiCflcrn, adi\ yesterday.
0Cfunb, adj. (or adv.) healthy,
sound, well.
©cfuniJfteit, /. health.
fiCtreu, adj. {or adv.) true, faithful.
©etlJOt^g, n. -fe§, -fe. anything
growing; plant.
gelua^ren, tr. warrant, guarantee,
assure; grant.
@ettltt^rmi0, /. warranting, grant-
ing.
©ehlttit, /. -ten. power, force,
might.
gCtDaltfam, adj. {or adv.) forcible,
violent.
gCtninncn, 0. tr. win, gain, obtain.
JU — fte^en, be to be gained.
gCtt)i§, adj. {or adv.) sure, certain,
undoubting; certain, some.
©etniffcn, n. -n§. consciousness;
conscience.
©emitter, n. -rg, -r. thunder-
storm.
gelDO^nen, tr. {or intr. with gen.)
be accustomed to. getOOl^nt,
wont, used to.
getnb^nen, tr. accustom, habituate.
gehlb^nlifi, adj. {or adv.) ordinary,
customary, usual.
©etoitl^t, n. -U. turmoil, tumult.
©IttltJ, w. -ge^. lustre, splendor.
glanjen, intr. shine, glitter, glisten.
©IttI, n. -je§, -a[er. glass, tumbler.
©laube, m. -ben^, -ben. belief
faith.
glauben, tr. believe; think.
@laukn^fa^, n. article of faith.
©IttUbiger, m. -x^, -r. creditor,
gleic^, adj. like, resembling; alike,
equal ; direct, adv. similarly,
equally; directly, at once.
gteit^en, 0. inir. {with dat.) he like,
equal, resemble.
®(ei^gultijj!cit, /• indifference.
@(et^ma§, n. uniformity, propor-
tion.
glei^fietten, reflex, put one's self
on an equality, equal, rival.
gleic^tDO^t, adv. nevertheless.
®Io(fc, /. -fen. beU.
glorreit^, adj. glorious.
®lnd, n. -feS. luck, fortune; good
fortune, happiness.
glutfen, intr. \ or ^. {impers.
with dat.) turn out well, suc-
ceed.
414
GEKMAN-ENGLISS
glitrfU^, «(?/. {or adv.) happy,
fortunate.
fllurffclig, adj. highly blessed,
bUssful.
©ntttC, /. -en. grace, favor,
mercy.
gniibig, adj. {or adv.) gracious,
propitious.
@oftl, n. -beg. gold.
golbcn, adj. golden.
goH)i9, adj. golden.
©Oltlfi^mieb, m. goldsmith.
©Olbflttrf, n. gold-piece.
0Onnen, tr. grant willingly, not
@Ott, rn. -tteg, -otter, god; God.
0OttU^, adj. {or adv.) god-like, di-
vine.
@d^e, w. -en, -en. idol, false
god.
graven, 0. tr. dig.
©tttf , m. -fen, -fen. count, earl.
©riifln, /. sinncn. countess.
©ram, m. -meg. grief, sorrow,
dislike.
griifeli^, adj. {or adv.) horrible,
ghastly.
grauen, intr. {impers. with dai.)
cause horror, fill with dread,
make to shudder.
graufen, i^r. {impers. wUh dat.)
excite horror in, horrify.
grcifen, 0. tr. gripe, grasp,
seize.
@rci0, m. -fe8, -fe. old man.
©rcn^C, /. -sen. boundary, limit.
©rcnjjicin, wi. boundary stone.
©reuci, m. -Ig, -t. horror, outrage.
grimmig, a,dj. {or adv.) wrathful,
furious, fierce.
gtofe, adj. {or adv.) great, large,
big, huge, tall; eminent, grand.
©ruft, /. -iiftc. cave, hollow; se-
pulchre, tomb.
gtttJl/ adj. (or adv.) green.
©riin, n. -ncg. green color, green,
ness, verdure.
©runtJ, rn. -beg, -iinbe. ground,
bottom; grounds, reason, cause.
Jtt — gC^Cn, go to destruction.
gtunticn, tr. lay the foundation of,
found, establish.
griinblitt), adj. {or adv.) deep, thor-
ough.
©riintlttng, /. foundation.
©rufe,m. -feeg,-iiBe. greeting, sal-
utation.
grit^en, tr. greet, salute; bow to.
©uliieit, m. -ng, -n. florin (coin of
various values).
®m%f. favor, grace, goodwill
gitnfiig, adj. {or adv.) favorable.
©unfiling, m. -gg, -ge. favorite.
gut, adj. {or adv.) good, proper;
kind. adv. well.
®ni, n. -teg, -liter, property, pos-
session, goods; estate.
^aar, w.-reg, -re, hair {used coUec-
tively or singly).
l^ubcn, {irreg.) tr. have, possess; as
avx'y, have, gem — , like.
niitftig [niitlg] — , need, want.
l^ab^aft, adj. having possession,
with gen. and ttierben, get pos-
session of.
^afcr, rn. -rg. oats.
^a^n, rn. -ncg, -nen or -dt)ne.
cock.
I^ttlft, adj. half. adv. half, by halves.
sjtoet, etc. half past one, etc.
l^ttlfecr or sben, prep, {with gen.) on
account of, for the sake of.
§alfte, /. -en. half.
§tt«e, /. -Hen. hall.
§ttl0, rn. -feg, -olfe. neck ; throat.
sbanti, ri. necklace.
^ttlt, rn. -teg, -te. hold; halt, stop.
I^alten, 0. tr. hold, keep, retain;
contain; esteem, think.
VOCABtJLAET.
its
§ttlttl, J- -cinbe. hand.
l^anbeln, intr. act, behave; trade,
carry on commerce, mit CttDdl
— , deal in something,
^aniltoerf^ n. handicraft, trade.
I^angen^ 0. intr. hang, depend.
j^dngettf i'"'- cause to hang, sus-
pend.
^(ltl§, infh. -fen§. Hans, Jack.
partner, w. -r«, r. harper.
^ttrm, m. -meg. harm, hurt, in-
jury; sorrow, grief.
l^atten, intr. wait, Hnger in expec-
tation.
5 art, ci'dj. (or adv.) hard; stiff.
sltacftg, adj. stiff-necked.
^tt^, m. -[[e§. hatred, enmity.
P§n^, «(??■. (or adv.) ugly, hateful.
l^a^ig, adj. (or adv.) hasty, hurried.
^ttUfe, m. -fee, -fen. heap, pile;
mass, company of people.
^ttU|lt, n. -te§, -aupter. head;
chief, leader.
^auB, n. -feg, -aitfer. house, ju
>^aufe, at the house, at home.
not^ ^(iU\t, to home, home.
^ttU0frttU, /. housewife.
l^eben, 0. tr. heave, lift, move.
^eer^ n. -re§, -re. host, army.
^CCrtJC, /. -ben. herd, flock.
l^efttg^ adj. {or adv.) vehement, vio-
lent, impetuous.
^Cftigtcit, /. vehemence, impetu-
osity.
^eil, n. -te6. health, prosperity; as
exclamation, hail!
^eitcn, tr. heal, cure.
f^tiii^fOdj. {or adv.) holy, sacred.
I^etligen, tr. hallow, make or keep
sacred or holy.
^Cimot^ [sttt], -t^en. /. home.
I&cimfommen, 0. intr. f. come
home.
i^etmlic^, adj. (or adv.) private; se-
cret
^Cinri^, m. -cf)6. Henry.
l^cife, adj. {or adv.) hot.
I^eiten, 0. tr. bid, command; call,
name, intr. be called or named^
mean, signify.
fitiitV, odj. {or adv.) clear, bright,
cheerful.
%t\ts, rn. -ben, -ben. hero.
iclbcngrofec, /. heroic greatness.
sfinn, wi- heroism.
^Clbin, /. sinncn. heroine.
l^elfen, 0. intr. {with dat.) help,
aid, assist.
l^ett, adj. {or adv.) {of sound) clear,
distinct; {of light or color) light,
clear, bright.
^Cttgfi, wi. -te§, -te. stallion,
steed,
^enfer, m. -rg, -r. hangman, exe-
cutioner.
j^Cr, ddv. and sepHe prefix, hither,
this way, toward the speaker or
the point had in view or con-
ceived {opposite of llin, hence).
ttttl . . • ||Ct, round about.
l^eraB^ adv. and seple prefix, down
hither, down.
I^etan, adv. and sep'le prefix, on
hither, near.
^Cranfommcn, 0. intr. \. come on
or near, approach.
^erau^, adv. and seple prefix, out
hither, out. •
ftcraugfttflen, O. intr. f. fall out.
^CtttU^flntlcn, 0. tr. find out. re-
flex, find one's way out, stand
forth.
l^erBet, adv. and seple prefix, near
by hither, this way.
§Ctbfi, rn. -teg, -te. autumn, fall.
I&erein, adv. and seple prefix, in
hither, inward (toward the
speaker).
^ercinfuftrcn, tr. lead in.
^crcinfommcn, 0. intr. f. come in.
416
GEEMAN-ENGLISH
Herntetiet, ctdv. and seple prefix.
down hither, downward, from
above.
^ttoB, m. -g, -oen. hero.
^crr, rn. (-rren or) -xxn, -rrcn {or
-rrn). master, lord; gentleman;
{in address) sir; {before a name)
Mr. Ijcr ^Crr, the Lord, ^ctts
gott, in. the Lord God.
^Crrf^ttft, /. -ten. lordship, do-
minion; master and mistress,
employers; person or persons
of rank.
^crrfc^cr, m. -r8, -r. ruler, lord.
l^etitbct, adv. and sepUe prefix, over
hither, to this side.
I^erutn, ado. and sq)le prefix, round
about, around.
lerunter, adv. and sep'le prefix.
down hither.
I^erdor, odv. and seple prefix, forth
or forward hither, forward,
forth, out.
lemorftrtngen, {irreg.) tr. bring
forth or out.
l^crdortogctt, intr. jut forth, pro-
ject.
^etj, n. -genS, -gen. heart; cou-
rage, spirit.
l&crjUt^, adj. {or adv.) hearty, cor-
dial.
^crjog, m. -g§, -oge. duke.
I^euttg, adj. {or adv.) of today;
modern.
l^icr, adv. here, in this place.
lier^er, adv. hither, to here.
^ilfc, same as ^itlfe.
^immcl, m. -18, -(. heaven, sky,
heavens.
l^tmmltf^, adj. {or adv.) heavenly,
celestial.
5ill, adv. and sepHe prefix, hence,
that way, away from the
speaker or point had in view
or conceived (ppposUe to f^tt,
hither); sometimes simply along;
gone, lost, too — l^tn, whither.
— fcitt, be gone or away or lost.
fiinah, adv. and sep'le prefix, down
thither, down.
l^tnauf, adv. and sep'le prefix, up
thither, upward.
^inaufftral^len, intr. shine up or
out.
I|tnau0, adv. and sep'le prefix, out
hence or thither, forth.
^inttU06cgcben, 0. reflex, betake
one's self away, go forth.
lirtttUlgC^cn, 0. intr. [. go out or
forth.
]^ittttU§3tel|en, 0. tr. pull out. intr.
f, march out.
l^inDern, tr. hinder, prevent.
I^inein, adv. and sep'le prefix, in
thither, in.
lincingc^cn, 0. intr. f. go in
thither.
|itteinf(^toinbcln, reflex, cheat or
swindle one's self in, get in by
cheating.
l^ingellen, 0. intr. f. go there or
away; pass on, elapse.
I^tttl^or^en, tr. listen.
|infommen,0. Mr.f. come forth or
away, get (to somewhere or
something).
l^tnlegen, tr. lay away or down.
JinnCtt, adv. hence.
I^tnftttfen, 0. intr. f. sink down.
itnftreifen, tr. stretch, extend.
l^tntet/ adj. hinder, back. adv. and
sep'le prefix, behind, back, in the
rear.
^VXXi\stX,adv. and sepHe prefix, over
thither, over (from this side),
across.
I^iniibcrlttufcn, 0. intr. f. run
across.
fiinnnitX^adv.aridsep'le prefix.down
hence, down thilier, down.
VOCABtJLAEY.
411
^tntoerfen, 0. tr. throw away or
down. ^tngchJOrfcn, casually
thrown out, chance.
^ixi, m. -ten, -ten. shepherd.
fot^, ctdj. (as declined, ^o^er, etc.)
high, tall, lofty, great.
^od)mut$ [smut], »^- arrogance,
pride.
^Ot^toertttt^ [stttt]/m. high trea-
son.
1^ off en, tr. hope, expect, look
for.
^Offnung, /. -gen. hope, expecta-
tion.
§i)fli(^fcit,/. courtesy, politeness.
^Oft^iit,/. door of the courtyard.
1^0^, see ^0^.
I^dl^nen, tr, scorn, scoff at.
ioliJ, o^j' {or adv.) favorable,
propitious, gracious ; pleasing,
lovely.
I&olen, tr. fetch, bring.
^oUc, /. -en. hell.
^ottengei^, fn. infernal spirit.
§ol5, n. -geg, -ge or -otjer. wood,
timber.
I^Ot^en, irdr. hearken, listen; tr.
give ear to, hsten to.
§OtbC,/. -ben. horde, troop.
pren, intr. or tr. hear, give ear to;
hearken.
J&iiBfd), adj. {or adv.) pretty.
I^ulbigen, intr. {withdat.) pay hom-
age to.
^itlf e, /• helpy- aid, assistance.
^iilfclciflung, /. rendering of
help.
I&ulftcit^, adj. {or adv.) helpful.
^umor, rn. -r^. humor.
^untl, rn. -be^, -be. dog.
^Untert, num. hundred,
hunger, w. -r^. hunger, appetite.
I^ungern, intr. (or tr. impers.) hun-
ger, be hungry.
gut, rn, -te«, -iite. hat.
I^itten, tr. {rardy intr, with gen.)
have heed, watch, r^ex. guard
one's self, beware.
filter, wi- -r8, -r. guardian,
keeper.
giittc, /. -ten. cottage, hut; tent,
tabernacle.
tc^, pron. I.
^tCC, /. -cen. idea, notion, con-
ception.
t^r, 1. nom. plu. of Iju, ye, they.
2. dai. sing, of fit, fern, to her or
it. 3. poss. adj. {for Sdpers. sing,
fern.) her or its. 4. poss. adj. {for
Sdpers. plu.) their; ^^X, (in ad-
dress) your.
tl^tig, poss. pron, her, its; theirs,
^^rtg, your.
im = in iicm.
immct, odv. ever, always, continu-
ally; yet, still.
in, prep, {with dat. or accus.) in,
into, to, at, within.
inbem, conj. in or during that,
while.
intlC^ or sffcn, adv. meanwhile
conj. while.
innct, odj' inner, interior; as neu-
ter nouny inner self, heart.
inncr^alfi, prep, (with gen.) inside
of.
^nfcl, /. -tn. isle, island.
intntefern, conj. as far as.
ittlif (^, ctdj- {or €idv.) earthly, mor-
tal.
ttgenti, odv. ever, soever.
^rrtftum [stum], m. -m«,-iimer.
error, mistake.
^taticn, n. -ng. Italy.
^tttUf net, m. -rg, -r. Italian.
jtt, part, of assent, yea, yes.
^agb, /. -ben. chase, hunt; hunt-
ing party.
418
GERMAN-ENGLISH
jftgen, intr. f or 1^. huiit, chase.
tr. hunt.
^tt^r, n. -reg, -re. year, if^mtitxi,
n. century.
Sttl^rcSjeit/. -ten. season.
3jimmer, m. -r8, -r. sorrow, grie^
misery, lamentation.
SanUttt, m. -r«. January.
\t, adv. always, ever, jc ... |C or
JC . • . bcfto, {before compara-
tives) so much the . . . or the . . .
the.
iel> (jeber, jebe, jebeS), pron. each,
every, either, see 190.
ietertnann, m. every man, every
one.
jjebeiSinal, adv. each time, every
time.
ittio6i,adv, however, notwithstand-
ing, yet.
fCfiKd), pron. every, each, see 190.
je^cr (je ever and ^cr hither), Hon
jel^er^ from always to here or
now, always.
.^etnanb, pron. some or any one,
somebody.
jcn (jener, jene, jene8), pron. yon,
yonder, that, the former, see
163.
jenfcitS, prep, (with gen.) on the
other side of, beyond.
fc^t, a(^u. at the present time,
now.
^iO^anntt, /. Jane, Joan.
^uie, m. -en, -en. Jew.
^itDin, /. -inn en. Jewess.
Nugent), /. youth, time of youth;
young people, youth, sfreuitttn,
/. friend of youth, sfrfjcin, m.
light of youth.
3ul!, m. -m. July, srcuolution,/.
l-evolution of July (1830).
Suni, m. -ni«. June.
jun0 CM??. ;or a(iu.) young, youth-
ful : new, recent.
^ungc, m. -eng, -en. young one,
youth, stripling.
^iittgUng^m.-gg^-ge. young man,
3'^outh.
^ttffce, m. -ee6. coflfee.
^aifcr, m. -r«, -r. emperor, slog,
a(^". emperorless, without an
emperor.
^ttlf, m. -!e§, -fe. lime, chalk.
fttit adj. (or adv.) cold, frigid.
^amerab, fn. -bs or -ben, -ben.
comrade, companion.
^ttmtll, m. -ne8, -ne. chimney,
fireplace.
hammer, /. -rn. chamber, room.
s^tXt, ni. chamberlain.
^ttm^f, m. -pfeg, -ampfe. fight,
contest, struggle, battle.
fttmUfcn, intr. fight, struggle.
^ttlinc, /. -nen. can, tankard,
pot.
^a^itel, n. -1§, -t. chapter.
Stttt, rn. -Ig. Charles.
^ttrtcnfllicl, n. game of cards, card
playing.
^ttrtoffcl, /. -In. potato.
^aitx, wi. -rS, -r. tom-cat
^ttuf, m. -fe^, -ciufe. purchase, bar-
gain.
faufcn, tr. buy, purchase.
^ttuflcute, see ^ttufmann.
^ttUfmttnn,m. -nne§ (rarefy -anner,
generally ^anffeute). merchant,
tradesman.
tanm, adv. hardly, scarcely, but
just.
^e^lc/.-Ien. throat.
ttimtn,intr. germinate, shoot forth,
develop.
fctn, pron. no, not one, not any,
no one. see 195,2.
better, rn. -r§, -r. cellar.
fcitncn, (irreg.) tr. know, be ac-
quainted with.
TOCABULAET.
419
tenner, tn. -X^, -r. knower, con-
noisseur.
^Crfer, wi. -r^, -r. prison, jail, dun-
geon.
^ttU, /. -ten. chain, fetter,
bond.
^tnil, n. -beS, -ber. child.
^ittbletn, n. -nS, -lu little child.
^ir^C, /. -d)en. church.
^i^t,f' -ten. chest.
tlagcn, intr. or tr. mourn, bewail,
lament, complain.
^(ang, m. -ge§, -ange. sound,
ringing, clang.
fJttt, adj. {or adv.) clear, bright,
fair; evident.
^lar|ett, /. clearness, brightness.
^\t\tSp n. -be^, -ber. garment, arti-
cle of clothing, dress, raiment.
fleitt, (idj. {or adv.) little, small; in-
significant, petty.
^Ictnigfcit, /. -ten. trifle.
^leinoti^ n. -be§, -bicn {or -be),
ornamental or precious thing;
jewel.
fling ein, intr. tinkle, ring the bell.
flo|)fen, intr. beat, knock.
^(ofter, n. -r@, -lifter, cloister,
monastery, convent.
Hug, adj. {or adv.) prudent,
shrewd, sagacious, clever.
^nak, m. -ben, -ben. boy.
ftnCJ^t, m. -te§, -te. servant, vas-
sal.
^nic, n. -e8, -c. knee.
fniecn, intr. kneel.
fo^en, tr. or intr. cook, boil.
Coffer, rn. -X9, -r. coffer, trunk.
^0ffctd)en, n. -m, -n. little trunk.
fibin {or (Siitn), n. -n«. Cologne.
^ommonbttnt, i^- - ten, -ten. com-
mander.
(ommen, 0. intr. f. come, ap-
proach, arrive ; occur, come
about.
^ombbic,/. -{en. comedy, sf^itelett,
n. comedy-acting.
^bmg,m. -gg, -ge. king.
^bmgin,/. -innen. queen.
fbniglil^, adj. {or adv.) kingly,
royal.
^bntgret^, 71. kingdom, realm.
fbnnett, {irreg.) tr. can, be able,
have power; he permitted; know,
understand, see 251, 254.
^O^lf, rn. -fe§, -bpfe. head.
^oxh, in. -be§, -brbe. basket.
^br^ICr, rn. -r§, -r. body ; sub-
stance; corpse.
fofibar, adj. {or adv.) costly.
fojien, tr. cost.
fbftUc^, adj. or adv. costly, pre-
cious; delightful, delicious.
ftd^Clt, intr. crack, crash.
^tttft /• -Cifte. strength, vigor;
power, force,
frdftig, adj. {or adv.) strong, vigor-
ous, powerful, mighty.
fttt^cn, intr. crow.
ixmt, adj. {or adv.) ill, sick, dis-
eased, as noun, sick person, in-
valid.
^tttnfcnktt, n. sick-bed.
^ranf^cit, /. -ten. illness, sick-
ness, disease.
^xant, n. -teg, -autcr. herb.
^retlittti, n. -ties, -t)e. credentials.
^Xti§, m. -feg, -je. circle.
^rCUJ, n. -geS, -ge. cross, crucifix.
sjUg, rn. crasade.
BxtU^CX,rn. -r8, -r. kreuzer (small
coin).
freu^tgeit, tr. crucify, pple as noun,
the crucified one.
Wcg, m. -geS, -ge. war, ^tiegcg^
t(jttt, /. deed of war,
l^rofobil, n. {or m.) -leg, -le. croco-
dile.
^rone, /. -nen. crown.
^ru|J|JCl, rn. -Ig, -I cripple.
420
GERMAN-ENGLISH
^utf)C, /. -d^en. kitchen.
^Htl f. -In. ball, bullet.
ful^r, adj. {or adv.) cool.
fu|n, adj. (or adv.) bold, daring,
intrepid.
^ultUt/ /. culture, civilization.
tUttintCtlt, tf. grieve, trouble, con-
cern, reflex, concern one's self,
care.
jfitnfttg, adj. (or adv.) to come, fu-
ture.
^Unft, /. -iinfte. art, skill; art (as
distinguished from science).
sf^ulc, /. art-school. ^
fiunftlcr, m. -rg, -r. artist.
^Ur,/. -ren. choice, election; right
of electing, sfiirft, m. Elector
(i. €. one of the princes formerly
entrusted with the election of
the German emperor), sfiirftcits
t^Um [stum], n. electorate (ter-
ritory of an Elector).
fnX], adj. {or adv.) short, brief.
fuffen, tr. kiss.
^iiftc, /. -ten, coast, shore.
^Utf^Cr, m. -x^, -v. coachman,
driver.
iSaBfal, n. -leS, -le. refreshment,
comfort.
lad^en, intr. {rardywith gren.) laugh,
laugh at.
la^erlit^, adj. {or adv.) laughable,
ridiculous.
Satien, m. -n^, -n or -ciben. shop,
staU; shutter.
fittge, /• -en. situation, position.
Ha^tX, n. -V^, -V. couch, sickbed;
fig. sickness ; camp, encamp-
ment.
fittnti, n. -be§, -be or -an^ev. land,
ground; territory, region, coun-
try; country (as distinguished
from city), auf tcttl gatltlC, in
the country, agut, n. country-
place, sfirerfe, /• stretch of land,
region. gttniJcStJcrtuetfung, /.
banishment.
1. Itttig, adj. {or adv.) long, ex-
tended, protracted; high, tall.
2. lanjj {or longc), adv. long, a
long while; by far, see 230.1a.
Sangenol^ren, m. a long-eared one.
langetuetien {or langtucilen), tr,
bore, tire, reflex, be bored.
Idng0, prep, {with dat, or gen.)
along, see 373a.
longfam, adj. (or adv.) slow.
Ittngji, adv. very long (already),
long since, a great while ago.
Ittffcn, 0. tr. let alone, leave; let,
permit, allow, suffer; {often with
another verb in infin. ) cause, make,
effect, bring about, have; in im-
perative, let. e0 liifet fl^, it can
be; it may be, it is possible, see
343.5d
SttUf, inn. -\t^, -cinfe. course, career.
laufen, 0. intr. \or ]). run, move
rapidly.
Saunc,/. -ncn. humor, mood, tem-
per.
Ittttt, adj. {or adv.) loud, aloud.
SttUt, ini. -teg, -te. sound, tone.
leBen, intr. live, exist; dwell.
fickn, n. -ng, -n. life, hving; an-
imation.
gcBctt^gliilf, n. happiness of Ufa.
gekng|ifli(t)t /• duty of life.
lebentlig, adj. {or adv.) living, alive.
leb^aft, adj. (or adv.) Uvely, viva-
cious.
\t^^tn,intr. be parched with thirst,
pant.
Iccr, adj. (or adv.) empty, vacant;
vain.
Icgcn, tr. lay, put down, place.
refl X. lay one's self down.
le^ncn, tr. or intr. lean, incline,
rest.
VOCABUIARY.
421
Sel^nfiu'^T, m. easy chair, arm-cliair.
fUt^Xt, /. -ren. doctrine, teaching;
theory; apprenticeship.
lel^ren, tr, teach, instruct.
ficl^tcr, w^- -r8, -r. teacher.
fiei6, rn. -be§, -ber. body; waist.
Ici^t, adj. {or adv.) light, easy.
itlh, adj. {ojily predicatively) disa-
greeable, painful. tSi^uimix—,
I am sorry, I regret.
fieib, w. -beg. harm, hurt, pain;
sorrow.
leiben, 0. tr. suffer, endure, bear;
intr. suffer, as noun, suffering,
misfortune.
8cii>enftl)ttft, /. -ten. passion.
leitietf interjectional adv. alas, un-
fortunately.
Ict^cn, 0. tr. lend.
Icifc, cidj- (or adv.) not loud, soft,
low, gentle.
lenfen, tr. (or intr.) turn or bend
in a desired direction, direct,
manage, influence.
lernen, tr. (or intr.) learn.
lefcn, 0. tr. read.
Ic^t, odj. (or adv.) last, latest,
final.
leu^ten, intr. shine, give light,
beam.
Scute, pi people, folks.
fiil^t, n. -m, -ter or -tc. light,
brightness; candle.
licb, odj. (or adv.) dear, beloved;
attractive, pleashnt. — ^abett,
hold dear, love. — fcin, be
agi*eeable or pleasant (to some
one).
fiieftt^cn, n. -n§, -n. little love,
darling, sweetheart.
fiic6e, /. love.
lithtn, tr. love.
lieber, (idv. rather, sooner, more
willingly.
fiict># n. -be«, -bsr. song, lay.
Hcgen, 0. intr. ^ or f. lie.
fiilte, /. -ieu. lily.
fiiniJC, /. -ben. linden, lime-
tree.
lint adj. left.
linU, adv. to the left.
CiH^C, /. -pen. lip.
8ob, n. -be§. praise. stcJittcrin, /.
praiser, panegyrist.
\ohtn, tr. praise, commend; pro-
mise.
Cot^, n. -d)e§, -ocl)er. hole; dun-
geon. •
Siiffcl, m. -% -t spoon.
(O^ncn, tr. reward, recompense.
SOO0, n. -feS, -fe. lot; destiny.
Io0, CK^. (or adu.) loose, released,
set free; with fcin or luerbeu,
governing accus. loose from, rid
of. as sepHe prefix to verbs, loose,
free.
SbfegcliJ, n. ransom.
lb fen, tr. set loose, loosen.
lo^geben, 0. tr. set loose or free,
release.
loSma^en, tr. make loose, loosen;
disengage.
lolrct^Cn, 0. tr. tear loose, tear
away.
l0i§f|)rc^cn, 0. tr. declare free, re-
lease; acquit, absolve.
iiot^ [got], n. -tf)e§, -tf)e. lead;
half an ounce.
SottJC, m. -en, -en. lion. gbttJCm
ficgcr, wi- lion-conquerer.
IJuft, Z'. -iifte. air; breeze, breath.
(itgen, 0. intr. lie, speak falsely.
Suflp /. -iifte. pleasure, delight;
inclination, fancy. — |aben,
have desire, like.
Ittfltg, adj. {or adv.) merry, gay;
amusing.
ma^en, tr. make, produce; cause;
do, perform.
422
GEKMAN-ENGUSH
9Jlttt^t, /. -a6)it, miglit, power,
force.
mii^tig, adj. {or adv.) mighty,
powerful, (loith gen.) capable of.
SRiitl^en, n. -n§, -ll, girl, maiden.
SKttgb, /. -agbe. maid, maiden.
aUtti, m. -aieS. May.
Pttilanil, n. -b8. Milan.
9Kttinj, n. -jeg. Mayence (city).
Pajept, /. -ten. majesty,
Majesty.
WlayoXf rn. -xi, -re. major.
SWttI, n. -leg, -te or -filer, token,
sign, mask; point of time, time,
turn.
malen, tr. paint.
Wt^XtX, in. -r8, -r. painter,
artist.
man, indef. pron. one, people,
they, see 185.
mattt^, indef, pron. , in sing, many
a, many a one; in pi. many, see
191.
mant^txlti,adj. inded. {or adv.) of
various sorts, diverse, in many
ways.
mttn^mal, adv. many times,
often.
Wtaniif m. -nne6, -firmer, man;
husband.
Wdnntx^tWU f- figure of a
man.
SWttltfttrilC,/. -ben. mansard (curb-
roof).
Maxt,f- -!en. mark (a coin, worth
about 25 cts).
aWtttft, m. -teg, -orfte. market,
market-place.
marft^icrcn, intr. march.
Tlaxitxtoti, m. death by torture.
Sflarj, m. -geg. March.
^aUxn,pl measles.
3Ktt^, n. -^eg, -^e. measure;
standard, scale, proportion.
mdfftt), adj. {or adv.) massive.
SWaucr, /. -rn. wall, sftcln, m,
stone for building.
9RaU0, /. -fiufe. mouse.
2Rcbttittc, /. -en. medal.
9Kcet, n. -reg, -re. ocean, sea.
mcl^r, adj. {or adv.) more, generally
indeclinable, but pi. nte^re or me^s
rere, more than one, several.
after negative, any longer.
Sfleile, /. -len. mile, (a German
mile equals nearly 5 English
miles).
mtin, poss. adj. my, mine.
mttnctt, tr. or intr. think, suppose;
mean, signify.
mcinig, poss. pron. my, mine.
SJlcinuilfl, /. -gen. opinion.
mcijl, (idj. most, adv. mostly, for
the most part. oni -Cll, most,
above all others.
3!lcificr, «*. -rg, -r. master, chief,
leader.
meltiett, tr. mention, notify, an-
nounce.
SUcngC, /. -en. multitude, crowd.
9Rcnf(^, m. -fcfjen, -fd^en. man,
person, human being.
9Rcnf(^cn: sgef^lcdjt, n. human
race, sl^crj, n. human heart.
Aithe, /. philanthropy, sfeele, /.
human soul, sfiimme, /. human
voice.
a^cnfl^ftcit, /. humanity.
mcrfcn, tr. mark, stamp; note,
perceive, observe.
mcffcn, 0. tr. measure.
SWcffct, n. -r§, -r. knife.
meuMiren [sieren], tr. furnish.
SUtene, /. - en. mien, expression
of face, air, look. — ma^ett, put
on a look,
mict^en [4tn], tr. hire, rent
anU^, /. milk.
mill* (or mitbc) adj. {or adv.) mild,
meek, gentle; benevolent
VOCAB0LABY.
423
9Rtlbc, /. gentleness, mercy.
5!Jinion, /. -neu. million.
9Winiftcr, m. -i-g, -r. minister.
ailinutc, /. "ten. minute.
mi^faUen, 0. Mr. {vMh dat.) dis-
please.
mit, adv. and seple prefix, along,
along with; at the same time;
likewise, also. prep, (with dat.)
with, along with, by.
mitBrtngen^ {irreg.) tr. bring along
(with one), come bringing.
SKitfiurger, w^. fellow citizen.
mitgcftcn, 0. intr. f. go along, go
too.
mitma^en, tr. join in making or
doing.
mitne^mcn, 0. tr. take along with
one.
mitftngcn, 0. intr. join in sing-
ing, sing too or with others.
SKittag, m. -g§, -ge. midday,
noon.
Sfltttag0effen, n. midday-meal,
dinner.
mutt, /. middle, midst.
S!ttttet n- -% ~t middle; means,
instrument.
mitten, adv. (followed by prep.)
midway, in the midst.
mtttl^etlen [stcilcn], tr. communi-
cate, impart.
aHitttUOi^, m. -6)^, -d)e. Wednes-
day.
SWitttJClt, /. one's own age or time,
contemporaries.
SRotie, /. -ben. mode, fashion.
mogen, (irreg.) intr. or tr. may,
might, be permitted or allowed;
like, choose, care, desire, see
251, 255.
9Konat, m. -t«, -tc. month.
Monti, m. -be§, -be. moon.
aWontttg, m. -g§, -ge. Monday.
>, m. -beS, -be. murder.
SWorgcn, m. ^itg, -n. mom, morn-
ing; east, orient; morrow.
fian'O, n. the East, the Orient.
sjiunbC, /. morning-hour.
Woxtti, m. -U, -I mortar.
tnittie, adj. (or adv.) tired, weary.
Mn^t, /. -^en. toil, labor, pains.
SKumie, /. -en. mummy.
S^unb, m. -beg, -be or-iinbe or
-iinber. mouth.
muntcr, adj. (or a<!i;.) lively, brisk,
cheery, gay.
SJluftf, /. -!en. music
miiffcn, (irreg.) tr. or intr. must, be
under necessity of, be compelled
or obliged, be unable to help,
have to, cannot but. see 251,
256.
tnitfftg, adj. (or adv.) unemployed,
idle, sgang, m. idleness, sloth.
sgjingcr, m. idler.
SRut^ mnt], m. -ttjea. mood, dis-
position; courage, spirit, mettle.
mut^ig [mutig], adj. (or adv.) spir-
ited, courageous, daring.
Wntttv, /. -iitter. mother.
miittcrU^, adj. (or adv.) motherly,
maternal.
Ittt^, adv. and sep'le prefix, atter,
afterward, behind; in accord-
ance, conformably, nad) unb
nod), little by little; nad) ttJie \)ov,
afterwards as before, still.
prep, (with dat.) after, behind;
according to, after the manner
• of; for, about; at, by; with names
of places, to, toward, for. — often,
upward, etc.
ntt^ttl^men, intr. (with dat.) or tr.
imitate, copy.
![Ra^ttftmnng, /. -gen. imitation,
mimicry.
9laii\hav, m. -v8 or -xn, -rn. neigh-
bor.
424:
GERMAN-ENGLISH
9la^!ommc, m. -en, -eit. succes-
sor, descendant.
9la^loi m. -ffe6, -affe. thing left
behind, residuum; heritage.
JWttt^mittttg, m. -g§, -ge. after-
noon.
JWtt^rit^t, /. -ten. intelligence,
news.
mil^fllllTCIt, inir. (with dat) stare
after.
^tt^t, /. -ad^tc. night, sfcitc, /.
night side, dark side.
nac^tuetfen, 0. tr. point out, show,
prove.
9lat^toclt, /. after world or age,
posterity.
tlfX^f adj. {with dat.) nigh, near,
close.
9l(il^er /. nearness, proximity,
neighborhood.
naletlt/ if. bring nearer, reflex.
draw nigh, approach; resemble.
niilrcn, tr. nourish, support, nii^s
tcnb, nourishing, nutritive.
9lrtmc {or scn), m. -m, -n.
name.
9larr, rn. -rren, -rren. fool.
Ittt^, odj. {or adv.) wet.
9latton, /. -nen. nation.
9lainv, /. -ren. nature.
nthtn, odv. beside, prep, {with dot.
or accus.) beside, by the side of,
by, with; along with, besides.
9lcffe, m. -en, -en. nephew.
ne|tnen, 0. tr. take, seize; take
away; receive, accept.
ttetgen, tr. bend, bow. reflex, bow.
9CttCi9t,incUned; favorable, well
affectioned.
JRcigUng, /. -gen, inclination;
affection, attachment.
tiein, indecl. no, nay.
filtitt, /• -!en. pink, carnation.
tlCnncn, {irreg.) tr. name, caU;
speak oi
9lerb, m. -ueg, -t)e, or Jlctbe, /.
-tien. nerve.
nctt, adj. {or adv.) neat, pretty,
nice.
neu, adj. {or adv.) new, fresh, un-
used; recent, modern.
neugtertg, adj. {or adv.) curious.
ncuglii^Cnil, adj. {or adv.) newly
glowing.
neutt, num. nine, sjcl^tt, nineteen.
'-m ninety.
1li(^t, indef. pron. naught, nothing-
ness. Q^v.not. — cinmtti, not
even, no^ — , not yet. — nut
.... fonbcrn m^, not only
.... but also.
tti^tS^ indef. pron. indecl. naught,
nothing, adverbially, in no wise,
not at all.
nidCtt, intr. nod.
nic, adv. never, at no time.
nicber, adj. nether, lower; low,
base. adv. andsep'lepreflx. down,
downward.
nicbcrtcugcn, reflex, bend down.
niciicrlttniift^, adj. {or adv.) Neth-
erlandish, Dutch.
niciJCrfe^en, ^. set down. r^ex. sit
down.
nicilcrtlJCrfeit, 0. tr. throw down,
prostrate.
nictirig, adj. {or adv.) low;
humble.
niemaB, adv. never.
9Iicmttnil, indef. pron. nobody, no
one, not any one. see 186.
1. no^, adv. still, yet, further. —
ni^t, not yet. — cttt, one more,
another. — etttmal, once more.
2. ttO^, conj. {after negative, espHy
metier) nor.
IRortl, m. -beg, -be. north. stoiirtS,
adv. northwards.
9lortien, »^. -ng. north, northern
region.
V0CABULAE7.
425
ttor))It$, odj, (or adv.) northerly,
northern.
9l0t^ ['^Oi], /. -ot!)C. need, neces-
sity; want; trouble, misery.
nbt^ifi [nbtig], {with dat) adj. {or
adv ) needful, necessary.
nbtligCtt [nbtigcn], tr. constrain,
force, compel.
JlOt^ttJCnilig [mU], (^j- necessary,
indispensable.
*WotJCmber, m. -x%, -r. Novem-
ber.
nun, ddv. now, at present.
nur, odv. only, simply; but just,
scarcely.
9lu§,/. -iiffe. nut. sbtttUn, adj. nut-
brown.
nu^cn (yr nii^cn, intr. {wUhdat.)he
of use to, profit.
nu^Ut^, ddj. {or adv.) useful.
Of\, adv. over, above, conj. whether,
if; aU —, as if.
oBcn, adv. above, aloft, on high.
nac^ —, upwards.
Obct, adj. upper, higher.
Obctfl, trh. -te§ or -ten, -te or -ten.
colonel.
oBglett^, conj. although, though.
CctoBer, w. -r8, -r. October.
bllC or olj, adj. {or adv.) vacant,
deserted, desolate, waste.
VttitX, conj. or, otherwise, else.
off en, adj. {or adv.) open; public;
frank, sincere.
Offenbar, adj. {or adv.) plain, evi-
dent.
Dfflctcr {or sjicr), m. -r«, -re. offi-
cer.
oft, adv. often, frequently. svudU,
adv. oftentimes, repeatedly.
Cl^etm, rn. -m§, -me. uncle.
0|ne, prep, {with accus.) without;
but for, except, save. — J)tt§,
but that, save thart
Ofit, n. -rcg, -rctt. ear. sting, m.
earring.
ort)entlt(^, adj. (or adv.) orderly,
regular, proper.
Drt, rn. {or n.) -te8, -te or Orter.
place, spot, region.
Often, m. -ng. east; eastern land.
Ottilie,/. -ien«. OttiHa.
$aar, n. -res, -re. pair, couple;
ein ^aot {or paat), a couple,
two or three, a few. see 322.2a.
^ttlaft, m. -t§, -cifte. palace.
^ttntoffcl, m. -Ig, -L slipper.
^tt^ier, n. -r8, -re. paper.
^aifl, m. -m, -dpfte. pope.
SParatieS, n. -fee, -je. paradise.
^ortei,/. -eien. party, faction.
|iartetif((), adj. {or adv.) factious,
partial, partizan.
^ttttie, /. -ieu. party, company;
part, portion.
p)ttf!o0ter, m. -r§, -re. passenger.
^elj, rn. -geg, -ge. fur, furred
coat.
^fab, «*• -beg, -be. path, track,
way.
^f ttff e, rn. -en, -en. priest, parson
{used generally contemptuously).
starrer, rn. -rg, -r. parson, min-
ister.
^ftttr^of, m. parsonage.
^fertl, n. -beg, -be. horse.
i^lfiegen, 0. or N. tr. {or intr. with
gen.) wait upon, nurse, cherish;
enjoy, be given to. intr, be
wont, be used to.
mWJ- -ten. duty
llfliilfen, tr. pick, pluck.
^forte,/. -ten. door, gate, portal;
port (of ships).
p\m,inierj. fie!
^funb, n. -beg, -be. pound,
^^ilolog, m. -gen, -gen. philolo-
gist.
426
GERMAN-ENGLISH
^$ifofo||]&, m. -^^en, -p^en. phi-
losopher.
^ilgcr, rn. -r8, -r. pilgrim, sft^attt,
/. band of pilgrims.
^Ittgc, /. -gen. plague, torment,
calamity.
^(anf e, /• -fen. plank, board.
^la^, m. -^eg, -d^e, place, seat;
situation.
|ilau))ern, intr. chat.
illo^lif^, adj. {or adv. ) sudden.
Illunbern, tr. plunder, pillage.
flO^en, intr. knock.
iioetif^, adj. (or adv.) poetical.
iloUtif^, adj. {or adv.) political.
^ort, m. -teg, -te. port, harbor.
portrait ^' -te§, -te. portrait.
sinaler, m. portrait-painter.
^ofl,/. -ten. post, post-office.
^rat^t, /• -ten. splendor, pomp.
SPriifiilcnt, m. -ten, -ten. president.
^taffen, intr. carouse, riot.
^Xti§, m. -je8, -je. price, cost;
prize, reward ; praise, glory.
Iltetfen, 0. tr. praise, commend.
^tcmiermittiflcr, m. prime-minis-
ter.
^reu^e, m. -en, -en. Prussian.
^ricflcr, rn. -x^, -v. priest.
^rinj, m. -jen, -jen. prince.
^rinjcfftn,/. -innen. princess.
Ilribat, adj. {or adv.) i)rivate.
sflttltbC,/. private lesson.
^rotlUCt, n. -tg, -te. product.
^rofcffor, m. -v^, -ren. profes-
sor.
^iroftttcrcn, intr. profit, gain.
^romcttttbe, /. -en. promenade,
walk.
Quitter, n. -r«, -r. powder, gun-
powder.
^unft, m. -tg, -te. point.
Ouctt, m. -HeS, -He, (yr OntUt, f.
-en. spring, well, source.
quetten, 0. intr. ^ or f. flow forth,
burst out, gush.
9taBe, m. -en, -en. raven.
Ma^C, f. revenge.
9la(^en, m. -m, -n. throat, jaws.
ttt^en, tr. avenge.
IRong, w. -ge§, -onge. rank, class.
taft^, adj. {or adv.) impetuous,
swift, speedy.
tttfcn, intr. rave, rage, tttf cnti, furi-
ous, raving, mad.
diatfi [Mai], m. -tf)eg, -dt{)c. coun-
sel, advice; counsellor. s^nu§, n.
town-hall.
tttt^en [ratcn], 0. intr. {mth dat.)
give advice or counsel, advise;
guess.
raubett, tr. take by violence (from,
dat.), rob of.
9lau(er, m. -x^, -r. robber.
9{ttU(ft, m. -c^eS. smoke.
tauten, intr. smoke.
tttUl^, adj. {or adv.) rough, harsh,
coarse.
IRaum, m. -meg, -duntc. room,
space, place. — geBett, give waj'^,
yield.
9JttUf^, m. -fc^eg, -dnjd^e. noise,
rush ; sudden enthusiasm, in-
toxication.
rauf^en, intr. ^ or f. move with a
sound like rushing water, rustle;
roar, rush.
(Ret^enft^ttft/. reckoning, account.
Xt^\itXi,tr. reckon, calculate, count,
estimate, deem.
tct^t, adj. {or adv.) straight, direct;
right, just; correct, true, real;
{with dat.) suitable, convenient;
right (not left). adverbially,
really, actuallj"^; very, quite.
9lc^t fi. -teg, -te. right, justice,
— ^aBen, be in the right.
te^tgliiufiig, adj. orthodox.
VOCABULAET.
427
ttd^tS, odv, to the right.
9lctie, /. -ben. speech, talk, dis-
course. — fte^en, stand talk,
(voifh dat.) answer, be accounta-
ble to.
tebeit/ irdr. or tr. speak, talk, con-
verse.
rebli^^ adj, (or adv.) honest, fair.
^Reform, /. -en. reform.
9iC9Cn, m. -nS. rain.
^Icgicrung, /. -gen. government.
regnen, intr. impers. rain.
rci^, adj. {or adv.) wealthy, rich;
copious.
9iti^, n. -C^e8, -d)e. empire, realm,
kingdom.
XtiH^tn, intr. reach, extend, tr. hold
out, present, offer.
rei^Itt^^ cidj. (or adv.) abundant,
copious, plentiful.
9lcit^t§um [stum], m. -m%,- iimer.
riches, wealth.
Ut\f)t,f. -en. row, series, line.
Utimex, rn. -rS, -r. rhymer.
Xtin, adj. {or adv.) clean, pure.
rctnigcn, tr. cleanse, purify.
9lcifc, /. -fen. journey, voyage.
tcifcn, intr. f or I), journey, travel,
take a journey.
tei^en, 0. tr. tear, snatch away.
rcitcn, 0. intr. I) or \. ride, go on
horseback.
better, rn. -r8, -r. rider, horseman.
retjen, tr. incite, excite; charm, at-
tract, rcijcnb, charming.
Uttiox {or stiox), m. -r§, -oren.
rector (principal of a school).
^Religion, /. -nen. religion.
9itfi,m,. -te8, -te. residue, remnant,
remainder.
^leftttUrtttion, /. -nen. restaurant.
Xttitn, tr, save, rescue, deliver.
reflex, save one's self ; run away.
IRettung, /. -gen. rescue, deliver-
ance.
teuett, tr. or intr. rue, repent, re-
gret. c0 rcuct mid), I repent.
9leboIutton, /• -nen. revolution.
9l^cin, m. -ne§. (river) Khine.
fbxildt, /• Rhine-bridge.
Xi^itn, tr. set jight; direct; judge,
censure.
(Rit^tcr, m. -r§, -r. judge. sflul^I,
m. judgment-seat.
Oii^tigfeit, /. rightness* correct-
ness.
(Ricfc, m. -fen, -fen. giant.
0ltng,m. -ge§, -ge. ring.
tittgett, 0. tr. wring, twist, intr,
struggle, strive, contend.
ttng0, adv. around, about. — um*
^tX, adv. round about, all
around.
rinncn, 0. intr. Ij or f. run, flow,
course.
IRitt, m. -tteg, -tte. ride.
flitter, rn. -r§, -r. chevalier,
knight.
IRocf, m. -deg, -ocfc. coat, petti-
coat.
XOi), adj. (or adv.) rude, raw,
rough.
(RoMe, /. -len. roll, scroll ; role,
part.
9tam, n. -ni§. Eome.
tHoman, m. -ne§, - nc, novel, ro-
mance.
9Jofe, /. -fen. rose.
9lO^, n. -ffeg, -ffe. horse, steed.
XOi^ [tot], adj. {or ad>\) red.
JRiirfcn, rn. -nS, -n. back, rear.
tiitfen, tr. jerk, pull; move, push.
MdW, /• -ten. regard, respect,
consideration.
riirftnartd, adv. backwards, back.
tufcn, 0. intr. call out, cry. tr.
call, call to.
iRu^e, /. rest, repose, tranquillity.
rul^en, intr. rest, repose.
HU^ig, adj. {or adv.) quiet, tranquil.
423
GERMAN-ENGLISH
SJill^rUttg, /. moving, touchiDg;
emotion.
lRu|m, m. -meg. fame, glory.
Saal, m. -te§, -ak, hall, saloon.
@(l^C,/. -en» thing, matter, affair,
concern, business, pi. things,
goods.
Sacrament, n. - m, -te. sacra-
ment.
©aft, m. -te§, -cifte. sap, juice.
^H^, /• -en. talk, saying; legend,
tradition.
fagen, tr. say, tell, relate; speak,
utter, declare.
©ale, see Saal.
Salon, ni. -itg, -n§. salon, saloon,
parlor.
Salj, n. -jeS, -3c. salt.
fammt, prep. {wUh dat.) along
with, together with.
SaniJ, m. -beg. sand. sBanf, /.
sandbank.
fanft, adj. {or adv.) soft, gentle,
mild, smooth.
Saracene, in. -en, -en. Saracen,
Mussulman.
Satg, m. -geg, -cirge. coffin.
©a^, m. -5eg, -a^e. proposition,
sentence.
fancr, adj. (or adv.) sour, tart,
acid; disagi-eable, peevish.
faUCrU(!^, adj. (or adv.) tart, acid,
sourish.
faufcn, 0. intr. drink (said of the
lower animals), guzzle.
Sttnglmg, m. -gg, -ge. nursling,
baby.
S(^aar [S^ar], /. -ren. troop,
band, crowd.
f(!^aben, intr. {with dat.) harm, in-
jure, hurt.
f^affcn, 0. tr. shape, form, create,
make. 0. or N. procure, obtain,
provide.
f^amen, reflex, be ashamed.
f^anblit^, adj. {or adv.) disgrace-
ful, shameful, infamous.
©t^ar, see S^aar.
ft^arf, adj. {or adv.) sharp, keen,
cutting; severe.
Sc^a^, rn. -^e§, -ci^e. treasure.
ft^d^en, ir. treasure, value.
fr^aubcr^ttft, adj. {or adv.) awful,
horrible.
fc^autn, intr. look, gaze, see. tr,
look at, behold, see.
f^dumen, intr. foam, froth.
S^anf|licl, n. -l^, -k. spectacle,
sight; play, drama.
St^anf|liclcr, rn. -r^, -r. player,
actor.
S^effcl, m. -tg, -I. bushel.
f(!^etben, 0. intr. f. part, separate;
go away; die.
ft^eincn, 0. intr. shine; seem or
appear.
S^citcl, /. -In. crown (of the
head).
S^elm, m. -me§, -me. rogue,
knave.
fc^eltcn, 0. tr. or intr. reprove,
chide, scold ; revile as, call re-.
proachfuUy.
ft^Cnfcn, tr. pour out for drinking;
make a present of, give, grant.
St^CnfjiuBc, /. tap-room, bar,
room.
ft^CtJCn, intr. joke, jest, make
fun.
ft^euen, tr. be shy of; avoid, shun;
shy (of a horse).
f^ttfen, tr. cause to happen; uslp
send, despatch, forward.
S^frffal, n. -Ig, -te. fate, destiny,
lot.
ft^te^en, 0. intr. or tr. shoot.
S^iff, n. -ffeg, -ffe. ship.
S^itb, w. -beg, -be or-ber. shield;
coat of arms; sign, signboard.
VOCABULARY.
429
fe^im|lten, tr. insult, abuse, call
names.
St()Ittd)t /. -ten. battle.
S^lttf, m. -feg. sleep.
ft^lttfcn, 0. Mr. sleep.
©t^lttg, m. -geS, -age. stroke,
blow; shock.
f^lagen, 0. tr. or Mr. strike, bit,
beat ; knock ; defeat.
(Sc^Itttige, /. -gett. serpent, snake.
f^le^t, cidj- (or adv.) bad, base,
mean.
S^Tctfc, /. -fen. knot, bow.
{(^lie^cn, 0. tr. shut.
©t^loi n. -ffe§, -offer, lock;
citadel, castle, si^ov, n. castle-
gate.
©^(Ut^t, /. -ten. ravine, gorge.
S glummer, w. -x^, -r. slumber.
ftdlummern, intr. slumber, sleep.
@d)Iu^, m. -ffe§, -iiffe. closing;
close, end, conclusion.
©djlilffcl, w. -tg, -t. key.
(S^ntttt^, /. abuse, outrage ; dis-
grace, shame.
f^tnal, adj. (or adv.) narrow,
slender.
f^mei^eln, intr. {with dat.) caress;
flatter.
S^mctt^elretie, /• flattery.
S^mcrj, m. -jeg or -seu§, -jen.
pain, ache ; sorrow, distress.
f^mcrjen, intr. smart, pain. tr.
crimpers, (with dat.) pain, grieve,
afflict
f^merjHl^, adj. (or adv.) painful.
S^micll, m. -beg, -be. smith.
Sj^mictC, /. =cn. smithy, forge.
fdinett, adj. (or adv.) quick,
speedy, swift, rapid.
\ii)On, adv. already, even.
Won, adj. (or adv.) beautiful,
handsome, fine, noble.
f^Onen, tr. (or intr. with gen.) treat
■with consideration, spare.
<S(ftbnfteit, /. beauty.
(S^ranfc, /. -en. railing, barrier.
pi. lists (at tournaments), in tlic
— tt fommcn, enter the lists.
Street, m. -c!c§, -de. fright,
terror.
ft^rcdU^, adj. (or adv.) terrible,
frightful.
f^rcikn, 0. tr. write.
Sdireibttf^, m. writing-table.
fdircten, 0. intr, cry, cry out,
scream.
Shrift, /. -ten. writing; some-
thing written, scripture.
<S^ritt, rn. -tteS, -tte. step, stride,
pace.
^^U^, m. -'^eS, -^e. shoe.
(S^ulb, /. -ben. debt; fault,
crime.
ft^ulbig^ adj. (or adv.) owing, in-
debted for (with accus.); culpable,
criminal, guilty of or lacking in
(with gen)
(S^uliincr, m. -r§, -r. debtor.
(S^ulc, /. -len. school.
<S filler, in. -x^, -r. pupil, scholar.
S^urfc, rn. -en, -en. rascal,
knave, villain.
^M, m. -ffeS, -iiffe. shot;
charge (of a gun).
ft^tnat^, adj. (or adu.) weak, feeble.
@d)Uitt9crin,/. -nnen. sister-in-law.
S^lUttii, m. -\m or -nen, -cine
or -nen. swan.
ft^tuanfcn, intr. ]^ or f. stagger,
totter ; waver.
ft^ttJttrj, adj. (or adv.) black.
fc^tDcBettf intr. sweep (through the
air), soar, hover, float.
ft^tDCigCn, 0. intr. keep silence, be
still, not talk, hold one's peace.
as noun, silence.
St^tDCtj, /. Switzerland.
f^tuelgcn, intr. gormandize,
revel, carouse.
430
GERMAN-ENGLISH
Statuette, /. -Icn» threshold.
fi^tneUen, 0. intr. f. swell, heave.
f^tOCt/ odj. {or adv.) grievous,
sore, burdensome, heavy; hard,
difficult.
<Sd)toCtt, n. -teS, -ter. sword.
(S^ttJcficr, /. -rn. sister, sdjctt,
n. little sister.
(Sc^tUiegcrDtttcr, m. father-in-law.
f(^tt)immen, 0. intr. Ijor \, swim,
float.
f^lningcn, 0. tr. or intr. swing;
wave, brandish, rejiex. swing
one's self.
f^ttlbttn, 0. tr. or intr. swear, take
oath to, vow.
fc^tnitl, ctdj. {or adv.) sultry, hot
and close.
©t^tuung, m. -geS, -iinge. swing,
rotation, swinging motion.
Sc^tDur, m. -re§, -iire. oath, vow.
fc^tO^^, adj. of Swytz (a Swiss
Canton).
fC^§, num. six. sjcl^n, sixteen, sjig,
sixty.
Sec, m. -ee§. -een. lake. /. -een.
sea, ocean.
Scele, /. -ten. soul.
SegCl, n. -U, -I sail.
Scgcn, rn. -n6, -n. blessing.
fcgncn, tr. bless.
fe^en, 0. tr. or intr see, look.
glance, perceive ; look, appear.
fcl&ttCn, reflex, long, yearn, feel
eager desire, as noun, longing,
yearning.
<SeftnfUt^t, /. eager desire, yearn-
ing.
\t\\X, (tdv. very greatly, very much,
much.
1. fcin, 0. intr. f. be, exist. eS ift,
there is, etc. ciucm gut — , be
fond of one. an citicm — ,
depend on one ; be one's turn.
2. f cin, poss, adj, his, its.
3. fcin, gen. of er or e6.
{etne0glei(t)en, inded. adj. or pron.
of his kind, such as he.
f etnig, poss. pron. his, its.
fcit, prep, {with dat.) since, from (a
given time till now), during.
conj. since, since the time that.
shtm, ddv. since then, since.
C071J. since, from the time that.
<^eiit, /. -ten. side ; party ; page.
fclbct, adj. inded. self, myself, etc.
see 155.5.
fclbfl, adj. inded. self, etc. see
155.5. adv. even.
<BtW : sat^tung, /. self-respect.
::er^altung, /. self-preservation.
fclig, adj. {or adv.) blessed, happy,
blissful.
Seligtett, /. happiness, bliss, sal-
vation.
fcltfam, adj. {or adv.) unusual,
strange, wonderful.
fcnticn, {irreg. or reg.) tr. send.
September, m. -rg, -r. September.
fc^en, tr. set, place ; lay down,
lay. reflex, sit down.
fcufjcn, intr. sigh, groan.
ft^, re/lex. pron. himself, herself,
itself, themselves ; one another.
see 155.3,4.
fitter, adj. {or adv.) safe, sure, se-
cure.
ft^etn, tr. make sure, secure,
guarantee.
fie, pers. pron. {Sd sing.) she, her,
it; (3d pi) they, them; Sie,
you. see 153.4.
ftcbcit, num. seven, sjcftn {or fith
3C^n), seventeen, sjig {or fieh
m), seventy.
Sicg, m. -geg, -ge. victory, con-
quest.
Sieger, rn. -r8, -r. victor, cod^
queror.
ftegreid), adj. victorious.
VOCABtJLAEY.
431
IlIBctIt, (tdj. (or adv.) silver.
ftngen, 0. tr. or intr. sing.
finfcn, 0. intr. \, sink, fall.
^inn, m.-nueS, -niic or nuen. sense,
organ of perception ; mind ;
intent, meaning, import ; dispo-
sition, character.
ftttn^/ «(?/• {or adv.) related to
manners or morals ; social,
moral.
fi^en, 0. intr. sit.
8natie, m. -en, -en. slave.
fo, adv. so, in this manner or de-
gree, as. fo . . . aU (or mie) . . .
as ... as .... fo cilt, such a.
used as rel. pron. see 182.1.
fo : fbaiti, adv. so soon. conj. as
soon as. sglet^, adv. immedi-
ately, at once, slange, conj. as
long as. soft, conj. as often as.
stoic, adv. as. stO0^(, adv. as
well, fo tOO^l ... aU. ., as
well . . . as . ., both . . . and.
<So^n, m. -ne§, -o^ne. son.
So^nletn, n. -n§, -n. Httle son.
fol4 pron'l adj. such, cill folt^Ct,
such a.
(Sotbat, w. -ten, -ten. soldier.
foliti, (Ji'dj. (or adv.) solid, respect-
able.
foUen, (irreg.) tr. shall, should ;
owe, ought ; be to, be intended
to ; be said to. see 251, 257.
©ommcr, rfi. -rS, -r. summer.
fonlJCrn, conj. but (stronger than
ttbcr, and usually after negative).
Sonnaknti, m. -bS, -be. Satur-
day.
Sonne, /. -nen. sun.
fonnen, irdr. expose to the sun,
air, sun.
Sonnenlt^t, n. sunlight, sunbeam.
©onntttfi, wi. -g«, -ge. Sunday.
fonit, adv. else, otherwise, besides;
at other time, heretofore.
So^l^te, /. -ien§. Sophia.
"SotgC, /. -gen. care, anxiety, sor-
row.
fotgen, intr. care, take care, make
provision; feel anxiety or sorrow.
S^ianicn, n. -n^. Spain.
6|)anter, m. -x^, -r. Spaniard.
f|ianif(^, adj. {(yr adv. ) Spanish.
fjlOten, iT. spare, save, lay up.
fjlttt, adj. {or adv.) late, tardy,
slow.
fijajictcn, intr. \) or I walk (for
exercise or pleasure), go abroad.
— gCl^Cn, take a walk. — fol^ten,
take a drive. — rcitcn, take a
ride.
Sneer, m. -re§, -re. spear.
f^eifen, intr. eat, take food.
S^iel, n. -leg, -te. play, game,
sport ; playing, acting ; gam-
bling ; trick.
f|lielen, tr. or intr. play ; play
(music) ; gamble ; act.
S|JteUente, pi. actors, musicians.
SJli^e, /. -sen. point, peak, head.
SJjott, ni. -tte§, -tte. mockery,
derision, scorn, ridicule.
f|)Otten, intr. (with gen.) mock,
scoff at, ridicule.
S^JtOt^e, /. -rf)en. speech, lan-
guage.
f^tedien, 0. intr. or tr. speak, talk,
say, utter ; speak to, address.
frei — , pronounce free, absolve.
f^ttngen, 0. intr. f or t). spring,
leap, jump.
f|)tut)eln, intr. or tr. bubble, gush.
S|)Ut, /. -ven. track, trace ; way.
Stttb, m. -beg, -dbe. staff.
Stttbt, /. -cibte. city, town.
(Stamm,m. -ammeg,-dmme. stem,
stalk ; stock, race, tribe,
ftammein, intr. or tr. stammer.
fiammen, intr. f. originate, pro-
ceed, descend.
432
GERMAN-ENGLISH
8tant), in. -be§, -cinbc. standing ;
state, position, rank in life, ju
— C brtngen, bring about, ac-
complish, im — C fcitl, be pre-
pared, be able.
ftaxt, o,dj. {or adv.) strong, stont,
vigorous ; mighty.
Static, /• -en. force, strength.
flatt, prep, (with gen.) instead of ;
for.
fiattftnbcn, 0. intr. take place.
^tdttl, 0. or N. intr. stick, remain
fast ; lie hidden, tr. set ; hide.
fiel^en, 0. intr. t) or ]. stand, be
upright ; be situated, be ; stand
still, stop, tuic ficftt'0? how are
you ? how goes it ?
fietgen, 0. intr. f. step up; rise,
ascend, climb, get up or in;
sometimes descend, climb down.
flcil, adj. {or adv. ) steep.
Stein, m. -:ie§, -ne. stone, rock.
ftellen, tr. place, put, set, fix ; ar-
range, reflex, give one's self the
appearance, act as if, appear.
flerbcn, 0. intr. die.
Stern, TO.-ne8,-tie (or-nen). star.
flctS, ddv. steadily, ever, always.
Sticfel, m. -I§, -L boot.
flitt, ctdj- {or (idv.) still, silent,
quiet, calm, tranquil. imStitten,
secretly, sfdltueigenb, silent.
Stimme, /. -en. voice.
flimmcn, intr. or tr. give voice,
sound ; harmonize, agree, trcin
ftimmen, join in, join in singing.
Stirn, /. -nen. forehead, brow.
Stoif, n. -(feg, -ocfe. stick, staff,
cane ; trunk, stock ; story (of
a house).
StofF, m. -\\t%, -ffe. stuff, matter,
material.
flb^nen, irdr. groan.
flo(j,a(i/. (or adu.) proud, haughty,
arrogant.
Stor^, m. -6)t%, -tx6)t, stork.
flbten, tr. stir up, disturb, trouble.
fiO^en, 0. intr. or tr. push, thrust,
strike.
firafen, tr. punish, chastise.
Sttttfee, /. -§en. street.
ftreHen, irdr. strive, struggle, en-
deavor; aspire.
fireifen, tr. stretch, extend.
Strei^, in. -^t^, -d^e. stroke,
lash; trick, prank.
Streit, ra. -te§, -te, contest, com-
bat, conflict.
jlreitcn, 0. irdr. contend, struggle,
fight; argue, debate.
fireuen, tr. strew, scatter.
Strom, rn. -meg, -ome. stream,
river.
Stiib^en, n. -w^, -n. little room.
Sttirf, n. -dt^, -dt. piece, part,
fragment, bit ; piece, play.
Student, in. -ten, -ten. student.
Stubium, n. -mS, -ien. study ; pi
studies.
Stul^I, »w. -Ie§, -ii^te. chair.
fiumnt, o,dj. {or adv.) dumb, mute,
silent.
Stunbe, /. -ben. hour ; lesson (of
an hour's duration) ; distance of
an hour's walk.
fiiinilU^, adj. {or adv.) hourly.
Stnrm, m. -meg, -iirme. storm.
flUrjen, intr. f. fall headlong,
tumble, rush. tr. overthrow,
ruin.
fUC^en, tr- seek, search for, try to
find or obtain, aim at.
Siib, in. -beg. south, sintliftft, adj.
South-Indian.
Siinte, /. -ben. sin.
fitnbigen, intr. sin, commit a
sin.
fn§, adj. {or adv.) sweet, delight-
ful.
Stjricn, n. -ng. Syria.
VOCABULAEY.
433
Xdbat, rti. -!§, -!e. tobacco.
stdU^, n. tobacco-smoke.
tatein, tr. blame, censure, re-
proach.
^ttfcl, /. -In. table.
^tt0, m. -ge8, -ge. day.
tiiglt^, adj. {or adv.) daily.
talentDott, adj. {or adv.) talented.
^annc, /. -nen. fir-tree. Xanntni
Qtun, n. green of the firs.
^ttnte, /. -ten, aunt.
^ttnj, m. -geg, -ansc dance.
tanjett, intr. or ir. dance.
Sa^et w- -te§, -te. carpet.
^ojlCtC,/. -ten. tapestry, hangings.
ta|)f er, adj. {or adv.) brave, valiant,
bold.
2^ilft^e, /. -en. pocket, pouch.
Stttffc, /. -en. cup.
tdUfett, tr. dip, immerse ; baptize,
christen. getttttft, baptized,
christian.
taufent), num. a thousand. sUlttl,
adv. a thousand times.
better,- m. -x^, -r. plate.
2eufcl, m. -Ig, -t. devil.
2ft al, n. -Ie§, -ciler. valley.
^ftaler, m. -r8, -r. dollar, thaler
(about 73 cts.)
%W, /• -ten. deed, action.
tftiitig, adj. {or adv.) active, busy.
XWl^ttii, /. -ten. activity, effi-
ciency.
Xf^m [%m], m. -aue0, -ane. dew.
Xitakv, n. -r«, -r. theatre.
%Mtt, m. -eeS, -ee. tea; tea-
party.
Sfteil [XtW], m. or n. -Ie§, -te.
part, portion, share, jam — ,
partly, cincm 3tt — tucrticn,
fall to one's share.
tfteilncftmcn [ttiU], 0. intr. take
part, participate, be interested.
tfteucr [icttcr], adj. {or adv.) dear,
beloved; expensive.
Xf^kx [Xkx] , . n. -res, -re animal,
creature.
tfttcrif(ft [tiers], adj. {or adv.) ani-
mal.
XiiOX, n. -re§, -re. door, gate.
Xiox, rn. -ren, -ren. fool, simple-
ton.
Xf^OX^tit, f. -kn. folly.
^ftrfinc, /. -en. tear.
2ftron, m. -neg, -ne or -wen.
throne.
tftronctt/ iri/r. sit on a throne, be
enthroned.
tftun, 0. tr. do, perform ; make ;
put. intr. act, behave ; carry on,
conduct, irnpers. matter; be.
see 242.3.
Xf^nx, f. -ren. door.
ticf, adj. {or adv.) deep, profound,
low.
Xtcfc, /. -fen. depth, profundity,
deep place.
Xtfct), m. -fcf)e8, -fd)e. table.
Xitel, rn. -U, A. title ; claim.
Xijittn^m. -nS. Titian (the painter).
sfotti, m. hall for the paintings
of Titian.
Xo^kx, f. -orf)ter. daughter.
XoH, m. -be§, -be. death.
tobt [tot], a(^*. {or adv.) dead, as
nown, dead or deceased person.
toUtn [toten], tr. kill, slay, put
to death.
Xobtenfammer [XoU], n. cham-
ber of death.
tbiltUlft [tiitliJ^], adj. {or adv.)
deadly, mortal.
tobtfjijlttgen [tots], tr. strike dead.
Xon, rn. -neS, -one. tone, sound.
tonen, intr resound, sound forth.
triige, adj. {or adv.) inert, indo-
lent, lazy.
tragen, 0. tr. or intr. carry, bear,
bring ; wear ; support, endure ;
produce, yield.
434
(GERMAN-ENGLISH
StanI, m. -n!e8, -an!c. drink,
beverage.
ttauen, in^r. {with dat) trust, have
confidence in, confide, reflex.
trust one's self, venture.
txautxn, intr. mourn, grieve,
lament.
Xvaum, m. -mt%, -dumc. dream.
trdumett, intr. or tr. dream, fancy.
traumlo^, adj. dreamless.
trauttg, odj. {or adv.) mournful,
sad, melancholy.
iraut, adj. {or adv.) beloved, dear.
ixtxhtn, 0. tr. drive, impel ; carry
on, perform, ein S|liel -, play
a trick.
trcnncn, tr. separate, divide, part.
reflex, part.
Strcnnung, /. -gen. separation.
trcten, 0. intr. f. tread, step, pro-
ceed, enter, eincm no^c —,
come near to, affect.
treu, adj. {or adv.) true, faithful,
trusty.
%X\t^, m. -beg, -be. drift; im-
pulse, instinct.
trinfcn, 0. tr. or intr. drink.
trorfen, adj. {or adv.) dry.
troifnen, tr. or intr. Ijor \. dry,
dry up.
frolic, /. -cn. tropic.
^rojlfeit, m. -itg, -n. drop.
trofien, tr. comfort, console.
Xxoi^, m. -geg. defiance, disdain ;
stubbornness.
tro^, prep, {with dat. or gen.) in
defiance of, in spite of, notwith-
standing, sbcm, adv. in spite of
that, notwithstanding.
Xrunf, m. -M. drink, draught.
Xxu^p, m. -ppe§, -ppe. troop.
^U^, n. -c^eg, -iic^er. cloth, linen;
kerchief.
Sttgcnb, /. -ben. virtue.
tttgent^aft, adj. {or adv.) virtuous.
Ue^el, n. -t6, -t evil, ill, misfortune.
itbcn, tr. practice, exercise.
uhtXf adv. and seple {or insep'le)
preflx. over, above ; in excess.
tie !^tit —, during the time, see
230.1a.
prep, {with dat.) over, above,
higher than ; in the process of;
while, by reason of. {with a^cus.)
over or above ; across ; beyond ;
after, by way of ; respecting ;
over, more than.
itbcraU, adv. everywhere.
itkrMngen, {irreg.) tr. bring over,
deliver. (sep7e) bring over,
carry over.
itberflufftg, adj. {or adv.) super-
fluous, unnecessary ; plentiful.
u6cr]^0U|Jt, adv. in general,
altogether.
itbetlaffett, 0. tr. {sep'le or insep'le)
leave over, turn over, relinquish,
resign, make over, cede.
ubetlebctt, tr. outUve, survive.
1. iificrlegcn, tr. {seple) lay over,
turn over, (inseple) turn over in
mind, consider.
2. iibcrlcgen, see itkrliegeit.
itberliegen, 0. intr. {seple) lie oyer,
be deferred, {insep'le) be superior
to, surpass, itftetlegen, with dat
superior to.
iikrmorgcn, adv. day after to-
morrow.
iiklTttft^cn, tr. surprise, startle.
itberfe^en, tr. (seple) set over or
across, {inseple) translate.
itkrfte^en, intr. {sepHe) stand over
or out. {inseple) last over, last
through, outlast, endure, live
through.
itbertninben, 0. tr. overcome, con-
quer, subdue.
iibtig, adj. {or adv.) left over, left.
— ilciiicn/ be left.
VOCABULAEY.
435
u6rt0en0, adv. for the rest, more-
over.
UeBung, /. -gen. exercise, prac-
tice.
Ufer, n. -x^f -r. shore, coast,
bank.
U|r, /. -retl. hour ; clock, watch.
after numerals, o'clock.
Um, adv. and seple prefix, around,
about ; around about or over.
prep, {with accus.) around,
about; near to; respecting, con-
cerning, {after verbs of asking)
for. {with comparativef denoting
arrCt of difference) by. before ju
and an infinitive, in order, so as.
urn .... ^cr, {with accus. be-
tween) round about, uui ....
toittcn^ {yyith gen.) on account
of.
UmaXTMtt^tr. throw the arm about,
embrace.
Umbrtngen, {irreg.) tr. cause to
lose one's life, destroy, kill.
Umgang, m. -gg. going around ;
roundabout way ; society, com-
pany.
urn 9 eb en, 0. tr. {insepUe) sur-
round, environ, enclose.
Itni^Ct, adv. around, round about.
Umterneit, intr. leam over again,
learn in a different way.
Umltegen, 0. intr. f. lie around or
about, umncgenti, surrounding,
neighboring.
Umfcl^cn, 0. intr. look about, re-
flex, look about one's self.
Umftant), tn- -beg, -cinbe. circum-
stance.
Umtoenbett, {irreg. or reg.) tr.
turn about, reverse, invert, intr.
turn, turn back.
Itns, neg. prefix, same as English un-.
sQ6dnberli(^, adj. unalterable.
sanfeJ^nltf^, adj, inconsiderable,
insignificant, stttttg, adj. rude,
naughty. sBefttnnt,<w^i. unknown.
ssBetoegJit^, adj. immovable. sBc
mol^nt, adj. uninhabited. sBtaUt^s
Bat, useless.
Unt, conj. and.
unsllttnfbttr, adj. thankless, scnlls
Ii(^, adj. endless, scntbc^rlii^,
indispensable, setfttftrenftcit, /.
inexperience. sCrmcfeUri, adj.
immeasurable. sCrfc^Ut^, adj.
indispensable, scrtriiglit^, adj.
unendurable. stttOIXXUt, adj. un-
expected, sfe^lbttt, adj. infalli-
ble. sfc^IBttrtctt, /. infallibility.
sgcac^tct, prep, {with dat. or
gen.)in spite of, notwithstand-
ing, conj. although, sgcftt^r,
ado. about, nearly, not far from.
sgClicBt, adj. unloved, sgcmif^t,
adj. unmixed, sgcrc d)t, adj. un-
just, unfair. sgcf(^e()en, adj.
not happened, undone. sgCs
f^Ia^t, adj. uncouth, unwieldy.
sgCtUi^^Cit, /• uncertainty, sge?
JOgcn, adj. illbred, rude, un-
mannered. sgtaublilJ), adj. in-
credible.
Unglucf, rn. ill-luck, misfortune,
unhappiness.
Ultsglutflid), adj. unfortunate, un-
happy, sgtiirffelig, adj. unlucky,
unfortunate, miserable.
Unibcrritttt, /. -ten. university.
unsmbgtid), adj. impossible, spa^s
fcnb, adj. unsuitable. stcd)t, n.
wrong, error ; injustice, injury.
*ru^e, /. disquiet, anxiety.
sfauftcrlid^, adj. not neat or
clean, dirty, /ft^ultltg, adj. in-
nocent.
1. unfcr, poss. pron. our, ours.
2. unfer, gen. pi. of i^.
unferig (unfrig), poss. pron. our,
ours.
436
OEHMAJJ-ENGUSH
Unsfit^er, cw^i- uncertain, unsafe.
Itnten, odv. below, beneath.
UXdtX, adv. and sep'le prefix, below,
beneath, under ; among, amid.
prep, (with dot. or accus.)
under, beneath, below ; less
than, inferior to ; among, amid,
between; during.
Untcrtcffen, adv. during this time,
meantime.
untergc^cn, 0. intr. f. go down,
descend, set ; fall, perish.
ItntcrliCftCn, 0. intr. {sep'le) lie
under. {insepHe) succumb, yield,
be worsted.
Untemc^mcn, 0. tr. undertake, at-
tempt.
tttttcrri^tcn, tr. instruct, teach.
ttntcrt^an, m. -nen or -n§, -nen.
subject, dependent.
UnttXtOt^^, adv. on the way, under-
way. .
UnsUntcrBrO^en, adj. uninter-
rupted. sUtttcrliinilif^, adj. un-
patriotic. stierfO^nH^, adj. im-
placable, irreconcihable. $tlOilens
titi, adj. unfinished, incomplete.
s^DOtfit^ttg, adj. destitute of fore-
sight, imprudent, sfticit, adv.
not far distant, prep, {mth gen.)
not far from, near, stoitierfle^'
li^, adj. irresistible. stUO^I, adj.
unwell, not well. stUUtbtg, adj.
unworthy, derogatory to {with
gen.)
Urfat^e, /. -ci^en. cause, motive.
JBtttcr, m. -r«, -ater. father, slonb,
n. native country, fatherland.
tJcitcrUj^, adj. {or adv.) fatherly,
paternal.
I55ct(^cn, n. -n«, -11. violet.
SBenciig, n. -g«. Venice.
Her* insep'le prefix, see 307.6,
405.IU.ld
bera^ten, tr. despise, disdain.
95crtt(fttun9, /• contempt, scorn.
bcraltcn, intr. f. grow old. UCU?
ttltct, grown old, aged.
HcriinilCrn, tr. change, alter.
iJCtbcrgcn, 0. tr. hide, conceal.
Ucrbcffern, tr. make better, im-
prove.
JBerficlfcrung, /. -gen. improve-
ment, reform.
tietbteten, 0. tr. {with dot.) forbid,
interdict.
tierbtnben, 0. tr. bind up, tie up ;
bind together; lay under an obli-
gation.
!|JcrBrC^en, 0. tr. break ; trans-
gress, as noun, transgression,
crime, guilt.
JBcrirct^cr , tn. -rs, -r. criminal,
transgressor.
tierbrcnncn, {irreg.) tr. or intr. j.
bum up, destroy by fire ; scorch,
scald.
tJCrbringcn, {irreg.) tr. pass away,
spend.
fStX^iat^t, m. -tg. suspicion.
tiertiammen, tr. condemn, damn,
sentence, ppl. used as noun,
condemned one.
tiertieifcn, tr. cover up, conceal.
ticrbcrficn, 0. intr. f. spoil, be
ruined, perish. N. tr. spoil, des-
troy, ruin, as noun, ruin, de-
struction.
tjerberBItt^, adj. {or adv.) destruct-
ible ; destructive, pernicious.
Dettltenen, tr. earn, gain ; deserve.
berbtent, deserving.
tJCrbric^cn, 0. tr. fret, vex. bet*
broffcn, averse; wearied, dis-
gusted.
liSere^rung, /. reverence, venera-
tion.
ISBcrein, m. -ii8, -ne. union, com-
bination.
VOCABULABY.
437
tICtCitcTn, tr. make vain, frustrate,
render futile.
tJerftt^rCtt, 0. intr. I) or f. proceed,
conduct one's self.
ticrfatten, 0. mtr. f. fall in, de-
cline, degenerate, decay. tJCt*
faUcn, dilapidated, ruinous.
JBcrfttffcr, rn. -x^, -r. author,
composer.
iSBcrgttngcn^cit, /. the past, time
past.
tierpnglil^, adj. {or adv.) tran-
sitory, perishable.
tietgeben, 0. tr. give away; forgive,
pardon.
htX^thtnB, adv. in vain, vainly.
ncrge^Ctt, 0. Mr. j. pass away,
elapse, as noun, error, offense.
ticrgttngcn, gone by, elapsed,
past.
Uetgcltcn, 0. tr. pay back, return,
requite, recompense.
tetgeffen, 0. tr. (or Mr. with gen.)
forget.
ticrgniigcn, tr. satisfy, gratify,
please, as noun, satisfaction,
enjoyment, delight.
nergbnncn, tr. grant cheerfully,
not grudge, allow.
tierl^angniftdott [sniguoH], adj. (or
adv.) momentous, fateful.
Derl^aH <^^i- (^^ ^^0 lifted, hate-
ful, abhorrent.
bCtlftctmUl^cn, tr. keep secret, con-
ceal.
tlcrl^cirttt^Ctt [statett], tr. give in
marriage, reflex, marry, get
married.
llCtltntlCrit, tr. hinder, prevent.
tietiagen, tr. chase away, expel.
lierittufen, tr. sell.
tietflagen, tr. accuse ;^complain of.
^etllagt (as noun), the accused.
JBerfitntiiger, m. -rg, -r. herald,
proclaimer, haxbinger.
ticrlutjcn, tr. make short, shorten.
Ucrlangen, Mr. long, desire, tr.
desire, require, demand, as
noun, longing, desire, wish,
demand.
ticrlttff en, tr. leave, quit; forsake,
desert, reflex, {with auf) confide
one's self to, trust in, rely or
depend upon.
tJCrlcbcn, tr. live, spend, pass.
Ucrlei^cn, 0. tr. lend out, let;
confer, grant.
tlCtlc^cn, tr. injure, harm, hurt,
wound ; hurt the feelings of.
uetlictcn, 0. tr. lose, ucrlorcn,
lost, ruined.
liBcrlufl, m. -t8, -te. loss, detri-
ment.
Ucrmogen, {irreg.) ir. have power
to, be able to, can. as noun,
ability ; property.
JBcrmut^ung [=utung], /. -gen.
supposition, conjecture.
HCtttCi^mcn, 0. tr. become sensible
of, perceive ; hear, understand.
Dcrniinftig, adj. {or adv.) reason-
able, sensible.
tJCrortincn, tr. order, decree;
ordain.
HOcrriit^er [4tt], m, -r«, -r.
traitor, betrayer.
tJCrreifcil, intr. ]. go on a journey,
travel off, set out.
bcrfttgcn, tr. refuse, deny.
ticrfammeln, tr. {andreflex.) assem-
ble, collect, gather.
ftcrfiiumen, tr. forget, omit, ne-
glect, miss.
tJCtfc^affcit, tr. procure, obtain,
furnish.
Detf^attcn, 0. or K. Mr. f, die
away. ticrft^oHcn, vanished.
tierf^tetien, adj. {or adv.) different,
various, diverse, pi. various,
sundry.
438
GEKMAN-ENGUSH
Derf^Kc^en, 0. tr. shut up, close,
lock Tip. tjctf^loffen, shut,
locked up ; closed.
tJCrf^nttt^Ctt, tr. disdain, despise.
tjcrf^otten, see tJcrft^aHcn.
DCrfrfloncn, tr. spare, exempt.
tJCrfc^tainiien, 0. intr, \. vanish,
disappear.
tCrfcl^tClt, tr. wound, hurt.
Derfc^cn, tr. misplace ; displace,
transfer, put (into a state or
condition).
t^tx[oi^Xitn,tr. reconcile, propitiate;
expiate, atone for.
JBcrfo^nung, /. -gen. reconcilia-
tion, expiation.
Iierfliret^cn, 0. tr. promise, as
noun, promise.
95cr|^reiung, /• -gen. promise.
HOerDanH, m. -beg. understand-
ing, intelligence, intellect.
llCrfidntJig, adj. {or adv.) under-
standing, reasonable, judicious.
tietfleifen, tr. hide, conceal.
tietfielien, 0. tr. understand, reflex,
(impers.) understand itself, be a
matter of course, {with ttUf)
understand, know well.
Ucrflettcn, tr. displace, reflex, dis-
semble. Derftellt feigned ;
sham.
tterjlorctt, tr. disturb, trouble,
derange.
ticrjitcij^en, 0. tr. spread over.
iriir. f. glide away, elapse.
UCrfUt^cn, tr. attempt, try, en-
deavor.
ticrtttttft^cn, tr. exchange, barter;
mistake, confound.
ticrt^eibigcn Nciiitgcn], tr. de-
fend, vindicate.
tJCrticfcn, tr. deepen, reflex, be
lost or absorbed. bCtticft, deeply
engaged, lost, absorbed.
^crtrttgli^f eit, /. tolerance.
tJerttttUen, tr. entrust, confide.
intr. {with dat.) trust to, confide.
Hertraut, trusted, trusty, fami-
liar, intimate. ^txtxautn, n.
trust, confidence.
tiertreibcn, 0. tr. drive away, ex-
pel, exile.
titVtoan1itln,tr. change, transform,
convert.
JBcrtUttttiltft^ttft, /. -ten. relation-
ship, kin. collectively, relations,
kindred.
tJCrhlCt^fcItt, tr. exchange; con-
found.
UcrtDCrfen, 0. tr. throw away, re-
ject, repudiate.
^crtuirrung, /. -gen. complica-
tion, confusion.
ticrtnorren, old pple. entangled,
confused.
!55cr3ci^ni§ [mB], n. -ffeg, -ffe.
note, list.
bcrjcifteit, 0. tr. forgive, pardon.
iKcrjCi^ung, /. pardon, forgive-
ness,
ticrjtticifcln, intr. despair.
^Uerjtoeiflung, /. despair, dec-
peration.
^Better, m. -r8, -rn. male
cousin.
\S\t\, adj. {or adv.) much, many.
siJCUtig, adj. ambiguous, sfad^,
adj. manifold, various, sj^riitl,
adj. very green, slci^t, adv or
conj. perhaps, maybe, smttf, adj.
many times, smc^r, adv. much
more, rather, sooner.
tJier, num. four, sjcl^lt, fourteen.
JBicrtel, n. -t§, -t quarter.
SBogel, m. -U, -oget. bird.
UBiiglein, n. -n8, -n. little bird.
^O^ip m. -m, -ogte. governor,
prefect, etc.
Jgolf, n. -!eg, -i3I!er. people, nation.
VOCABULAET.
439
sing, used collectively, folks,
people.
f&OlUxVtfilt, n. right of nations, in-
ternational law.
* tioff, adj. (or adv.) full, filled ;
complete, whole, entire, seple
or insep'le prefix, full.
HoQenben, tr. bring to a close,
end, complete, finish. tJOttctt?
bet, completed, finished, per-
fect.
t\otii^,adj. {or adv.) full, complete,
entire.
tioUtommtn,adj. {or adv.) perfect,
complete.
tiOtifimtiQ,adj. {or adv.) complete,
entire, total.
Hon, prep, {with dat.) from, of,
among, by, with ; concerning,
about, by ; on, upon. — fe(6ft,
of itself.
Iior, adv. and seple prefix, before ;
formerly, prep, {with dat. or
accus.) before (in place or in
time), in front of, ere ; in sight
of ; for, on account of ; from,
against, more than, above, of
time, ago: e. g. Jjot cincm ^tt^rc,
a year ago.
tlOtbei, adv. and sep'le prefix, along
by, past; past and gone, over,
done with, t^tfittl, 0. intr. \. go
past, pass by.
JKortlCrftttUS, n. front part of the
house.
UOrfoftrcn, 0. intr. \. go or drive
before or in front, drive up.
IKorgcma^, n. -c^g, -ad^er. ante-
chamber.
SDorgcf^it^tc, /. previous or ante-
cedent history.
Uorgcficrn, adv. day before yester-
day.
Hor^a^en, {irreg.) tr. have before
one or in view, intend,
t\OVfitX, adv. and sep'le prefix, be-
forehand, before, previously.
dorig, adj. former, preceding,
last.
iJOrlcfcn, 0. tr. read before or for
any one, read aloud ; lecture.
^ormtttag, m. forenoon. [dian.
liSormunD, m. -beg, -iiiiber. guar-
Dorne^nten, 0. tr. set before one's
self ; intend, propose ; under-
take.
9)orf(^Cttt, m. -Its* coming to light,
appearance, gum — foiumcn,
come to light, appear.
ajorf^tttj, m. -gg, -age. offer,
proposal.
iJOrfc^cn, tr. prefix ; set over,
ai)point; put before (one's self)
as an object, propose, intend.
tlOtftngCtt, 0. tr. or intr. sing before
or for one {dat.), sing aloud.
ttOtjietten, tr. put before; intro-
duce, present ; personate, re-
present ; plead, {with refiex. dat. )
put before one's mind, imagine,
fancy.
95ort^cil [stcil], m. -U, -le. advan-
tage, profit.
tlOru6cr, adv. and sep'le prefix. .
across before or in front, along
by, past ; over, finished, done.
sffiel^cn, 0. intr. \. fly past, rush
past.
DOtttiatt0, adv. forward, on, in
advance, ffttcbett, i'dr. strive
onward or forward.
tottt^, adj. {or adv.) awake.
ttia^en, intr. wake, be awake;
watch.
til tt^ fen, 0. intr. I wax, grow,
increase.
ttiader, adj. {or adv. ) gallant, brave,
clever.
SBaffe,/, -fen. weapon.
440
GERMAN-ENGUSH
ttmgett, tr. hazard, risk, dare.
SBttgen, m. -ng, -n or -agett.
wagon, carriage ; car.
SBal^l/ /• -len. choice, selection,
election.
tDfi^klt, tr. choose, select, elect.
tua^nen, tr. believe erroneously,
be mistaken in believing ; fancy,
imagine.
tOd^X, adj. (or adv.) true, real.
to'df^Vtn'ii, prep, {with gen.) during.
conj. while, whilst.
SBttftr^cit,/. -ten. truth.
SBa(t), m. -beS, -dtber. forest, wood.
sl^utct, tn. forester.
SSttni),/. -anbe. wall.
tUttnJlCln, irdr. \ or 1^. go, walk,
proceed.
tnanbern, intr. f or If, wander,
rove ; travel.
SSanberer, m. -r§, -r. wanderer,
traveller.
SBonbcrgmann, m. wanderer,
traveller (on foot).
toanitn,intr.]orl). stagger, totter,
waver, flinch.
toantt, odv. (interrog.) when? at
what time ?
conj. when ; at what time.
to arm, adj. (or adv.) warm.
SBttritttng, /. -gen. warning,
caution.
tOavUn, irdr. wait, stay, await ;
(with -ouf) wait for, await ; wait
on, serve.
to arum, adv. (or conj.) for or on
account of what or which, why,
wherefore.
toaB, pron. interrog. or relat. what,
that which ; whatever ; why,
for what, /or cttOttg, something,
somewhat ; how. — fiir, what
sort of, what kind of. — aut^,
— immer, — nut, whatever.
see 175-6, 179.
SSttffcr, n. -x9, -r. water.
tOC^fcln, tr. or intr. change, ex-
change.
toetfen, tr. wake up, wake, arouse.
tociJer, conj. neither (withfoUmmn^
no^, nor).
1. 9Scg, m. -ge§, -ge. way, path,
road, route ; mode, manner,
means.
2. tlAt^,adv. and sep'le prefix, away,
off; gone, interjec. be gone,
away, snc^mcit, 0. tr. take
away, stoerfcit, 0. tr. throw
away.
toegen, prep, (with gen.) on account
of, because of, for.
1. tOCl^, adj. (or adv.) sad, painful.
2. aSc^, n. -f)e8, -^ -I)e or -f)en.
woe, pain, distress, grief. — t|un,
(withdat.) give pain to, distress.
SBcifi, n. -be^, -ber. woman, wife.
toei^en, 0. intr. f. give way, lose
ground, flinch, yield ; (with dot.)
yield to, turn out for.
toeitien, intr. pasture, feed.
Xon%txn,tr. refuse, deny, object to.
SBct^nat^t, /. gen'lly in pi. sfctt,
Christmas.
tocil, conj. because, since, as.
SBetn, rn. -ne§, -ne. wine.
toettten, intr. weep, cry.
toetneritt^, adj. (or adv.) incUned
to weeping, whining.
tOCife, adj. (or adv.) wise, sage,
prudent, as noun^ wise man,
sage.
SSetSl^eit /. wisdom, knowledge.
tOCife, adj. (or adv.) white.
tOCit, adj. (or adv.) wide, broad,
large, far, far off, distant.
tOCitcr, adv. farther, further;
besides.
toe(c^, interrog. or relat. adj. or
pron. which, what, that, indef.
pron. some, any.
VOCABULAKY.
441
fl&tUc, f. -ten. wave, billow.
JBcIt, /. -ten. world, earth, uni-
verse, society, ^bc^tuinger, rn.
conqueror of the world, slauf,
m. course of the world. stcgiCs
rcnU, cidj' world-governing.
stDCife, ctdj. philosophic, as
noun, philosopher.
tneniieit, {reg. or irreg.) tr. turn,
turn about, direct, apply.
toenig, ci^dj. {or adv.) little, not
much; few, not many, ein — ,
a little, a bit.
tOCnig|iten0, adv. at least, at any
rate.
toeitn, conj. when ; usually, if, in
case. $Q(ett^, although.
tOtV, pron. interrog. or rdat. who,
he who, whoever. — ttUt^,
— nur, whoever, see 173, 179.
toetticn, 0. intr. f. become, come
to be, grow, as auxiliary, see
240.2,4, 275-77. — ^n, {with
dot.) turn to, become, etttem — ,
fall to one's share, be given to
one. impers. with pred. adj. begin
to be or feel.
toerfen, 0. tr. throw.
SBcrf, ri. -fe8, -fe. work, deed,
production.
teicrt^ [tticrt], adj. {or adv.) with
gen. (of) or dnt. (to) worthy,
worth; dear, beloved, deserving.
SBert^ [ttJcrt], m. -i\)t^, -t^e.
worth, value, price.
SScfcn,n. -n8,-n. being, existence;
creature, living thing.
SBcflcntttfd^C, /. vest-pocket.
3Better, n. -r§, -r. weather ; storm.
tnidltig, adj. {or adv.) weighty, im-
portant.
SBic^tigfcit, /. -ten. importance,
consequence.
toiffeltt, tr. wrap up, roll, envelop.
toitier^ odv. and sep'le w insep'le \
prefix, against, gain -, with -;
prep, {with accus.) against, con-
trary.
toitierfe^en, reflex, {with dot.) {in-
sepHe) set one's self against, op-
pose, resist, tr. {seple) seat one's
self again.
tQttierfle^en, 0. intr. {with dot.)
withstand, resist, oppose.
mibctflteben, intr. {with dot.) strive
or struggle against, oppose, re-
sist, be reluctant.
tuibmen^ tr. dedicate, devote, re-
flex, devote one's self.
tUtlirtg, adj. {or adv.) contrary;
repugnant, offensive, odious ;
cross.
luie, adv. {interrog.) how? in what
way? in what degree or measure?
how!
conj. {relat.) how, efc. ; of man-
ner and degree, as, like as, like ;
such as, as if; of time, as, when.
— Ottli^, — nur, however, how-
soever.
tuiciict, adv. and sep'le or inseple
prefix, again, anew, once more.
totCbcrbrtngcn, {irreg.) tr. bring
back or again, restore.
ttitebergeben, 0. tr. give back,
restore.
tOietter^Olen, tr. {sep'le) bring or
fetch back, {insep'le) say again,
repeat.
tutetierfe^ren, intr. f. turn back,
return.
toiclJCrfommcn, 0. intr, f. come
back again, return.
tuietierfe^en, 0. tr. see or meet
again, as noun, meeting again.
out — , till we meet again I
au revoir.
tUtetierum, adv. over again, again,
SSicge, /. -gen. cradle.
toiegcn, 0. tr, weigh ; lift
442
GERMAN-ENGLISH
SBtcn, n. -ttS. Vienna.
SBtefe, /. -en. meadow, pasture.
toiltl, adj. (or adv.) wild, fierce,
savage, unruly.
SBiKc or SBittcn, m. -n§, -n. will, in-
tent, design, purpose, um ....
tOttten, (with gen.) for the sake
of, on account of.
toittfommen, adj. (or adv.) wel-
come.
aBiitli, m. -beg, -be. wind, sfilats
tctlt, pi' cMcken-pox.
SStnilung, /. -gen. winding, coil.
SBinfel, m. -Ig, -I. comer, angle,
nook,
SBinter, m. -r§, -r. winter.
tnir, nom. pi. of i^. we.
toirfcn, tr. work, produce, do,
perform, operate.
iQtrfH^, adj. (or adv.) actual, real.
SBirtft mixt], m. -i\)t%, -t^e. host,
landlord.
miff en, (irreg.) tr. know, be aware
of; loith injin. know how. as
noun, knowledge, learning.
SBiffenft^ttft, /. -ten. knowledge ;
science.
SBttttiicr mittotv], m. -r8, -r.
widower.
mo adv. (interrog.) where? in what
place? conj. (relat.) where ; in
which, at which, on which, etc.
of time, at which (time), when.
(for too compounded with prep's,
instead of lottg, tucr, etc. see
173.2, 180.) s^cn (^v. (inter-
rog.) or conj. (rdat.) whence,
from whence, sl^ilt, adv. or
conj. whither, what way. sju,
adv. or conj. whereto, to what
purpose.
SBo^e, /. -d^en. week.
SBoge, /. -gen. wave, billow.
1. toOl||(, adv. well, in good manner
or degree ; ojiien used to make a
statement less definite, indeed,
perhaps, probably, I presume.
etc. mir ifl — , I feel well. Uhtn
(Sic — , farewell, sbefanitt, adj.
well known, st^ttt,/. good deed,
kindness, benefit.
2. S8o^(, n. -te«. weal, welfare, ad-
vantage.
tOOl^nen, intr. dwell, live, reside.
SBo^nort, m. dwelling place.
SBoinuitg, /. -gen. dweUing, lodg-
ing, residence, house.
SBoIf, m. -feg, -olfe. wolf.
SBolfc, /. -en. cloud. •
tDOtten, (irreg.) tr. will, be willing;
intend, desire, wish ; be on the
point, be about ; claim, assert.
see, 251, 258, 259.
aSonne, /. -en. joy, pleasure,
bUss, rapture.
toots, same as tOO.
UBort, n. -teg, -te or -orter. word,
term ; expression, speech.
tounti, adj. (or adv.) wounded,
sore, hurt.
SSl^untie, /• -ben. wound, hurt.
aSunbcr, n. -rg, -r. wonder,
miracle.
iOUnt)Crbttr, adj. (or adv.) wonder-
ful, miraculous.
tuuntierit, reflex, wonder, be aston-
ished or amazed.
SSuttfi^, m. -fc^eS, -itnfd^e. wish,
desire.
tniinf^cn, tr. wish, desire, long.
SBiirilC, /. -en. worth; dignity,
high rank or office.
ttluriJig, adj. (or adv.) worthy,
deserving.
SBiirjc, /. -en. spice.
SS^irjcI, /. -In. root.
Xtnit, /. -ten. xenium (name
given to satyrical epigrams by
Goethe und Schiller),
VOCABULABY.
443
S(i% f' -Ifctt* number ; figure.
ja^Icn, tr. tell out; pay off.
ja^ten, tr. tell over, count, number.
3ft^n, m. -neg, -at)ue. tooth.
Jtttt, «d/. (or adu.) tender, soft,
delicate ; slender, frail.
^ttrtl^cit, /• tenderness, softness.
jcirtli^, cidj- {<yr adv.) tender, fond.
SaviiWtiU /• tenderness, fond-
ness.
jaubetn, intr. delay, linger, hesitate.
ge^tt, num. ten.
Sti^tn, n. -n«, -It. token, sign,
mark ; signal ; miracle, wonder.
^ti^tn,tr. show, point out; dis-
play, reflex, show one's self,
appear.
3ei(e, /. -ten. line, row.
^tii, /. -ten. time, season.
gcitung, /. -gen. tidings, news ;
newspaper.
Stli, n. -teS, -tc. tent.
gets insep'le prefix, see 307.7.
gCtfitC^cn, 0. intr f. or tr. break
asunder or in pieces, shatter.
jerfatten, 0. intr. \. fall to pieces,
crumble, become ruined ; fall
out.' jcrf alien, p'ple, decayed,
ruinous ; not on good terms, at
variance.
jerfc^cn, tr. tear, mangle.
jetrctftcn, 0. tr. tear in pieces,
rend asunder, intr. f. be torn
asunder.
jerfloren, tr. destroy, ruin, demol-
ish.
gerflrcuttng, /. -en. scattering;
diversion, amusement; absence
of mind.
Jtel^en, 0. tr. draw, pull ; attract ;
extract, obtain, bring ; bring up.
reflex, draw or move slowly,
march ; stretch, extend, intr. f.
proceed, move; march, go on
an expedition.
3icl, n. -\%, -le. end, limit ; goal,
aim, object.
jicmcn, intr. (with dat,) beseem,
become, suit, be fitting for.
Jtemltt^, cidj. {or adv.) suitable,
proper; moderate, tolerable.
jictcn, tr. adorn, ornament.
dimmer, n. -r«, -r. room, aparte-
ment.
3inn, n. -nneg. tin. sfolbttt, w.
tin-soldier.
Jtttetn, intr. tremble, quake.
^orn, ni. -ne^. anger, wrath.
jornig, adj. {or adv.) angry.
jU, adv. and sep'le prefix, to;
together, closed ; with adj. or
adv. too, overmuch, in excess.
prep, {with dat.) to, unto ; in
addition to, besides ; at, in, by;
in order to, for ; on, in ; with
preceding, dat., toward, as sign
ofinfin., to, in order to.
jukrcitcn, tr. prepare, make
ready.
jubringen, {irreg.) tr. with accus.
and dat. bring to, offer, present;
with accus. only, pass (time),
spend.
3utf)t, /. -ten. training, dis-
cipline.
jUcfen, intr. \) or \. move with a
quick motion, throb, quiver,
flash, tr. shrink, shrug.
Surfer, m. -rg, -r. sugar, stuett
n. sweetmeats, confectionary,
candy.
JUCrfl, adv. at first.
jufa^ren, 0. intr. f. {wUhdat.) dniye
or ride to, come in, approach.
3Ufluflern, tr. whisper.
jufriebcn, adj. {or adv.) at peace,
content, pleased.
Sug, m. -geg, -iige. drawing, pull;
impulse ; draught, breath ; ex-
pedition,
4M
GERMIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
JupngTi^, adj, (or adv.) access-
ible, affable.
gugeften, 0. intr. [. {with dat) go
to, approach ; go on, proceed,
happen, come to pass.
3U0CI^ ''^- "^^r ~f' rein, bridle.
gUglctt^, ddv. at the same time.
JUgreifen, 0. Mr. {with dot.) take
hold of, seize ; lay hold, fall to.
^Ufunft, /. time to come, future.
juma^cn, tr. make to, shut,
fasten.
gunge, /. -gen. tongue; language,
speech.
JUtetien, intr. {with dat.) address;
exhort, urge ; try to console or
pacify.
3tttU(f , adv. and sep'le prefix, back-
ward, back ; behindhand, in the
rear.
JuriilfblciBcn, 0. intr. f. remain
behind.
jururfgetdittttcn, 0. tr. win back
again.
JUritdfe^rCtt, intr. f. turn back,
return.
glttitrffommcn, 0. irdr. \. come
back, return.
JUriirff^irfcn, tr. send back.
JUritrffein, 0. intr. \. be behind
hand or back.
§ttrttrfllCrtttngett, tr. demand back.
juriirftocifcn, 0. tr. send back, re-
ject.
JUriirfjic^en, 0. tr. draw back,
withdraw, reflex, move back,
retreat, withdraw.
JUfammen, adv. and sep'le prefix.
together, in company, jointly.
jufammenf^mcljcn, 0. intr. f.
melt together, run together,
dwindle away.
jttfammcnjiurjcit, intr. f. tumble
together, collapse, fall in.
JUtrauen, tr. {with dat.) entrust to,
confide in. as noun, trust, con-
fidence.
jUDOr, adv. before, formerly.
JUtQCKeit, adv. at times, occasion-
ally.
gtUttng, m. -geS, -dnge. compul-
sion, coercion, force.
Jttlttnjig, num. twenty.
Jtuat, adv. or conj. to be sure, in-
deed.
gtoerf, m. -cfe§, -(fe. aim, end,
design, purpose.
jhiei, num. two. smaU, twice.
}ttietfetto0, adj. {or adv.) doubt-
less.
JtOCifcIn, intr. doubt.
gtUCig, rn. -ge«, -ge. twig, branch
Jtllingen, 0. tr. force, compel
3tt)0(f, num. twelve.
n. ENGLISH-GERMAN YOCABULART.
a, an, indef. art. ein, einc.
able, adj. fal)ig.
able ! to be — , !onueu (irreg.): see
254.
about, prep, urn (accus.), iilicr (ac-
cus. or dat). adv. ^erum, uinl^er;
ungefal)v. round aboat, urn ....
l)erum.
above, adv. obcn. prep. lUcr.
abstain, Mr. fid) cutI)aUcu 0.
(from, (?af.).
accept, <r. ainic^nteii 0. tr.
accompany, tr. licfllciteu.
accordingly, adv. nlfo.
account: on — of, prep. tDcgcn
(gen.), \)0V.
accuse-, tr. auftngcn (of, gen.).
accustom, tr. gcuio()ncn (to, an).
accustomed, adj. getuoljiit {govern-
imj accufi. with fciii).
acquainted: be — with, fcuucu
(irreg.) tr. become — with, ten-
ncn tcrncn.
acre, 9l(!er, m. -v^, 9tccfcr.
act : — as if, t^nn nt« 0.
activity, 3:i)Qtigfcit, /.
admire, tr. bcnjnnbcvn,
advantage, ^^ovtl)eiI
-% -Ic.
advice, Stot^ [^at],
-atl)e.
advise, tr. ratten [rotcn] 0. Mr.
(dat.).
aflkir, <Ba^e, f. -d)tn ; @e|d^aft, n.
-t«, -tc.
m.
afraid : be — , fid) filrd^ten (of,
nor).
after, prep, nad} (dat). one ....
another, nad)cinanbci:. adv. and
conj. nad)bem.
afternoon, 9?ad)nnttag, m. -gs,
-ge.
afterwards, adv. no(^^er, baronf,
barnad).
again, adv. tuieber, nod^ einniat.
come — , mieberfommen 0.
Mr. \.
age, ?ntcr, n. -r8, -r.
alas, m<er;. iuel)! 0.6) \
alive, ad>. Icbcnbig.
all, adj. all (see 193), gan;;.
allow, tr. erlanben. Mr. (daf.)taffcn
0. be — ed, biirfcn : see 253.
alone, adj. or adv. allein. all — ,
gan,^ allein.
along, prep, enttang (grew.).
already, adr. jd)on, bereit«.
also, adv. and), nod).
altliough, conj. obglcic^, obfc^on.
always, adv. innner, ftet^.
America, 'iltnicvifa, n. -a«.
American, "Jlincvitaner, m. -v«,-v ;
5lmerifanerin, /. -innen.
American, adj. anieritanifd).
among, prep, nnter {dat. or accus.).
amuse, tr. aniiifiven. be - d, fid)
amiifircn.
amusement, 3Seignugen,n. -n«,-n,
amusing, adj. aniiifant.
an, see su
446
ENGLiSH-GimMAN
and, conj. unb.
angry, adj. gornig,
animal, 3:1) ier [Xkx], n. -re«,
-re.
another, adj. ein anber, nod^ ein :
see 198.30.
answer, tr. and intr. ontworten
(dat).
answer, 5tnttt)ort, /. -ten.
antechamber, 3Sorgemac^, n. -d^e«,
-dc^er.
any, ady. irgenb ein. not—, !ein:
see 195.2. — one, 3ebei% 3eber-
mann. — thing, dtwa^, ma^,
oUeg. not — thing, 9^i(f)tg.
appear, intr. erfc^einen 0., Qug=
jel)en 0., fcl)einen 0.
apearance, 5tnfel^en, n. -n§, -n.
apple, 5lpfet, m. -Is, ^lepfel.
April, ?rpril, m. -I8.
arm, 3(rm, m. -meg, -nte. -chair,
?e^nftu^I, m.
army, §eer, n. -reg, -re.
aroond, prep, um (accws.), um . . .
^eriint.
arrive, intr. anfommen 0. f.
art, ,(?un[t, /. -iinfte. -school,
^unftfd^ule,/.
artist, ^iinftler, m. -rg, -r.
as, ad \ ot^, tt)ie ; fo. as if, atg ob.
as soon as, fobatb.
ashamed : be — , ftd) fd)Qmen.
ask, fr. frag en. — after, fid) er=
funbigen na6).
asleep, adv. im ©c^fafe. be — ,
|ci)(afen.
assemble, tr. tierfammefn, jam=
ntetn. intr. ftd) tterfammetn.
at, prep, an, ^u, bei, um. — home,
in §aufe. — twelve o'clock, nm
gttjolf Uf)r. — an end, ^,u Gnbe.
— all, ganj unb gar. not — all,
gar nid)t. — least, menigfteng.
Angnst, Stnguft, m. -tS.
aunt, 2:antc, /. -ten.
anthor, 5>crfaffer, m. -r«, -t*
antnnin, iperbft, m. -teS, -tc.
avenge, tr. rcic^en.
await, tr. ermarten, marten auf.
awake, tr. mecfen. intr. trwadjcn,
aufmaci^en.
away, adj. meg, fort, be — , fort
fein.
back, adj. l^inter. adv. gururf;
riicfmarts.
bad, adj. {adv. -ly) fd^Ied^t, boje.
— fortune, Ungliicf, n.
bag, ^^eutel, n. -l^, -I
bake, tr. bacfen 0., bratenO.
baptize, tr. taufen.
bar-room, ©c^enfftube, /. -ben.
be, intr. fein 0. \., merbcn 0. \.,
bleiben, 0. f. be (as to health),
fid} befinben 0. there are, etc.
eg gib t, etc.
bear, tr. iragen 0., ertragen 0.
beautiful, adj. {adv. -ly) fc^on.
beauty, ®i1)bn^eit,/. -ten.
because, conj. meit.
become, intr. merben 0. f.
bed, ^ett, n. -tteg, -tte or -tten.
to -, ^u «ette, ing S3ett.
beer, ^ier, n. -reg, -re.
before, prep, ijor {accus.or dat.).
conj. beoor, e^e. adv. t>orber.
beg, tr. bitten 0., betteln. go beg-
ging, bettetn ge'^en.
begin, intr. anfangen 0.
t^eginning, 5lnfang, m. -gg, -ange.
behind, prep. Winter {accus. or
dat.).
behold, tr. erbticfen.
belief, ©laube, m. -eng, -en.
believe, tr. gtanben.
belong, intr. ge^oren, ange^orcn
(to, dat.).
bench, 33an!, /. -an!e.
beseem, impers. jiemen {dat), fid)
giemen.
VOCABULAKY.
U7
beside, prq). ncoen (accus. or dat).
adv. and}.
best, adj. (or adv.) be ft
betake one's self, ftd^ begeben 0.
betrayer, ^erriitljer [4er], m. -rg,
-r.
better, adj. (or adv.) beffer,
better, tr. Derbcffern.
bid, tr. I)eit3eu 0., befet)ten 0. (dat).
bi?, o,dj. grof3, birf, t)od^.
bind, tr. binben 0.
bird, 5>oge(, m. -tg, -oget. little — ,
5>ogIeiu, n. -tt§, -n.
birthday, ©eburt^tag, m.
bit, ©tiicf, n, -(fg, -cfe ; 33igc^cn, n.
-xi9, -n.
bite, <r. bei^en 0.
bitter, ad/, (odu. -ly) bitter, grim=
mig.
blaek, adj, fc^iuarg,
blame, tr. tabetn»
bless, tr. fegnen.
blood, ^lut, n. -teS.
blossom, 53(utt)e [i8(ute], /. -tfjen.
blue, adj. hlau.
book, ^nd),n. -d)e8, -iid^er.
bom, geboren.
both, adj. beibe, atle beibe.
bottle, §Iafcf)e, /. -fdjen.
boy, ^uabe, m. -en, -en.
braye, adj. (adv. -ly) tapfer.
bread, 33vob, w. -beg.
break, tr. bred) en 0. intr. t)tV'
bred)en, 3erbred)en 0. — open,
erbrec^en 0.
breakfast, griif)ftu(f, n. -dg, -de.
breakfast, intr. frut)ftuden.
bribe, tr. beftec^en 0.
bridge, 53rude, /. -den.
bright, adj. l)eU.
bring, tr. bringen (irreg.). — back,
tDicberbringen 0., njieber^olen.
broad, adj. breit.
brook, 53ad), m. -d^eg, -M)e;
©riinntein, n. -n8, -n.
brother, 35rnber, m. -r«, -ilber.
building, ©ebdube, n. -beg, -be.
bnm, /r. brennen (irreg.). Mr. Der*
brennen (irreg.).
business, @cfd)dft, n. -t§, -te,
busy, adj. bcfc^aftigt. be — or
busied, fid) bejdiaftigen.
but, conj. ober, fonbern, atlein, boc^.
nothing — , nid)tg atg.
buy, tr. fanfen.
by, prep, bei, neben. a/^er passive,
bnrc^, tjor. longer — three feet,
nm brei gu^ Idnger, etc.
call, <r. rnfcn 0., nennen (irreg.),
tiei^en 0. — away, abrufen. be
called, l)ei§cn.
camp, Imager, n. -rg, -r.
can, (irreg.) fijnnen : see 254.
carpet, Sapete, /. -ten.
carriage, Sag en, m. -ng, -agcn or
-n.
carry, tr. tragen 0.
cast down, <r. ftiirjen.
castle, Bd)io^, n. -ffeg, -offer.
cathedral, S)om, m. -meg, -me.
catch, tr. fan gen 0. — cold, \\6)
erfditen.
cause, mir*. laffen : see 343.1. 56, d.
cease, intr. anfpren.
certainly, ad>\ getui^.
change, tr. dnbern, tierdnbern. intr.
fid) uerdnbern.
charitable, adj. borm^er^^ig.
charity, 53armt)er5igfeit,/. / Sobl^
tt)dtigfeit, /.
Charles, ^arl, m. -Ig.
charming, a^j. (adv. -ly) rcigcnb,
ollerliebft.
chat, intr. ^tonbern.
cheap, adj. bitlig.
cherish, tr. fc^dljen.
child, ^inb, n. -beg, ~ber.
chilly : be — , froftein, impers. vMh
448
ENGLISH-aERMAN
choose, tr. voa\)len.
Christian, Sfirift, m. -ten, -ten;
(5l)ri[tin, /. -innen.
church, ^ird)c, /. -cf)eiu
city, @tabt, /. -abte.
claim, make — to, ttjotten: see
258.
clever, adj. flug.
climb, tr. fteigen 0., ^inauf*
fteigen.
cloister, ttofter, n. -r8, -oflcr.
clothes, clothing, tieibcr, pL
cloud, 2Bo(fe,/. -fen,
coachman, tntjc^er, m. -r8, -r.
coat, 9Jo(f, m. -deg, -ocfe.
coffee, taffee, m. -eeg.
cold, acZ/. {adv. -\j) iaU. catch — ,
fic^ erfdlten.
Cologne (the city), ^otn, n. -n8.
colored, adj. bunt.
come, intr. fommen 0. j. — back,
juriidfommen, guriicffeliren. —
forth, ^ert>or!ommen. —to one's
help, einem ju C^utfe fommen.
— out, l)inau§fommen.
comfort, tr. troften.
command, tr. ^eigen, befeljien {dat.)
0., gebieten {dat.) 0.
command, S3efe^(, m. -U, -le.
commit, tr. bege^cn 0.
communicate, tr. mitt^eiten [4ei*
ten] (to, daf.).
companion, ©efa^rte, m. -en.
company, ©efeUfd^aft, /. -ten.
complain, intr. flag en.
complete, tr. tJoUenben.
complete, adj. {adv. -ly) tooEig,
tiollenbet.
comrade, tomerab, m. -ben, -ben ;
©efett, m. -en, -en.
concern one's self, ft(^ befiimmern.
concerning, prep, ntegen {gen.).
condemn, tr. Derbammen.
confidence, SSertrouen, n. -n§.
conquer, tr. erobcrn.
consider, tr. betraci^ten. — as, IjaU
ten fiir 0.
console, tr. troften.
contain, tr. ent{)atten 0.
contemplate, tr. betrac^ten.
content, adj. gufrieben.
content one's self, fid^ begnitgen.
cook, tr. tod) en.
cool, adj. {adv. -ly) fii^I.
copy, tr. abfci^reiben 0.
corner, @de, /. -den.
cost, tr. foften.
costly, adj. foftUc^, foftbar.
count (earl), @raf, m. -fen, -fen.
countess, ©rafin, /. -innen.
country, ?anb, n. -be§, -cinber.
natiye — , 25aterlanb, n.
couple, ^aar, n. -reg, -re.
courage, 9JJutt) [3}?nt], m. -t^e§;
Xa^ferfeit, /.
cousin, 35etter, m. -r§, -rn ; ^ou--
fine,/, -nen.
coward, geigting, m. -g§, -ge.
create, fc^offen 0.
crime, SSerbrec^en, n. -ng, -n.
criminal, SSerbrec^er, m. -r^, -r.
crowd, ©ebrange, n. -eg, -e;
3}?enge, /. -gen; ©d^aar, /.
-ren.
crown, ^rone, /. -nen.
cup, Xaffe, /. -ffen ; ^ed^er, m.
-rg, -r.
curse, tr. flrn^en intr. {with dat. m-
auf).
cut, tr. fc^neiben 0. — off, ah'
j(|lagen 0., abfc^neiben 0.
dance, intr. tonjen.
danger, @efat)r, /. -ren.
dangerous, adj. gefci^rlid^.
dare, intr. \x6) ttjagen ; biirfen : see
253.
dark, adj. bnnfel.
daughter, 2;od^ter, /. -od)ter.
day, 2;ag, m. -geg, -ge.
VOCABULAEY.
449
dead, adj. tobt [tot].
dear, adj, \\t^, wert^ [n)ert], t^euer
[teuer].
death, iob, m. -beg, -be.
debate, infr. bebattieren, ^x6) \ixtU
ten 0.
deceiye, tr. betriigen 0.
December, S)eceTnber, m. -r8.
declare, <r. erfldren.
deed, %\)ai, f. -ten.
delight : it delights me, e8 freut
deep, ac?;. tief.
deliyer, tr. abUefern.
demand, tr. tierlangen.
deny, tr. tjerfagen.
descend, tr. {or intr.) !^erab= or ]^in=
unter^fteigen 0.
describe, tr. befc^reiben 0.
description, 33e|c^reibung, /.
-gen.
desert, tr. oerloffen 0.
deserre, tr. tjerbienen. -ing, ber^
bient.
devote one's self, ftd) tDibmen.
die, intr. fterben 0. |.
difficult, adj. f(f)tt)er.
diligent, adj. (adv. -ly) ftei^ig.
dinner, 3}fittagge[fen, n. -n^, -n.
direct, adj. (adv. ,-ly) birect,
geraben 3Beg§.
disappear, intr. »erfc!^tt)inben 0.
discovery, (Srfinbnng, /. -gen;
(Sntbecfung, /. -gen.
distant, adj. entfernt, fern, lueit.
divine, adj. gottlic^.
do, tr. (or intr.) t{)nn 0., ma6)cn.
— without, entbe^ven. how —
you —1 njie gef)t c% 3l)nen?
doctor, %vit, m. -te«, Heqte;
2)octor, m. -r§, -ren.
dog, ^nnb, m. -beS, -be.
door, X()ur,/. -ren.
down, adv. ^ernnter, ^inunter,
^erab, ^inab : see 362.3, 379.1.
draw near, intr. fi6) ndljtvn (to,
dat.).
dream, Xxanm, m. -meg, -dnme,
dream, intr. {or tr.) trannten.
dress, ^leib, n. -beg, -ber.
dress, tr. !(eiben. intr. fid) an^
jjie^en 0.
drink, tr. trinfen 0.
drive, tr. {or mir.) fal)ren 0., fii'^^
ren. — (for pleasure), fpa^ieren
fa^ren. — by or past, Dorbet
fa^ren (an). — out, tr. tierjagen.
— up, t)orfal)ren.
duke, ^er^og, m. -geg, -ge or
-oge.
during, prep, tcd^renb {gen,),
duty, ''WW, /. -ten.
dwell, intr. n)o()nen.
dwelling, 2So()nnng, /. -geiu
each, pron. adj. jeber, ein ieber. —
one, jeber : see 190. — other,
einanber ; fid), nng, etc. : see
155.4.
eager, adj. {adv. -ly) eifrig.
ear, O^x, n. -reg, -ren. -ring,
Ol^rring, m.
early, adj. frii^.
earn, tr. geratnnen 0.
earnestness, (Srnft, m. -fteg.
earth, ©rbe, /. -ben.
easy, adj. {adv. -ly) Ieic!^t.
eat, tr. e[fen 0., fpeifen irdr.
education, (Srjiet^ung, /.
either, conj. meber, enttt)eber.
either . . . . or . . ., entmeber . . .
ober . . .
emperor, ^aifer, m. -rg, -r.
employment, 53ef(^dftignng, /.
-gen.
empty, adj. h\it, (eer.
end, (Snbe, n. -eg, -n. at an — , ^n
(Snbe.
endeavor, intr. f\6) beftreben, t3er=
[idjen.
450
ENGLISH-GERMAN
endeavor, 53eftreben, n. -nS.
enemy, geinb, m. -be«, -be*
England, ©ngtanb, n. -b8.
EngUsh, adj. englifd^.
Englishman, (Suglcinber, m. -r8,
-r.
enjoy, <r. \\6) freuen (gen.), ge*
itie^en 0. (gen.), fro^ werben
(gen.).
enough, adv. germg.
entice, in loden, antocfen.
entire, adj. gan^. {adv. -ly) ganj
unb gar, uoUig.
especially, adv. befonberS.
estate, @ut, n. -teg, -iiter; :2anb=
gut, n.
eternal, ad/, (adu. -ly) ett)ig.
eyen, adu. felbft, aucf). — if, felbft
njenn, ouc^ iDenn, obg(eid).
evening, 2tbenb, m. -b§, -be.
every, jebeu (190). every one, eiu
jeber, alle, aU^^ (193.3), 3eber»
mann (187). everything, olles
(193). everywhere, adv.
liberalt.
evil, a^i. bo8.
evil, bag 53bfe, 33o8l)eit, /.
-ten.
example, 53eif^iet, n. -Ig, -le. for
— , sum ^eifpiel.
exchange, tr. uertaufc^en.
excuse, tr. entfci^ulbigeu.
expect, tr. ertuarten.
expedition, ^uq, m. -geS, -iige.
experience, t. eriebeu.
explain, tr. erffaren. - one's self
to anyone, einem dlttt fte^eu
0.
eye, 5luge, n. -g, -u.
lace, (5)efTrf)t, n. -tg, -ter.
IkU, intr. fallen 0. — together,
aufontmenftiirgen.
family, ^amilie, /. -ien.
famous., adi. berii^iUu
far, ac?j. (or adv.) n)eit. not — ,
unmeit. not — from, prep, un*
tt)eit (gren.).
fate, @d^icffa(, n. -Ig, -le.
father, 5Sater, m. -rg, -ater.
— land, 35aterlanb, n.
fault, ^el)ler, m. -rg, -r.
fear, ^urc^t, /.
fear, tr. fiirc^ten, fid^ fiird^ten
(t)or).
fearful, ad;, furd^tbar.
February, gebruar, m. -rg.
feel, intr. fid) fii'^Ien, fi(^ beftnben
0., fein (w)i</i c?af.) ; see 292.4.
feeling, ©efiibt, w. -leg, -le.
fellow-citizen, 9)iitburger, m. -rg,
-r.
fetch, tr. l^oten.
few, adj. wenig, menige. a — ,
einige (pi), nid)t tjiele.
field, ^etb, n. -beg, -ber.
fight, intr. fampfen.
find, tr. finben 0.
fine, acZ/. fein ; fd)bn.
finger, finger, m. -rg, -r.
finish, tr. toottenben.
finished, adj. fertig, tjoltenbet.
fire, ^euer, n. -rg, -r.
first, adj. erft. adv. erft, suerjlt,
flame, glamme, /. -men.
Florence, ^^lorenj, n.
flower, 33Iume, /. -men.
follow, tr. folgen (dat).
foUowing, adj. folgenb.
fool, %\)ov, m. -reg, -ren.
foolish, adj. bumm.
foot, gu§, m. -ffeg, -iiffe.
for, conj. benn. prep, fiir {accus.\
IM (dat.), feit (dat.), uor (da/. c«r-
accws.).
forbid, tr. Derbieten 0.
force, tr. jttjingen «^.
foreign, adj. fremb. — land, Ut
^rembe.
forest, 2BaIb, m. -beg, -iitbcr.
TOCABULARY.
451
foreyer, adv. auf ctuig.
forget, tr. tiergeffen 0.
forgive, tr. dergeben 0.
former, adj. {adv. -ly) frut)er.
fortune, ©lucf, n. -cfe«, -cfe.
forward, adv. oortucirts.
four, num. t)ier.
France, gvanfreic^, n. -d^g.
Frederick, gviebrid^, m. -d)^,
free, <r. befreien.
free, adj. {adv. -ly) frei.
— thought, ®eban!enfrei^eit, /.
freedom, ^rei^eit, /.
French, adj. franjbfifd^. — man,
granpfe, m. -fen, -fen.
— woman, ^rangbfin, /. -innen.
fresh, adj. frifd^.
friend, grennb, m. -beg, -be.
friendly, adj. {or adv.) freunbli^.
friendship, greunbf(i)aft, /. -ten.
fright, @c^re(f, m. -de8, -de.
fHghtened : be — , erfc!^re(f en, fic^
erfc^recfen (iiber).
from, prep, tjon, au^ {dat); dnt.
case: see 222.1,3.
fruit, f^rnc^t, /. -ucf)te.
frustrate, tr. tjereitetn.
full, adj. X)oU (of, gen.).
furnish, tr. nteublieren.
further, adj. {or adv.) n)elter.
game, @piet, n. -teg, -Ic.
garden, ©orten, m. -n6, -cirten.
gardener, ©artner, m. -rg, -r.
gay, adj. fro^r (i^ coZor) bunt.
general, @cnera(, m. -I§, -ale.
genius, ®enie, n. -leg, -leg.
gentleman, §err, m. -rrn, -rren.
German, adj. beutfd^. noun, ber
2)eutfd)e, e<c.
Germany, 5)pntfrf)(anb, n. -b8.
get, #r. ^oten, »erf(i)Qffen. away,
fid^ (oSmac^en (oon). — up, auf*
ftet)en 0.
gift, ®aht, /. -beiu
girl, aJJabd^en, n, -n§, -n.
give, tr. fc^enfen, geben 0. —one's
hand, bie ^anb reic^en. — up,
tr. entfagen 0. {dat.), auf geben 0.
glad, adj. gliicflic^. be — , fic^
fveuen.
glance, intr. blicfen.
glass, ©lag, n. -feg, -ofer.
go, intr. get) en 0. — along or
too, mitgel^en. — away, fort:=
ge^en, abreifen. — out^ aug=
ge^en, ^inaugge^en.
God, @ott, m. -tteg, -otter.
godlike, adj. gotttid^.
gold, @otb, n. -beg. — piece,
©otbftM, n.
golden, adj. gotben.
good, adj. gut. a — deal, t)iet.
— fortune, ©liid, n. -cfeg.
government, ^iegierung, /. -gen.
gracious, adj. gudbig.
great, adj. gro^, t)oc^.
green, adj. griin.
grim, adj. {adv. -ly) grimmig.
grow, intr. njad)fen 0. ; tuerben 0.
guardian, ^ormunb, m. -beg, -be.
guest, @aft, m. -teg, -afte.
guilty, adj. frfjulbig.
hair, §aar, n. -reg, -re.
half, adj. {or adv ) t)atb. — an
hour, eine ^atbe @tunbe.
hall, @aat, m. -teg, -dte.
hand, §anb, /. -dnbe. on the
other—, adv. bag eg en.
handsome, adj. fc^on.
hang, tr. or intr. ^dngen.
happiness, ©tiicf, n. -deg.
happy, adj. gtiidtic^.
hard, adj. ^art, fd)tt)er.
hardly, ado. fanm.
hasty, adj. {adv. -ly) ^aftig, eitig.
hat, |)ut, m. -teg, -iitc.
hate, tr. t)offen.
hateful, adj. {or adv.) ge^dffig.
452
ENGLISfl-GEEMAN
hatred, ^a% m. -ffeg»
hare, tr. ^aben (irreg.). haye to,
miiffen : see 256. hare (a thing
done), laffen: see 343.1,56,d.
helpers, pron. er ; berjenige, ber.
— who, 113 er.
head, Mopl m. -feg, -o^Jfe;
@pi^e, /. -^en.
health, @ejunbt)eit, /.
healthy, adj. gefunb.
hear, tr. l^oren.
heed, tr. aditen (j/en.). take—, fic^
l^iiten.
heir, (Srbe, m. -ben, -ben.
help, tr. ^etfen 0. (dat), gu ^iilfe
fommen (c^ai.)-
help, C^iitfe, /•
helpfal, ac?/. t)ulfreic^.
Henry, ^einric^, m. -c^g.
her, pers. pron. [te. poss. pro/i.
\\)x, ber i^rige.
hero, §elb, m. -ben, -ben.
heroine, ^elbin, /. -innen.
hide, tr. tjerbergen 0.
hi^h, adj. l}od) (t)o^er etc.).
him, it)n. — self, felbft.
hinder, tr. ^inbern.
hii-e, tr. ntiet^en [mieten].
his, poss. pron. fein, ber feinige.
history, ©efc^id^te, /. -ten.
hold, tr. fatten 0.
home, ^eimat [=mat], /. -en. at
— , lu §aufe.
honor, (S^re, /. -ren.
honor, tr. e^ren.
honorable, adj. e^rtid^, el^ren-
^aft.
hope, intr. ^ off en.
hope, ^offnung, /. -gen.
horrorstrnck : be — , grauen (im-
pers. with dot.).
horse, ^ferb, n. -be8, -be.
hot, adj. t)ei^.
hour, @tunbe, /. -ben.
house, ^au«, w. -jeg, -aufer.
how, adv. itiie. — erer, adv. n)le
and) ; bod).
humanity, 3)lenf(^t)eit, /.
hundred, num. t)unbert.
hunger, hunger, m. -rg.
hun^y : be - , '^nngern {impers.
with accus.).
hunt, tr. jag en.
hunt, 3agb, /. -ben.
hunter, Sciger, m. -r«, -r.
hurry, intr. eilen.
hurry, (Sile, /.
husband, Wann, m. -nc8, -dnner;
@atte, m. -en, -en.
hut, §utte, /. -ten.
I, pers. pron. ici).
idea, 33egriff, m. -p, -ffe.
idle, adj. trcige, faul.
if, conj. tt)cnn. as — , a(8 ob.
ill, ac?/. franf.
illness, ^ronffieit, /. -ten.
imitate, tr. nad)a^nten (dat.).
important, adj. widjtiQ.
impossible, adj. unnioglid).
imprisoned, adj. gefangen.
improve, tr. oerbeffern, beffern.
in, prep, in {dat. or accus.): see
376.
inclined, adj. geneigt.
incredible, adj. unglaubUci^.
indifference, @Ieid)gu(tig!eit, /.
indifferent, adj. g(eid)gu(tig, einer^
lei {indeclinable).
indispensable, adj. nnentbe^rtit^.
industrious, adj. flei^ig.
industry, S^citigfeit, /.
inexperience, Unevfa^reul)eit, /.
inherit, tr. erben.
injure, tr. fd^abcn (dat), uerle^en.
instead of, prep, ouftatt, ftatt
(gen. or injin. with jn).
intend, intr. t)orboben; fld^ (dat.)
t)ornef)men, beabfidjtigen.
interesting", adj. intereffant.
VOCABULAEY.
4:53
into, prep, in (accus.): see 376.
invitation, ©intabung, /. -gen.
invite, tr. eintobeu 0.
it, pers. pron. e§ ; 'ba^, baSjenige.
Itoly, Stalien, n. -lens.
January, 3attuar, m. -rg.
jew, 3ube, m. -ben, -ben.
journey, W\\t, / -fen.
journey, inir. reifen. — away,
abreifen.
joy, i^renbe, /. -ben.
judge, 9Jid)tei% m. -r^, -r.
judgment-seat, 9?id)terftu^l, m.
July, 3uU, m. -Us.
June, 3nni, m. -nig»
just, oc?;. biEig.
keep, tr. be^alten 0., er^atten 0.
— from, \\^ ent^alten.
keeper, ^iiter, m. -rg, -r.
kill, tr. tobten [toten].
kind, adj. freunblirf).
kind, %xi, f. -ten. what — of,
tt)ag fiir : see 175.
kindness, 2Bot)Ut)at, /. -ten.
king, ^onig, m. -gg, -ge.
knee, ,^nie, n. -eg, -e.
kneel, Mr. fnieen.
knife, SO^effer, n. -rg, -r.
knock, i^j^r. ffopfen, ipoc^en.
know, tr. It) iff en (irreg.), fennen
(irreg.), evfennen.
known, adj. befannt.
lack: there is a —of, eg fe^U
(il)m) an.
lady, !5)ame, /. -men.
lament, tr, bemeinen.
lamp, ?ampe, /. -pen.
land, ?anb, n. -beg, -anber.
landlord, mxt^ [SEStrt], m. -tfjeg,
-tf)e.
large, cw?/. gro§.
last, cwi/. le^t.
last, intr. bauern.
late, adj. or adv. fpdt.
laugh, intr. Iarf)en.
laughable, adv. Icici^ertid^.
law, @efe^, n. -^eg, -^e.
lay, tr. leg en.
lazy, adj. fant, trdge.
lead, tr. fiiljren. — back, juriidE^
gie{)en 0. — out, l^inaug=
fii^ren.
learn, tr. (ernen.
learned, adj. gele'^rt.
least: at , cidu. njenigfteng, ant
tt)enigften.
leave, tr. tterlaffen ; laffen 0.
left, adj. Unf.
less, adj. or adv. minber, weniger.
letter, S3rief, m. -feg, -fe.
library, 8ibUott)e!, /. -!en.
lie, intr. Uegen 0.
life, ?eben, n. -ng, -n.
lift, tr. ^eben 0. — up, er«
l^eben 0.
light, 2id}t, n. -teg, -ter.
light, tr. an^iinben, anfteden.
like, adj. gleid^.
like : be like, gleici^en 0. (dat.),
like, tr. {or intr.) lieben, mogen
(irreg. : see 255), gern ^aben. I
— it, eg gefoUt mir.
listen, intr. ^ord)en, 3ut)bren, an=
t)oren.
little, adj. !tein, ircnig.
live, intr. Icben ; luo^nen.
lonely, adj. einfam.
long, adj. lang. adv. tange, tdngft.
— ago, Idngft. as — as, fo=
lange.
look, tr. (or intr.) fet)cn 0., btirfen,
onfefjen. — down, l^innntev
blicfen, ^innnterfet)en.
lose, tr. Derlieren 0.
love, /r. tieben.
love, IHcbe, /.
lowj adj. niebrig.
454
ENGLISH-GERMAN
lyin^, pp'le of ticg en 0.
maid, SJJagb, /. -agbe»
make, tr. mad)en.
man, aJlenjc^, m. -\6)tn, -fd^en;
ajJann, m. -nne§, -tinner.
mansard, 9}?anfarbe, /. -ben.
many, adj. or noun, t)iet, tjiele.
— a, mand^.
March, Maxi, m. -^eS.
march, intr. marfd^ieren.
mark (a coin), Ttavt, f. -fen.
market: — place, 'Sflaxtt, m.
-fte§, -cirfte.
massiye, '^idj. maffidc*.
master, ilReifter, m. -r«, -r.
matter: it does not matter to
me, e« fommt mir nid^t barauf
on.
May, Wai, m. -aie8.
meantime, adv. and conj. inbcffen.
meat, ^leifc^, n. -fd^eS, -jd^e.
medsd, 9)^ebaitle, /. -en.
meet, tr. {or intr.) begegnen (dat),
treffen 0., fid) begegnen.
merchant, ^anfmann, m. -anneg,
-anner or (more generally) ^auf=
leute.
methinks, impers. mic^ bun!t,
from biinfen.
ndle, 9Reile, /. -ten.
milk, mild), /.
mine, poss. pron. mein, bcr niel=
nige.
minister, SQfinifter, m. -r8, -r.
minnte, 9JJinute, /. -ten.
misfortune, UngliicE, n. -de8.
mock, tr. {or intr.) fpotten {gen.).
modesty, ^efc^eiben^eit, /.
moment, 9Jlinnte, /. -ten ; 3(ugen^
blidf, m. -dfeS, -de.
monastery, ^tofter, n. -rg, -ofter.
money, @etb, n. -be8, -ber.
month, ajJonat, m. -tg, -te.
moon, 3Jlonb, m. -beg, -be or -ben.
more^ adj. (or adv.) nte^r.
morning, aJJorgcn, m. -n8, -n.
most, adv. am meiften.
mother, aJJutter, /. -litter.
mountain,' 53 erg, m. -geg, -ge.
mourn, tr. (w intr. beweinen,
flagen.
move, intr. ^te^en 0. — in, ein=
jie^en. — out, angjie^en.
moTcment, 33en)egung, /. -gen.
Mr., §err, m. -rrn, -rren.
much, adj. {or adv.) oiel.
murder, 9JJorb, m. -beg, -be.
murder, tr. ermorben.
music, a^nfif, /.
my, poss. pron. mein,
name, tr. nennen {irreg.).
name, 9Zame, m. -ng, -n.
naughty, adj. unartig.
necessary, adj. not^ig [notig].
neck, ^n(g, m. -feg, -alfe.
necklace, ^algbanb, n. -beg,
-cinber.
need, tr. bebiirfen, brand^en.
need, ajott) mot], f. -ot^e. there
is — of, eg braud^t.
neighbor, 9^ad)bar, m. -rg or -rn,
-rn.
neither, conj. tucbcr. — .... nor,
njeber .... nod^. pron. feiner,
etc.
nerve, 9?ert)e, /. -tien.
never, adv. nie, niemolg.
nevertheless, adv. bennot^, boc^.
new, adj. nen.
news, a?ad)rid^t, /. -ten.
newspaper, S^itnng, /. -gen.
next, adj. m6)\i {sup. of na^),
onber : see 203.1a.
night, aJad^t, /. -odfite.
no, adv. nein. adj. !ein. — one,
Reiner, a^iemonb. — longer,
nid^t me^r.
noble, adj. ebet. noun, ber @b!e,
5(beUge,
VOCABULABY.
455
nobleman^ (Sbetmanu, m.
nod, intr. nicfen.
north, 9^orb or S'Jorbeu, m. -ng.
northern, adj. norblic^.
not, adv. nid)t. — one, !ein eiu=
^iger, etc.
nothing, noun, ^id^t€, n. adv.
nic^tg. — hut, ni(^tg alg.
novel, 9Joman, m. -n^, -tie.
NoYemher, 9?otjember, m. -r8.
now, adv. je^t.
nomher, 5luso^(, /.
ohey, ir. ge^orc^en (dat),
obliged: be — to, ntuffen: see
256.
ocean, 2J?eer, n. -re8, -re.
o'clock, Ut)r, /.; see 211.3.
October, October, m. -rg.
of, prep. \}on{dat.).
offer, <r. anbieten 0., reic^en.
officer, Offijier, m. -r§, -re.
often, adv. oft.
old, adj. ait
on, prep, auf {dat. or accus.).
once, ac?u. einnmt^. at — , gleidf).
one, num. eiu. adj. ein, eine, ein,
etc. pron. einer, eine, eing, etc.
indef. pron. man: see 185.
not—, fein.
only, adj. einjig. adu. olleiu, nur.
not — . . . . but also, uicf)t nur
.... fonbern and).
open, tr. offnen, aufmac^eu.
opinion, 9iReinung, /. -gen.
opportunity, ©etegen^eit, /. -ten.
oppose, tr. fid^ njiberfetien.
opposite, prep, gegeniiber (dat.).
or, conj. ober.
order, tr. beflellen; befe^Ien 0.
(dat).
order: in — to or that, conj. ha%
bomit: see 332.56, urn: see
346.1.
orthodox^ adj. re^tgtaubin.
other, adj. aitber.
otherwise, adv. fouft.
ought, intr. joUeii : see 257.
our, poss. adj. uiifer, ber un[rigc.
out (of), prep, aug ((?ai.).
outbreak, 5lugbru(^, m. -d^g,
-iic^e.
outlet, 5Iuggaug, m. -g§, -angc.
outside, prep. au§er^atb (gen.).
over, prep, iiber {dat. or accus.),
adv. '^Iniiber.
own, adj. eigen.
owner, S3efi^er, m. -r8, -r.
pace, @d)ritt, m. -tteg, -tte.
pain, tr. fc^merseu {dat.).
pain, ^d)mer3, m. -3e3 or -;5ett6,
-sen.
paint, tr. or intr. maten.
painter, 9Jfa(er, m. -rg, -r.
painting, ©emcitbe, n. -beg, -be,
pair, ''^aax, n. -reg, -re,
pale, adj. bta§.
palace, ^^^ataft, m. -tg, -cifle.
parents, p^ (Sltern.
part, 2:^ei( [2^ei(], m. or n. -leg,
-le. take — , t^eilnet)men [teil=]
0.
part, tr. trennen. intr. fid^ tren^
nen.
pass (time), tr. ^ubringen, tier*
bring en {irreg.). intr. Derftreid^en
0.
past, adv. tiorbei.
pastor, starrer, m. -rg, -r.
path, ^|?fab, m. -beg, -be.
pay, tr. begalilen.
peace, ^riebe or -ben, w. -eng,
-en.
peaceful, adj. friebtid^.
peasant, 33aner, m. -rg or -rn, -r
or -rn.
pen, ^cber, /. - rn.
people, pi. l^cntc ; SSotf, n. -fe«
-ol!er»
456
ENGLTSH-GERMAN
penetrate, ir. burd^bringen 0.
(sep'le).
perhaps, adv. toieUeii^t ; tno'^L
philosopher, ^t)iIofopt), m. -p^tn,
pictnre, 53ilb, n. -be8, -ber.
piece, @tu(f, n. -cfeg, -cfe»
pilgrim, ^^Ulger, m. -rS, -r.
pity, iy. bebauern, be!(agen ; bau*
ern {impers.). take — on, fid^ er*
barmen (gen.).
place, ^(al^, m. -^e^, -ci^e.
plant, tr. ipftansen.
plant, ^ftanje, /. -^tn ; @enjac^§,
n. -fe8, -fe.
plate, XtUtx, m, -rs, -r.
play, mtr. fpielen.
play, @^iei, /i. -Ie8, -Ic.
players, pZ. @^ielleutc.
pleasant, adj. angene^nt.
please, ir. gef alien 0. {dnt).
pleasure, ^reube, /. -ben; SSer^
gniigen, n. -n^, -n,
pluck, tr. pfliicfen.
poem, ®ebi(^t, n. ~m, -te.
poet, 2)i(^ter, m. -r6, -r.
poetry, 2)ic^t!unft, /.
point, @pl^e, /. -3en, he on
the — of, ttJoHen eben: see
258.
politeness, ^bflid^!eit, /.
political, adj. politifd^.
poor, adj. arm.
pope, -^apft, m. -te§, -apfle.
portion ; he the — of, einem in
%\)z\[ {Zn\] iDPrben.
pojirait, ^|>ortrait, n. -m, -te.
possess, tr. befi^en, im iBefi^
:^aben.
possession, 93efi^ung, /. -gen.
take or gain — of, fid) bemtid^-
tigen igen.), erringen 0. tr.
post, ^^oft, /. -ten.
potato, tartoffet, /. -In.
pound, ^fnnb, n. -beS, -be.
power, ma^i, f. -ad^te ; ©etrati;
/. -ten.
powerful, adj. mac^tig.
praise, tr. toben, preijen 0.
pray, intr. beten.
preach, inir. prebigen.
prepare, tr. jnbereiten.
preserye, tr. erbalten 0.
president, ^rdfibent, m. -ten,
-ten.
presume : I presume, ttjo^l with
merben : see 328.
pretty, adj. pbfc^.
price, ^rei«, m. -je§, -fe.
pride, ^od^mut^ [=mut], m.
-t^eg.
prince, ?^urft, m. -ten, -ten ; ^ring,
m. -jen, -gen.
princess, ^iirftin, /. -inncn.
print, tr. bruden.
prison, ©efangni^ [=nig],n. -ffe3,
-ffe.
prisoner, ©efangen {p'ple as
noun).
prohahly, adv. n)al)rf(^einUd^,
tt»ol)l: see 328.
procure, tr. t>erfd)affen.
professor, ^rofeffor, m. -rs, -ren.
promise, tr. tjerfprec^en 0.
promise, S5erfprec^en, n. -n8, -n.
pronounce, tr. auSfpred^en 0,
proud, adj. ftolg.
proye, tr. beweifen 0., nad^njcifen
0.
Prussia, ^ren^en, n. -n«.
Fi*ussian, adj. preufeifd^. noun, bet
^reu^e.
punish, tr. ftrafen.
pupil, ©driller, m. -r§, -r.
put, tr. or intr. je^en, ftellen, tegcn,
ftedfen. — himself, ftcfi ftetlen.
quarter, 33iertel, n. -I«, -I.
queen, ^bnigin, /. -innen.
question, tr. fragen.
VOCABULAEY.
457
question, %xaQt, f. -en.
qnick^ adj. (adv. -ly) fci)uel(I, rofcl).
qniet, adj. {adv. -ly) ru^ig.
qnite, adv, gang, Dollig.
race, ©efc^lec^t, n. -te§, -ter.
railroad, @ijenbot)n, /. -nen.
rain, intr. impers. regnen.
rain, 3tegen, m. -ng.
rank, 9iang, m. -ge§, -cinge.
reach, <r. erreii^en.
read, ir. or intr. lejen 0. — alond,
tjortefen (to, dat).
ready, ad/, bereit.
really, adv. tvivtii^,
receive, tr. emtifangen 0.
recognize, tr. erfeixnen {irreg.).
reconcile, tr. Derfo^neiu
red, adj. rot^ [rot],
regard, tr. betrac^ten.
regret, intr. reuen {impers. with
accus.).
rejoice, intr. ftc^ freuen (in, gen. /
over, iihtXf auf).
relations, pi. 5Serix)anbtfcf)aft, /.
release, ir. entlaffen , eutbinben
0. (from, gen.).
remain, intr. bleiben 0. f, — be-
hind, surucfbteibeit.
remember, tr. fi(^ erinnern
{gen. or an), gebenfen {irreg.)
{gen.).
repeat, tr. inieber'^oteu {insep'k).
respect, tr. ac^tcn.
rest, 9?ut)e/7.
restaurant, SfJeftauration, /. -nen.
revile, tr. fc^intpfen.
revolution, 9?et)olution, /. -nen.
reward, tr. to^nen.
Rhine, $Rt)ein, m. - ne8.
ribbon, 53onb, n. -be§, -cinbe'r.
rich, adj. reid).
riches, 9leid^t^um [=tum], m. -m^,
-iimer,
rid, adj. Io0 (of, accus.).
ride, intr. rettcn 0. — away,
fortreiten.
ride, $Ritt, m. -tteS, -tte.
right, adj. rec^t.
right, 9?e(f)t, n. -m, -te.
righteous, oc?/. g credit
ring, 9ting, m. -ge8, -ge.
rise, intr. auffte^en 0. f., (of the
sun) aufge'^en 0. f.
robj ir. raubeu, beraubett.
Bome, 9tom, n. -m«.
roof, '^ad), n. -c^eg, -ad^er,
room, 3itttmer, n. -ra, -r.
rude, adj. rau^, ungegogeu.
run, intr. laufen 0. f. — away,
entlaufen (from, dat.).
sad, adj. traurig.
sake : for the — of, prep, tucgen
{gen.).
same, adj. \dh, gteid). the — ,
berfelbe, etc.
save, tr. rettett.
say, ir. fag en.
scamp, S3ofert)i(^t, m. -tg, -te.
scholar, ©chiller, m. -r8, -r;
@elet)rte (r), m. -en, -en.
school, <2>dink, f. -len.
science, 2Biffenjd)aft, /. -ten.
scream, intr. fd^reien 0.
scold, tr. fd^elten, 0.
sculptor, 53ilb^auer, m. -r8, -r."
season, 3al)re§seit, /. -ten.
seat one's self, fid) fe^sen.
secret, ©e^eimnife [=uig], n. -ffeS,
-ffe.
secure, tr. fic^ern.
see, tr. fe^en 0. - about one, ftd^
uinfe^en. — again, tviebevfe^en.
seek, tr. fuc^en.
seem, intr. fd^einen 0.
seldom, adv. felten.
self, pron. fclbft, felber: see
155.5.
self-respect, ©elbftad^tung, /.
458
ENGLISH-GERMAN
sell, tr. Derfaufcn (to, dat).
send, tr. fd^icfen, fenben (reg. or
irreg.) — in, einfeuben,
sensible, adj. {adv. -ly) oevniinftig.
September, (September, m. -r§.
servant, 2)iener, m. -x^, -v.
senrice, S)ienft, m. -fteg, -ftc.
set, <r. je^en ; (of the sun) uttter^
ge'^en 0. f. — over, iiberfe^en
(sep'Ze).
several, adj, pi me^rere: see
192.2; Derfc^iebene,
she, pers. pron. fte.
sheplierd, ^irt, m. -ten, -ten.
shoe, @cf)u^, m. -I^eg, -l^e.
shop, $?oben, m. -ng, -aben.
short, ac?/. furg,
show, tr. jetgen,
shut, <r. fc^Ue^en 0., jumod^en.
sick, «c?/. franf. — bed, ^ran!en=
bett, n.
sickness, ^ranf^eit, /. -ten.
silent : be — , intr. fd^meigen 0.
silver, @i(ber, n. -r8.
silver, adj. filbern»
sin, intr. jiinbigen.
since, prep, feit (dat.). adv. feit=
htm. conj. ba, inbem.
sing, tr. or intr. fingen 0. — too
or at the same time, join in
— ing, mitfmgen.
single, adj. ein^ig. not a — , !ein
einglger, etc.
sister, ©c^mefter, /.
sit, intr. ftljen 0. — down, fid)
fe^en.
sleep, m^r. fd^Iafen 0. go to — ,
einfc^Iafen.
slow, adj. {adv. -ly) Tang jam.
slumber, @(^(ummer, m. -r«, -r.
small, adj. flein.
small-pox, tie 331ottern, pi.
smoke, tr. or intr. rand^en.
smoke, 0?aud^, m. -df)e6.
snoWj ii^r. and impers. jdE|neien.
so, adv. and conj. fo, at[o ; e8 : see
154. 4e.
soldier, @oIbat, m. -ten, -ten.
solid, at?/. foUb.
some, prcn. ad/, eintg, cttid^ ; et:=
it)a§, tttag; trelc^e: see 176.2.
— thing, etma8, njag. — body,
Semanb.
son, ®o^n, m. -ne8, -o^ne.
song, ?ieb, n. -beS, -ber.
soon, adv. haih.
sorrow, (©ef)mer,5, m. -jeS, -gen;
(gorge, /. -en.
sorrow, intr. leiben (?.
sorry : be — for, bebanern tr. ;
fid) erbormen {gen.).
sort : what - of, nja« filr.
soul, (geele, /. -len.
south, (Siibcn, m. -n3.
southern, ac(;. fiiblid^.
Spain, ©panien, n. -icn3.
Spanish, ad/, fpanifd).
Spaniard, (gpanier, m. -r§, -r.
spare, ir. fd)onen, t)erfd)onen.
speak, tr. or intr. fpred^en 0.,
reben. — out, augfpredjen 0.
spend, tr. (of time) tjerbringen
{irreg.), tterleben.
spiritual, adj. geiftig.
spite ! in — of, prep, tro^ {gen.).
spoil, tr. tierberben 0.
spoon, ?offet, m. -t8, -t.
spring, ^rut)Ung, m. -gg, -gc.
spring, mfr. fpringen 0. \) or f.
stand, intr. [te'^en 0. I) or |.
stay, m<r. bleiben 0. f.
step, (Sd)ritt, m. -tte«, -tte.
still, etc?/, ftitt, fd)meigenb. adv.
noc^, ftetg ; bod^.
stop, intr. author en, fte'^en bleiben.
story, ®efd)idf)te, /. -ten.
strange, adj. fremb.
stranger, ber ^rembe, etc.
stream, (Strom, m. -meS, -omc.
street, @tra^e, /. -^en.
VOCABULARY.
459
strength, ^raft, /. -afte.
stretch, tr. ftrecfen. Mr. fid)
ftrecfeit.
strike, ir. fci^tagen 0. — off, (xl--
fd)(agen.
strong, adj. ftarf.
student, ©tubent, m. -ten, -tcit.
study, ©tubium, n. -mg, -ien.
stupid, adj. biimm.
style, aJJobe, /. -ben.
sublime, adj. er'^aben. {with dat)
succeed, intr. gelingen 0. {impers.
such, pron. adj. or adv. fotd).
— a, fold) ein, ein fotcl), jo ein.
sudden, {adj. -ly) plbt^lic^.
suffer, intr. {or tr.) teiben 0.
sufficiently, adv. genng.
suitable: be — , piemen {Impers.
with dal.).
summer, (Sommev, m. -r^, -r.
sun, ®onne, /. -nen.
Sunday, ©onntog, m. -g§.
sure, adv. getuijs. to be — , jnjar,
surrive, tr. iiberlebeu.
suspicion, 5>erbac^t, m. -t§.
sweet, adj. \n^.
Switzerland, @d)tt)ei5, /.
sword, >2)C^mert, n. -te8, -ter.
table, Zi\6).
take, tr. ne^men 0. —away, n)cg=
ne^men. — along or too, ntit=
ne'^men.
talk, Mr. reben, fpred^en 0.
— over, befprecl^en 0.
tall, adj. gro^, \)o^.
task, ^nfg abe, /. -ben.
tea, 2:t)ee, m. -eeg, -ec.
teach, <r. le'^ren.
teacher, ^tljttv, m, -x^, -r;
SOfJeifter, m. -r8, -r»
teaching, ?e^rc, /. -rem
tear, X{)rdne, /. -nen.
tell, <r. erj^ci^Ien, fag en.
terrible^ adj. furd)tbar.
thaler, ^'^nter, m. -r8, -r.
than, conj. (x\^, benn»
thank, tr-. banfen {dat.).
thanks, 2)an!, m. -leg.
that, c?em. pro>2. jener, berjenige,
etc. ; reZ. pron. tDeld), ber, efc.
cory. \i(x% bamit. in order — ,
bamit
the, de/. ar^. ber (bie, ba§). con/.
or adv. je, befto.
theatre, it)eater, n. -r§, -r.
their, poss. pron. i'^r, ber il)vig.
then, adv. bann, borauf. conj.
benn, bann, fo.
there, adv. ba, bort. — are, etc.,
eg gibt, etc., e6 finb, etc.
therefore, adv. or conj. barnm.
they, pers. pron. [ic. indef. man.
thine, poss. pron. bein, ber beinig.
thing, 2)ing, n. -geg, -ge ; 'Bo.&^t,
f. -en.
think, Mr. benfen (irreg.) ge*
benfcn. (of, gren.).
thirst, infr. biirften {impers. with
accus.).
this, (^ew?. pron. bie0.
thou, pers. pron. bu.
thought, ®eban!e, m. -fen§, -!cn.
three, num. brei.
throne, 3:^ron, m. -neg, -ne or
-nen.
through, pnp. bnrc^ (accws.).
thunder, Conner, m. -r§, -r.
-storm, ©emitter, n. -r§, -r.
time, 3cit, /• -ten. three times,
breintat, etc. sometimes, mand)=
ntal.
tire, tr. ermiiben.
tired, adj. miibe, ermiibet. be —
of it, eg miibe fein, eg fatt ^ahtn.
to, prep. 3u, nad^ {dat.), in, an
{accus.), big (da<.) ; ici^/i in/in. ju.
today, adv. ^cute. of — , today's,
l^eutig {adj.).
together, adv. jnfammcn.
460
ENGLISH-GERMAN
tomorrow, adv. morgcn.
tone, 2;on, m. -neg, -one.
too, adv. ju ; an6). — mnch, ju
t)iet or fe^r, all^ufe^r.
toward, prep, iiad) (dat), gegen
(accws.), gen.
town, ^tabt, /. -dbte. — hall,
9latl)l)aug maU], n.
translate, tr. uberfe^en (inseple).
travel, intr. rcifeit j or f).
treason, 33en*at^ [=trot], m. -f^e^.
high--, ^oc^tjerrat^, m.
tree, 93aum, m. -nteS, -aunte.
tremble, intr. jittern.
troop, Zxnpp, m. -ppt^, -ppe.
tropic, Xrope, /. -pen.
trouble, 9Jiu^e, /.
true, adj. iDaljr; trcu. it is — ,
adv. 3tt)ar.
truly, adv. toa^rtic^, tra'^r^aftig.
trust, tr. trauen, tjertrauen (dat.).
truth, SSa^r^eit, /.
try, intr. t)erfut^en.
turn (to), intr. biegen 0., fic^
menben ; tuerben (gu) 0.
twice, adv. jmeimal.
twig, B^eig^ wi- -gc8, -gc.
two, nwm. jttjei,
ngly, «(^i. PBtic^.
unable: be — , nid^t fbuneu:
see 254.
nncle, Onfel, m. -Ig, -I ; D^elm,
m. -m^, -me.
under, prep, unter (cZa^. and
accus.).
understand, tr. berftel^en 0.
undertake, intr. or tr. ftd^ (dat.)
Dornet)men 0.
undone, adj. ungefd^e^ett.
unending, adj. enbloS, unenbUc^.
unexpected, adj. unern)artet.
ungrateful, adj. unbanfbar.
nnhappiness, Ungliic!, n. -d^.
unhappy, adj. mtgliicfUc!^.
uninterrupted, adj. uuutitcr^
brod^en.
university, UniDerfttcit, /. -ten.
unknown, adj. unbefannt.
unless, conj. o^ne bQJ3, njenn ni^t,
eg fei benn : see 331. le.
until, conj. bis, bi§ ta^. prep, big
(dat.).
unwell, adj. or adv. unmo^t.
unworthy, adj. nnwiirbig.
up, adv. or prep. au\, an (dat or
accus.), '^inauf.
upon, prep, anf (dat. or accus.).
usual, adj. (adv. -ly) get»b^nli(^.
as
it)ie genjo^ntic^.
use, tr. benu^en. be of—, nnt3eu
(to, dat.).
useless, adj. unbranc^bor.
vain, adj. eitct.
vainly, in vain, adv. tjergcbeng.
valley, Zljai, n. -leg, -citer.
vanquish, tr. begtuingen 0.
vegetable, ©eniiife, n. -feg, -fc.
very, adv. fe^r.
victor, ®ieger, m. -rg, -r.
victorious, adj. ftegreid).
victory, @ieg, m. -geg, -ge.
Tienna, SSien, n. -ng.
village, 2)orf, n. -feg, -orfer.
violet, ^eilc^en, n. -ng, -n.
virtue, Slugenb, /. -ben.
visit, tr. befuc^en.
visit, Sefu(^, m. -d^eg, -6)t,
voice, ®timme, /. -men.
wagon, Bag en, m. -ng, -n or
-agen.
wait, intr. ioarten (for, gen. or
auf).
wake, tr. medfen. intr. aufwad)en.
walk, intr. get)en 0. ; ivanbern.
take a — , fpagieren gef)en.
wander, intr. manbern f.
wanderer, Sanberer^w. -xi^-x^
VOCABULABY.
461
want, fr. {<yr infr,) n)flnfd)en, iroHen
{irreg.).
war, ^'rieg, m. -ge§, -gc.
warm, adj. voaxm,
warning, Sarnutig, /. -gen.
watch, intr. wac^en.
watch, U()u, /. -ren.
water, SSaffer, n. -r6.
way, 3Beg, m. -geg, -ge. on the — ,
untertt)eg§.
we, p^s. pron. ttJtr.
weak, adj. jrf)tt)acf).
weary, adj. miibc.
weather, Setter, n. -vg.
Wednesday, 9)litttt)od^, m. -c^g.
week, SSocf)e, /. -en.
weep, intr. tueinen.
weigh, intr. (or tr.) tt)legen 0.
welcome, adj. tDlUfommen.
well, adv. gut, tt)o^L
what, prori. was ; wetcf). — kind
of, toa^ fiir. - ever, was aud).
Mer;. n)ie! tuaS!
when, adv. a\^, tuenn ; wann.
where, adv. roo. — erer, wo,
tt)o auc^.
whether, con/, ob.
which, pron. tuetd), tuer, ttJaS efc.
that — , n?ag.
while, adv. inbem, ttja^renb.
white, adj. wti%
who, pron. tt)er, n)e((f)er, efc,
ber, e*c. he — , she — , \vtx,
ber« or bie^jenige. —ever, nier
aud^.
whole, adj. gan^.
whose, pron. njcffen {gen. of
ttjer).
why, adv. tDarutn; Wa^: see
176.3.
widower, SBitttner [Sitttjer], m.
-r«, -r.
wife, %xa\x, f. -€n; ©attin, /.
-nnen.
willingly, adv. gertu
window, ^enj^er, n. ~^r§, -r.
wine, SBein, -ne8, -ne.
winter, SBinter, m. -rS, -r.
wisdom, SBeiS^elt, /.
wise, adj. njeife, gete^rt.
wish, tr. or intr. tDiiiifd^en, ttJoUen
(trreg ). wished for, ertt}imfd)t.
wish, 2Bunf(^, m. -fc^eS, -iinfc^e,
with, prep, ntit (dat.).
withdi*aw, tr. juriid^iel^en 0.
intr. fid^ guriid^ie^en.
without, prq). o^ne {accus. or
infin. with ju).
woman, Seib. n. -be«, -ber;
gran, /. -en.
wonder, intr. iuunbevn. — at, fic^
ttjunbern iiber.
wood, ^oli, n. 3e«, -je ; Satb, m.
-bes, -dlber.
word, Sort, n. -te8, -orter.
work, m^r. orbeiten.
work, ?lrbeit, /. -ten ; Serf, n.
- !eg, -!e.
world, Sert, /. -ten.
worse, worst, comp. and, superl.
of bad, fc^ (ed)t.
wretched, adj. nngliidfeUg.
wring", tr. ring en 0,
write, tr. or intr. fc^reiben 0.
— in, register, elnfc^reiben,
writing, @d)reiben, n. -n8.
wrong, Unrec^t, n. -teS, -te,
year, 3al)r, n. -re8, -re.
yes, ac?v. ja.
yesterday, ac?v. geftern.
yet, adv. noc^. not — , nod) nid)t.
yon, pers. pron. 'tixi, \\\x, <B\t : see
153.
young, adj. jnng,
yonr, poss. pron. bein, i^r, 3^t»
e^c* see 157.
youth, rvng'-nb, /.
youth, young man, Siingliug, m.
463
INDEX.
^^^The references are to Sections, not to pages.
a, pronunciation of, 8; a for aa in
new orthography, 8.1.
a, pronunciation of, 15; d for e in
new orthography, 15.1.
miant, 400.2.
Absolute construction, with accu-
sative, 230.3; -with infinitive,
347.
accent, 55.
accessary clause, see dependent.
accusative case, general office of,
59.4, 226; with transitive
verbs, 227.1; with intransitive,
227.2; double accus., with
verbs, 227.3; accus. with prepo-
sitions, 228, 375-6; with ad-
jectives, 229; accus. of measure
and time, 230.1,2; accus, ab-
solute, or of accompanying
circumstance, 230.3.
active voice of verb, 233.3.
address, use of pronouns in, 153.
adjective, usual adjunct of noun,
110; when declined, 114-7;
rules of adj. declension, 118-
28; indeclinable adj. 126.4;
origin of double declension of
adj., 132; adj. as noun, 129;
as adverb, 130, 363.1,2; adj.
with etwaS, \va^, iud)t§, 129.5;
comparison of adj., 133-42;
absolute use pf comparative adj.,
142.2; modifying adjuncts of
adj., 143-6; their place, 147:—
agreement of adj., 62, 209;
genitive dependent on adj . , 2 1 7 ;
dative do., 223; accusative do.,
229: — primitive adj., 413; adj.
derived from verbs, 414; deri-
ved by suffix, 415; by prefix,
416; compound adj., 423^
adjective clause, 437, 444.2,
110.1c.
adjective phrase, compound, 437.
2a, 147.2, 358.
adverb, office of, 361; usual ad-
junct of adjective, 144; of verb,
317; of noun, 110.2, 369.3; of
preposition, 369.1; complement
of preposition, 379; used as
adj., 369.3 ; place of adv.,
319.2/, 370; classification of
adverbs., 362; derivation of ad-
verbs, from nouns, 364; from
adj . , 36 3 ; from adj . , by derivative
endings, 363.3 ; by combination,
365; from pronominal roots,
367.2; original adverbs, 367;
ordinal adv., 207.3; comparison,
368; adjective as adv., 130,
363.1,2; participle as adv., 356;
comparison of adjectives by adv.,
141.
adverbial clause, 438, 444.3,
144.2.
adverbial predicate, adjective asj
116.16, 316.26.
5(e, see a.
5leu, see an,
ai, pronunciation of,
all, 193.
aller, prefixed to superlatives,
142.3.
alphabet, German, 1-3; its origin,
1; written character, 2.1, pp.
275-77; use of capitals, 4.
aU, in sense of *asif,' 332. 26, c,
4336; do. in substantive clause,
436. 3^; omission of al^ after fp
and adverb or adjective, 438.
Sd,e.
outer, 194.
19.1.
464
INDEX.
npodosis, 332.1.
appositive adjective, 110.16, 116.
2,4; do. noun, 59.4:, 111.2; in
nominative, 213.2.
arrangement of the sentence, rules
for 429-39; summary of rules,
440-44; additional remarks,
rhetorical arrangements, 445-6.
articles, declension, 63-4; com-
bination with prepositions, Q5;
rules for use, 66; place, 67.
Aryan languages, see Indo-Euro-
pean.
assertive sentence, 427.
attributive adjective, 110.1a, 115.
au, pronunciation of, 20.
aUf pronunciation of, 21.2.
auxHiaries, of tense, 239-41; of
mood, see modal auxiliaries;
causative auxiliary, 242.2;
•omission of auxiliary of tense,
439.3a; verbs taking either
tjobtn or fetn as auxiliary, 241.3.
atj, pronunciation and use of, 19.3.
b, pronunciation of, 23; English
correspondent of, 459.L
bases, 3936.
be=, derivation and use of, 307.2,
405.III.la.
bcibc, 1996.
C, pronunciation and use of, 24.
capitals, use of, 4; in pronouns of
address, 153.3-5.
cardinal numerals, 197-201; their
derivatives, 202-8.
cases of declension, their uses, 59,
212-30: arid see accusative,
dative, genitive, nominative.
causative auxiliary, 242 2; causa-
tive derivative verbs, 404.1.1.
Celtic languages, relationship of,
450.
C^, pronunciation of, 43; English
correspondents of, 460.
df pronunciation and use of, 30,
classes, under first declension, how
determined, 69; first class, 75-
80; second, 81-6; third, 87-
90.
cognate accusative, 227.2a.
collective noun, agreement of verb
with, 322.2.
comparative degree, 134 fE.; de-
clension of, 140.1.
comparison, of adjectives, 133-
42; degrees and endings, 134-
5; modification of vowel, 136;
irregular and defective compari-
son, 139; declension, 140: — of
participles, 355; of adverbs,
368.
composition or combination of
words, 418-25.
compound adjective phrase, 437.
2a, 147.2, 358.
compound foi-ms of verb, 238-42.
compound nouns, gender of, 61.4;
inflection of, 68.1; formation
of, 421-2.
compound verbs, with prefixes,
233.4, 296-311; with otiier
elements, 312-3.
compound words, 418; their fre-
quency in German, 419; ortho-
graphy, 4196,c; pronunciation
of finals and initials in, 53;
accent, 55.2-4; rules of forma-
tion of compound verbs, 420;
nouns, 421-2; adjectives, 423-
4; particles, 425, 365.
conditional clauses, inversion in,
433, 443.5.
conditional tenses, formation o^
240.2c; their use, 334-6.
conditional use of subjunctive,
332.
conjugation, defined, 231; rules
respecting, 232-313; conjuga-
tions, distinction and origin of,
246 ; New conjugation, 247-60;
Old conjugation, 261-73 ; mixed
conjugation, 272.
conjunctions, 382; their classi-
fication, 383; general con-
nectives, 384; adverbial con-
junctions, 385 ; subordinating
conjunctions, 386.
consonants, pronunciation o^
23-54.
copula, 316.1a, 426.26; omission
of, in dependent clause, 439.3,
correspondences between English
INDEX.
465
and German words and letters,
452-61.
countries and places, declension of
names of, 103.
b, pronunciation of, 25; English
correspondent of, 458.1.
ha, added to relative pronoun,
182.2.
ba or bar, in combination with
prepositions, as substitute for
pronoun of third person, 154.
2,3; for demonstrative, 166.4;
for relative, 180.
dative case, general use of, 59.3,
221; dat. with verbs, 222; of
possession, with luerben, etc.,
222. II. Id; with impersonal
phrases of condition, 222. II. 1/,
292.4; of interest or concern,
222.III.; possessive dat., 222.
Ilia, 6; dative with adjectives,
223; with prepositions, 224,
374, 376; with nouns, 225.1;
in exclamations, 225.2:— use or
omission of e in dat. of nouns,
71.15, 83; old dat. sing. fem.
in u, 95.
day of the month, expression of,
216. 5d.
declension, defined, 57; rules of
decl., 58-208; decl. of articles,
63-4; of nouns, 68-108; of
adjectives, 118-28, 140; of
pronouns, 151-95 ; of numerals,
198-208; uses of the forms of
decl., 209-30.
defective declension of nouns,
100; defective theme in declen-
sion, 98.
definitive article, see articles ; use
in generaUzing sense, 66.1,2; in
senoe of possessive, 66.3, 161.
demonstratives, 163-71; use of,
in sense of personal or posses-
sive pronouns, 166.26, 171.
denominative verbs, 405.
dependent clauses, 426.2d, 435,
444; their arrangement, 434-9,
444; their introduction in a
period, 439.5; omission of
auxiliary or copula in, 439.3.
ber, as definite article, 63; as de-
monstrative aajective or pro-
noun, 163, 164.1,2, 166 ; as
relative, 177-8.
bcrer, 164.2.
derivation of words, 393-417.
S)ero, 162.
determinative pronouns, 167-71;
use of, instead of personal or
possessive pronouns, 171.
bteS, 163, 165-6.
digraphs, vowel, 18-22; conso-
nant, 43-51.
dimidiative numerals, 207.1.
diphthongs, pronunciation of,
18-22.
doubled vowels, 7.1, 53; modified
vowels not doubled, 14.2;
doubled consonants, 7.2, 52.2,
53.
biirfen, 251, 253.
e, pronunciation of, 9; c for ec in
new orthography, 9 .1; e fofr a in
new orthography, 15.1.
ei, pronunciation of, 19.2.
ein, as indefinite article, 63; as
indef. pronoun, 195.1; as
numeral, 198.
eintg, 189.
emp=, derivation and use of,
307.3.
emphasis or impressiveness, in-
version for, 431gf, 443.2.
endings of inflection and of deri-
vation, see suffixes.
English language, relation of Ger-
man to, 447-52 ; corresponden-
ces between English and German
words and letters, 452-61.
eiit=, derivation and use of, 307.3;
405. III. 16.
er=, derivation and use of, 307.4;
405.IIL1C.
e6, special uses and constructions
of, 154.4; omission of, as im-
personal subject, 293.
etiid), 189.
tUva^, 188; form of adjective
with, 129.5.
etn^etrf), 189.
eu, pronunciation of, 21.1; for au
in new orthography, 21.3.
@W.« 162.
m
INDEX.
exclamation, construction of , 391,
432.1c, 439.4a.
expletive personal pronoun in
dative, 156, 222. Ulb.
eh, pronunciation and use of,
19.3.
f, pronunciation of, 26; English
correspondents of, 459.3,
factitive predicate, see objective
predicate.
feminine, see gender: classification
of fem. nouns in declension,
69.2, 70; fem. noun invariable
in singular, 71.1a; exceptions,
95.
first or strong declension of nouns,
69, 73, 74-90; its first class,
75-80; second, 81-6; third,
87-90:— of adjectives, 1 18-28,
132.
foreign nouns, declension of, 86,
92.1a,2c, 97.2, 101; gender,
61.5.
foreign words, pronunciation of,
54; of t), ie, e, t, d) in, 13, 18,
24, 37, 43.3; of g in words
from French, 27; accent, 55.5.
fractional numerals, 207.2.
fiir in nja§ fiir, 175, 177, 179.
future perfect tense, how formed,
240.26; its use, 328.
future tense, how formed, 240.2a;
its use, 328; present in sense of
future, 324.4.
g, pronunciation of, 27, 43; Eng-
lish correspondents of, 460.
ge=, derivation and use of, 307.5;
use as prefix of participle, 243. 3 ;
its origin as such, 243.3c.
gegeffen, 271.3.
gender, 60; general rules for, in
nouns, 61; in adjectives etc.,
62; of compound nouns, 421.1;
gender of personal pronoun,
154.1.
genitive case, general office of,
59.2, 215; gen. with nouns,
216; its place, 216.6; with ad-
jectives, 217; with prepositions,
218, 873; with verbs, 219,
220.2-4; substitution of dative
with t)0U for, 216.4; adverbial
gen., 220.1; predicate gen.,
220.2; gen. with interjections,
220.5:— form of gen. deter-
mines declension of a noun,
69.1, 70; use of e§ or g in, 83;
of en or n, 93; old gen. sing,
of feminines, in it, 95; omission
of sign of genitive, 101.5; gen.
of second adjective declension
used instead of first, 121.3.
Germanic or Teutonic group of
languages, 449-50; its divi-
sions, 451; progression of
mutes in, 453-60.
German language, relation of to
English, 447-61; history of,
462-9.
Gothic language, relationship of,
451.4.
gradation of vowels, see variation.
Greek language, relationship of,
450.
Grimm's law of progression of
mutes, 453.
^, pronunciation of, 28; used to
denote a long vowel, 7.1; Eng-
Ush correspondents of, 460.
l)aben, conjugation of, 239.1,4a;
use as auxiliary, 240-1 ; origin
of use, 240.4.'
Hebrew etc., not related with Ger-
manic languages, 450.76.
I^ier, compounded with preposi-
tions, in sense of demonstrative,
166,4,
High-German subdivision of Ger-
manic group of languages, 451.
2; its history, 463-9.
hour of the day, expression of,
211.3,
hypothetical period, construction
of, 332.1,2.
i, pronunciation of, 10; ic for tin
new orthography, 18.1.
ie, pronunciation of, 18.
3{)ro, 162.
imperative mood, 235.4, 237.5,
270; filled up from subjunctive
INDEX.
467
present, 243.1; use, 337; sub-
stitutes for, 338.
imperative sentence, see optative.
imperfect tense, see preterit.
impersonal verb, 233.26, 291-5;
relation to passive, 294; omis-
sion of impers, subject, 293 ; with
genitive object, 219.4; with
dative of subject, 222.11. le;
accusative of subject, 227.2c.
impressiveness or emphasis, inver-
sion for, 431j7, 443.2.
indeclinable words, 56.3, 360;
indeclinable adj., 126.4.
indefinite article, see articles.
indefinite pronouns and numerals,
184-95.
indefinite subjects of verbs, 1 54.4,
166.3; agreement of verb after,
154.4d, 322.3.
Indian (East) languages, relation-
ship of, 450.
indicative mode, 235.2; uses of
its tenses, 323-8; use of indica-
tive instead of subjunctive,
330c, 332.5c, 333.5.
indirect statement, subjunctive of,
333.
Indo-European family of lan-
guages, 449-50.
Indo-Germanic, see Indo-Euro-
pean.
infinitive, verbal noun, 235.5,
339; ending, 237.1a; ^vl assign
of, 243.2, 341; perfect inf.,
240. 1(Z; use of inf. for participle
in perfect and pluperfect, 240.
Ic, 251.4a; inf. as noun, 340;
inf. as subject of a verb, 342;
as object, 343; subject-accusa-
tive of inf., 343.1.5a; active inf.
in sense of passive, 343.1. 5c, (?,
ni.l&; more special cases, 343.
1.6; inf. of purpose or design,
343.III.1; inf. dependent on
adjective, 344; on noun, 345;
on preposition, 346; in absolute
construction, 347; inf. clauses,
348; with preposition, 346.2;
place of inf. 348.2, 319.2a-6;
— two infin. , place of transposed
verb with, 439.2, 444. 3&.
inseparable prefixes, 297.2, 307;
conjugation of verb with, 302-
6; denominative verbs foi-med
with, 405.III.1.
interjections, 56.4, 387-9; inter-
jectional use of other parts of
speech, 390; inter) ectional or
exclamatory construction, 391;
construction of cases with in-
ter)., 392.
internal change as means of inflec-
tion and derivation, 400.
interrogative pronouns, 172-6;
their use as relatives, 176.1; as
indefinites, 176.2.
interrogative sentence, 427; order
of, 432.1, 443.3, 439.46.
intransitive verb, 233.1, 227.
la, 6; construction of accusative
with, 227.2, 288.1; impersonal
passive from, 279.2; reflexive
from, 288.2.
inverted order of sentence, 431-3,
441, 443; inversion after ad-
verbial clause, 438.3/; after
appositive adjective phrase,
431(Z; in exclamatory clause,
432.1c.
irregular declension of nouns, 96-
100; irr. comparison of adjec-
tives, 139, irr. conjugation of
verbs, 249-60.
irregular verbs, list of, pp. 278-84;
equivalent to Old or strong
verbs, 236 2 Rem.l, 246.3.
Italic languages, relationship of,
450.
iterative numerals, 206.
\, pronunciation of, 29,
\(x, 360a.
|eb, jeber, 190.
jebermann, 187.
jebmeb, icbmeber, 190.
leflUd), 190.
jemanb, 186.
ien, jener, 163, 165-6.
f, pronunciation of, 30; English
correspondents of, 460.
!ein, 195.2.
fbmten, 251, 254.
468
INDEX.
r, pronunciation of, 31.
Latin language, relationship of,
450.
letters, German, see alphabet.
Low-German subdivision of Ger-
manic languages, 451.1, 452.1.
Luther's influence on German lan-
guage, 467-8.
m, pronunciation of, 31.
man, 185.
man&i, 191.
masculine, see gender.
measure, use of singular instead of
plural in expressing, 211.2;
noun of measured substance not
in genitive, 216.5a; accusative
of measure, 230.1.
tnetir, 192.2.
Meistersanger, works of, 465.2c.
Middle High-German period, dia-
lects, Uterature, 463.2, 465;
transition to New, 466.
Minnesanger, works of, 465.2a.
mi^, as prefix, 313.
mixed conjugation, 272; declen-
sion of nouns, 97; of adjectives,
124.
modal auxiliaries, 242.1, 251-9.
modes, 235.2-4.
modified vowels, origin, 14,
400.1; pronunciation of, 15-7,
21.2; in declension of nouns,
69, 75, 78, 79.n., 81, 84,
85, 87, 88, 93.3 ; in compari-
son of adjectives, 136 ; in in-
flection of verb, 250.2, 251,
268.2,3, 269.n.l, 270.2a.
ntogen, 251, 255.
Moeso-Gothic, see Gothic.
month, invariable after numeral
designating day, 216.4d
multiplicative numerals, 204.
miiffen, 251, 256.
mutes, progression of, in Germanic
languages, 453-6; correspon-
dences of, in English and Ger-
man, 457-60.
Tt, pronunciation of, 32.
n=declension of nouns, 73; of ad-
jectives, 132.
nein, 360a.
neuter, see gender.
New or weak conjugation, charac-
teristics and origin of, 236.1,
246.2,3; mles of, 247-60; irre-
gular verbs of, 249-60.
New High-German period and
dialects, 463.3, 467-9; tran-
sition from Middle to, 466.
New orthography, 5.
XIQ, pronunciation of, 45; English
correspondent of, 460.
Nibelungenhed, 46 5. 2b.
nid}t, position in sentence, 319.2/.
nic^t^, 188; form of adjective
with, 129.5.
niemanb, 186.
nominative case, uses of, 59.1,
212-4.
normal or regular order of sen-
tence, 319, 430, 441-2.
noun, declension of, 68-73; first
declension, 74-90; second de-
clension, 91-5; irregular declen-
sion, 96-100; foreign nouns,
101; proper names, 102-8;
modifjdng adjuncts of the noun,
109-12; equivalents of, 113;
adjective used as noun, 129;
infinitive, 340; noun as adjunct
of adjective, 145, 147.3; geni-
tive dependent on a noun, 216;
dative do. 225 ; syntax of nouns,
see the several cases: — primitive
nouns, 407 ; derivative, 408 -
12; compound, 421-2.
numbers, in declension, 58; rules
for use, 210-11; in conjuga-
tion, 235.3; rules for use, 322;
of verb or adjective with ®ie,
'you,' 153.4.
numerals, 196-208; cardinals;
197-202; ordinals, 203; multi-
pHcatives, 204; variatives, 205;
iteratives, 206 ; dimidiatives,
207.1; fractional, 207.2; inde-
finite, 189-95.
0, pronunciation of, 1 1 ; o for 00
in new orthography, 11.1.
b, pronunciation of, 16.
objective predicate, noun as, 316.
16, 227.26, 36, c; adj. as, 116.1c,
.316.2c.
INDEy
469
Oe, see B.
Old or strong conjugation, charac-
teristics of, 246.1.3, 261-73;
changes of radical vowel in, 262;
classification of verbs of, 263-
7; rules of inflection of, 268-
71; conjugation of, 273.
Old High-German period, dialects,
literature, 463.1, 464.
omission, of auxiliary or copula in
dependent clauses, 439.3; of
certain endings of adjective de-
clension, 126; of subject of
impersonal verb, 293.
optative or imperative sentence,
427; its arrangement, 432.2,
443.4.
optative use of subjunctive, 331.
ordinal numerals, 203; their deri-
vatives, 207; ordinal adverbs,
207.3.
p, pronunciation of, 33; English
correspondents of, 459.2.
participles, verbal adjectives, 235.
6, 349; forms, 237.6,7, 243.3;
use as adjectives, 131, 148; as
adverbs, 356; comparison of,
355; participial clauses, 357-
8: — present part., form, 237.6;
use and office, 350, 353, 355-
8:— past part., form, 237.7,
246, 271; use of ge as sign of,
243.3; value and office, 351,
854-8; certain special uses,
359; adjectives in form of past
part., 351.3:— future passive
part,, 278, 352.
parts of speech, enumeration and
classification of, 56.
passive voice, 233.3, 274; its
forms, 275-7 ; future pass, par-
ticiple. 278, 352; pass, formed
from what verbs, 279; cases
used with, 280; infrequency of
its use, 281 ; distinction of pass.
from past participle with fein,
282; pass, use of active ini&ni-
tive, 343.I.5c,d,III.16.
perfect tense, 240.1a, c; use, 326;
omission of auxihary of, 439.3,
Persian languages, relationship o^
45Q.
personal forms of the verb, 814a.
personal pronouns, declension of,
151-2; use in address, 153;
other rules respecting, 154; re-
flexive use, 155 ; expletive dativo
of, 156: possessive dative of,
161, 222.IIIi>; declension of
adjective after, 125.2; place of,
319.36; do. in inverted and
transposed clauses, 431^, 439.
1, 443.56, 444.3a.
persons of verb, 235.3,4; endings
of, 237.2,3,5; rules respecting
use, 321.
persons, declension of names ©4
104-8.
pf, pronunciation o^ 46.1; origin,
459.4.
pi), pronunciation of, 46.2.
pluperfect tense, 240. 16, c; use,
327; omission of auxiliary o^
439.3.
plural, its ending determines class
under first declension of nouns,
69; irregular formation of, in
nouns, 97.2, 99, 100, 101.
3-5; singular used for, in expres-
sions of measure, 211.2.
positive degree of adjectives, 134,
possessive dative, 222.nia,&,
225.1.
possessive pronouns or pronomi-
nal adjectives, 157-8; declen-
sion, 159; used as nouns, 160;
definite article or poss. dative
used for, 161; old style expres-
sions and abbreviations for,
162; used instead of genitive of
pronoun, 158.2, 216.3.
potential use of subjunctiye^
332.3.
predicate of a sentence, 426.2,
428.2.
predicate adjective, 116.1, 316.2;
its form in superlative, 140.26.
predicate noun, 213, 316.1; verb
in plural to agree with, 822.3.
prefixes, origin of, 395.
prefixes of verbs: separable, 297.
1, 298; inseparable, 297.2,
302, 307; separable or in-
separable, 297.3, 808-9.
prepositions, 371; classification.
470
INDEX.
372; prep, followed by genitive,
218, 373; by dative, 224,
374; by accusative, 228.1,
375; by dative or accusative,
224.2, 228.2, 376; by infini-
tive, 346. 1 ; by infinitive clause,
346.2; by substantive clause,
377, 436. 3c?; by adverbs,
378 ; taking adverb as comple-
ment, 379 ; combination of
prep, with definite article, 65.
prepositional phrase, 380; as ad-
junct of noun, 112; of adjective,
146; of verb, 318.
present tense, 235.1, 268; use,
324; in sense of our preterit,
324.2; of perfect, 324.3; of
future, 324.4.
preterit tense, 235.1, 269; its
origin, 246.3; use 325; in sense
of our pluperfect, 325.2; of
perfect, 325.3.
primitive words, 402; verbs, 403;
nouns, 407; adjectives, 413;
adverbs, 367.
principal parts of verb, 237. 1.
progression of mutes in Germanic
languages, 453-60.
pronouns, substantive and adjec-
tive use of, 149; classification,
150; personal pron., 151-6;
reflexive, 155; possessive, 157-
62; demonstrative, 163-71;
determinative, 167-71; inter-
rogative, 172-6; relative, 177-
83; indefinite, 184-95.
pronunciation, 6-55.
proper names, declension of,
102 8.
protasis, 332.1.
q, pronunciation of, 34, 39.
qu, pronunciation of, 47.
question, see interrogative sen-
tence.
r, pronunciation of, 35.
reciprocal use of reflexive pronoun,
155.4.
redundant declension, 99.
reflexive use of personal pronouns,
155; reflexive pronoun, 155.3;
reciprocal reflexive, 155.4.
reflexive verb. 233.2a, 283; con-
jugation of, 284-5 ; from what
verbs formed, 286-7; from in-
transitives,288; cases used with,
289; with reflexive object in
dative, 290; with genitive ob-
ject, 219.3.
regular order of sentence, see nor-
mal order.
regular verbs, 246.3.
relative pronouns, 177-83; com-
pound rel., 179.1-3; indefinite,
179.4; compound relative used
for our simple, 179.5; agree-
ment of verb with rel., 181,
321.2.
root of verb, 237. la ; roots of lan-
guage, 3936, 398.
rotetion of mutes, 453.
j, pronunciation of, 36; English
correspondents of, 458.3; use
of long or short § (f or g) in
writing or printing, 3.1.
Sanskrit language, relationship of,
450.
Scandinavian languages, relation-
ship of, 451.3.
f A, pronunciation of, 48
@e., 162.
second or weak declension of
nouns, 70, 73, 91-5; of adjec-
tives, 119-28, 132.
fein, conjugation of, 239.2,46;
use as auxiliary, 240-1; origin
of use, 240.46.
fetber, felbft, added to reflexives,
155.5, 169.3.
sentence, definition and constitu-
ents, 426, 428; kinds, 427;
arrangement, 429-46.
separable prefixes, 297-8; con-
jugation of verbs with such,
299-301; place of prefix, 299.
1, 319.2c,d; denominative verbs
formed with, 405. in. 2.
fid), 155.3.
simple predicate adjective, 116.
la, 316.2a.
Slavic or Slavonic languages, re-
lationship of, 450.
fo, as relative pronoTin, 182.1;
with atg omitted after, 438. 3d, e.
INDEX.
471
\o\d), 170.
foUen, 251, 257.
2>x„ 162.
[[/ % pronunciation and use of,
49; English correspondents of,
458.3.
^, romanized as ss, 2.2; § for §, in
new orthography, 49.1.
stems, 3936.
strong declension, see first or
strong declension.
strong conjugation, see old or
strong conjugation.
subject of a sentence, 426.2,
428.1.
subjunctive mood, 235.2; nature
and use, 329-30; optative
subj., 331; conditional and
potential, 332 ; of indirect state-
ment, 333 ; other less frequent
uses, 332.5.
subordinate clause, see dependent.
substantive, see noun.
substantive dependent clause,
113.3, 436, 444.
suffixes, origin and relation of,
394-5 ; formation of, 418c.
superlative degree, of adjective,
134-42; declension of, 140-1,2;
predicate form, 140. 2&; adver-
bial form, 140.2c, 363.2; sup.
absolute and relative, 142. 1 ; do.
in adverbs, 363.2c; sup. inten-
sified by aUer, 142.3.
t, pronunciation of, 37; English
correspondent of, 458.2; t for
hi in new orthography, 25.1; t
fortt), 37.3.
tenses, simple, 235.1; compound,
240-1; use of, indicative,
324 8.
Teutonic languages, see Germanic.
t^, pronunciation of, 37, 50;
English correspondent of, 458.
2; ^ of tt) omitted in new ortho-
graphy, 37.3.
themes, 3936.
t^un, as auxiliary, 242.3.
time, accusative of, 230.2; geni-
tive of, 220.1.
titles, declension of, 108; plural
verb used with, 322.4,
transitive verb, 233.1, 227.1a,6.
transposed order of dependent
clauses, 434, 441, 444; limited
to clauses grammatically depen-
dent, 439.6; of interrogative
and exclamatory clauses, 439.4.
^, pronunciation of, 51.
u, pronunciation of, 12.
ii, pronunciation of, 17.
Ue, see ii.
ui, pronunciation of, 22.
Umlaut, 400.1.
t), pronunciation of, 38.
variation of radical vowel in Old
conjugation, 400.2, 262-7.
variative numerals, 205.
ber=, derivation and use of, 307.6,
405. m. Id
verb, essential characteristic and
office of, 232, 314; classifica-
tion, 233; simple forms of,
235-7; principal parts, 237.1;
compound forms, 238-41 ;
auxiliaries, of tense, 239; of
mood, 242.1, 251-9; other,
242.2,3; Old and New conjuga-
tions, 245-73; passive voice,
274-82; reflexive verbs, 283-
90; impersonal, 291-5; com-
pound, 296-313, 420:- ad-
juncts of verb, 315-8; their
order, 319; object, 315; predi-
cate noun or adjective, 316; ad-
verb, 317; prepositional phrase,
318; genitive case with verbs,
219-20; dative, 222, 225.1;
accusative, 227, 230: — primi-
tive verbs, 403; derivative,
404-6.
\)id, 192.
vocative, nominative in sense of,
214.
voices, active and passive, 233.3.
boll, as prefix, 313.
vowels, pronunciation of, 7-22;
quantity, 7; modified vowels,
14-7.
rt), pronunciation of, 39.
tt)a«, 129.5, 172-3, 176, 179;
tpq? fiir^ 175, 177, 179,
472
INDEX.
weak declension, see second or
weak declension.
weak conjugation, see New or
weak conjugation.
toeld), 172, 174, 176-9.
toenig, 192.
Wer, 172-3, 176, 179.
Werben, conjugation of, 239.3,4c;
as auxiliary of future and con-
ditional tenses, 240.2,4; of
passive voice, 275-7.
ttJiffen, 260.
wo or wov, combined with prepo-
sitions, in interrogative sense,
173.2; in relative sense, 180.
njoHen, 251, 258.
word-combination or composition,
418-25.
word-formation or deri/ation, in-
troductory-explanations, 393-7;
principles, 398-402; means of
derivation, 399-400; rules of
derivation, 403-17.
written character, German, 2.1,
pp. 275-77.
JT, pronunciation of, 40.
h, pronunciation and use oL 13,
19.3, 41.
2, pronunciation of, 42; English
correspondents of, 458.3.
2er=, derivation and use of, 307. f.
405.ni.le.
JU, as sign of infinitive, 341.
gnjeen, jtro, 199«.
GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS
PUBLISHED BY
HENRY HOLT & CO., New York.
These hooks are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated.
♦
Grammars and Exercise Books.
Blackwell's German Prefixes and Suffixes. By J. S. Blackwell,
Professor in the University of Missouri. 16mo. 137 pp.
Huss's Conversation in German. By H. C. O. Huss, Professor of
Modern Languages in Princeton College. 12mo. 230 pp.
Joynes-Otto First Book in German. For young pupils. By Bmil
Otto. Revised by Edward S. Joynes, Professor in the South
Carolina College. 12mo. 116 pp. Boards.
Joynes-Otto Introductory German Lessons, The. New edition, with
full vocabularies. By Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 252 pp.
Keetels's Oral Method with German. By Jean Gustave Keetels.
12mo. 371 pp.
Otis's Elementary German. By Charles P. Otis. 16mo. 832 pp.
^^° There are two editions of this hook: I. In German type; II. In
Roman type, which edition will only he sent when specially ordered.
Otto's German Conversation Grammar. By Dr. Emil Otto. New
edition, revised, and in part re-written, by Wm. Cook. 12mo.
Half roan. 591 pp.
Otto's Elementary German Grammar. With a vocabulary by George
MoRiTZ Wahl. 12mo. 315 pp.
Otto's Translating English into German. By Dr. Emil Otto.
Edited by Prof. Rhodes Massie and Prof. Edward S. Joynes.
12mo. 167 pp.
Spanhoofd's Deutsche Grammatik. By A. W. Spanhoofd, teacher in
St. Paul's School, N. H. 16mo. 187 pp.
Wenckebach und Schrakamp's Deutsche Grammatik fiir Amerikaner.
* By Carla Wenckebach, Professor in Wellesley College, and
Josepha Schrakamp. 12mo. 291 pp.
Whitney's Compendious German Grammar. By Wm. D. Whitney,
Professor in Yale University. 12nio. 472 pp. Half roan.
Whitney's Brief German Grammar, based on the author's "Compen-
dious German Grammar." By Wm. D. Whitney. 16mo. 143 pp.
Whitney-Klemm German by Practice. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. Edited
by William D. Whitney. 12jno. 305 pp.
Natural Method and Conversation Books.
Game of German Conversation. By Mme. F. Jeff Tensler.
Heness's Der neue Leitfaden. Beim Unterricht in der deutschen
Sprache. By Gottlieb Heness. 12mo. 403 pp.
Heness's Der Sprechlehrer unter seinen Schlllern. By Gottlieb
Heness. 12mo. 187 pp.
Kaiser's Erstes Lehrbuch. By H. C. Kaiser, Ph.D. 12mo. 128 pp.
Pylodet's German Conversations By L. Pylodbt. ISmo. ^8 pp.
HENRY HOLT &= CO.'S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS,
Schrakamp und Van Daell's Das Dentsche Buch. By A. N. Van Daell
and JosEPHA Schrakamp. 12mo. 144 pp.
Sprechen Sie Deutsch 1 18mo. 147 pp. Boards.
Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. First Series. By Sigmon M. Stekn,
Director of Stern's School of Languages. 12mo. 262 pp.
Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. Second Series. By Sigmon M.
Stern and Menco Stern. 12mo. 380 pp.
"Wenckebach's Deutscher Anschauungs-Unterricht. By Carla and
Helene Wenckebach. 12mo. 451 pp.
Williams's German Conversation and Composition. By Alonzo Wil-
liams, A.M., Professor in Brown University. 12mo. 147 pp.
Reading Books.
Fouque's TJndine. With introduction, notes, and vocabulary, by H.C.
G. VON Jagemann, Professor in the Indiana University. 190 pp.
Key's Fabeln fiir Kinder. Illustrated by Otto Speckter. With
vocabulary. {In roman type.) 12mo. 52 pp. Boards.
Joynes-Otto Introductory German Reader. By Dr. Emil Otto.
With notes and vocabulary by Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo.
282 pp.
Klemm's lese- und Sprachbuecher. In sieben Kreisen. By Dr. L. R.
Klemm.
Klemm's Abriss der Geschichte der deutschen Literatur. Kreis VIII.
12mo. 385 pp.
Meissner's Aus meiner Welt. Geschichten fur Grosse und Kleine.
With vocabulary by Carla Wenckebach. 12mo. 127 pp.
Otis's Grimm's Maerchen. Selected and edited, with introduction,
notes, and vocabulary, by Charles P. Ottis. 151 pp.
Otto's German Reader. By Prof. E. P. Evans. 12mo. 239 pp.
Half roan.
Schrakamp's Erzaehlungen aus der deutschen Geschichte. By Josepha
Schrakamp. 12mo. 286 pp.
Simonson's German Ballad Book. Prepared by Prof. L. Simonson, of
the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 12mo. 304 pp.
Storme's Easy German Reading. By G. Storme. 16mo. 356 pp.
Wenckebach's deutsches Lesebuch. By Carla and Helene Wencke-
bach. 12rao. 316 pp.
Wenckebach's Die schoensten deutschen Lieder. By Carla and
Helene Wenckebach. 12mo. 363 pp.
Whitney's German Reader. By William D. Whitney, Professor in
Yale University. 12mo. 523 pp. Half roan.
Whitney-Klemm Elementary German Reader. By Dr. L. R. Klemm.
Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 12mo. 237 pp.
Dictionary.
Whitney's Compendious German Dictionary. (German-English and
English-German.) By William D. Whitney. 8vo. 900 pp.
A complete catalogue and price-list of Henry Holt d Oo,'s educa-
iional publications will be sent on application.
3
HENRY HOLT &> CO:S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS.
Whitney's German Texts.
Selected and annotated under the general editorship of Professor Wiixiam D.
Whitney. 16mo. Cloth.
Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. With an introduction^nd notes by Frank-
lin Carter, President of Williams College. 113 pp.
Faust. I. Theil. With an introduction and notes by William Cook,
late Professor in Harvard University. 220 pp.
Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. With an introduction and notes by W.
D. Whitney, Professor in Yale University. 138 pp.
Nathan der "Weise. With an introduction and notes by H. C. G,
Brandt, Professor in Hamilton College. 158 pp.
Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With an introduction and notes by A. Sachtle-
BEN, Professor in the College of Charleston, S. C. 199 pp.
Maria Stuart. With an introduction and notes by Edward S. Joynes,
Professor in South Carohna College. 222 pp.
Seidensticker's German Scientific Monographs.
With >otes. 12mo. Paper.
No. I. Uber Goethe's Naturwissenschaftliche Arbeiten. Von H. Helmholtz.
53 pp.
No II, Uber Bakterien, die Kleinsten lebenden Wesen. Von Dr. Ferdinand
CoHN. 55 pp.
Student's Collection of Classic German Plays.
12mo. Paper.
Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea. With notes by Calvin Thomas. 104 pp.
Egmont. Edited by Professor William Steften. 113 pp.
Koerner's Zriny. With an introduction and notes by Edward R. Ruggles,
Professor in Dartmouth College. 126 pp.
Lessing's Emilia Galotti. With notes, 82 pp.
Schiller's Der Nefie als Onkel. With notes and a vocabulary by A.
Clement. 99 pp.
Jungfrau Von Orleans. Edited by Rev. A. B. Nichols, Instructor in
German in Harvard University. 203 pp.
Wallenstein's Lager. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 60 pp.
Die Piccolomini. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 139 pp.
"Wallenstein's Tod. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 210 pp.
Wallenstein, complete in one volume. Cloth.
College Series of German Plays.
12mo. Paper.
Einer muss heiraten, by Wilhelmi ; and Eigensinn, by Benedix. With
notes. 63 pp.
Three German Comedies. I. Er ist nicht eifersuechtig, by Elz; IL
Der Weiberfeind, by Benedix ; III. Ln Wartesalon erster Classe,
by Mueller. With notes. 24 pp.
Der Bibliothekar. By Gustav von Moser. With notes. 162 pp.
Die Journalisten. By Gustav Freytag. With notes. 178 pp.
Zopf und Schwert. By Gutzkowt. With notes. 173 pp.
Englisch. By Goerner. With notes by A. H. Edoren. 61 pp.
Badekuren. By Putlitz. With notes. 69 pp.
Das Hera vergessen. By Putlitz. With notes. 79 pp,
3
HENRY HOLT &> CO:S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS.
Stern's Selected German Comedies.
Selected and Edited by Professor S. M. Stern. 12mo. Paper,
Ein Knopf. By Julius Rosen. 41 pp.
Der Schimmel. By G. von Moser. 55 pp.
Sie hat ihr herz entdeckt. By; W. Mueller von Koenigswintbb. 79 pp.
Simson und Belila. ByEMiLCLAAR. 55 pp.
Er sucht einen Vetter. By Jungman. 49 pp.
Er muss tanzen. By C. A.Paul. 51 pp.
Gaenschen von Buchenau. By W. Friedrich. 59 pp.
German Plays for Children.
Kinder-Comoedien. By various authors. Edited and annotated in German
by Professor Th. Heness. Five plays in one volume 12mo. 141 pp.
UnterFialtungs Bibliotliek. (12mo. Paper.)
Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder. With notes and vocabulary by Pro-
fessor L. SiMONSON of the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 104 pp.
Die Eisjungfrau u. andere Geschichten. With notes by E. C. F. Kbauss.
150 pp.
Auerbach's Auf "Wache; Koquette's Der gefrorene Kuss. The two in
one volume. With notes. 126 pp.
Carove's Das Maerchen ohne Ende. With notes. 45 pp.
Ebers' eine Frage. With introduction and notes. 117 pp.
Eichendorff s Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. 132 pp.
Pouqu6's Undine. With a glossary of the principal words and phrases.
137 pp. See also Jagetiiann's edition under Reading Books.
Sintram und seine Gefaehrten. 114 pp.
Grimm's Die Venus vor Milo ; Kafael und Michel- Angelo. ' 139 pp.
Grimm's Kinder- und Hausmaerclien. With notes. 228 pp. See also
Otis's edition under Reading Books.
Hauflfs Das kalte if erz. 61 pp.
Heine's Die Harzreise. With introduction and notes. 97 pp.
Heyse's Anfaung und Ende. 54 pp.
Die Einsamen. 44 pp.
Hillern's Hoeher als die Kirche. With notes and vocabulary. 46 pp.
Muegge's Biukan Voss. 55 pp.
Signa die Seterin. 71 pp.
Mueller's Deutsche Liebe. With English notes. 121 pp.
Nathusius' Tagebuch eines armen Praeuleins. 163 pp.
Ploennies' Princessin Use. With notes by J. M. Merrick. 45 pp.
Putlitz's "Was sich der wald erzaehlt. 62 pp.
Vergissmeinnicht. With English notes. 44 pp.
Biehl's Der Much der Schoenheit. With introduction and notes by
Francis L. Kendall. 77 pp.
Schiller's Das Lied von der Glocke. With introduction and notes by
Charles P. Otis, Ph.D. 70 pp.
Storm's Immensee. With notes. 34 pp.
Tieck's Die Elfen ; Das Kothkaeppchen. With notes by Professor L.
SiMONSON. 41 pp.
Vilmar and Richter's German Epic Tales. Told in prose. Die Nibe-
lungen, von A. F. C. Vilmar. "Walther und Hildegund, von Au-
BERT RTCHTER. 100 pp
4
FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS
PUBLISHED BY
HENRY HOLT & CO., New York.
These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated^
Grammars and Exercise Books.
Borel's Grammaire Frangaise. A I'usage des Anglais. Par Eugene Borel.
Revised by E. B. Coe, \imo. 450 pp. Half roan.
Delille's Condensed French. Instruction. By C. J. Delillk. 18mo. 143 pp.
Eugdne's Student's Comparative French Grrammar. To which are
a<Wed Fi-ench- English Exercises. Kevised by L. H. Buckingham, Ph.D.
12mo. 284 pp.
Eugene's Elementary French Lessons. Revised and edited by L. H.
Buckingham, Ph.D. 12mo, 126 pp.
Gasc's The Translator.— English into French. By Professors Gasc, L.
Brun, and others. 12mo. 220 pp.
Gibert's French Manual. A French Pronouncing Grammar for Young
Students. By M. Gibert, 12mo. 112 pp.
Julien's Petites Legons de Conversation et de Grammaire. By F. Julien.
Square 12ino. 222 pp.
Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Ferdinand Bocher,
Professor of Modern Languages in Harvard University. 12mo. 489 pp. Half
roan.
Pylodet's Beginning French. Exercises in Pronouncing, Spelling, and
Translatitig. By L. Pylodet. 16mo. 180 pp. Boards.
Sadler's Translating English into French. By P. Sadler. Revised and
annotated by Prof. C. F. Gillette. 12mo. 285 pp.
The Joynes-Otto Introductory French. Lessons. By Edward S. Joynes,
Professor in University of South Carolina. 12nio. 275 pp.
The Joynes-Otto First Book in French. By Edward S. Joynes. 12mo.
116 pp. Boards.
WTiitney's French Grammar. By William D. Whitney, Professor in Yale
University. 12mo. 442 pp. Half roan.
Whitney's Practical French. Taken from the author's larger Grammar,
and supplemented by conversations and idiomatic phrases. By Professor
W, D. Whitney.
Whitney's Brief French Grammar. Systematically arranged, with exer^
cises. By William D. Whitney. 16mo. 177 pp.
Natural Method and Conversation Books.
AUiot's Contes et Nouvelles. Suivis de Conversations,d'Exercices de Gram-
maire. Par Madame L. Alliot. 12mo.
Aubert's Colloquial French Drill. By E. Aubkrt, Professor in the Normal
College, New York City. Part I. l6rao. 66 pp. Part H. 118 pp.
Le Jeu des Auteurs. 96 Cards in a Box.
Moutonnler's Les Premiers Pas dans I'Etud e du Frangais par la
m6thode natiirelle. Par C. Moutonnier. 12mo. 197 pp. Illustrated.
Pour Apprendre a Parler FranQais. 12mo. 191 pp.
Parlez-vous Frangais ? A pocket manual of French and English Conversa-
tion, with hints for pronunciation and a list of the irregular verbs. l8mo.
111pp. Boards.
I
HENR Y HOL T 6- CO. \S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS.
Biodu's Lucie. Familiar Conversations in French and English. By Mme. A.
Riodu. 1-^mo. 1J8 pp.
Stern & M6ras' fetude Progressive de la Langue Francaise. By Sigmon
M. Stern and Bapi^iste Meras. K'lno. 288 pp.
Witccmb & Bellenger's French Conversation. Dialogues on Familiar
bubjects, to which is annexed tlie Summary of French Grammar, by Deullk.
ISmo. 259 pp.
Reading Books.
^sop's Fables in French. With vocabulary. 16mo. 237 pp.
Alliot's Les Auteurs Contemporains. Extraits choisis d'oeuvres diverses,
avee Notices Biographiqiies et Motes. By Mme. L. Alliot. 12mo. 371pp.
Aubert's Litt^rature Frangaise. Premiere Annee. By E. Aubkrt. 16mo
338 pp.
Bocher s Progressive French Beader. With notes and vocabulary by
F. BocHER, Professor in Harvard Univer>ity. 12mo. 291 pp. Half roan.
Fisher's Easy French Beading. Historical tales and anecdotes, arranged
with foot-notes, contaiuing irans^latioiis of the principal words. 16mo. 253 pp.
Fleury's L'Histoire de France. Racontee a la Jeunesse. Par M. Lam^
Fleury. 16mo. 372 pp.
De Janon's Becueil de Po6sies. A I'usage de la Jeunesse Am^ricaine. Far
Mlle. Camille de Janon. 16mio. 18t) pp.
Joynes-Otto Introductory French Beader, The. Edited, with notes and
vocabulary, by Edwaro S. Joynes, 12mo. \m pp.
Julien's Practical and Conversational Beader in French and English. By
F. JuLiEN. Square 12mo. 18..' pp.
Lacombe's Petite Histoire du Peuple Frangais. By Paul Lacombe.
With Grammatical and Explanatory Notes by Jules Bufi. 12mo. 212 pp.
La Fontaine's Fables Choisies. Edited, with notes, by Leon Delbos. 12mo.
119 pp. Boards.
Pylodet's Beginner French Beader. With a complete vocabulary. Ar-
ranged by L. Pylodet- 16nio. ::'35 pp. Boards.
Pylodet's Second French Beader. With a complete French-English vo-
cabulary. Compiled by L. Pylodet. Illustrated. 12mo. 277 pp.
Pylodet's La Litt6rature Frangaise Classique. Tir6es des Matinees Lifct6-
raires d' Edouard Mennechet. 12mo. 393 pp.
Pylodet's La Litt6rature Frangaise Contemporaine. Recueil en prose
et en vers. 12mo. 310 pp.
Pylodet's Gouttes de Bos6e. Petit Tr6sor poetique des Jeunes Personnes.
l8mo. 188 pp.
Pylodet's La Mdre I'Oie. Poesies, 6nigmes, chansons et'rondes enfantines.
Ilkistre. 8vo. 80 pp.
Whitney's Short French Reader. With notes and vocabulary. By W. D.
Whitney. 16mo.
Dictionaries.
Bellow's French and English Dictionary for the Pocket. 32mo. 600 pp.
The same. Larger print. 12nio. 600 pp. Half roan.
Gases K"ew Dictionary of the French and English Languages. By
Ferdinand E. A. Gasc. 8vo. French-English part, 600 pp. English-French
part, 586 pp. One volume.
Gasc's Improved Modern Pocket Dictionary. By F. A. E. Gasc. 18mo.
French-English part, 201 pp. English-French part, 387 pp. One volume.
A descriptive catalogue, with prices, of Henry Holtd: Co.^s educational publU
cations will be sent on application.
HENR V HOL T &= CO:s FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS.
Students' Collection of Classic French Plays.
The first six with full uotes by Prof. E. S. Joynes. The last three with notes
by Leon Delbos, M.A. 12mo, Paper.
Le Cid. Par CoRNEiLLE. 110 pp.
Athalie. Far Racine. 117 pp.
liB Misanthrope. Par Moliere. 130 pp.
L'Avare. Par Moliere. 132 pp.
Esther. Par Racine. 66 pp.
Cinna. Par Corneili.e. 87 pp.
Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. Par Moliere. 140 pp.
Horace. Par Corneillk. 78 pp.
Les Plaideurs. Par Racine. 80 pp.
The foregoing in 3 vols., three plays in each, in the above order. 12mo. Cloth.
Ronnantic French Drama. (12mo. Flexible covers.)
Buy Bias. By Victor Hugo. With notes by Rena A. Michaels. 117 pp.
College Series of Modern French Plays.
With Euglish notes by Prof. Ferdinand Bocher. 12mo. Paper.
La Joie Fait Peur. Par Mme. de Girardin. 46 pp.
La Bataille de Dames. Par Scribe et Legouve. 81 pp.
La Maison de Penarvan. Par Jules Sandeau. 72 pp.
La Poudre aux Yeux. Par Labiche et Martin, 59 pp.
Jean Baudry. Par Augusts Vacquerie. 7:2 pp.
Les Petits Oiseaux. Par Labiche et Delacour. 70 pp.
Mademoiselle de la SeigliSre. Par J. Sandeau. 99 pp.
Le Bom-an d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par O. Feuillbt. 100 pp.
Les Doigts de F6e. Par E. Scribe. HI pp.
Above in 2 vols. Cloth. Vol I. containing the first five, Vol. II. the last four.
Modern French Comedies. (12mo. Paper.)
Le Village. Par O. Feuillet. 34 pp.
La Cagnotte. Par MM. Eugene Labiche et A. Delacour. 83 pp.
Les Pemmes qui Pleurent. Par MM. Siraudin et Lambert Thiboust. 28 pp.
Les Petites Mis6res de la Vie Humaine. Par M. Clairville. 35 pp.
Le Niaise de Saint Flour. Par Bayard et Lemoine. 38 pp.
Un Caprice. Par Alfred de Musset.
Trois Proverbes. Par Th. Leclerq. 68 pp. With vocabulary.
Valerie. Par Scribe. 39 pp. With vocabulary.
Le Collier de Perles. Par Mazeres. 56 pp. With vocabulary.
Selected French Comedies.
Original text, with a close English veision on opposite pages.
En Wagon. ComMie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12mo. 44 pp.
C'6tait Gertrude. Comedie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12rao. 54 pp.
French Plays for Children. (12mo. Paper.)
La Petite Maman, par Mme. de M. ; Le Bracelet, par Mme, de Gaule. 38 pp.
La Vieille CousinCj par E. Souvestre; Les Bicochets. 52 pp.
Le Testament de Madame Patural, par E. Souvestre; La Demoiselle
de St. Cyr, par Drohoyowska. 54 pp.
La Lotene de Francfort, par E. Souvestre. La Jeune Savante,
par Mme. Curo. 47 pp.
French Plays for Girls. (l2mo. Paper.)
Trois Comedies pour Jeunes Filles: I. Les Cuisinieres; II. Le Petit
Tom; III. La Malade Imaginaire. Par Lemercieb de Nkuville. 134 pp.
3
HENRY HOLT &> CO:S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS,
Bibliotheque d'Instruction et de Recreation.
12mo volumes. Paper or Cloth.
Achard's Clos-Pommier, et Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Par Xavibr
DE Maistrb. Cloth. 144 pp.
Achard*s Clos-Pommier. Paper. 106 pp.
B6dolli6re's M6re Michel. With vocabulary. Cloth. 138 pp.
The same. Paper.
Biographies des Musiciens C616bres. Cloth. 871 pp.
The same. Paper.
Carraud et Segur's Contes (Les Petites Filles Modules, par Mme. de Skgur,
et Les Gouters de la Grand'mere, par Mme. Z. Carraud). With a list of
difficult phrases. Cloth. 193 pp.
Carraud's Les Gouters de la Grand*m6re. With a list of difficult
phrases. Paper. 95 pp.
Choix de Contes Contemporains. With notes. By B. F. O'Connor. Cloth.
300 pp.
■ The same. Paper.
Erckmann-Chatrian's Conscrit de 1813. With notes. By Prof. F.
BocHER. Cloth. 236 pp.
■ The same. Paper.
Le Blocus. With notes. By Prof. F. Bocher. Cloth. 258 pp.
The same. Paper.
Madame Th6r6se. With notes. By Prof. F. B6cher. Cloth 216 pp.
The same. Paper.
Pallet's Princes de I'Art. Cloth. 834 pp.
The same. Paper.
Feuillet's Koman d*un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Cloth 204 pp.
The same. Paper.
P6val's ' Chouans et Bleus.' With notes. Cloth. 188 pp.
The same. Paper.
Poa's Contes Biographiques. With vocabulary. Cloth. 189 pp.
The same. Paper,
Petit Bobinson de Paris. With vocabulary. Cloth. 166 pp.
The same. Paper.
Mac6*s Bouch6e de Pain. (L'Homme.) With vocabulary. Cloth. 260 pp.
The same. Paper.
De Maistre's Voyage Autour de ma Chambre. Paper. 117 pp.
Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Paper. 38 pp.
Merim6e's Columba. Cloth. 179 pp.
The same. Paper.
Porchat's Trois Mois sous la Neige. Cloth. 160 pp.
• The same. Paper.
Pressens6's Rosa. With vocabulary. By L. Pylodbt. Cloth. 286.
The same. Paper.
Saint-Germain's Pour une Epingle. With vocabulary. Cloth. 174 pp.
The same. Paper.
Sand's Petite Fadette. Cloth. 205 pp.
The same. Paper.
S6gur et Carraud's Contes. (Petites Filles Modules; Les GoMers de la
Grand'mere.) Cloth. 193 pp.
S6gur's Les Petites Filles Modules. Paper. 98 pp.
Souvestre's Philosophe sous les Toits. Cloth. 137 pp.
— — The same. Paper.
Jjl <Z^JLf . i -«-^ =A-.t„„..J<3 . f '
^f ^ itJlv.t>-v-^^t.Xe> i-<>Xv/v>C'Q^»-^-^o
^r^\